JP1 Version 13 JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Operator's Guide

3021-3-L48(E)

Notices

Relevant program products

For details about the applicable OS versions, and the service packs and patches required for JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3, see the Release Notes.

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager (For Windows):

P-2A12-3KDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC2A12-4KDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC2912-39DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Web Console version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC8412-39DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Web Console version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC2A12-3NDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Print Option Manager version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC2A2C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager (For Linux):

P-8412-3KDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC8412-4KDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Manager version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC2912-39DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Web Console version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC8412-39DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Web Console version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC8412-3NDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Print Option Manager version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC842C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent (For Windows):

P-2A12-33DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC2A12-43DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC2A2C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent (For AIX):

P-1M12-33DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC1M12-43DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00 (For AIX)

P-CC1M2C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For AIX)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent (For Linux):

P-8412-33DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC8412-43DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC842C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition (For Windows):

P-2A12-38DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC2A12-48DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

P-CC2A2C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition (For Linux):

P-8412-38DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC8412-48DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Agent Minimal Edition version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

P-CC842C-6LDL JP1/Base version 13-00 (For Linux 7, Linux 8, Linux 9, Oracle Linux 7, Oracle Linux 8, Oracle Linux 9, SUSE Linux 12, SUSE Linux 15)

JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - View (For Windows):

P-2A12-34DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - View version 13-00

The above product includes the following:

P-CC2A12-44DL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - View version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016, Windows 11, Windows 10)

P-CC2A12-3MDL JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 - Print Option version 13-00 (For Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016, Windows 11, Windows 10)

Trademarks

HITACHI, JP1, Job Management Partner 1, uCosminexus, HiRDB are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Hitachi, Ltd. in Japan and other countries.

AIX is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.

Amazon Web Services, AWS, the Powered by AWS logo are trademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates.

IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.

MQSeries is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.

Itanium is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Linux(R) is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft is a trademark of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Active Directory are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Azure are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Excel are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Internet Explorer are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Outlook are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, SQL Server are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Microsoft, Windows Server are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Red Hat, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

SAP C/4HANA is the trademark or registered trademark of SAP SE or its affiliates in Germany and in several other countries.

UNIX is a trademark of The Open Group.

SPARC(R) is a registered trademark of SPARC International, Inc. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Other company and product names mentioned in this document may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

Portions of this software were developed at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA) at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

This software contains code derived from the RSA Data Security Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm, including various modifications by Spyglass Inc., Carnegie Mellon University, and Bell Communications Research, Inc (Bellcore).

Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England.

The original software is available from ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/programming/pcre/

1. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

2. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

3. This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)

4. This product includes the OpenSSL Toolkit software used under OpenSSL License and Original SSLeay License. OpenSSL License and Original SSLeay License are as follow:

LICENSE ISSUES

==============

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of

the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.

See below for the actual license texts.

OpenSSL License

---------------

/* ====================================================================

* Copyright (c) 1998-2019 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

*

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

*

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

* distribution.

*

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this

* software must display the following acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

*

* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to

* endorse or promote products derived from this software without

* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

* openssl-core@openssl.org.

*

* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"

* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

* permission of the OpenSSL Project.

*

* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

* acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY

* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED

* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

* ====================================================================

*

* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim

* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*

*/

Original SSLeay License

---------------

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

* All rights reserved.

*

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

*

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*

* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in

* the code are not to be removed.

* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution

* as the author of the parts of the library used.

* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or

* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

* "This product includes cryptographic software written by

* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

* being used are not cryptographic related :-).

* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

*

* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

* copied and put under another distribution licence

* [including the GNU Public Licence.]

*/

This product includes software developed by the Java Apache Project for use in the Apache JServ servlet engine project (http://java.apache.org/).

This product includes software developed by IAIK of Graz University of Technology.

This product includes software developed by Daisuke Okajima and Kohsuke Kawaguchi (http://relaxngcc.sf.net/).

This product includes software developed by Andy Clark.

Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Microsoft product name abbreviations

This manual uses the following abbreviations for Microsoft product names.

Abbreviation

Full name or meaning

Excel

Microsoft(R) Excel

Microsoft(R) Office Excel

Exchange Server

Microsoft(R) Exchange 2000 Enterprise Server

Microsoft(R) Exchange 2000 Server

Microsoft(R) Exchange Server

Internet Explorer

Windows(R) Internet Explorer(R)

Microsoft Edge

Microsoft(R) Edge

Microsoft SQL Server

Microsoft(R) SQL Server

Microsoft(R) SQL Server Enterprise Edition

MSMQ

Microsoft(R) Message Queue Server

Outlook

Outlook 2016

Microsoft(R) Office Outlook(R) 2016

Outlook 2019

Microsoft(R) Office Outlook(R) 2019

Outlook 2021

Microsoft(R) Office Outlook(R) 2021

Outlook Express

Microsoft(R) Outlook(R) Express

Windows 10

Windows(R) 10 Enterprise

Windows(R) 10 Pro

Windows(R) 10 Home

Windows 11

Windows(R) 11 Enterprise

Windows(R) 11 Pro

Windows(R) 11 Home

Windows Server 2016

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2016 Datacenter

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2016 Standard

Windows Server 2019

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2019 Datacenter

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2019 Standard

Windows Server 2022

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2022 Datacenter

Microsoft(R) Windows Server(R) 2022 Standard

Windows is sometimes used generically, referring to Windows Server 2022, Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016, Windows 11, and Windows 10.

Restrictions

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Hitachi. The software described in this manual is furnished according to a license agreement with Hitachi. The license agreement contains all of the terms and conditions governing your use of the software and documentation, including all warranty rights, limitations of liability, and disclaimers of warranty.

Material contained in this document may describe Hitachi products not available or features not available in your country.

No part of this material may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in writing from the publisher.

Issued

Jun. 2023: 3021-3-L48(E)

Copyright

Copyright (C) 2023, Hitachi, Ltd.

Copyright (C) 2023, Hitachi Solutions, Ltd.

Colophon

Publisher

Hitachi, Ltd.

6-6, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100‒8280 Japan

Summary of amendments

For details about the amendments, see the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Preface

This manual describes the GUI operations of JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 (abbreviated hereafter to JP1/AJS3).

For details on the prerequisites before reading this manual, see the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Organization of this manual

This manual is organized into the following parts. The manual is a common reference for all supported operating systems. Any platform-dependent differences in functionality are noted in the manual.

PART 1: JP1/AJS3 - View

This part provides an overview of JP1/AJS3 - View, shows examples of operations from designing a JP1/AJS3 system to operating the system, and describes JP1/AJS3 - View operation procedures. This part also describes the commands supported by JP1/AJS3 - View and the items displayed in the windows and dialog boxes of JP1/AJS3 - View.

PART 2: Web GUI

This part provides an overview of the Web GUI, and describes how to set up and customize the Web GUI. This part also describes the items displayed in the windows and dialog boxes of the Web GUI.

Part 1: JP1/AJS3 - View

1 Overview

JP1/AJS3 - View allows you to define and monitor applications, which are to run on JP1/AJS3 through the GUI. This chapter describes the overview of JP1/AJS3 - View and notes on using JP1/AJS3 - View.

1.1 Overview of JP1/AJS3 - View

JP1/AJS3 - View allows you to define and monitor applications, which are to run on JP1/AJS3 through the GUI.

1.1.1 GUI operations in JP1/AJS3 - View

Below are some examples of GUI operations that you can use in JP1/AJS3 - View.

(1) Define applications through the GUI

JP1/AJS3 - View allows you to define applications, which are to run on Windows hosts and UNIX hosts through the GUI.

The figure below provides an example of a definition on a JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Figure 1‒1: Example of definition on a JP1/AJS3 - View window

JP1/AJS3 - View lets you just drag icons and associate the icons with each other using arrows to define a jobnet. The defined jobnet starts to execute after you register it for execution on the window.

Alternatively, you can use commands, instead of JP1/AJS3 - View, to define jobnets.

(2) Monitor applications through the GUI

With JP1/AJS3 - View, you can monitor how the applications are executed and check results of execution of the applications on windows. Information displayed on the windows is automatically updated at 30-second intervals. This allows you to quickly find an error or failure and immediately take appropriate measures against it.

You can specify the update interval between 30 seconds and 3,600 seconds.

The figure below shows an example of a window displaying results of application execution on JP1/AJS3 - View.

Figure 1‒2: Example of a window displaying results of application execution on JP1/AJS3 - View

JP1/AJS3 - View lets you check all results of execution of multiple jobnets at a glance as well as view by jobnet or all jobnets together. Its multi-colored display provides quick and comprehensive reference to execution results.

JP1/AJS3 - View allows you to type in commands.

For the functional overview of the entire JP1/AJS3, see 1. Overview of JP1/AJS3 in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

1.2 Notes on using JP1/AJS3 - View

This section describes notes on using JP1/AJS3 - View.

Display resolution and color

Set the display resolution to 1,024 x 768 pixels or higher. If the display resolution is lower than 1,024 x 768 pixels, a window or dialog box might not be displayed within the display screen.

Specify the number of display colors to a value greater than 256. With 256 or fewer display colors, the windows or dialog boxes may not be correctly displayed.

System resources (memory) in the startup sequence

If a system resource (memory) becomes insufficient in the startup sequence, an application error may occur or operations in windows may be disabled. Set sufficient margin for the upper limits to the system resources (memory) on JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about how to set the upper limit, see 11.2.5 Setting the amount of memory used.

When starting multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View

When starting multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View, start an instance of JP1/AJS3 - View after the JP1/AJS3 - View window of the previous instance of JP1/AJS3 - View is displayed. If an attempt is made to start JP1/AJS3 - View before the JP1/AJS3 - View window of the previous instance is completely displayed, the environment settings may become invalid.

When running multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View concurrently

When you run multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View concurrently on a single host, changing the environment settings of one instance might overwrite the environment settings of the others. Make sure that only one instance of JP1/AJS3 - View is running when you change its environment settings.

Using JP1/AJS3 - View for a long time

When you use JP1/AJS3 - View over a long period of time, restart JP1/AJS3 - View periodically. This prevents a memory leak that causes JP1/AJS3 - View to be inoperable. We recommend that you restart JP1/AJS3 - View within the range of every two days to once a week, depending on the amount of work.

Notes on setting an item of a dialog box

When the OK button is clicked in a dialog box for defining details of a JP1/AJS3 - View unit or specifying a schedule, the communication with JP1/AJS3 - Manager starts to register the information specified in the dialog box.

If you only checked the information in a dialog box without changing it, we recommend that you click the Cancel button to close the dialog box to prevent unnecessary communication.

Copying or moving a unit between multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View

A unit cannot be copied among multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View. A unit cannot be cut and pasted into another instance of JP1/AJS3 - View.

Notes on incorrect window display

When pages are switched around in a dialog box or when the scroll bar is used to scroll through the window, the window display may be garbled. If this occurs, slowly repeat the same operation to recover the normal window display.

Window operation while a dialog box is displayed

While a dialog box of a certain type is displayed, other windows cannot be used.

Access key of a menu command

The menu commands have no access key.

Scroll arrow button for drop-down lists

In the Login screen and some dialog boxes, a menu scroll button is sometimes displayed even if no item can be selected from the drop-down lists.

Display and display driver

Some types of displays and display drives may be unable to represent proper colors. This problem does not affect the system operation.

Problem on minimized windows

A minimized window cannot be correctly displayed at its maximum. To maximize a minimized window, first restore the original window size, and then maximize it.

Dotted-line box focus

On some dialog box buttons and message box buttons, the dotted-line box, which represents your focus, may not be displayed. It does not affect the system operation.

Multiple dialog boxes or message boxes displayed at the same time

On a low-speed host, multiple dialog boxes or message boxes might appear if you successively click menu items or other items in a window while the host is busy or JP1/AJS3 - View is communicating with JP1/AJS3 - Manager. In such a case, click the Cancel button on each dialog box to close them all, then redo the same operations. When multiple message boxes appear at the same time, respond to the messages one by one.

Animation functionality enabled

If the animation functionality is enabled, scrolling through a list box might cause something to be incorrectly displayed. The procedure below describes how to disable the animation functionality.

Press the Windows key and the U key at the same time.

The Ease of Access Center window opens.

Click Make the computer easier to see.

Under Make things on the screen easier to see, clear the Turn off all unnecessary animations (when possible) check box.

Level 3 and level 4 kanji characters added to JIS 2004

JP1/AJS3 does not support JIS 3rd level and 4th level Kanji characters. Do not use such characters if you are using JP1/AJS3 - View. If you do use such characters, they might be garbled.

Note on text fields

Do not enter control characters such as tab characters and newline characters in text fields.

If a control character such as a newline character is included in the unit definition parameter, the character string might be deleted when the text fields are displayed. If a control character is entered, the background of the text field is changed to yellow.

2 Example of Using JP1/AJS3 - View

Chapter 2 describes JP1/AJS3 - View in detail by expanding the overview provided in Chapter 1. Using an example of creating a task, the chapter explains how to define, execute, and monitor a jobnet with JP1/AJS3 - View. We suggest that you start at the beginning of this chapter and perform all the procedures as instructed. Please read this chapter carefully.

Note that this chapter assumes that the appropriate operating environment has been prepared for JP1/AJS3 before the procedures in this chapter are begun.

2.1 Task to be created in the example

In the example, you create an order processing task. This task totals order data, checks inventory, and creates an order form. The following figure shows the jobnet to be created for this task.

Figure 2‒1: Jobnet created in the example for an order processing task

In the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet, define the following four jobs:

Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job

Job_CheckStock job

Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job

RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job

When you execute the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet, the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job, the Job_CheckStock job, and the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job are normally executed in this order. If the Job_CheckStock job ends abnormally, the RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job is executed.

2.2 Preparations required before executing the example

Before executing the example:

Install and set up the systems (JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View) you will use on a Windows host.

Set JP1_AJS_Editor, JP1_AJS_Manager, or JP1_AJS_Admin as your JP1 permission level.

In the Jobnet Monitor window and Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, specify 30 seconds as the interval for automatically updating information.

To set this interval:

Open the Jobnet Monitor window.

Choose Options and then Set Refresh Interval to open the Refresh Interval dialog box.

In Auto refresh, click Do. In Refresh interval, enter 30.

Click the OK button.

Open the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window. Repeat steps 1 to 4.

Do not change the default colors of icons, although you can change them in the Preferences dialog box.

When you install JP1/AJS3 - View for the first time, leave the start mode at its default setting. If you perform an upgrade installation of JP1/AJS3 - View, on the Login page of the Preferences dialog box, change Start mode to Normal.

Create an err.bat file.

To create the file:

Create the C:\Temp folder.

Create the err.bat file, and store it in the folder you created in step 1.

In the err.bat file, write echo Stock is insufficient. >&2.

2.3 Operations explained in the example

The example explains the following operations:

Logging in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from JP1/AJS3 - View.

You start JP1/AJS3 - View, and log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Defining the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

You define four jobs that are required in an order processing task, and specify the order in which the jobs are to be executed.

Registering the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet for immediate execution.

You execute the jobnet immediately.

Monitoring the execution status of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

You monitor the execution status of the jobnet in the following four windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Re-executing the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

You re-execute jobs that terminated abnormally after monitoring the execution status.

For details about the procedures for defining and executing a jobnet, see 5. Defining Jobnets and 7. Executing Jobnets. For details about windows and dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

2.3.1 Logging in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from JP1/AJS3 - View

Perform the following procedure to log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from JP1/AJS3 - View.

From the Start menu of Windows, choose JP1_Automatic Job Management System 3 - View and then Job System Operation.

The following Login screen appears.

Figure 2‒2: Login screen

Enter the information required to log into JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Enter the following:

User name

Enter the name of the JP1 user who is to log into JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Password

Enter the password of the JP1 user who is to log into JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Host to connect

Enter the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host the user logs into.

Click the OK button.

The following JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) appears.

Figure 2‒3: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) at startup

In the tree area, the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed.

2.3.2 Defining the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet

This section describes the operation for defining the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Four major steps are required to define this jobnet.

Step 1: Define a job group.

Step 2: Define a jobnet.

Step 3: Define jobs.

Step 4: Relate jobs.

This section describes steps 2 to 4. Step 1 Define a job group is omitted here since we use the job group (AJSROOT1) that is automatically created when JP1/AJS3 - Manager is installed.

(1) Define a jobnet

In the AJSROOT1 job group, define the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

To define the jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

Choose Edit, New, and then Jobnet.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box appears.

Define attributes of the jobnet.

Define the following in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box.

Figure 2‒4: Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box

Unit name

Enter Processing_Of_Received_Order.

Exec-agent

Enter the name of the execution agent on which you want to execute the job. Note that you do not need to specify anything if the host on which the job is to be executed is the same as the host you entered in Host to connect in the Login screen.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box closes.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is created in the AJSROOT1 job group and this jobnet appears in the list area.

In the list area, make sure that the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is selected, and then click the Show button.

The detailed information area displays the definitions of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The following figure shows how the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) looks at the end of step 5.

Figure 2‒5: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) after the jobnet has been created

(2) Define jobs

Define jobs in the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

To define jobs:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, make sure that Jobnet Definition is selected in Function Menu.

In the tree area, make sure that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Alternatively, double-click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The following Jobnet Editor window appears.

Figure 2‒6: Jobnet Editor window before jobs have been defined

In this window, define four jobs in the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Select Exclusive edit.

When you define a job or relate jobs, select this checkbox so that other users cannot access the job or jobs.

From the Basic page that lists icons, drag the PC job icon and drop it into the map area.

When drop the PC job icon into the map area, the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box appears.

Define attributes of the job.

The following figure shows the items that are defined on the Definition page of the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

Figure 2‒7: Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box (Definition page)

Unit name

Enter Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData.

File name

Enter the name of the file you want to execute as a job.

If you did not prepare an executable file before you perform the example, you can omit this item.

The following figure shows the items that are defined on the Attributes page of the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

Figure 2‒8: Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box (Attributes page)

Hold

Select Yes.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box closes.

The Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job has now been defined in the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Define the three other jobs with the same procedure.

Repeat step 5 to 7 to define three more jobs.

The following shows the definition for each job.

Define the following for the Job_CheckStock job:

Unit name

Enter Job_CheckStock.

File name

Enter C:\Temp\err.bat.

For details about C:\Temp\err.bat, see 2.2 Preparations required before executing the example.

End judgment

Select Normal if specified file exists for Rule and enter C:\Temp\stock-check for File name.

To explain the execution of a recovery job, this example lets you specify that the Job_CheckStock job ends abnormally if the specified file (C:\Temp\stock-check) does not exist.

Define the following for the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job:

Unit name

Enter Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip.

File name

Enter the name of the file you want to execute as a job.

If you did not prepare an executable file before you perform the example, you can omit this item.

Define the following for the RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job:

Unit name

Enter RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip.

File name

Enter the name of the file you want to execute as a job.

If you did not prepare an executable file before you perform the example, you can omit this item.

Type

Switch to the Attributes page. In Type, click Recovery.

When you select Recovery, R is added to the upper right corner of the icon in the map area.

Now four jobs are defined in the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

In the list area, the Unit name column displays the unit name of each job. The Type column displays "PC job".

(3) Relate jobs

Relate the four jobs as an execution order.

For this example, you relate the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job, the Job_CheckStock job, and the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job in this order, which is the normal execution order of the jobs.

You then relate the Job_CheckStock job and the RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job in this order. This order specifies that if the Job_CheckStock job ends abnormally, then the recovery job will be executed.

Perform the following procedure to relate the jobs.

To relate jobs:

Click the Make Consecutive Relations button.

The Make Consecutive Relations button is now selected.

Click the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job icon (which is executed first), the Job_CheckStock job icon (which is executed second), and then the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job icon (which is executed third).

Each icon becomes selected when clicked, and black arrows appear between the icons.

Click the mouse in a blank location in the map area.

The Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job icon, which was clicked last, is deselected.

Now the jobs for the normal procedure are related. Next, you need to relate the recovery job.

Click the Make Relation button.

The Make Relation button is now selected.

Click the Job_CheckStock job icon and then the RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job.

Each icon is selected when clicked, and a red arrow appears between the icons.

The Jobnet Editor window now should appear as follows.

Figure 2‒9: Jobnet Editor window after jobs have been defined and related

Now the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is completely defined.

You do not need to save a jobnet after it is defined since information is automatically saved each time any change is made, such as when a jobnet is created or a job is defined.

When you finish defining a jobnet, you can execute the jobnet. Close the Jobnet Editor window.

2.3.3 Registering the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet for execution

This section describes the procedure for registering the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet for execution.

Register the jobnet in a way that allows it to be executed immediately (this method is called immediate execution).

Perform the following procedure to register a jobnet for execution. This procedure assumes that all the operations explained in 2.3.2 Defining the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet are completed.

To register a jobnet for execution:

If the Jobnet Editor window (where jobs in the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet are defined) is still open, close it.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Register for Execution.

Register for Execution is now selected.

In the tree area, check that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Choose Operations and then Register for Execution.

The Register for Execution dialog box appears.

Specify the type of registration for the jobnet.

Define the following in the Register for Execution dialog box.

Figure 2‒10: Register for Execution dialog box

Jobnet name

Check that Processing_Of_Received_Order is displayed.

Register method

Select Immediate execution.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Execution dialog box closes, and the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is executed.

In the list area, make sure that the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is selected, and then click the Show button.

The detailed information area shows the execution method for the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

2.3.4 Monitoring the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet during execution

This section describes how to monitor the execution status of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The following four windows are used to monitor the execution status in this example.

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

When you click Status Monitor in Function Menu, the detailed information area lists the schedules and execution results for the jobnet. Among other items displayed in the detailed information area are the execution status, scheduled start date and time, and start date and time.

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

This window displays the progress of the jobnet, the status of subordinate jobs, and a simulated result of the jobnet at the scheduled end date and time. You can also check the status and start date and time of the jobnet and subordinate jobs in this window.

Jobnet Monitor window

Like the Jobnet Editor window that you use when defining jobs, this window allows you to check the execution status of the jobs in a jobnet in a map area. The colors of icons indicate the statuses of jobs. For example, different colors indicate which job is currently executing or which job has ended execution.

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

This window lists the execution statuses of jobnets and jobs in a jobnet. You can also use this window to check execution start times and execution end times.

The following describes how to check the execution status of the jobnet in each window. Note that the operations described below assume that all the operations explained in 2.3.3 Registering the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet for execution have been completed.

(1) Using the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) to check the execution status

Perform the following procedure to check the execution status of the jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

To check the execution status of the jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, make sure that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Click the Show button.

The detailed information area displays information about the execution of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

In the detailed information area, check the execution information about the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Because the hold attribute was set for the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job when you defined the jobs in this example, the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet does not end execution, and its status in the Status column is therefore Now running.

The following figure shows how the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) looks at the end of step 4.

Figure 2‒11: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) that is monitoring the jobnet

Supplementary note

If execution information about the jobnet does not appear, choose View and then Refresh to update the window display.

(2) Using the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) to check the execution status

Perform the following procedure to check the execution status of the jobnet and jobs in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

To check the execution status of the jobnet and jobs:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Summary Monitor.

Summary Monitor is now selected.

The following JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) appears.

Figure 2‒12: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) after opening

Click the Setting button.

The following Monitoring Unit Select dialog box appears.

Figure 2‒13: Monitoring Unit Select dialog box

In the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box, in Selectable units, click the plus sign (+) on the left of the AJSROOT1 job group.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet appears under the AJSROOT1 job group.

Select the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet, and click the Add button.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet appears in Monitored units.

Click the OK button.

The Monitoring Unit Select dialog box closes.

The information about the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet appears in the summary list in the JP1/AJS3 - View (Summary Monitor window) window.

In the summary list, check the progress of the jobnet.

In this example, the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job is the first job in the jobnet. Because you set the hold attribute for this job when you defined the job, the Progress column displays 0%.

In the summary list, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet. Choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and then All.

The unit detailed information list displays the execution status of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet and its four jobs.

In the unit detailed information list, check the execution status of the jobnet and its jobs.

In this example, you set the hold attribute for the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job when you defined the job. Therefore, execution of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet has not ended yet, and as a result, the Status column indicates Being held for the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job. For the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet, the Status column indicates Now running, and for other jobs, it indicates Wait for prev. to end.

The following figure shows how the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) looks at the end of step 8.

Figure 2‒14: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) that is monitoring the jobnet and its jobs

Supplementary note

If execution information does not appear, choose View and then Refresh to update the window display.

(3) Using the Jobnet Monitor window to check execution status

This subsection describes how to check the execution status of a jobnet or a job using the Jobnet Monitor window.

(a) Checking execution status in the map area and list area

Perform the following procedure to check the execution status of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window.

To check the execution status of the jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, make sure that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Choose View, Jobnet Monitor, and then Status.

The following Jobnet Monitor window appears.

Figure 2‒15: Jobnet Monitor window (job execution status 1)

You can use the ajs command to open the Jobnet Monitor window directly. For details about the command, see the ajs in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

In the map area and list area, check the execution status of the jobs.

The following describes how to read the map area and the list area.

How to read the map area

The map area displays the icons of the jobs under a jobnet. The color of an icon represents the status of the corresponding job.

In this example, the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job is being held because the hold attribute was set for the job when you defined it. The color of the icon of a job that is being held is yellow. The color of the icon of a job that is waiting for the end of the preceding job is light blue.

How to read the list area

The list area displays the information (unit name, comment, type, status, delay status) about all the units displayed in the map area.

In this example, you set the hold attribute for the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job when you defined the job. Therefore, for the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job, the Status column indicates Being held. For the other jobs, the Status column indicates Wait for prev. to end.

Click the icon of the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job. Choose Operations, Change Hold Attribute, and then Hold-Release.

A message dialog box appears to confirm hold-release.

Click the Yes button.

The held Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job is now released. In the map area, you can check that the held job is released and the execution is started. When the execution of the Job_CalculateReceivedOrderData job ends, the Job_CheckStock job starts executing.

This example ends the Job_CheckStock job abnormally to explain how a recovery job is executed. When the Job_CheckStock job ends abnormally, the icon of the Job_CheckStock job is displayed in red and the defined RecoverJob_CreateShippingSlip recovery job starts executing. Since the Job_CheckStock job is ended abnormally, the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job is not executed.

The Jobnet Monitor window should appear as follows at this point.

Figure 2‒16: Jobnet Monitor window (job execution status 2)

Supplementary note

If the colors of icons do not change, choose View and then Refresh to update the contents of the window.

(b) Checking detailed information

Perform the following procedure to check the detailed information about the abnormally ended Job_CheckStock job.

To check the detailed information:

In the map area, click the icon (red) of the Job_CheckStock job.

The icon of the Job_CheckStock job is now selected.

Choose View and then Detailed Information.

The following Monitor Details - [PC Job] dialog box appears.

Figure 2‒17: Monitor Details - [PC Job] dialog box

Click the Details button in Execution result details.

The following Execution Result Details dialog box appears.

Figure 2‒18: Execution Result Details dialog box

Check the details about the execution result.

Note that the message "Stock is insufficient." is displayed.

You can also check the details about the execution result of a job.

Click the Close button.

The Execution Result Details dialog box closes.

Click the Close button.

The Monitor Details - [PC Job] dialog box closes.

(4) Using the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window to check execution status

This subsection describes how to check the execution status of a jobnet or a job using the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

To check execution status:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, make sure that Status Monitor is selected.

In the tree area, make sure that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The following Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

Figure 2‒19: Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

In the tree area, click + on the left of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Four jobs appear under the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

In the schedule area and the execution result list, check the execution status of the jobnet.

View the schedule area and the execution result list as follows:

Viewing the schedule area

The schedule area displays colored marks (rectangles). Each colored mark represents the execution of a jobnet or a job. One side of a colored mark indicates the execution start time and the other side indicates the execution end time. The width of a colored mark represents the length of execution time and the color indicates the execution status. The following describes the relationship between colored-mark color and execution status:

- Now running: Green

- Being held: Yellow

- Waiting for the end of the preceding job: Light blue

- Abnormal end: Red

- Normal end: Light green

Viewing the execution result list

The execution result list displays the information about a jobnet or a job (unit name, start date and time, end date and time, and status) selected in the tree area.

When you want to display the execution status within a certain time period, click the time period in the time area. The selection frame moves and the information about all the colored marks within the selection frame appears in the execution result list. Figure 2-19 indicates the case when the time area is clicked.

Supplementary note

If the execution schedule or execution status does not appear, chose View and then Refresh to update the contents of the window.

2.3.5 Changing the contents of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet registered for execution

This section describes how to use the Jobnet Monitor window to re-execute jobs from the Job_CheckStock job that ended abnormally.

The procedure explained here assumes that all the operations in 2.3.4 Monitoring the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet during execution are completed. You also need to eliminate the cause of the job that ended abnormally. For this example, you must prepare the C:\Temp\stock-check file so that the Job_CheckStock job ends normally. You do not need to write anything in the stock-check file.

To re-execute the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, make sure that Status Monitor is selected.

In the tree area, make sure that the AJSROOT1 job group is displayed. In the list area, click the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

The Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet is now selected.

Choose View, Jobnet Monitor, and then Result.

The Jobnet Monitor window appears.

In the map area, click the icon of the Job_CheckStock job.

The icon of the Job_CheckStock job is now selected.

Choose Operations and then Rerun.

The Rerun dialog box appears.

Define the first job to be executed.

Define the following in the Rerun dialog box.

Figure 2‒20: Rerun dialog box

Unit name

Check that Job_CheckStock is displayed.

Rerun Method

Select From this unit.

Click the OK button.

The Rerun dialog box closes.

The Job_CheckStock job is re-executed and its icon is displayed in green, indicating that the job is being executed. When the Job_CheckStock job ends normally, the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job begins to be executed. Normal termination of the Job_CreateReceivedOrderSlip job completes the processing of the Processing_Of_Received_Order jobnet.

Supplementary note

If the execution schedule and execution status do not appear, click View and then Refresh to update the window display.

3 Logging in and Logging out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager

This chapter describes how to start up JP1/AJS3 - View to log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager and how to log out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

3.1 Logging in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager

This section describes how to log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from JP1/AJS3 - View.

To start up JP1/AJS3 - View from the Start menu on Windows:

From the Start menu of Windows, choose JP1_Automatic Job Management System 3 - View and then Job System Operation.

The Login screen is displayed.

Enter information required to log in JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

For details about the information required to log in, see 12.2 Login screen.

Click the OK button.

The JP1/AJS3 - View window is displayed.

Supplementary notes

You can specify settings so that the JP1 user name used for the previous login or the names of previously connected hosts will not be displayed. Hiding previously used login information can prevent unauthorized users from logging in to the system by using an authorized user name. For details, see 11.2.6 Preventing the history of previously used login user and connected host names from appearing on the Login screen.

We recommend that you disable the predictive conversion functionality of character input software such as IMEs. If the functionality is enabled, entry candidates might be displayed when you enter text for User name, Password, or Host to connect even though you have disabled the display of previously used login information.

To start up JP1/AJS3 - View using a command:

Execute the ajs command as follows:

ajs [-F service-name]
    [-a login-information-file-name]

-F service-name

Specify the service name of the target scheduler service.

-a login-information-file-name

Specify the name of the login information file containing the user name, the password, and the name of the host to be connected, which is the information that must be entered on the Login screen.

For details about the command, see the ajs in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

3.2 Logging out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager

To log out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager, choose File and then Exit in the JP1/AJS3 - View window. The JP1/AJS3 - View window is closed, and you have logged out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

4 Display Modes and Basic Operations of the JP1/AJS3 - View Window

For the JP1/AJS3 - View window, you can select a display setting (start mode) that is appropriate for the intended use. This chapter provides an overview of the window in each mode, and describes the basic operations in each mode.

For details about each window mode, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

4.1 Start modes of the JP1/AJS3 - View window

With JP1/AJS3 - View, you can select a display mode for the JP1/AJS3 - View window and the functions that are available in the selected mode. These display modes are called start modes.

Three start modes are provided:

Normal mode

In Normal mode, you are able to display only the menus, units, and display items that are necessary by selecting an operational objective from the function menus related to defining, executing, and monitoring units. Because only the functions that are relevant to the operational objective you select are provided, operational errors can be prevented.

When you install JP1/AJS3 - View for the first time, the JP1/AJS3 - View window is displayed in this mode.

For details about the basic operations, see 4.2.1 Normal mode.

Monitoring mode

In Monitoring mode, you can monitor the progress of jobnets by specifying those whose progress you want to monitor. However, in this mode, you cannot define units or register units for execution. Specify Monitoring mode when you only need to monitor the progress of tasks.

For details about the basic operations, see 4.2.2 Monitoring mode.

Compatible mode

In Compatible mode, JP1/AJS3 - View can be operated in the same way that it was operated before version 09-00. The functions not related to the current operational objective are also provided.

The JP1/AJS3 - View window appears in this mode if you perform an upgrade installation from JP1/AJS2 - View version 8 or earlier.

For details about the basic operations, see 4.2.3 Compatible mode.

For details about how to specify a start mode, see 11.2.2 Changing the start mode.

4.2 Window types and basic operations

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View and log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the JP1/AJS3 - View window appears. This section describes the basics of how to use the JP1/AJS3 - View window in each start mode.

Note that the start mode assumed in Chapter 5 and subsequent chapters is the Normal start mode.

4.2.1 Normal mode

In Normal mode, there are two JP1/AJS3 - View window types:

Main window

You can create units, register units for execution, and monitor the status of units.

Summary Monitor window

You can monitor the progress of units and the status of subordinate units.

The following provides an overview of operations available in these windows.

(1) JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View in Normal mode and log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) appears. The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Figure 4‒1: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) in Normal mode

The following describes the display areas.

Function menu area

In the items listed in Function Menu, click the operation you want to perform. When you click an item, the JP1/AJS3 - View window behaves as follows:

Displays in the list area only the units relevant to the item you chose.

Makes available only the operation menus relevant to the item you chose.

Changes the items displayed in the detailed information area to the information related to the item you chose.

If you click Summary Monitor, the main window changes to the Summary Monitor window.

Tree area

The tree area displays the scheduler service (root job group) defined for JP1/AJS3 - Manager and its subordinate job groups and planning groups in hierarchical format. When you select a unit in the tree area, the units immediately below the selected unit appear in the list area.

List area

The list area lists the units immediately below the unit selected in the tree area. The list area displays only the units whose type is relevant to the item chosen in Function Menu.

Detailed information area

The detailed information area displays the details, such as definitions and execution information, about the units selected in the list area. The detailed information area can display information about multiple units at one time. The types of information that are displayed are fixed for each Function Menu item that is chosen.

To display details, select a unit in the list area and then click the Show button. If you want to display the information for another unit, select a different unit in the list area and then click the Show button again.

For some types of information that are displayed, the information appears on multiple pages, in which case click the appropriate tab to display the information.

Clicking Refresh updates the displayed information for all units currently displayed in the detailed information area.

To minimize the detailed information area, choose View, Detailed Information Area, Area Size, and then Minimum. To restore the minimized detailed information area, choose View, Detailed Information Area, Area Size, and then Restore.

(2) JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Choosing Summary Monitor from Function Menu in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) opens the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window). The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Figure 4‒2: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) in Normal mode

The following describes the display areas.

Function menu area

From the items listed in Function Menu, click the operation you want to perform.

If you choose any item other than Summary Monitor, the summary monitor window changes to the main window.

Summary list

The summary list displays the progress of units that are registered as monitoring targets, the status of subordinate units, scheduled end time, and other information.

For details about how to register units as monitoring targets, see 8.3 Monitoring the progress.

Unit detailed information list

The unit detailed information list displays details about the unit selected in the summary list and its subordinate units.

The unit detailed information list is blank by default. To display details, select a unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All. If you choose unit-status, the unit detailed information list displays only those units categorized with unit-status among the units below the unit selected in the summary list. If you choose All, the unit detailed information list displays all the units below the unit selected in the summary list.

If you want to display information about another unit, select a different unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All again.

4.2.2 Monitoring mode

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View in Monitoring mode and log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) appears. The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Figure 4‒3: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) in Monitoring mode

The following describes the display areas.

Summary list

The summary list displays the progress of units that are registered as monitoring targets, the status of subordinate units, scheduled end time, and other information.

For details about how to register units as monitoring targets, see 8.3 Monitoring the progress.

Unit detailed information list

The unit detailed information list displays details about the unit selected in the summary list and its subordinate units.

The unit detailed information list is blank by default. To display details, select a unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All. If you choose unit-status, the unit detailed information list displays only those units categorized with unit-status among the units below the unit selected in the summary list. If you choose All, the unit detailed information list displays all the units below the unit selected in the summary list.

If you want to display information about another unit, select a different unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All again.

4.2.3 Compatible mode

In Compatible mode, there are two JP1/AJS3 - View window types:

Main window

You can create units, register units for execution, and monitor the status of units.

Summary Monitor window

You can monitor the progress of units and the status of subordinate units.

The following provides an overview of the operations available in these windows.

(1) JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View in the Compatible mode and log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) appears. The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Figure 4‒4: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) in Compatible mode

The following describes the display areas.

Tree area

The tree area displays the scheduler service (root job group) defined for JP1/AJS3 - Manager and its subordinate job groups and planning groups in hierarchical format. When you select a unit in the tree area, the units immediately below the selected unit appear in the list area.

List area

The list area lists the units immediately below the unit selected in the tree area.

Detailed information area

The detailed information area displays the details, such as definitions and execution information, about the units selected in the list area. The detailed information area can display information about multiple units at one time.

To display details, select a unit in the list area and then click the Show button. If you want to display the information for another unit, select a different unit in the list area and then click the Show button again.

To switch the display to another type of information, select the type of information from the display-switching drop-down list. The types of displayable information are those that can be displayed for the Normal start mode. For details about the types of display information, see 12.3.1 Configuration of the window.

Choosing Refresh updates the displayed information for the units currently displayed in the detailed information area.

To minimize the detailed information area, choose View, Detailed Information Area, Area Size, and then Minimum. To restore the minimized detailed information area, choose View, Detailed Information Area, Area Size, and then Restore.

(2) JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Choosing View from the menu bar of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and then Summary Monitor opens the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window). To return to the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the menu bar, choose View and then choose Main.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Figure 4‒5: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) in Compatible mode

The following describes the display areas.

Summary list

The summary list displays the progress of units that are registered as monitoring targets, the status of subordinate units, scheduled end time, and other information.

For details about how to register units as monitoring targets, see 8.3 Monitoring the progress.

Unit detailed information list

The unit detailed information list displays details about the unit selected in the summary list and its subordinate units.

The unit detailed information list is blank by default. To display details, select a unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All. If you choose unit-status, the unit detailed information list displays only those units categorized with unit-status among the units below the unit selected in the summary list. If you choose All, the unit detailed information list displays all the units below the unit selected in the summary list.

If you want to display information for another unit, select a different unit in the summary list, and then choose View, Unit Detailed Information List, and either unit-status or All again.

5 Defining Jobnets

This chapter describes how to define jobnets using JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

5.1 Overview of the procedure for defining a jobnet

This section describes the procedure for defining a jobnet using JP1/AJS3 - View. The general procedure for defining a jobnet is as follows:

To define a jobnet:

Define a job group.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) of JP1/AJS3 - View, define a job group.

Define a jobnet.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), define a jobnet in the job group defined in step 1.

At this point, the jobnet is not completed. To complete the jobnet, define jobs in the jobnet and relate the jobs if necessary.

Define jobs.

In the Jobnet Editor window, define jobs in the jobnet. Specifically, drag the job icons from the icon list and drop them into the map area.

Then define attributes (such as unit names and execution agents) of the jobs.

You can also define jobnet connectors as needed.

Relate jobs and jobnets if necessary.

Use arrows to bind (relate) the job icons defined in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window. This way, the execution order of the jobs is defined. You can copy, move, and delete icons.

Assign wait conditions as needed to the jobs and jobnets you defined.

You can use wait conditions to control the execution order of jobs and jobnets that you are unable to relate using the method in step 4.

Check the relations with preceding and succeeding jobs, and the relations of jobnets as necessary.

Check the relations between a job and its preceding and succeeding jobs, between a job and a jobnet, or between jobnets.

Specify a start condition for the jobnet if necessary.

Define the condition to start the jobnet. You can define a start condition for a root jobnet, which is the highest - level jobnet.

For definition of jobnets, see 3. Defining Automated Applications in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

5.2 Defining units

This section describes how to define a job group and define jobnets and jobs in the job group.

The following figure shows the Jobnet Editor window that you use to define units.

Figure 5‒1: Jobnet Editor window

By defining units in a unit definition file, you can execute the ajsdefine command to define units. For details of the command, see the description of ajsdefine in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

5.2.1 Defining job groups

A job group is a folder to classify multiple tasks (jobnets) and to control them. A job group cannot be defined in a jobnet or a job.

The following describes the procedure for defining each type of job group.

(1) Defining a job group

The following procedure define a job group in the scheduler service.

To define a job group:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, choose Job Group Definition.

Job Group Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the scheduler service (the root job group that manages the job group to be defined such as AJSROOT1).

The clicked scheduler service is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit, New, and then Job Group.

The Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the job group such as attributes.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box closes.

A folder representing the job group is displayed in the tree area.

(2) Defining a manager job group in a job group

A manager job group is a unit which links with job groups or planning groups defined in JP1/AJS3 - Manager on different hosts. This unit is defined if frequently used job groups on different hosts are viewed by single JP1/AJS3 - View.

The following procedure shows how to define a manager job group in the job group.

To define a manager job group in a job group:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Job Group Definition.

Job Group Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the manager job group to be defined.

The clicked job group is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose the Edit, New, and then Manager Job Group.

The Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the manager job group such as attributes.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box closes.

In the job group selected in the step 2, a manager job group is defined and it is displayed in the list area.

(3) Defining a planning group in a job group

A planning group is a job group to automatically switch multiple jobnets such as the root jobnets and the root remote job net. Under the planning group, multiple jobnets can be defined so that execution registration with period can be applied. If changes in the definition of the root jobnet are expected in future, define multiple versions of root jobnets with different definition and switch them as planned so that the system can run seamlessly.

The following procedure show how to define a planning group in the job group. A planning group is also created by ajsdefine command. For details of the command, see the description of ajsdefine in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To define a planning group in a job group:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Job Group Definition.

Job Group Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manages the planning group to be defined.

The clicked job group is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit, New, and then Planning Group.

The Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the planning group such as attributes.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box is closed.

The planning group is defined in the job group selected in step 2 and the planning group appears in the list area.

Supplementary note

The system runs a check if you specify connection of the planning group to a jobnet connector, specify Same service in Connection range on the Definition page of the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box, and then you click the OK button in step 5. This check is to determine whether the planning group can be really connected to the jobnet connector, and includes such checks as whether the jobnet connector actually exists and whether the jobnet connector is already connected to a jobnet.

If Other service is specified for Connection range, however, the system does not check whether the planning group can be really connected to the jobnet connector. In this case, manually check whether the planning group can be connected to the jobnet connector.

If a confirmation message or an error message appears, follow the displayed instructions.

5.2.2 Defining a jobnet

A jobnet is a collection of processing units (jobs) with a preset execution order. You define a jobnet in a job group, but you cannot define a jobnet in a job. For details about the procedure for defining a jobnet or defining a job in a jobnet, see (4) Defining a jobnet in a jobnet or 5.2.3 Defining jobs.

This subsection describes how to define each type of jobnet, and assumes that a job group has already been created.

You can also use the ajsdefine command to define units. For details about this command, see ajsdefine in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

(1) Defining jobnet (root jobnet)

The following procedure shows how to define a jobnet in the job group.

To define a jobnet in a job group:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click a job group that will manages the jobnet to be defined.

The clicked job group is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit, New, and then Jobnet.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the jobnet such as attributes.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box closes.

The job group selected in the step 2 is created and is displayed in the list area.

Supplementary notes

Even while registering execution, definition of a root jobnet can be added and changed. For the procedure using JP1/AJS3 - View, see 9.13 Changing the lower-level definition of a jobnet registered for execution.

The system runs a check if you specify connection of the planning group to a jobnet connector, specify Same service in Connection range on the Definition page of the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box, and then you click the OK button in step 5. This check is to determine whether the planning group can be really connected to the jobnet connector, and includes such checks as whether the jobnet connector actually exists and whether the jobnet connector is already connected to a jobnet.

If Other service is specified for Connection range, however, the system does not check whether the planning group can be really connected to the jobnet connector. In this case, manually check whether the planning group can be connected to the jobnet connector.

If a confirmation message or an error message appears, follow the displayed instructions.

You can register the definitions of a jobnet beforehand and then change the definitions at a specified date and time. For details about switching definitions, see 9.14 Switching definitions of a running jobnet according to a plan (jobnet release).

(2) Defining a remote jobnet

With a remote jobnet, you can transfer a jobnet that has already been defined on the local manager host to a different manager host and execute the jobnet there.

The following procedures shows how to define a remote jobnet in the job group.

To define a remote jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the jobnet to be defined.

The clicked job group is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit and New, and then Remote Jobnet.

The Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the remote jobnet such as attributes.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box closes.

A remote jobnet is defined in the job group selected in the step 2, and is displayed in the list area.

Cautionary note

A remote jobnet cannot be defined for a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

(3) Defining a manager jobnet

A manager jobnet is a unit to link jobnets on another hosts defined in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. This unit is defined if frequently used units on another hosts is used by single JP1/AJS3 - View.

The following procedure shows how to define a manager jobnet in the job group.

To define a manager jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, select a job group that manages a manager jobnet to be defined.

The clicked job group is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit, New, and then Manager Job Group.

The Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the manager jobnet such as attributes.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box closes.

In the job group selected in the step 2, a manager jobnet is defined and is displayed in the list area.

(4) Defining a jobnet in a jobnet

A jobnet defined in a jobnet is called a net jobnet.

The following procedure shows how to define a net jobnet assuming the job group and the jobnet have been defined.

To define a nested jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet that will manage the nested jobnet to be defined.

The clicked jobnet is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Or double click the root jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window is displayed.

Select Exclusive edit.

From the icon list, drag the icon of the target jobnet into the map area.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box is displayed.

Define items in the net jobnet such as attributes.

In case of recovery jobnet, choose Recovery for Type in the Attributes page.

Click OK button.

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box closes.

A nest jobnet is defined in the root jobnet.

To define another unit immediately under a nested jobnet, in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, click the icon of the nested jobnet, and then choose View and then Open Jobnet. Alternatively, double-click the icon of the nested jobnet.

The map area displays the level immediately below the nested jobnet.

Next, define the unit by performing step 5.

In the tree area, click the root jobnet selected in step 2.

The map area now displays the units immediately below the root jobnet.

Repeat steps 5 to 9 as necessary.

Supplementary notes

If the mouse cursor is placed in an icon in the icon list, the name of the icon is displayed. Before dragging it, check the icon name.

A job (custom job) that executes programs other than JP1/AJS3 programs is available. Among custom jobs, there are standard custom jobs provided by JP1/AJS3, or user defined custom jobs, which a user can register optionally. For details of custom jobs, see 3. Adding Custom Jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

A nest jobnet could have up to 30 layers, the first layer of which is a unit directly under the scheduler service (root job group)

To change the attributes of a nested jobnet defined in the map area, click the icon of the nested jobnet in the map area or the nested jobnet in the list area, and then choose Edit and then Properties.

You can set start conditions for root jobnets. For details see 5.4 Setting a start condition.

If you want to change the operation that is performed when you double-click a jobnet in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, use the Main page of the Preferences dialog box. If the default setting has been changed, double - clicking a jobnet does not display the Jobnet Editor window.

When you double-click a nested jobnet in the list area of the Jobnet Editor window, the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box appears by default. If you want to change the operation that is performed when you double-click a jobnet in the list area, use the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box. For details about how to change the operation, see 11.5.11 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked.

5.2.3 Defining jobs

Define jobs in the jobnet.

Provided that a job group and a jobnet are already created, use the following procedure to define jobs.

To define jobs:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the jobnet that will manage the job to be defined.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Or double - click the jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window is displayed.

Select Exclusive edit.

Drag the icon of the job or jobnet you want to define from the icon list and drop it into the map area.

The Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears. icon-name is replaced by the type of the selected unit.

Define attributes of the job or jobnet.

If the job or jobnet is a recovery job or recovery jobnet, select Recovery for Type in the Attributes page.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [icon - name] dialog box closes.

The job or jobnet is defined in the jobnet.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary.

Supplementary notes

After you define jobs, you do not need to save the jobnet.

When you place the mouse cursor on an icon in the icon list, the name of the icon is displayed. Check the icon name before you drag it.

You can use jobs (custom jobs) that execute programs other than JP1/AJS3. Custom jobs include the default custom jobs that are provided by JP1/AJS3 as standard and the user custom jobs that users can register. For details about custom jobs, see 3. Adding Custom Jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

To change the attributes of a job defined in the map area, click the icon of the job in the map area or the job in the list area, and click Edit and then Properties.

If a job defined in a jobnet is an event job, you can specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet in the Detailed Definition - [event - job - icon - name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. You can display the Detailed Definition - [event - job - icon - name] - [Passing Information] dialog box by clicking the Pass Info button in the Detailed Definition - [icon - name] dialog box. The event - job - icon - name portion displays the name of the event job defined in the jobnet.

When you double-click a job in the list area in the Jobnet Editor window, the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears by default. If you want to change the operation that is performed when you double-click a job in the list area, use the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box. For details about how to change the operation, see 11.5.11 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked.

5.2.4 Defining jobnet connectors

You can define a jobnet connector in a jobnet.

There are two methods to do so:

Manually creating a jobnet connector

Automatically creating a jobnet connector

This subsection assumes that the jobnet where a jobnet connector will be located has already been created. See the following for how to define a jobnet connector.

Cautionary notes

A jobnet connector can be defined only under a root jobnet or a nested jobnet.

A jobnet connector cannot be defined for a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

Only a root jobnet or a planning group can be specified as the connection-destination jobnet for a jobnet connector. Jobnet connectors cannot be connected to other unit types.

Do not define a jobnet connector under its connection-destination jobnet. If you do so, an error occurs when the connection-destination jobnet containing the jobnet connector are registered for execution.

Do not specify a start condition for the jobnet containing a jobnet connector or the connection-destination jobnet for the jobnet connector. If you do so, an error occurs when the connection-destination jobnet and the jobnet containing the jobnet connector are registered for execution.

If the versions of JP1/AJS2 - View and the connection-destination JP1/AJS2 - Manager are earlier than 08-50, you cannot connect a jobnet connector to a root jobnet or a planning group under a different scheduler service.

If the versions of JP1/AJS2 - View and the connection-destination JP1/AJS2 - Manager are 08-50, and a jobnet connector will control the execution order of root jobnets under different scheduler services, JP1/AJS2 - View and connection-target JP1/AJS2 - Manager must be set up.

(1) Manually creating a jobnet connector

To manually create a jobnet connector:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the jobnet that will manage the jobnet connector to be defined.

The clicked jobnet is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Or double - click the jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window is displayed.

Select Exclusive edit.

From the icon list, drag the jobnet connector icon into the map area.

The Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box appears.

Define the name of the connection-destination jobnet for the jobnet connector and other necessary items.

Click the OK button.

Depending on the option you choose in Connection range, the subsequent operation differs as described below when you click the OK button.

If you click Same service in Connection range:

When the OK button is clicked, the system checks whether the jobnet connector can be really connected to the specified connection-destination jobnet. For example, the system checks whether the connection-destination jobnet exists and whether the connection-destination jobnet is connected to another jobnet connector.

If you click Other service in Connection range:

The system does not check whether the jobnet connector can be really connected to the specified connection-destination jobnet. In this case, manually check whether the jobnet connector can be really connected to the specified connection-destination jobnet.

If a confirmation message or an error message appears, follow the displayed instructions.

If the system determines that the specified settings are acceptable, the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box closes and the jobnet connector is created.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary.

When you manually create a jobnet connector, you need to define the name of the jobnet connector in the root jobnet (or planning group if the connection will be to a root jobnet immediately under a planning group) that is specified as the connection-destination jobnet.

(2) Automatically creating a jobnet connector

When a jobnet connector is automatically created, you do not need to enter a connection-destination jobnet name in Connect destination on the Definition page of the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box and a jobnet connector name in Jobnet Connector on the Definition page of the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box or Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box.

Cautionary note

A jobnet connector can be created automatically only if its connection-destination root jobnet or planning group is under the same scheduler service. If you want to create a jobnet connector in a jobnet that is under a different scheduler service from the scheduler service containing the connection-destination jobnet or planning group, perform the procedure described in (1) Manually creating a jobnet connector.

To automatically create a jobnet connector:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Jobnet Definition.

Jobnet Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the jobnet that will manage the jobnet connector to be defined.

The clicked jobnet is displayed in the selected mode.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Or double - click the jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window is displayed.

Select Exclusive edit.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), in the tree area, click the connection-destination jobnet or planning group, and then choose Options and then Save as Jobnet Connector.

Cautionary notes

Select only one root jobnet or planning group as the connection destination. If you select multiple root jobnets or planning groups, you cannot choose Options and then Save as Jobnet Connector.

If you select a root jobnet under a planning group, you cannot choose Options and then Save as Jobnet Connector.

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and then Auto-create Jobnet Connector.

In the Jobnet Editor window, a jobnet connector is created in the map area. The name of the jobnet connector is the same as the name of the root jobnet you selected in step 5.

Cautionary notes

A jobnet connector cannot be connected automatically if the status of its connection destination (root jobnet, root jobnet under a planning group, or planning group) is any of the following:

- The target has been registered for execution. (Except for planning groups.)

- The target contains a jobnet connector.

- The target is defined with Other service specified in Connection range on the Definition page of the Define Details dialog box.

- The target has already been specified with another jobnet connector.

A jobnet connector cannot be connected automatically if its connection-destination root jobnet is a release-target jobnet. Also, a jobnet connector cannot be created automatically if the root jobnet in which you create the jobnet connector is a release-target jobnet.

A jobnet connector cannot be created automatically if there is no operate permission for the connection-destination unit.

Double-click the jobnet connector icon created in the map area.

The Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box appears.

Connect destination displays the full name of the root jobnet or planning group you selected in step 5.

Change the definitions of the jobnet connector as necessary.

Change the definitions as necessary.

Cautionary note

For automatic creation of a jobnet connector, information about the unit selected in step 5 and about the jobnet connector is set in the text boxes related to execution order control. If you change the unit name or other information about the jobnet connector, the new information creates inconsistencies with the information set for the connection-destination unit for the jobnet connector. If you change the definitions of an automatically created jobnet connector, check the definitions of the connection-destination unit and make any required changes.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box closes.

The jobnet connector is defined in the jobnet.

Repeat steps 5 to 9 as necessary.

Supplementary notes

If you want to connect a jobnet connector to a root jobnet immediately under a planning group, you need to specify the name of the jobnet connector for the planning group.

When you double-click a jobnet connector in the list area of the Jobnet Editor window, the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box appears by default. If you want to change the operation that is performed when you double-click a jobnet connector in the list area, use the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box. For details about how to change the operation, see 11.5.11 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked.

5.2.5 Relating jobs and jobnets

This subsection describes how to relate the jobs, nested jobnets, and jobnet connectors that are defined in a jobnet.

(1) Relating two units

To relate two units:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units you want to relate.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Make Relation button.

The Make Relation button is now selected.

Click the icons starting from the first unit to be executed.

When you click an icon, it is selected.

A black or red arrow appears between icons.

Click the mouse in the desired place in the map area.

The icon that is clicked later is deselected.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

(2) Relating more than two units consecutively

To relate more than two units:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units you want to relate.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Make Consecutive Relations button.

The Make Consecutive Relations button is now selected.

Click the icons starting from the first unit to be executed.

When you click an icon, it is selected.

A black or red arrow appears between icons.

Click the mouse in the desired place in the map area.

The icon that is clicked last is deselected.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

(3) Relating multiple units from one unit

To relate multiple units from one unit:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units you want to relate.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Make Relation button.

The Make Relation button is now selected.

Click the icon for the unit to be executed first.

A line is drawn from the icon toward the pointer.

Drag the pointer across the icons of the units to be executed subsequently.

The icons are selected.

A black or red arrow appears between icons.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

(4) Relating multiple units to one unit

To relate multiple units to one unit:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units you want to relate.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Make Relation button.

The Make Relation button is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to select the icons for the units to be executed first:

Use a mouse-drag operation to surround the target icons.

Holding down the Shift key, click the target icons.

If you perform either of these operations on icons that have already been selected while you are holding down the Shift key, the selection will be cleared.

Press the Shift key, and then release it. If the key has already been pressed, release it.

Lines are drawn from the selected icons toward the pointer.

Click the icon for the unit that you want to execute next after the selected units.

Multiple relations are set simultaneously.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

(5) Relating a judgment job and a dependent unit

To relate a judgment job with a dependent unit:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units you want to relate.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Make Conditional Relations button.

The Make Conditional Relations button is now selected.

Click a judgment job icon and then a dependent unit icon.

When you click an icon, it is selected.

A blue arrow with pointed ends on both sides appears between icons.

Click the mouse in the desired place in the map area.

The icon that is clicked later is deselected.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

(6) Canceling a relation

To cancel a relation:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units whose relation you want to cancel.

Select Exclusive edit.

Click the Break Relation button.

The Break Relation button is now selected.

Click the arrow with one pointed end or two pointed ends between the icons whose relation you want to cancel.

The relation line is deleted.

If JP1/AJS3 - View is configured to display a confirmation message, the relation line is deleted when you click the Yes button in the message.

For details about the setting that controls whether a confirmation message is displayed, see 11.5.16 Displaying a confirmation message when deleting a relation line.

Click the Basic button to end creating relations between icons.

The Basic button is now selected.

5.2.6 Assigning wait conditions

You can assign wait conditions to the jobs and jobnets you defined.

To assign a wait condition:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display a jobnet that meets either of the following conditions:

If the unit to which you are assigning a wait condition is a jobnet:

Display the jobnet to which you want to assign a wait condition.

If the unit to which you are assigning a wait condition is not a jobnet:

Display the jobnet that contains the unit to which you want to assign a wait condition.

Cautionary note

For details about the units that are capable of accepting wait conditions, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Select the Exclusive edit check box.

Click the icon for the unit to which you want to assign a wait condition. If the unit is a jobnet, click the jobnet in the tree area.

The icon or jobnet you clicked is now selected.

From the Edit menu, choose Waiting Conditions Settings.

The Waiting Condition Settings dialog box appears.

Define the wait conditions.

Define the wait conditions in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

Cautionary notes

When designating a unit other than a root jobnet that is in a planning group as a unit whose end is to be waited for, specify the name of the unit without the root jobnet name.

For example, to specify jobnet/job1 in planning group plangr as a unit whose end is to be waited for, specify plangr/job1 rather than plangr/jobnet/job1.

Click the OK button.

The Waiting Condition Settings dialog box closes, and the wait condition is assigned to the unit selected in step 3.

If you selected an icon in step 3, the letter W appears in the icon.

As necessary, select a jobnet in the tree area, map area, or list area of the Jobnet Editor window, and from the View menu, choose Wait Conditions Settings List.

The Wait Conditions Settings List window appears.

In this window, you can check whether the unit whose end is being waited for is defined correctly, and check the definitions of wait conditions.

For details about the Wait Conditions Settings List window, see 12.11 Wait Conditions Settings List window.

Cautionary note

A setup process is required before you can use wait conditions. If you do not perform the necessary steps, you will be able define wait conditions, but units with wait conditions will terminate abnormally upon execution.

For details about the setup for wait conditions, see 6.1.8 Settings for using wait conditions in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Supplementary note

Specify units whose ends are to be waited for by their full path name. If you define and test units on a development host before copying them to the production host, there is no need to amend the paths of the units whose ends are to be waited for on the production host, provided that the jobnet hierarchy is the same on both hosts.

5.3 Copying, moving, and deleting units

This section describes how to edit (copy, move, and delete) the units that are defined in jobnets.

5.3.1 Copying units

To copy one or more units that are defined in a jobnet:

(1) Copying units only

To copy only the units defined in a jobnet:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the unit or units to be copied.

Use one of the following methods to select the icon or icons of the target units:

If you want to select one unit:

Click the icon.

If you want to select multiple units:

Either use the mouse to enclose a range of icons, or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired units.

If you want to select all units:

Either click Edit and then Select All, or hold down the Ctrl key and press the A key.

To release the selected status, click the icon if only one icon is selected. To deselect multiple icons, hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected icons.

Choose Edit and then Copy.

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet where the target unit or units are to be copied to.

Select Exclusive edit.

Choose Edit and then Paste (Units only).

The icon or icons are copied. The place where the icon or icons are copied depends on the number of icons selected in step 2.

When one icon was selected

The icon is copied to the place in the map area where the mouse was clicked last.

When multiple icons were selected

The icons are pasted in the same arrangement as the source jobnet with respect to the last point the mouse was clicked in the map area. To copy the icons into a place you desire, click on the place, then choose Edit and then Paste (Units only).

When icons are copied, the unit names are changed so that there are no multiple instances of the same unit name.

Cautionary note

The following units cannot be copied under a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

Remote jobnet

.CONDITION (start condition)

Jobnet connector

Supplementary notes

When you copy a unit, the attributes of that unit are also copied. However, the unit does not retain settings related to ownership and JP1 resource groups. The owner and JP1 resource group settings of a unit created by copying depends on whether the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is enabled.

If the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is disabled:

Owner: The JP1 user who copied the unit.

JP1 resource groups: Retains the JP1 resource groups of the original unit.

If the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is enabled:

Owner: Inherits the owner of the upper-level unit at the copy destination.

JP1 resource groups: Inherits the JP1 resource groups of the upper-level unit at the copy destination.

For details on the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function, see 6.4.1(4) Access permission for creating or copying a unit, or making a release entry in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy a unit, relations are canceled.

You can also copy the units that are displayed in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), and the tree area and list area of the Jobnet Editor window.

(2) Copying units and relations

To copy multiple units including the relations between the units:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the units that you want to copy.

Use one of the following methods to select the icons for the target units:

If you want to select multiple units:

Either use the mouse to enclose a range of icons, or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired units.

If you want to select all units:

Either click Edit and then Select All, or hold down the Ctrl key and press the A key.

To clear the selection of an icon, hold down the Ctrl key and click the icon.

Choose Edit and then Copy.

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet where the target unit or units are to be copied to.

Select Exclusive edit.

Choose Edit and then Paste (Units and relations).

The icons are pasted in the same arrangement as the source jobnet with respect to the last point the mouse was clicked in the map area. The icons are pasted with the same layout as that of the source map area, when possible. If it is impossible to paste the icons with the same layout, the starting position is changed to maintain the same layout.

Note that copied units are renamed to avoid duplication of unit names.

Cautionary notes

When you copy a nested jobnet, all the subordinate units are also copied. Note, however, that the definitions of the subordinate units to be copied do not have the time that the Copy operation was performed but the time that the Paste (Units and relations) operation was performed. Therefore, if you select multiple units in the map area that include a nested jobnet and copy them under a nested jobnet, the status of the copied units might not be what you expect.

The following units cannot be copied under a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

- Remote jobnet

- .CONDITION (start condition)

- Jobnet connector

Supplementary note

When you copy a unit, the attributes of that unit are also copied. However, the unit does not retain settings related to ownership and JP1 resource groups. The owner and JP1 resource group settings of a unit created by copying depends on whether the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is enabled.

If the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is disabled:

Owner: The JP1 user who copied the unit.

JP1 resource groups: Retains the JP1 resource groups of the original unit.

If the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function is enabled:

Owner: Inherits the owner of the upper-level unit at the copy destination.

JP1 resource groups: Inherits the JP1 resource groups of the upper-level unit at the copy destination.

For details on the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function, see 6.4.1(4) Access permission for creating or copying a unit, or making a release entry in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

5.3.2 Moving units

This subsection describes how to move a unit defined in a jobnet to another jobnet.

(1) Moving units only

To move only the units defined in a jobnet to another jobnet:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the unit or units are to be moved.

Select Exclusive edit.

Use one of the following methods to select the icon or icons of the target units:

If you want to select one unit:

Click the icon.

If you want to select multiple units:

Either use the mouse to enclose a range of icons, or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired units.

If you want to select all units:

Either click Edit and then Select All, or hold down the Ctrl key and press the A key.

To release the selected status, click the icon if only one icon is selected. To deselect multiple icons, hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected icons.

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and then Cut.

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the destination jobnet.

Select Exclusive edit.

Choose Edit and then Paste (Units only).

The icon or icons are moved. The place where the icon or icons are moved depends on the number of icons selected in step 3.

When one icon was selected

The icon is moved to the place in the map area where the mouse was clicked last.

When multiple icons were selected

The icons are moved to the same coordinate position as in the source jobnet with respect to the last point the mouse was clicked in the map area. To move the icons into a place you desire, click on the place, then choose Edit and then Paste (Units only).

When icons are moved, the unit names are changed so that there are no multiple instances of the same unit name.

Cautionary notes

If you close the Jobnet Editor window or disable Exclusive edit after performing a Cut operation, you can perform a Paste (Units only) operation. However, you cannot perform a Paste (Units only) operation if Exclusive edit is enabled in another Jobnet Editor window, or if the units you cut have been referenced from another window.

If you use Copy or Cut for a jobnet connector, the connection-destination jobnet of the replaced jobnet connector does not change. Accordingly, the connection between the new jobnet connector and the connection-destination jobnet might not work. Make sure that you check the connection-destination jobnet after you paste a jobnet connector.

The following units cannot be moved under a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

- Remote jobnet

- .CONDITION (start condition)

- Jobnet connector

Supplementary note

When you move a unit, the attributes defined for the unit are also moved.

(2) Moving units and relations

To move multiple units including the relations between the units:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the unit or units are to be moved.

Select Exclusive edit.

Use one of the following methods to select the icons for the target units:

If you want to select multiple units:

Either use the mouse to enclose a range of icons, or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired units.

If you want to select all units:

Either click Edit and then Select All, or hold down the Ctrl key and press the A key.

To release the selected status, click the icon if only one icon is selected.

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and then Cut.

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the destination jobnet.

Select Exclusive edit.

Choose Edit and then Paste (Units and relations).

The icons are pasted in the same arrangement as in the source jobnet with respect to the last point the mouse was clicked in the map area. The icons are pasted with the same layout as that of the source map area, when possible. If it is impossible to paste the icons with the same layout, the starting position is changed to maintain the same layout.

Note that moved units are renamed to avoid duplication of unit names.

Cautionary notes

After executing Cut, you can also execute Paste (Units and relations) by closing the Jobnet Editor window or by clearing Exclusive edit, unless Exclusive edit is selected in another Jobnet Editor window.

The following units cannot be moved under a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

- Remote jobnet

- .CONDITION (start condition)

- Jobnet connector

Supplementary note

When a unit is moved, the attributes defined in the unit are also moved.

5.3.3 Deleting units

To delete units that are defined in a jobnet:

In the map area of the Jobnet Editor window, display the jobnet that contains the unit or units are to be deleted.

Select Exclusive edit.

Use one of the following methods to select the icon or icons of the target units:

If you want to select one unit:

Click the icon.

If you want to select multiple units:

Either use the mouse to enclose a range of icons, or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired units.

If you want to select all units:

Either click Edit and then Select All, or hold down the Ctrl key and press the A key.

To release the selected status, click the icon if only one icon is selected. To deselect multiple icons, hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected icons.

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and then Delete.

A message dialog box appears to confirm the deletion of the selected unit or units.

Click the Yes button.

The icon or icons are deleted.

Cautionary note

If the units have been referenced from another window, you cannot perform a Delete operation.

Supplementary note

You can also delete the units displayed in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), and the tree area and list area of the Jobnet Editor window.

5.4 Setting a start condition

This section describes how to set a start condition for a jobnet.

To set a start condition:

In the Jobnet Editor window, display the root jobnet for which a start condition is to be set.

Select Exclusive edit.

Choose Edit and then Define Start Condition.

The Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box appears.

Select the method for satisfying the start condition.

When you select OR in the Definition page, the jobnet starts when one of the conditions specified in steps 7 to 9 is satisfied.

When you select AND in the Definition page, the jobnet starts when all the conditions specified in steps 7 to 9 are satisfied.

Click the OK button.

The Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box closes.

A virtual jobnet for defining the start condition (a jobnet titled .CONDITION) is created and displayed in the tree area.

Click jobnet .CONDITION.

The map area for jobnet .CONDITION appears.

Drag the event job icon from the Events tab in the icon list and drop it in the map area.

The Detailed Definition - [event - job] dialog box appears.

Define attributes of the event job.

Click the OK button.

The Detailed Definition - [event - job] dialog box is closed.

Repeat steps 7 to 9 if necessary.

Cautionary notes

Only the root jobnet can have a start condition. Note, however, that start conditions cannot be specified for a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

Only one start condition is permitted for the root jobnet. You cannot create more than one start condition.

Supplementary notes

You cannot relate the event jobs defined in jobnet .CONDITION.

To check or change the conditions for satisfying the start condition, which are set in jobnet .CONDITION, choose Edit and then Define Start Condition. When the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box appears, check or change the conditions.

To delete a start condition, choose Edit and then Cancel Start Condition.

For setting the start condition, see 3.4 Defining a start condition in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

6 Defining Schedules

This chapter describes how to define schedules of jobnets by using JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

6.1 Steps required for defining a schedule

This section describes the steps that are required to define the schedule of a jobnet using JP1/AJS3 - View.

The following three steps are required to define a schedule:

Define calendar information in the job group.

In the Edit Monthly Calendar window or the Edit Annual Calendar window of JP1/AJS3 - View, define the calendar information (open days and closed days) in the job group.

Define calendar information for each job group. The defined calendar information is valid for all the jobnets in the job group. However, when you define the schedule of each jobnet, you can specify that the calendar information of another job group is to be used.

When you define a job group under another job group, the lower-level job group can inherit the calendar information from the upper-level job group. Therefore, defining calendar information in a lower-level job group is optional.

Define the schedule of a jobnet.

In the Schedule Settings dialog box and the Schedule Rule dialog box of JP1/AJS3 - View, define the schedule of a jobnet. As the elements of the schedule, define the expiration date of the schedule, the execution start date of the schedule, the execution processing cycle, and the calendar information to be used.

Define a schedule for each jobnet. However, if jobnets are nested, you can inherit the schedule rules of an upper-level jobnet. In this case, you can choose whether or not to define a schedule rule.

Check the defined schedule.

In the Monthly Schedule window of JP1/AJS3 - View, check the defined schedule.

6.2 Defining calendar information

This section describes how to define the monthly or annual calendar information in a job group. For calendar information definition functions, see 3.2 Defining a calendar for JP1/AJS3 operation in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You can also use the ajscalendar command to define calendar information. For details of the command, see the description of ajscalendar in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

You can also view the defined calendar information from a jobnet of another job group. For details on how to view the defined calendar information from a jobnet of another job group, see 12.3.16 Schedule Settings dialog box.

6.2.1 Defining the monthly calendar information

To define the monthly calendar information:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Calendar Definition.

Calendar Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group for which calendar information needs to be defined.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Calendar.

The Edit Monthly Calendar window of the month appears. The current date is displayed in yellow.

When calendar information is defined in the job group that is above the selected job group, the calendar information of the upper-level job group is applied to the background colors in the Edit Monthly Calendar window. The background colors are as follows:

For open days: Light green

For closed days: Orange

For unspecified days: White

If you have defined calendar information in Standard week, that calendar information is applied to the background colors in the Edit Monthly Calendar window. The background colors are as follows:

For open days: Light blue

For closed days: Light red

For unspecified days: White

Define open days and closed days of the month.

We recommend that you define open days and closed days in the following sequence:

1. Define days of the week in Standard week (valid for all years and months).

2. Define days of the week in the calendar area (valid for the particular month).

3. Define dates in the calendar area (valid for the particular month).

When you click a day of the week in Standard week, a day of the week in the calendar area, or a date in the calendar area, the background color changes in the following sequence each time you click a day or date:

Days of the week in Standard week:

Light red (closed day) to light blue (open day) to white (unspecified day)

Days of the week in the calendar area:

Red (closed day) to blue (open day) to white (unspecified day)

Dates in the calendar area:

Red (closed day) to blue (open day) to white (unspecified day)

If the definition of the standard week differs from the definition of each week or each date, the definition of each week or each date takes precedence.

Define the calendar information of the next month if necessary.

To define, click the Next month button, and define the calendar information of the next month in the displayed window.

Choose File and then Save.

The defined information is saved.

Choose File and then Close.

The Edit Monthly Calendar window is closed.

Example of defining calendar information

Define the calendar as follows:

In the year 20XX every Sunday is a closed day throughout the year. Only in the current month (May 20XX), all Saturdays and the end of the month (May 31, 20XX) are also closed days.

To define the calendar:

In the standard weeks, click the column of Sundays until the column of Sundays in the calendar area is displayed in pale red.

In the calendar area, click the column of Saturdays until the column is displayed in red.

In the calendar area, click the box of 31 until the box is displayed in red.

The calendar information for May and June in 20XX is as follows after the calendar information is defined.

Figure 6‒1: Calendar information

Cautionary note

Change calendar information when there are only a few tasks. While the Edit Monthly Calendar window is saving calendar information, the system suppresses the execution of the jobnets that are registered for execution under the scheduler service containing the job group whose calendar information you are changing. This could have an effect on tasks. However, note that, regardless of whether calendar information is being saved, a jobnet with a start condition is executed when the start condition is established if the jobnet enters the Now monitoring status before the calendar information is changed.

Supplementary notes

Multiple users can edit calendar information simultaneously. In this case, the last saved information is valid.

Calendar information is definable between January 1994 and December in the four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter.

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, calendar information is definable up to December 2036.

The information defined in the standard week is valid for all months and years (January 1994 to December in the four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter).

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, calendar information is definable up to December 2036.

By using the Edit Monthly Calendar window, you can define the calendar information for each month. By using the Edit Annual Calendar window, you can define the calendar information of one year on the same screen.

If calendar information of a job group has not been set, the calendar information of the upper-level job group or scheduler service is referenced. If none of this calendar information has been specified, an open day is assumed.

You can change the settings to display the Edit Annual Calendar window when you choose Edit and then Calendar in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). We recommend that you do so to make the display period the same for the window and the detailed information area. For details about how to change the settings, see 11.6.2 Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first.

For details about the Edit Monthly Calendar window, see 12.14.5(1) Notes on the Edit Monthly Calendar window as well.

6.2.2 Defining the annual calendar information

To define the annual calendar information:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Calendar Definition.

Calendar Definition is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group for which calendar information needs to be defined.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Calendar.

The Edit Monthly Calendar window of the month appears. The current date is displayed in yellow.

Choose View and then Edit Annual Calendar.

The Edit Annual Calendar window of the year appears. The current date is displayed in yellow.

When calendar information is defined in the job group that is above the selected job group, the calendar information of the upper-level job group is applied to the background colors in the Edit Annual Calendar window. The background colors are as follows:

For open days: Light green

For closed days: Orange

For unspecified days: White

If you have defined calendar information in Standard week, that calendar information is applied to the background colors in the Edit Annual Calendar window. The background colors are as follows:

For open days: Light blue

For closed days: Light red

For unspecified days: White

Define open days and closed days of the year.

For details about the definition method, see 6.2.1 Defining the monthly calendar information.

Define the calendar information of the next year if necessary.

To define, click Next Year button, and define the calendar information of the next year in the displayed window.

Choose File and then Save.

The defined information is saved.

Choose File and then Close.

The Edit Annual Calendar window is closed.

Cautionary note

Change calendar information when there are only a few tasks. While the Edit Annual Calendar window is saving calendar information, the system suppresses the execution of the jobnets that are registered for execution under the scheduler service containing the job group whose calendar information you are changing. This could have an effect on tasks. However, note that, regardless of whether calendar information is being saved, a jobnet with a start condition is executed when the start condition is established if the jobnet enters the Now monitoring status before the calendar information is changed.

Supplementary notes

Multiple users can edit calendar information simultaneously. In this case, the last saved information is valid.

Calendar information is definable between January 1994 and December in the four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter.

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, calendar information is definable up to December 2036.

The information defined in the standard week is valid for all months and years (January 1994 to December in the four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter).

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, calendar information is definable up to December 2036.

In the Edit Annual Calendar window, choosing View and then Edit Monthly Calendar displays the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

Defining annual calendar information causes the first month to become the month for which operations were performed, as when you define monthly calendar information.

If calendar information of a job group has not been set, the calendar information of the upper-level job group or scheduler service is referenced. If none of this calendar information has been specified, an open day is assumed.

For details about the Edit Annual Calendar window, see 12.14.5(2) Notes on the Edit Yearly Calendar window as well.

6.3 Defining a schedule

This section describes how to define the schedule of a jobnet. For schedule rules, see 3.3 Defining a schedule in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You can also use the ajschgnet command to define schedules. For details of the command, see the description of ajschgnet in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

6.3.1 Defining a new schedule

To define a new schedule of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to display the Schedule Settings dialog box:

If you want to define a schedule for the root jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Schedule.

If you want to define a schedule for a nested jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet. When the Jobnet Editor window appears, in the tree area, click the jobnet for the operation, and then choose Edit and then Schedule.

Deselect Depends on upper-level jobnet.

In Schedule rules, click the Add button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box appears.

Define the details of schedule rules.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box is closed.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 if necessary.

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, specify Valid term and Options.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box is closed.

The schedule is defined for the jobnet.

Supplementary notes

Multiple users can define the same schedule simultaneously. In this case, the last defined information is valid.

You can use the calendar information of a job group in another tier instead of the calendar information defined for the job group to which the target jobnet belongs. To do so, in the Schedule Settings dialog box, in Options, select Refer to a calendar of another job group and specify the name of the desired job group. For details on how to specify the name of a job group, see 12.3.16 Schedule Settings dialog box.

6.3.2 Changing an already-defined schedule rule

This subsection describes how to edit, copy, and delete a schedule rule that has already been defined for a jobnet.

(1) Editing a schedule rule

To edit a schedule rule:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to display the Schedule Settings dialog box:

If you want to define a schedule for the root jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Schedule.

If you want to define a schedule for a nested jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet. When the Jobnet Editor window appears, in the tree area, click the jobnet, and then choose Edit and then Schedule.

In Schedule rules, click the schedule rule to be edited.

The schedule rule you clicked is now selected.

Click the Change button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box appears.

Change the details of the schedule rule.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box is closed.

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box is closed.

(2) Copying a schedule rule

To copy a schedule rule:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to display the Schedule Settings dialog box:

If you want to define a schedule for the root jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Schedule.

If you want to define a schedule for a nested jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet. When the Jobnet Editor window appears, in the tree area, click the jobnet for the operation, and then choose Edit and then Schedule.

In Schedule rules, click the schedule rule to be copied.

The schedule rule you clicked is now selected.

Click the Copy button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box appears.

In Rule number, enter a value that is not yet used as a schedule rule number (an unused number between 1 and 144). Then define other details of the schedule rule.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box is closed.

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box is closed.

(3) Deleting a schedule rule

To delete a schedule rule:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to display the Schedule Settings dialog box:

If you want to define a schedule for the root jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Schedule.

If you want to define a schedule for a nested jobnet:

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet. When the Jobnet Editor window appears, in the tree area, click the jobnet for the operation, and then choose Edit and then Schedule.

In Schedule rules, click the schedule rule to be deleted.

The schedule rule you clicked is now selected. You can select multiple schedule rules by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key as you click.

Click the Delete button.

A message dialog box appears to confirm whether the schedule rule should be deleted.

Click the Yes button.

The selected schedule rules are deleted.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box is closed.

6.3.3 Defining a schedule rule that starts a jobnet at regular intervals

You can use repetition settings to define schedule rules that start a jobnet at regular intervals. When you use repetition settings, the jobnet with the original schedule rule is scheduled at regular intervals from the start time of the schedule rule until the last start time specified in the repetition settings.

To apply repetition settings:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which you are defining a schedule.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Use either of the following methods to display the Schedule Settings dialog box:

If you want to define a schedule for a root jobnet:

From the Edit menu, choose Schedule.

If you want to define a schedule for a nested jobnet:

From the Edit menu, choose Edit, or double-click the root jobnet. When the Jobnet Editor window appears, click the jobnet in the tree area, map area, or list area, and from the Edit menu, choose Schedule.

Deselect Depends on upper-level jobnet.

To define a schedule rule by modifying or copying an existing rule, in the Schedule rules area, click the schedule rule that you want to modify or copy.

The schedule rule you clicked is now selected.

Skip this step if you intend to define a new schedule rule.

Click the Add, Change, or Copy button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box appears.

Define the details of the schedule rule.

Define the schedule rule that provides the basis for the repeating schedule.

Click the Repeat button.

The Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box appears.

Define the repetition settings in detail.

Supplementary note

If you specify an absolute time for the Start time of the schedule rule you define in step 7, the Last start time in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box is assumed to be an absolute time. If you specify a relative time for the start time, the Last start time is also assumed to be a relative time.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box closes.

In the Schedule Rule dialog box, click the OK button.

A message dialog box appears to confirm addition of the schedule rule.

Click the Yes button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box closes, and the schedule rule appears in the Schedule rules area of the Schedule Settings dialog box.

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box closes.

Example of defining schedule rules with repetition settings

Define the schedule rule as follows:

Define a schedule rule that schedules a jobnet every 60 minutes from 10:00 until 13:00.

To define a set of schedule rules, you can apply a repetition setting to a new schedule rule that you created or copied, or edit an existing schedule rule to serve as the basis for the repeated schedule. The number of schedule rules that result from the process differs for each method.

Using a new schedule rule as the basis for the repeated schedule by adding a new rule or copying an existing rule:

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, click the Add or Copy button to display the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Specify 10:00 in the Start time field.

In the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box, specify 60 minutes in the Start interval field, and 13:00 in the Last start time field.

Including the schedule rule that serves as the basis for the repeated schedule, this process results in four schedule rules starting at 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, and 13:00.

Using an existing schedule rule as the basis for the repeated schedule:

In the Schedule Settings dialog box, click the Change button to display the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Specify 10:00 in the Start time field.

In the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box, specify 60 minutes in the Start interval field, and 13:00 in the Last start time field.

This process results in three schedule rules, starting at 11:00, 12:00, and 13:00.

Cautionary notes

You can use repetition settings in JP1/AJS3 - View version 09-50 and later.

If the repetition setting you specify results in more than 144 schedule rules, only the first 144 are defined.

A schedule rule generated by a repetition setting inherits some of its settings from the schedule rule defined in the Schedule Rule dialog box, while others are set automatically.

The following table lists the settings that are set automatically.

Table 6‒1: Properties set automatically for schedule rules defined by repetition settings

No.

Page

Item set automatically

Value assigned

1

--

Rule number

An unused schedule rule number.

2

--

Rule number to link

The same value as Rule number#1.

3

Basic

Start time

The start time of the original schedule rule offset by the value of Start interval in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box

4

The time when Absolute time is selected for Period in the Valid range of start condition area.

The value of Absolute time in Period in the Valid range of start condition area offset by the value of Start interval in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box#2

5

Monitor Delay

The time when Absolute time is selected for Monitor start delay

The absolute time specified for Monitor start delay for the original schedule rule, offset by the value of Start interval in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box#2

6

The time when Absolute time is selected for Monitor end delay

The absolute time specified for Monitor end delay for the original schedule rule, offset by the value of Start interval in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box#2

Legend:

--: Not applicable.

#1

When you use a repetition setting to define schedule rules for a nested jobnet, Rule number to link is automatically assigned the same value as Rule number. Amend the value of Rule number to link to match the number of the upper-level jobnet that relates to the particular schedule rule of the nested jobnet.

#2

When the time reaches 47:59, a time of 47:59 is assigned to all schedule rules beyond that time.

Supplementary notes

You can cancel the process of setting a repetition setting by selecting No for Repetition settings in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box, and then clicking the OK button.

Schedule rules generated by a repetition setting start at the time specified by Last start time or earlier. For example, if you use a new schedule rule with a start time of 10:00 as the original schedule rule for the repeating schedule, and specify 60 minutes for Start interval and 13:15 for Last start time in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box, new schedule rules are defined with the start times 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, and 13:00.

6.3.4 Inheriting the schedule rules of an upper-level jobnet

When jobnets are nested, you can define the schedule rules that are identical to those of an upper-level jobnet.

To define the schedule rules identical to those of an upper-level jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window appears.

In the tree area of the Jobnet Editor window, click a nested jobnet and choose Edit and then Schedule.

The Schedule Settings dialog box appears.

In Schedule rules, check Depends on upper-level jobnet.

Schedule rules and buttons are now inactivated and inoperable.

Specify Valid term and Options.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box closes.

Cautionary note

Only schedule rules can inherit the settings of an upper-level jobnet. You need to specify Valid term and Options for each jobnet.

Supplementary note

If the jobnet is the root jobnet, Depends on upper-level jobnet is inactive and inoperable.

6.3.5 Copying the schedule rules from the upper-level jobnet

When jobnets are nested, you can copy the schedule rules from the upper-level jobnet to the lower-level jobnet. The following shows how to copy the schedule rules to a jobnet from its upper-level jobnet.

To copy the schedule rules to the jobnet from the upper-level jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which a schedule needs to be defined.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window appears.

In the tree area of the Jobnet Editor window, click a nested jobnet and choose Edit and then Schedule.

The Schedule Settings dialog box appears.

Click the Copy Upper button.

A message dialog box appears for confirming that the schedule rules of the upper-level jobnet will be copied.

Click the Yes button.

The schedule rules of the upper-level jobnet are copied.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box is closed.

Cautionary notes

If schedule rules have already been set in the jobnet to which you want to copy the schedule rules from the upper-level jobnet, the existing schedule rules are lost.

You cannot copy the following items from the upper-level jobnet:

- Linked rule number in the Schedule rules list

- Exclusive jobnet specified in the Options group with Exclusive schedule check box selected

Supplementary notes

You can click Copy Upper button only when all the following conditions are satisfied:

- The Schedule Settings dialog box was displayed with a lower-level jobnet specified

- Depends on upper-level jobnet is not selected

If Depends on upper-level jobnet is selected in the upper-level jobnet, the schedule rules of the jobnet one level upper are referenced. The upper-level jobnets can be referenced and referenced up to the root jobnet.

6.3.6 Linking the schedule rules of the upper-level jobnet

To link the schedule rules of the upper-level jobnet with a nested jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Schedule Definition.

Schedule Definition is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet of the jobnet for which you want to define a schedule.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Edit, or double-click the root jobnet.

The Jobnet Editor window appears.

In the tree area of the Jobnet Editor window, click the target jobnet and choose Edit and then Schedule.

The Schedule Settings dialog box appears.

Deselect Depends on upper-level jobnet.

In Schedule rules, click the Add button.

The Schedule Rule dialog box appears.

Make definitions in Rule number and Rule number to link.

Rule number

Specify the rule number.

Rule number to link

Specify the rule number of the upper-level jobnet with which the schedule rules are to be associated.

Click the OK button.

The Schedule Settings dialog box closes.

6.4 Checking a defined schedule

This section describes how to check a defined schedule. With this procedure, you can check an execution schedule created from a schedule defined for an unregistered unit in the Monthly Schedule window.

The execution schedule of an unregistered unit will appear only when the following conditions are satisfied:

The version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-10 or later

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is 10-10 or later

The database configuration of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a standard configuration or standard configuration without ISAM

To check the execution schedule of an unregistered unit:

In the tree area or the list area, click the job group that contains the unregistered root jobnet or the unregistered jobnet.

The job group or jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose View and then Monthly Schedule.

The Monthly Schedule window appears.

Note that when you select Schedule Definition in Function Menu, the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window appears.

If you do not see a triangle indicating the execution schedule of an unregistered unit, select View and then Unregistered Schedules.

This operation displays the execution schedule of an unregistered unit marked with a triangle in the Monthly Schedule window. The next time you open the Monthly Schedule window, the execution schedules of unregistered units are automatically displayed. This setting is saved as a common setting for the Monthly Schedule window and the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window.

The following figure shows the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window that is displayed.

Figure 6‒2: Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window

In the schedule area and the execution result list, check the execution schedule.

The following explains the schedule area and execution result list area.

Schedule area

The schedule area displays triangles. Each triangle represents the execution schedule of one generation of a jobnet, and each triangle is displayed with the icon color that indicates not registered (default: None). When you select Display in Hold plan in the Preferences dialog box (General tab), the execution schedule of units for which the hold attribute is set is displayed with the icon color that indicates being held (default: Yellow). You can change the colors of the triangle in the Preferences dialog box. For details on how to change the colors, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

The period for which the execution schedule of unregistered units is displayed starts from the base time of the execution date when the Monthly Schedule window appears, or the execution date when the view is updated. If the start time of the selected jobnet is earlier than the base time of the execution date when the Monthly Schedule window appears or the execution date when the view is updated, the execution schedule is not displayed.

Click the desired triangle in the schedule area, choose View, and then Detailed Information to display the Detailed Schedule dialog box.

By clicking one of the display month change buttons, you can display the information for the previous or next month.

Execution result list

The execution schedule of unregistered units is not displayed in the execution result list by default. For details about how to display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list, see 11.9.8 Displaying the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list.

When you set that the execution schedule of unregistered units is to be displayed, the information of the jobnets or jobs that are being selected in the tree area appears in the execution result list. The information that is displayed includes unit name, start time, end time (always a - (hyphen)), and status (always Not registered).

When you click a triangle in the schedule area, the corresponding line of the information in the execution result list is selected.

When you click the day or week portion of the time area to move the selection frame, the information of all the triangles in the selection frame is displayed in the execution result list.

Example of checking the execution schedule

The following figure shows an example of checking the execution schedule of jobnet net01.

Figure 6‒3: Example of checking the execution schedule of a jobnet

Cautionary notes

When jobnet execution spans two days, the execution status is displayed for the execution start day only. Even if you have set a 48-hour schedule on JP1/AJS3 - Manager and display a jobnet whose execution start time is 24:00 or later, the execution schedule appears on the specified execution day (the first day of execution).

No execution simulation is performed while the execution schedule of unregistered units is displayed. The schedule definition information is displayed as is for the start time or scheduled start time. Even if there is a preceding/succeeding or upper/lower unit relationship, the sequence of the units is not considered. The following shows an example of an execution sequence that does not match the start times.

Figure 6‒4: Example of a schedule definition of preceding and succeeding units and the start time to be calculated

Figure 6‒5: Example of a schedule definition of upper and lower units and the start time to be calculated

Note that even though you select Monthly execution simulation, Simulation, and then Perform on the Schedule tab of the Preferences dialog box in JP1/AJS3 - View, no execution simulation is performed while the execution schedule of unregistered units is displayed.

For details about execution simulation, see 4.4.2(2) Execution simulation in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

To display the execution schedule of unregistered units, you need reference privileges for all of the units listed below. If you do not have reference privileges, the execution schedule is not displayed.

- Selected root jobnet and the following units

- Jobnet specified in Exclusive jobnet of Exclusive schedule in the Schedule Settings dialog box

- Job group specified in Job group name of Refer to a calendar of another job group in the Schedule Settings dialog box

The execution schedule of unregistered units is calculated based on the time zone that is set in the environment variable TZ at JP1/AJS3 service startup. Therefore, when you register a jobnet specifying a time zone that is different from the time zone at JP1/AJS3 service startup, the schedule of the unregistered units does not match the actually registered execution schedule. For details about time zones, see 2.4.1 Time zones in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

When you select a job group containing multiple jobnets and then open the Monthly Schedule window and perform the following operations on only some of the jobnets, only the views of those jobnets on which the operations were performed are updated:

- Changing the definition of the schedule information

- Canceling execution registration for all generations

- Prohibiting execution of all the generations of a root jobnet whose fixed registration has been completed

The execution schedule of a jobnet whose view is updated is displayed from the base time of the execution date on which the operation is performed rather than from the execution date on which the Monthly Schedule window opens.

For example, first suppose that you select a job group containing multiple jobnets for which execution has been registered and open the Monthly Schedule window on January 1. Then suppose that January 3 arrives without the view ever having been updated. When you cancel the execution registration for all the generations of some of the jobnets on January 3, the status of those jobnets changes to Not registered and the execution schedule from January 3 is displayed with a triangle. Also, the execution schedules for January 1 and January 2 are not displayed. However, for other jobnets that are displayed in the same Monthly Schedule window, the execution schedule is displayed from January 1, the date on which you opened the Monthly Schedule window.

When you select a planning group to display the schedule information, the schedule information of units in the planning group is consolidated and displayed in the schedule area and execution result list as described in the following:

- The schedule information of units for which fixed execution has been registered only is included more than once on the same day

Schedule area: A circle indicating fixed execution registration is displayed.

Execution result list: The unit with the latest start time is selected and displayed.

- The schedule information of both unregistered units and units for which fixed execution has been registered is included on the same day

Schedule area: A circle indicating fixed execution registration is displayed.

Execution result list: The unit with the latest start time among the units for which fixed execution has been registered is selected and displayed.

- The schedule information of unregistered units only is included more than once on the same day

Schedule area: A triangle indicating Not registered is displayed.

Execution result list: The unit with the latest start time is selected and displayed.

Supplementary note

If the execution schedules are not displayed in the schedule area, perform the following:

Choose Edit, choose Schedule, and then change the following settings:

- Schedule rule

- Valid term

- Exclusive jobnet

- Refer to a calendar

Choose View and then Refresh to display the latest information.

The information in the Monthly Schedule window is not automatically updated.

To display the information about a month that has an execution schedule, either choose View, Change Display Month, and then Specify Month, or use the display month change buttons.

In the Monthly Schedule window, only the information for one month is displayed. If there are no execution schedules for the displayed period, set the display period to a period that includes the date that the execution schedule was created.

Choose Options, choose Filter, and then select Waiting to execute or Being held.

When you enable filter settings, the execution schedule of unregistered units is also subject to the filtering. If Waiting to execute or Being held has been hidden, the execution schedules might not be displayed.

7 Executing Jobnets

This chapter describes how to register for execution of the jobnets and release the jobnet from registration for execution using JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

7.1 Registering jobnets for execution

Now that a jobnet is defined and the schedule is defined for the jobnet, the next step is to execute the jobnet. To execute a jobnet, you must register the root jobnet for execution. The nested jobnets in the root jobnet are registered for execution at the same time. Nested jobnets alone cannot be registered for execution.

The method of registration for execution depends on how the jobnet is to be executed. There are three methods of registering a jobnet for execution. The following table shows the relationship between the execution methods of jobnets and the registration methods for execution. For jobnet execution, see 4. Executing an Application in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Table 7‒1: Execution methods of jobnets and registration methods for execution

Jobnet execution method

Registration method for execution

To execute a jobnet according to a defined schedule

Planned-execution registration

To execute a jobnet according to a defined scheduled for a specified period of time with certainty

Fixed-execution registration

To invalidate the schedule defined for a jobnet and execute the jobnet immediately

Immediate-execution registration

Cautionary notes

Jobnets other than the root jobnet cannot be registered for execution.

For root jobnets in planning groups, use fixed-execution registration. Registration for planned-execution or immediate-execution registration is unusable for such root jobnets.

If a jobnet is already registered for planned execution and has the next execution schedule, the jobnet cannot be registered for another type of execution.

When the Jobnet Editor window is open and displays the jobnet you want to register for execution, do not select the Exclusive edit check box.

7.1.1 Registering a jobnet for planned execution

The procedure of registering a jobnet for planned execution is described below.

Note that you can also use the ajsentry command to register a jobnet for planned execution. When doing so, make sure that you specify the -s or -f option in the ajsentry command. If you do not specify either of these options, the system assumes the -s option. For details of the command, see the description of the command ajsentry in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To register a jobnet for planned execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Register for Execution.

Register for Execution is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the jobnet you want to register for planned execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose Operations, and then Register for Execution.

The Register for Execution dialog box appears.

You can select multiple root jobnets at a time by clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key or Shift key. Selecting multiple root jobnets like this displays only one Register for Execution dialog box for all the root jobnets you selected.

In Register method, select Planned execution. Define the options for the planned-execution registration as well.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Execution dialog box is closed.

The jobnet is registered for execution. Note that, in step 3, selecting multiple root jobnets causes all the selected root jobnets to be registered for execution with the same settings.

The jobnet execution starts according to the defined schedule.

Supplementary note

You can also open the Register for Execution dialog box from the following windows:

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Monthly Schedule window

7.1.2 Registering a jobnet for fixed execution

The procedure of registering a jobnet for fixed execution is described below.

Note that you can also use the ajsentry command to register a jobnet for fixed execution. Specify one of the following options when you execute the ajsentry command:

-d option

-t option

-b and -e options

-p option

To create the schedule information file that needs to be specified in the -p option, use the ajsschedule command. For details of the command, see the description of the command ajsentry in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To register a jobnet for fixed execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Register for Execution.

Register for Execution is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the jobnet you want to register for fixed execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose Operations, and then Register for Execution.

The Register for Execution dialog box appears.

You can select multiple root jobnets at a time by clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key or Shift key. Selecting multiple root jobnets like this displays only one Register for Execution dialog box for all the root jobnets you selected.

In Register method, select Fixed execution. Define the options for the fixed-execution registration as well.

For a root jobnet in a planning group, be sure to specify Fixed schedule period. Do not specify Future generation.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Execution dialog box is closed.

The jobnet is registered for execution. Note that, in step 3, selecting multiple root jobnets causes all the selected root jobnets to be registered for execution with the same settings.

The jobnet execution starts according to the defined schedule.

Supplementary notes

You can also open the Register for Execution dialog box from the following windows:

- Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

- Monthly Schedule window

If an attempt is made to register the period that exceeds n months for Fixed schedule period, a warning message appears when you click the OK button. You can set any number for n. For further details, see 12.3.22 Register for Execution dialog box. Note that the default is Unlimited.

7.1.3 Registering a jobnet for immediate execution

The procedure of registering a jobnet for immediate execution is described below.

You can also use the ajsentry command to register a jobnet for immediate execution. When doing so, make sure that you specify the -n option in the ajsentry command. For details of the command, see the description of the command ajsentry in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To register a jobnet for immediate execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Register for Execution.

Register for Execution is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the jobnet you want to register for immediate execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose Operations, and then Register for Execution.

The Register for Execution dialog box appears.

You can select multiple root jobnets at a time by clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key or Shift key. Selecting multiple root jobnets like this displays only one Register for Execution dialog box for all the root jobnets you selected.

In Register method, select Immediate execution. Define the options of immediate execution registration as well.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Execution dialog box is closed.

The jobnet is registered for execution. Note that, in step 3, selecting multiple root jobnets causes all the selected root jobnets to be registered for execution with the same settings.

When you use a start condition, the jobnet immediately begins to wait for the start condition. If you do not use a start condition, the jobnet execution starts immediately.

Cautionary note

In JP1/AJS3, if a jobnet is not scheduled to be executed again, you can register that jobnet for execution multiple times. A jobnet registered for immediate execution is not scheduled to be executed again, so you can re-register the jobnet for execution even if the jobnet has already been registered for immediate execution.

Supplementary note

You can also open the Register for Execution dialog box from the following windows:

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Monthly Schedule window

7.2 Specifying macro variables during registration for execution

This section describes how to specify macro variables during registration for execution.

You can also specify macro variables by using the ajsentry command, instead of using the procedure described in this section. For details about this command, see ajsentry in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To specify macro variables during registration for execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Register for Execution.

Register for Execution is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that will manage the jobnet you want to register for execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose Operations, and then Register for Execution.

The Register for Execution dialog box appears.

You can select multiple root jobnets at a time by clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key or Shift key. Selecting multiple root jobnets like this displays only one Register for Execution dialog box for all the root jobnets you selected.

Specify the registration method and options.

Click the Pass Info button.

The Passing Information dialog box appears, and displays a list of passing information for the selected jobnets. For jobnets with no passing information, the column for this list is blank.

Do either of the following:

If you want to add passing information:

Click the Add button.

If you want to change or delete the passing information:

Select the applicable passing information, and click the Change button or Delete button.

When the Add or Change button is clicked, the Register Passing Information dialog box appears.

If you have clicked the Add button or Change button, in the Register Passing Information dialog box, enter the name of a macro variable in the Variable text box and the passing information in the Passing Info text box.

For Variable, you can click the ... button to display the Variables Used dialog box, which lets you select a macro variable.

Click the OK button.

The Register Passing Information dialog box closes.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Execution dialog box closes.

The jobnets are registered for execution. If multiple root jobnets were selected in step 3, all of them are registered for execution with the same settings.

Supplementary notes

You can also specify macro variables in the Register for Execution dialog box that you open from either of the following windows:

- Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

- Monthly Schedule window

You cannot specify macro variables when registering a remote jobnet for execution.

You can also specify a macro variable in the Add dialog box (for root jobnets).

7.3 Releasing the jobnet from registration for execution

The procedure of releasing the jobnet from registration for execution is as follows.

To release the jobnet from registration for execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Cancel Registration.

Cancel Registration is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet you want to release from registration for execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose Operations, and then Cancel Registration.

The Cancel Registration dialog box appears.

You can select multiple root jobnets at a time by clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key or Shift key. Selecting multiple root jobnets like this displays only one Register for Execution dialog box for all the root jobnets you selected.

Click Cancel method.

If you select Specify period, specify the period for canceling registration.

Click the OK button.

The Cancel Registration dialog box closes.

The jobnet is released from registration for execution. Note that, in step 3, selecting multiple root jobnets causes all the selected root jobnets to be registered for execution with the same settings.

Cautionary notes

You cannot directly release the registration for execution of nested jobnets. If you want to release the registration for execution of a nested jobnet, release the registration for execution of the root jobnet.

If a jobnet is being executed or monitored, it cannot be released from registration for execution.

Supplementary notes

You can also open the Cancel Registration dialog box from the following windows:

- Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

- Monthly Schedule window

At a jobnet distribution destination, when you restore a distributed jobnet, release the jobnet from registration for execution and then restore the jobnet.

If you want to release the registration for execution of a jobnet with a start condition when the jobnet has already started, first forcibly end the execution of its root jobnet in the Now monitoring or Now running status (check the execution result list in the Monthly Schedule window). Then release the registration for execution of the jobnet with the start condition.

8 Checking the Execution Schedule and Execution Status of a Jobnet and Jobs

This chapter describes how to monitor jobnets and jobs by JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

8.1 Overview of monitoring jobnets and jobs

This section describes how to check the execution status of a jobnet and jobs.

When you register a jobnet for execution, you can check the execution schedule and the execution status of the jobnet by days or by months. If the jobnet is already started, you can also check the progress, the execution start time, and the execution end time as well as the execution status. Likewise, you can check the execution schedule and the execution status of the jobs in a jobnet that is registered for execution. On this occasion, status-specific colors indicate the execution schedule and the execution status of the jobs.

You can use the map area to check the execution status of a jobnet and jobs (in the same format as when the jobnet was defined).

You can also use the ajsshow command to check the execution schedule and the execution status of a jobnet and jobs. For details of the command, see the description of ajsshow in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

For monitoring jobnets and jobs, see 6. Monitoring Applications in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary note

The windows display the information about jobnets and jobs current at the instant the information is obtained. If the status of a jobnet or job changes while the system is obtaining the information, the displayed information might be inconsistent with the current status of the jobnet or job, or an error might occur. In such cases, update the display of the applicable window or re-execute the ajsshow command.

8.2 Checking jobnet details

To check jobnet details:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), in the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose details you want to check.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

In the list area, click the jobnet whose details you want to check.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Click the Show button.

The detailed information area displays the information about the generations of the jobnet you selected in step 3.

In the detailed information area, check the details about the jobnet.

The detailed information area displays the following generations:

The generations to be executed on the current day

The generation that ended last of the generations executed on the previous day or earlier

The generation to be executed first of the generations to be executed on the next day and later (not including dummy schedules)

The generations whose status is Shutdown

For details about the columns displayed in the detailed information area, see 12.3.1 Configuration of the window.

For details about the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and the basics of how to use the window, also see 4.2 Window types and basic operations.

8.3 Monitoring the progress

This section describes how to check the progress of root jobnets, root remote jobnets, or planning groups on a monitoring day.

To check the progress:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Summary Monitor.

Summary Monitor is now selected.

The JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) appears.

Click the Setting button.

The Monitoring Unit Select dialog box appears.

In the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box, in Selectable units, click the plus sign (+) on the left of the job group that manages the jobnet whose progress you want to check.

The jobnets under the job group appear.

Select a monitored jobnet, and then click the Add button.

The jobnet is displayed in Monitored units. You can add a jobnet that belongs to a different scheduler service or a different level. When you select a job group and click the Add button, the jobnets and planning groups immediately below the selected job group appear in Monitored units.

Click the OK button.

The Monitoring Unit Select dialog box closes.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), the summary list displays the information about the selected jobnet.

In the summary list, check the progress of the jobnet.

The following explains the information that appears in the summary list columns.

End time (schd.)

The End time (schd.) column displays the scheduled end date and time, which is calculated based on the preceding and succeeding relations of the subordinate units and the average of past execution times. A simulation is performed to determine the scheduled end date and time.

To calculate the scheduled end date and time for a jobnet that has never ended normally, the system uses the time specified in First execution time in Execution time on the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box. For details about how to specify a value in First execution time in the Preferences dialog box, see 11.4.13 Specifying the first execution time.

If multiple generations are scheduled to be executed on a monitoring day, a simulation is performed for each generation. The End time (schd.) column in this case displays the simulated scheduled end date and time that is furthest into the future.

Note that these simulations do not take into account the execution time of a jobnet connected to a jobnet connector, the hold time of a jobnet, and the delay for an execution generation whose start condition has been established. Also note that the simulation for determining the scheduled end date and time of a release-target jobnet does not inherit any information about the release-source jobnet.

Progress

The progress (in %) is calculated as follows:

Progress = (Number of all units that have ended) / (Number of units to be executed on the monitoring day) x 100

Number of all units that have ended means the number of executed units appearing in the Result/Schedule column. Number of units to be executed on the monitoring day means the number of units that are scheduled to be executed, as indicated in the Result/Schedule column.

You can select the unit status that determines ended from the Progress drop-down list.

When multiple generations are scheduled to be executed on the monitoring day, the progress is calculated based on the number of all generations that are scheduled to be executed.

Status category

The status category columns indicate the status categories of subordinate units.

When multiple generations are scheduled to be executed on the monitoring day, the column displays the status categories of all the generations.

For details about the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) and the basics of how to use the window, also see 4.2 Window types and basic operations.

Cautionary notes

If you want to specify a day other the day that JP1/AJS3 - View starts as the monitoring day, specify a date in the Day for Monitor boxes. However, if automatic update is performed while you are changing the monitoring day, the summary list might display information for an unexpected day. To prevent this problem, before you change the monitoring day, select the Pause of automatic update check box beforehand to temporarily stop automatic update.

If the root jobnet or planning group to be monitored contains a unit for which you do not have access permission, the system removes the root jobnet or planning group from the monitoring targets. To prevent this problem, obtain view permission for the unit to be monitored and all the subordinate units.

Supplementary notes

If you frequently update the window, server load increases rapidly. To reduce load, select the Pause of automatic update check box to temporarily stop automatic update.

You can specify a maximum of 100 units as monitoring targets. You can also change this value. For details about how to change the maximum number, see 11.4.14 Changing the maximum number of units to be monitored.

If you suspend a monitored root jobnet, add a unit under it or delete a unit from it, the added or deleted unit is not monitored.

You can upload the information about the units added to the summary list to the common user profiles for use as the common settings for JP1 users. JP1 users can download the common user profiles. For details about common user profiles, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

8.4 Monitoring jobnets and jobs on a daily basis

This section describes how to check the execution schedules or execution status of jobnets and jobs on a daily basis.

To monitor a jobnet or job on a daily basis:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose execution schedule or execution status you want to check.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy or All Jobs.

If you want to check a jobnet or job:

Choose Hierarchy to display the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

If you want to check all the jobs in a jobnet:

Choose All Jobs to display the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

The following figures show the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window and Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

Figure 8‒1: Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Figure 8‒2: Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

In the schedule area and the execution result list, check the execution schedule and the execution status of the jobnet and jobs.

The following explains the schedule area and execution result list.

The schedule area contains colored marks (rectangles). Each colored mark represents the execution of one generation of a jobnet or job. The colored marks provide the following types of information:

- Left and right edges: Indicate the execution start time and execution end time.

- Length: Indicates the length of the execution time.

- Color: Indicates the status of jobnet or job execution.

For details about the meaning of the colors, see 12.7 Daily Schedule window. You can change the colors of the marks in the Preferences dialog box. For details on how to change the colors, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

The execution result list displays the information about a jobnet or a job (name, execution start time, execution end time, execution schedule or execution status) selected in the tree area. The execution result list displays all the information of the colored marks within the selection frame in the schedule area. When you click a colored mark, the corresponding information line in the execution result list is selected.

When you click a date or a time, the information about all the colored marks in the selection frame is displayed.

You can move the selection frame in the schedule area to display the information of the past and the future. To move the selection frame, click the mouse button at the position you want the selection frame to be.

By clicking one of the display date change buttons, you can display information for the previous or next day.

You can check the schedule of each execution generation. Click the desired colored mark in the schedule area or the desired line in the execution result list, and choose View and then Detailed Information to display the Detailed Schedule dialog box.

If multiple instances of the same jobnet are running simultaneously (concurrent execution), the colored marks overlap in the schedule area.

If the start of execution is delayed or the end of execution is delayed, the upper and bottom lines of the colored mark in the schedule area are displayed in bold.

Example of checking the execution schedule and execution status

The following figure shows an example of checking the execution schedule and execution status of jobnet net01.

Figure 8‒3: Example of checking the execution schedule and execution status of a jobnet (by days)

Cautionary note

When a jobnet is registered for planned execution or registered for fixed execution with the number of future generations specified, the system creates and displays a dummy schedule for the jobnet. You cannot change the dates or times in the dummy schedule. Also note that the system ignores the following settings you specify on the Definition page of the Define Details dialog box for dummy schedules:

Concurrent exec. (the system assumes Enable)

Schedule option (the system assumes Multi-schedule)

If the system is unable to predict when an event job will start, it assumes that there is no wait time.

Note that the execution result list does not display dummy schedules.

Supplementary note

If the execution schedule and the execution status are not displayed in the schedule area or the execution result area, perform the following:

Chose View and then Refresh to display the latest information.

The contents of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window are updated at the interval specified in the Refresh Interval dialog box. Even if the contents are automatically updated, the contents are updated every 30 seconds at least. Therefore, if there is information about a jobnet that was registered for execution immediately before or the schedule information was changed immediately before, the new information may not be reflected in the window.

Choose View and then Resize to increase the display width of one hour or change the time display from 24 hours to 48 hours.

If you select Small for Width in the Resize dialog box, the colored marks displayed in the schedule area may be difficult to see when you execute a short jobnet more than once within an hour.

When the execution start time is after 24:00, the execution schedule and the execution status are not displayed in the 24-hour display. When you specify the execution start time using a relative time, use the 48-hour display.

To display the information about a day that has an execution schedule, either choose View, Change Display Date, and then Specify Day, or use the display date change buttons.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window normally displays the information for the current day. Execution schedule and execution status of 24 hours or 48 hours from the base time defined in the job group containing the target jobnet. If there is no execution schedule for the current day, the execution schedule is not displayed on the window. Therefore, on the window you need to display the information for a day that has an execution schedule.

8.5 Monitoring jobnets and jobs on a monthly basis

To check the execution schedule and execution status of a jobnet and jobs in units of months:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose execution schedule or execution status you want to check.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, and then Monthly Schedule.

The following Monthly Schedule window appears.

Figure 8‒4: Monthly Schedule window

In the schedule area and the execution result list, check the execution schedule and the execution status of the jobnet and jobs.

The following explains the schedule area and execution result list area.

The schedule area displays colored marks (rectangles and circles). Each colored mark represents the execution of one generation of a jobnet. A rectangle appears when the jobnet is registered for planned execution or immediate execution. A circle appears when the jobnet is registered for fixed execution. The colors of colored marks indicate the execution schedule and execution status of the jobnet. The color of a rectangle or circle indicates the execution schedule and execution status of the jobnet. For details about the meaning of the colors, see 12.7 Daily Schedule window. You can change the colors of the marks in the Preferences dialog box. For details on how to change the colors, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

If a single jobnet is executed more than once in a day, the colored mark in the schedule area indicates the status of the last execution generation on that day.

The execution result list displays the information about a jobnet or a job (name, execution start time, execution end time, execution schedule or execution status) selected in the tree area. When you click a colored mark, the corresponding information line in the execution result list is selected.

When you click a date or a day of the week, the information about all the colored marks in the selection frame is displayed.

You can move the selection frame in the schedule area to display the information of the past and the future. To move the selection frame, click the mouse button at the position you want the selection frame to be.

By clicking one of the display month change buttons, you can display the information for the previous or next month.

You can check the schedule of each execution generation. Click the desired colored mark in the schedule area or the desired line in the execution result list, choose View, and then Detailed Information to display the Detailed Schedule dialog box.

If execution start or execution end is delayed, the frame of the corresponding colored mark in the schedule area becomes bold.

Example of checking the execution schedule and execution status

The following figure shows an example of checking the execution schedule and execution status of jobnet net01.

Figure 8‒5: Example of checking the execution schedule and execution status of a jobnet (by months)

Cautionary notes

When jobnet execution spans two days, the execution status is displayed for the execution start day only. Even if you have set a 48-hour schedule on JP1/AJS3 - Manager and display a jobnet whose execution start time is 24:00 or later, the execution schedule appears on the specified open day (the first day of execution). If you want to check the status of a unit in such a case, use the Daily Schedule window.

When a jobnet is registered for planned execution or a jobnet is registered for fixed execution with the number of future generations specified, the system creates and displays a dummy schedule for the jobnet. You cannot change the dates or times in the dummy schedule. Also note that the system ignores the following settings you specify on the Definition page of the Define Details dialog box for dummy schedules:

- Concurrent exec. (the system assumes Enable)

- Schedule option (the system assumes Multi-schedule)

If the system is unable to predict when an event job will start, it assumes that there is no wait time.

Note that the execution result list does not display dummy schedules.

Supplementary note

If the execution schedule and the execution status are not displayed in the schedule area or the execution result area, perform the following:

Choose View and then Refresh to display the latest information.

The information in the Monthly Schedule window is not automatically updated.

To display the information about a month that has an execution schedule, either choose View, Change Display Month, and then Specify Month, or use the display month change buttons.

The Monthly Schedule window usually displays the information about the current month. Specifically, the Monthly Schedule window displays the execution schedules and execution status of a jobnet from the base day defined for the job group containing the target jobnet to the end of the current month. If there is no execution schedule of the current month, the execution schedule is not displayed on the window. Therefore, the information about the month with the execution schedule needs to be displayed on the window.

8.6 Monitoring jobnets and jobs in a map

You can check the execution schedules or execution status of jobnets and jobs in the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window in the same way that you define jobnets and jobs.

Use one of the following methods to display the Jobnet Monitor window:

From the JP1/AJS3 - View window

If you want to check the status of a jobnet currently being executed, the next execution schedule of a jobnet, or the execution result of a jobnet, open the Jobnet Monitor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

By using the ajs command

If you want to check the status of a jobnet currently being executed, the next execution schedule of a jobnet, or the execution result of a jobnet, open the Jobnet Monitor window by using the ajs command.

From the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window

If you want to check the execution schedules after the next schedule or the past results of jobnet execution, open the Jobnet Monitor window from the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window.

The following explains each method.

To display the Jobnet Monitor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window

To display the Jobnet Monitor window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the applicable jobnet.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Jobnet Monitor, and then Status or Result.

To check the status of the jobnet being executed or the next execution schedule of the jobnet, choose Status. To check the result of the jobnet that is already executed, choose Result.

The following Jobnet Monitor window appears.

Figure 8‒6: Jobnet Monitor window

In the map area and list area, check the execution status or other information about the jobnet or job.

For details about the meanings of the colors of the icons in the map area, see 12.9 Jobnet Monitor window and 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box. You can change the colors of the icons in the Preferences dialog box.

The list area displays information about the jobs and jobnets that are displayed in the map area (name, comment, unit type, execution status, and delay status). The unit highlighted in the map area is always the same as the unit highlighted in the list area.

To minimize the list area, choose View, List Area, and then Minimum. To restore the minimized list area to the original size, choose View, List Area, and then Restore.

If you double-click a job or jobnet in the map area or list area, the Monitor Details dialog box appears. Note, however, that if you double-click a nested jobnet in the map area, the map area displays the units under the nested jobnet you clicked.

To display the Jobnet Monitor window by executing a command:

ajs [-a login-information-file-name]
    {-l execution-ID | -m { state|result }}
    -n fully-qualified-jobnet-or-job-name
    -v monitor

For login-information-file-name, specify the user name entered in the Login screen, password, and the name of the login information file in which the name of the host to connect has been specified. For execution-ID, specify the execution ID of the generation to be displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window. For state|result, specify the status of the jobnet to be displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window. For fully-qualified-jobnet-or-job-name, specify the fully qualified jobnet or job name to be displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window.

For details of the command, see the description of ajs in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To display the Jobnet Monitor window from the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window

To display the Jobnet Monitor window:

Display the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window.

Colored marks are displayed in the schedule area. Each colored mark represents the execution of one generation of a jobnet or job.

Change the displayed time period as necessary.

To change the displayed time period to the time period for which you want to check the execution status, either choose View and then Change Display Date or Change Display Month, or else use the display date change buttons or display month change buttons.

In the schedule area, click the colored mark representing the schedule whose execution status you want to check.

The schedule of the colored mark you clicked appears in the execution result list.

If the colored mark represents a dummy schedule, the execution result list does not include schedule information.

In the execution result list, click the schedule you want to check.

The line for the schedule is now selected.

Choose View and then Jobnet Monitor.

The Jobnet Monitor window appears. In the map area and list area, check the execution status of the jobnet or job.

Supplementary note

When you open the Jobnet Monitor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or with the ajs command, you cannot check the next execution schedule in the following cases:

When there is a jobnet displayed as executing, monitoring, or suspended for re-execution in Status in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

When today's schedule is to be displayed#, and if jobnets of the day have been executed and finished and jobnets to be executed next are scheduled to be executed on the next day or later. Alternatively, when there is neither schedule to be handled on the day nor results returned on the day, and if jobnets to be executed next are scheduled to be executed on the next day or later.

#

If you want to display the current day's schedule, specify this in the VIEWSTATUSRANGE environment setting parameter.

For details, see 20.4 Setting up the scheduler service environment in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

To check the next execution schedule, do either of the following:

Redisplay the Jobnet Monitor window.

Display the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box).

The procedure for each method is as follows.

Redisplaying the Jobnet Monitor window

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose next execution schedule you want to check.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet, choose View, Jobnet Monitor, and then Next schedule.

The Jobnet Monitor window appears.

Displaying the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box)

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose next execution schedule you want to check.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet, choose View, Detailed Information, and then Next Schedule.

The Jobnet Monitor window appears.

The Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box) appears. In the Scheduled start time, you can check the next execution schedule.

9 Controlling the Execution of a Jobnet and Jobs

This chapter describes operation in JP1/AJS3 - View after registering jobnet execution registration. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

9.1 Controlling the execution of a jobnet and jobs

Even after you start executing a jobnet, you can change the schedule of the jobnet or control the execution of the jobnet or jobs. For example, if you find an abnormality while you are monitoring the execution status, you can interrupt the execution of the jobnet or kill the jobnet. When you interrupt or kill a jobnet, you can re-execute from the desired jobnet or job.

The following table lists the types of control available for jobnets and jobs.

Table 9‒1: Available control

No.

Type of control

Jobnet

Job

1

Add an execution schedule

Yes

No

2

Temporarily change or restore the execution start time

Yes

No

3

Immediately execute an execution schedule

Yes

No

4

Temporarily cancel execution

Yes

Yes

5

Hold execution or release held execution

Yes

Yes

6

Apply or undo temporary changes to delay monitoring times

Yes

No

7

Temporarily change the execution priority

Yes

No

8

Interrupt execution

Yes

No

9

Kill execution

Yes

Yes

10

Re-execute

Yes

Yes

11

Change status

No

Yes

12

Change registered definitions

Yes

Yes

13

Switch definitions of a running job according to a plan

Yes

No

14

Change the execution order control method

Yes

No

15

Temporarily enable or disable wait conditions

Yes

Yes

16

Re-execute temporary changes

Yes

Yes

Legend:

Yes: Controllable

No: Not controllable

This section describes how to change the schedule of jobnets and control the execution of jobnets and jobs. Although the description mainly covers the operation using the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, the same operation may sometimes be available from other windows. For details, see Supplementary note.

Some of the above operations cannot be performed from the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window. A description of how to perform these operations is given in the appropriate section below.

Cautionary note

You can control the execution of jobnets and jobs by changing the unit definition in the Define Details dialog box after the unit has been registered for execution. However, changes to certain units might not take effect depending on the status of the root jobnet. For details, see 7.4 Changing the unit definition information during registration for execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Administration Guide.

9.2 Adding an execution schedule for a jobnet

This subsection describes the procedure for adding a fixed schedule for the root jobnet.

You can also use the ajsentry command to add an execution schedule for the root jobnet. You can use the ajsplan command to add an execution schedule for a jobnet other than the root jobnet. For details about the commands, see the description of ajsentry in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference and of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To add a fixed schedule for a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet to which you want to add an execution schedule.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target root jobnet.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Operations and then Add.

The Add dialog box appears.

Add the execution schedule of the root jobnet.

Click the OK button.

The Add dialog box is closed.

A new execution schedule is added for the root jobnet.

In the schedule area, a colored mark appears at the time and date specified in step 6. The colored mark is displayed in pale blue (default), which indicates the execution start wait status.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary note

You can add an execution-scheduled generation to a root jobnet only if the root jobnet is registered for fixed execution, or if the root jobnet is registered for planned execution and the status of the jobnet is Not sched. to exe.. The schedule definitions for the added execution schedule are ignored for both the root jobnet and its nested jobnets. If you add an execution schedule for a jobnet with a start condition, the jobnet is immediately executed without monitoring for the start condition.

Supplementary note

You can also add an execution schedule for a jobnet in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Monthly Schedule window

9.3 Temporarily changing and restoring the execution start time of a jobnet

This subsection describes the procedures for temporarily changing and restoring the execution start time of a jobnet.

You can also use the ajsplan command to temporarily change and restore the execution start time of a jobnet. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

9.3.1 Changing the execution start time of a jobnet

To change the execution start time of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet for which you want to change the execution start time.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the jobnet selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose execution start time you want to change. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line whose execution start time you want to change.

Choose Operations, Change Plan, and then Change Time.

The Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box appears.

Change the execution start time of the jobnet.

Click the OK button.

The Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box is closed.

The execution start time of the jobnet is temporarily changed.

The colored mark in the schedule area moves to the time and date specified in step 7. The colored mark is displayed in pale blue (default), which indicates the execution start wait status.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

For details about how to temporarily change the execution start time of a jobnet, see 4.5.3 Temporarily changing the execution start time of a jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

You can change the execution start time only for jobnets whose status is Wait for start time, Wait for prev. to end, or Being held (that is, jobnets that have not started yet). If you change the execution start time of a completed jobnet, the change will apply when the jobnet is re-executed.

You can also use the ajsplan command to change the execution start time of a completed jobnet, specifying the jobnet's execution ID or execution registration number.

You cannot perform the following operations for a release-target jobnet:

- Change the execution start time defined for a jobnet in Being applied status to a time later than the release date.

- Change the execution start time defined for a jobnet in Release wait status to a time before the release date.

If you have created schedules in a 48-hour schedule and want to change the execution start time of a root jobnet to 24:00 or later, specify the desired time in absolute time in the Specify date and time in the Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box. With this specification, the execution start time is considered to be within the current day. If you change the execution start time of a root jobnet to 24:00 or later by specifying the desired time in relative time, the system assumes that the execution start time belongs to the next day's schedule.

If you use a 48-hour schedule to define the schedule of a root jobnet and have set a time other than 0:00 as the base time, JP1/AJS3 operation becomes complicated. For example, the specified date and time and the date and time on JP1/AJS3 might not match, or the time specifications might not be in chronological order. Caution is required. For details, see 3.3.2(1)(a) Setting the execution start time in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Supplementary note

You can also change the execution start time of a jobnet in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

9.3.2 Restoring the changed execution start time of a jobnet

To restore the changed execution start time of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet for which you want to restore the previous execution start time.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the jobnet selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose changed execution start time you want to restore. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line of which changed execution start time you want to restore.

Choose Operations, Change Plan, and then Release Change.

A dialog box appears to confirm that the changed execution start time of the jobnet can be restored.

Click the Yes button.

The changed execution start time of the jobnet is restored.

The colored mark in the schedule area moves back to the original position before the change.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary note

You cannot perform the following operations for a release-target jobnet:

Cancel a changed execution start time defined for a jobnet in Being applied status, and then specify an execution start time that is later than the release date.

Cancel a changed execution start time defined for the jobnet in Release wait status, and then specify an execution start time that is earlier than the release date.

Supplementary note

You can also restore the previous execution start time of a jobnet in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

9.4 Immediately executing the execution schedule of a jobnet

This section describes how to immediately execute a jobnet whose status is Wait for start time.

A jobnet can be executed by ajsplan command immediately. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

You can also use the ajsplan command to immediately execute a jobnet.

To enable immediate execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet you want to execute immediately.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the jobnet selected in step 4, click the colored mark that you want to execute immediately. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line that you want to execute immediately.

Choose Operations, Change Plan, and then Execute Immediately.

The Immediate Execution dialog box appears.

Specify how to handle the nested jobnets when the jobnet is immediately executed.

Click the OK button.

The Immediate Execution dialog box is closed.

The jobnet is executed immediately.

If you specify that a schedule is to be added in step 7, a colored mark is added in the schedule area and the colored mark is displayed in green (default) which indicates that the jobnet is being executed. If you specify that a schedule is to be moved in step 7, the colored mark (in the schedule area) of the time and date specified in step 5 is moved to the current time and displayed in green (default) which indicates that the jobnet is being executed.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

For details about how to immediately execute a jobnet in Wait for start time status, see 4.5.4 Executing a registered jobnet immediately in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

A manipulated nested jobnet is immediately executed when another execution condition is satisfied, for example, when the upper-level jobnet begins to be executed or the preceding job or jobnet is terminated.

You can immediately execute jobnets whose status is Wait for star time, Wait for prev. to end, or Being held (that is, jobnets that have not started yet). If the jobnet has completed, immediate execution will apply when the jobnet is re-executed.

You can also use the ajsplan command to immediately execute a completed jobnet, specifying the jobnet's execution ID or execution registration number.

If the target of the operation is a release-target jobnet, you can execute immediately only a definition whose release status is Being applied.

Immediate execution is performed at the date and time for which immediate execution is specified even if the 48-hour schedule is used in defining the schedule of a root jobnet. For example, if you immediately execute an execution schedule of 34:00 on August 1 at 8:00 on August 2, the schedule is executed as 8:00 on August 2, not as 32:00 on August 1.

Supplementary notes

The same result can be obtained by setting the execution start time of the jobnet to the current time instead of enabling immediate execution of the jobnet.

You can also immediately execute a jobnet in Wait for start time status in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

9.5 Temporarily canceling the execution of jobnets and jobs

This section describes how to temporarily cancel the execution schedule of a jobnet or job.

You can also use the ajsplan command to temporarily cancel the execution of a jobnet or job. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To temporarily cancel execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet or job whose execution you want to cancel.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet or the jobnet that manages the target job, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet or job.

The jobnet or job you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet or job you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to cancel execution. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to cancel execution.

Choose Operations, Change Plan, and then Execution Prohibited.

A confirmation dialog box asking whether you want to cancel the execution of the jobnet or job appears.

Click the Yes button.

The execution of the jobnet or job is temporarily canceled.

For the root jobnet:

If planned execution is registered, the current execution generation is deleted (the colored mark representing the current execution generation is deleted). The deleted execution ID is assigned to the next execution generation.

If fixed execution is registered, the next fixed schedule is deleted (the colored mark representing the execution generation of the fixed schedule is deleted).

For nested jobnets or jobs:

The colored marks in the schedule area are deleted.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary notes

You can cancel execution only for jobnets whose status is Wait for start time, Wait for prev. to end, or Being held (that is, jobnets that have not started yet). If you cancel execution of a completed jobnet, the jobnet will not run when re-executed.

You can also use the ajsplan command to cancel the execution of a completed jobnet, specifying the jobnet's execution ID or execution registration number.

When you cancel execution of a jobnet, communications are exchanged and the database in JP1/AJS3 is updated. Therefore, if you select many jobnets and cancel execution all of them at one time, the overall burden on JP1/AJS3 is severe, and is likely to adversely affect operation due to processing delays and other problems. If you need to cancel executions of multiple jobnets, cancel them one by one at intervals of several seconds to several minutes.

Supplementary notes

You can also cancel the execution of a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

You can also cancel the execution of a job in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

9.6 Holding the execution of jobnets and jobs

This section describes how to hold the execution of jobnets and jobs, and cancel the held execution of jobnets and jots.

Note that you can also use the ajsplan command to hold the execution of jobnets and jobs or cancel the held execution of jobnets and jobs. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

9.6.1 Holding the execution of jobnets and jobs

To hold the execution of a jobnet or job:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet or job whose execution you want to hold.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet or the jobnet that manages the target job, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet or job.

The jobnet or job you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet or job you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to hold execution. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to hold execution.

Choose Operations, Change Hold Attribute, and then Hold.

A confirmation dialog box asking whether you want to hold the execution of the jobnet or job appears.

Click the Yes button.

The hold attribute is set for the jobnet or job.

When the jobnet or job is executed, the corresponding colored mark in the schedule area appears in yellow (default color that indicates hold status).

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Supplementary notes

You can hold the execution of jobnets and jobs whose status is Wait for start time (that is, jobnets and jobs that have not started yet). When you temporarily specify the hold attribute for a jobnet or job that has ended execution or cancel the hold attribute, the change becomes effective the next time the jobnet or job is executed. For details, see 4.5.6 Temporarily changing the hold attribute of a job or jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You can also hold the execution of a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

You can also hold the execution of a job in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

9.6.2 Canceling the held execution of jobnets and jobs

To cancel the held execution of a jobnet or job:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet or job for which you want to cancel held execution.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet or the jobnet that manages the target job, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet or job.

The jobnet or job you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet or job you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to cancel held execution. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to cancel held execution.

Choose Operations, Change Hold Attribute, and then Hold-Release.

A confirmation dialog box asking whether you want to cancel the held execution of the jobnet or job appears.

Click the Yes button.

The jobnet or job is released from held status.

The colored mark in the schedule area indicates the executing status if the execution start condition is satisfied. The colored mark indicates the waiting status if the execution start condition is not satisfied. However, a time lag may occur.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Supplementary notes

You can also cancel the held execution of a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

You can also cancel the held execution of a job in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

9.7 Temporarily changing the delay monitor date and time of jobnets

This subsection describes the procedure for temporarily changing the delayed start monitor time and date and the delayed end monitor time and date defined for jobnets.

You can also use the ajsplan command to temporarily change the delay monitor time and date of jobnets. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To temporarily change the delay monitor time and date:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet for which you want to change the date and time that delay detection starts.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the job selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose delay monitor time and date you want to change. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line whose delay monitor time and date you want to change.

In the Operations menu, choose Change Delay Monitor.

The Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box appears.

Change the delay monitor time and date for the start of the jobnet execution and the delay monitor time and date for the end of the jobnet execution.

Click the OK button.

The Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box is closed.

The delay monitor time and date is temporarily changed.

Cautionary note

You can change the delay monitor date and time of jobnets only.

Supplementary notes

You can also change the delay monitor date and time for jobnets in the following windows:

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

Delay monitor can also be started according to required execution time. To specify the start of delay monitor according to required execution time, use Monitor jobnet in the Define Details dialog box. For details, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

9.8 Temporarily changing the execution priority of jobnets

This subsection describes the procedure for temporarily changing the execution priory of jobnets.

You can also use the ajsplan command to temporarily change the execution priority of jobnets. For details of the command, see the description of ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To temporarily change the priority of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose execution priority you want to change.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the jobnet selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose execution priority you want to change. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line whose execution priority you want to change.

In the Operations menu, choose Change Priority.

The Change Priority dialog box appears.

Change the execution priority of the jobnet.

Click the OK button.

The Change Priority dialog box is closed.

The execution priority of the jobnet is temporarily changed.

Cautionary note

You can change the execution priority of jobnets only.

Supplementary note

You can also change the execution priority of a jobnet in the following windows:

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

9.9 Interrupting a jobnet being executed

This subsection describes the procedure for interrupting a jobnet being executed.

You can also use the ajsintrpt command to interrupt the execution of a jobnet. For details of the command, see the description of ajsintrpt in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To interrupt the execution of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose execution you want to interrupt.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target jobnet, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target root jobnet.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the root jobnet selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose execution you want to interrupt. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line whose execution you want to interrupt.

Choose Operations and then Interrupt.

A message dialog box appears to confirm that the execution of the jobnet can be interrupted.

Click the Yes button.

The execution of the jobnet is interrupted.

The colored mark in the schedule area is displayed in pale red (default), which indicates the interrupted status.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary notes

You can interrupt only the jobnets being executed.

When you interrupt a jobnet, communications are exchanged and the database in JP1/AJS3 is updated. Therefore, if you select many jobnets and interrupt all of them at one time, the overall burden on JP1/AJS3 is severe, and is likely to adversely affect operation due to processing delays and other problems. If you want to interrupt multiple jobnets, insert a pause of a few seconds to a few minutes after each jobnet interruption.

Note that when you interrupt a jobnet containing many event jobs or interrupt multiple jobnets containing event jobs at one time, the restrictions set for successive execution of the ajsintrpt command take effect for the number of event jobs ending due to interruptions. For details, see B.8 Limits for the event/action control in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

Supplementary notes

If there is an executing job when the interrupt for the jobnet execution is requested, the jobnet is interrupted after the execution of the job ends.

You can also interrupt the execution of a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

For details on how to re-execute an interrupted jobnet, see 9.11 Re-executing jobnets and jobs.

9.10 Killing the jobnets and the jobs being executed

This subsection describes the procedure for killing the execution of jobnets and jobs.

You can also use the ajskill command to kill the execution of jobnets and jobs. For details of the command, see the description of ajskill in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To kill the execution of a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet or job whose execution you want to kill.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet or the jobnet that manages the target job, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet or job.

The jobnet or job you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet or job you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to kill execution. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to kill execution.

Choose Operations and then Kill.

A confirmation dialog box asking whether you want to kill the jobnet or job appears.

Click the Yes button.

The execution of the jobnet or job is killed.

The colored mark in the schedule area is displayed in pale red (default), which indicates the killed status.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary notes

You can kill the execution of jobnets whose status is Now running, Running + Warning, Running + Abend, or Now monitoring only.

You can kill the execution of jobs whose status is Now queuing or Now running only. For queueless jobs, you can also kill the jobs whose status is Waiting to execute.

For details about how to kill a jobnet for which start conditions are being monitored, see 8.1.1 Stopping a jobnet that is monitoring start conditions in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Administration Guide.

When you kill a jobnet, communications are exchanged and the database in JP1/AJS3 is updated. Therefore, if you select many jobnets and kill all of them at one time, the overall burden on JP1/AJS3 is severe, and is likely to adversely affect operation due to processing delays and other problems. If you want to kill multiple jobnets, insert a pause of a few seconds to a few minutes after each time a jobnet is killed.

Note that when you kill a jobnet containing many event jobs or kill multiple jobnets containing event jobs at one time, the restrictions set for successive execution of the ajskill command take effect for the number of event jobs that end because they are killed. For details, see B.8 Limits for the event/action control in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

If you kill a job being executed in the Windows environment, the resources used by the job may not be released. We recommend that you end a job using the method recommended by the application that executes the job.

Supplementary notes

If there is an executing job when the interrupt for the jobnet execution is requested, the job is killed first then the jobnet is interrupted.

You can also kill the execution of a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

You can also kill the execution of a job in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

For details about how to re-execute jobnets and jobs that have been killed, see 9.11 Re-executing jobnets and jobs.

9.11 Re-executing jobnets and jobs

This section describes how to re-execute jobnets and jobs that have been canceled or killed.

Note that you can also use the ajsrerun command to re-execute jobnets and jobs. For details of the command, see the description of ajsrerun in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To re-execute a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet or job you want to re-execute.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the target jobnet or the jobnet that manages the target job, click View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet or job.

The jobnet or job you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet or job you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to re-execute the jobnet or job. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to re-execute the jobnet or job.

Choose Operations and then Rerun.

The Rerun dialog box appears.

Specify the first jobnet or job to be re-executed, and other settings.

Click the OK button.

The Rerun dialog box is closed.

The jobnets or jobs are re-executed starting with the unit you specified in step 7. Execution is immediate unless the jobnets or jobs are being held.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Supplementary notes

You can also re-execute a jobnet in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

You can also re-execute a job in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

9.12 Changing the status of jobs

This subsection describes the procedure for changing the status of jobs.

You can also use the ajschgstat command to change the status of jobs. For details of the command, see the description of ajschgstat in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To change the status of a job:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the job whose status you want to change.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The root jobnet appears in the list area.

Click the root jobnet containing the target job, choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target job.

The job you clicked is now selected.

In the schedule area, for the job selected in step 4, click the colored mark whose status you want to change. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line whose status you want to change.

Choose Operations and then Change Job Status.

The Change Job Status dialog box appears.

Change the status of the job.

Click the OK button.

The Change Job Status dialog box closes.

The status of the job is changed.

The colored mark in the schedule area is displayed in the color indicating the status specified in step 7.

The change is also reflected in the execution result list.

Cautionary notes

The status can be changed only if the job is being executed or ended. For queueless jobs, the job status can be changed even while the jobs are waiting to execute.

If you change the status of a Unix job, PC job, flexible job, HTTP connection job, Queue job, action job, or custom job from executing to ended, the succeeding job or jobnet starts in the same manner as when the preceding job ends normally. At this time, the job that was being executed continues running even though it is in the ended status, and until the job actually ends, the agent management control will count the job toward the maximum number of jobs that can be executed concurrently.

If you change the status of an event job from executing to ended, the succeeding job or jobnet starts in the same manner as when the event job ends normally. Note that, however, no information to be inherited is set even if the even job is normally ended. In addition, the process for monitoring the event job ends at the timing of the status change.

Supplementary notes

If you want to execute a jobnet definitely even if it contains an abnormally-ended job, you can do so by changing the status of such a job to a normal end.

You can also change the status of a job in the following windows:

- Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

After changing the status of a job, you can use the ajsagtshow and the jpqagtshow commands to check the actual number of jobs in the queue and the number of jobs currently running. For details about these commands, see ajsagtshow in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference, and see jpqagtshow in 4. Commands Used for Special Operation in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

9.13 Changing the lower-level definition of a jobnet registered for execution

This subsection shows how to change the lower-level definition of a jobnet registered for execution.

You can also change the lower-level definition of a jobnet registered for execution by executing the ajssuspend command and then executing one of the following commands. For details on how to use the following commands, see the description of ajssuspend in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajsdefine command

For details of the command, see the description of ajsdefine in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajsdelete command

For details of the command, see the description of ajsdelete in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajscopy command

For details of the command, see the description of ajscopy in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajschgnet command

For details of the command, see the description of ajschgnet in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajsrestore command

For details of the command, see the description of ajsrestore in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

ajsimport command

For details of the command, see the description of ajsimport in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

9.13.1 Suspending the root jobnet

Before you change the lower-level definition of the root jobnet registered for execution, you must place the root jobnet in the suspended status. You can suspend the root jobnet when all the following conditions are satisfied:

The JP1/AJS3 service are active.

No generation is subject to the monitoring of start condition (that is, the status of the start condition is waiting or ended).

You have a sufficient JP1 permission to suspend the root jobnet.

To suspend the root jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet whose lower-level definition you want to change.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

Click the target jobnet, and then choose Operations, Suspension, and then Suspend.

The Execute Suspension dialog box appears.

In the If a unit is executing group, select Suspend or Do not suspend.

If there is a running generation of the jobnet you want to suspend, you can select whether or not to suspend the jobnet. If you do not suspend the jobnet, an error is returned.

To suspend the jobnet, select Suspend.

Click the OK button.

When the root jobnet is suspended, The Execute Suspension dialog box closes. Then, the icon that indicates the suspended status is displayed to the left of the Name column in the list area.

If the root jobnet is not suspended, an error message appears and the Execute Suspension dialog box remains open.

Supplementary notes

You can suspend the root jobnet registered for planned execution, fixed execution, or immediate execution.

In the definition, you cannot change the start condition.

If the target of the operation is a release-target jobnet, only a jobnet with a definition whose release status is Being applied can be suspended.

9.13.2 Editing the lower-level definition of a root jobnet

When the root jobnet is placed in the suspended status, you can edit the definition of a lower-level unit of a root jobnet. You can edit the lower-level definition of a root jobnet when both of the following conditions are satisfied:

The root jobnet is suspended.

No other users are performing exclusive editing for the root jobnet.

To edit the lower-level definition of the root jobnet registered for execution:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the list area, click the root jobnet whose icon indicates suspended status.

The root jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Edit. Alternatively, double-click the root jobnet whose icon indicates suspended status.

The Jobnet Editor window appears.

Use any of the following methods to edit the lower-level definition of the root jobnet:

Add a new unit.

Edit the definition of an existing unit.

Delete the definition of an existing unit.

Cautionary notes

You cannot rename an existing unit. However, you can rename the unit added when the root jobnet was suspended.

You cannot move a unit by executing the Cut and Paste (Units and relations) (or Paste (Units only)). To move a unit, execute the Copy command and then the Paste (Units and relations) (or Paste (Units only)) command, and then use the Delete command to delete the original unit.

You cannot delete a unit being executed.

You cannot add or delete host link jobnets or jobnet connectors.

You cannot delete or paste a unit containing a host link jobnet or jobnet connector. For host link jobnets, jobnet connectors, and units that contain host link jobnets or jobnet connectors, you can only do the following:

- Add, delete, or edit relation lines.

- Add, delete, or edit preceding and succeeding units.

Supplementary notes

If you change a definition when the jobnet is registered for execution, the change affects all generations that were executed, that are being executed, and that are to be executed.

If you edit the definition of an existing unit, the past execution results remain. If you delete the definition of an existing unit, the past execution results are not retained.

If you change or delete existing units, the configuration becomes different from the configuration before you change or delete the units. Be careful when re-executing the jobnet.

You can change the map area size of any jobnet regardless of the jobnet status when the root jobnet is suspended.

9.13.3 Releasing a root jobnet from the suspension

After changing a lower-level definition of a root jobnet, you must release the root jobnet from the suspension. You can release the root jobnet from the suspension when all the following conditions are satisfied:

The JP1/AJS3 service is running.

The root jobnet is suspended.

No other users are performing exclusive editing for the root jobnet.

You have a sufficient JP1 permission to release the root jobnet from the suspension.

To release the jobnet from the suspension:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the list area, select a jobnet marked with the icon indicating the suspended status.

The jobnet you clicked is placed in the selected status.

In the Operations menu, choose Suspension and then Release Suspension.

The Release Suspension dialog box appears.

Select the behavior of the units added to immediately under running jobnets when the root jobnet is released from the suspension. You can select any of the following behaviors:

Execute

The units added while the parent jobnets were running will be executed when the root jobnet is released from the suspension.

Do not execute (stop)

The units added while the parent jobnets were running will be placed in the bypassed status when the root jobnet is released from the suspension.

Hold

When the root jobnet is released from the suspension, the units added while the parent jobnets were running will be placed in the hold status.

Click the OK button.

When the root jobnet is released from the suspension, the Release Suspension dialog box closes. In the list area, the icon indicating the suspended status disappears and the status is renewed.

If the root jobnet is not released from the suspension, an error message appears and the Release Suspension dialog box remains open.

9.14 Switching definitions of a running jobnet according to a plan (jobnet release)

This section describes how to switch the definition of a running jobnet according to a plan (that is, perform release entry for the jobnet), and how to cancel switching the definition (that is, cancel a release for the jobnet). For details about jobnet releases, see 4.5.14 Automatically switching a jobnet definition at a specified time in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview or 7.3 Switching a jobnet definition while the jobnet is registered for execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Administration Guide.

You can also use the ajsrelease command to perform release entry or release cancel for jobnets. For details about the command, see ajsrelease in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

9.14.1 Performing release entry for jobnets

To perform release entry for a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Release Entry.

Release Entry is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the release-source jobnet.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

Click the release source jobnet, and then choose Operations and then Release Entry.

The Register for Release dialog box appears.

Enter the required information for release entry.

Cautionary note

Any temporary changes that you make to the jobnet before performing a release entry will not apply to execution schedules after the release date.

To check whether any temporary changes have been registered, click the Browse button. The Temporary Changes dialog box appears. Look through the list of temporary change information for any changes to the release-source jobnet.

If you want to apply a temporary change set before the release entry to execution schedules after the release date, select the Open the Temporary Changes list check box. When you finish the release entry, the Temporary Changes dialog box will open automatically and you can re-execute the change.

Click the OK button.

The Register for Release box closes.

The definition of the jobnet you selected in step 3 is registered in the release-target jobnet, and the release status becomes Release wait.

Cautionary notes

You can specify only a root jobnet as the release source.

You cannot specify the following jobnets as the release source:

- Jobnet that is already specified as a release target

- Suspended jobnet

- Jobnet being edited

- Jobnet on which another user is performing operations

- A jobnet for which at least two of the following are defined: a jobnet connector, a connection-destination jobnet, or a start condition (.CONDITION)

- Jobnet for which a remote jobnet was defined

You cannot specify the following jobnets as the release target:

- Suspended jobnet

- Jobnet whose status is Shutdown

- Jobnet being edited

- Jobnet on which another user is performing operations#

- A jobnet for which at least two of the following are defined: a jobnet connector, a connection-destination jobnet, or a start condition (.CONDITION)

- Jobnet for which a remote jobnet was defined

#

If the other user's operation is to set or to release the hold attribute for units of a jobnet that is being applied, you can specify the jobnet as the release target.

A jobnet whose schedule is later than the release date and that has been registered for fixed execution with either a period or a date specified cannot be specified as a release target. In such cases, cancel the registration or prohibit the execution of schedules after the release date, and then register the jobnet-definition release. Note, however, that if a number of future generations is also specified for the jobnet registered for fixed execution, you can register a jobnet-definition release even when the schedule of the jobnet is later than the release date.

If you want to change the definition of a jobnet whose release status is Release wait, cancel the release, change the definition, and then perform release entry. If you do not have enough time to cancel the release or to re-do release entry, or if you want to change the definition whose status is Being applied, suspend the jobnet and then change the definition.

An error might occur if you do not perform release entry at least one day before the release date. When you perform release entry, make sure that you do so well in advance.

Performing release entry significantly increases system load. When you perform release entry, try to avoid times when the system is busy executing jobs.

If the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the jobnet specified as the release target, the function will determine the owner and JP1 resource group set for the jobnet.

If release entry fails, the jobnet definition remains in the Release entry wait status and release entry is not performed. To prevent this problem, after you perform release entry, check whether the release status of the released jobnet definition changes from Release entry wait to Being applied or Release wait. If release entry fails and a definition remains in the Release entry wait status, cancel the release to delete the definition.

After performing release entry, if you use the ajslocaldate command to move the local date and time of the scheduler service to a date and time in the past, or you change the system time to an earlier time, use a command such as ajsdelete to delete the release-target jobnet before making the change.

If you change to an earlier time without deleting the release-target jobnet, release entry might not work correctly. In this case, undo the time changes you made, delete the release-target jobnet, and then change the time again.

Note that to recover the release-target jobnet, you will need to have taken a backup of the definition information for the intended release-target jobnet prior to release entry.

You can restore a deleted release-target jobnet from backup definition information created by a command such as ajsprint for the intended release-target jobnet prior to release entry. After using a command such as ajsdefine to re-define the definition information of the backed-up jobnet, you can restore the release-target jobnet by performing release entry with the release source specified.

9.14.2 Canceling a release for a jobnet

To cancel the release for a jobnet:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Release Cancel.

Release Cancel is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the jobnet for which you want to cancel a release.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

Click the target jobnet, and then choose Operations and then Release Cancel.

A confirmation dialog box asking whether you want to cancel the release for the jobnet appears.

Click the Yes button.

The release for the jobnet is canceled.

The definition whose status is Release wait is deleted.

Cautionary notes

You can cancel a release only for a jobnet that has a definition whose release status is Release entry wait, Release wait, or Delete wait.

You cannot cancel a release for the following jobnets:

- Suspended jobnet

- Jobnet whose status is Shutdown

- Jobnet being edited

- Jobnet on which another user is performing operations#

#

If the other user's operation is to set or to release the hold attribute for units of a jobnet that is being applied, you can cancel a release for the jobnet.

You cannot cancel a release if the jobnet is registered for fixed execution with either a period or a date specified and its schedule is later than the release date. In such cases, cancel the registration or prohibit the execution of schedules after the release date, and then try again to cancel the release. Note, however, that if a number of future generations is also specified for the jobnet registered for fixed execution, you can cancel the release even when the schedule of the jobnet is later than the release date.

An error might occur if you do not cancel a release at least one day before the release date. If you intend to cancel a release, make sure that you do so well in advance.

Canceling a release significantly increases system load. If you intend to cancel a release, try to avoid times when the system is busy executing jobs.

Supplementary note

If the cancellation of a release fails, the status of the jobnet changes to Delete wait. You can delete the definition whose release status is Delete wait by trying to cancel the release again.

9.15 Temporarily changing the execution order control method of root jobnets

This section describes how to temporarily change the execution order control method (synchronous or asynchronous) when you use a jobnet connector to control the execution order of root jobnets.

To temporarily change the execution order control method:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the root jobnet whose execution order you want to change.

The job group you clicked is now selected.

The subordinate root jobnets appear in the list area.

Click the target root jobnet, and then choose View, Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

The Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window appears.

In the tree area, click the target jobnet.

The jobnet you clicked is now selected.

For the jobnet you selected in step 4, in the schedule area, click the colored mark for which you want to change the execution order control method. Alternatively, in the execution result list, click the line for which you want to change the execution order control method.

Choose Operations, Change Execution Order Method, and then Synchro or Asynchro.

A confirmation message asking whether you want to change the execution order control method appears.

Click the Yes button.

The execution order control method for the root jobnet is changed.

Supplementary note

You can also change the execution order control method for a jobnet in the following windows:

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

9.16 Temporarily enabling or disabling wait conditions

This section describes how to temporarily enable or disable the wait conditions used to control the execution order of jobs and jobnets.

For details about wait conditions, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You can also use the ajsplan command to enable or disable wait conditions. For details about this command, see ajsplan in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

To temporarily enable or disable wait conditions:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, in Function Menu, click Status Monitor.

Status Monitor is now selected.

In the tree area, click the job group that manages the unit whose wait conditions you want to enable or disable.

The job group you clicked is selected, and its root jobnets appear in the list area.

If you are enabling or disabling the wait conditions of a root jobnet, click that root jobnet in the list and then choose View and Wait Conditions Statuses. Otherwise, open the Jobnet Monitor window or other window, click the unit whose wait conditions you want to enable or disable, and then choose View and Wait Conditions Statuses.

The Wait Conditions Statuses window appears.

Click the unit whose wait conditions you want to temporarily enable or disable.

The unit with wait conditions that you clicked is now selected.

From the Operations menu, choose Waiting and then Wait Disabled or Wait Enabled.

The wait conditions of the unit you selected in step 4 are temporarily enabled or disabled.

If you disabled the unit's wait conditions, Wait complete (manual) appears in the Waiting status field in the Wait Conditions Statuses window. If you enabled the wait conditions, Wait incomplete (manual) appears in the Waiting status field.

9.17 Displaying and re-executing temporary changes

This section describes how to display the temporary changes set for a jobnet. From a displayed list of temporary change information, you can select an operation and then re-execute (reapply) it to the jobnet in question.

For details about checking and re-executing temporary changes, see 4.5.16 Displaying and re-executing temporary change operations for a job or jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The procedures for displaying temporary change information and re-executing temporary changes are described below.

9.17.1 Displaying temporary changes

To check temporary changes, follow the steps below.

Using the ajsplanout command, you can output temporary changes to the standard output. For details about this command, see ajsplanout in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window or other window, click View and then Temporary Changes.

The Temporary Changes dialog box appears.

In Start date, enter the date from which to list temporary changes.

Click the Update button.

Temporary changes beginning from the date you entered are listed in the dialog box.

To output changes in CSV format, select the lines to output and click the Save button. The selected information is copied to the clipboard.

You can copy a maximum of 1,000 changes to the clipboard.

Click the Close button.

The Temporary Changes dialog box closes.

Supplementary note

You can also check temporary changes in the following windows and dialog boxes:

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

Register for Release dialog box

9.17.2 Re-executing temporary changes

To re-execute temporary changes:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window or other window, click View and then Temporary Changes.

The Temporary Changes dialog box appears.

In Start date, enter the date from which to list temporary changes.

Click the Update button.

Temporary changes beginning from the date you entered are listed in the dialog box.

Select the changes you want to re-execute from the listed information.

Click the Re-execute button.

If the temporary changes are executed successfully, you are returned to the Temporary Changes dialog box and Operation completed appears for each change you re-executed. The Operation time and Operation user fields are updated to the date of re-execution and the re-execution user name.

An error message appears if you selected one change only and an error occurred.

If you selected multiple changes, and an error occurs when the changes are re-executed, the Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box appears and you can find out what happened.

Click the Close button.

The Temporary Changes dialog box closes.

Make sure that the re-executed changes were properly applied by viewing the results in the Monthly Schedule window or other window.

Cautionary notes

You cannot use other windows or dialog boxes while the Temporary Changes dialog box is open. If you need to compare temporary change information before and after the re-execution, launch another instance of JP1/AJS3 - View before you open the Temporary Changes dialog box.

If you click the Close button in the Temporary Changes dialog box before closing the Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box, both dialog boxes will close.

Supplementary note

You can also re-execute temporary changes in the following windows and dialog boxes:

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

Register for Release dialog box

10 Other Operations

This chapter describes the operations you can perform for jobnets and jobs by using JP1/AJS3 - View that have not been described in earlier chapters. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

10.1 Narrowing down the information to be displayed

You can narrow down the information about the jobnets and jobs that is to be displayed in the windows. Two methods are provided for narrowing down information: list filtering and specifying job execution states in the Filter Settings dialog box. The following subsections describe these methods.

10.1.1 Using list filtering to narrow down information

You can use list filtering to narrow down the information displayed in the following windows and dialog boxes:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

Temporary Changes dialog box

To narrow down the information to be displayed:

Open a window or dialog box that supports list filtering.

The window or dialog box appears.

If you opened a window, choose View and then List Filter. If you opened a dialog box, select the List filter check box.

List filtering is enabled.

▼ appears on the right of each column name in the areas that list information (the list area and detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the summary list and unit detailed information list in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), the list area in the Jobnet Editor window, the execution result list in the Daily Schedule window and Monthly Schedule window, the list area in the Jobnet Monitor window, and the search result list area in the Search window).

Click ▼ on the right of a column name to display a drop-down list. Select the option that displays the lines you are interested in.

The window displays only the lines that match the option you selected in the drop-down list.

▼ turns blue after you select an option.

The available options in the drop-down lists are as follows:

All

Filtering is canceled, and all lines are displayed.

Blanks

A line is displayed only if the cell under the applicable column is blank.

NonBlanks

A line is displayed only if the cell under the applicable column contains a value, the cell is not blank.

Selection-value

A line is displayed only if the cell under the applicable column contains a value that matches selection-value. If the column displays dates and times, selection-value is a date and a line is displayed only if the cell under the applicable column contains a date that matches the selected date.

Supplementary notes

You can enable or disable list filtering in each window or dialog box, but not for individual areas within a window or dialog box. The list filtering setting must be the same in the Main window and Summary Monitor window of JP1/AJS3 - View.

When you narrow down information in a JP1/AJS3 - View window, by default the list is scrolled to the top and the topmost item is selected. You can change this behavior to preserve the currently selected unit and scroll position. For details about the procedure, see 11.4.7 Preventing unit selection and the scroll position from being maintained after the window is updated or list filtering is specified.

10.1.2 Using the Filter Settings dialog box to narrow down execution statuses

You can specify job execution statuses in the Filter Settings dialog box of the following windows to narrow down the jobs that are displayed in the windows:

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

To specify job execution states:

Display the applicable window.

The applicable window appears.

Choose Options and then Filter.

The Filter Settings dialog box appears.

In Use, choose Use.

The Filter section is enabled.

In the Filter section, select the check boxes for the execution statuses of the jobs you want to display.

Click the OK button.

The Filter Settings dialog box closes.

The Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window displays only jobs whose status is one of the selected execution statuses.

Supplementary notes

The settings of the Filter Settings dialog box are also valid the next time you open the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window. For details about the Filter Settings dialog box, see 12.7.11 Filter Settings dialog box.

If the hold attribute is set for a unit and the unit is in wait status (scheduled for holding), selecting the Waiting to execute check box in the Filter Settings dialog box enables filter display for the unit. At this time, you can display the unit in the color indicating scheduled for holding if you have chosen Display in Hold plan on the General page of the Preferences dialog box. For details about how to set the scheduled-for-holding color for units, see 11.3.4 Changing a display color of a unit to be held.

For JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later, when you select the Being held status includes hold plan check box in Options and select Being held in Filter in the Filter Settings dialog box, the system displays together the units that are scheduled for holding and the units that are being held. For details, see 12.7.11 Filter Settings dialog box.

You can upload the settings you specify in the Filter Settings dialog box to a common user profile that JP1 users can share by downloading. For details about common user profiles, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

10.2 Finding and displaying units

Use the Search window to find specific units.

You can open the Search window from the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

In the Search window, you can find a specific unit by specifying your own search conditions or by using a combination of search conditions predefined in JP1/AJS3 - View. You can also save and delete sets of search conditions.

10.2.1 Specifying search conditions

To find a jobnet or job:

Open one of the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

In the window you opened in step 1, click the jobnet or job group that manages the unit you want to find.

Click the job group or jobnet in the summary list or unit detailed information list of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), or in the tree area if you opened one of the other windows.

The job group or jobnet you clicked is now selected.

Choose Edit and then Search.

The following Search window appears. If you selected more than one unit, or if you did not make a selection, the Search window will not open.

Figure 10‒1: Search window

The full path name of the job group or jobnet you selected in step 2 appears in Search location.

Cautionary notes

The path name displayed in Search location is that of the unit that was selected in the tree area of the window from which you opened the Search window, regardless of what unit you might have selected in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window.

You can change the path name displayed in Search location by clicking the ... button, which opens the Search Location dialog box.

If you opened the Search window having selected a unit other than a root jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), the full path name of the upper-level root jobnet appears in Search location. To change the location to search, click the ... button, which opens the Search Location dialog box.

In the search condition setting area, specify the name, type, and other details about the unit you want to find.

Click the Search button.

Units matching the search conditions are listed in the search result list area.

If you want to cancel the search before it ends, click the Cancel button.

Check the units listed in the search result list area.

Using the Operations menu, you can perform operations for the listed units as required.

Supplementary notes

You cannot perform operations for any unit displayed in the search result list area until the search is finished or canceled.

The available commands in the Operations menu depend on the unit you specified in Search object in the search condition setting area. For details, see 12.10.2 Menu commands.

You can change the columns displayed in the search result list area. For details, see 11.10.2 Specifying the columns displayed in the search result list area.

10.2.2 Using predefined search conditions

JP1/AJS3 - View provides predefined sets of search conditions for finding the following type of unit:

Unit with wait conditions

By selecting this option, you can enter a predefined set of search conditions in the Search window to look for a particular unit.

To find a particular unit using predefined search conditions:

Open one of the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

In the window you opened in step 1, click a unit according to the type of unit you want to find:

To find a unit with wait conditions:

Click a unit whose end is being waited for.

The unit you clicked is now selected.

From the Edit menu, choose Simple Search and then choose a command from the displayed submenu.

The Search window opens.

The search conditions are set automatically, according to the submenu command you chose.

The following describes the values that are set automatically as the search conditions, based on the submenu command.

When the submenu command is Unit with Wait Conditions

Search conditions are set automatically for the unit with wait conditions associated with the unit whose end is being waited for that you selected in step 2.

The predefined search conditions differ according to the window you opened in step 1.

The table below describes the predefined search conditions. Defaults appear for all search items not shown in this table.

Table 10‒1: Predefined search conditions for finding a unit with wait conditions

No.

Search conditions

Window opened in step 1

Area

Item

View (Main)

View (Summary Monitor)

Monitor

Editor

1

Common area

Search location

Set as the scheduler service for the unit you selected in step 2.

Search lower units check box is selected.

Set as the scheduler service for the unit you selected in step 2.

Search lower units check box is selected.

Set as the scheduler service for the unit you selected in step 2.

Search lower units check box is selected.

Set as the scheduler service for the unit you selected in step 2.

Search lower units check box is selected.

2

Search object

Set as Definition & Status.

Set as Definition & Status.

Set as Definition & Status.

Set as Definition.

3

Definition page

Waiting-target

Set as the full path name of the unit you selected in step 2, without the scheduler service name and with Equals specified.

Set as the full path name of the unit you selected in step 2, without the scheduler service name and with Equals specified.

Set as the full path name of the unit you selected in step 2, without the scheduler service name and with Equals specified.

Set as the full path name of the unit you selected in step 2, without the scheduler service name and with Equals specified.

4

Status page

Generation

Specify period is set from 00:00 to 23:59 on the date on which the Search window was opened.

Specify period is set from 00:00 to 23:59 on the date on which the Search window was opened.

Specify period is set from 00:00 to 23:59 on the date on which the Search window was opened.

Not set.

Legend:

View (Main): JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

View (Summary Monitor): JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Monitor: Jobnet Monitor window

Editor: Jobnet Editor window

Change the search conditions as required.

Click the Search button.

Units matching the search conditions are listed in the search result list area.

If you want to cancel the search before it ends, click the Cancel button.

Check the units listed in the search result list area.

Using the Operations menu, you can perform operations for the listed units as required.

10.2.3 Saving search conditions

You can save a maximum of 32 sets of specified search conditions. To apply saved search conditions, simply select the name they were saved under from the Search Condition drop-down list.

To save search conditions:

Specify the search conditions in the search condition setting area.

Click the Save button.

The Save Search Condition dialog box appears.

Type a name for the set of search conditions you are saving.

Click OK.

The Save Search Condition dialog box closes.

The search conditions are saved under the name you entered in step 3. If search conditions have been saved previously under the same name, the saved conditions will be overwritten.

Saved search conditions can be uploaded and downloaded from a common user profile, allowing JP1 users to share the settings. For details about common user profiles, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

10.2.4 Deleting saved search conditions

To delete saved search conditions:

From the Search Condition drop-down list, select the name of the search conditions you want to delete.

The name you selected appears in the Search Condition drop-down list.

The saved conditions appear in the Search window.

Click the Delete button.

The search conditions you selected in step 1 are deleted.

10.3 Highlighting units

You can highlight units displayed in the windows to make them easier to see.

This section describes two methods of highlighting units.

10.3.1 Highlighting preceding and succeeding units

In the following windows, you can highlight the preceding unit and succeeding unit of a specified unit:

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

To highlight the preceding and succeeding units:

Select a base unit in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window.

The icon of the unit you clicked is now selected.

From the View menu choose Highlighted Display, and then choose a command from the submenu.

Choose one of the following commands:

Only Preceding

The base unit and preceding unit, and a relation line drawn between them, are shown in their respective highlight colors. All other units, and relation lines other than with the preceding unit, are dimmed.

Only Succeeding

The base unit and succeeding unit, and a relation line drawn between them, are shown in their respective highlight colors. All other units, and relation lines other than with the succeeding unit, are dimmed.

Preceding and Succeeding

The base unit, preceding and succeeding units, and relation lines drawn between them, are shown in their respective highlight colors. All other units, and relation lines other than to the preceding and succeeding units, are dimmed.

An example of the display when you choose Preceding and Succeeding is shown below.

Figure 10‒2: Display example for "Preceding and Succeeding"

To unhighlight the preceding and succeeding units, from the View menu choose Highlighted Display and Release.

Supplementary notes

In the Preferences dialog box, you can set highlight colors for the base unit, its preceding and succeeding units, and the relation lines between them. For details, see 12.3.42(3) Editor/Monitor page.

By double-clicking a unit in the list area, you can display its preceding and succeeding units and relation lines in their respective highlight colors in the map area. For details, see 11.5.11 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked.

Units that do not have a preceding or succeeding relationship with the base unit are dimmed in the map area but shown at normal color level in the list area.

You can customize the color level of units that do not have a preceding or succeeding relationship with the base unit, and relation lines between those units, when preceding or succeeding units are highlighted in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. For details about customizing color levels, see 11.7.11 Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units).

10.3.2 Highlighting execution units only

In the Jobnet Monitor window, you can highlight only those units that were executed or are scheduled to execute today. This makes it easy to see the units for the current day when a large number of units are defined at the same level within the jobnet.

To highlight execution units only:

Select a root jobnet and open the Jobnet Monitor window.

For details about displaying the Jobnet Monitor window, see 8.6 Monitoring jobnets and jobs in a map.

From the View menu choose Only Execution Units.

Units that were executed or are scheduled to execute today are displayed at normal color level, and all other units and relation lines are dimmed.

An example of the display when you choose Only Execution Units is shown below.

Figure 10‒3: Display example for "Only Execution Units"

If you close the Jobnet Monitor window with Only Execution Units in effect, the same status will apply the next time you open the window.

To unhighlight execution units, again choose View and Only Execution Units.

Depending on the execution schedule, the job flow might appear discontinuous when execution units only are highlighted.

An example of a job flow that looks discontinuous is shown below.

Figure 10‒4: Example of a job flow that looks discontinuous

Supplementary notes

Units in the following statuses are not considered to be execution units:

- Not registered

- Not sched. to exe.

- Not executed + Ended (not scheduled)

- Bypassed

- Skipped so not exe. (not scheduled)

- Shutdown

When icons and relation lines overlap, highlighting precedence is as follows:

1. Icon of execution units

2. Relation lines to and from execution units

3. Icons of other units

4. Relation lines of other units

Highlighted display of execution units can be used in conjunction with highlighted display of preceding and succeeding units.

When highlighted display of execution units is used in conjunction with highlighted display of preceding and succeeding units, the base unit, preceding unit, and succeeding unit appear in their specified colors, and units other than those executed or scheduled today are dimmed.

Units other than those executed or scheduled today are dimmed in the map area but shown at normal color level in the list area.

Highlighted display of execution units is implemented by dimming units other than those executed or scheduled today and their relation lines. You can customize the dimming level. For details, see 11.7.12 Changing the lightness of colors of non-execution units when displaying only execution units.

10.4 Executing JP1/AJS3 commands from JP1/AJS3 - View

You can execute JP1/AJS3 commands from JP1/AJS3 - View. This function allows you to obtain the JP1/AJS3 - Manager operating status and job definition information without logging in to the manager host.

To execute JP1/AJS3 commands from JP1/AJS3 - View, you must first register the commands.

This section describes how to register and execute JP1/AJS3 commands.

Note that, to register or execute JP1/AJS3 commands, settings must be configured in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. For details about this setting, see 4.5.4 JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

10.4.1 Registering JP1/AJS3 commands

A JP1/AJS3 command can be registered from any of the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

To register a JP1/AJS3 command:

Open any one of the above windows.

From the Options menu, select JP1/AJS3 Command Settings.

The JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box appears.

Click the Add button.

The JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box appears.

Specify the entry name, command name, and other information for the command to be registered.

In the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box, if you select the Add to pop-up menu check box, you will also be able to execute the registered command from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click the applicable unit.

Cautionary note:

When you specify the target units in the command, if you use wildcard characters or specify the -R option, a large number of units might become processing targets. If a large number of units are processing targets, command execution might overload the network or manager host, adversely affecting JP1/AJS3 operation. To avoid this, do not include wildcard characters in the target unit name and do not specify the -R option. If you must specify wildcard characters or the -R option, also specify the -E, -L, or -T option to narrow the target units.

Click the OK button.

The JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box closes.

The command that you registered in step 4 is added to the JP1/AJS3 command list in the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box.

10.4.2 Executing a JP1/AJS3 command

A JP1/AJS3 command can be executed from any of the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

To execute a JP1/AJS3 command:

Open any one of the above windows.

Select the unit for which the command is to be executed.

Cautionary note:

In the cases below, you do not need to select a unit. The command is executed according to the content specified in the command line.

- When parameters are not used in Command argument or in Output

- When only the following items are used as parameters:

- User name

- Year

- Month

- Day

- Time

From the Options menu, select JP1/AJS3 Command Settings.

The JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box appears.

In the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box, select the command that you want to execute.

Click the Start button.

A message box appears asking you whether you really want to execute the selected command.

Click the Yes button.

The command is executed according to permissions of the JP1 user who is logged into JP1/AJS3 - View.

When command execution finishes, the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box appears, and you can check the command execution result.

Supplementary notes:

If the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings menu is disabled, JP1/AJS3 Command is not displayed in the shortcut menu.

During command execution, if the command process is forcibly terminated on the manager host, the execution results before termination might be output to the output file. In such a case, 0 might be displayed as the Return code in the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box.

The following operations cannot be performed during command execution:

- Terminating JP1/AJS3 - View

- Closing the window that executed the command

11 Customizing Windows and Dialog Boxes Used for JP1/AJS3 - View

This chapter explains how to customize the windows and the dialog boxes used in JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about the items that are defined in the dialog boxes, see 12. Windows and Dialog Boxes.

11.1 Methods of customization

JP1/AJS3 - View has the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window

Jobnet Editor window

Edit Monthly Calendar window

Edit Annual Calendar window

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

JP1/AJS3 - View provides a variety of customization options for these windows to make them more convenient to use.

11.1.1 Types of customization methods

Explains how to customize the windows and the dialog boxes.

(1) List of customization methods

You can customize windows and dialog boxes in the following seven ways:

Customization by using dialog boxes and menus from JP1/AJS3 - View

A customization that uses dialog boxes and menus from JP1/AJS3 - View is applied to each login JP1 user on each JP1/AJS3 - View host.

Some of the customization can be saved as a common user profile. To apply a customization to multiple JP1 users, use the common user profile.

For details about common user profiles, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

Customization by using a JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsDisableMenu)

A customization that uses a JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsDisableMenu) is applied to each login JP1 user regardless of the JP1/AJS3 - View host.

Customization by using a JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsExecutableCommand)

A customization that uses the jajsExecutableCommand file of JP1/AJS3 - Manager can be applied to all JP1 users or to a specific JP1 user.

Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - View user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

A customization that uses the JP1/AJS3 - View user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf) is applied to each login JP1 user on each JP1/AJS3 - View host.

Part of the customization can be saved as a common user profile. To apply a customization to multiple JP1 users, use a common user profile.

For details about common user profiles, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - View system common settings file (ajs2view_common.conf)

A customization that uses the JP1/AJS3 - View system common settings file (ajs2view_common.conf) is applied to each JP1/AJS3 - View host regardless of the login JP1 user.

Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf)

A customization that uses the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf) is applied to each JP1/AJS3 - View host.

Customization by using the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager

A customization that uses the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager is applied to each JP1/AJS3 - Manager host regardless of the JP1/AJS3 - View host.

(2) Customization by using dialog boxes and menus from JP1/AJS3 - View

You can use dialog boxes and menus from JP1/AJS3 - View to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

(3) Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsDisableMenu)

You can edit the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsDisableMenu) to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file:

In JP1/AJS3 - Manager, create a folder for storing the customization file (jajsDisableMenu).

Create a folder for each customization-target JP1 user, and specify the JP1 user name for the folder name.

The following shows the location of the folder to be created.

In an environment where the OS is not Windows Server 2003, if the installation folder is the default installation folder or is in a folder protected by the system:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2\conf\profiles\JP1-user-name#1, #2

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

A folder protected by the system is the path to a folder in any of the following:

- system-drive\Windows

- system-drive\Program Files

- system-drive\Program Files (x86) (for 64-bit Windows)

In an environment where the OS is not Windows Server 2003, if the installation folder is other than the above:

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf\Profiles\JP1-user-name#1, #2

For Windows Server 2003:

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf\Profiles\JP1-user-name#1, #2

For UNIX:

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles/JP1-user-name#1, #2

#1

JP1-user-name cannot have uppercase alphabetic characters. If you use alphabetic characters, make sure that they are all lowercase.

#2

If you use any of the following names as the JP1 user name, the folder that is created for each JP1 user name is enclosed in single-byte parentheses ( ).

In Windows:

- A device name (such as NUL, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, and PRN)

- A name consisting of a device and extension

- A name beginning with a period (.)

In UNIX:

- A name beginning with a period (.)

In the JP1-user-name folder that you created in step 1, create a customization file (jajsDisableMenu), and then open the file with a text editor.

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save them.

Start JP1/AJS3 - View.

The customization is enabled from JP1/AJS3 - View, which starts after the customization file is created.

Cautionary note

The specifications in the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file take effect for both physical and logical hosts. Therefore, if JP1/AJS3 - Manager is in a cluster configuration, make sure that the specifications for the active and standby servers match.

(4) Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsExecutableCommand)

You can edit the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsExecutableCommand) to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file:

Copy the model file (jajsExecutableCommand.model) for the JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsExecutableCommand) to any folder.

The model file (jajsExecutableCommand.model) is located in the following folder:

In Windows:

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf

In UNIX:

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf

Use a text editor to open the copied model file.

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save the file.

For details about the file specification format, see 11.3.18 Allowing execution of JP1/AJS3 commands.

Change the file name to jajsExecutableCommand, and then move the file to the appropriate location.

The location of the common customization file for all JP1 users and the location of the customization file for a specific JP1 user are different. If both the common customization file and a user-specific customization file exist in the same location, the settings in the user-specific customization file take precedence. For details, see 4.5.4 JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

The following table shows the location of the jajsExecutableCommand file.

Table 11‒1: Location of the jajsExecutableCommand file

OS

File containing the common settings for all JP1 users

File containing the settings for a specific JP1 user

Windows (Physical host)

JP1/AJS3-folder#1\profiles\(jajsExecutableCommand)#2

JP1/AJS3-folder#1\profiles\(jajsExecutableCommand)#2\JP1-user-name

Windows (Logical host)

shared-folder\jp1ajs2\conf\profiles\(jajsExecutableCommand)#2

shared-folder\jp1ajs2\conf\profiles\(jajsExecutableCommand)#2\JP1-user-name

UNIX (Physical host)

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles/(jajsExecutableCommand)#2

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles/(jajsExecutableCommand)#2/JP1-user-name

UNIX (Logical host)

shared-directory/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles/(jajsExecutableCommand)#2

shared-directory/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles/(jajsExecutableCommand)#2/JP1-user-name

#1

Substitute the following folder for JP1/AJS3-folder:

In an environment where the OS is not Windows Server 2003, if the installation folder is the default installation folder or is in a folder protected by the system

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2\conf

In an environment where the OS is not Windows Server 2003, if the installation folder is other than the above

JP1/AJS3-Manager-installation-folder\conf

In Windows Server 2003

JP1/AJS3-Manager-installation-folder\conf

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

A folder protected by the system is a folder under any of the following:

- system-drive\Windows

- system-drive\Program Files

- system-drive\Program Files (x86) (for 64-bit Windows)

#2

The (jajsExecutableCommand) folder is not created during installation or setup of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Note that the folder name includes halfwidth parentheses: "(" and ")".

(5) Customization by using user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

You can edit the JP1/AJS3 - View user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf) to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the user-specified option file:

Copy the model file (ajs2view_opt.conf.model) for the user-specified option file to any folder.

The following folder contains the model file (ajs2view_opt.conf.model):

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf

Use a text editor to open the copied model file.

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save them.

Delete the hash mark (#) preceding an option you want to customize, and then specify a value.

Change the file name to ajs2view_opt.conf, and then move the file to the following folder.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name#

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#

If the system has been logged in to even once, the folder has already been created with that login JP1 user name.

If you use any of the following names as the JP1 user name, the folder that is created for each JP1 user name is enclosed in single-byte parentheses ( ).

- A device name (such as NUL, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, and PRN)

- A name consisting of a device and extension

- A name beginning with a period (.)

Start JP1/AJS3 - View.

The customization is enabled from JP1/AJS3 - View, which starts after the user-specified option file is saved.

Cautionary notes

If no user-specified option file exists, JP1/AJS3 - View uses default values.

Since version 11-00, the default values have changed for some of the customizable items in the user-specified option file. Whether the new defaults apply in version 11-00 depends on the method you used to install JP1/AJS3, and whether the user-specified option file you are using was created in version 10-50 or earlier.

The following table describes the circumstances in which the new default values apply in version 11-00.

Table 11‒2: Application of new default values for version 11-00

Installation method

Status of user-specified option file for version 10-50 or earlier

Application of new default values in version 11-00

New installation of version 11-00 or later

Not applicable.

The new default values apply.

Upgrade installation from version 10-50 or earlier to version 11-00 or later

File has been customized.

The new default values do not apply.

Consider whether you need to change the settings in the file to the new default values for version 11-00.

File has not been customized.

The new default values apply.

Consider whether you need to restore the old default values used in version 10-50 and earlier.

For details about the items whose default values have changed in version 11-00, and how to change the default values back to those used in version 10-50, see B.1 List of customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00.

(6) Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - View system common settings file (ajs2view_common.conf)

You can edit the JP1/AJS3 - View system common settings file (ajs2view_common.conf) to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the system common settings file:

Copy the model file (ajs2view_common.conf.model) for the system common settings file to any folder.

The following folder contains the model file (ajs2view_common.conf.model):

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf

Use a text editor to open the copied model file.

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save them.

Delete the hash mark (#) preceding an option you want to customize, and then specify a value.

Change the file name to ajs2view_common.conf and move the file to the following folder.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

Start JP1/AJS3 - View.

The customization is enabled from JP1/AJS3 - View, which starts after the system common settings file is saved.

Cautionary notes

We recommend that users who do not need to change the system common settings file be granted either only read and execute permissions or read only permission.

If there is no system common settings file, JP1/AJS3 - View uses default values.

(7) Customization by using the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf)

You can edit the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf) to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the file (ajs2.conf):

Use a text editor to open the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf).

The following folder contains the file (ajs2.conf):

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save them.

Start JP1/AJS3 - View.

The customization is enabled from JP1/AJS3 - View, which starts after the JP1/AJS3 - View file (ajs2.conf) is saved.

(8) Customization by using the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager

You can edit the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager to customize JP1/AJS3 - View.

To customize JP1/AJS3 - View by using the View customization settings file:

Prepare the jajsCustomizeView.model file, which is the model file of the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView), and then copy the model file to a folder of your choice, using a file name of your choice.

The jajsCustomizeView.model file is located in the following folder:

JP1/AJS3-View-installation-folder\conf

Use a text editor to open the copied model file.

Specify the settings that you want to customize, and then save them.

For details about the file format, see 11.3.19 Displaying the information about the connection-destination manager host.

From JP1/AJS3 - View, log in to the manager host on which you want to customize the settings.

Use the Preferences dialog box of JP1/AJS3 - View to upload the modified file that you saved in step 3.

For details about the Preferences dialog box of JP1/AJS3 - View, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Download the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) from the Preferences dialog box of JP1/AJS3 - View, and then check whether the new settings have been applied.

11.1.2 Using common user profiles

This subsection describes common user profiles and their use.

(1) About common user profiles

Common user profiles, maintained by JP1/AJS3 - Manager at the login destination, consist of JP1/AJS3 - View settings information that is common to all JP1 users.

Common user profiles hold the following information:

Information related to customization that uses dialog boxes and menus from JP1/AJS3 - View

Information related to customization that uses the JP1/AJS3 - View user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

JP1/AJS3 - View users can apply the settings common to all JP1 users to JP1/AJS3 - View simply by downloading a common user profile that the system administrator has uploaded in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Users who use a common user profile do not need to specify JP1/AJS3 - View again.

The capability to upload items that will be used as common settings among JP1 users as common user profiles in JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a useful feature.

Supplementary notes

If the following directories and files already exist in JP1/AJS3 - Manager, give the OS user write privilege mapped to the JP1 user in advance.

For a physical host (in an environment where the OS is not Windows Server 2003):

The value is different depending on the installation folder.

If the installation folder is the default installation folder or is in a folder protected by the system:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2\conf

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2\conf\profiles

A folder protected by the system is the path to a folder in any of the following:

- system-drive\Windows

- system-drive\Program Files

- system-drive\Program Files (x86)

If the installation folder is other than the above:

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf\profiles

For a physical host (in Windows Server 2003):

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf

JP1/AJS3 - Manager-installation-folder\conf\profiles

For a physical host (in UNIX):

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf

/etc/opt/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles

For a logical host (in Windows):

shared-directory\jp1ajs2\conf

shared-directory\JP1AJS2\conf\profiles

For a logical host (in UNIX):

shared-directory/jp1ajs2/conf

shared-directory/jp1ajs2/conf/profiles

If the following directories and files already exist in JP1/AJS3 - View, give the OS user write privilege for JP1/AJS3 - View starting in advance.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name\ajs2view_opt.conf

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

The same common user profile uploaded and downloaded by different versions of JP1/AJS - View can still be used. If you use an earlier version of JP1/AJS - View to download a common user profile containing information uploaded from a later version of JP1/AJS - View, you have use of the common user profile within the limits of the functions supported by the earlier version of JP1/AJS - View.

(2) List of settings that can be saved in common user profiles

The following table lists settings you can save in common user profiles and when the settings become effective after download.

Table 11‒3: Customizing settings that can be saved in common user profile of connection destination Manager and when settings become effective

Location for customizing settings

Settings that can be saved

When settings take effect

Preferences dialog box

Login page

Changing start mode

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View starts

Main page

Setting the display status of the list area

Icon color and Show color image in status and result: Immediately

Display status of a job group: When the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is restarted

Changing the window that is displayed when a jobnet is double-clicked in the list area

Immediately

Setting whether exclusive editing mode is permitted when the Jobnet Editor window opens

Immediately

Setting the monitoring mode in effect when the Jobnet Monitor window is started

Immediately

Editor/Monitor page

Specifying the settings regarding the display of unit names and comments in the map area

When information is updated

Specifying the highlight colors for preceding and succeeding units in the map area

When highlighting is initiated or canceled, or when information is updated

Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked

When the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Schedule page

Specifying the first execution time

When information is updated or automatic update is performed

Specifying the hour system used for the Time area display

When the Daily Schedule window is restarted

Performing a monthly execution simulation

When information is updated or automatic update is performed

Setting the sort sequence of unit names in the tree area

When the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Hiding root jobnets without schedule information

When the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Hiding planning groups

When the Monthly Schedule window is restarted

General page

Changing the display colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

Immediately

Changing the priority of the display colors for the delay, abend, and warning statuses

Immediately

Changing a display color of a unit to be held

When information is updated or automatic update is performed

Set Function Menu dialog box

Changing the function menu items to be displayed

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View is started

Create Color dialog box

Creating colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

Immediately

Refresh Interval dialog box

Setting the window refresh interval

Immediately

Display Item Setup dialog box

Specifying the columns displayed in the list area

Immediately

Specifying the columns displayed in the execution result list

When the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Specifying the columns displayed in the search result list area

When the Search window is restarted or when the Search button in the Search window is clicked

Set Display Order dialog box

Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area

Immediately

Set Default Values dialog box

Changing default values in dialog boxes

Immediately

Prohibiting changes to definition items in the Define Details dialog box

When the Define Details dialog box is restarted

Hiding the icons of unused units in the icon list

When the Jobnet Editor window is restarted

Filter Settings dialog box

Filtering the execution status of jobs#1

When information is updated or automatic update is performed

Tool Settings dialog box

Registering and activating tools

Immediately

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box

Registering JP1/AJS3 commands#6

Immediately

Monitoring Unit Select dialog box

Adding units to the summary list#2

Immediately

Save button in the Search window

Saving search conditions#3

When the Search window is restarted

User-specified option file saved in JP1/AJS3 - View (ajs2view_opt.conf)

Disabling automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager

Immediately

Allowing each JP1 user to use different custom jobs

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View is started

Changing the order in which execution agents appear in the Define Details dialog box

When the Define Details dialog box is restarted

Suppressing certain confirmation messages

Immediately

Displaying unregistered custom jobs with the jobnet icon

Immediately

Changing icon images

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View is started

Changing the display format for the execution-prohibition of a root jobnet registered for planned execution

When information is updated

Displaying units in the tree area using the display order for version 10 and earlier

When the applicable window or dialog box is started

Suppressing the display of the logged-in JP1 user name

When the target window is restarted

Grouping the types displayed in the Type column

When information is updated or when the Search button in the Search window is clicked

Setting the warning message to be displayed when a jobnet is registered for fixed execution

Immediately

Displaying job groups and planning groups in the tree area when the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is opened

Immediately

Preventing unit selection and the scroll position from being maintained after the window is updated or list filtering is specified

When the JP1/AJS3 - View window is restarted

Displaying the operation menu items other than Register for Execution and Cancel Registration in a pop-up menu

When the JP1/AJS3 - View (Main window) window is restarted

Adding Add and Changing Plan to the menu bar

When the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is restarted

Changing the maximum number of units to be monitored

Immediately

Displaying User name in the Replace drop-down list box in the Tool Entry dialog box

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View starts

Preventing display of a confirmation message when deleting defined schedule rules for nested jobnets with "Depends on upper-level jobnet" selected in the Schedule Settings dialog box

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View starts

Preventing jobnets that have been registered for execution from appearing in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View starts

Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area

When information is updated

Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window is displayed

Immediately

Keeping a nested jobnet selected after moving up in the hierarchy

When the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Changing the color indicating the selected status

When the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units)

When the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Changing the lightness of colors of non-execution units when displaying only execution units

When the Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Suppressing the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area

When the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Displaying the full names of jobnets

When a level is selected in the tree or the mode is changed to exclusive editing mode

Disabling exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window

When the mode changes to exclusive editing mode

Displaying a confirmation message when deleting a relation line

When the Jobnet Editor window is restarted

Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor windows

Immediately

Replacing "Paste (Units and relations)" and "Paste (Units only)" with the menu items and behavior from version 10-50 and earlier

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View is started

Changing the background colors for dates in the calendar

When the Edit Monthly Calendar or Edit Annual Calendar window is restarted, or when the Previous year button, Next year button, Previous month button, or Next month button is clicked

Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first

When the Edit Monthly Calendar window or Edit Annual Calendar window is restarted

Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Monitor window is displayed

Immediately

Preventing users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box

When the Edit Def button is clicked

Automatically refreshing the Execution Result Details dialog box

When the Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Displaying a smaller Execution Result Details dialog box

When the Execution Result Details dialog box is restarted

Displaying the units directly under a root jobnet when the Jobnet Monitor window is opened from JP1/IM - View

When the Jobnet Monitor window is restarted

Preventing the opening of multiple Jobnet Monitor windows

Immediately

Changing the background colors of the time area and schedule area

When the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Changing the colors of text in the time area and schedule area

When the Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Displaying the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list

Next time JP1/AJS3 - View is started

Changing how the current day is positioned in the Time area and Schedule area

When the Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Changing the maximum number of units displayable in the search result list area

When the Search window is restarted or when the Search button in the Search window is clicked

Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area

When the Search window is restarted

Monthly Schedule window

Displaying unregistered execution schedules#4, #5

When the Monthly Schedule window is restarted

Legend:

Immediately: When the OK button is clicked in a message KAVV375-I.

#1

For details about how to narrow down the status of jobs to display only certain jobs, see 10.1.2 Using the Filter Settings dialog box to narrow down execution statuses.

#2

For details about how to add units to the summary list, see 8.3 Monitoring the progress.

#3

For details about how to save search conditions, see 10.2 Finding and displaying units.

#4

For details about how to display unregistered units, see 6.4 Checking a defined schedule.

#5

If you make settings so that the execution schedule of unregistered units is to be displayed, calculation of the execution schedule might delay startup of the Monthly Schedule window.

Therefore, if the person defining the schedule of jobnets is not the same person who monitors the status of jobnets, we recommend that you upload common user profiles that are set so that the execution schedule of unregistered units is not displayed.

#6

The command settings registered in the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box can be saved in the common user profile. For details on how to register commands in the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box, see 10.4.1 Registering JP1/AJS3 commands.

(3) Uploading and downloading common user profiles

The following describes how to upload common user profiles to and download them from JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

To upload common user profiles to JP1/AJS3 - Manager:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, click Options, Common User Profile, and Upload.

Supplementary notes

During the upload, the settings not changed from the defaults are assumed to be uploaded with the defaults.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, to upload Set Refresh Interval, you need to close the Jobnet Monitor window before you upload Set Refresh Interval.

To upload the screen sizes of the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and the execution result list in the Daily Schedule window and the Monthly Schedule window, you need to close the windows before uploading them.

Any JP1 user can perform an upload. If you want to prevent uploading by specific JP1 users, set the upload operation menu so that uploading is disabled for those JP1 users. For the customization method, see 11.3.9 Disabling menus.

To download common user profiles from JP1/AJS3 - Manager:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, click Options, Common User Profile, and Download.

Supplementary notes

If a downloading JP1 user did not create ajs2view_opt.conf in the JP1/AJS3 - View host, ajs2view_opt.conf is created according to ajs2view_opt_en.conf.model.

The time that downloaded settings become effective varies according to the settings. To validate all the downloaded settings at the same time, restart JP1/AJS3 - View.

Cautionary note

Do not upload, to the same JP1/AJS3 - Manager host, common user profiles from multiple JP1/AJS3 - View hosts whose language settings are different. Similarly, do not download common user profiles from the same JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to multiple JP1/AJS3 - View hosts whose language settings are different.

11.2 Settings related to the entire system

This section describes the following settings related to the entire JP1/AJS3 - View system:

Logging in automatically at start

Changing the start mode

Trace log setting (JP1/AJS3 - View)

Disabling automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager

Setting the amount of memory used

Preventing the history of previous login user names and connected host names from appearing on the Login screen

Allowing multiple users to concurrently use JP1/AJS3 - View via remote desktop connections

Allowing each JP1 user to use different custom jobs

11.2.1 Logging in automatically at start

You can customize to perform automatic login to JP1/AJS3 - Manager when starting JP1/AJS3 - View.

Specify from:

The Login page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To specify automatic login:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Login page.

The Login page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Auto login, set the following items:

Auto login

Specify Yes.

User name

Specify the name of a JP1 user who wants to log in.

Password

Specify the password to log in the JP1/Base authorization server.

Host to connect

Specify the name of a connected host.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you start JP1/AJS3 - View.

11.2.2 Changing the start mode

You can change the start mode of JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about start modes, see 4.1 Start modes of the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Specify from:

The Login page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change the start mode:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Login page.

The Login page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Start mode, select a start mode.

Available options are as follows:

Normal

Monitoring

Compatible

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you start JP1/AJS3 - View.

11.2.3 Trace log setting (JP1/AJS3 - View)

You can change settings related to the JP1/AJS3 - View log file.

Specify from:

The Other page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change settings:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Other page.

The Other page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

Set the following items for Troubleshooting:

Trace level

Select levels of information to be output to the log file.

Max. log file size

Specify the log file size in megabytes.

If the log file size exceeds the set value, the system creates the second log file automatically. The set value is applied also to the second log file. If the second log file size exceeds the set value, the system overwrites information in the first log file.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you start JP1/AJS3 - View.

11.2.4 Disabling automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager

You can disable automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsAutoReconnect={Yes|No} (return)

To disable automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager, specify No. To enable automatic reconnection, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To enable automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager:

jajsAutoReconnect=No (return)

11.2.5 Setting the amount of memory used

You can set the amount of memory JP1/AJS3 - View uses.

The maximum amount of memory JP1/AJS3 - View can use is 256 megabytes (default). With this default value, three windows in the following status can be displayed simultaneously.

Table 11‒4: Window status

No.

Window

Number of units

Total number of schedules

1

JP1/AJS3 - View (Main window)

1,000

--

2

JP1/AJS3 - View (Summary Monitor window)

1,000

1,000#1

3

Jobnet Editor

1,000

--

4

Jobnet Monitor

1,000

--

5

Daily Schedule

1,000

1,000#1

6

Monthly Schedule

1,000

30,000#2

7

Search

1,000

--

Legend:

--: Not applicable

#1

One execution per day is assumed.

#2

Display of 30 days' data (one execution per day) is assumed.

If the estimate exceeds the default, increase the maximum size of memory for JP1/AJS3 - View.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf\ajs2.conf

Specification

Use the following format:

jreparam=-Xmxmemory-upper-limitM

Cautionary notes

When you edit the ajs2.conf file, do not change any options specified in jreparam other than the -Xmx256option. Change only the numeric value portion of the -Xmx256M default.

If the specification of the -Xmx entry is incorrect, JP1/AJS3 - View might ignore the specified value or might be unable to operate. Keep this in mind when you set a value in this entry. If the value specified in -Xmx is too large, the memory for the entire system may become insufficient. Therefore, when you adjust the value, you must take the amount of system memory into account. Also, make sure that the value you specify does not exceed half of the amount of memory that has been installed (main memory).

Cautionary note (for upgrading from version 6 or 7)

In version 8, the version of JRE that is used as prerequisite software on the same device has changed.

As a result, the memory requirement settings (location and contents of the specification) have also changed. The following memory requirement settings, which were used in version 7 or earlier, cannot be used in version 8 or later. Note that the ajs.conf file shown below must not be deleted. If you delete the file, JP1/AJS2 - View is no longer able to start.

Specify from (in version 7 or earlier): JP1/AJS2-View-installation-folder\conf\ajs.conf

Specification (in version 7 or earlier): jreparam=-mxnM (n: maximum memory size)

As a result of changing the JRE version, more memory is required than in version 7 or earlier. Re-estimate the memory requirements and, if necessary, set them again.

Cautionary note (when upgrading from version 8)

More memory is required in version 9 and later, than in version 8. Re-estimate the memory requirements, and set them again if necessary.

Example

Change the memory upper limit value to 512 megabytes.

jreparam=-Xmx512M

11.2.6 Preventing the history of previously used login user and connected host names from appearing on the Login screen

You can make settings so that previously used login information is not displayed in User name and Host to connect on the Login screen.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (System common settings file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsHideLoginHistory={Yes|No} (return)

When you specify Yes:

The Login screen is displayed as follows at JP1/AJS3 - View startup:

User name: Blank

Host to connect: Blank

Previously connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager hosts do not appear in the drop-down list.

When you specify No:

The Login screen is displayed as follows at JP1/AJS3 - View startup:

User name: The previous login JP1 user name appears.

Host to connect: The names of previously connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager hosts appear.

A maximum of 10 names of previously connected JP1/AJS3 Manager hosts appear in the drop-down list.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

Make settings so that previous login information will not be displayed in User name and Host to connect when the Login screen appears.

jajsHideLoginHistory=Yes (return)

Cautionary note

When you open the Login screen in the following cases, User name and Host to connect are displayed even though Yes is specified for jajsHideLoginHistory.

When you reconnect to the host because you have been disconnected

The Login screen is as follows:

User name: Previously connected user name (inactive)

Password: Blank (active)

Host to connect: Previously connected host name (inactive)

When you start up JP1/AJS3 - View by using the ajs command with a login information file containing incorrect information

The Login screen is as follows:

User name: Value specified in the login information file (active)

Password: Value obtained by converting the value specified in the login information file to * (active)

Host to connect: Value specified in the login information file (active)

Note that the list of host names does not appear in the Host to connect drop-down list.

11.2.7 Allowing multiple users to concurrently use JP1/AJS3 - View via remote desktop connections

JP1/AJS3 has a multiuser remote desktop connection function, which allows multiple users to concurrently use JP1/AJS3 - View via remote desktop connections.

If this function is enabled, the environment settings and log files for JP1/AJS3 - View are separate for each user. Because the settings and log files are output to separate files for each OS user, the file access permission settings in the OS can be used to prevent the files of one OS user from being viewed by other users.

The following table lists the items that can be set or managed for each OS user.

Table 11‒5: Items that can be set or managed for each OS user

No.

Item

Section

1

Login history for the Login screen#1

User name

12.2

2

Host to connect

3

Preferences dialog box

Auto login#1, #2

Auto login

12.3.42(1)

4

User name

5

Password

6

Host to connect

7

Troubleshooting#1, #2

Trace level

12.3.42(6)

8

Max. log file size

9

JP1/AJS3 - View information log#3

--

#1

The settings file for each OS user is output to the following folder:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\(osusers)\OS-user-name

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#2

The other environment settings are managed separately for each JP1 user. The environment settings for each JP1 user are output to the following folder:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#3

The log file for each OS user is output to the following folder:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\log\OS-user-name

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

This function can be used regardless of the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager to which JP1/AJS3 - View is connected. If you want to use custom jobs when this function is enabled, we recommend that you also enable the function that allows each JP1 user to use different custom jobs. For details about the settings for the function that allows each user to use different custom jobs, see 11.2.8 Allowing each JP1 user to use different custom jobs.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf\ajs2.conf

We recommend that you set the appropriate access permissions for this file so that only administrators can change the settings in the file.

Specification

Use the following format:

MULTI_USERS=NORMAL (return)

To enable the function that allows multiple users to use JP1/AJS3 - View concurrently via remote desktop connections, specify MULTI_USERS=NORMAL. If this entry is specified, the following message is output to a log file when JP1/AJS3 - View is started: KAVV3340-I The multi-user remote operation function is enabled.

If MULTI_USERS=NORMAL is not specified, or if the MULTI_USERS parameter is specified incorrectly, multiple users cannot concurrently use JP1/AJS3 - View via remote desktop connections.

By default, this parameter is not specified.

After changing the parameters for this setting, you must restart JP1/AJS3 - View.

Cautionary notes

For details about OSs that are supported for the multiuser remote desktop connection function, see the Release Notes.

Make sure that the OS user names of all OS users who use remote desktop connections are unique, even if their domains are different. Note that domain names are not included in the paths of the folders to which settings files and log files are output. Therefore, if two users have the same OS user name, their files are output to the same folder, even if their domains are different.

Make sure that the OS user names of all OS users who use remote desktop connections do not contain any reserved words or invalid characters such as periods or spaces that cannot be used in an OS user name for Windows. Also note that using an OS user name beginning with one of the following JP1/AJS3 - View reserved words (in any combination of uppercase and lowercase) might prevent log files from being output or prevent the settings in the Preferences dialog box from being specified correctly:

AJS (example: AJSxxxx)

HLICLIB (example: HLICLIBxxxx)

JBSONLSET (example: JBSONLSETxxxx)

CJOBREGM (example: CJOBREGMxxxx)

xxxx: Any character string

If you enable this function, use a different JP1 user for each OS user. Note that each OS user can use only one session of remote desktop connection to JP1/AJS3 - View at a time.

Estimate the memory size required for the OS user (including administrators) who uses the largest amount of memory, and then multiply that estimated size by the number of OS users. Then, set the resulting value as the amount of memory to be used for the entire system. For details about how to set the amount of memory, see 11.2.5 Setting the amount of memory used.

We recommend that you create the following folders and set the appropriate access permissions beforehand to prevent the folders from being viewed by other OS users.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\(osusers)\OS-user-name

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\log\OS-user-name

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

If you do not create these folders in advance, they are automatically created when you start JP1/AJS3 - View after enabling these settings. Make sure that the appropriate access permissions are set for the created folders.

If this function is enabled, the previous setting files and log files of an OS user might be able to be viewed by other OS users. To prevent this, back up and delete the following files and the folder (including the log files in it):

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\default.conf

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\log

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

We recommend that you do not use login information files, because passwords might be leaked to other OS users. If you want to use login information files, set the appropriate file access permissions so that each file can only be viewed by the appropriate OS user.

These settings do not apply to the uploading or downloading of common user profiles.

If this function is enabled, the ability to launch JP1/AJS3 - View from the following linked product and to launch the following linked product from JP1/AJS3 - View are not guaranteed. Check the linked product to determine whether this function is supported.

JP1/AJS3 - Definition Assistant

11.2.8 Allowing each JP1 user to use different custom jobs

You can set JP1/AJS3 to allow each JP1 user to use different custom jobs.

By saving the custom job registration information for each JP1 user in a separate folder, different custom jobs can be displayed in the Jobnet Editor window for each JP1 user who is logged in.

Custom jobs are displayed in the Custom Jobs tab of the icon list in the Jobnet Editor window. This tab displays only the custom jobs that are registered in the folder that contains the custom job registration information for the JP1 user who is currently logged in. This folder is called the custom job registration information folder. For JP1 users who share the same custom job registration information folder, the same custom jobs are displayed in the icon list.

If the multiuser remote desktop connection function is enabled, we recommend that you set JP1/AJS3 to allow each JP1 user to use different custom jobs. For details about how to enable the multiuser remote desktop connection function, see 11.2.7 Allowing multiple users to concurrently use JP1/AJS3 - View via remote desktop connections.

To allow each JP1 user to use different custom jobs, you must specify the settings in the user-specified option file. You must also specify the custom job registration program to be used for registering custom jobs. These two settings are described in the following subsections.

(1) Specifying the settings in the user-specified option file

How to specify the settings in the user-specified option file:

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsCustomJobDirectory=folder-name (return)

The specification conventions for folder-name are as follows:

You can use only single-byte alphanumeric characters and the following symbols: hyphens (-) and underscores (_).

The maximum length is 31 bytes.

The folder names shown in the following table will be used for the custom job registration information folder:

Table 11‒6: Custom job registration information folder

No.

Folder name specified

Custom job registration information folder

1

No

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%#1\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir

2

Yes

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%#1\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir\extend#2\folder-name

#1

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#2

The extend folder does not exist when JP1/AJS3 - View is installed.

(2) Setting the custom job registration program for each JP1 user

How to set the custom job registration program:

Procedure

Create the custom job registration information folder.

Create a folder named extend directly under the custom job registration information folder (custom.dir), and then, directly under the extend folder, create the folder that you specified in the user-specified option file.

For details about the custom job registration information folder, see (1) Specifying the settings in the user-specified option file.

Set the read and write permissions for the custom job registration information folder that you created in step 1.

Create a shortcut to the following file:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir\Cjobregm.exe

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

In the Properties dialog box for the shortcut that you created in step 3, open the Shortcut tab, and then, in Start in, specify the custom job registration information folder that you created in step 1.

From the shortcut that you created in step 3, register the custom jobs that the target JP1 user can use.

Cautionary notes

If you want to use the extended custom job settings file, you must place it in the custom job registration information folder that you created.

You must copy the following file to the custom job registration information folder that you created:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\HITACHI\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir\CJX.xsd

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

If the folder specified in the user-specified option file does not exist, the KAVV103-E message is output and the custom job registration information is saved in the folder that is used when a folder name is not specified in the user-specified option file.

11.3 Customization common to many windows

This section describes the following methods of customization, which you can use for different windows:

Changing the display colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

Changing the priority of the display colors for the delay, abend, and warning statuses

Creating colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

Changing a display color of a unit to be held

Storing the display status and position of a window

Changing default values in dialog boxes

Prohibiting changes to definition items in the Define Details dialog box

Changing the order in which execution agents appear in the Define Details dialog box

Disabling menus

Suppressing certain confirmation messages

Displaying unregistered custom jobs with the jobnet icon

Changing icon images

Registering and activating tools

Changing the display format for the execution-prohibition of a root jobnet registered for planned execution

Displaying units in the tree area using the display order for version 10 and earlier

Suppressing display of the logged-in JP1 user name

Grouping the types displayed in the Type column

Allowing the execution of JP1/AJS3 commands

Displaying the information about the connection-destination manager host

11.3.1 Changing the display colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

You can change the display colors for icons, which represent execution statuses, results, and delays (including rectangles and circles which represent execution schedules).

Specify from:

The General page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change the display colors for execution statuses and results:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (or some other appropriate window), choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Choose the General page.

The General page appears.

In List of icon colors, click the item whose color you want to change.

The item is highlighted.

In the Change icon color dropdown list, select a new color.

In List of icon colors, the Color field for the selected item reflects the selected color.

Repeat steps 3 and 4, as required.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes.

Supplementary note

The changed color will apply to the execution statuses, execution results, and delays displayed in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

Wait Conditions Statuses window

11.3.2 Changing the priority of the display colors for the delay, abend, and warning statuses

You can specify the priorities of the icon display colors for the delay, abend, or warning statuses if they occur at the same time. The default priorities are the abend, warning, and delay statuses.

Specify from:

The General page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change priorities of the display colors for delay:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Choose the General page.

The General page appears.

For Priority of delay display color, specify priorities of the abend, warning, and delay statuses.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes.

Supplementary note

The priorities of the display colors of the delay status reflect when the delay status is displayed in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

Wait Conditions Statuses window

11.3.3 Creating colors for execution status, execution results, and delays

You can create your own colors and assign them to the display colors for icons, which represent execution statuses, results, and delays (including rectangles and circles which represent execution schedules).

Specify from:

The Create Color dialog box

Procedure

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (or some other appropriate window), choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Choose the General page.

In List of icon colors, click the item whose color you want to create.

The item is selected.

Click the Select button.

The Select Color dialog box appears.

Click the Add button.

The Create Color dialog box appears.

In the Name field, specify the name of the color you want to create.

From the Basic color dropdown list, select a JP1/AJS3 - View basic color to use as a basis for specifying the RGB values.

The RGB values of the selected basic color appear in the R, G, and B fields. The Sample field displays a sample image of the selected basic color.

Modify the values of R, G, and B, as required.

In the Create Color dialog box, click the OK button.

The Create Color dialog box closes and the created color is added to the Available colors list in the Select Color dialog box. The added color is highlighted.

In the Select Color dialog box, click the OK button.

The Select Color dialog box closes and the created color is displayed in the Color field for the selected item in List of icon colors in the General page.

Cautionary notes

You cannot create a color having the same name or RGB values as a basic color.

You cannot create more than one color having the same name or RGB values.

11.3.4 Changing a display color of a unit to be held

If the hold attribute is set for a unit and before it is held, the default displayed color of the unit is either of waiting for the start time, of waiting for the completion of the precedent, of waiting for execution, or of waiting for the start condition. These displayed colors could be changed to planned to be held (the default color is yellow). By changing the color, checking whether the hold attribute is set can be done easily.

Specify from:

The General page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

In JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Choose the General page.

In Hold plan group, select Display .

Select Only if hold attribute changes as necessary.

If this is not checked, both one with the temporarily hold attribute and one with the hold attribute are displayed as "Hold plan". If checked, only one with the temporarily hold attribute is displayed as "Hold plan".

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes.

Supplementary note

Changing display colors affects the unit with the hold attribute in the following windows.

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

Wait Conditions Statuses window

11.3.5 Storing the display status and position of a window

The system can store the display status and position of a window. When you operate multiple jobnets or jobs, this feature eliminates the need to separately open all windows necessary for definition or monitoring or adjust the positions of windows every time you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View window

Procedure

To store the display status and position of a window:

Adjust the positions of the necessary windows in the appropriate status.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options, Save Status and Save.

The system stores the status and position of each window.

The next time you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window, the windows are displayed as you specified in step 1.

Cautionary note

For a window corresponding to a deleted unit, an error occurs when you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window next.

Supplementary notes

The system does not store information about the Jobnet Monitor window displaying a manager job group, manager jobnet, or remote jobnet.

The system does not store information about dialog boxes.

If you log in to a host other than the host on which you were logged when the window information was stored, window status is not restored.

To clear the stored display status and position of a window, in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options, Save Status, and then Clear Saved Status.

The information about the Jobnet Monitor window, which displays the connection-destination jobnet for a jobnet connector, is not saved if the connection-destination jobnet and the jobnet connector are on different hosts. Also note that this information is not saved in the following cases, even if the connection-destination jobnet and the jobnet connector are on the same host:

For generations with a fixed connection

Information is not saved if the host name you enter in the Login screen to log in to JP1/AJS3 - View is different from the host name# of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

# The host name of JP1/AJS3 - Manager is either of the following:

- For a physical host, the host name returned by the hostname command

- For a logical host, the logical host name

For generations without a fixed connection

Information is not saved if the host name you enter in the Login screen to log in to JP1/AJS3 - View is different from Connection host in the jobnet connector definition.

Note, however, that information is saved if the Connection host in the jobnet connector definition is omitted.

The information about the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window, which displays the connection-destination jobnet for a jobnet connector, is not saved if the connection-destination jobnet and the jobnet connector are on different hosts.

The information is not saved even when a jobnet connector and its connection-destination jobnet are on the same host if the host name you enter in the Login screen to log in to JP1/AJS3 - View is different from Connection host in the jobnet connector definition. Note, however, that the information is saved if Connection host in the jobnet connector definition is omitted.

With regard to the start mode and the function menu items to be displayed, if the settings you specify in the Preferences dialog box differ from the saved settings, the saved settings take precedence.

11.3.6 Changing default values in dialog boxes

Default values of the setting items in the dialog box can be changed. By changing to the normally used values as default, less work is required for setting.

Specify from:

Set Default Values dialog box

Procedure

To set default values in dialog boxes:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Set Default Values.

The Set Default Values dialog box appears.

Choose an item for which you want to set a default value from the tree area.

The content of the items set in the tree area is displayed in the set item area.

Click the OK button.

The Set Default Values dialog box closes and the setting becomes valid.

Supplementary note

To set the default value for users, use a common user profile. For the common user profile, see 11.1.2 Using common user profiles.

11.3.7 Prohibiting changes to definition items in the Define Details dialog box

You can disable definition items in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box to prohibit changes to the items.

Specify from:

Set Default Values dialog box

Procedure

To prohibit changes to definition items:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Set Default Values.

The Set Default Values dialog box appears.

In the Set Default Values dialog box, in the tree area, select the definition item to which you do not want to permit changes.

The setting item area displays the settings for the definition item selected in the tree area.

In the setting item area, select the Change is not permitted check box.

Click the OK button.

The Set Default Values dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you open the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Supplementary notes

This operation is available for the following dialog boxes. For details, see 12.3.48 Set Default Values dialog box.

- Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box

- Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet)

- Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet)

- Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

- Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

- Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box

- Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box

- Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

- Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

- Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

- Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

- Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box

- Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

- Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box

If a unit is created while the Change is not permitted check box is selected, the user-specified default values or the system default values are used.

11.3.8 Changing the order in which execution agents appear in the Define Details dialog box

You can change the order in which execution agents are listed in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use a following format.

jajsComboBoxAgentSort={profile|asc|desc} (return)

When profile is specified:

Execution agents are listed in the order they appear in the execution agent profile.

When asc is specified:

Execution agents are listed in ascending order by name in the execution agent profile.

When desc is specified:

Execution agents are listed in descending order by name in the execution agent profile.

The default is profile. If you omit this setting, profile is assumed.

Example

To display execution agents in ascending name order in the Exec-agent area of the Define Details dialog box:

jajsComboBoxAgentSort=asc (return)

11.3.9 Disabling menus

You can disable a menu command in a window to prevent the user from choosing it.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsDisableMenu)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

screen-type-1 mnemonic-1-for-menu-to-be-disabled;screen-type-2 mnemonic-2-for-menu-to-be-disabled;screen-type-n mnemonic-n-for-menu-to-be-disabled

The screen type is a letter indicating the window name. The mnemonic of a menu is an abbreviation corresponding to each menu name. Do not insert any spaces, and do not enter a linefeed character at the end of the file.

The following table lists screen types.

Table 11‒7: Screen types

No.

Window name

Screen type

1

JP1/AJS3 - View window#

m

2

Jobnet Editor window

e

3

Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window

c

4

Jobnet Monitor window

j

5

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

d

6

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

b

7

Monthly Schedule window

o

8

Search window

f

9

Wait Conditions Settings List window

p

10

Wait Conditions Statuses window

w

#

The settings are the same for the main window and the Summary Monitor window.

The following table lists the relevant windows and the menu mnemonics. For details about the screen types of the windows, see Table 11-7.

Table 11‒8: Mnemonics of menus for different windows

Screen types

of the windows

Menu name

Menu mnemonic

Menu

Menu command

Submenu command

m, e, c, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

File

--

--

file

m, e

Backup

--

file-backup

m, e

Restore

--

file-restore

m

Package

--

file-package

m, e

New Window

--

file-newwindow

c

Save

--

file-save

m, e, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Edit

--

--

edit

m

New

--

edit-new

m

Job Group

edit-new-newgroup

m

Jobnet

edit-new-newnet

m

Remote Jobnet

edit-new-newrnet

m

Manager Job Group

edit-new-newmgroup

m

Manager Jobnet

edit-new-newmnet

m

Planning Group

edit-new-newpgroup

m

Edit

--

edit-definition

m, d, b, o, f, p

Jobnet Editor

--

edit-jobnetdefinition

p

Unit with Wait Conditions

edit-jobnetdefinition-meeting_condition

p

Waiting-target unit

edit-jobnetdefinition-meeting_object

m, e

Copy

--

edit-copy

m, e

Delete

--

edit-delete

e

Cut

--

edit-cut

m, e

Paste

--

edit-paste

e

Paste (Extension)

--

edit-pasteextension

e

Paste (Units and relations)

--

edit-pasteextension

e

Paste (Units only)

--

edit-paste

E

Edit Mode

--

edit-editmode

e

Basic

edit-editmode-basic

e

Make Relation

edit-editmode-makerelation

e

Make Consecutive Relations

edit-editmode-makeconsecutiverelations

e

Make Conditional Relations

edit-editmode-makeconditionalrelations

e

Break Relation

edit-editmode-breakrelations

m, e, j

Find

--

edit-find

m, e, j

Simple Search

--

edit-find_simple

m, e, j

Unit with Wait Conditions

edit-find_simple-meeting_condition

m, e, j, d, o

Schedule

--

edit-schedule

m, e, p

Waiting Conditions Settings

--

edit-meeting

m

Calendar

--

edit-calendar

m, e

Properties

--

edit-property

m, e, f, p, w

Select All

--

edit-selectall

e

Map Size

--

edit-mapsize

e

Define Start Condition

--

edit-definestartcondition

e

Cancel Start Condition

--

edit-cancelstartcondition

e

Auto-create Jobnet Connector

--

edit-autocreatejobnetconnector

m, j, d, b, o, f, w

Operations

--

--

operations

m, d, o

Register for Execution

--

operations-register

m, d, o

Cancel Registration

--

operations-cancel

m

Release Entry

--

operations-releaseentry

m

Release Cancel

--

operations-releasecancel

m, d, o

Add

--

operations-add

m, j, d, b, o, f

Change Plan

--

operations-changeplan

m, j, d, o, f

Change Time

operations-changeplan-changetime

m, j, d, o, f

Execute Immediately

operations-changeplan-immediate

m, j, d, b, o, f

Execution prohibited

operations-changeplan-prohibit

m, j, d, o, f

Release change

operations-changeplan-cancel

m

Execution Prohibited

--

operations-prohibit

m, j, d, b, o, f

Change Hold Attribute

--

operations-changehold

j, d, b, o, f

Hold

operations-changehold-hold

j, d, b, o, f

Hold - Release

operations-changehold-holdrelease

m

Hold

operations-changehold-hold_m

m

Hold Release

operations-changehold-holdrelease_m

w

Waiting

--

operations-meeting

w

Wait Enabled

operations-meeting-on

w

Wait Disabled

operations-meeting-off

j, d, o

Change Delay Monitor

--

operations-monitordelay

j, d, o

Change Priority

--

operations-priority

m, d, o, f

Interrupt

--

operations-interrupt

m, d, b, o, f

Kill

--

operations-kill

m, d, b, o, f

Rerun

--

operations-rerun

j, d, b, o

Change Job Status

--

operations-changejobstatus

m

Suspension

--

operations-suspend

m

Suspend

operations-suspend-dosuspend

m

Release Suspension

operations-suspend-suspendrelease

j, d, o

Change Execution Order Method

--

operations-connectmethod

j, d, o

Synchro

operations-connectmethod-synchro

j, d, o

Asynchro

operations-connectmethod-notsynchro

m, e, c, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

View

--

--

view

m, f

Main

--

view-mode-main

m, f

Summary Monitor

--

view-mode-summary

e,j

List Area

--

view-listarea

e,j

Minimum

view-listarea-minimize

e,j

Restore

view-listarea-restore

m, j, d, b, o, f, w

Daily Schedule

--

view-dailyschedule

m, j, b, o, f, w

Hierarchy

view-dailyschedule-hierarchy

w

Hierarchy - Unit with Wait Conditions

view-dailyschedule-hierarchy-meeting_condition

w

Hierarchy - Waiting-target Unit

view-dailyschedule-hierarchy-meeting_object

m, j, d, o, f, w

All Jobs

view-dailyschedule-alljobs

w

All Jobs - Unit with Wait Conditions

view-dailyschedule-alljobs-meeting_condition

w

All Jobs - Waiting-target Unit

view-dailyschedule-alljobs-meeting_object

m, j, d, b, f, w

Monthly Schedule

--

view-monthlyschedule

w

Unit with Wait Conditions

view-monthlyschedule-meeting_condition

w

Waiting-target Unit

view-monthlyschedule-meeting_object

m, d, b, o, f, w

Jobnet Monitor

--

view-monitor

m

Status

view-monitor-status

m

Result

view-monitor-result

m

Next Schedule

view-monitor-next

w

Unit with Wait Conditions

view-monitor-meeting_condition

w

Waiting-target unit

view-monitor-meeting_object

m, j, d, b, o, e, c, w

Refresh

--

view-refresh

e, j

Highlighted Display

--

view-emphasis

e, j

Only Preceding

view-emphasis-preceding

e, j

Only Succeeding

view-emphasis-succeeding

e, j

Preceding and Succeeding

view-emphasis-both

e, j

Release

view-emphasis-release

j

Only Execution Units

--

view-onlyexecution

e, j

Zoom

--

view-zoom

e

Toolbar

--

view-toolbar

m, j, d, b, o

Detailed Information

--

view-detail

m

Status

view-detail-status

m

Result

view-detail-result

m

Next Schedule

view-detail-next

m, j, d, b, o, f

Temporary Changes

--

view-changeplanlist

m, e, f

Wait Conditions Settings List

--

view-meeting_define

m, j, d, b, o, f

Wait Conditions Statuses

--

view-meeting_status

m

Status

view-meeting_status-status

m

Result

view-meeting_status-result

m

Next Schedule

view-meeting_status-next

m, e, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

List Filter

--

view-listfilter

o

Unregistered Schedules

--

view-non-registration_execution

m

Unit Detailed Information List

--

view-unitdetaillist

m

Ended Abnormally

view-unitdetaillist-abnormal

m

Ended with Warning

view-unitdetaillist-warning

m

Delay

view-unitdetaillist-delay

m

Ended Normally

view-unitdetaillist-normal

m

Being Held

view-unitdetaillist-hold

m

Now Running

view-unitdetaillist-running

m

Waiting to Start

view-unitdetaillist-startwait

m

All

view-unitdetaillist-all

j

Monitor mode

--

view-monitormode

j

Fixed monitor

view-monitormode-fixedmonitor

j

Monitor last status

view-monitormode-statusmonitor

j

Monitor last result

view-monitormode-resultmonitor

d, b

Resize

--

view-size

d, b

Change Display Date

--

view-displayday

d, b

Next Day

view-displayday-nextday

d, b

Today

view-displayday-today

d, b

Previous Day

view-displayday-previousday

d, b

Specify Day

view-displayday-specifiedday

d, b, o

Cancel#

--

view-displaycancel

o

Change Display Month

--

view-displaymonth

o

Next Month

view-displaymonth-nextmonth

o

This Month

view-displaymonth-thismonth

o

Previous Month

view-displaymonth-previousmonth

o

Specify Month

view-displaymonth-specifiedmonth

d, o

Display Order

--

view-order

d, o

Name

view-order-name

d, o

Execution Time

view-order-time

C

Edit Annual Calendar and Edit Monthly Calendar

--

view-changecalendar

j, d, o

Jobnet for Destination

--

view-jobnetconnector

j, d, o

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy)

view-jobnetconnector-dailyhierarchy

j, d, o

Daily Schedule (All Jobs)

view-jobnetconnector-dailyalljobs

j, d, o

Monthly Schedule

view-jobnetconnector-monthlyschedule

j, d, o

Jobnet Monitor

view-jobnetconnector-monitor

j, d, b, o

Inherit Result

--

view-transferresult

m, e, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Options

--

--

option

m, e, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Preferences

--

option-preference

m, e, j, d, b, o, f

Display Item Setup

--

option-displayitemsetup

m

Set Display Order

--

option-displayorder

m

Set Default Values

--

option-setdefaultvalue

m

Save status

--

option-savestatus

m

Save

option-savestatus-enable

m

Clear Saved Status

option-savestatus-disable

m, j, d, b

Set Refresh Interval

--

option-refreshinterval

m, e, j, f, p, w

Save Full Unit Name

--

option-savefullunitname

p, w

Unit with Wait Conditions

option-savefullunitname-meeting_condition

p, w

Waiting-target unit

option-savefullunitname-meeting_object

m

Save as Jobnet Connector

--

option-savejobnetconnector

m

Common User Profile

--

option-commonuserprofile

m

Download

option-commonuserprofile-download

m

Upload

option-commonuserprofile-upload

e, j

Set Wall Paper

--

option-wallpaper

m, e, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Save Csv Unit Data

--

option-savecsvunitdata

d, b, o

Filter

--

option-filter

m

Change Password

--

option-changepassword

m, e, j, d, b, o, f

Set Tools

--

option-tool

m, e, j, d, b, o, f

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

--

option-command

m, e, c, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Help

--

--

help

m, e, c, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

Help Contents

--

help-contents

m, e, c, j, d, b, o, f, p, w

About JP1/AJS3 - View

--

help-about

Legend:

--: Not applicable

Note

You can use only lowercase letters and hyphens (-) in a menu mnemonic. You cannot use carriage returns.

#

If you specify this mnemonic, the cancel button is also disabled.

Example 1

The following specification disables File and then New Window in the Jobnet Editor window.

efile-newwindow

Example 2

Disable the following menus:

Edit - New - Jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Operations - Kill in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

medit-new-newnet;doperation-kill

11.3.10 Suppressing certain confirmation messages

You can suppress the display of confirmation messages during the operation of JP1/AJS3 - View. Confirmation messages are indicated by an I or Q suffix in the message number.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

To suppress messages with message number suffix I:

jajsStopInformDialog=message-number-1-to-be-suppressed;message-number-2-to-be-suppressed;...message-number-n-to-be-suppressed (return)

To suppress messages with message number suffix Q:

jajsStopQuestDialog=message-number-1-to-be-suppressed;message-number-2-to-be-suppressed;...message-number-n-to-be-suppressed (return)

Confirmation messages are not suppressed unless these settings are specified.

Cautionary notes

You can only suppress the display of messages whose message numbers end with I or Q. Note that you cannot suppress the following messages:

- KAVV126-I Now connecting with the Manager. Please wait.

- KAVV3901-I The command is being executed.

- KAVV3902-I Command execution is complete.

- KAVV3924-I Because the standard error output exceeds the maximum number of items that can be displayed, some results cannot be displayed.

- KAVV4001-Q Do you want to delete the registered information for this Custom Job (custom-job-name)?

- KAVV4018-I The "Register Custom Job" dialog box was opened. (version = version, OS user name = OS-user-name)

- Messages with message numbers that end with E

If you suppress a message that asks you a question (Yes or No, OK or Cancel), the system assumes that you gave a positive answer (Yes or OK).

Example

Suppress the display of messages KAVV370-I, KAVV371-I and KAVV372-I.

jajsStopInformDialog=370;371;372 (return)

11.3.11 Displaying unregistered custom jobs with the jobnet icon

You can use the jobnet icon, not a ? icon, to display an unregistered custom job.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsUnknownCustomJobJobnetIcon={Yes|No} (return)

To use the jobnet icon, specify Yes. To display the ? icon, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To display the jobnet icon as the icon for unregistered custom jobs:

jajsUnknownCustomJobJobnetIcon=Yes (return)

11.3.12 Changing icon images

You can change the current icons in a window to one of the following sets:

Extended icons in version 6

Icons in version 6

Icons in version 7

User-created icons

Note that the icons in version 8 and later have the same design.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsIconImageDirectory={AllBackground|V6Icon|V7Icon|user-specified} (return)

When AllBackground is specified

The entire background of an icon is the area displayed with a color that indicates the unit status or delay. The icon design is almost the same as that in version 6. In version 6, the bottom half of the background is the area displayed with a color that indicates the unit status or delay. When AllBackground is specified, this area is extended to become the entire background. The following lists exceptions:

In the Jobnet Editor window, the entire background of icons in the icon list and map area is gray.

For Unix jobs, PC jobs, and Queue jobs, the entire background of icons cannot be displayed with the display colors to represent the execution schedule, result, and delay statuses due to design of the icons.

When V6Icon is specified

Icons in version 6 are displayed.

When V7Icon is specified

Icons in version 7 are displayed.

When user-specified is specified

Specify the folder that contains user-created image files.

The user-created image files are used for displaying icons. The icons for which user-created image files have not been prepared are displayed as icons in version 10. For details on how to create an image file, see 11.12.2 How to create an icon image.

If you omit this setting, the icons in version 10 are displayed.

Supplementary notes

The following items are displayed as images in version 10, regardless of the specification:

- Login dialog box image

- Version information dialog box image

- Message box image (images for information, warnings, and errors)

- Program icons and icons displayed in window title bars

- Icons on the tool bar of the Jobnet Editor window (such as the Make Relation button).

- Icons in the function menu area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window

When you perform this customization, the icon images change in the following windows:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Jobnet Editor window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Daily Schedule window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Search window

- Wait Conditions Settings List window

- Wait Conditions Statuses window

Example

Window icons are displayed as extended variations of version 6 icons.

jajsIconImageDirectory=AllBackground (return)

11.3.13 Registering and activating tools

You can register a tool from JP1/AJS3 - View, as well as activate the registered tool on the host where JP1/AJS3 - View is running.

Specify from:

Tool Settings dialog box

Procedure (for registering a tool)

To register a tool:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options, and then Set Tools.

The Tool Settings dialog box appears.

Click the Add button.

The Tool Entry dialog box appears.

Specify the following items:

Entry name text box

Enter the registration name of the startup command.

Command text box

Enter the command for starting the tool.

Add to pop-up menu check box

Use this check box to specify whether to start the tool from a pop-up menu. If you select the check box, the registration name appears in the pop-up menu.

Click the OK button.

The Tool Entry dialog box closes, and the tool is added to Tools list in the Tool Settings dialog box.

Procedure (for activating a tool)

To activate a tool:

In the Tool Settings dialog box's Tools list, select the tool you want to activate.

Click the Start button.

The tool is activated.

Supplementary note

The Tool Settings dialog box is displayed by choosing Options and then Set Tools in any of the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

11.3.14 Changing the display format for the execution-prohibition of a root jobnet registered for planned execution

The root jobnet displayed as Yes (Execution Prohibited) can be displayed as No (Previous execution prohibited).

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsExecutionProhibitedDisplayFormat={Yes|No} (return)

To display No (Previous execution prohibited) for the root jobnet, specify No. To display Yes (Execution Prohibited), specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Supplementary note

When you change the option for whether to cancel the root jobnet registered for planned execution, the change is applied to the following windows and dialog box:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box

Example

To display No (Previous execution prohibited) as the execution-prohibition of a root jobnet registered for planned execution:

jajsExecutionProhibitedDisplayFormat=No (return)

11.3.15 Displaying units in the tree area using the display order for version 10 and earlier

You can display the units in the tree area in the same order as in version 10 and earlier. If you enable this customization, units are displayed in character code order on Windows hosts, and in order of creation on UNIX hosts.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSortTreeArea={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to display items in the same order as in version 10 and earlier. To display the units in the same order (Unicode) as they appear in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Cautionary notes

This setting is not applied to scheduler services displayed in the tree area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). If the OS of the manager host is Windows, the units are always displayed in order of character encoding. If the OS of the manager host is UNIX, the units are always displayed in the order in which the units were created.

If you set this customization, the order in which job names in the tree area of the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window are displayed by name will be different from the order in which they are displayed before the setting. Job names are displayed in the format of job-name:relative-path and in ascending order for the relative path. Those in the same relative path are displayed in ascending order for the job name.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, the new sequence of units in the tree area is applied to the following windows and dialog boxes:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

Wall Paper dialog box

Monitoring Unit Select dialog box

Selection of Release Target dialog box

Example

To display items in the same order as in version 10 and earlier:

jajsSortTreeArea=No (return)

11.3.16 Suppressing display of the logged-in JP1 user name

You can suppress display of the logged-in JP1 name that appears in the title of a window.

Specify from:

A file of JP1/AJS3 - View (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification:

Specify the following entry:

jajsHideLoginJP1UserName={Yes|No} (return)

To prevent the name of the logged-in JP1 user from being displayed, specify Yes. To display the name in window titles, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, suppression of the logged-in JP1 user name is applied to the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)#

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Edit Monthly Calendar window

Edit Annual Calendar window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

Search window

Wait Conditions Settings List window

Wait Conditions Statuses window

#

The names of the connected hosts are displayed as in version 7 or earlier.

Example

To suppress display of the logged-in JP1 user name:

jajsHideLoginJP1UserName=Yes (return)

11.3.17 Grouping the types displayed in the Type column

You can group the types that are displayed in the Type column in the display areas of windows into fewer types.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification:

Use the following format:

jajsDisplayDetailUnitType={Yes|No} (return)

To group job types into fewer categories, specify No. To display job categories in full detail, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

The following table describes the types that are displayed in the Type column when you specify Yes and No for this setting.

Table 11‒9: Types displayed when the setting is Yes and No

No.

Unit

Type displayed when the setting is Yes

Type displayed when the setting is No

1

Unix job

Unix job

Job

2

PC job

PC job

Job

3

Queue job

Queue job

Job

4

Jobnet

Jobnet

Jobnet

5

Remote jobnet

Remote jobnet

Remote jobnet

6

Jobnet connector

Jobnet connector

Jobnet connector

7

OR job

OR job

OR job

8

Judgment job

Judgment job

Judgment job

9

Flexible job

Flexible job

Job

10

HTTP connection job

HTTP connection job

Job

11

Receive JP1 Event job

Receive JP1 Event

Event

12

Monitoring Files job

Monitoring Files

Event

13

Receive Mail job

Receive Mail

Event

14

Receive MQ Message job

Receive MQ Message

Event

15

Receive MSMQ Message job

Receive MSMQ Message

Event

16

Monitoring Log Files job

Monitoring Log Files

Event

17

Monitoring Event Log job

Monitoring Event Log

Event

18

Interval Control job

Interval Control

Event

19

Send JP1 Event job

Send JP1 Event Send

Job

20

Send Mail job

Send Mail

Job

21

Send MQ Message job

Send MQ Message

Job

22

Send MSMQ Message job

Send MSMQ Message

Job

23

OpenView Status Report job

OpenView Status Report

Job

24

Local Power Control job

Local Power Control

Job

25

Remote Power Control job

Remote Power Control

Job

26

Custom job

Custom job

Job

27

Passing information setting job

Passing information setting

Job

Supplementary note

This customization is applied to the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

Example

To group displayed job types into fewer categories:

jajsDisplayDetailUnitType=No (return)

11.3.18 Allowing execution of JP1/AJS3 commands

You can execute JP1/AJS3 commands from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - Manager file (jajsExecutableCommand)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

In the above JP1/AJS3 - Manager file, make sure to:

Use only lowercase alphabetic characters.

Specify each command on a separate line.

Add a hash mark (#) at the beginning of any lines to be treated as a comment.

The file specification format is as follows:

command-name-1
command-name-2
:

The JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View are as follows:

ajslogprint

ajsprint

ajsshow

ajsstatus

Cautionary notes:

If the following lines are specified for the command, they will be ignored, and no error message will be displayed:

- Lines that include uppercase alphabetical characters

- Lines with commands that cannot be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View

- Lines containing only space characters

- Lines containing only linefeed characters

- Misstatements and duplicated lines

The Command field of the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box displays JP1/AJS3 commands in the order that they were specified in the jajsExecutableCommand file.

The specified contents will be referenced by JP1/AJS3 - View when a user logs in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager. While logged in to JP1/AJS3 - View, to apply the changes made to the file (jajsExecutableCommand) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager, restart JP1/AJS3 - View.

Example 1

The specification in this example allows execution of the ajsshow and ajsprint commands.

ajsshow
ajsprint

Example 2

The specification in this example includes a JP1/AJS3 command that cannot be executed and a comment line that begins with a hash mark (#). In this example, only the ajsshow command on the second line can be executed.

ajsdefine
ajsshow
(return)
#ajsprint

11.3.19 Displaying the information about the connection-destination manager host

You can display the information about the connection-destination manager host in a window. You can also change the color of the information display areas and the font color.

Specify from:

The View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) in JP1/AJS3 - Manager

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification:

Specify entries in the following formats. For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

jajsHostInfoBarBackground=RGB-value (return)

Use this entry to specify the background color of the upper and lower areas displayed in the window. The default color value is 192:192:192. If you do not specify this entry, the system assumes that 192:192:192 is specified.

jajsHostInfoBarText=Any-character-string (return)

Use this entry to specify the character string that is to be displayed in the upper area of the window. Typically, information about the connection destination, such as the OS or machine name of the connection-destination manager host, is specified. To use a backslash (\) as an ordinary character, specify two consecutive backslashes (\\). To specify a character string that begins with a halfwidth space, enclose it in double quotation marks ("Δany-character-string", where Δ indicates a halfwidth space). The character string you specify can have a maximum of 640 characters. If you do not specify this entry, an empty line is displayed.

jajsHostInfoBarTextColor=RGB-value (return)

Use this entry to specify the font color of the text displayed in the upper and lower areas of the window. The default color value is 0:0:0. If you do not specify this entry, the system assumes that 0:0:0 is specified.

Cautionary notes

For the information about the connection-destination manager host to be displayed in the window, we recommend that you specify a character string that is no longer than 40 characters. If you specify a character string longer than 40 characters, characters after the first 40 characters might not be displayed.

You cannot use control characters, Unicode control characters, and platform-dependent characters.

As a result of changing the color of window areas, depending on the combination of bar and font colors, text might become hard to read. If you change the color of window areas, we recommend that you also adjust the font color.

Example

With the following entry settings, the connection-destination manager host name MAN01 is displayed in black with a gray background:

jajsHostInfoBarBackground=192:192:192

jajsHostInfoBarText=MAN01

jajsHostInfoBarTextColor=0:0:0

11.4 Customizing the JP1/AJS3 - View window

This section explains the following items to customize JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Changing the function menu items to be displayed

Setting the window refresh interval

Setting the warning message to be displayed when a jobnet is registered for fixed execution

Displaying job groups and planning groups in the tree area when the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is opened

Setting the display status of the list area

Specifying the columns displayed in the list area

Preventing unit selection and the scroll position from being maintained after the window is updated or list filtering is specified

Displaying the operation menu items other than Register for Execution and Cancel Registration in a pop-up menu

Adding Add and Changing Plan to the menu bar

Changing the window that is displayed when a jobnet is double-clicked in the list area

Preventing users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box

Displaying a smaller Execution Result Details dialog box

Specifying the first execution time

Changing the maximum number of units to be monitored

Displaying User name in the Replace drop-down list box in the Tool Entry dialog box

Preventing display of a confirmation message when deleting defined schedule rules for nested jobnets with "Depends on upper-level jobnet" selected in the Schedule Settings dialog box

Preventing jobnets that have been registered for execution from appearing in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu

Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area

11.4.1 Changing the function menu items to be displayed

You can change the function menu items that are displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). Note that you cannot hide all the function menu items.

Specify from:

Set Function Menu dialog box

Procedure

To change the function menu items that are displayed:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Login page.

The Login page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

Click the Set Function Menu button.

The Set Function Menu dialog box appears.

Specify the function menu items to be displayed.

If you want to show function menu items:

In Displayable function menu, select all the function menu items you want to display in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, and click the Add button. The selected items move to Displayed function menu.

If you want to hide function menu items:

In Displayed function menu, select all the function menu items you do not want to display in the JP1/AJS3 - View, and click the Delete button. The selected items move to Displayable function menu.

Click the OK button.

The Set Function Menu dialog box closes.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you start JP1/AJS3 - View.

11.4.2 Setting the window refresh interval

You can specify whether to refresh information (unit statuses) displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View window automatically. You can set 30 to 3,600 (in seconds) for the automatic refresh interval.

Note that the refresh interval is the same for both the main window and the Summary Monitor window.

Specify from:

Refresh Interval dialog box

Procedure

To set the window refresh interval:

In JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Set Refresh Interval.

The Refresh Interval dialog box appears.

Define necessary information and click the OK button.

The definition information is accepted and the window refresh interval changes.

To refresh manually, choose View and Refresh. The most recent information appears in the window.

Supplementary note

You can also specify the automatic refresh in the following windows:

Daily Schedule window

Jobnet Monitor window

You can specify a separate refresh interval for each window. For example, you can specify 300 seconds for the JP1/AJS3 - View window and 30 seconds for the Jobnet Monitor window.

11.4.3 Setting the warning message to be displayed when a jobnet is registered for fixed execution

During fixed execution registration, if you enter an invalid fixed period, the warning message. "KAVV357-Q The fixed schedule period is over n months. Are you sure you want to register for execution?" appears. You can set a required value to "n months", which is the decision standard.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsFixedRegistrationWarningTerm=1-120 (return)

If you omit this setting, no warning message is displayed when registering a jobnet for fixed execution. If you specify a value outside the specifiable range, 6 is assumed.

Example

Set 12 months for the decision standard of the fixed period.

jajsFixedRegistrationWarningTerm=12 (return)

11.4.4 Displaying job groups and planning groups in the tree area when the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is opened

You can configure the tree and list areas to behave as follows when you display the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) from a window in which a job group or planning group is selected:

Tree area

Displays the job group or planning group that was selected in the source window.

List area

Displays the subordinate units of the job group or planning group that was selected in the source window.

When you perform the following operation, the job group or planning group you select appears in the tree area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

Select a job group or planning group in the search result list area of the Search window, and from the View menu, choose Main.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOpenSelectUnitListArea={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to display the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) with the unit selected in the source window displayed in the tree area. Specify Yes to display the window with the unit selected in the source window selected in the list area, and the tree area expanded from one level above that unit.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To display the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) with the unit selected in the source window shown in the tree area and the hierarchy below that unit shown in the list area:

jajsOpenSelectUnitListArea=No (return)

11.4.5 Setting the display status of the list area

You can specify how units are displayed in the list area and detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Specify from:

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set the list area display status:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Main page.

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

Set the following items for the List area of main window.

Icon color

Specify whether to display icons in the list area in colors according to the unit status or results.

For example, in a jobnet that terminated abnormally and schedules no execution (unscheduled status), if the jobnet icon color shows the unit status, it appears in gray. If it shows the unit result, the jobnet icon appears in pale red.

Show color image in status and result

Specify whether to display color images that represent the execution status, execution results, and delay status in the Status and Result columns in the list area and the Status column of the detailed information area.

Display status of a job group

Specify whether to display explanation about the status for a job group displayed in the list area.

If you specify the job group status to be displayed, the job group icon is displayed in a color indicating the jobnet status in the job group. In addition, the execution result of the jobnet appears in the Result column for the job group.

If the job group contains multiple jobnets and even one jobnet ends abnormally, the jobnet icon is displayed in a color indicating an abnormal end. Also if a jobnet in a nested job group ends normally, upper job groups are displayed in the color indicating an abnormal end.

If you specify the job group status not to appear, the job group icon is not colored. No jobnet execution result appears for Result.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings for Icon color and Show color image in status and result take effect. The setting for Display status of a job group takes effect the next time you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

11.4.6 Specifying the columns displayed in the list area

You can set items displayed in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and the order in which they appear.

Specify from:

The Main Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box

Procedure

To specify items to be displayed in the list area:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Display Item Setup.

The Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

In the Display Item Setup dialog box, choose the Main Window page.

The Main Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

Specify the items to be displayed.

If you want to show items:

In Displayable items, select all the items you want to display in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), and then click the Add button. The selected items move to Displayed items.

If you want to hide items:

In Displayed items, select all the items you do not want to display in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), and click the Delete button. The selected items move to Displayable items.

Specify the sequence for displaying the items.

Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the items in Displayed items into the sequence you want them to be displayed in the list area. The uppermost item in Displayed items will be in the leftmost position of the list area.

Click the OK button.

When you choose Options and Display Item Setup in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the setting takes effect after you close the Display Item Setup dialog box.

When you perform the above operation in a window excluding the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the setting becomes effective after you restart the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

11.4.7 Preventing unit selection and the scroll position from being maintained after the window is updated or list filtering is specified

You can prevent JP1/AJS3 - View from keeping the same units selected and maintaining the same scroll position when you select Refresh in the JP1/AJS3 - View window or specify list filtering.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsKeepSelectAndScrollAfterRefresh={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No if you do not want to keep the same units selected and maintain the same scroll position after you refresh the screen or apply a list filter. Specify Yes to keep the same units selected and maintain the same scroll position.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To prevent JP1/AJS3 - View from keeping the same units selected and maintaining the same scroll position when you refresh the window contents or specify list filtering:

jajsKeepSelectAndScrollAfterRefresh=No (return)

11.4.8 Displaying the operation menu items other than Register for Execution and Cancel Registration in a pop-up menu

You can display Execution Prohibited, Hold, Hold-Release, Interrupted, Kill, and Rerun operations in the popup menu when you select a single jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsPopupOperation={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to display Execution Prohibited, Hold, Hold-Release, Interrupted, Kill, and Rerun operations in the popup menu. Specify No to exclude these operations from the popup menu.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To display Execution Prohibited, Hold, Hold-Release, Interrupted, Kill, and Rerun operations in the popup menu when you select a single jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

jajsPopupOperation=Yes (return)

11.4.9 Adding Add and Changing Plan to the menu bar

You can add the Add and Change Plan commands to the Operations menu of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). This also makes the Change Time, Execute Immediately, and Release Change sub-commands of Change Plan accessible from the Operations menu.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOperationExtension={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to add the Add and Change Plan commands. Specify No to omit these commands from the Operations menu.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Cautionary notes

The Execution Prohibited menu has been relocated from the Operations - Execution Prohibited sequence to the Operations - Change Plan - Execution Prohibited sequence.

If you select a single jobnet and execute it from the popup menu, you must also enable the setting described in 11.4.8 Displaying the operation menu items other than Register for Execution and Cancel Registration in a pop-up menu.

Example

To add the Add and Change Plan commands to the Operations menu:

jajsOperationExtension=Yes (return)

11.4.10 Changing the window that is displayed when a jobnet is double-clicked in the list area

You can change the window that is displayed when you double-click a jobnet in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The default is displaying the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To have the Jobnet Monitor window displayed:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Main page.

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Double-click on jobnet, select a window to be displayed when you double-click a jobnet.

You can select the following items:

Displaying the Jobnet Editor window

Displaying statuses in the Jobnet Monitor window

Displaying results in the Jobnet Monitor window

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you double-click a jobnet in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

11.4.11 Preventing users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box

When the information displayed in the detailed information area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is information about an execution generation, clicking the displayed unit and then choosing View, Detailed Information, and then Status, Result or Next Schedule opens the Monitor Details dialog box. Next clicking the Edit Def button in this dialog box opens the Define Details dialog box. You can disable items in the Define Details dialog box if you want to prevent users from selecting them.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDoubleClickFunction=Reference (return)

If you omit this setting, users can change job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box.

Supplementary note

This customization also takes effect when the Monitor Details dialog box is opened from the Jobnet Monitor window.

Example

To prevent users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box:

jajsDoubleClickFunction=Reference (return)

11.4.12 Displaying a smaller Execution Result Details dialog box

When the information displayed in the detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is information about an execution generation, clicking the displayed unit and then choosing the View, Detailed Information, and then Status, Result or Next Schedule displays the Monitor Details dialog box. Next, clicking the Details button in this dialog box opens the Execution Result Details dialog box. You can set whether to display a smaller version of this Execution Result Details dialog box.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSizeofExecutionResultDialogs={Normal|Middle|Large} (return)

The following table describes the sizes of the Execution Result Details dialog box when you specify Normal, Middle, and Large.

Table 11‒10: Available sizes of the Execution Result Details dialog box

No.

Size

Width (single-byte characters)

Height

Appropriate screen

1

Normal

56 characters

15 lines

640 x 480 pixels

2

Middle

106 characters

23 lines

800 x 600 pixels

3

Large

142 characters

31 lines

1,024 x 768 pixels

The default is Large. If you omit this setting, Large is assumed.

Example

Specify Middle as the size of the Execution Result Details dialog box.

jajsSizeofExecutionResultDialogs=Middle (return)

11.4.13 Specifying the first execution time

You can specify the period of time required for the first execution for calculation of the scheduled end date and time in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

The specified first execution time is used for the display in the Daily Schedule window and for setting the first execution time for monthly execution simulations.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To specify the first execution time:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Execution time, in First execution time, enter the length of time required for the first execution.

For the first execution time, you can specify a value from 1 to 86,400 (in seconds). The default value is 1200.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect when you choose Refresh in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), when automatic update is performed, or the next time you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

11.4.14 Changing the maximum number of units to be monitored

You can change the number of monitored units that can be registered in the summary list of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSummaryUnitListCount=1-500 (return)

The default is 100. If you omit this setting, 100 is assumed.

Example

Specify 400 as the maximum number of units to be monitored.

jajsSummaryUnitListCount=400 (return)

11.4.15 Displaying User name in the Replace drop-down list box in the Tool Entry dialog box

Choose Options and then Set Tool in the JP1/AJS3 - View window to display the Tool Settings dialog box. When you click the Add button in this dialog box, the Tool Entry dialog box appears. This setting determines whether User name appears in the Replace drop-down list in the Tool Entry dialog box.

This setting is valid in JP1/AJS3 - View version 09-10 or later.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsToolEntryReplaceUserName={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to display User name in the Replace drop-down list. Specify No to omit User name from the list.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To prevent User name from appearing in the Replace drop-down list in the Tool Entry dialog box:

jajsToolEntryReplaceUserName=No (return)

11.4.16 Preventing display of a confirmation message when deleting defined schedule rules for nested jobnets with "Depends on upper-level jobnet" selected in the Schedule Settings dialog box

When you save a nested jobnet with Depends on upper-level jobnet selected in the Schedule Settings dialog box, the defined schedule rules for the jobnet are deleted automatically. This setting determines whether to display the confirmation message KAVV346-Q when saving a nested jobnet for which the Depends on upper-level jobnet check box is selected and to which a defined schedule rule is assigned.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDeleteScheduleMessage={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to not display the confirmation message, and Yes to display the confirmation message.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To prevent the confirmation message KAVV346-Q from being displayed when saving a nested jobnet for which the Depends on upper-level jobnet check box is selected and to which a defined schedule rule is assigned:

jajsDeleteScheduleMessage=No (return)

11.4.17 Preventing jobnets that have been registered for execution from appearing in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu

You can specify whether to display jobnets that have been registered for execution in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected in the Function Menu area. If you configure JP1/AJS3 - View to not display such jobnets, you can prevent users from performing operations on jobnets that have been registered for execution when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDisplayRegisteredJobnetDefinition={Yes|No} (return)

To prevent the display of jobnets that have been registered for execution, specify No. To display such jobnets, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Cautionary note

You cannot use the following menu commands with jobnets that have been registered for execution, even if JP1/AJS3 - View is configured to display such jobnets:

Choose File, and then Restore

Choose Edit, and then Edit

Choose Edit, and then Delete

Choose Edit, and then Waiting Conditions Settings

Choose Edit, and then Properties

Choose Jobnet Editor#

#: This menu command is an item that is displayed only on the pop-up menu in the detailed information area.

Example

To prevent jobnets that have been registered for execution from appearing in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from Function Menu:

jajsDisplayRegisteredJobnetDefinition=No (return)

11.4.18 Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area

You can set the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

This setting is available in JP1/AJS3 - View 11-00 or later. This function can be used regardless of the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager to which JP1/AJS3 - View is connected.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Set Display Order dialog box

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsJobgroupDisplayOrder={Change|Display|No} (return)

When Change is specified

Users can use the Set Display Order dialog box to set the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

When Display is specified

Users cannot display the Set Display Order dialog box. Any settings that have already been made in the Set Display Order dialog box remain in effect. If no settings have been made in the dialog box, the items displayed in the tree area and in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) are displayed in the same order as when No is specified.

When No is specified

Users cannot display the Set Display Order dialog box. Any settings that have already been made in the Set Display Order dialog box are ignored. The display order of scheduler services in the tree area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) differs depending on the OS of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which a connection is to be established. If the OS is Windows, the scheduler services are sorted by name in order of character encoding. If the OS is UNIX, the scheduler services are sorted in the order in which they were created. For job groups, the display order depends on the setting for the function for displaying units in the tree area in the same order as in version 10 or earlier. The job groups that are displayed in the list area are sorted by name in Unicode order.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed. For details about the function for displaying units in the tree area in the same order as in version 10 or earlier, see 11.3.15 Displaying units in the tree area using the display order for version 10 and earlier.

Example

To allow users to set the display order of items in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) by selecting Options and then Set Display Order in the menu:

jajsJobgroupDisplayOrder=Change (return)

Procedure

Select an item in the area whose display order you want to set.

You can select any item.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), select Options and then Set Display Order.

The Set Display Order dialog box appears.

In the Set Display Order dialog box, select the Set Display Order check box.

Set the display order.

Use the Up and Down buttons to sort the items in the Display order area in the order you want them to appear in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Click OK.

The Set Display Order dialog box closes.

Items in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) are now displayed in the order you set.

Cautionary notes

Any units you add after setting the display order in the Set Display Order dialog box appear in the order in which they were added, after the units whose display order you set. This includes new units and units that were copied and pasted.

When you click Refresh or re-open the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the newly added units appear in character code order after the units whose display order you set. The display order does not change when the window contents are automatically refreshed.

If you rename a unit for which a display order is set in the Set Display Order dialog box, the display order setting no longer applies to that unit. In this situation, the position of the unit in the list will not change immediately. When you click Refresh or re-open the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the renamed unit will appear in character code order after job groups for which a display order is set. The display order does not change when the window contents are automatically refreshed. If you want to change the display order for the renamed unit, you can do so again in the Set Display Order dialog box.

11.5 Customizing the Jobnet Editor window

This section describes the following methods of customizing the Jobnet Editor window:

Setting whether exclusive editing mode is permitted when the Jobnet Editor window opens

Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window is displayed

Specifying the settings regarding the display of unit names and comments in the map area

Resizing the map area

Zooming the display size of the map area

Changing the background image of the map area

Keeping a nested jobnet selected after moving up in the hierarchy

Changing the color indicating the selected status

Specifying the highlight colors for preceding and succeeding units in the map area

Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units)

Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked

Hiding the icons of unused units in the icon list

Suppressing the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area

Displaying the full names of jobnets

Disabling exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window

Displaying a confirmation message when deleting a relation line

Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor windows

Replacing "Paste (Units and relations)" and "Paste (Units only)" with the menu items and behavior from version 10-50 and earlier

11.5.1 Setting whether exclusive editing mode is permitted when the Jobnet Editor window opens

You can specify that the mode is to be set the exclusive edit mode when the Jobnet Editor window starts.

Specify from:

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set the exclusive edit mode:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Main page.

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Exclusive edit when Jobnet Editor starts of Setting when window starts, specify whether to set the exclusive edit mode is to be used when the Jobnet Editor window starts.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Jobnet Editor window.

11.5.2 Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window is displayed

You can configure the tree and map areas to behave as follows when you display the Jobnet Editor window from a window in which a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet is selected:

The behavior of the tree and map areas when you display the Jobnet Editor window from a window in which the same unit or a unit under the same root jobnet is selected depends on the setting in 11.5.17 Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor windows.

Tree area

The nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet selected in the source window is displayed.

Map area

The subordinate units of the nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet selected in the source window are displayed.

When you perform any of the following operations, the nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet will be displayed in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window appears:

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the unit detailed information list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), and then choose Jobnet Editor from the Edit menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the tree area of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, and then choose Jobnet Editor from the Edit menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the tree area of the Monthly Schedule window, and then choose Jobnet Editor from the Edit menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the search result list area of the Search window, and then choose Jobnet Editor from the Edit menu.

Select a nested jobnet in the Wait Conditions Settings List window, and from the Edit menu, choose Jobnet Editor and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOpenSelectUnitMapArea={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to display the unit selected in the source window in the tree area when you display the Jobnet Editor window. Specify Yes to display the Jobnet Editor window with the tree area expanded from one level above the unit selected in the source window, and with the unit selected in the source window selected in the map area.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To display the Jobnet Editor window with the unit selected in the source window displayed in the tree area and its subordinate units displayed in the map area:

jajsOpenSelectUnitMapArea=No (return)

11.5.3 Specifying the settings regarding the display of unit names and comments in the map area

You can specify the number of characters after which a linefeed is inserted in a unit name when displaying the icon of a unit in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window. Also you can specify whether to display a comment under the unit name.

To display a comment under a unit name, specify the number of characters from the beginning of the comment. The comment containing as many characters as the specified number is displayed.

If you do not want to display the comment, specify an identification character at the beginning of the comment. The comment does not appear in the map area.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set display of unit names and comments:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

Set the following items for the Map Area:

Unit name new line

Specify whether to specify a return position in a unit name when displaying the icon of the unit in the map area.

Characters per line

Specify the maximum number of characters in one line. When the unit name exceeds that length, it continues to the next line.

Display comments

Specify whether to display the comment under the unit name.

Displayed characters

Specify the number of characters (not the number of bytes) from the beginning of the comment when displaying the comment under the unit name.

New line character

When displaying the comment under the unit name, specify the position of a return in the comment by a character. Select the character for New line character.

Hide comment when

To not display a comment under a specific unit, specify a symbol at the beginning of the comment. Select a character as the symbol for Hide comment when.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect when information is updated.

11.5.4 Resizing the map area

You can resize the map area of the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

Map Size dialog box

Procedure

To resize the map area:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and Map Size.

The Map Size dialog box appears.

Specify the map size by the number of icons.

You can specify values from 1 to 100 for Columns and Rows. The defaults are 10 for Columns and 8 for Rows.

Click the OK button.

The Map Size dialog box closes.

The map area of the size specified in step 2 appears.

Supplementary note

If resizing the map causes already-defined icons to go out from the map area, the map size changes automatically so that the icons can exit in the map area.

11.5.5 Zooming the display size of the map area

You can zoom the display size of the map area of the Jobnet Editor window. To define many icons in the map area, it is best to zoom down the display size to avoid problems with screen scrolling.

Specify from:

Zoom dialog box

Procedure

To zoom the display size of the map area:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose View and Zoom.

The Zoom dialog box appears.

Specify the display size with a percentage in units of 1%.

You can specify a value from 20 to 200 (%). The default is 100.

Click the OK button.

The Zoom dialog box closes.

The map area of the display size specified in step 2 appears.

Cautionary note

Specifying a too small size may cause icons to be displayed unclearly and make it difficult to read the characters.

11.5.6 Changing the background image of the map area

You can change the background image of the map area in the Jobnet Editor window.

Two methods are provided:

Setting the same background image for all units

Specify the setting in a JP1/AJS3 - View file.

Setting a background image for each unit

Specify the setting in the Wall Paper dialog box.

The following describes each method and provides cautionary notes.

(1) Setting the same background image for all units

You can specify the same background image in the Jobnet Monitor window and Jobnet Editor window for all units.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMapBackGroundPixmap=background-file-name (return)

If you omit this setting, no background image is specified.

Example

Use \tmp\japanmap.gif as the background of the map area.

jajsMapBackGroundPixmap=c:\\tmp\\japanmap.gif (return)

(2) Setting a background image for each unit

You can specify a background image for each unit. For example, you can specify different background images for different job groups or different manager hosts.

Specify from:

Wall Paper dialog box

Procedure

To set a background image for each unit:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Options and then Set Wall Paper.

The Wall Paper dialog box appears.

Specify the unit for which you want to set wallpaper.

In the tree area, select the unit for which you want to set wallpaper. By default, the unit displayed in the Jobnet Editor window is selected.

Specify the name of the file you want to use for the background.

In File name, click the ... button to display the Select File dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the name of the file you want to use for the background. When you select an image file in the Select File dialog box, File name in the Wall Paper dialog box displays the absolute path for the file.

By default, the Depends on upper-level unit check box is selected in the Wall Paper dialog box. When this check box is selected, File name is disabled.

Click the OK button.

The Wall Paper dialog box closes.

(3) Cautionary notes

Note the following when you change the background image of the map area:

You can specify a background file having the .gif or .jpg extension.

When you specify an image file for the background in a JP1/AJS3 - View file, use a slash (/) or double backslashes (\\) as a delimiter in the file path.

When specifying a JP1/AJS3 - View file, you cannot specify Japanese and other double-byte characters in file paths and file names. These characters are invalid.

Modifying the background of the map area may result in insufficient resources or degraded performance.

If the wallpaper setting specified in a JP1/AJS3 - View file as described in (1) and the wallpaper setting specified in the Wall Paper dialog box as described in (2) have both been specified, the setting in the Wall Paper dialog box takes precedence.

The wallpaper setting is managed separately for each host running JP1/AJS3 - View and each JP1 user on the host, and for each host that is to be connected. Note that the system assumes that a host specified with a host name and a host specified with an IP address in Host to connect in the Login screen are different hosts.

If the size of the selected image file is larger than the map area in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window, part of the image might not be displayed because the image is not scaled down to fit the map area.

11.5.7 Keeping a nested jobnet selected after moving up in the hierarchy

You can configure the Jobnet Editor window to keep a nested jobnet selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy. This allows you to easily identify which nested jobnet was selected in the map area before you moved the view.

Moving the view to a higher level refers to the following operations:

Selecting Upper Jobnet from the View menu in the Jobnet Editor window.

In the tree area, clicking the upper-level jobnet or the minus (-) sign next to the upper-level jobnet.

Pressing the Backspace key when the focus is in the map area.

Pressing the left or up arrow key when the focus is in the tree area.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSelectMapAreaJobnet={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No if you do not wish to keep nested jobnets selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy. To keep the nested jobnet selected, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Supplementary notes

The units that can remain selected in the map area after you move up in the hierarchy are nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets.

If you have configured JP1/AJS3 - View to display comments in the map area, the comment will also be selected.

If you use the mouse to move two or more levels up in the hierarchy, of the jobnets defined directly under the jobnet to which you moved, the jobnet that contains the nested jobnet that was displayed before the move will be selected in the map area. If you move to a higher level in the hierarchy that does not include the original nested jobnet among its descendant units, the nested jobnet will not be selected in the map area.

Example

To stop nested jobnets from remaining selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy:

jajsSelectMapAreaJobnet=No (return)

11.5.8 Changing the color indicating the selected status

You can change the color that indicates the selected status of icons that are displayed in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSelectStatusCycleColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is the system color used as the background when text or other elements are selected. If you omit this setting, the system color is applied. Note that the system color will depend on the host environment.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the color indicating the selected status to red:

jajsSelectStatusCycleColor=255:0:0 (return)

11.5.9 Specifying the highlight colors for preceding and succeeding units in the map area

You can specify the display colors used to highlight base units, preceding and succeeding units of base units, and relation lines in the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To specify highlight colors:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Click the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Highlighted display, specify the following items:

Base unit

Specify the highlight color for base units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Red (R, G, B=224, 0, 0).

Direct preceding

Specify the highlight color for the units that directly precede base units, and the relation lines between the base units and the preceding units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Orange (R, G, B=255, 128, 0).

Direct succeeding

Specify the highlight color for the units that directly succeed base units, and the relation lines between the base units and the succeeding units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Dark pink (R, G, B=255, 128, 160).

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Editor window or when the display is updated.

11.5.10 Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units)

You can change the lightness of the colors used for units that are not base units, preceding units, or succeeding units when those units are highlighted in the map area in the Jobnet Editor window. The same lightness level also applies to relation lines between units that are not base units and preceding and succeeding units.

The following table describes the lightness levels and their corresponding transparency.

Table 11‒11: Lightness levels and corresponding transparency

Level

Transparency (%)

Remarks

0

0

The unhighlighted units and relation lines are displayed in the normal manner, not in lighter hues.

1

10

--

2

20

--

3

30

--

4

40

--

5

50

--

6

60

--

7

70

--

8

80

Default setting

9

90

--

10

100

The unhighlighted units and relation lines are displayed in white.

Note that you can select and manipulate these units, and connect or delete their relation lines. Be careful, however, that you do not perform incorrect operations or select incorrect units and relation lines.

Legend:

--: None.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsEmphasisLightLevel=0-10 (return)

If you omit this setting, 8 is assumed.

Example

The following specification uses level 5 (50% transparency) to display the units and relation lines that are not base units, preceding units, or succeeding units, or their relation lines.

jajsEmphasisLightLevel=5 (return)

11.5.11 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked

You can choose whether to display the Define Details dialog box or the clicked unit (in selected status) in the center of the map area when you double-click a unit in the list area of the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change the operation performed when you double-click a unit in the list area:

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Double-click on unit, choose either of the following:

Open monitor details or define details dialog box

The Define Details dialog box for the clicked unit will open.

Select and show on center of map area

The clicked unit will appear in the center of the map area, and will be selected. If you select the Highlight preceding/succeeding rows check box, the preceding and succeeding units are highlighted.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you open the Jobnet Editor window.

11.5.12 Hiding the icons of unused units in the icon list

You can hide the icons of unused units in the icon list in the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

Set Default Values dialog box

Procedure

To hide the icons of unused units in the icon list:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and then Set Default Values.

The Set Default Values dialog box appears.

In the Set Default Values dialog box, in the tree area, select the unit type you want to hide.

The setting item area displays the settings of the unit type you selected in the tree area.

In the setting item area, select the The unit is not used check box.

Click the OK button.

The Set Default Values dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you open the Jobnet Editor window.

Supplementary notes

You can hide the icons of the following units:

- Unix Job

- PC Job

- Queue Job

- Jobnet

- Jobnet Connector

- OR Job

- Judgment Job

- Flexible Job

- HTTP Connection Job

- Receive JP1 Event job

- Monitoring Files job

- Receive Mail job

- Monitoring Log Files job

- Monitoring Event Log job

- Interval Control job

- Send JP1 Event job

- Send Mail job

- OpenView Status Report job

- Local Power Control job

- Remote Power Control job

- Passing information setting job

If you do not use any of the event jobs or any of the action jobs, in the tree area, select Events or Actions, and then select the The unit is not used check box in the setting item area.

Tabs for which The unit is not used is selected for all units are not displayed in the Jobnet Editor window.

If you select the The unit is not used check box, the setting item area for the subordinate units is disabled. However, any settings that have already been specified are stored.

11.5.13 Suppressing the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area

You can suppress the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsCommentIndicate={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to prevent comments from appearing. To display comments, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To suppress the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window:

jajsCommentIndicate=No (return)

11.5.14 Displaying the full names of jobnets

You can display jobnet names using full path names in the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMapAreaJobnetFullName={Yes|No} (return)

Select Yes to display full path names or select No to display relative names.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To display full jobnet names in text fields above the map area of the Jobnet Editor window:

jajsMapAreaJobnetFullName=Yes (return)

11.5.15 Disabling exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window

You can disable exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsEditorLock={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to disable exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window. To enable exclusive editing, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To prevent exclusive editing in the Jobnet Editor window:

jajsEditorLock=No (return)

11.5.16 Displaying a confirmation message when deleting a relation line

You can specify whether to display a confirmation message when deleting a relation line.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDeleteArrowMessage={Yes|No} (return)

To display a confirmation message when deleting a relation line, specify Yes. To not display a confirmation message, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

Display a confirmation message when deleting a relation line.

jajsDeleteArrowMessage=Yes (return)

11.5.17 Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor windows

You can allow multiple Jobnet Editor windows to open for the same unit# or for a unit under the same root jobnet#.

If you permit this action, users can open a new instance of the Jobnet Editor window even if a window is already open for the same unit# or a unit under the same root jobnet#.

The content of the tree area and map area depends on the setting in 11.5.2 Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window is displayed.

#

Applies to only release-target jobnets that have the same release definition.

Does not apply to manager jobnets.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsShowOneEditorAndMonitor={Yes|No} (return)

To allow users to open multiple Jobnet Editor windows, specify No. To prevent the opening of muliple windows, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Cautionary note

Even when No is specified, users are unable to open additional instances of the Jobnet Editor window by using the following methods:

Opening a window from another process

Opening a Jobnet Editor window whose status has been saved

However, after the saved Jobnet Editor window has been opened, opening further instances of the window will be allowed.

Opening a window by selecting File and then New Window in the Jobnet Editor window

Opening a Jobnet Editor window from a related product

Example

To allow the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor windows:

jajsShowOneEditorAndMonitor=No (return)

11.5.18 Replacing "Paste (Units and relations)" and "Paste (Units only)" with the menu items and behavior from version 10-50 and earlier

You can set whether to replace the Paste (Units and relations) and Paste (Units only) menu commands in the Jobnet Editor window with the original Paste and Paste (Extension) commands used in version 10-50 and earlier.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsPasteMenuV10={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to use the original commands and behavior instead of Paste (Units and relations) and Paste (Units only) in the Jobnet Editor window. To keep the Paste (Units and relations) and Paste (Units only) commands, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To use the original commands and behavior from version 10-50 and earlier instead of Paste (Units and relations) and Paste (Units only) in the Jobnet Editor window:

jajsPasteMenuV10=Yes (return)

11.6 Customizing the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window

This section describes the following methods of customizing the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window:

Changing the background colors for dates in the calendar

Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first

11.6.1 Changing the background colors for dates in the calendar

You can change background colors for dates in the calendar.

(1) Changing the background color for open days specified with a standard week value

You can change the background color for open days specified with a standard week value in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsWeeklyOpenDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 176:225:255. If you omit this setting, 176:225:255 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for open days specified with a standard week value to blue:

jajsWeeklyOpenDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(2) Changing the background color for closed days specified with a standard week value

You can change the background color for closed days specified with a standard week value in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsWeeklyClosedDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:180:180. If you omit this setting, 255:180:180 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for closed days specified with a standard week value to blue:

jajsWeeklyClosedDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(3) Changing the background color for open days specified based on the day of the week or absolute day

You can change the background color for open days that are specified as days of the week or as dates in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOpenDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 0:0:255. If you omit this setting, 0:0:255 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, the text color for open days in the time area and the schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window also changes.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for open days to blue:

jajsOpenDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(4) Changing the background color for closed days specified based on the day of the week or absolute day

You can change the background color for closed days that are specified as days of the week or as dates in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsClosedDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:0:0. If you omit this setting, 255:0:0 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, the text color for closed days in the time area and the schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window also changes.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for closed days to white:

jajsClosedDayColor=255:255:255 (return)

(5) Changing the background color for open days defined for an upper-level job group

You can change the background color for open days defined for an upper-level job group in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsUpperOpenDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 0:255:0. If you omit this setting, 0:255:0 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for open days to blue:

jajsUpperOpenDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(6) Changing the background color for closed days defined for an upper-level job group

You can change the background color for closed days defined for an upper-level job group in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsUpperClosedDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:200:0. If you omit this setting, 255:200:0 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for closed days to blue:

jajsUpperClosedDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(7) Changing the background color for days for which no calendar information is defined for an upper-level job group

You can change the background color for days for which no calendar information is defined for an upper-level job group in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsNoSpecifyDayColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:255:255. If you omit this setting, 255:255:255 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for days for which no calendar information is defined for an upper-level job group to red:

jajsNoSpecifyDayColor=255:0:0 (return)

11.6.2 Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first

You can specify the format of the calendar that is displayed first when you choose Edit and then Calendar in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), or when you double-click a unit on the Calendar page of the detailed information area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsCalendarForm={Year|Month} (return)

To display the annual calendar first, specify Year. To display the monthly calendar first, specify Month.

The default is Month. If you omit this setting, Month is assumed.

Example

The following specification displays the Edit Annual Calendar window first when you choose Edit and then Calendar.

jajsCalendarForm=Year (return)

11.7 Customizing the Jobnet Monitor window

This section describes the following methods of customizing the Jobnet Monitor window:

Setting window refresh intervals

Setting the monitoring mode in effect when the Jobnet Monitor window is started

Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Monitor window is displayed

Specifying the settings regarding the display of unit names and comments in the map area

Resizing the map area

Zooming the display size of the map area

Changing the background image of the map area

Keeping a nested jobnet selected after moving up in the hierarchy

Changing the color indicating the selected status

Specifying the highlight colors for preceding and succeeding units in the map area

Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units)

Changing the lightness of colors of non-execution units when displaying only execution units

Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked

Suppressing the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area

Displaying the full names of jobnets

Setting whether the Start button is displayed in the Monitor Details dialog box and which external program it launches

Preventing users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box

Automatically refreshing the Execution Result Details dialog box

Displaying a smaller Execution Result Details dialog box

Displaying the units directly under a root jobnet when the Jobnet Monitor window is opened from JP1/IM - View

Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Monitor windows

11.7.1 Setting window refresh intervals

You can specify whether to refresh information (unit statuses) displayed in Jobnet Monitor window automatically. You can set 30 to 3,600 (in seconds) for the automatic refresh interval.

Specify from:

Refresh Interval dialog box

Procedure

To set the window refresh interval:

In Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and Set Refresh Interval.

The Refresh Interval dialog box appears.

Define necessary information and click the OK button.

The defined information is accepted and the window refresh interval changes.

If you set manual refresh, choose View and Refresh to display most recent information in the window.

Supplementary note

You can also specify the automatic refresh in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window

Daily Schedule window

You can specify a separate refresh interval for each window. For example, you can specify 300 seconds for the JP1/AJS3 - View window and 30 seconds for the Jobnet Monitor window.

11.7.2 Setting the monitoring mode in effect when the Jobnet Monitor window is started

You can specify whether to display only the jobnets of the generation displayed in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or to display the most recent status and result of jobnets regardless of the contents of the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) when the Jobnet Monitor window is called from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). Note that the system assumes Monitor the previous status on the Main page of the Preferences dialog box, regardless of the setting you specify here, when you open the Jobnet Monitor window from the detailed information area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Specify from:

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set the monitoring mode:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Main page.

The Main page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts of Setting when window starts, select Monitor the previous status or Monitor the latest status and result.

Monitor the previous status

Only the generations down in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) are displayed. The status when the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) was on the screen is displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window even if the jobnet status changed after the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) appeared.

Monitor the latest status and result

The most recent status or result appears regardless of the contents of the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you start the Jobnet Monitor window.

11.7.3 Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Monitor window is displayed

You can configure the tree and map areas to behave as follows when you display the Jobnet Monitor window from a window in which a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet is selected:

The behavior when you attempt to display another Jobnet Monitor window for the same unit or a unit under the same root jobnet depends on the setting in 11.7.21 Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Monitor windows.

Tree area

The tree area is expanded from one hierarchy level higher than the unit that was selected in the source window.

Map area

The unit that was selected in the source window is selected in the map area.

This allows you to easily identify which of the nested jobnets or nested remote jobnets in the map area were selected in the source window.

When you perform any of the following operations, the nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet will be selected in the map area when the Jobnet Monitor window appears.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the unit detailed information list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), and then choose Jobnet Monitor from the Edit menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the execution result list area of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, and then choose Jobnet Monitor from the View menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the execution result list area of the Monthly Schedule window, and then choose Jobnet Monitor from the View menu.

Select a nested jobnet or nested remote jobnet in the search result list area of the Search window, and then choose Jobnet Monitor from the View menu.

Select a nested jobnet in the Wait Conditions Settings List window, and from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOpenSelectUnitMapArea={Yes|No} (return)

If you specify Yes, the Jobnet Monitor window appears with the unit that was selected in the source window selected in the map area, and the tree area expanded from one hierarchy level higher than that unit. If you specify No, the window appears with the unit that was selected in the source window selected in the tree area, and the map area showing the hierarchy under that unit.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

When you display the Jobnet Monitor window, the hierarchy in the tree area expands from one level above the unit selected in the source window, and the unit that was selected in the source window is selected in the map area.

jajsOpenSelectUnitMapArea=Yes (return)

11.7.4 Specifying the settings regarding the display of unit names and comments in the map area

You can specify the number of characters after which a linefeed is inserted in a unit name when displaying the icon of a unit in the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window. In addition, you can specify whether to display comments under unit names.

If you want to display a comment under a unit name, specify the number of characters starting from the beginning in a comment. Only the specified number of characters is allowed in a comment.

If you do not want to display a particular comment, insert text at the beginning of the comment for identification purposes so that comment will not be displayed in the map area.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To specify the settings related to the display of unit names and comments:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Map area, specify the following items:

Unit name new line

Specify whether to specify position of line breaks for unit names when unit icons are displayed in the map area.

Characters per line

Specify the number of characters after which you a line break is to be inserted for a unit name when you choose Selected in Unit name new line.

Display comments

Specify whether to display comments under unit names.

Displayed characters

Specify the number of characters (not the number of bytes) in a comment, starting from the beginning of the comment, when comments will be displayed under unit names.

New line character

When displaying the comment under the unit name, specify the position of a return in the comment by a character. Select the character for New line character.

Hide comment when

If you do not want to display a comment under some units, specify a symbol to be included at the beginning of the comment you do not want to display. For the symbol, select a character from the list box.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect when the information is updated.

11.7.5 Resizing the map area

You can resize the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

Map Size dialog box

Procedure

To resize the map area:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Edit and Map Size.

The Map Size dialog box appears.

Specify the map size by the number of icons.

You can specify values from 1 to 100 for Columns and Rows. The defaults are 10 for Columns and 8 for Rows.

Click the OK button.

The Map Size dialog box closes.

The map area of the size specified in procedure step 2 appears.

Supplementary note

If resizing the map area causes already-defined icons to go out from the map area, the map size changes automatically so that the icons can exit in the map area.

11.7.6 Zooming the display size of the map area

You can zoom the display size of the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window. To define many icons in the map area, it is useful to zoom down the display size to avoid problems with screen scrolling.

Specify from:

Zoom dialog box

Procedure

To zoom the display size of the map area:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose View and Zoom.

The Zoom dialog box appears.

Specify the display size as a percentage in units of 1%.

You can specify a value from 20 to 200 (%). The default is 100.

Click the OK button.

The Zoom dialog box closes.

The map area of the display size specified in step 2 appears.

Cautionary note

Specifying a too small size may cause icons to be displayed unclearly and make it difficult to easily read characters.

11.7.7 Changing the background image of the map area

You can change the background image of the map area in the Jobnet Monitor window.

Two methods are provided:

Setting the same background image for all units

Specify the setting in a JP1/AJS3 - View file.

Setting a background image for each unit

Specify the setting in the Wall Paper dialog box.

The following describes each method and provides cautionary notes.

(1) Setting the same background image for all units

You can specify the same background image in the Jobnet Monitor window and Jobnet Editor window for all units.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMapBackGroundPixmap=background-file-name (return)

If you omit this setting, no background image is specified.

Example

Use \tmp\japanmap.gif as background of the map area.

jajsMapBackGroundPixmap=c:\\tmp\\japanmap.gif (return)

(2) Setting a background image for each unit

You can specify a background image for each unit. For example, you can specify different background images for different job groups or different manager hosts.

Specify from:

Wall Paper dialog box

Procedure

To set a background image for each unit:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and then Set Wall Paper.

The Wall Paper dialog box appears.

Specify the unit for which you want to set wallpaper.

In the tree area, select the unit for which you want to set wallpaper. By default, the unit displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window is selected.

Specify the name of the file you want to use for the background.

In File name, click the ... button to display the Select File dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the name of the file you want to use for the background. When you select an image file in the Select File dialog box, File name in the Wall Paper dialog box displays the absolute path for the file.

By default, the Depends on upper-level unit check box is selected in the Wall Paper dialog box. When this check box is selected, File name is disabled.

Click the OK button.

The Wall Paper dialog box closes.

(3) Cautionary notes

Note the following when you change the background image of the map area:

You can specify a background file having the .gif or .jpg extension.

When you specify an image file for the background in a JP1/AJS3 - View file, use a slash (/) or double backslashes (\\) as a delimiter in the file path.

When specifying a JP1/AJS3 - View file, you cannot specify Japanese and other double-byte characters in file paths and file names. These characters are invalid.

Modifying the background of the map area may result in insufficient resources or degraded performance.

If the wallpaper setting specified in a JP1/AJS3 - View file as described in (1) and the wallpaper setting specified in the Wall Paper dialog box as described in (2) have both been specified, the setting in the Wall Paper dialog box takes precedence.

The wallpaper setting is managed separately for each host running JP1/AJS3 - View and each JP1 user on the host, and for each host that is to be connected. Note that the system assumes that a host specified with a host name and a host specified with an IP address in Host to connect in the Login screen are different hosts.

If the size of the selected image file is larger than the map area in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window, part of the image might not be displayed because the image is not scaled down to fit the map area.

11.7.8 Keeping a nested jobnet selected after moving up in the hierarchy

You can configure the Jobnet Monitor window to keep a nested jobnet selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy. This allows you to easily identify which nested jobnet was selected in the map area before you moved the view.

Moving the view to a higher level refers to the following operations:

Selecting Upper Jobnet from the View menu in the Jobnet Monitor window.

In the tree area, clicking the upper-level jobnet or the minus (-) sign next to the upper-level jobnet.

Pressing the Backspace key when the focus is in the map area.

Pressing the left or up arrow key when the focus is in the tree area.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSelectMapAreaJobnet={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No if you do not wish to keep nested jobnets selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy. To keep the nested jobnet selected, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Supplementary notes

The units that can remain selected in the map area after you move up in the hierarchy are nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets.

If you have configured JP1/AJS3 - View to display comments in the map area, the comment will also be selected.

If you use the mouse to move two or more levels up in the hierarchy, of the jobnets defined directly under the jobnet to which you moved, the jobnet that contains the nested jobnet that was displayed before the move will be selected in the map area. If you move to a higher level in the hierarchy that does not include the original nested jobnet among its descendant units, the nested jobnet will not be selected in the map area.

Example

To prevent nested jobnets from remaining selected in the map area when you move the view to a higher level in the hierarchy:

jajsSelectMapAreaJobnet=No (return)

11.7.9 Changing the color indicating the selected status

You can change colors indicating the selected status for an icon in the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSelectStatusCycleColor=RGB-value (return)

The default is the system color used as the background when text or other elements are selected. If you omit this setting, the system color is applied. Note that the system color will depend on the host environment.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Example

The following specification changes the color indicating the selected status to red:

jajsSelectStatusCycleColor=255:0:0 (return)

11.7.10 Specifying the highlight colors for preceding and succeeding units in the map area

You can specify the display colors used to highlight base units, preceding and succeeding units of base units, and relation lines in the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To specify the colors for highlighting:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

Choose the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Highlighted display, specify the following items:

Base unit

Specify the highlight color for base units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Red (R, G, B=224, 0, 0).

Direct preceding

Specify the highlight color for the units that directly precede base units, and the relation lines between the base units and the preceding units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Orange (R, G, B=255, 128, 0).

Direct succeeding

Specify the highlight color for the units that directly succeed base units, and the relation lines between the base units and the succeeding units. To do so, click the Select button to display the Select Color dialog box, and then select a color. The default is Dark pink (R, G, B=255, 128, 160).

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Monitor window or when the display is updated.

11.7.11 Changing the lightness of colors of units that are not highlighted units (base units and preceding and succeeding units)

You can change the lightness of the colors used for units that are not base units, preceding units, or succeeding units when those units are highlighted in the map area in the Jobnet Monitor window. The same lightness level also applies to relation lines between units that are not base units and preceding and succeeding units.

The following table describes the lightness levels and their corresponding transparency.

Table 11‒12: Lightness levels and corresponding transparency (highlighting)

Level

Transparency (%)

Remarks

0

0

The unhighlighted units and relation lines are displayed in the normal manner, not in light hues.

1

10

--

2

20

--

3

30

--

4

40

--

5

50

--

6

60

--

7

70

--

8

80

Default setting

9

90

--

10

100

The unhighlighted units and relation lines are displayed in white (causing them to disappear).

However, you can still select and perform operations (such as deletion) on units and relation lines, so be careful not to operate on them unknowingly or by mistake.

Legend:

--: None.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsEmphasisLightLevel=0-10 (return)

If you omit this setting, 8 is assumed.

Example

The following specification uses level 5 (50% transparency) to display the units and relation lines that are not base units, preceding units, or succeeding units, or their relation lines.

jajsEmphasisLightLevel=5 (return)

11.7.12 Changing the lightness of colors of non-execution units when displaying only execution units

You can change the lightness of the colors used for units other than those already executed or scheduled to execute today, when Only Execution Units is selected in the View menu in the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window.

The following table describes the lightness levels and their corresponding transparency.

Table 11‒13: Lightness levels and corresponding transparency (Only Execution Units)

Level

Transparency (%)

Remarks

0

0

Units other than those already executed or scheduled to execute today are displayed in the normal manner, not in light hues.

1

10

--

2

20

--

3

30

--

4

40

--

5

50

--

6

60

--

7

70

--

8

80

Default setting

9

90

--

10

100

Units other than those already executed or scheduled to execute today and relation lines are displayed in white (causing them to disappear).

However, you can still select and perform operations (such as deletion) on units and relation lines, so be careful not to operate on them unknowingly or by mistake.

Legend:

--: None.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOnlyexecutionLightLevel=0-10 (return)

If you omit this setting, 8 is assumed.

Example

The following specification uses level 5 (50% transparency) to display the units other than those already executed or scheduled to execute today and relation lines.

jajsOnlyexecutionLightLevel=5 (return)

11.7.13 Changing the operation performed when a unit in the list area is double-clicked

You can choose whether to display the Monitor Details dialog box or the clicked unit (in selected status) in the center of the map area when you double-click a unit in the list area of the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To change the operation performed when you double-click a unit in the list area:

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Options and then Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Editor/Monitor page.

The Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Double-click on unit, choose either of the following:

Open monitor details or define details dialog box

The Monitor Details dialog box for the clicked unit will open.

Select and show on center of map area

The clicked unit will appear in the center of the map area, and will be selected. If you select the Highlight preceding/succeeding rows check box, preceding units and succeeding units are highlighted.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The settings take effect the next time you open the Jobnet Monitor window.

11.7.14 Suppressing the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area

You can suppress the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsCommentIndicate={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to prevent comments from appearing. To display comments, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

To suppress the display of a comment when the mouse pointer is positioned at an icon in the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window:

jajsCommentIndicate=No (return)

11.7.15 Displaying the full names of jobnets

You can display jobnets by their full names in the text field at the top of the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window.

Specify from:

JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMapAreaJobnetFullName={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to display the jobnet names by their full names and No to specify the jobnets by their relative names.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To display full jobnet names in text fields above the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window:

jajsMapAreaJobnetFullName=Yes (return)

11.7.16 Setting whether the Start button is displayed in the Monitor Details dialog box and which external program it launches

When you double-click a job icon or a unit displayed in the map area or list area of the Jobnet Monitor window, the Monitor Details dialog box appears. You can specify whether the Start button appears in the Monitor Details dialog box, and configure the button to launch a different external program for each custom job.

By assigning a suitable external program to the Start button, you can more easily check the detailed execution status of custom jobs.

Specify from:

Custom job extended settings file

The location of the model file for the custom job extended settings file is as follows:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir\CJNAME.cjx.model

The default value of %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

Procedure

Register a custom job.

Skip this step if you are assigning an external program to an existing custom job.

For details about how to register a custom job, see the following references:

For a default custom job

See 3.2 Registering default custom jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

For a custom PC job or custom Unix job

See 3.3 Registering custom PC jobs or custom Unix jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide

Copy the custom job extended settings file.

Copy the model custom job extended settings file and give it the following name:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir\custom-job-name#.cjx

The default value of %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#

The character string you specified in the Name field of the Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box in step 1.

Edit the file you copied in a text editor such as Notepad.

Use the following format. Do not change any entries that are not described here.

<DTLSHWBTN SHOW="true|false">

Specify true to display the Start button in the Monitor Details dialog box, and false to not display the button.

<DTLSHWPROG>"path-of-external-program" parameters-passed-to-external-program</DTLSHWPROG>

The character string in this format must not exceed 2,048 bytes in total.

Specify the following information:

- path-of-external-program

Specify an absolute or relative path to the external program to be launched when you click the Start button. Specify relative paths from the installation folder of JP1/AJS3 - View.

If the path to the external program contains spaces, enclose the entire path in double quotation marks (").

- parameters-passed-to-external-program

Specify an arbitrary character string or alternate string to pass to the external program. If you specify an alternate string, the string is replaced with the value obtained when the Monitor Details dialog box opens. If you specify the same alternate string more than once, each instance of the alternate string is replaced with the same value. If the system cannot acquire the information needed to replace the string, the alternate string is passed as-is to the external program.

The following table lists the variable strings you can specify.

No.

Variable string

Information passed to external program

1

(MAN_HOST)#1

Name of manager host where job execution is requested

2

(SERVICE_NAME)

Name of scheduler service where job execution is requested

3

(UNIT_NAME)#2

Full unit name of job

4

(EXEC_ID)

Job execution ID

5

(JOB_ID)

Job number

6

(EXEC_HOST)#3

Name of job execution host

#1

Replaced by the logical host name (in short format) of the manager host that requested the job. If you are connected to a version 09-00 or earlier of JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the variable is not replaced and the string (MAN_HOST) is passed as-is to the external program.

#2

If a unit name contains any of the following characters, an error occurs when the external program starts:

" (double quotation mark), &, ' (right single quotation mark), *, <, >, ?, [, \, ], ^, ' (left single quotation mark), {, |, }, and ~

#3

Replaced by the execution host name in the execution agent definition that was in effect at the manager host when the job was executed.

Save the custom job extended settings file you edited in UTF-8 format.

If you are using Notepad, choose Save As from the File menu, and then select UTF-8 from the Encoding drop-down menu.

11.7.17 Preventing users from changing job definitions when the Define Details dialog box is opened from the Monitor Details dialog box

When you double-click a job icon or a unit in the map area or list area in the Jobnet Monitor window, the Monitor Details dialog box appears. In this dialog box, clicking the Edit Def button displays the Define Details dialog box. You can disable each item in this dialog box so that the user cannot choose it.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDoubleClickFunction=Reference (return)

If you omit this setting, you can change job definitions when you open the Define Details dialog box from the Monitor Details dialog box.

Supplementary note

This customization also takes effect when the Monitor Details dialog box is opened from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Example

To prevent users from changing job definitions when they open the Define Details dialog box from the Monitor Details dialog box:

jajsDoubleClickFunction=Reference (return)

11.7.18 Automatically refreshing the Execution Result Details dialog box

When you click a unit icon or a unit in the map area or list area of the Jobnet Monitor window, and then choose View and then Detailed Information, the Monitor Details dialog box appears. In this dialog box, clicking the Details button displays the Execution Result Details dialog box. You can set whether to automatically refresh the contents of this Execution Result Details dialog box.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsAutoRefreshErrorOut={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes to automatically refresh the contents of the Execution Result Details dialog box. To disable automatic refresh, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

To automatically refresh the contents of the Execution Result Details dialog box:

jajsAutoRefreshErrorOut=Yes (return)

11.7.19 Displaying a smaller Execution Result Details dialog box

When you click a unit icon or a unit in the map area or list area of the Jobnet Monitor window, and then choose View and then Detailed Information, the Monitor Details dialog box appears. In this dialog box, clicking the Details button displays the Execution Result Details dialog box. You can set whether to display a smaller version of this Execution Result Details dialog box.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSizeofExecutionResultDialogs={Normal|Middle|Large} (return)

The following table lists the dialog box sizes displayed when Normal, Middle and Large are specified.

Table 11‒14: Execution Result Details dialog box sizes on the screen

No.

Size

Columns (single-byte characters)

Rows

Appropriate screen

1

Normal

56 characters

15 rows

640 x 480 pixels

2

Middle

106 characters

23 rows

800 x 600 pixels

3

Large

142 characters

31 rows

1,024 x 768 pixels

The default is Large. If you omit this setting, Large is assumed.

Supplementary note

This customization also takes effect when the Monitor Details dialog box is opened from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Example

Specify Middle for the Execution Result Details dialog box size.

jajsSizeofExecutionResultDialogs=Middle (return)

11.7.20 Displaying the units directly under a root jobnet when the Jobnet Monitor window is opened from JP1/IM - View

When linking with JP1/IM - View, you can open the Jobnet Monitor window by selecting a job in the Event Console window of JP1/IM - View and clicking the Start Monitor button. In this situation, you can have the Jobnet Monitor window display the units directly under the root jobnet of the selected job in the map area.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsExecJobnetMonitorAllJobName={Yes|No} (return)

Specify No to display the units directly below the root jobnet of the selected job in the map area. To display the selected job directly in the map area, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

If you specify Yes but the units directly below the root jobnet still appear in the map area, you need to change the jobnet monitor start interface definition file in JP1/IM.

To change the file:

Terminate JP1/IM - View started.

On the JP1/IM - Manager host, change the extension of the definition file for opening monitor windows, and then back up the file.

Change the extensions of the following files:

In Windows:

JP1/IM - Manager-installation-folder\conf\console\monitor\hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

or

shared-folder\jp1cons\conf\console\monitor\hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

In UNIX:

/etc/opt/jp1cons/conf/console/monitor/hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

or

shared-directory/jp1cons/conf/console/monitor/hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

For example, you can change the extensions as follows:

Before the change: hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

After the change: hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf.bak

Copy the definition file for opening monitor windows from the JP1/AJS3 - View host to the JP1/IM - Manager host.

Copy the following files:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf\hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf.0700

Change the name of the file copied in procedure step 3 as follows:

Before the change: hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf.0700

After the change: hitachi_jp1_ajs2_mon.conf

Restart the JP1/IM - Manager service.

Cautionary note

If you performed an upgrade installation or an overwrite installation for JP1/IM - Manager after you stored the jobnet monitor start interface definition file in the JP1/IM - Manager installation folder, store the file in the folder again.

Example

To display the units directly below the root jobnet of the selected job in the map area:

jajsExecJobnetMonitorAllJobName=No (return)

11.7.21 Permitting the opening of multiple Jobnet Monitor windows

You can allow multiple Jobnet Monitor windows to be opened for the same unit# or for units under the same root jobnet#.

If you permit this action, users can open a new instance of the Jobnet Monitor window even if a window is already open for the same unit# or a unit under the same root jobnet#.

The content of the tree area and map area depends on the setting in 11.7.3 Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Monitor window is displayed.

#

Applies only to units whose generation (execution ID) and monitoring mode are the same.

Does not apply to root remote jobnets and nested remote jobnets.

The Jobnet Monitor window opened for jobnets at the connection destination of the jobnet connector is not prevented from opening.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsShowOneEditorAndMonitor={Yes|No} (return)

To allow users to open multiple Jobnet Monitor windows, specify No. To prevent the opening of muliple windows, specify Yes.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Cautionary note

Even when No is specified, users cannot open additional instances of the Jobnet Monitor window using the following methods:

Opening a window from another process

Opening a Jobnet Monitor window whose status has been saved

However, after the saved Jobnet Monitor window has been opened, opening further instances of the window will be allowed.

Opening a Jobnet Monitor window from a related product

Example

To allow the opening of multiple Jobnet Monitor windows:

jajsShowOneEditorAndMonitor=No (return)

11.8 Customizing the Daily Schedule window

This section describes the following methods of customizing the Daily Schedule window:

Specifying the first execution time

Specifying the hour system used for the Time area display

Setting window refresh intervals

Setting the sort sequence of unit names in the tree area

Hiding root jobnets without schedule information

Changing the background colors of the time area and schedule area

Specifying the columns displayed in the execution result list

11.8.1 Specifying the first execution time

Specify the first execution time of a unit.

The specified first execution time is used for the calculation of the scheduled end date and time in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) and for the first execution time for monthly execution simulations.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set the first execution time:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

In Execution time, in First execution time, enter the length of time required for the first execution.

For the first execution time, you can specify a value from 1 to 86,400 (in seconds). The default value is 1200.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you execute Refresh in the Daily Schedule window, automatic refresh is performed, or you display the Daily Schedule window.

11.8.2 Specifying the hour system used for the Time area display

Specify the hour system used for the Time area display in the Daily Schedule window.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To set display hours:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Daily display time of Display hours, specify whether to display the time area of the Daily Schedule window on a 24-hours basis (current day) or on a 48-hours basis (current and next day).

If you have specified a schedule that takes two days, click 48 hours to make it easier to view the execution schedule.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Daily Schedule window.

11.8.3 Setting window refresh intervals

You can specify whether to automatically refresh information (unit status) displayed in Daily Schedule window. You can set 30 to 3,600 (in seconds) for the automatic refresh interval.

Specify from:

The Refresh Interval dialog box

Procedure

To set the window refresh interval:

In Daily Schedule window, choose Options and Set Refresh Interval.

The Refresh Interval dialog box appears.

Define necessary information and click the OK button.

The definition is accepted and the window refresh interval changes.

To refresh manually, choose View and Refresh. The most recent information appears in the window.

Supplementary note

You can also specify the automatic refresh in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window

Daily Schedule window

You can specify a separate refresh interval for each window. For example, you can specify 300 seconds for the JP1/AJS3 - View window and 30 seconds for the Daily Schedule window.

11.8.4 Setting the sort sequence of unit names in the tree area

You can specify whether the unit names displayed in the tree area of the Daily Schedule window are displayed in order of name or execution time. The default order is name.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

The Daily Schedule window

Procedure (for specification from the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box)

To specify the order in which unit names are displayed:

In the Daily Schedule window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Order display by: of Tree area of the Daily/Monthly windows, select Name or Execution time.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Daily Schedule window.

Procedure (for specification from the Daily Schedule window)

To specify the order in which unit names are to be displayed:

In the Daily Schedule window, perform either of the following operations:

To display the units in the order of name

Choose View, Display Order, and Name.

To display the units based on the earliest execution start time

Choose View, Display Order, and Execution Time.

The setting becomes effective when you perform the operation:

11.8.5 Hiding root jobnets without schedule information

You can hide a root jobnet without displaying any schedule information in the tree area of the Daily Schedule window.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To hide a root jobnet without displaying any schedule information:

In the Daily Schedule window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Daily (hierarchy) of Root jobnet with no schedule, select Hide.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Daily Schedule window.

11.8.6 Changing the background colors of the time area and schedule area

You can change the background color for the date/time area and schedule area in the Daily Schedule window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDailyScheduleBackground=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:255:255. If you omit this setting, 255:255:255 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Cautionary note

Lines and characters are black. If you change the background color to black or a similar dark color, lines or characters may not be legible.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for the date/time area and schedule area to yellow:

jajsDailyScheduleBackground=255:255:0 (return)

11.8.7 Specifying the columns displayed in the execution result list

You can specify the items to be displayed in the execution result list in the Daily Schedule window and the display sequence of the items.

Specify from:

The Daily Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box

Procedure

To set display items in the list area:

In the Daily Schedule window, choose Options and Display Item Setup.

The Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

In the Display Item Setup dialog box, choose the Daily Window page.

The Daily Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

Specify the items to be displayed.

If you want to show items:

In Displayable items, select all the items you want to display in the execution result list in the Daily Schedule window, and click the Add button. The selected items move to Displayed items.

If you want to hide items:

In Displayed items, select all the items you do not want to display in the execution result list in the Daily Schedule window, and click the Delete button. The selected items move to Displayable items.

Specify the sequence for displaying the items.

Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the items in Displayed items in the sequence you want them to be displayed in the execution result list. The uppermost item in Displayed items will be in the leftmost position in the execution result list.

Click the OK button.

If you chose Options and Display Item Setup in the Daily Schedule window, the setting takes effect after you close the Display Item Setup dialog box.

If you perform the above operation in a window other than the Daily Schedule window, the setting becomes effective after you restart the Daily Schedule window.

11.9 Customizing the Monthly Schedule window

This section describes the following methods of customizing the Monthly Schedule window:

Performing a monthly execution simulation

Setting the sort sequence of unit names in the tree area

Hiding root jobnets without schedule information

Hiding planning groups

Changing the background colors of the time area and schedule area

Changing the colors of text in the time area and schedule area

Specifying the columns displayed in the execution result list

Displaying the execution schedule of unregistered jobnets in the execution result list

Changing how the current day is positioned in the Time area and Schedule area

11.9.1 Performing a monthly execution simulation

Monthly execution simulation is the process of determining an execution schedule of jobnets registered for planned execution. You can display the execution schedule in the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To execute monthly execution simulation:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

Set the following item for Monthly execution simulation:

Simulation

Monthly execution simulation is a function for determining an execution schedule of jobnets registered for planned execution from statistics and for displaying the execution schedule in the Monthly Schedule window. You can specify whether to use this function.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect when the information is updated.

Supplementary note

When you select Perform in Monthly execution simulation, schedules are calculated and display performance degrades. This option should not be specified unless it is required.

11.9.2 Setting the sort sequence of unit names in the tree area

You can specify whether the unit names displayed in the tree area of the Monthly Schedule window are displayed in the order of name or execution time. The default is name order.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

The Monthly Schedule window

Procedure (for specification from the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box)

To set the order in which the unit names are displayed:

In the Monthly Schedule window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Order display by: of Tree area of the Daily/Monthly windows, select Name or Execution time.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Monthly Schedule window.

Procedure (for specification from the Monthly Schedule window)

To set the order in which the unit names are displayed:

In the Monthly Schedule window, perform either of the following operations:

To display the units in the order of name

Choose View, Display Order, and Name.

To display the units based on the earliest execution start time

Choose View, Display Order, and Execution Time.

The setting takes effect when you perform the operation.

11.9.3 Hiding root jobnets without schedule information

You can hide a root jobnet without displaying any schedule information in the tree area of the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To hide a root jobnet without displaying any schedule information:

In the Monthly Schedule window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Monthly of Root jobnet with no schedule, select Hide.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Monthly Schedule window.

11.9.4 Hiding planning groups

You can hide a planning group if you specify the planning group in the JP1/AJS3 - View window and display the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box

Procedure

To hide planning groups:

In the Monthly Schedule window, choose Options and Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box appears.

In the Preferences dialog box, choose the Schedule page.

The Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box appears.

For Planning group of Planning group, select Hide.

Click the OK button.

The Preferences dialog box closes. The setting takes effect the next time you display the Monthly Schedule window.

11.9.5 Changing the background colors of the time area and schedule area

You can change the background color for the time area and schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMonthlyScheduleBackground=RGB-value (return)

The default is 255:255:255. If you omit this setting, 255:255:255 is assumed.

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Cautionary note

Lines and characters are black. If you change the background color to black or a similar dark color, lines or characters may not be legible.

Example

The following specification changes the background color for the time area and schedule area to yellow:

jajsMonthlyScheduleBackground=255:255:0 (return)

11.9.6 Changing the colors of text in the time area and schedule area

You can change the character color for open days and for closed days in the time area and schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window.

(1) Changing the character color for open days in the time area and schedule area

You can change the character color for open days in the time area and schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsOpenDayColor=RGB-value (return)

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, the background color of the open days that you specify as days of the week or dates in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and the Edit Annual Calendar window also changes.

Cautionary note

Even if you specify a job group in Options - Refer to a calendar of another job group within the Schedule Settings dialog box, the calendar information of the specified job group will not be applied.

Example

The following specification sets blue as the character color for open days.

jajsOpenDayColor=0:0:255 (return)

(2) Changing the character color for closed days in the time area and schedule area

You can change the character color for closed days in the time area and schedule area in the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsClosedDayColor=RGB-value (return)

For details about RGB-value, see 11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values.

Supplementary note

When you perform this customization, the background color of the closed days that you specify as days of the week or dates in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and the Edit Annual Calendar window also changes.

Cautionary note

Even if you specify a job group in Options - Refer to a calendar of another job group within the Schedule Settings dialog box, the calendar information of the specified job group will not be applied.

Example

The following specification sets white as the character color for closed days.

jajsClosedDayColor=255:255:255 (return)

11.9.7 Specifying the columns displayed in the execution result list

You can specify the items to be displayed in the execution result list in the Monthly Schedule window and the display sequence of the items.

Specify from:

The Monthly Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box

Procedure

To set display items:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window, choose Options and Display Item Setup.

The Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

In the Display Item Setup dialog box, choose the Monthly Window page.

The Monthly Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

Specify the items to be displayed.

If you want to show items:

In Displayable items, select all the items you want to display in the execution result list in the Monthly Schedule window, and click the Add button. The selected items move to Displayed items.

If you want to hide items:

In Displayed items, select all the items you do not want to display in the execution result list in the Monthly Schedule window, and click the Delete button. The selected items move to Displayable items.

Specify the sequence for displaying the items.

Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the items in Displayed items in the sequence you want them to be displayed in the execution result list. The uppermost item in Displayed items will be in the leftmost position in the execution result list.

Click the OK button.

If you chose Options and Display Item Setup in the Monthly Schedule window, the setting takes effect after the Display Item Setup dialog box closes.

If you perform the above operation in a window other than the Monthly Schedule window, the setting becomes effective after the Monthly Schedule window restarts.

11.9.8 Displaying the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list

You can display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list of the Monthly Schedule window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsDisplayCheckingSchedule={Yes|No} (return)

To display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list, specify Yes. To prevent display of the execution schedule, specify No.

The default is No. If you omit this setting, No is assumed.

Example

Display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list.

jajsDisplayCheckingSchedule=Yes (return)

11.9.9 Changing how the current day is positioned in the Time area and Schedule area

You can change how the current day is positioned in the Time area and Schedule area of the Monthly Schedule window.

You specify the position of the current day by specifying how many days before the current day to display in these areas.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsMonthlyDisplayPastDays=0 to 20 (return)

This customization takes effect when you specify a value in the range from 0 to 20. When you specify a value, the date the specified number of days before the current day serves as the base date of the month displayed in the Monthly Schedule window. If you do not specify a value, the base date in the Monthly Schedule window is that of the higher-level unit.

By default, no value is specified.

Example

To reposition the current day by displaying the five previous days:

jajsMonthlyDisplayPastDays=5 (return)

11.10 Customizing the Search window

This section describes the following customization of the Search window:

Changing the maximum number of units displayable in the search result list area

Specifying the columns displayed in the search result list area

Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area

11.10.1 Changing the maximum number of units displayable in the search result list area

You can change the maximum number of units that are displayed in the search result list area in the Search window.

Specify from:

Files on JP1/AJS3 - View (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Specify in the following format.

jajsSearchResultCount=1 to 2147483646 (return)

The default is 1000. If you omit this setting, 1000 is assumed.

Example

Make the results of search displayed up to 5,000.

jajsSearchResultCount=5000 (return)

11.10.2 Specifying the columns displayed in the search result list area

You can specify the columns that are displayed in the search result list area in the Search window and the display sequence of the columns.

Specify from:

The Search Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box

Procedure

To specify the columns to be displayed in the search result list area:

In the Search window, choose Options and then Display Item Setup.

The Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

In the Display Item Setup dialog box, choose the Search Window page.

The Search Window page of the Display Item Setup dialog box appears.

Specify the columns you want to display.

If you want to show columns:

In Displayable items, select all the columns you want to display in the search result list area in the Search window, and click the Add button. The selected columns move to Displayed items.

If you want to hide columns:

In Displayed items, select all the columns you do not want to display in the search result list area in the Search window, and click the Delete button. The selected columns move to Displayable items.

Specify the sequence for displaying the columns.

Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the columns in Displayed items in the sequence you want them to be displayed in the search result list area. The uppermost column in Displayed items will be the leftmost position in the search result list area.

Click the OK button.

If you choose Options and then Display Item Setup in the Search window, the settings take effect after the Display Item Setup dialog box closes.

If you perform the above operation in a window other than the Search window, the settings take effect when the Search window is redisplayed.

11.10.3 Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area

You can change whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area of the Search window.

Specify from:

A JP1/AJS3 - View file (User-specified option file)

For details, see 11.1.1 Types of customization methods.

Specification

Use the following format:

jajsSearchButtonFix={Yes|No} (return)

Specify Yes if you want the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons to always appear at the bottom of the part of the search condition setting area that appears on screen. Specify No if you want the buttons to only appear when you scroll to the very bottom of the search condition setting area.

The default is Yes. If you omit this setting, Yes is assumed.

Example

The Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons appear when you scroll to the very bottom of the search condition setting area.

jajsSearchButtonFix=No (return)

11.11 Specifying colors with RGB values

RGB values are used to specify colors. Red, green and blue are specified with values between 0 and 255. One color is specified with a combination of three values.

The following table lists examples of RGB value specifications:

Table 11‒15: Example RGB values

No.

Color

RGB value

(in red-value:green-value:blue-value format)

1

White

255:255:255

2

Yellow

255:255:0

3

Light gray

192:192:192

4

Sky blue

0:255:255

5

Yellow green

0:255:0

6

Gray

128:128:128

7

Dark yellow

128:128:0

8

Dark pink

255:0:255

9

Blue green

0:128:128

10

Red

255:0:0

11

Green

0:128:0

12

Purple

128:0:128

13

Brown

128:0:0

14

Blue

0:0:255

15

Dark blue

0:0:128

16

Black

0:0:0

The table lists only example RGB values. You can use a wide range of colors within the range that can be specified with RGB values.

11.12 Creating image files

You can set a required background image for the map area of the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window. You can also set a required icon image for each object in each window.

11.12.1 How to create a background image

To display a background image in the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window, you have to create a background image and place it in JP1/AJS3 - View.

This subsection describes how to create a background image.

(1) File format that you can specify for a background image

You can specify either the gif or jpg format for the image.

(2) Software to be used

Use graphics software that can edit the gif or jpg files.

(3) Background image name

Assign a name to a background image you create.

(4) Destination to save background image

Save a created background image in the proper folder.

11.12.2 How to create an icon image

You can create icons to be displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View windows and dialog boxes.

This section describes how to create an icon image.

(1) File format that you can specify for an icon image

You can specify a gif format for the image.

(2) Software to be used

Use graphics software that can edit the gif files.

(3) Icon image size

The maximum sizes of icons are as follows: 32 x 32 (in pixels) for an icon displayed in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window and 16 x 16 (in pixels) for an icon displayed in the tree and list areas of each screen.

If you display an icon of 32 x 32 (in pixels) in the map area, there is no space between the created icon and an adjacent icon when it is displayed in the icon list of the Jobnet Editor window. It is best to create the icon of 30 x 30 (in pixels) with at least one-pixel space around the icon in the drawing area.

(4) Setting the status color area

The system displays status display colors (red for termination with detection of an error, pale green for normal termination, etc.) by filtering a specific color (RGB value 255:102:255) in a program. Therefore, you have to specify the specific color for a part displaying the status display color. In addition to parts set to RGB value 255:102:255, parts set to the following RGB values change colors according to the status display color.

Table 11‒16: Status color display RGB values

No.

RGB value (red:green:blue)

1

255:204:255

2

255:102:255

3

255:51:204

4

204:51:204

5

204:51:153

6

102:0:51

Supplementary note

The smaller the RGB value No. becomes, the paler the status color becomes. The larger number the RGB value No. becomes, the darker the status color becomes.

Specify a transparent color for a part you want to display in a transparent color.

You can use 256 colors. Even if you use 256 colors or less, colors set by the graphics software cannot be displayed by JP1/AJS3 - View correctly in some cases, depending on the display setting and the palette to be used. Check that set colors are displayed correctly by JP1/AJS3 - View.

(5) Icon image name

The names that can be assigned to icon image files are fixed. For these names, see (8) Icon images you can create as required.

(6) Destination to save default icon image

The following shows the destination to save default icon image:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\image\AJSView

JP1/AJS3 - View-instalation-folder\image\custom

(7) Location to save an icon image file created as required

User-created icon image files must be saved in the following folders:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\image\extend\user-specified\AJSView

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\image\extend\user-specified\custom

Use the appropriate folder depending on the type of user-created icon image files. For details, see (8) Icon images you can create as required.

Supplementary note

Japanese characters cannot be used in user-provided folder names.

(8) Icon images you can create as required

The table below lists the file names of icon images that can be changed from the default icon image. If no user-created icon image file is assigned, the default icon image will be displayed.

Table 11‒17: Icon images that can be created as required (AJSView folder)

No.

Icon name

File name

1

Jobnet

mapicon_jobnet.gif

2

Jobnet Connector

mapicon_jobnet_connector.gif

3

Decision Job

mapicon_judge.gif

4

OR Job

mapicon_or.gif

5

Remote Jobnet

mapicon_remote_jobnet.gif

6

Unclear type unit (map area)

mapicon_unknown.gif

7

Job

treeicon_job.gif

8

Job Group (closed status)

treeicon_jobgroup.gif

9

Job Group (opened status)

treeicon_jobgroup_open.gif

10

Jobnet (closed status)

treeicon_jobnet.gif

11

Jobnet (opened status)

treeicon_jobnet_open.gif

12

Release Target Jobnet

treeicon_jobnet_release.gif

13

Jobnet Connector (tree area)

treeicon_jobnet_connector.gif

14

Manager Job Group (closed status)

treeicon_manager_jobgroup.gif

15

Manager Jobnet

treeicon_manager_jobnet.gif

16

Planning Group (closed status)

treeicon_planning_group.gif

17

Planning Group (opened status)

treeicon_planning_group_open.gif

18

Remote Jobnet (closed status)

treeicon_remote_jobnet.gif

19

Remote Jobnet (opened status)

treeicon_remote_jobnet_open.gif

20

Unclear Type Unit (tree area)

treeicon_unknown.gif

Table 11‒18: Icon images that can be created as required (custom folder)

No.

Icon name

File name

1

OpenView Status Report Job

AomCm2Rep.gif

2

File Monitoring Job

AomFileMon.gif

3

Receive JP1 Event Job

AomIMEventRec.gif

4

JP1 Event Send Job

AomIMEventSend.gif

5

Execution Interval Control Job

AomInterval.gif

6

Monitoring Log Files Job

AomLogMon.gif

7

Receive Mail Job

AomMailRec.gif

8

Mail Send Job

AomMailSend.gif

9

Receive MQ Message Job

AomMQRec.gif

10

Message Queue Send Job

AomMQSend.gif

11

Receive MSMQ Message Job

AomMSMQRec.gif

12

Send MQ Message Job

AomMSMQSend.gif

13

Windows Event Log Monitoring Job

AomNTLogMon.gif

14

Local Power Control Job

ApmLocal.gif

15

Remote Power Control Job

ApmRemote.gif

16

JP1AMOAP Job#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMOAP.gif

17

JP1AMR3 Job (PC)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3.gif

18

JP1AMR3BW Job (PC)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3BW.gif

19

JP1AMR3CP Job (PC)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3CP.gif

20

JP1AMR3 Job (UNIX)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3UX.gif

21

JP1AMR3BW Job (UNIX)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3BWUX.gif

22

JP1AMR3CP Job (UNIX)#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1AMR3CPUX.gif

23

JP1FTP Job#

CUSTOM_PC_JP1FTP.gif

24

Passing Information Setting Job

PASVARJOB.gif

25

ADSHPC Job#

CUSTOM_PC_ADSHPC.gif

26

ADSHUX Job#

CUSTOM_PC_ADSHUX.gif

27

ADSHAPPEXEC Job#

CUSTOM_PC_ADSHAPPEXEC.gif

28

DHAJEW Job#

CUSTOM_PC_DHAJEW.gif

29

CPALINK job#

CUSTOM_PC_CPALINK.gif

30

Flexible Job

FLEXIBLEJOB.gif

31

HTTP Connection Job

HTTPJOB.gif

32

PC Job

PCJob.gif

33

Queue Job

QueueJob.gif

34

Unix Job

UnixJob.gif

#

For details about each custom job, see 3.1.1 Default custom jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

12 Windows and Dialog Boxes

This chapter describes the windows, menu commands and dialog boxes that you use in JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.1 Windows

The following figure shows the relationships among the windows that JP1/AJS3 - View displays.

Figure 12‒1: Transitions among windows

The following table lists the windows JP1/AJS3 - View displays.

Table 12‒1: Windows

Window

Description

Login screen

Logs in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

JP1/AJS3 - View window

Defines a job group, a planning group, and a root jobnet.

Registers or deregisters a jobnet for execution.

Monitors the progress of a jobnet or a planning group.

Monitors the execution status and execution result of a jobnet.

Temporarily changes the schedule of a jobnet after it has started or cancels the changed schedule.

Cancels the execution of a jobnet or forcibly ends a jobnet.

Re-executes a jobnet.

Performs release entry or release cancel for a jobnet.

Jobnet Editor window

Defines a jobnet.

Edit Monthly Calendar window

Defines monthly calendar information about a job group.

Edit Annual Calendar window

Defines Edit Annual Calendar information about a job group.

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Displays and edits a daily schedule for executing a jobnet, and displays a jobnet or job in the tree area.

Registers or deregisters a jobnet for execution.

Temporarily changes or cancels changes to the schedule of a running jobnet.

Stops or kills the execution of a jobnet.

Reruns a jobnet.

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Displays and edits a daily schedule for executing a job, or displays all jobs under the particular job group or jobnet in the tree area.

Kills the execution of a job.

Reruns a job.

Monthly Schedule window

Displays and edits a monthly schedule for executing a jobnet.

Registers or deregisters a jobnet for execution.

Temporarily changes or cancels changes to the schedule of a running jobnet.

Stops or kills the execution of a jobnet.

Reruns a jobnet.

Jobnet Monitor window

Monitors the status and results of jobnet execution.

Temporarily changes or cancels changes to the schedule of a running jobnet.

Stops or kills the execution of a jobnet.

Reruns a jobnet.

Search window

Searches for a unit.

Temporarily changes or cancels changes to the schedule of a running jobnet.

Stops or kills the execution of a jobnet.

Reruns a jobnet.

Wait Conditions Settings List window

Displays the settings of a wait condition.

Wait Conditions Statuses window

Checks the status of units with wait conditions and units whose ends are being waited for.

Temporarily enables or disables a wait condition.

12.2 Login screen

Launching JP1/AJS3 - View displays the Login screen. Use this screen to log into JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

The following figure shows the Login screen.

Figure 12‒2: Login screen

The following explains the displayed items.

User name

Specify the name of a JP1 login user. The default value is the previous login JP1 user name. For the first login, the value is blank.

Password

Specify the password for the JP1 user to be logged in. The characters you are entering will not be displayed; instead, as many asterisk (*) symbols appear.

Host to connect

Specify the host name or IP address (in dot notation such as 100.100.1.1) of the destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager host. The specified IP address must be an IPv4 address. It must not be an IPv6 address.

The default is the name of the previously connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager host. Specify a blank for the first login. The dropdown list displays up to ten JP1/AJS3 - Manager host names that were connected in the past.

Cautionary note

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Supplementary note

If the multiuser remote desktop connection function is enabled, the JP1 user name and host name that were used during the previous login are displayed for each OS user.

If you enter the above items and click the OK button, the JP1/AJS3 - View window appears.

12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window

The JP1/AJS3 - View window is mainly used for the following purposes:

Define or register units, or monitor the status of units.

Monitor the status and progress of units.

This section describes the configuration of the JP1/AJS3 - View window, menu commands, transitions of the window, and dialog boxes to be displayed.

12.3.1 Configuration of the window

The JP1/AJS3 - View window supports two display modes:

Main window

Summary Monitor window

The following describes the items that are displayed in each mode of the window.

(1) Main window

The JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) appears when you log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager while the start mode is Normal or Compatible.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) when the start mode is Normal. For details about start modes, see 4.1 Start modes of the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Figure 12‒3: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) when the start mode is Normal

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) when the start mode is Compatible.

Figure 12‒4: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) when the start mode is Compatible

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Function Menu area

The function menu area displays function menus. This area appears only when the start mode is Normal.

You can change the items to be displayed in the function menus. For details about how to specify the items to be displayed in the function menus, see 11.4.1 Changing the function menu items to be displayed.

Definition

This function menu allows you to define units and schedules.

Job Group Definition

Click Job Group Definition to perform operations regarding job group definitions in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), such as creating a job group, editing the definition of a job group, or deleting a job group.

Jobnet Definition

Click Jobnet Definition to perform operations regarding jobnet definitions in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), such as creating a jobnet, editing the definition of a jobnet, or deleting a jobnet.

Calendar Definition

Click Calendar Definition to perform operations regarding calendar definitions in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), such as editing or changing the calendar for a job group.

Schedule Definition

Click Schedule Definition to perform operations regarding schedule definitions in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), such as editing or changing the schedule of a jobnet.

Execution

This function menu allows you to register jobnets and cancel registration of jobnets.

Register for Execution

Click Register for Execution to register a jobnet for execution in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Cancel Registration

Click Cancel Registration to cancel the registration of a jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Release Entry

Click Release Entry to perform release entry for a jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Release Cancel

Click Release Cancel to perform release cancel for a jobnet in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Monitor

This function menu allows you to monitor jobnets and jobs.

Status Monitor

Click Status Monitor to check the execution schedule and result of a jobnet, the execution status of a jobnet, or generation information. Also use this menu item to re-execute or forcibly end a jobnet.

Summary Monitor

Click Summary Monitor to open the Summary Monitor window from the main window. For details about the summary monitor window, see (2) Summary Monitor window.

(b) Tree area

The tree area displays the scheduler services (root job groups) defined for JP1/AJS3 - Manager, and the subordinate job groups and planning groups. However, if the scheduler service reference restriction function is enabled, this area displays only the scheduler services that the logged-in JP1 user can access.

A maximum of 20 scheduler services can be displayed. If there are multiple scheduler services, their display order differs depending on the OS of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which a connection is to be established. If the OS is Windows, the scheduler services are sorted by name in order of character encoding. If the OS is UNIX, the scheduler services are sorted in the order they were created.

For details about how to add a scheduler service, see 6.1.1 Settings for starting multiple scheduler services in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide (for Windows) or 15.1.1 Settings for starting multiple scheduler services in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide (for UNIX).

If multiple job groups or planning groups are managed by a scheduler service, their display order depends on the setting for the function for displaying units in the tree area in the same order as in version 10 or earlier. For details, see 11.3.15 Displaying units in the tree area using the display order for version 10 and earlier.

You can freely change the display order of scheduler services and the display order of the job groups and planning groups managed by each scheduler service. For details, see 11.4.18 Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area.

(c) List area

The list area displays the units that belong directly to the unit selected in the tree area. By default, the units are sorted by name in Unicode order for each job group (job group, manager job group, or planning group) and for each jobnet (jobnet, remote jobnet, or manager jobnet).

With respect to job groups and planning groups, you can change the order in which they are displayed. For details, see 11.4.18 Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area.

When the start mode is Normal, the units to be displayed differ depending on the chosen function menu item. The following table describes the relationship between the function menu items and the units to be displayed in the list area.

Table 12‒2: Function menu items and units to be displayed in the list area

Function menu

Menu item

Unit to be displayed

Definition

Job Group Definition

Job groups

Jobnet Definition

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution#

Unregistered jobnets

Calendar Definition

Job groups

Schedule Definition

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution

Unregistered jobnets

Execution

Register for Execution

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution

Unregistered jobnets

Cancel Registration

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution

Release Entry

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution

Unregistered jobnets

Release Cancel

Job groups

Jobnets for which release entry is performed

Monitor

Status Monitor

Job groups

Jobnets registered for execution

#

This unit is not displayed by default. For details about how to display this unit, see 11.4.17 Preventing jobnets that have been registered for execution from appearing in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu.

If the root jobnet is being suspended, an icon appears to the left of the Name column in the list area to show the state of suspension. Otherwise, nothing is displayed.

For release target jobnets, in columns regarding definitions, such as Name, the definitions of jobnets with the Being applied release status appear. In columns regarding execution, such as Status and Result, information about each execution generation appears.

You can select more than one unit you want to display in the list area, by clicking them while you hold down the Ctrl or Shift key.

You can change the columns to be displayed in the list area and the sequence of the columns. For details about how to specify the columns to be displayed, see 12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box.

The width of each column to be displayed is saved when the window is closed or when the column to be displayed is changed.

Name

Displays the icon and the unit name. The color of the icon is different depending on Status or Result. Using the Preferences dialog box, you can select the color of the icon and specify whether the icon shows the state or result of the unit. For details of the setting, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Status

Displays the current status of execution.

For details about the status to be displayed, see 6.2.1 Monitoring via the JP1/AJS3 - View windows in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Result

Displays the status of the generation whose end date and time are closest to the current time.

Type

Displays the unit type.

Comment

Displays any comments defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Start time (Status) / Start time (Result)#

Displays the start date and time or scheduled start date and time of execution in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

Rerun start time (Status) / Rerun start time (Result)#

Displays the date and time of re-execution in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column is a blank if re-execution is not performed.

End time (Status) / End time (Result)#

Displays the end date and time of execution in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

Execution type (Status) / Execution type (Result)#

Displays one of the following execution types:

Planned execution

Immediate execution

Fixed execution.

Start condition (Status) / Start condition (Result)#

Displays the number of times the start condition can be used and the expiration time for the start condition in the following format:

{maximum-execution-count,expiration-time}

maximum-execution-count can be Unlimited or it can be the number of times the start condition can be used.

expiration-time can be Unlimited or it can be the expiration date and time for the start condition in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

This column is blank when no start condition is specified.

Processing time (Status) / Processing time (Result)#

Displays the length of time between the start and end of execution in hhhh:mm:ss format.

When the unit is being executed, this column displays the length of time elapsed from the start date and time.

If the unit was re-executed, this column displays the length of time that took for processing from the start of re-execution.

Time when start delayed (Status) / Time when start delayed (Result)#

Displays the date and time from which to start detecting delayed start in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column is blank when delayed start is not monitored.

Time when end delayed (Status) / Time when end delayed (Result)#

Displays the date and time from which to start detecting delayed end in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column is blank when delayed end is not monitored.

Execution ID (Status) / Execution ID (Result)#

Displays the execution ID in @[mmmm]{A-Z}nnnn format. No zero is appended before mmmm or nnnn.

Change Plan (Status) / Change Plan (Result)#

Displays whether a temporary plan change exists and the details about the change in the following format:

{change-option (details)}

change-option is either Yes or No.

details can be Change Time, Execution Prohibited, Previous execution prohibited, or Temporary linkage change.

#

These columns are displayed only for root jobnets. Note that these columns are not displayed by default. For details about how to display these columns, see 11.4.6 Specifying the columns displayed in the list area.

(d) Detailed information area

The detailed information area displays details about the units selected in the list area. The information to be displayed differs depending on the chosen function menu item. When you click an item in the Definition menu, the relevant information appears on the applicable pages.

You can minimize the detailed information area from the View menu by choosing Detailed Information Area, Area Size, and then Minimum.

The following table describes the relationship between the function menu items and the columns to be displayed in the detailed information area.

Table 12‒3: Function menu items and information to be displayed in the detailed information area

Function menu

Menu item

Page name

Column displayed

Definition

Job Group Definition

Job Group

Name

Comment

Type

Specify base day

Treat as

Set base time

Exec. order control#1

Connection range#1

Connection host#1

Connection service#1

Jobnet Connector#1

Exec. order method#1

Host to reference#2

Unit to reference#2

Owner

JP1 resource group

Jobnet Definition

Jobnet

Name

Comment

Type

Exec-agent#3

Concurrent exec.#3

No. logs to keep#3

Priority#3

Time-out period#3

Schedule option#3

Monitor jobnet#3

Hold#3

Recovery attribute#3

Exec. order control#4

Connection range#4

Connection host#4

Connection service#4

Jobnet connector#4

Exec. order method#4

Target manager#5

Host to reference#6

Unit to reference#6

Owner

JP1 resource group

Calendar Definition

Calendar

Name

Comment

Type

Weekly open Day

Weekly closed Day

Specific open day

Specific closed day

Job Group

Name

Comment

Type

Specify base day

Treat as

Set base time

Exec. order control#1

Connection range#1

Connection host#1

Connection service#1

Jobnet Connector#1

Exec. order method#1

Host to reference#2

Unit to reference#2

Owner

JP1 resource group

Schedule Definition

Schedule

Name

Comment

Type

Valid term

Refer to a calendar

Exclusive schedule

Schedule Rule

Name

Comment

Type

Rule number

Type of the jobnet start date

Start year and month

Start day

Start time

Processing cycle

Substitute schedule of closed day job

Monitor delay

Jobnet

Name

Comment

Type

Exec-agent#3

Concurrent exec.#3

No. logs to keep#3

Priority#3

Time-out period#3

Schedule option#3

Monitor jobnet#3

Hold#3

Recovery attribute#3

Exec. order control#4

Connection range#4

Connection host#4

Connection service#4

Jobnet connector#4

Exec. order method#4

Target manager#5

Host to reference#6

Unit to reference#6

Owner

JP1 resource group

Execution

Register for Execution

Cancel Registration

--

Name

Comment

Type

Registration-time

User who registered

Execution type

Planned time passed when daemon starts

Start condition#7

Start condition (count)#7

Start condition (period)#7

Release Entry

Release Cancel

--

Release target

Release ID

Release status

Release date

Release comment

Release source

Monitor

Status Monitor

--

Name

Comment

Type

Status

Scheduled start time

Start time

Rerun start time

End time

Time when start delayed

Time when end delayed

Start delay

End delay

Change plan

Hold

Execution ID

Legend:

--: No page appears.

Note:

You cannot change the columns to be displayed or the sequence of columns in the detailed information area.

#1

This column displays a definition only when the unit type is planning group. For other unit types, the column displays a hyphen (-).

#2

This column displays a definition only when the unit type is manager group. For other unit types, the column displays a hyphen (-).

#3

This column displays a hyphen (-) when the unit type is manager jobnet.

#4

This column displays a definition only when the unit type is root jobnet. For other unit types, the column displays a hyphen (-).

#5

This column displays a definition only when the unit type is remote jobnet. For other unit types, the column displays a hyphen (-).

#6

This column displays a definition only when the unit type is manager jobnet. For other unit types, the column displays a hyphen (-).

#7

This column displays a definition only when the execution type is Immediate execution. When the execution type is Planned execution or Fixed execution, the column displays a hyphen (-).

To select multiple units displayed in the detailed information area, hold down the Ctrl key or Shift key, and click the target units. You can perform operations while multiple units are selected.

Display-switching drop-down list

Use the drop-down list to switch the types of information to be displayed in the detailed information area. The types available are as follows:

Definition

Register for execution

Release

Execution generation

When the start mode is Normal, the types of information to be displayed switch, depending on the chosen function menu item. The following table describes the relationship between the function menu items and the types of information to be displayed in the detailed information area.

Table 12‒4: Function menu items and types of information to be displayed in the detailed information area

No.

Function menu item

Type of information to be displayed

Description

1

Job Group Definition

Jobnet Definition

Calendar Definition

Schedule Definition

Definition

Displays the settings that were specified when a unit was defined.

2

Register for Execution

Cancel Registration

Register for execution

Displays the information that was registered when a jobnet was registered for execution.

3

Release Entry

Release Cancel

Release

Displays the information that was registered when release entry was performed for a jobnet.

4

Status Monitor

Execution generation

Displays the information about an execution generation.

When the start mode is Compatible, the display-switching drop-down list is enabled and you can freely change the type of information to be displayed.

Show button

Click the Show button to display the details about the units selected in the list area in the detailed information area.

The following describes the columns to be displayed in the detailed information area for each type of information you select from the drop-down list.

Definition (for the Job Group page)

Select this type to display the job group definitions. The columns display the settings specified in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box for the job groups selected in the list area.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Specify base day

Displays a base day. A base day means the start day in each month. When a base day is specified as the number of days from the first day of a month, it is expressed as the nth day. When a base day is specified as a day in the week, it is expressed as a combination of an ordinal and a day in the week (example: First Monday). This column is blank when no base day is specified.

Treat as

Displays month handling. The month handling indicates whether to handle one month from the specified base day as this month or next month. This column displays None when the month handling is not specified.

Set base time

Displays base time. Base time means the time that begins the day. When base time is specified, it is expressed as hh:mm. The column displays No when no base time is set.

Exec. order control

Displays an option about whether to control the execution order of root jobnets directly under a planning group. The column displays either Yes or No.

Connection range

Displays the range of connection with a jobnet connector when Exec. order control displays Yes.

Connection host

Displays the host name of the host on which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined when Connection range displays Other service.

Connection service

Displays the scheduler service name of the scheduler service for which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined when Connection range displays Other service.

Jobnet connector

Displays the full name of the jobnet connector to be connected when Exec. order control displays Yes.

Exec. order method

Displays an option about whether to synchronize the root jobnets directly under a planning group with the start time of a jobnet connector when Exec. order control displays Yes. The column displays either Synchro or Asynchro.

Host to reference

Displays the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager that is referenced by a manager job group.

Unit to reference

Displays the name of the unit on the JP1/AJS3 - Manager that is referenced by a manager job group.

Owner

Displays the owner of the unit.

JP1 resource group

Displays the name of a JP1 resource group.

Definition (for the Jobnet page)

Select this to display the definition of jobnets. The columns display the settings specified in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box for the jobnets selected in the list area.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Exec-agent

Displays the name of the execution agent or execution agent group on which the jobnet is executed.

Concurrent exec.

Displays an option about whether to simultaneously execute multiple jobnets. The column displays either Enable or Disable.

No. logs to keep

Displays the number of logs to keep in the execution result log.

Priority

Displays a priority level. The column displays None when no priority level is specified. The column displays a value from 1 to 5 when a priority level is specified.

Time-out period

Displays expiration time. Expiration time means the length of time before a jobnet enters the Skipped so not exe. status if it has not been executed after the scheduled execution start date and time.

Schedule option

Displays the schedule option of the jobnet. The schedule option dictates how the system handles execution schedules when a jobnet fails to complete before the scheduled start time of the next generation.

Monitor jobnet

Displays the length of time required for execution as Time-required-for-execution n minutes when the delayed end of a jobnet is checked based on the time required to execute the jobnet. When the time required to execute a jobnet is not specified for jobnet monitoring, this column displays No.

Hold

Displays the setting about whether to hold the unit in advance.

The displayed information differs depending on the hold setting. The following table lists the character strings that can be displayed and the corresponding hold settings.

Table 12‒5: Hold statuses displayed in the detailed information area and their corresponding hold settings

Status

Hold setting

Yes

Yes is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

No

No is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Hold if prev. = 'abend'

Hold if prev. = 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend'

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Recovery attribute

Displays an option about whether recovery attributes exist. The column displays either Yes or No.

Exec. order control

Displays an option about whether to control the execution order of root jobnets. The column displays either Yes or No.

Connection range

Displays the range of connection with a jobnet connector when Exec. order control displays Yes.

Connection host

Displays the host name of the host on which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined when Connection range displays Other service.

Connection service

Displays the scheduler service name of the scheduler service for which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined when Connection range displays Other service.

Jobnet connector

Displays the full unit name of the jobnet connector to be connected when Exec. order control displays Yes.

Exec. order method

Displays an option about whether to synchronize the jobnet with the start time of a jobnet connector when Exec. order control displays Yes. The column displays either Synchro or Asynchro.

Target manager

Displays the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager to which remote jobnets are transferred and executed.

Host to reference

Displays the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager that is referenced by a manager jobnet.

Unit to reference

Displays the name of the unit on the JP1/AJS3 - Manager that is referenced by a manager jobnet.

Owner

Displays the owner of the unit.

JP1 resource group

Displays the name of a JP1 resource group.

Definition (for the Calendar page)

Select this to display the definition of calendars. The columns display the settings that are specified in the Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window for the job groups selected in the list area for each year. When a calendar is specified for a upper-level job group, information on that calendar is also displayed.

Display Period

Displays the period of the calendar information to be displayed when the Calendar page is displayed. The default display period is one year from the local month of the scheduler service on the connection target host when the Calendar page is displayed. For details about local dates for a scheduler service, see ajslocaldate in 4. Commands Used for Special Operation in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

<< button

Appears when the Calendar page is displayed. Click this button to display the calendar information before the current display period.

>> button

Appears when the Calendar page is displayed. Click this button to display the calendar information after the current display period.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Weekly open Day

Displays the days of the week for open days specified in Standard week in the Edit Monthly Calendar window or Edit Annual Calendar window. This column displays a blank when no weekly open day is specified.

Weekly closed Day

Displays the days of the week for closed days specified in Standard week in the Edit Monthly Calendar window or Edit Annual Calendar window. This column displays a blank when no weekly close day is specified.

Specific open day

Displays the specific open days specified in the calendar area in the Edit Monthly Calendar window or Edit Annual Calendar window in month/day format. This column displays a blank when no specific open day is specified.

Specific closed day

Displays the specific closed days specified in the calendar area in the Edit Monthly Calendar window or Edit Annual Calendar window in month/day format. This column displays a blank when no specific closed day is specified.

Definition (for the Schedule page)

Select this to display the definition of schedules. The columns display the settings specified in the Schedule Settings dialog box for the jobnets selected in the list area.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Valid term

Displays the valid period for schedule rules in yyyy/MM/dd format. This column displays a hyphen (-) when no valid period is specified.

Refer to a calendar

Displays the name of the job group that owns the target calendar when the job group containing the selected jobnet references the calendar information of a job group in another level. This column displays None when the calendar information of job groups in other levels is not referenced.

Exclusive schedule

Displays the name of a jobnet to be exclusively executed so that it will not be executed on the same day when other jobnets are executed. This column displays None when such a jobnet is not specified.

Definition (for the Schedule Rule page)

Select this to display schedule rules. The columns display the settings specified in the Schedule Rule dialog box for the jobnets selected in the list area.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Rule number

Displays a rule number.

Type of the jobnet start date

Displays the type of an execution start day.

Start year and month

Displays the start year and month in yyyy/MM format. This column displays an asterisk (*) when no start year and month is specified.

Start day

Displays the start date in dd format. This column displays an asterisk (*) when Type of the jobnet start date displays Registered day.

Start time

Displays the start time in hh:mm (absolute or relative) format.

Processing cycle

Displays the specified processing cycle as Execution every n cycle. This column displays a hyphen (-) when no processing cycle is specified.

Substitute schedule of closed day job

Displays a substitution method when the execution day is a closed day. This column displays a hyphen (-) when Type of the jobnet start date displays Open day.

Monitor delay

Displays the monitoring method for delayed start and delayed end.

Register for execution

Select this type to display information about the units that were registered for execution. The columns display the settings specified in the Register for Execution dialog box for the jobnets selected in the list area. Note that the information regarding the jobnets registered for execution is not displayed when generations are deleted because of management of the number of logs to keep or cancellation of registration.

When you select a planning group in the list area, the information to be displayed concerns the subordinate root jobnets that were registered for execution.

Note that jobnets that were not registered for execution are not displayed here.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Registration-time

The date and time when the jobnet was registered for execution is displayed in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

User who registered

Displays the JP1 user who registered the jobnet for execution.

Execution type

Displays the type of execution.

Planned time passed when daemon starts

Displays an option about whether to execute the jobnet immediately or execute it on the next scheduled execution day if the scheduled start time has passed when the scheduler service starts. This column displays a hyphen (-) when Execution type displays Immediate execution.

Start condition

Displays an option about whether to execute the jobnet using a start condition when it is registered for immediate execution and a start condition is defined. This column displays a hyphen (-) when Execution type displays Planned execution or Fixed execution.

Start condition (count)

Displays the maximum number of times a start condition can be used for execution. This column displays Unlimited or n times. The column displays a hyphen (-) when Start condition displays Do not use.

Start condition (period)

Displays the length of time allowed before a start condition expires. This column displays Unlimited, hh:mm (absolute time), or n (relative time in minutes). The column displays a hyphen (-) when Start condition displays Do not use.

Release

Select this type to display the release information about release target jobnets. The columns display the settings specified in the Register for Release dialog box for the jobnets selected in the list area.

Note that jobnets without release information are not displayed here. Also note that release information is not displayed when the release status is Applied.

Release target

Displays an icon indicating release and the unit name of the release target jobnet.

Release ID

Displays the release ID defined in the Register for Release dialog box.

Release status

Displays release status.

Release date

Displays the release date and time defined in the Register for Release dialog box in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

Release comment

Displays the comment defined in the Register for Release dialog box.

Release source

Displays the full name of a release source jobnet.

Execution generation

Select this to display information about the execution generations of units.

When you select a planning group in the list area, generation information about subordinate root jobnets is displayed. For details about the generations displayed, see 6.2.1(1)(b) Monitoring a root jobnet in the detailed information area in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Note that jobnets that were not registered for execution are not displayed here.

Name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit. The color of the icon changes depending on the status or result status of the unit.

To determine the colors for icons, use the General page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for a unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Status

Displays the status (delay) of the unit.

Scheduled start time

Displays the scheduled start date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the jobnet is not scheduled to be started.

Start time

Displays the start date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the jobnet is not started.

Rerun start time

Displays the re-execution start date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the jobnet is not to be re-executed.

End time

Displays the end date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the jobnet has not ended.

Time when start delayed

Displays the date and time at which to begin detection of delayed start in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when delayed start is not monitored.

Time when end delayed

Displays the date and time at which to begin detection of delayed end in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when delayed end is not monitored.

Start delay

Displays an option about whether to detect delayed start.

End delay

Displays an option about whether to detect delayed end.

Change plan

Displays an option about whether the plan for the unit is to be temporarily changed. When the plan is to be temporarily changed, the plan itself is also displayed.

Hold

Displays an option about whether the unit is being held.

The displayed information differs depending on the hold setting. The following table lists the character strings that can be displayed and the corresponding hold settings.

Table 12‒6: Hold statuses displayed in the detailed information area and their corresponding hold settings

Status

Hold setting

Follow the definition. (Hold)

Yes is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Do not hold)

No is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Yes

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold is selected.

Hold is selected in the Holding field of the Register for Execution dialog box.

None

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold-Release is selected.

Execution ID

Displays an execution ID in @[mmmm]{A-Z}nnnn format.

Supplementary note

The subwindow to be displayed when you double-click a displayed unit differs depending on the displayed page or the type of displayed information. The following table lists the subwindows to be displayed when you double-click a unit.

Table 12‒7: Subwindows to be displayed when you double-click a unit

Type of information displayed

Page displayed

Subwindow to be displayed

Definition

Job Group

Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box

Jobnet

Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box

Calendar

Edit Monthly Calendar window#1

Schedule

Schedule Settings dialog box

Register for execution

--

None

Release

--

None

Execution generation

--

Jobnet Monitor window#2

Legend:

--: No page appears.

#1

You can customize the display of the Edit Annual Calendar window. For details about how to do so, see 11.6.2 Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first.

To match the display period on the Calendar page with the display period in the window to be displayed when you double-click a unit, we recommend that you customize the display of the Edit Annual Calendar window.

#2

When the displayed information concerns an execution generation, the monitor mode is set to Fixed Monitor in the Jobnet Monitor window. The option specified in Monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts in the Preferences dialog box does not apply.

(2) Summary Monitor window

The JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) appears when you log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager while the start mode is Monitoring. When the start mode is Normal, you can move to this window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) by clicking the Summary Monitor function menu item. When the start mode is Compatible, click View and then Summary Monitor to move to the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

For details about start modes, see 4.1 Start modes of the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

The JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) allows you to monitor how jobnets are executed, such as the progress of jobnets, status of subordinate jobs, and scheduled end time.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) when the start mode is Normal.

Figure 12‒5: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) when the start mode is Normal

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) when the start mode is Monitoring or Compatible.

Figure 12‒6: JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) when the start mode is Monitoring or Compatible

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Function Menu area

The function menu area displays function menus. This area appears only when the start mode is Normal.

When you click an item other than Summary Monitor, the window changes to the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

(b) Day for Monitor

Select a date for performing monitoring. By default, the date when JP1/AJS3 - View starts is set. For details, see 6.2.1 Monitoring via the JP1/AJS3 - View windows in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

(c) Update button

Click this button to update the contents of the summary list and the unit detailed information list.

(d) Pause of automatic update check box

When you select this check box, automatic update of unit information in the summary monitor window temporarily stops. If you have chosen Not do in Auto refresh in the Refresh Interval dialog box, the Pause of automatic update check box is disabled. For details about how to specify an update interval for the JP1/AJS3 - View window, see 11.4.2 Setting the window refresh interval.

(e) Summary list

The summary list displays a list of units to be monitored. You can specify root jobnets, root remote jobnets, and planning groups as monitoring targets. You can specify any of these targets regardless of the scheduler service or the level of the job group.

In the summary list, one unit is displayed on one line. When a unit is executed multiple times on a monitoring day, the monitoring results of multiple generations are combined and shown here. At the bottom of the summary list, the total number of monitored units is shown.

If a root jobnet is being suspended, an icon appears on the left of the # column in the summary list to indicate that the root jobnet is being suspended. No icon appears when the jobnet is not being suspended.

To select multiple units in the summary list, hold down the Ctrl key or Shift key and click the target units. Note, however, that you cannot manipulate multiple units at the same time.

In the following cases, a hyphen (-) appears in columns other than # and Unit name:

When the schedule for the unit to be monitored does not exist on the monitoring day

When the unit to be monitored is not registered

When a unit has been deleted or a unit name has been changed after the unit was registered in the summary list

When the user does not have access permission for the unit to be monitored

When the information about the generations of the unit to be monitored was not obtained due to a failure in communication with JP1/AJS3 - Manager or for other reasons

Setting button

Click this button to display the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box where you can add or delete units to be monitored. For details about the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box, see 12.3.57 Monitoring Unit Select dialog box.

Progress drop-down list

Use this drop-down list to specify the unit status to be included in the result. The option you specify here only affects the Progress column, the result part of the Result/Schedule column, and the Remainder column. The drop-down list provides the following options:

Ended normally

Includes normally ended units in the result.

Ended normally & with warning

Includes normally ended units and units ended with a warning in the result.

Ended normally & with warning & abnormally

Includes normally ended units, units ended with a warning, and abnormally ended units in the result.

By default, Ended normally & with warning is selected.

#

Displays a number. Numbers are assigned to the units in the sequence they are specified in the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box.

Unit name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit. This column displays the comment of the generation with a scheduled end date and time that are furthest in the future if the definition of a jobnet is changed during monitoring due to jobnet release or for other reasons. If a jobnet generation to be monitored does not exist at the target date, an empty field is displayed.

Generation

Displays the total number of generations to be monitored on the monitoring day. For details, see 6.2.1 Monitoring via the JP1/AJS3 - View windows in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

End time (schd.)

Displays the scheduled end date and time of the target unit in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

This column displays the scheduled end date and time that are furthest in the future when multiple generations are executed on the monitoring day.

The column displays the latest end date and time when all generations have ended.

For details, see 8.3 Monitoring the progress.

Progress

Displays how far the target unit has completed (in %) on the monitoring day. For details about how progress is calculated, see 6.2.1 Monitoring via the JP1/AJS3 - View windows in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Result/Schedule

Displays the total number of units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day (number of scheduled units) and the number of units that have ended (number of executed units) in number-of-executed-units/number-of-scheduled-units format. The number of executed units changes depending on the option selected in the Progress drop-down list.

Note that the following units are not included in the number of executed units or the number of scheduled units.

Units under a jobnet with a start condition when the jobnet's generations to be monitored are in the following status:

- Now monitoring

- Monitor-end normal

- Unmonitored + Ended

- Monitor terminated

- Interrupted monitoring

Jobnets which are the connection targets of jobnet connectors and units under such jobnets

Units under root remote jobnets and nested remote jobnets

Remainder

Displays the number of units that need to be ended before the percentage of completion (value in the Progress column) reaches 100% on the monitoring day. Specifically, this column displays the difference between the number of scheduled units and the number of executed units that are displayed in the Result/Schedule column.

Ended abnormally

Displays the number of abnormally ended units among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Ended with warning

Displays the number of units that ended with a warning among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Delay

Displays the number of delayed units among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Being held

Displays the number of units being held among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Waiting to start

Displays the number of units waiting to be started among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Now running

Displays the number of units being executed among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Ended normally

Displays the number of successfully ended units among the units with generations to be monitored on the monitoring day.

Supplementary note

For details about the status types, see 6.2.1 Monitoring via the JP1/AJS3 - View windows in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

(f) Unit detailed information list

The unit detailed information list displays detailed information about the root jobnets, root remote jobnets or planning groups selected in the summary list, and their subordinate units. In this list, one generation of a unit is displayed on one line.

To select multiple units in the unit detailed information list, hold down the Ctrl key or Shift key and click the target units. You can manipulate multiple units at the same time.

If you select a root remote jobnet in the summary list, the information about the subordinate units is not displayed here. If you select a planning group in the summary list, only the information about the subordinate units is displayed here.

Unit name

Displays the icon and the name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Status

Displays the execution status and the corresponding color. To determine the colors for execution status, use the General page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Start time

Displays the start date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. For units that have not started yet, this column displays the date and time calculated from an execution simulation like that used in the Daily Schedule window.

End time

Displays the end date and time in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. For units that have not ended yet, this column displays the date and time calculated from an execution simulation like that used in the Daily Schedule window.

Execution ID

Displays an execution ID. This column displays a blank for dummy schedules.

Supplementary note

When you double-click a displayed unit, the Jobnet Monitor window appears for the unit.

12.3.2 Menu commands

This subsection describes the menu commands that are available in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

(1) Menu commands in the main window

The following table lists the menu commands in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). Note that some menu commands might not appear or might be disabled depending on the chosen function menu item.

Table 12‒8: Menu commands in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

Backup

Specifies how to back up a unit.

Backup

Restore

Specifies how to restore a unit.

Restore

Package

Packages a calendar and jobnet.

Package

New Window

Displays the JP1/AJS3 - View window in another window. The type of window to be displayed differs depending on the start mode.

When the start mode is Normal: Main window

When the start mode is Compatible: The window that was displayed at the previous logout (main or Summary Monitor window)

--

Close

Closes the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

--

Exit

Logs out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

--

Edit

New - Job Group

Creates a new job group right under the job group selected in the tree area or right under the planning group.

Define Details - [Job Group]

New - Jobnet

Creates a new jobnet right under the job group selected in the tree area or right under the planning group.

Define Details - [Jobnet]

New - Remote Jobnet

Creates a new remote jobnet right under the job group selected in the tree area.

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet]

New - Manager Job Group

Creates a new manager job group right under the job group selected in the tree area.

Define Details - [Manager Job Group]

New - Manager Jobnet

Creates a new manager jobnet right under the job group selected in the tree area.

Define Details - [Manager Jobnet]

New - Planning Group

Creates a new planning group right under the job group selected in the tree area.

Define Details - [Planning Group]

Edit

Displays the Jobnet Editor window if a jobnet or a remote jobnet are selected.

Otherwise, the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box displays.

Define Details - [icon-name]

Copy#1

Copies a unit selected in the tree area or the list area.

--

Paste

Pastes a copied unit name right under the unit selected in the list area.

If the system finds the same unit name to be passed, the command displays the Input unit name dialog box if only one copy source exists. If more than one copy source exists, this command automatically generates unit names.

Input unit name

Delete#1

Deletes the unit selected in the tree or list areas.

--

Select All#1

Selects all the units in the area containing a selected unit.

--

Search

Displays the Search window for the unit selected in the tree area.

--

Simple Search - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Search window to search for units with wait conditions that specify the selected unit as a unit whose end is to be waited for.

--

Schedule

Edits a jobnet schedule.

With a jobnet selected, displays the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule dialog box if you choose Add, Change or Copy in the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box if you choose Repeat in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Schedule Settings

Schedule Rule

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings

Calendar#2

With a job group selected, displays the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

--

Waiting Conditions Settings

Assigns wait conditions to selected units.

Waiting Condition Settings

Waiting-Target Unit Settings

Select Waiting-Target Unit

Properties

Displays and edits unit definitions. The dialog box name varies with a selected unit.

Define Details - [icon-name]

Operations

Register for Execution#1, #3

Registers a selected jobnet for execution.

Register for Execution

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Cancel Registration#1, #3

Cancels a jobnet from those jobnets registered for execution that have been selected.

Cancel Registration

Release Entry#3

Performs release entry using the selected root jobnet as the release source.

Displays information about temporary changes applied prior to release entry.

Re-executes a temporary change.

Register for Release

Selection of Release Target

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Release Cancel#3

Cancels the scheduled release for the selected release target jobnet.

--

Add#3, #4, #5

Adds a fixed execution schedule for the selected date and time.

Add

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Change Plan - Change Time#1, #4, #6

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected root jobnet.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately#1, #3, #5

Advances and executes the next execution schedule of the jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of the jobnet registered for fixed execution.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited#1, #3, #5

Cancels the next execution schedule of the jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of the jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Change Plan - Release Change#1,#3, #5

Cancels the date and time change or execution cancellation of the next execution schedule of the jobnet registered for planned execution, or the execution schedule of the jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Execution Prohibited#1, #3

Cancels the execution schedule for a selected root jobnet.

--

Change Hold Attribute- Hold#1, #3

Sets the hold attribute of the selected root jobnet.

Generation Selection

Change Hold Attribute - Hold-Release#1, #3

Cancels the hold attribute of the selected root jobnet.

Generation Selection

Interrupted#1, #3

Interrupts the selected jobnet.

--

Kill#1, #3

Forcibly terminates the selected root jobnet.

--

Rerun#1, #3

Re-executes the selected jobnet.

Generation Selection

Rerun

Suspension - Suspend#3

Puts a root jobnet into the suspended mode to make it possible to change the unit definition below the root jobnet being registered for execution.

Execute Suspension

Suspension - Release Suspension#3

Cancels the suspended state of root jobnet.

Release Suspension

View

Summary Monitor#6

Changes the current window to the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

--

Detailed Information Area - Display Information - Definition#6

Changes the information displayed in the detailed information area to definitions.

--

Detailed Information Area - Display Information - Register for Execution#6

Changes the information displayed in the detailed information area to information about jobnets registered for execution.

--

Detailed Information Area - Display Information - Release#6

Changes the information displayed in the detailed information area to release information.

--

Detailed Information Area - Display Information - Execution Generation#6

Changes the information displayed in the detailed information area to information about execution generations.

--

Detailed Information Area - Area Size - Minimum

Minimizes the display size of the detailed information area.

--

Detailed Information Area - Area Size - Restore

Restores the display size of the detailed information area to the original size if it is minimized.

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy

Displays the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Monthly Schedule#12

Displays the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet Monitor - Status#3

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for checking the status of a jobnet.

--

Jobnet Monitor - Result#3

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for checking the results of a jobnet.

--

Jobnet Monitor - Next Schedule#3

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for checking the next execution schedule for a jobnet.

--

Detailed Information - Status#3

Displays the Monitor Details dialog box for checking the status of a jobnet.

Displays the Execution Result Details dialog box when you click the Details button in the Monitor Details dialog box if you have selected a remote jobnet.

If you click Edit Def in the Monitor Details dialog box, the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears.

Monitor Details - [Jobnet]

Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet]

Execution Result Details

Define Details - [icon-name]

Detailed Information - Result#3

Displays the Monitor Details dialog box for checking the result of a jobnet.

Displays the Execution Result Details dialog box when you click the Details button in the Monitor Details dialog box if you have selected a remote jobnet.

If you click Edit Def in the Monitor Details dialog box, the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears.

Monitor Details - [Jobnet]

Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet]

Execution Result Details

Define Details - [icon-name]

Detailed Information - Next Schedule#3

Displays the Monitor Details dialog box for checking the next execution schedule for a jobnet.

If you click Edit Def in the Monitor Details dialog box, the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box appears.

Monitor Details - [Jobnet]

Define Details - [Jobnet]

Temporary Changes

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Wait Conditions Settings List

Displays the Wait Conditions Settings List window in which you can view the wait conditions assigned to units with wait conditions under the selected unit.

--

Wait Conditions Statuses - Status

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

Wait Conditions Statuses - Result

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the results of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

Wait Conditions Statuses - Next Schedule

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the next schedule of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Refresh

Updates the units displayed in the list area and the detailed information area to the latest status.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup

Sets the items you display in the list area of the window.

Display Item Setup

Set Display Order#7

Sets the display order of items in the tree area and list area of the window.

Set Display Order

Set Default Values

Specifies the default values of the values you specify in dialog boxes.

Set Default Values

Set Refresh Interval

Sets the interval at which the status of units that are displayed in the list area will be refreshed automatically.

Refresh Interval

Save status - Save#8

Saves the status of the currently displayed window.

--

Save status - Clear Saved Status

Clears the saved window status.

--

Common User Profile - Download

Overwrites the common user profile of connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager to the setup information of the user who logs in with JP1/AJS3 - View.

If the same JP1 user at the same host is activating JP1/AJS3 - View in another process, this command overwrites the JP1 setup information of the JP1 user downloaded last.

--

Common User Profile - Upload

Overwrites the setup information of the user who currently logs in with JP1/AJS3 - View to the common user profile of connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Suppose that more than one JP1 user tries to overwrite the common user profile of the same connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager at the same time. In this case, this command overwrites it with the user setup information of the JP1 user who uploaded last.

--

Save Full Unit Name#9

Saves, in the system clipboard, the full path name of the selected unit having a scheduler service name.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save as Jobnet Connector#10

Saves the selected root jobnet or planning group as the connection target of a jobnet connector.

After you click this menu item, in the Jobnet Editor window, click Edit and then Auto-create Jobnet Connector to automatically create a jobnet connector.

--

Save Csv Unit Data#1, #11

Saves the information selected in the list area or detailed information area in the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Change Password#13

Changes the password of the login JP1 user.

Change Password

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

Launches the Web browser, and displays the contents of the online help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Legend:

-- : Not displayed.

#1

You can execute this menu command for multiple units.

#2

You can customize the display of the Edit Annual Calendar window. For details about how to do so, see 11.6.2 Specifying the format of the calendar displayed first.

#3

This menu command is valid only when a root jobnet is selected. The command results in an error if a unit other than a root jobnet is selected.

#4

The menu command results in an error if a jobnet directly under a planning group is selected.

#5

This menu command does not appear by default. For details about how to display the command, see 11.4.9 Adding Add and Changing Plan to the menu bar.

#6

You can click this menu command only when the start mode is Compatible.

#7

This menu command does not appear by default. For details about how to display the command, see 11.4.18 Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area.

#8

Dialog boxes, the Edit Monthly Calendar window, the Edit Annual Calendar window, and the Search window are not saved.

The column size in the list area in windows is not saved.

The selected level in the tree is saved in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, Jobnet Editor Window, and Jobnet Monitor window. However, information about whether items in other levels in the tree are expanded or collapsed is not saved.

The status of windows (whether they are minimized or maximized) is not saved.

The positions of windows (which window comes in the front or back) are not saved.

#9

In the system clipboard, the last information saved is valid.

#10

You cannot automatically create a jobnet connector for a scheduler service that differs from the save source. For details about how to define a jobnet connector for a scheduler service that differs from the save source, see 5.2.4(1) Manually creating a jobnet connector.

#11

A maximum of 1,000 lines of data can be copied to the clipboard at one time.

#12

When you select Schedule Definition from Function Menu in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window appears. In the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window, specific menus are hidden. The settings for the items to display in the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window and for whether to display or hide the execution schedule of unregistered units are the same as the settings in the Monthly Schedule window.

#13

This menu command can be selected only when the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and the version of JP1/AJS3 - View are 10-10 or later and when the value of the environment setting parameter CHANGEPASSWORD is set to yes (changing of the password is enabled).

(2) Menu commands in the summary monitor window

The following table lists the menu commands in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

Table 12‒9: Menu commands in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

New Window

Displays the JP1/AJS3 - View window in another window. The type of window to be displayed differs depending on the start mode.

When the start mode is Normal: Summary Monitor window

When the start mode is Monitoring: Summary Monitor window

When the start mode is Compatible: Window that was displayed at the previous logout (Main or Summary Monitor window)

--

Close

Closes the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

--

Exit

Logs out of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

--

Edit

Jobnet Editor

Displays the Jobnet Editor window when a jobnet or a remote jobnet is selected.

--

Select All

Selects all the units in the area containing a selected unit.

--

Search

Displays the Search window for the selected root jobnet if you have selected a root jobnet in the summary list or unit detailed information list. When you select a subordinate unit in the unit detailed information list, this menu command displays the Search window for the root jobnet that is above the selected unit.

--

Simple Search - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Search window to search for units with wait conditions that specify the selected unit as a unit whose end is to be waited for.

--

Operations

Change Plan - Change Time#1,

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected jobnet.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately#1

Advances and executes the next execution schedule of the jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited#1

Cancels the next execution schedule of the jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Change Plan - Release Change#1

Cancels the date and time change or execution cancellation of the next execution schedule of a jobnet registered for planned execution, or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Change Hold Attribute- Hold#1

Sets the hold attribute of the selected unit.

--

Change Hold Attribute- Hold-Release#1

Cancels the hold attribute of the selected unit.

--

Interrupted#1

Interrupts the selected root jobnet.

--

Kill#1

Forcibly terminates the selected root jobnet or job.

--

Rerun#1

Re-executes the selected unit.

Rerun

Suspension - Suspend#1

Puts a root jobnet into the suspended mode to make it possible to change the unit definition below the root jobnet being registered for execution.

Execute Suspension

Suspension - Release Suspension#1

Cancels the suspended state of root jobnet.

Release Suspension

View

Main#2

Changes the current window to the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy

Displays the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Monthly Schedule

Displays the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet Monitor

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Temporary Changes

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Unit Detailed Information List - Ended Abnormally#3

Displays information about abnormally ended units among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Ended with Warning#3

Displays information about units ended with a warning among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Delay#3

Displays information about delayed units among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Being Held#3

Displays information about held units among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Waiting to Start#3

Displays information about units waiting to start among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Now Runnnig#3

Displays information about units being executed among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - Ended Normally#3

Displays information about successfully ended units among the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Unit Detailed Information List - All#3

Displays information about all the units selected in the summary list and their subordinate units in the unit detailed information list.

--

Wait Conditions Settings List

Displays the Wait Conditions Settings List window in which you can view the wait conditions assigned to units with wait conditions under the selected unit.

--

Wait Conditions Statuses

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Refresh

Updates the units displayed in the summary monitor window to the latest status.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Set Default Values

Specifies the default values of the values you specify in dialog boxes.

Set Default Values

Set Refresh Interval

Sets the interval at which the status of units that are displayed in the summary monitor window will be refreshed automatically.

Refresh Interval

Save status - Save#4

Saves the status of the currently displayed window.

--

Save status - Clear Saved Status

Clears the saved window status.

--

Common User Profile - Download

Overwrites the common user profile of connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager to the setup information of the user who logs in with JP1/AJS3 - View.

If the same JP1 user at the same host is activating JP1/AJS3 - View in another process, this command overwrites the JP1 setup information of the JP1 user downloaded last.

--

Common User Profile - Upload

Overwrites the setup information of the user who currently logs in with JP1/AJS3 - View to the common user profile of connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Suppose that more than one JP1 user tries to overwrite the common user profile of the same connected JP1/AJS3 - Manager at the same time. In this case, this command overwrites it with the user setup information of the JP1 user who uploaded last.

--

Save Full Unit Name#5

Saves, in the system clipboard, the full path name of the selected unit having a scheduler service name.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data#1

Saves the information selected in the summary list or unit detailed information list on the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Change Password#6

Changes the password of the login JP1 user.

Change Password

Set Tool

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

Launches a Web browser, and displays the contents of its online Help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Legend:

--: Not displayed.

#1

You can execute this menu command for multiple units.

#2

This menu command appears only when the start mode is Compatible.

#3

When you select a planning group in the summary list, only the information about the subordinate units is displayed in the unit detailed information list.

When you select a root remote jobnet in the summary list, the information about the subordinate units is not displayed in the unit detailed information list.

#4

Dialog boxes, the Edit Monthly Calendar window, the Edit Annual Calendar window, and the Search window are not saved.

The column size in the list area in windows is not saved.

The selected level in the tree is saved in the JP1/AJS3 - View window, Jobnet Editor window, and Jobnet Monitor window. However, information about whether items in other levels in the tree are expanded or collapsed is not saved.

The status of windows (whether they are minimized or maximized) is not saved.

The positions of windows (which window comes in the front or back) are not saved.

#5

On the system clipboard, the last information saved is valid.

#6

This menu command can be selected only when the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and the version of JP1/AJS3 - View are 10-10 or later and when the value of the environment setting parameter CHANGEPASSWORD is set to yes (changing of the password is enabled).

12.3.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the JP1/AJS3 - View window

This subsection describes the transitions of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) and the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

(1) Transitions of the main window

The following figure shows the transitions of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Figure 12‒7: Transitions of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

When the start mode is Normal, the main window appears. When the start mode is Compatible, the window that was displayed at the previous logout appears.

#2

The Define Details - [icon - name] dialog box appears.

#3

Displayed when you select a jobnet, remote jobnet, or manager jobnet.

#4

Displayed when you select a job group.

#5

Displayed when you select the Open the Temporary Changes list check box or click the Browse button in the Operation after registration for release area in the Register for Release dialog box.

#6

Displayed when an error occurs in the process of re-executing multiple temporary changes.

#7

The Monitor Details - [icon - name] dialog box appears.

#8

Displayed when you click the Set Function Menu button in the Login page.

#9

Displayed when you click the Select button in the General page.

#10

Displayed when you click the Add button in the Select Color dialog box.

#11

Displayed when you click the Edit button in the Select Color dialog box.

#12

The Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window appears only if you select Schedule Definition from Function Menu.

(2) Transitions of the Summary Monitor window

The following figure shows the transitions of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Figure 12‒8: Transitions of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

When the start mode is Normal or Monitoring, the main window appears. When the start mode is Compatible, the window that was displayed at previous logout appears.

#2

This is displayed when an error occurs in the process of re-executing multiple temporary changes.

#3

This is displayed when you click the Set Function Menu button in the Login page.

#4

This is displayed when you click the Select button in the General page.

#5

This is displayed when you click the Add button in the Select Color dialog box.

#6

This is displayed when you click the Edit button in the Select Color dialog box.

#7

This is displayed when you click the Setting button in the summary list.

12.3.4 Backup dialog box

The Backup dialog box sets the method for backing up information such as unit definitions. The following figure shows the Backup dialog box.

Figure 12‒9: Backup dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Backup uses same name as unit

When backing up a unit, specify a backup method if a unit with the same name already exists in the backup box. You can specify No or Yes. Choosing Yes forcibly updates the backup file in the backup box. The default is No.

Backup box

Displays the name of the backup box created in the directory for backup information. If you click a backup box name in the Backup box, the Backup file field displays the backup file name.

Backup file

Displays the names of the backup files stored in the backup box, as well as unit types and full path names.

Backup box name

Specify the name of the backup box to store a backup file. Use a character string of up to 50 bytes. If you want to store a backup file into a created backup box, double-click the backup box name appearing in the Backup box.

Unit elements

Lists the unit names and types in the unit selected in the tree area. If you select a unit in the list or map area, only the selected unit appears.

Units to backup

Displays the name of the unit to be backed up.

Add button

Adds the unit selected in Unit elements to Units to backup. With a unit name selected in Unit elements, you can click the Add button.

Delete button

Deletes the unit selected in Units to backup. With a unit name selected in Units to backup, you can click the Delete button.

Cautionary notes

You cannot click the OK button if you have displayed the Backup dialog box with a unit having no subunits selected in the tree area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or the Jobnet Editor window.

If you update a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet), the status of the root jobnet changes so that release entry was not performed for the root jobnet, because the root jobnet is re-created.

The following units cannot be imported into a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

- Remote jobnet

- .CONDITION (start condition)

- Jobnet connector

Supplementary notes

Only the following users can save the unit.

- Users who have administrator privileges.

- Users assigned the reference privilege for all job units to be backed up and the update privilege for the backup box.

For JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the name of the backup box is case-sensitive for UNIX and case-insensitive for Windows.

You can create up to 1,024 backup files in a single backup box.

If the AJSPRINTNETSCHPRF environment setup parameter for JP1/AJS3 - Manager to be connected specifies the dependency on the schedule for the upper-level jobnet, you can specify either of the following methods to output the unit definition information for the nested jobnet having a schedule rule:

- Enable the schedule rule and do not depend on the schedule for the upper-level jobnet.

- Delete the schedule rule and depend on the schedule for the upper-level jobnet.

For details about the AJSPRINTNETSCHPRF environment setup parameter, see 20.4.2(79) AJSPRINTNETSCHPRF in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

12.3.5 Restore dialog box

The Restore dialog box sets how to restore unit definitions backed up or the like. The following figure shows the Restore dialog box.

Figure 12‒10: Restore dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Restore unit

Specify whether to restore unit definitions in units of backup files or of backup boxes. You can specify Backup file and Backup box.

In the former case, select Backup file.

To restore the entire backup box, select Backup box.

The default is Backup file.

Restore to

Set a location to restore a backup file. You can set In the selected unit and Original path.

To restore a backup file into a selected unit, select In the selected unit.

To restore a backup file into the same unit as the original, select Original path. Only with a root job group selected in the tree area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), you can set Original path.

The default is In the selected unit.

Restored unit uses same name as backup

To restore a unit, set the restore method when a unit of the same name exists in the restore destination. You can specify No or Yes. If you choose Yes, the system deletes the existing unit and then restores the backup file. The default is No.

Backup box

Displays the name of the backup box created in the directory for backup information.

Backup file

Displays the names of the backup files stored in the backup box, unit types, and full path names. Clicking a backup box name in the Backup box displays the backup file names.

Units to restore

Displays the name of the backup file to be restored.

Add button

Adds the backup file selected in Backup file to Units to restore. With a backup file name selected in Backup file, you can click the Add button.

Delete button

Deletes the backup file selected in Units to restore from Units to restore. With a backup file name selected in Units to restore, you can click the Delete button.

Cautionary notes

If the hierarchical structure of a unit to be restored differs from the hierarchical structure of the unit backed up, you cannot specify Original path in Restore to.

If a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet) exists that has the same name as the unit to be restored, the status of the root jobnet changes so that release entry was not performed for the root jobnet, because the root jobnet is re-created.

The following units cannot be restored in a root jobnet for which release entry was performed (a release-target jobnet).

- Remote jobnet

- .CONDITION (start condition)

- Jobnet connector

You cannot restore the unit in the following cases.

- You are not assigned the reference privilege for both of the backup box and the backup file.

- You are not authorized to reference the unit to be restored.

- There is no unit to be restored.

- You cannot make definitions, for example, restoring a job group under a jobnet.

- The maximum number of nests in the hierarchical structure exceeds 30.

- An attempt is made to restore the root jobnet being registered for execution.

- The root jobnet being registered for execution attempts to restore a lower-level job group.

- An attempt is made to restore the root jobnet being suspended.

- The root jobnet being suspended attempts to restore a lower-level job group.

- An attempt is made to restore an active unit below the root jobnet being suspended

- The unit definition saved in the backup file is incorrect.

- If you are restoring a host link jobnet at the level directly below a job group or at a level lower than a remote jobnet.

- If you are restoring a unit at a level lower than a host link jobnet.

- The number of generations of the unit to be restored exceeds the maximum number of logs to keep, which is set for the restoration-destination scheduler service.

12.3.6 Package dialog box

The Package dialog box is used to package unit definition information and calendar data. Packaged unit definition information and calendar data are called an object. You can use JP1/Software Distribution to distribute and register an object. If you click the Package button, the system executes packaging.

The following figure shows the Package dialog box.

Figure 12‒11: Package dialog box.

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the name of the unit to be packaged. You cannot edit this item.

Cabinet name

Specify the name of the cabinet to be packaged. Use a character string of up to 32 bytes. The default is a blank. You cannot specify any blanks and any symbols other than hyphens (-) and underscores (_).

Cabinet ID

Specify a cabinet ID. Use a character string of two bytes. You can specify alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). If the value consists of fewer than two bytes, the system adds 0 to its left to reach two bytes. The default is a blank.

Package name

Specify a package name. Use a character string of up to 50 bytes. The default is the name of the unit to be packaged.

You cannot use the following characters.

( (Left parenthesis)

) (Right parenthesis)

, (Comma)

: (Colon)

; (Semicolon)

= (Equal sign)

/ (Slant)

\ (Backslash)

Space

If a package name that includes any of the above characters is specified by default, you must change the package name.

Package ID

Specify a package ID. Use a character string of up to 44 bytes. You can specify alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), hyphens (-), and underscores (_). You can set 256 IDs for one cabinet. The default is a unique ID containing the date and time.

Version

Specify a package version. Use a character string of up to six bytes. You can specify alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). The default is 000000.

Generation

Specify a package generation. Use a character string of four bytes. You can specify alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). If the value consists of fewer than 4 bytes, the system adds 0s to the left to reach four bytes. The default is 0000.

Target to package

Specify a target to be packaged. In the default mode, this check box is not selected. To package only the calendar information, select Only calendar. You can select this item only for a job group.

Import destination

Specify an import destination. Use a character string of up to 961 bytes. The import destination is the full path name of the unit into which you import the packaged unit. The default is the full path name of the upper-level unit of the unit to be packaged.

You cannot specify the following characters.

( (Left parenthesis)

) (Right parenthesis)

, (Comma)

; (Semicolon)

= (Equal sign)

Space

When a unit exists

If the import destination contains a unit, specify whether to overwrite the unit information. You can specify Overwrite or Do not overwrite. The default is Do not overwrite. You cannot specify this item if you select Only calendar for Target to package.

Execution result

If you click the Package button, the system displays the result of packaging.

Package button

Executes packaging. The result appears in the Execution result field.

Cautionary notes

If the full path name of the unit to be packaged contains a symbol, you may not be able to package the unit.

If the character code set differs between the packaging-execution host and the packaging-registration host, do not use Japanese characters in Package name. If you do, the characters will be garbled.

If Japanese characters are used in the unit name or elsewhere, do not distribute the unit to environments where a different character code set is used. If you do, the characters will be garbled.

You can distribute a package created using Windows only to Windows, and a package created using UNIX only to UNIX.

In the following cases, an attempt to distribute a packaged unit results in a normal termination, but the unit is not distributed correctly.

- During distribution of a unit of the same name, the destination unit is being registered.

- During distribution of a unit of the same name, the destination unit has a lower-level unit that is being registered.

- A package is distributed to a unit below the unit that is being registered.

- During distribution of a unit of the same name, the destination unit is being suspended.

- A package is distributed to a unit below the unit that is being suspended.

If the following message appears when you execute packaging, it means that setup for linking with JP1/Software Distribution is incomplete:

'dmjppac' is not recognized as an internal or external command, operable program or batch file.

If this occurs, add JP1/Software-Distribution-Client-installation-folder\bin to the value of the PATH environment variable. For details about setting up linkage with JP1/Software Distribution, see 10.2 Setup for linking JP1/Software Distribution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

If the version of a linked JP1/Software Distribution Manager is 08-10 or later and you are using the user management feature of JP1/Base, you cannot package unit definitions and calendar information. If you want to package unit definitions or calendar information, link with a JP1/Software Distribution Manager that does not use the user management feature of JP1/Base.

In a UTF-8 environment, if you have changed the number of characters that can be specified in unit names or other strings, the default value for Package name might be more than 50 bytes long. Consequently, when you click the Package button, packaging might fail. In such a case, change the package name to a string that is 50 or fewer bytes long, and then click the Package button again.

For details about the settings for changing the number of characters that can be specified in unit names and other strings in a UTF-8 environment, see 15.1.10 Setting for changing the number of characters specifiable for a unit name in a UTF-8 environment in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

12.3.7 Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box

The Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box defines the details of a job group.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒12: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot set this item for a job group.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒13: Definition page in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Specify base day

Specify how to set the base date. The base date is the first date of a month. The default is None. The following gives how to set the base date:

Day

Select this to specify the base date as a day of the month. You can specify the appropriate date in the Day field.

Week

Select this to specify the base date as a day of the week. You can specify the appropriate day of the week in the Week field.

None

Select this to use the base date defined for the upper-level job group.

If the base date has not been defined for any upper-level job groups, 1 is assumed as the base date.

Day

Specify the base date as a day of the month. This is available if you select Day for Specify base day. You can specify 1 to 31. The default is a blank.

Week

Specify the base date as a day of the week. This is available if you select Week for Specify base day. You can enter 1 to 5, and the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday). The default is 1 and Sunday.

Supplementary note

The base date is the first date of a month.

For example, if you select Day for the base date and specify 21, then the start date will be the 21st of each month, which ends on the 20th of the next month.

Treat as

Specifies whether a month starting from the specified base date should be treated as "this" month or "next" month. Available if you select Day or Week for Specify base day. The default is None. You can set one of the following:

This month

Treats a month starting from the base date as this month.

Next month

Treats a month starting from the base date as the next month.

None

Follows the upper-level job group.

If the Treat as setting has not been specified for any upper-level job groups, This month is assumed.

Set base time

Specifies whether to set the base time. The base time indicates the time at which a day starts. The default is No.

Yes

Select this if you set the base time. You can specify an appropriate time using the hours:minutes format in the Base time field.

No

Select this if you use the Set base time setting of the upper-level job group. If this setting has not been specified for any upper-level groups, 0:00 is assumed as the base time.

Base time

Set the base time in hours and minutes. Available if you select Yes for Set base time. You can set 0 to 23 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. The default is a blank.

For example, if 8:00 is set as the base time, a day starts at 8:00 and lasts until 7:59 on the next day.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒14: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot specify this item for a job group.

Type

You cannot specify this item for a job group.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access the target.

12.3.8 Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) is used to define details about a root jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒15: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. If you omit this value, the system uses the default execution agent.

Note that if you omit Exec-agent for a job in a jobnet, the system uses this value.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you selected Queueless Agent for Exec. service for a job in the jobnet, specify the execution host name.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

This item appears as a text box when the version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50.

From version 09-50, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified jobnet is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified jobnet.

If the specified jobnet is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet).

Figure 12‒16: Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Concurrent exec.

Select whether to concurrently execute multiple jobnets. You can specify Disable or Enable. The default is Disable. With Enable selected, you cannot specify Hold if prev. = 'abend' and Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' for Hold in the Attributes page.

No. logs to keep

Specify the number of execution result logs you want to save. You can specify 1 to 99. The default is 1. However, if you specify the maximum number of logs to keep in an environment setting parameter, you can specify 1 to 999. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter MAXSAVEGEN, see 20.4.2(78) MAXSAVEGEN in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

If you want to decrease the number of logs to keep for a root jobnet that is already registered for execution, click the OK button. A confirmation message (KAVV430-Q) appears and asks you whether you want to change the number of logs to keep.

Priority

Specify the priority of a job. You can specify None or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None. This priority setting is used when the priority of a job is set to None and the priority of the upper-level nested jobnet of the job is set to None. If the priority of a job and of all upper-level jobnets is set to None, the priority value set for the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY is applied to that job.

In UNIX, if, as a result of mapping, the job is to be executed by a non-root user, specifying 4 or 5 will result in an authority error when the job is executed.

Time-out period

Specify a time period after which a time-out should occur if a root jobnet registered for execution is not executed on the schedule date. The value is the period of time to pass before the Skipped so not exe. state is set up. The specified value is always effective, irrespective of the registration procedure. For immediate registration, the date of registration is used as the date when execution starts. The default is Use system settings.

You can specify one of the following:

Use system settings

Executes the jobnet based on the settings of the EXECDEFER environment setting parameter.

1 day

Suppresses jobnet execution if one day has passed since the execution schedule date.

2 days

Suppresses jobnet execution if two days have passed since the execution schedule date.

Unlimited

Waits for hold release, an event or execution for unlimited amount of time.

Schedule option

Dictates how the system handles execution schedules when a jobnet fails to complete before the scheduled start time of the next generation. The default is Schedule skip. You can specify one of the following:

Schedule skip

Skips the jobnet execution schedule having the same start time. Then it starts a next-generation jobnet that does not have a conflicting start time.

Multi-schedule

Waits until the execution of the current-generation jobnet has been completed, and upon completion, executes the next generation. If Enable is selected for Concurrent exec., executes the next generation at its start time, without waiting for the completion of the current-generation jobnet.

Monitor jobnet

When using jobnet execution time to monitor the end delay of the jobnet, select Time-required-for-execution and specify the required jobnet execution time in minutes. You can specify 1 to 2,879. In the default mode, Time-required-for-execution is not selected.

Exec. order control

Specify whether to control the execution order of root jobnets.

Yes

Connects to a jobnet connector to control the execution order of root jobnets.

When you click Yes, Jobnet connector and Exec. order method are enabled.

No

Does not control the execution order of root jobnets.

The default selection is No.

Connection range

Specify the range of connection for a jobnet connector. The default selection is Same service.

Same service

Click this option to connect to a jobnet connector under the same scheduler service.

Other service

Click this option to connect to a jobnet connector under a different scheduler service. When you click this option, you can enter names in Connection host and Connection service.

Connection range appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection host

Use a character string of a maximum of 255 bytes to specify the host name of the host on which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined.

This text box is available when you choose Yes in Exec. order control and choose Other service in Connection range.

The text box is not available when you choose No in Exec. order control or choose Same service in Connection range.

The text box is blank by default.

You cannot specify single-byte spaces, tabs, and linefeed characters.

You do not need to specify a host name here when the jobnet connector belongs to a different scheduler service but exists on the same host.

This text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection service

Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes to specify the scheduler service name of the scheduler service for which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined.

You must specify a scheduler service name here when you choose Yes in Exec. order control and choose Other service in Connection range.

This text box is not available when you choose No in Exec. order control or choose Same service in Connection range.

The text box is blank by default.

You can specify single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (! # $ % + @ - . _).

This text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Jobnet connector

Use a character string of a maximum of 930 bytes to specify the full unit name of the jobnet connector to be connected. This text box is blank by default.

An input error occurs if you specify a unit name with any of the following characteristics:

A unit name that does not begin with a forward slash (/)

A unit name where part of the unit name between forward slashes (/) exceeds 30 bytes#

A unit name ending with a forward slash (/)

#

No error occurs when Other service is chosen in Connection range.

This text box is enabled when you choose Yes in Exec. order control.

Exec. order method

Specify whether to synchronize the execution of the jobnet with the start time of the jobnet connector.

Synchro

Synchronizes with the start time of the jobnet connector. The execution of the root jobnet waits until the jobnet connector is executed.

Asynchro

Starts the execution of the root jobnet without waiting for the execution of the jobnet connector.

Asynchro is chosen by default.

This section is enabled when you choose Yes in Exec. order control.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet).

Figure 12‒17: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. The default is No. You can select one of the following items:

No

Does not hold the root jobnet.

Hold if prev. = 'abend'

If the result of the previous root jobnet execution is "Ended abnormally", "Skipped so not exe.", "Invalid exe. seq.", "Interrupted", or "Killed", this option holds the root jobnet. If you select Enable for Concurrent exec. in the Definition page, you cannot specify this option.

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend'

If the result of the previous root jobnet execution is "Ended abnormally", "Ended with warning", "Skipped so not exe.", "Invalid exe. seq.", "Interrupted", or "Killed", this option holds the root jobnet. If you select Enable for Concurrent exec. in the Definition page, you cannot specify this option.

Yes

Holds the root jobnet.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal. Specify Normal for a root jobnet.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you select a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.9 Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet)

The Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet) defines the details about a nested jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒18: Common displayed items in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet)

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. If you omit the Exec-agent for a job in a jobnet, the system uses this value. If this value is also omitted, the system uses the value of the upper-level jobnet.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you selected Queueless Agent for Exec. service for a job in the jobnet, specify the execution host name.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified jobnet is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified jobnet.

If the specified jobnet is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested job).

Figure 12‒19: Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested job)

The following explains the displayed items.

Priority

Specify the priority of a job. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None. If you set None for the priority of a job in a jobnet, the system uses the priority of the upper-level jobnet. The system uses this value if you set None for the priority of a job in a jobnet. If the priority of a job and of all upper-level jobnets is set to None, the priority value set for the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY is applied to that job.

In UNIX, if non-root users execute jobs resulting from mapping, specifying the value of 4 or 5 will result in an authority error at the time of job execution.

Monitor jobnet

When using jobnet execution time to monitor the end delay of the jobnet, select Time-required-for-execution and specify the required jobnet execution time in minutes. You can specify 1 to 2,879. In the default mode, Time-required-for-execution is not selected

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested job).

Figure 12‒20: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested job)

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscore (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.10 Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

The Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet) defines the details of a root remote jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒21: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The execution agent name or execution agent group name must already be defined in the JP1/AJS3 - Manager you specified in Target manager.

The execution agent name that is used in the job definition differs depending on whether the execution agent is specified for a remote jobnet and whether the execution agent is specified for a job in the remote jobnet.

The following table shows the value used for each specification.

Table 12‒10: Execution agent name to be used in the job definition

Whether the execution agent is specified for a job in the remote jobnet

Yes

No

Whether the execution agent is specified for a remote jobnet

Yes

Execution agent name specified for the job

Execution agent name specified for the remote jobnet

No

Execution agent name specified for the job

Default execution agent name in the JP1/AJS3 - Manager specified in Target manager

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary note

If you selected Queueless Agent for Exec. service for a job in the jobnet, specify the execution host name.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box.

Figure 12‒22: Definition page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Concurrent exec.

Select whether to concurrently execute multiple jobnets. You can specify Disable or Enable. The default is Disable. If you select Enable, you cannot specify Hold if prev. = 'abend' and Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' for Hold in the Attributes page.

No. logs to keep

Specify the number of execution result logs to be saved. You can specify 1 to 99. The default is 1. However, to specify the maximum number of logs to keep in the environment setting parameter, you can specify 1 to 999. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter MAXSAVEGEN, see 20.4.2(78) MAXSAVEGEN in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Target manager

Specify the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which you want to transfer the root remote jobnet to be run. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

The scheduler service that executes a remote jobnet is determined by the specification of the environment setting parameter REMNETSERVICENAME for JP1/AJS3 - Manager on the host to which the jobnet is to be transferred.

Priority

Specify the priority of a job. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None. If the priority of a job is set to None, the priority value set for the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY is applied to the job.

In UNIX, if non-root users execute jobs resulting from mapping, specifying the value of 4 or 5 will result in an authority error at the time of job execution.

Time-out period

Specify a time period after which a time-out should occur if a root remote jobnet registered for execution is not executed on the schedule date. The value is the period of time to pass before the Skipped so not exe. status is set up. The specified value is always effective, irrespective of the registration procedure. For immediate registration, the date of registration is used as the date when execution starts. The default is Use system settings.

You can specify one of the following:

Use system settings

Executes the jobnet based on the settings of the EXECDEFER environment setting parameter.

1 day

Suppresses remote jobnet execution if one day has passed since the execution schedule date.

2 days

Suppresses remote jobnet execution if two days have passed since the execution schedule date.

Unlimited

Waits for hold release, event or execution for an unlimited amount of time.

Schedule option

Dictates how the system handles execution schedules when a jobnet fails to complete before the scheduled start time of the next generation. The default is Schedule skip. You can specify one of the following:

Schedule skip

Skips the jobnet execution schedule having the same start time. Then it starts a next-generation jobnet that does not have a conflicting start time.

Multi-schedule

Waits until the execution of the current-generation jobnet has been completed, and upon completion, executes the next generation. If Enable is selected for Concurrent exec., executes the next generation at its start time, without waiting for the completion of the current-generation jobnet.

Monitor jobnet

When using the required jobnet execution time to monitor the end delay of the jobnet, select Time-required-for-execution and specify the required jobnet execution time in minutes. You can specify 1 to 2,879. In the default mode, Time-required-for-execution is not selected.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet).

Figure 12‒23: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. The default is No. You can specify one of the following:

No

Does not hold a remote jobnet.

Hold if prev. = 'abend'

If the result of the previous root jobnet execution is "Ended abnormally", "Skipped so not exe.", "Invalid exe. seq.", "Interrupted", or "Killed", this option holds the root jobnet. If you select Enable for Concurrent exec. in the Definition page, you cannot specify this option.

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend'

If the result of the previous root jobnet execution is "Ended abnormally", "Ended with warning", "Skipped so not exe.", "Invalid exe. seq.", "Interrupted", or "Killed", this option holds the root jobnet. If you select Enable for Concurrent exec. in the Definition page, you cannot specify this option.

Yes

Holds the remote jobnet.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.11 Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

The Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet) defines the details about a nested remote jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒24: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The execution agent name or execution agent group name must already be defined in the JP1/AJS3 - Manager you specified in Target manager.

The execution agent name that is used in the job definition differs depending on whether the execution agent is specified for a remote jobnet and whether the execution agent is specified for a job in the remote jobnet.

The following table shows the value used for each specification.

Table 12‒11: Execution agent name to be used in the job definition

Whether the execution agent is specified for a job in the remote jobnet

Yes

No

Whether the execution agent is specified for a remote jobnet

Yes

Execution agent name specified for the job

Execution agent name specified for the remote jobnet

No

Execution agent name specified for the job

Default execution agent name in the JP1/AJS3 - Manager specified in Target manager

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary note

If you selected Queueless Agent for Exec. service for a job in the jobnet, specify the execution host name.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet).

Figure 12‒25: Definition page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Target manager

Specify the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which you want to transfer a nested remote jobnet to be executed. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

The scheduler service that executes a remote jobnet is determined by the specification of the environment setting parameter REMNETSERVICENAME for JP1/AJS3 - Manager on the host to which the jobnet is to be transferred.

Priority

Specify the priority of a job. You can specify None or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None. If you set None for the priority of a job in a jobnet, the system uses the priority of the upper-level jobnet. The system uses this value if you set None for the priority of a job in a jobnet. If the priority of a job and of all upper-level jobnets is set to None, the priority value set for the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY is applied to that job.

In UNIX, if non-root users execute jobs resulting from mapping, specifying the value of 4 or 5 will result in an authority error at the time of job execution.

Monitor jobnet

When using the required jobnet execution time to monitor the end delay of the jobnet, select Time-required-for-execution and specify the required jobnet execution time in minutes. You can specify 1 to 2,879. In the default mode, Time-required-for-execution is not checked.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (a nested remote jobnet).

Figure 12‒26: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.12 Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box

The Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box defines the details of a manager job group.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒27: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot set this item for a manager job group.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒28: Definition page in the Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Host to reference

Specify the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to be referenced. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

Unit to reference

Specify a unit name in JP1/AJS3 - Manager to be referenced. Use a character string of up to 961 bytes. Use a full path name to specify the name of the unit to be referenced. The default is a blank.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP/GROUP1

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒29: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Manager Job Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot select this item for a manager job group.

Type

You cannot select this item for a manager job group.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscore (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.13 Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box

The Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box defines the details of a manager jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒30: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot set this item for a manager jobnet.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box.

Figure 12‒31: Definition page in the Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Host to reference

Specify the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to be referenced. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

Unit to reference

Specify a unit name in JP1/AJS3 - Manager to be referenced. Use a character string of up to 961 bytes. Use a full path name to specify the name of the unit to be referenced. The default is a blank.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP/NET

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box.

Figure 12‒32: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Manager Jobnet] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot select this item for a manager jobnet.

Type

You cannot select this item for a manager jobnet.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.3.14 Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box

The Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box defines the details of a planning group.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒33: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot set this item for a planning group.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒34: Definition page in the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Specify base day

Specify how to set the base date. The base date is the first date of a month. The default is None. The following gives how to set the base date:

Day

Select this to specify the base date as a day of the month. You can specify the appropriate date in the Day field.

Week

Select this to specify the base date as a day of the week. You can specify the appropriate day of the week in the Week field.

None

Select this to use the base date defined for the upper-level job group.

If no base date is defined for the upper-level job group, 1 is assumed.

Day

Specify the base date as a day of the month. Available if you select Day for Specify base day. You can specify 1 to 31. The default is a blank.

Week

Specify the base date as a day of the week. Available if you select Week for Specify base day. You can enter 1 to 5, and the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday). The default is 1 and Sunday.

Supplementary note

The base date is the first date of a month.

For example, if you select Day for the base date and specify 21, then the start date will be the 21st of each month, which ends on the 20th of the next month.

Treat as

Specifies whether a month starting from the specified base date should be treated as "this" month or "next" month. Available if you select Day or Week for Specify base day. The default is None. You can set one of the following:

This month

Treats a month starting from the base date as this month.

Next month

Treats a month starting from the base date as the next month.

None

Follows the upper-level job group.

If no base month is defined for the upper-level job group, This month is assumed.

Set base time

Specifies whether to set the base time. The base time indicates the time at which a day starts. The default is No.

Yes

Select this if you set the base time. You can specify an appropriate time using the hours:minutes format in the Base time field.

No

Select this if you do not set the base time. In this case, the base time is assumed to be 00:00.

Base time

Set the base time in hours and minutes. Available if you select Yes for Set base time. You can set 0 to 23 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. The default is a blank.

For example, if 8:00 is set as the base time, a day starts at 8:00 and lasts until 7:59 on the next day.

Exec. order control

Specify whether to control the execution order of root jobnets directly under the planning group.

Yes

Connects to a jobnet connector to control the execution order of root jobnets directly under the planning group.

When you click Yes, Jobnet connector and Exec. order method are enabled.

No

Does not control the execution order of root jobnets.

The default selection is No.

Connection range

Specify the range of connection for a jobnet connector. The default selection is Same service.

Same service

Click this option to connect to a jobnet connector under the same scheduler service.

Other service

Click this option to connect to a jobnet connector under a different scheduler service. When you click this option, you can enter names in Connection host and Connection service.

Connection range appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection host

Use a character string of a maximum of 255 bytes to specify the host name of the host on which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined.

This text box is available when you choose Yes in Exec. order control and choose Other service in Connection range.

The text box is not available when you choose No in Exec. order control or choose Same service in Connection range.

The text box is blank by default.

You cannot specify single-byte spaces, tabs, and linefeed characters.

You do not need to specify the host name here when the jobnet connector belongs to a different scheduler service but exists on the same host.

This text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection service

Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes to specify the scheduler service name of the scheduler service for which the jobnet connector to be connected is defined.

You must specify a scheduler service name here when you choose Yes in Exec. order control and choose Other service in Connection range.

This text box is not available when you choose No in Exec. order control or choose Same service in Connection range.

The text box is blank by default.

You can specify single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (! # $ % + @ - . _).

This text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Jobnet connector

Use a character string of a maximum of 930 bytes to specify the full unit name of the jobnet connector to be connected. This text box is blank by default.

An input error occurs if you specify a unit name with any of the following characteristics:

A unit name that does not begin with a forward slash (/)

A unit name where part of the unit name between forward slashes (/) exceeds 30 bytes#

A unit name ending with a forward slash (/)

#

No error occurs when Other service is chosen in Connection range.

This text box is enabled when you choose Yes in Exec. order control.

Exec. order method

Specify whether to synchronize the execution of the planning group with the start time of the jobnet connector.

Synchro

Synchronizes with the start time of the jobnet connector. The execution of the planning group waits until the jobnet connector is executed.

Asynchro

Starts the execution of the planning group without waiting for the execution of the jobnet connector.

Asynchro is chosen by default.

This section is enabled when you choose Yes in Exec. order control.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box.

Figure 12‒35: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot select this item for a planning group.

Type

You cannot select this item for a planning group.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access the target.

12.3.15 Input unit name dialog box

If an existing unit name is pasted, enter a new unit name using the Input unit name dialog box. If you paste in more than one unit, the system automatically generates the unit names and this dialog box does not appear. The following figure shows the Input unit name dialog box.

Figure 12‒36: Input unit name dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a new unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is the unit name of a copied unit.

12.3.16 Schedule Settings dialog box

The Schedule Settings dialog box edits schedule information on a jobnet. The following figure shows the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒37: Schedule Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet whose schedule information is to be edited.

Schedule rules

Lists schedule rules, which you can add, delete or change.

Depends on upper-level jobnet

When the selected jobnet is a nested jobnet, specify whether to execute the jobnet using the schedule for the upper-level jobnet.

When the selected jobnet is the root jobnet, you cannot select Depends on upper-level jobnet.

With Depends on upper-level jobnet selected, the following items become inactive.

Copy Upper button

Add button

Change button

Copy button

Delete button

Refer to a calendar of another job group and Job group name

Copy Upper button

Click this when you want to copy the schedule rules for the upper-level jobnets to the nested jobnet. You can click here if all of the following conditions are met.

With the nested jobnet selected, the Schedule Settings dialog box has been displayed.

Depends on upper-level jobnet has not been selected.

If Depends on upper-level jobnet has been selected, the system further references the schedule rules for upper-level jobnets. This can be done until the root jobnet.

You cannot copy the setting items for the following upper-level jobnets.

Linked rule number in Schedule rules

Name of an exclusive jobnet specified by Exclusive schedule in Options

If the copy destination is a nested jobnet that has a schedule rule, the schedule rule will be lost.

#

Displays the number of a schedule rule.

Linked rule number

Displays the rule number of the upper-level jobnet assigned a schedule rule. A hyphen (-) appears for the root jobnet.

Type

Displays the type of the execution start date.

Year/Month

Displays the start year and month in the format of year/month. Asterisks (*) are displayed when the year and month are not set.

Day

Displays the start day appropriate to Type above. Asterisks (*) are displayed if Type is the registered day.

Time

Displays the start time in the format of hours:minutes (absolute or relative).

Processing cycle

Displays a processing cycle (year, month, week, day, or open or closed day). If no processing cycle is set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Substitute schedule of closed day job

Displays how to substitute the schedule of a closed day job. Displays a hyphen (-) if the type is open day.

Monitor delay

Displays how to monitor start-time and end-time delays, in the format of Start (Absolute time, Do not monitor or Relative time), and End (Absolute time, Do not monitor or Relative time).

Add button

Adds a schedule rule. If you click the Add button, the Schedule Rule dialog box appears. This item becomes inactive when you select multiple schedule rules.

Change button

Changes a schedule rule. If you click the Change button, the Schedule Rule dialog box appears. This item becomes inactive when you select multiple schedule rules.

Copy button

Copies a selected schedule rule. Copies a schedule rule to create a new schedule rule. If you click the Copy button, the Schedule Rule dialog box appears. This item becomes inactive when you select multiple schedule rules.

Delete button

Deletes a selected schedule rule.

Valid term

Specify the valid term of a schedule rule.

Expiration date

Specify the expiration date of a schedule rule. Selecting Expiration date allows you to set a year, month and day. The following gives the specifiable values and the defaults.

Table 12‒12: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Year, month, day

Specifiable value

Default value

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

Blank

2

Month

1 to 12

Blank

3

Day

1 to 31

Blank

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

Options

Define schedule option information.

Refer to a calendar of another job group

Specify whether to execute a jobnet according to the schedule of another job group or planning group.

You can use the calendar information of a job group (or planning group) of another hierarchy, rather than the calendar information defined in the job group (or planning group) containing that jobnet. To do this, select Refer to a calendar of another job group and specify the full path name of the job group in Job group name (no scheduler service name is available and the name begins with a slant (/)).

You can specify in Job group name a character string of up to 930 bytes. The default is a blank. For details, see 3.3.2(3)(a) Refer to a calendar of another job group in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You cannot specify the following characters.

( (Left parenthesis)

) (Right parenthesis)

, (Comma)

: (Colon)

; (Semicolon)

= (Equal sign)

Space

Supplementary note

Suppose that you have displayed the dialog box for the root jobnet belonging to the job group. You can relatively specify the job group (or planning group) which is in the same level of hierarchy as the root jobnet or which belongs to that root jobnet.

For example, if you specify the job group group1 in the same hierarchy as that of the root jobnet, you can also specify group1.

If you specify the job group group2 belonging to the job group group1, which is in the same hierarchy as that of the root jobnet, you can also specify group1/group2.

For this relative specification, the system adds the full path name of the higher-level unit when you save the definition.

Exclusive schedule

Specify whether not to execute the jobnet on the same day as another jobnet.

If you select Exclusive schedule, you can set Exclusive jobnet using a string of up to 30 bytes. You can specify a jobnet in the same hierarchy. You cannot specify the name of the jobnet you are editing. The default is a blank. For details, see 3.3.2(3)(b) Exclusive schedule in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You cannot specify the following characters.

( (Left parenthesis)

) (Right parenthesis)

, (Comma)

: (Colon)

; (Semicolon)

= (Equal sign)

/ (Slant)

Space

Specifying a planning group will have the same effect as when you specify an exclusive schedule for each jobnet immediately below the group. On the other hand, if you specify an exclusive schedule from a jobnet immediately below the planning group, only the jobnets in the same hierarchy will be affected.

Supplementary note

For the same jobnet, multiple users can edit schedule information. If another user has changed schedule information, clicking the OK button displays a message dialog box to confirm saving.

12.3.17 Schedule Rule dialog box

The Schedule Rule dialog box edits the detailed schedule rules of a jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Basic page

Monitor Delay page

Advanced page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒38: Items displayed in common in the Schedule Rule dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Rule number

Specify a rule number of 1 to 144. You cannot set already used numbers. The default is the smallest number not used.

Rule number to link

For a nested jobnet, specify a rule number for the upper-level jobnet to link the schedule rule. The default is the same value as the Rule number above.

You cannot specify this item for a root jobnet.

Repeat button

Click this button to define schedule rules that start a jobnet at regular intervals. When you click the Repeat button, the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box appears. For details, see 12.3.18 Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box.

(2) Basic page

The Basic page sets the type of the start date, start time, and a processing cycle.

The following figure shows the Basic page in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Figure 12‒39: Basic page in the Schedule Rule dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Type

Select the type of the jobnet start date from the dropdown list.

You can specify one of the following types. The default is Registered day.

Registered day

Sets the day of jobnet registration for the start date.

When you select Registered day, you do not need to specify the start year, month, and day.

Absolute day

When you select this option, specify an actual date (each month begins from 1) as the execution start date.

Relative day

When you select this option, specify the desired number of days from the base day specified in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box or Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box as the execution start date.

Open day

When you select this option, specify the desired number of open days from the base day specified in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box or Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box as the execution start date.

Closed day

When you select this option, specify the desired number of closed days from the base day specified in the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box or Define Details - [Planning Group] dialog box as the execution start date.

What you selected in Type determines the displayed items you can specify and what you can set for those items. The following table lists what you can set for the displayed items according to the selected type, as well as their settings.

Table 12‒13: Types and settings for the displayed items

No.

Type

Start year month

Start day

Start time

Processing cycle

Substitute schedule of closed day job

1

Registered day

--

--

Relative

Absolute

Day

Week

Month

Year

Do not execute

Execute on previous open day

Execute on next open day

Execute without shift

2

Absolute day

Year

Month

Date

End of month

Day of the week

Relative

Absolute

Day

Week

Month

Year

Do not execute

Execute on previous open day

Execute on next open day

Execute without shift

3

Relative day

Year

Month

Date

End of month

Day of the week

Relative

Absolute

Day

Week

Month

Year

Do not execute

Execute on previous open day

Execute on next open day

Execute without shift

4

Open day

Year

Month

Date

End of month

Relative

Absolute

Open day

Month

Year

--

5

Closed day

Year

Month

Date

End of month

Relative

Absolute

Closed day

Month

Year

Do not execute

Execute on previous open day

Execute on next open day

Execute without shift

Start year and month

Specify an execution start year and month. You can set 1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter as the year. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

You can set 1 to 12 as the month. The default is a blank.

You can omit year. If you omit year, you can also omit month. The default is the year and month registered for execution.

Start day

Select how to specify the execution start date from the dropdown list. The default is Specify day. The following gives how to set the base date:

Specify day

Specify an absolute date as the execution start date.

Specify end of month

Specify the execution start date relative to the month end.

Specify day of the week

Lets you set a day of the week.

If you specify an asterisk (*), the system assumes the execution start date to be the next day of the week after the date when the jobnet was registered for execution and the date when the ajsschedule command was executed. If you specify either year or month for Start year and month and specify an asterisk (*) for Specify day of the week, the system assumes the first week when you register anything for execution and when you execute the ajsschedule command.

The method for setting the execution start date depends on the selection in Type. The following table covers how to set the execution start date according to the selection in Type.

Table 12‒14: How to set the execution start date according to the selection in Type

Type

Method

Format

Specifiable value

Default

Absolute day

Specify day

d th day

When you omit a year and month

1 to 31

When you omit only a year

February: 1st to 29th day

Other months: Number of days specifiable for an appropriate month

When you specify a year and month

Number of days specifiable for the appropriate year and month

Blank

Specify end of month

d days before last day

Absolute date minus 1

The default is 0.

Blank

Relative day

Specify day

d th day

1 to 35

Blank

Specify end of month

d days before last day

0 to 34

The default is 0.

Blank

Absolute day Relative day

Specify day of the week

n th w day

n: * (asterisk), 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, final

w: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

n: * (Asterisk)

w: Mon

Open day

Specify day

d th open day

1 to 35

Blank

Specify end of month

d open days before last day

0 to 34

The default is 0.

Blank

Closed day

Specify day

d th closed day

1 to 35

Blank

Specify end of month

d closed days before last day

0 to 34

The default is 0.

Blank

Legend:

d: Numeric

n: Symbol and character

w: Day of the week

Start time

Sets the execution start time. Select Absolute time or Relative time. The default is Relative time. For details, see 3.3.2(1)(a) Setting the execution start time in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview. Then, set hours and minutes. You can set 0 to 47 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. The default is 0 hours 0 minutes as the relative time.

Processing cycle

Sets a processing cycle. To set a processing cycle, select Execution in cycle and then set a cycle as follows. The default is a blank and day. For details, see 3.3.2(1)(b) Processing cycle in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You can specify the following units and values.

Open days, days or closed days: 1 to 31

Weeks: 1 to 5

Months: 1 to 12

Years: 1 to 9

Substitute schedule of closed day job

Set how to substitute the schedule of a closed day job. The default is Do not execute for a root jobnet, and Execute without shift for a nested jobnet. For details, see 3.3.2(1)(c) Substitute schedule of closed day job in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

You can use the following methods for substitution.

Do not execute

Does not execute the jobnet on a closed day.

Execute on previous open day

Shifts jobnet execution to the previous open day.

Execute on next open day

Shifts jobnet execution to the next open day.

Execute without shift

Executes the jobnet on a closed day.

If you specify Execute on previous open day or Execute on next open day, you can set the maximum number of shift days. We recommend that you specify the maximum number of shift days so that they are fewer than the number of days in the processing cycle. You can set 1 to 31. The default is 2.

Start condition

With start conditions defined for a jobnet, select whether to use those conditions to execute the jobnet. The default is Do not use.

Selecting the nested jobnet to display the Schedule Rule dialog box will result in inactive display.

Use if defined

Select this if you use the start conditions. If you select Use if defined, you can specify Valid range of start condition.

Do not use

Select this if you do not use the start conditions. If you select Do not use, Valid range of start condition becomes inactive.

Valid range of start condition

Specify the number of executions under applied start conditions, or the period of execution. If Use if defined is selected for Start condition, you can set this item. For details, see 3.4.3 Valid range of a start condition in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Selecting the nested jobnet to display the Schedule Rule dialog box will result in inactive display.

Times

To set the valid range as the number of executions, in the Times dropdown list, select Unlimited or Number of executions. With Number of executions selected, you can set the number of times in the field to the right of the dropdown list. You can set 1 to 999. The default is a blank.

Period

To set the valid term as time, in the Period dropdown list, select Unlimited, Absolute time, or Relative time. With Absolute time or Relative time selected, you can set the value in the hour and minute field to the right of the dropdown list. For absolute time, you can set 0 to 47 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. For relative time, you can set 1 to 2,879 minutes. The default is a blank.

Note that if one of the settings listed below is specified, clicking the OK button displays the following confirmation message:

KAVV782-Q There is a possibility that multiple instances of the monitoring generation start running because the processing cycle is specified and the useful range of the start condition has been set to unrestricted. Are you sure you want to specify this setting?

The Execution in cycle check box is selected in Processing cycle.

The Use if defined radio button is selected in Start condition.

Unlimited is selected for both Times and Period in Valid range of start condition.

(3) Monitor Delay page

The Monitor Delay page sets the way to monitor the start-time delay and the end-time delay. For details about how to monitor delays, see 3.3.2(1)(f) Monitor delay in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The following figure shows the Monitor Delay page in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Figure 12‒40: Monitor Delay page in the Schedule Rule dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Monitor start delay

Set how to monitor the start-time delay. The default is Do not monitor.

For the root jobnet, you can select one of the following:

Do not monitor

Absolute time

Relative from start of the jobnet

For a jobnet other than the root jobnet, you can select one of the following:

Do not monitor

Absolute time

Relative from start of root jobnet

Relative from start of upper-l jobnet

Relative from start of the jobnet

With Absolute time selected, you can set hours and minutes. You can set 0 to 47 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. The default is a blank.

If you select Relative from start of root jobnet, Relative from start of upper-l jobnet or Relative from start of the jobnet, you can set 1 to 2,879 minutes. The default is a blank.

Monitor end delay

Set how to monitor the end-time delay. The default is Do not monitor.

For the root jobnet, you can select one of the following:

Do not monitor

Absolute time

Relative from start of the jobnet

For a jobnet other than the root jobnet, you can select one of the following:

Do not monitor

Absolute time

Relative from start of root jobnet

Relative from start of upper-l jobnet

Relative from start of the jobnet

With Absolute time selected, you can set hours and minutes. You can set 0 to 47 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. The default is a blank.

If you select Relative from start of root jobnet, Relative from start of upper-l jobnet or Relative from start of the jobnet, you can set 1 to 2,879 minutes. The default is a blank.

(4) Advanced page

The Advanced page sets the schedule by days from the start time.

The following figure shows the Advanced page in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Figure 12‒41: Advanced page in the Schedule Rule dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Schedule by days from start

Define a job schedule by days from the start time. This schedule executes the jobnet by changing the preset execution start date by the specified number of days. For details, see 3.3.2(1)(g) Schedule by days from start in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Schedule by days from start

If the Schedule by days from start check box is selected, you can specify how to shift the start day, the number of days by which the start day can be shifted, and the maximum number of days by which the start day can be shifted.

The text box under Execution allows you to specify the number of days by which you want to shift the start day. You can specify 1 to 31. The default is 1.

The drop-down list allows you to select the basis for counting the number of days, and whether to shift the scheduled start day backward or forward.

The following describes the two bases of counting the number of days:

Open-day basis

When calculating on an open-day basis, the next execution day is calculated from the schedule settings (such as the scheduled start time, processing cycle, and closed-day substitution) and then shifted backward or forward by counting only open days.

All-day basis

When calculating on an all-day basis, the next execution day is calculated from the schedule settings (such as the scheduled start time, processing cycle, and closed-day substitution) and then shifted backward or forward by counting both open days and closed days.

The following describes the items that can be selected from the drop-down list box. The default is open days before start time.

open days before start time

Select this item to shift the scheduled start day backward by a number of open days.

open days after start time

Select this item to shift the scheduled start day forward by a number of open days.

days before start time

Select this item to shift the scheduled start day backward by a number of days (including closed days).

days after start time

Select this item to shift the scheduled start day forward by a number of days (including closed days).

If you select open days before start time or open days after start time, you can also specify a value for Max. shiftable days. You can specify 1 to 31. However, specify a value equal to or greater than the number of days set for Execution. The default is 10.

12.3.18 Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box

The Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box defines the details of a repetition setting that allows you to define schedule rules that start a jobnet at regular intervals. The following figure shows the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒42: Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Repetition settings

Select whether to define a repetition setting for the schedule rule. The default is Yes.

Yes

Select this option to define schedule rules that repeat a jobnet at regular intervals.

No

Select this option if you do not want to apply a repetition setting to the schedule rule, or want to reset a repetition setting. If you select No, Start interval and Last start time become inactive.

Start interval

Specify the interval, in minutes, by which to offset the start time of each schedule rule defined by the repetition setting. You can specify a value from 10 to 120. This field is blank by default.

Last start time

Specify the start time of the last schedule rule defined by the repetition setting in the hh:mm format. You can specify a value from 0 to 47 for hh, and a value from 0 to 59 for mm. By default, both fields are blank.

If you specified an absolute time for Start time in the Schedule Rule dialog box, the time you specify in this field is handled as an absolute time. If you specified a relative time for Start time, the time is handled as a relative time.

Supplementary note

The information you enter in the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box remains in effect until you return to the Schedule Settings dialog box by clicking the OK or Cancel button in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

12.3.19 Waiting Condition Settings dialog box

The Waiting Condition Settings dialog box assigns a wait condition to a unit. The following figure shows the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒43: Waiting Condition Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the name of the unit to which the wait condition is to be assigned. You cannot edit this item.

Waiting-target units

In this area, you can add, change, or delete units whose ends are to be waited for. A list of such units appears in the list box.

Waiting-target unit

Displays the names of units whose ends are to be waited for.

Add button

Adds a unit whose end is to be waited for. When you click the Add button, the Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box appears. This button is inactive if the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition for has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

Change button

Changes a unit selected in the Waiting-target units area. When you click the Change button, the Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box appears.

This button is inactive when:

No unit is selected in the Waiting-target units area

Multiple units are selected in the Waiting-target units area

The unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended

Delete button

Deletes the selected unit from the Waiting-target units area. This button is inactive when no unit is selected in the Waiting-target units area, and when the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

Wait method

Specify the wait method that applies when more than one unit whose end is to be waited for is assigned to the unit with wait conditions. The default is AND. This item is inactive if there are no units listed in the Waiting-target units area, or the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

You can choose either of the following wait methods:

AND

The wait condition is satisfied when all units whose ends are being waited for finish executing.

OR

The wait condition is satisfied when any one of the units whose ends are being waited for finishes executing.

No generations to wait for

Select whether the unit with wait conditions continues waiting for the wait condition to be satisfied or executes immediately when there are no applicable generations of the units whose ends are being waited for. The default is Do not execute. This item is inactive if there are no units listed in the Waiting-target units area, or the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

You can configure the unit to behave in either of the following ways when there are no applicable generations:

Do not execute

The unit continues waiting for the wait condition to be satisfied.

Execute

The unit starts executing immediately, without waiting for units whose ends are being waited for to finish executing.

A jobnet with start conditions is waiting

When designating a jobnet with a start condition as a unit whose end is being waited for, specify the conditions under which the jobnet with a start condition is considered to have finished executing.

When Unmonitored + Ended

Select whether a monitoring generation is considered to have ended when the generation enters Unmonitored + Ended status. The default is Do not execute.

This item is inactive if there are no units listed in the Waiting-target units area, or the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

Do not execute

A monitoring generation that enters Unmonitored + Ended status is not considered to have finished executing. The wait condition is not satisfied and the unit with wait conditions does not start executing until the monitoring generation finishes executing, even if the execution generation has already finished.

Execute

A monitoring generation that enters Unmonitored + Ended status is considered to have finished executing. When all execution and monitoring generations have finished executing, the wait condition is satisfied and the unit with wait conditions will start.

Abnormal end for an execution generation

Select whether an execution generation is considered to have ended when it terminates abnormally. The default is Do not execute.

This item is inactive if there are no units listed in the Waiting-target units area, or the unit to which you are assigning the wait condition has been registered for execution and is not suspended.

Do not execute

An execution generation that terminates abnormally is not considered to have finished executing. The wait condition is not satisfied and the unit with wait conditions does not start executing until the execution generation finishes executing, even if the monitoring generation has already finished. However, if the Start when skipped so not exe. check box is selected, the execution generation is considered to have finished executing when it enters Skipped so not exe. status. The Start when skipped so not exe. check box is cleared by default.

Execute

An execution generation is considered to have finished executing when it terminates abnormally. When the monitoring generation and all execution generations have finished executing, the wait condition is satisfied regardless of the end status of the execution generation, and the unit with wait conditions will start.

12.3.20 Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box

The Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box assigns a unit whose end is to be waited for. The following figure shows the Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒44: Waiting-Target Unit Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Waiting-target unit

Specify, as a character string of no more than 930 bytes, the unit name obtained by removing the scheduler service name from the full name of the unit whose end is being waited for.

Example

/GROUP/NET

When you click the ... button, the Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box appears. When you select a unit in the Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box, the full path name of that unit appears in the Waiting-target unit field.

For details about the units you can set as a unit whose end is to be waited for, see 2.2.5(1)(a) Units with wait conditions and units whose ends are being waited for in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

12.3.21 Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box

In the Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box, you can select a unit whose end is to be waited for from the tree area. The following figure shows the Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box.

Figure 12‒45: Select Waiting-Target Unit dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Tree area

The tree area displays a scheduler service and subordinate units in a hierarchical format. Only units for which you have reference permission appear in the tree. Note that when you display a unit of the release-target jobnet, units whose release status is Being applied are displayed. Select the unit whose end is to be waited for from the tree area.

The following lists the units that appear and do not appear in the tree area:

Units displayed in tree area:

Job groups

Root jobnets

Nested jobnets

Planning groups

Standard jobs

Event jobs#

Action jobs

Custom jobs

Passing information setting jobs

HTTP connection jobs

#

Event jobs that are subject to a start condition are not displayed.

Units not displayed in tree area:

Remote jobnets

Manager job groups

Manager jobnets

Units defined in planning groups

OR jobs

Judgment jobs

Event jobs subject to a start condition

12.3.22 Register for Execution dialog box

The Register for Execution dialog box sets the method for registering execution.

In this dialog box, the displayed items vary depending on which radio button is selected for Register method.

The following explains the items displayed in common and the items displayed for each radio button.

The following figure shows the items displayed in common in the Register for Execution dialog box.

Figure 12‒46: Displayed items in the Register for Execution dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of a jobnet to be registered for execution. If you select multiple jobnets, the system displays, in Jobnet name, the jobnet name which is selected and which is at the top of the list area.

Register method

Specify how to register a schedule for execution. The default is Fixed execution if you select a jobnet immediately below the planning group. Otherwise, the default will be Planned execution.

You can select one of the following methods for registration for execution.

Planned execution

Executes a jobnet according to the calendar information or the schedule definition. If any changes are made to the calendar or the schedule definition after registration, the jobnet will be executed based on the new schedule.

Fixed execution

The execution schedule is calculated for a specified period or number of generations according to the calendar information or the schedule definition at the time of registration. The scheduled execution date will not be recalculated if you make any changes to a calendar or a schedule definition after registering execution.

Immediate execution

Jobnet execution starts the immediately after you register the jobnet for execution.

For details about how to register a jobnet for each type of execution, see 4.1.1 Methods of registering a jobnet for execution in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Pass Info button

When this button is clicked, the Passing Information dialog box appears. Here, you can specify the information inherited at the time of registration for execution. For details, see 12.3.23 Passing Information dialog box.

This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(1) When the register method is planned execution

The following figure shows the Register for Execution dialog box used for registration for planned execution.

Figure 12‒47: Register for Execution dialog box (for planned execution)

The following explains the displayed items.

Planned time passed when daemon starts

Select whether to execute the jobnet immediately or from the next scheduled day if the scheduled start time is exceeded when a scheduler service is started. You can select Execute immediately or Execute from next time. The default is Execute immediately. This item is available if the service start mode is warm start or disaster-recovery start.

Planned time passed when reg. for exe.

If planned start time has passed during registration for execution, you select immediate execution or execution from the next planned date. You can select Execute immediately or Execute from next time. The default is Execute immediately.

Holding

Use this item to select whether to hold a root jobnet when the jobnet is registered for planned execution.

If Hold is selected, the execution generations created during registration for execution are held. By default, the check box is not selected.

Note that this item can be used only if the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View are 11-10 or later.

(2) When the register method is fixed execution

The following figure shows the Register for Execution dialog box used for registration for fixed execution.

Figure 12‒48: Register for Execution dialog box (for fixed execution)

The following explains the displayed items.

Fixed schedule period

Set a period for a fixed execution schedule. You can set the period from January 1, 1994 to December 31, four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter.

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, you can set a period up to December 31, 2036. You cannot, however, set a date for the end day that comes before the start day. The default is a blank.

If you set both Fixed schedule period and Future generation, the execution schedule is defined as follows:

When the planned execution count defined for the fixed execution schedule in Fixed schedule period is greater than the planned execution count defined for the fixed execution schedule in Future generation (per day in the processing cycle):

The execution schedule is registered for fixed execution by the planned execution count defined for the fixed execution schedule in Fixed schedule period. If the fixed generation becomes smaller than the future generation, new generations are registered so that the fixed generation reaches the future generation.

When the planned execution count defined in Fixed schedule period is smaller than the planned execution count defined in Future generation (per day in the processing cycle):

The execution schedule is registered for the fixed execution by the planned execution count defined for the fixed execution schedule in Future generation. If the fixed generation becomes smaller than the future generation, new generations are registered so that the fixed generation reaches the future generation.

Future generation

Specify how many execution schedules are created. You can set 1 to 99. The default is a blank.

Planned time passed when daemon starts

Select whether to execute the jobnet immediately or from the next scheduled day if the scheduled start time has already passed when a scheduler service is started. You can select Execute immediately or Execute from next time. The default is Execute immediately. This item is available when the service start mode is warm start or disaster-recovery start.

Holding

Use this item to select whether to hold a root jobnet when the jobnet is registered for fixed execution.

If Hold is selected, the first execution generation created during registration for execution is held. By default, the check box is not selected.

Note that this item can be used only if the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View are 11-10 or later.

(3) When the register method is immediate execution

The following figure shows the Register for Execution dialog box used for registration for immediate execution.

Figure 12‒49: Register for Execution dialog box (for immediate execution)

The following explains the displayed items.

Start condition

With start conditions defined, select whether to use those conditions to execute the jobnet immediately. The default is Do not use. You can specify the following items.

Use if defined

Select this if you use the start conditions. If you select Use if defined, you can specify Valid range of start condition.

Do not use

Select this if you do not use the start conditions. If you select Do not use, Valid range of start condition becomes inactive.

Valid range of start condition

Specify the number of executions under applied start conditions, or the period of execution. If Use if defined is selected for Start condition, you can set this item. For details, see 3.4.3 Valid range of a start condition in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Times

To set the valid range as the number of executions, in the Times dropdown list, select Unlimited or Number of executions. With Number of executions selected, you can set the number of times in the field to the right of the dropdown list. You can set 1 to 999. The default is a blank.

Period

To set the valid term as time, in the Period dropdown list, select Unlimited, Absolute time, or Relative time.

With Absolute time or Relative time selected, you can set the value in the hour and minute field to the right of the dropdown list. For absolute time, you can set 0 to 47 hours, and 0 to 59 minutes. For relative time, you can set 1 to 2,879 minutes. The default is a blank.

Holding

Use this item to select whether to hold a root jobnet when the jobnet is registered for immediate execution.

If you select the Hold check box, the root jobnet will be placed in a hold state immediately after it is registered for execution. By default, the check box is not selected.

Note that this item can be used only if the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View are 10-50 or later.

Supplementary notes

You can select Register for Execution dialog box via the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, and the Monthly Schedule window.

When you successfully register the jobnet to be executed by clicking the OK button, the system refreshes the status and result of the target jobnet only.

Because the information set in this dialog box is not saved, the previously registered contents do not appear.

The jobnet immediately below the planning group can only be registered for execution with a fixed schedule period specified. In the following cases, an error message will be displayed and you cannot register a schedule for execution:

- You attempted to register for planned execution or immediate execution.

- You attempted to register for fixed execution only with Future generation specified.

- You attempted to register for fixed execution with both Fixed schedule period and Future generation specified.

If the value of Fixed schedule period is customized to exceed n months, clicking OK will display a warning message when you register for fixed execution. You can customize n, the number of months, as required. The default is Unlimited. For details about customization, see 11.4.3 Setting the warning message to be displayed when a jobnet is registered for fixed execution.

You can set passing information, irrespective of the method of registration selected in the Register for Execution dialog box. Note that passing information cannot be specified in a root remote jobnet.

12.3.23 Passing Information dialog box

The Passing Information dialog box lists all items of passing information for the unit selected to be registered for execution. The following figure shows the Passing Information dialog box.

Figure 12‒50: Passing Information dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Passing Info

Lists the passing information for the unit in the format macro-variable-name:passing-information.

You can register a maximum of 32 pieces of passing information, but you cannot use the same macro variable name more than once.

Add button

Clicking the Add button displays the Register Passing Information dialog box, in which you can add passing information. For details, see 12.3.24 Register Passing Information dialog box.

Change button

Clicking the Change button displays the Register Passing Information dialog box, in which you can change passing information. For details, see 12.3.24 Register Passing Information dialog box.

Delete button

You can select and delete items from the list of items of passing information.

12.3.24 Register Passing Information dialog box

In the Register Passing Information dialog box, you can register or change passing information. The following figure shows the Register Passing Information dialog box.

Figure 12‒51: Register Passing Information dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Variable

Specify the macro variable name without the first five characters (?AJS2) and last character (?), as a character string of no more than 58 bytes. You can use upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and periods (.).

... button

Use this button to select a macro variable name used in an existing unit in the same root jobnet. When you click this button, the Variables Used dialog box appears in which you can select a macro variable name. For details, see 12.3.25 Variables Used dialog box.

Passing Info

Specify passing information by using a character string of up to 255 bytes.

Cautionary note

In Passing Info, do not specify return or tab strokes, or any machine-dependent characters. Doing so may prevent the specified information from being passed correctly when jobnets are registered for execution.

Supplementary note

Specify a variable name so that the total number of bytes# of the macro variable name in the target unit is no more than 1,023.

Also, specify a variable name and passing information so that the total of the number of bytes# of the macro variable name and the number of bytes of the passing information in the target unit is no more than 4,085.

#

Number of bytes obtained by removing from the macro variable name ?AJS2 at the beginning and ? at the end + 4 (unit: bytes)

12.3.25 Variables Used dialog box

The Variables Used dialog box lists all macro variables used in a particular unit. The following figure shows the Variables Used dialog box.

Figure 12‒52: Variables Used dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Variables

Lists the macro variable names used in the target root jobnet and its subordinate units. It does not display the macro variable names for units defined under remote jobnets.

Multiple macro variables in a single definition item are displayed on more than one line. The same also applies when one particular macro variable is repeated in a single definition item.

Select an item from a displayed list of items and click the OK button to set a macro variable name in Variable in the Register Passing Information dialog box on the calling side.

Unit name

When the unit is a nested jobnet or a job, its name appears as a relative path from the root jobnet.

For example, nest/job is displayed when the full path name of the root jobnet is /root and the full path name of the job is /root/nest/job.

If variables are used in the root jobnet itself, the name of the root jobnet appears in parentheses. For example, (root) is displayed when the full path name of the root jobnet is /root.

If an operation covers multiple selected root jobnets, the name of the root jobnet itself is also displayed.

Used in

Where to use a macro variable name is displayed by the keyword for the unit definition parameter. For details about the unit definition parameter, see 5.2 Definition format and parameters in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Variable

The macro variable name is displayed in the format of ?AJS2xxxxx?.

12.3.26 Cancel Registration dialog box

The Cancel Registration dialog box cancels execution registration for a selected jobnet. The following figure shows the Cancel Registration dialog box.

Figure 12‒53: Cancel Registration dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of a jobnet for which you want to cancel execution registration. If you select multiple jobnets, the system displays, in Jobnet name, the jobnet name which is selected and which is at the top of the list area.

Cancel method

Select how to cancel execution registration. By default, All is selected when you open the dialog box from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), or Specify period is selected when you open the dialog box from the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) or the Monthly Schedule window.

All

Select this option if you want to cancel all the execution registration for selected jobnets.

Specify period

Select this option if you want to cancel execution registration for selected jobnets only for a certain period.

Date type

Lets you select whether you should specify Cancel period as a calendar date or an execution date of JP1/AJS3. You can select this option when Specify period is selected for Cancel method.

By default, Execution date is selected when you open the dialog box from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) or the Monthly Schedule window, or Calendar date is selected when you open the dialog box from the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Calendar date

Select this to set Cancel period with a calendar date.

Cancels registration for a generation of jobnets that have a scheduled start time within a specified period. 24 hours from the base time set in JP1/AJS3 is considered to be one day.

Execution date

Select this to set Cancel period with an execution date of JP1/AJS3.

Cancels registration for a generation of jobnets that have a scheduled start time within a specified period. If the schedule of a root jobnet is based on 48 hours, 48 hours from the base time set in JP1/AJS3 is considered to be one day. If the schedule of a root jobnet is based on 24 hours, 24 hours from the base time set in JP1/AJS3 is considered to be one day.

Supplementary note

If you specify the cancel period from December 15, 2009 to December 16, 2009, the system treats the jobnet scheduled to start at 25:00 on December 14, 2009 as follows:

If you select Calendar date, the registration of this jobnet is canceled because 25:00 on December 14 is equal to 1:00 on December 15 in a calendar date.

If you select Execution date and the root jobnet schedule is based on 24 hours, 25:00 exceeds the boundary of 24 hours and is considered to be the next day (December 15), so that the registration is canceled.

If you select Execution date and the root jobnet's schedule is based on 48 hours, registration is not canceled. Although 25:00 on December 14 is equal to 1:00 on December 15 in a calendar date, the scheduled execution date of JP1/AJS3 (December 14) is outside the period to be canceled.

Cancel period

Specify the cancel period in the format "from [ ] / [ ] / [ ] to [ ] / [ ] / [ ]." You can select this option when Specify period is selected for Cancel method. You can set a period within the range from January 1, 1994 to December 31, four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, you can set a period up to December 31, 2036.

Note that you cannot set the end date that comes before the start date. Also, you cannot omit the start date or the end date, and any of the year, month, or day should not be left blank. The default is a blank.

Supplementary notes

You can open the Cancel Registration dialog box via the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, and the Monthly Schedule window. If you have accessed the Cancel Registration dialog box from one of these windows, Cancel period displays the scheduled start date of a selected unit.

When you specify Cancel period, an error occurs in the following cases, preventing you from canceling registration:

- There is no schedule for the specified period.

- All schedules for the specified period are pseudo schedules.

- There is any schedule for the specified period that is currently being executed.

Whether a schedule falls within the specified cancel period depends on whether the scheduled start time falls within the period.

12.3.27 Register for Release dialog box

The Register for Release dialog box allows you to specify information that is required to perform release entry. The following figure shows the Register for Release dialog box.

Figure 12‒54: Register for Release dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Release source

Displays the name of the release source jobnet.

Release target

Specify the full name of a release target jobnet. This text box is blank by default. You cannot specify the following characters:

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

(

)

=

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

When you click the ... button, the Selection of Release Target dialog box appears. In the Selection of Release Target dialog box, select a release target jobnet. Then the full name of the selected jobnet appears in Release target in the Register for Release dialog box. Note that you cannot specify the following jobnets as release targets:

Jobnets whose unit type is other than root jobnet

Jobnets whose scheduler service differs from that of the release source jobnet

Jobnets containing definitions in the Release entry wait, Release wait, or Delete wait status

Suspended jobnets

Jobnets being edited

Jobnets currently being manipulated by other users

Jobnets for which the user has no operation permission

Jobnets in the Shutdown status

Release ID

Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes to specify a release ID. We recommend that you specify a release ID that describes the work performed by the jobnet or changes made to the definition. You cannot specify the following characters:

Single-byte space

(

)

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

=

/

Tab character

Linefeed character

"

&

'

*

<

>

?

[

\

]

^

‘

`

{

|

}

~

Note that you cannot specify the following release IDs:

Release IDs that are already associated with a jobnet specified in Release target

Release IDs that begin with single-byte upper-case AJS

Release date

Specify the year, month, day, hour, and minute of release. The following table lists specifiable values and default values.

Table 12‒15: Values that can be specified for release date

No.

Time

Specifiable value

Default

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

Current year

2

Month

1 to 12

Current month

3

Day

1 to 31 (number of days in the month)

Blank

4

Hour

0 to 23

Blank

5

Minutes

0 to 59

Blank

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

Note that you cannot specify time before the current time.

Release comment

Use a character string of a maximum of 80 bytes to specify a comment. This text box is a blank by default. You cannot specify tab characters and linefeed characters.

Operation after registration for release

If the jobnet specified as the release target is subject to a plan change or other form of temporary change, you can display the Temporary Changes dialog box and check its contents. For details about the Temporary Changes dialog box, see 12.3.40 Temporary Changes dialog box.

Open the Temporary Changes list check box

Causes the Temporary Changes dialog box to appear when you have finished using the Register for Release dialog box. If you select this item, you can re-execute a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box. For details about the procedure for re-executing a temporary change, 9.17.2 Re-executing temporary changes.

Browse button

When you click this button, the Temporary Changes dialog box appears. When accessed from the Browse button, the Temporary Changes dialog box only allows you to view a list of temporary changes, not to re-execute them.

12.3.28 Selection of Release Target dialog box

The Selection of Release Target dialog box allows you to select a release target jobnet. The following figure shows the Selection of Release Target dialog box.

Figure 12‒55: Selection of Release Target dialog box

The following explains the displayed item.

Tree area

The tree area displays a scheduler service and subordinate units in a hierarchical format. Select a release target jobnet from the displayed units.

12.3.29 Add dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The Add dialog box (for a root jobnet) sets the start time of a fixed execution schedule for a root jobnet. The following figure illustrates the Add dialog box.

Figure 12‒56: Add dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the root jobnet to which a start time is to be added.

Start time

Specify the start time of a fixed schedule. The following table lists the values you can set, and the defaults.

Table 12‒16: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Time

Specifiable value

Default

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

Current year

2

Month

1 to 12

Current month

3

Day

1 to 31 (Number of days in the month)

Current day

4

Hours

0 to 47

Current hour

A blank for the Monthly Schedule window

5

Minutes

0 to 59

Current minutes

A blank for the Monthly Schedule window

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

Holding

Select whether to hold the generations to be added.

If Hold is selected, the generations to be added are held. By default, the check box is not selected.

Note that this item can be used only if the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View are 11-10 or later.

Pass Info button

When the Passing Information dialog box appears, you can specify the information passed at the time of registration for execution. For details, see 12.3.23 Passing Information dialog box.

12.3.30 Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job)

The Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job) is used to specify the start time of the next execution schedule or fixed execution schedule for a jobnet. The following figure shows the Add dialog box.

Figure 12‒57: Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job)

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the name of the unit to which a start time is added.

Start time of upper jobnet

Lists the start times for the upper-level jobnet. From the list, select the start time for the upper-level jobnet to be added to Unit name.

Start time

Specify the start time for the next execution schedule or fixed execution schedule.

The following table lists the values that you can set and default values.

Table 12‒17: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Time

Specifiable value

Default

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

Current year

2

Month

1 to 12

Current month

3

Day

1 to 31 (Number of days in the month)

Current day

4

Hours

0 to 47

Current hour

A blank for the Monthly Schedule window

5

Minutes

0 to 59

Current minutes

A blank for the Monthly Schedule window

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

12.3.31 Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box

The Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box changes the start time for a unit. For details, see 4.5.3 Temporarily changing the execution start time of a jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview. For details about how to change the date and time, see 9.3.1 Changing the execution start time of a jobnet.

The following figure shows this dialog box.

Figure 12‒58: Shift Schedule Date and Time dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet whose start time is to be changed.

Start time

Changes the time when execution of the unit is started to the absolute or relative time specified here. For details about how to specify the execution start date and time, see 3.3.2(1)(a) Setting the execution start time in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Specify date and time

Specify the absolute time when the execution of the unit is started.

The following table lists the values you can set, and the defaults.

Table 12‒18: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Time

Specifiable value

Default

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

Year before change

2

Month

1 to 12

Month before change

3

Day

1 to 31 (Number of days in the month)

Day before change

4

Hours

0 to 47

Hours before change

5

Minutes

0 to 59

Minutes before change

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

Specify by relative time

Specify the relative time to change the previously set time. The default is 0.

To retard the time when unit execution starts, choose the + radio button. To advance the time, choose the - radio button.

Then, set days, hours and minutes.

The following table lists the values you can set, and the defaults.

Table 12‒19: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Time

Specifiable value

Default

1

Day

Blank character, or 0 to 99

Blank

2

Hours

Blank character, or 0 to 47

Blank

3

Minutes

Blank character, or 0 to 59

Blank

When schedule is pushed ahead

This specification is valid only when the selected jobnet is a root jobnet. If you want to push the start time ahead, you must specify whether to add the execution schedule at the start time before the change. You can set Also in next schedule or Not in next schedule. The default is Also in next schedule.

Change schedule of all lower jobnets

If you have selected Change schedule of all lower jobnets, you can relatively change the start times of all the jobnets under a selected jobnet. With this item cleared, you can change only the start time of a selected jobnet. By default, this item is cleared.

12.3.32 Immediate Execution dialog box

The Immediate Execution dialog box allows you to immediately execute a jobnet in the Wait for start time status. For details, see 4.5.4 Executing a registered jobnet immediately in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview. For details about how to perform immediate execution, see 9.4 Immediately executing the execution schedule of a jobnet.

The following figure shows this dialog box.

Figure 12‒59: Immediate Execution dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet to be executed immediately.

Start time

Displays the execution start time of the specified jobnet. Also, select whether to add an execution schedule before immediate execution to the next execution schedule.

When schedule is pushed ahead

This specification is valid only when the selected jobnet is a root jobnet. To push ahead the start time, specify whether to add an execution schedule to the start time before the change. You can set Also in next schedule or Not in next schedule. The default is Also in next schedule.

Change date and time of all lower jobnets

With this item selected, you can relatively change the start times of all the jobnets under a selected jobnet. With this item cleared, you can change only the start time of a selected jobnet. By default, this item is cleared.

12.3.33 Generation Selection dialog box

In the Generation Selection dialog box, you specify the target generation when performing the following operations in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

Rerun

Hold

Hold Release

The following figure shows the Generation Selection dialog box:

Figure 12‒60: Generation Selection dialog box

The following explains the displayed item.

Generation

Select the generation you want to operate. You can specify Status and Result. The default depends on the operation. For Rerun, the default is Result. For Hold or Hold Release, the default is Status.

If you specify Status, the operation targets the generation displayed in Status of the list area. If you specify Result, the operation targets the generation displayed in Result of the list area.

12.3.34 Rerun dialog box (for root jobnets)

In the Rerun dialog box (for a root subnet), you specify how to re-execute a jobnet or job. How to specify re-execution depends on whether the root jobnet is selected or a nested jobnet or job is selected. The following figure shows the Rerun dialog box (for a root jobnet):

Figure 12‒61: Rerun dialog box (for a root jobnet)

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet to be re-executed. If you select multiple jobnets, the system displays in Jobnet name, the jobnet name which is one of the selected ones and which is displayed at the top of the list area.

Rerun Method

Specify how to re-execute a root jobnet. The default is From top. However, you select From abnormally ended job if you want to re-execute an abnormally ended jobnet or if more than one unit is selected. For details, see 4.5.11(1) Rerun the root jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

From abnormally ended job

Re-executes the job which is one of the jobs of the specified root jobnet and which ended abnormally. If the job does not end abnormally, you cannot specify this item.

From after abnormally ended job

Re-executes a job following the job which belongs to the specified root jobnet and which ended abnormally. If no job ends abnormally, you cannot specify this item.

From abnormally ended jobnet

Re-executes the jobnets directly under which jobs that terminated abnormally are included. If no jobnet ends abnormally, you cannot specify this item.

From top

Re-executes jobs starting with the first job of the specified root jobnet.

Only job that ended with warning

Re-executes only the job which is one of the jobs of the specified root jobnet and which ended with a warning.

Rerun options

Specify whether to place the root jobnet to be re-executed in the hold status or to end the preceding unit in the abnormal status with a warning.

Rerun with hold

Sets the root jobnet to be re-executed in the hold status.

Set skipped jobs to warning

If a preceding unit in abnormal status exists, selecting this option ends the end status of that unit with a warning. If you select the From after abnormally ended job radio button, you can select this item.

12.3.35 Rerun dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job)

In the Rerun dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job), you specify how to re-execute jobnets or jobs. How to specify re-execution depends on whether a root jobnet is selected or a nested jobnet or job is selected. The following figure shows the Rerun dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job):

Figure 12‒62: Rerun dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job)

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the name of the jobnet or job to be re-executed.

Rerun Method

Specify how to re-execute nested jobnets or jobs. The default is From this unit. For details, see 4.5.11(2) Rerun a nested jobnet or job in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

From this unit

Re-executes the specified unit and subsequent units.

Only this unit

Re-executes only the specified unit.

After this unit

Starts re-execution with the unit following the specified unit.

Rerun options

Specify whether to hold the unit specified for re-execution or to end the preceding unit in the abnormal status with a warning.

Run with hold

Holds the unit specified for re-execution. You can select this check box when you click the From this unit or Only this unit radio button in Rerun Method. You cannot select this check box when you click the After this unit radio button or when the selected unit is a jobnet connector.

Note that this check box is selected even for a jobnet connector if you have selected Rerun with hold for Rerun (for nested jobnet or job) in the Set Default Values dialog box. However, when you click the OK button, the check box is ignored.

Set skipped jobs to warning

If a preceding unit in abnormal status exists, end the end status of that unit with a warning.

12.3.36 Execute Suspension dialog box

If the root jobnet that you want to suspend contains a generation currently being executed, the Execute Suspension dialog box lets you choose whether the jobnet will result in an error without being suspended or be suspended. For details about suspension, see 4.5.17 Changing job and jobnet definitions without unregistering the jobnet in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The Execute Suspension dialog box is shown below.

Figure 12‒63: Execute Suspension dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Specify the name of a root jobnet that you want to suspend.

If a unit is executing

Specify the operation available when the root jobnet that you want to suspend has a generation being executed. The default is Do not suspend.

Do not suspend

The root jobnet will not be suspended if it has a generation that is currently executed.

Suspend

The root jobnet will be suspended even if it has a generation that is currently executed.

12.3.37 Release Suspension dialog box

When a root jobnet being suspended is canceled, the Release Suspension dialog box lets you choose whether a unit added during the execution of the parent jobnet should be executed. The Release Suspension dialog box is shown below.

Figure 12‒64: Release Suspension dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Specify the name of a root jobnet that should become unsuspended.

Unit added during execution of parent jobnet

Specify the operation available when the parent jobnet of a unit being added during suspension and if the state of suspension is canceled. The default is Execute. For details, see 4.5.17(3)(d) Behavior of added units after suspension is released in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Execute

Executes the additional unit when the state of suspension is canceled.

Do not execute (stop)

Does not execute the additional unit when the state of suspension is canceled, but sets up s state of failure to execute a plan.

Hold

Does not execute the additional unit when the state of suspension is canceled, but sets the hold attribute. The additional unit will be executed only when the hold state is removed.

12.3.38 Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box

The Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box allows you to check the execution status of the selected jobnet (jobnet, remote jobnet, or jobnet connector) and the details about the execution result. The type of dialog box to be displayed differs depending on the icon you choose. The following describes the dialog box to be displayed for each case.

When you select a root jobnet:

The Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) appears.

When you select a nested jobnet:

The Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet) appears.

When you select a root remote jobnet:

The Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet) appears.

When you select a nested remote jobnet:

The Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet) appears.

When you select a jobnet connector:

The Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box appears.

Each of the following two groups of dialog boxes displays the same items.

Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) and Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet)

Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box, Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet), and Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet)

The following figures show the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) and the Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box.

Figure 12‒65: Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box

Figure 12‒66: Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the full path name of a unit.

Status

Displays the status of the unit.

Change plan

Displays whether any plan in the unit has been changed.

Hold

Displays whether or not the execution of the unit is suspended.

The displayed information differs depending on the hold setting. The following table lists the character strings that can be displayed and the corresponding hold settings.

Table 12‒20: Hold statuses displayed in the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box and in the Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box, and their corresponding hold settings

Status

Hold setting

Follow the definition. (Hold)

Yes is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Do not hold)

No is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Yes

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold is selected.

Hold is selected in the Holding field of the Register for Execution dialog box.

None

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold-Release is selected.

Scheduled start time

Displays the time at which to start executing the unit.

Start time

Displays the time when the execution of the unit started.

The execution start date and time displayed here are the date and time when the unit entered the Now running status on the manager host.

To check the actual date and time when a job began to be executed on the agent, execute the ajsshow command. In the ajsshow command, specify the date and time when job execution started on another host (%V) in the format indicator.

For details about the ajsshow command, see ajsshow in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Rerun start time

Displays the time when the re-execution of the unit started.

When the unit is re-executed, the rerun start time is set for the upper-level jobnet at the rerun start point.

However, the rerun start time is not set for the root jobnet if the root jobnet is being executed. If the root jobnet has terminated and the root jobnet has been specified for the rerun start point, the rerun start time is exclusively set for the root jobnet.

End time

Displays the time when the execution of the unit ended.

The execution end date and time displayed here are the date and time when the unit entered the end status on the manager host.

To check the actual date and time when a job ended on the agent, execute the ajsshow command. In the ajsshow command, specify the date and time when job execution ended on another host (%Q) in the format indicator.

For details about the ajsshow command, see ajsshow in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Delay status

Displays the delay status of the unit.

Time when start delayed

Displays the start time for monitoring for a start delay.

Time when end delayed

Displays the date and time for monitoring an end delay.

For monitoring of an end delay for the scheduled end time in the schedule, the system assumes the following to be the time when the end is delayed: relative time from the scheduled start time and absolute time of the scheduled end.

When an end delay is monitored based on the time required for execution, this text box shows the number of days and hours from the start date and time. Therefore, the date and time from which to start detecting an end delay is determined when the jobnet starts to be executed.

If you have specified monitoring of an end delay based on both the scheduled end time and the time required for execution, the earlier time is shown here.

Start delayed

Displays whether a delayed start has been specified.

End delayed

Displays whether a delayed end has been specified.

Exec. ID (Source)

Displays the execution ID of the connected jobnet connector.

A hyphen (-) is displayed for jobnets for which execution order control is not performed using jobnet connectors or for remote jobnets.

This text box displays None when execution order control is performed but no jobnet connector is connected. The text box also displays None when you do not have reference permission for the connected jobnet connector.

The text box appears only in the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) and Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet).

Cautionary note

When the connected jobnet connector is under a scheduler service on a different host, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on the host with the jobnet connector beforehand.

Supplementary notes

The following table describes whether this text box displays the execution ID of a jobnet connector based on the status of the jobnet connector.

Table 12‒21: Status of a jobnet connector and whether its execution ID is displayed

Result/schedule

Generation of connection-destination jobnet

Status of jobnet connector

Execution ID

Execution order control method

Result

Result

No jobnet connector is connected.

N

Y

A jobnet connector is connected.

The jobnet connector exists.

Y

Y

The jobnet connector does not exist (deleted when registration is canceled).

Y

Y

Schedule

Fixed

A fixed execution schedule exists for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

The unit type of the jobnet connector is correct.

Y

Y

The unit type of the jobnet connector is invalid.

Y#

Y

A dummy schedule exists for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

N

Y

A dummy schedule does not exist for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

N

Y

Dummy schedule

--

N

Y

Legend:

--: Not applicable.

Y: Displayed.

N: None is displayed.

#

When a jobnet connector is defined in a normal nested jobnet (invalid definition), Exec. ID (Source) displays the execution ID of the jobnet connector for a scheduled generation of the connection-destination jobnet. However, the jobnet enters the Ended abnormally status when it is executed, because the definition is invalid. To check whether there is any definition error, perform a definition pre-check.

For jobnet generations without fixed connection, the jobnet connector determines the generation to be connected and Exec. ID (Source) displays the execution ID for this generation.

At this time, if the jobnet connector exists on a different host, the host with the jobnet communicates with the host with the jobnet connector. If the two hosts are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Monitor Details dialog box is displayed, login might be required because the host obtains a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID.

Exec. ID (Source) displays Unknown when you click Cancel in the Login screen. When Unknown is displayed, redisplay or automatic update of the Monitor Details dialog box will not allow the host with the jobnet to communicate with the other host where the jobnet connector exists. Therefore, Unknown remains displayed.

If you want to display an execution ID in Exec. ID (Source), click View and then Refresh to update the display.

When the connection between the jobnet and the jobnet connector is fixed, this text box displays the execution ID of the jobnet connector without communicating with the host where the jobnet connector exists.

Exec. order method

Displays an execution order control method.

You can temporarily change the execution order control method for each generation. This text box displays a method as follows.

When the method is not changed:

Follow the definition. (execution order control method) appears.

When the method is changed from Asynchro to Synchro:

Synchro appears.

When the method is changed from Synchro to Asynchro:

Asynchro appears.

A hyphen (-) is displayed for jobnets for which execution order control is not performed and for remote jobnets.

This text box appears only in the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet) and Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet).

Exec. ID (Destination)

Displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet when you select a jobnet connector. The text box displays None when no jobnet is connected. The text box also displays None when you do not have reference permission for the connection-destination jobnet.

This text box appears only in the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet), Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet), and Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box.

Cautionary note

When the jobnet connector is connected to a jobnet under a scheduler service on a different host, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on the host where the connection-destination jobnet exist.

Supplementary notes

The following table describes whether this text box displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet based on the status of the jobnet.

Table 12‒22: Status of a connection-destination jobnet and whether its execution ID is displayed

Result/schedule

Generation of jobnet connector

Status of connection-destination jobnet

Execution ID

Result

Result

The connection-destination jobnet is not connected.

N

The connection-destination jobnet is connected.

The connection-destination jobnet exists.

Y

The connection-destination jobnet does not exist (deleted when registration is canceled).

Y

Schedule

Fixed

A fixed execution schedule exits for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

The unit type of the connection-destination jobnet is correct.

Y

The unit type of the connection-destination jobnet is invalid.

Y#

A dummy schedule exists for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

N

A dummy schedule does not exist for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

N

Dummy schedule

--

N

Legend:

--: Not applicable.

Y: Displayed.

N: None is displayed.

#

When a normal root jobnet or nested jobnet is specified as the connection-destination jobnet (invalid definition), Exec. ID (Destination) displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet for a scheduled generation of the jobnet connector. However, the jobnet enters the Ended abnormally status when it is executed because the definition is invalid. To check whether there is any definition error, perform a definition pre-check.

For generations without fixed connection, the connection-destination jobnet determines the generation to be connected and Exec. ID (Destination) displays the execution ID for this generation.

At this time, if the connection-destination jobnet exists on a different host, the host with the jobnet connector communicates with the host with the jobnet. If the two hosts are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Monitor Details dialog box is displayed, login might be required because the host obtains a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID.

Exec. ID (Destination) displays Unknown when you click Cancel in the Login screen. When Unknown is displayed, redisplay or automatic update of the Monitor Details dialog box will not allow the host with the jobnet connector to communicate with the other host where the connection-destination jobnet exists. Therefore, Unknown remains displayed.

If you want to display an execution ID in Exec. ID (Destination), click View and then Refresh to update the display.

When the connection between the jobnet connector and the connection-destination jobnet is fixed, this text box displays the execution ID of the jobnet without communicating with the host where the connection-destination jobnet exists.

Waiting

If the unit has wait conditions, this field shows whether the wait conditions are satisfied.

If the wait conditions are not satisfied:

Displays Yes.

If the wait conditions are satisfied:

Displays None.

This field shows a hyphen if any of the following apply:

The unit has no wait conditions

The connection target is JP1/AJS2 - Manager or a version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager earlier than 09-50

The JP1/AJS3 - Manager database uses the compatible ISAM configuration

Execution result details

If you have selected a remote jobnet, you can click the Details button. If you click this button, the Execution Result Details dialog box appears. For more information, see 12.3.39 Execution Result Details dialog box.

Edit Def button

You see the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box or Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box used to define detailed information about a unit. For more information, see 12.3.8 Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a root jobnet), 12.3.9 Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested jobnet), 12.3.10 Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a root remote jobnet), or 12.3.11 Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box (for a nested remote jobnet).

Cautionary notes

The displayed execution status, which is acquired when the dialog box appears, may differ from the contents displayed in the list area.

Even for the same target unit, multiple dialog boxes appear.

When you display the dialog box from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), the execution status is not automatically updated.

The unit start and end times display the time associated with JP1/AJS3 - Manager. To determine the actual start and end times for a jobs or other units, see the log for JP1/AJS3 - Agent.

Note the following when you display the Monitor Details dialog box for a generation without fixed connection with a jobnet connector or connection-destination jobnet:

- When you specify a jobnet connector or a connection-destination jobnet on the host in a different authentication bloc as the connection destination, you might need to log in to the host containing the destination item in order to obtain an Exec. ID (Source) or Exec. ID (Destination).

- Because the local host might need to communicate with the host containing the connection destination unit, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on that host beforehand. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs. You cannot perform other operations before a communication error is detected.

12.3.39 Execution Result Details dialog box

The Execution Result Details dialog box lets you check the detailed information about the result of unit execution. The following figure shows the Execution Result Details dialog box.

Figure 12‒67: Execution Result Details dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Results

This dialog box displays the contents of the standard error output file output by the job.

For a remote jobnet, this dialog box displays the error message logged during remote jobnet execution.

When you re-execute a Unix job or PC job in which the standard error output file has been set to allow additional writing, the result from the previous execution does not disappear but is displayed as part of the accumulated information.

For a jobnet connector or connection-destination jobnet, this dialog box displays an error message that is generated when the jobnet connector or jobnet is re-executed, if there are any re-executed.

If a flexible job is run by broadcast execution in sync mode, the execution result details are displayed for each destination agent in the following format:

[Host-name,IP-address,Return-code,job-judgment-result#]

contents-of-standard-error-output-for-destination-agent

#

Normal end: normal

End with warning: warning

Abnormal end: abnormal

Cautionary notes

The Execution Result Details dialog box will not be displayed when the standard error output file is moved or deleted in a job.

The previous execution results or messages are not deleted when you re-execute the event jobs because they displayed cumulatively.

12.3.40 Temporary Changes dialog box

The Temporary Changes dialog box displays a list of temporary changes made to jobnets and jobs, such as temporary plan changes and changes to hold attributes. You can also select an operation from the list and re-execute it.

The following figure shows the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Figure 12‒68: Temporary Changes dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Start date

Specifies the date from which to display temporary change information. The following table lists the specifiable values and the defaults.

Table 12‒23: Specifiable values and defaults

No.

Field

Specifiable values

Default value

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

When you display the Temporary Changes dialog box from the following windows, the default is the date on which JP1/AJS3 - View started:

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

- JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

- Daily Schedule window

- Monthly Schedule window

- Jobnet Monitor window

- Search window

When you display the Temporary Changes dialog box from the Register for Release dialog box, the default is the date specified in the Register for Release dialog box.

2

Month

1 to 12

3

Day

1 to 31 (or the last day in that month)

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

Update button

Refreshes the contents of the temporary changes list area.

List filter

Selecting the List filter check box enables the list filter function. When you enable the list filter function, the ▼ symbol appears next to each item in the list area.

You can narrow down the information displayed in the list area by clicking the ▼ symbol and selecting an item from the drop-down list.

Temporary Changes list area

Displays temporary changes made since the date specified in the Start date fields.

This area displays the temporary changes for all units defined under the same root jobnet as the unit selected in the window from which the Temporary Changes dialog box was displayed.

You can sort the items in the list area by clicking the header of each column.

You can also change the column width by dragging the boundary of the column header sideways. Changes you make to column widths are retained after JP1/AJS3 - View shuts down.

You can filter the information in the list area by clicking the ▼ symbol in each column header. List filter settings (whether list filtering is enabled and what information is filtered) are retained after JP1/AJS3 - View shuts down.

Re-exe

Shows whether the temporary change has been re-executed.

Blank: Indicates that the temporary change has not been re-executed.

Operation completed: Indicates that the temporary change has been re-executed.

Unit name

The names of the units defined under the same root jobnet as the unit selected in the window from which the Temporary Changes dialog box was displayed.

This unit is the target when you re-execute the temporary change.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit, including the scheduler service name.

Root jobnet

Displays the name of the root jobnet associated with the unit.

Scheduled start

Displays the scheduled start date of the unit.

This column displays the YYYYMMDD component of each unit's execution registration number (YYYYMMDDnnn) in the format YYYY/MM/DD.

Seq. No.

Displays the nnn component of each unit's execution registration number (YYYYMMDDnnn)

Operation type

Displays the type of temporary change applied to each unit, as one of the following:

Change Time

Execute Immediately

Execution Prohibited

Release Change

Change Hold Attribute

Change Delay Monitor

Change Priority

Change Execution Order Method

Change Wait Condition Settings

Execution schedule added

Command

Cautionary notes

If you add an execution schedule or start date and time for a nested jobnet in the Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job), Change Time is displayed.

If you add an execution schedule or start date and time for a job in the Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job), Release Change is displayed.

Operation time

The date and time at which the temporary change was executed or re-executed, in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss.

Operation user

The name of the JP1 user who executed or re-executed the temporary change.

If the temporary change was re-executed more than once, this column displays the name of the JP1 user who last performed the operation.

Operation details

Displays detailed information about the temporary change.

Supplementary notes

The contents of the list area are refreshed when:

- The Temporary Changes dialog box opens

- You click the Update button

- Re-execution of a temporary change is successfully completed

When re-execution of a temporary change is successfully completed, the temporary changes are deselected.

Select All button

Selects all the temporary changes.

Save button

Copies the selected temporary changes to the clipboard in CSV format.

A maximum of 1,000 temporary changes can be copied to the clipboard at one time.

Re-execute button

Re-executes the selected temporary changes. If multiple changes are selected, the system re-executes the changes in ascending order of their operation time.

12.3.41 Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box

The Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box displays information about errors that occurred when re-executing temporary changes. This dialog box appears if one or more errors occur when you re-execute multiple temporary changes.

The following figure shows the Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box.

Figure 12‒69: Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Results

Lists the details of errors that occurred when re-executing temporary changes.

Click a column header to sort the results in order of its contents.

Unit name

Displays the name of the unit targeted by the temporary change re-execution that produced the error.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit, including the scheduler service name.

Operation time

Displays the date and time when the operation took place.

Error message

Displays the error message that describes the error.

12.3.42 Preferences dialog box

The Preferences dialog box sets up an environment for the JP1/AJS3 - View windows. This dialog box contains the following pages:

Login page

Main page

Editor/Monitor page

Schedule page

General page

Other page

The auto login settings in the Login page and all settings in the Other page apply to each instance of JP1/AJS3 - View.

The start mode settings in the Login page and all settings in the Main, Editor/Monitor, Schedule, and General pages apply to each instance of JP1/AJS3 - View and each login user.

The following explains the items displayed for each of the pages.

(1) Login page

Set the auto login parameters and the start mode.

In the Auto login area, you can configure JP1/AJS3 - View to automatically connect to a specified JP1/AJS3 - Manager host on startup. This eliminates the need to log in manually from the Login screen.

In the Start mode area, you can set a start mode that limits the range of features available in JP1/AJS3 - View.

The following figure shows the Login page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒70: Login page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Auto login

Set information about automatic login.

If the multiuser remote desktop connection function is enabled, this item can be set for each OS user.

Auto login

Specify whether to automatically connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager when you start JP1/AJS3 - View. The default is No.

Yes

Select this if you want to automatically connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager. If you choose Yes, you can specify User name, Password, and Host to connect.

No

Select this if you do not want to automatically connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager. If you choose No, User name, Password, and Host to connect fields become inactive.

User name

Specify a login user name. This is available if you select Yes for Auto login. The default is a blank.

Password

Specify the password associated with the user name of a login user. This is available if you select Yes for Auto login. The entered characters are displayed like "*".

If a password is already set, it does not appear.

Host to connect

Using a character string of no more than 255 bytes, specify the host name or IP address (in dot notation such as 100.100.1.1) of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager that you want to automatically connect. The specified IP address must be an IPv4 address. It must not be an IPv6 address.

This is available if you select Yes for Auto login. The default is a blank.

Start mode

Specify a start mode and function menus.

Start mode

Specify the start mode to be applied when JP1/AJS3 - View starts. The default is Normal. However, the default is Compatible when upgrade installation is performed from version 8. The available start modes are as follows:

Normal

Starts the JP1/AJS3 - View window in the Normal mode.

Monitoring

Starts the JP1/AJS3 - View window in the Monitoring mode.

Compatible

Starts the JP1/AJS3 - View window in the Compatible mode.

Set Function Menu button

When the start mode is Normal, use this button to specify the function menus to be displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). Click the Set Function Menu button to display the Set Function Menu dialog box. For details, see 12.3.43 Set Function Menu dialog box.

View customize setting

You can select whether the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) that has been uploaded to the connection-destination manager host is loaded when the user logs in from JP1/AJS3 - View to JP1/AJS3 - Manager. The default is Load.

Note that the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) is loaded only at the first login. It is not loaded when the user logs in again in cases such as the when connection is closed or the authentication server is restarted.

Display settings

Load

Select this if the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) that has been uploaded to the connection-destination manager host is to be loaded. The information about the connection-destination manager host specified in the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) is displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Not load

Select this if the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) that has been uploaded to the connection-destination manager host is not to be loaded.

(2) Main page

The following figure shows the Main page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒71: Main page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

List area of main window

Specify the settings for the list area and detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Icon color

Set whether the icon color in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) follows the status or results of the unit. The default is Use result color. You can set the following items.

Use status color

Displays the icon color according to the status.

Use result color

Displays the icon color according to the results.

Show color image in status and result

Specify whether to display color images representing execution status, execution results, and delays in Status and Result in the list area and Status in the detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The default is Yes.

Yes

Displays information on the execution status, results, and delay with color images and text.

No

Displays information on the execution status, results, and delay with text only.

Display status of a job group

Set whether to display the status of a job group in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The default is No. You can set the following items.

Yes

Displays the status of a job group in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

No

Does not display the status of a job group in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Supplementary notes

Display status of a job group

The status of a job group displayed in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is a possible status for the root jobnet. These statuses are classified by priority. The following table shows the priority of status for the root jobnets and job groups (a smaller value means a higher priority). When the status of a job group is determined, the highest priority of status for the units under the job group is sent to the higher-level unit, and is displayed as the status of the job group.

Table 12‒24: Priorities of status for the root jobnet and job group

Priority

Root jobnet status

Job group status

1

Shutdown

Shutdown

2

Running + Abend

Running + Abend

3

Ended abnormally

Ended abnormally

Interrupted

Killed

Invalid exe. seq.

4

Running + Warning

Running + Warning

5

Ended with warning

Ended with warning

6

Wait for start time

Now running

Being held

Wait for start cond.

Now running

Now monitoring

7

Ended normally

Ended normally

Skipped so not exe.

Unmonitored + Ended

Monitor-end normal

Monitor terminated

Interrupted monitoring

8

Not sched. to exe.

Not sched. to exe.

9

Not registered

(None)

Delay display for a job group

Like the delay display for a job group, the delay of a job group displayed in the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is connected to a character string of the status display, for example, "Ended normally (Delay)". When the delay of a job group is determined, the highest priority of delay for the units under the job group is sent to the higher-level unit, and is displayed as the delay of the job group.

There are four types of delay, which are grouped into two types for display in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

The following table shows the priority of delay for the root jobnets and job groups (a smaller value means a higher priority).

Table 12‒25: Priorities of delay for the root jobnet and job group

Priority

Delay status

Delay display for the root jobnet and job group

1

End-time delay of a root jobnet

(Delay)

2

End-time delay of a nested jobnet or job

(Nest delay)

3

Start-time delay of a root jobnet

(Delay)

4

Start-time delay of a nested jobnet

(Nest delay)

5

No delay

No display

Example:

The following figure shows how to determine the status and delay for job group A under which job group B, jobnet C, and jobnet D are defined. This example assumes that (Delay) for jobnet C means the start-time delay of a root jobnet and (Nest delay) for jobnet D means the end-time delay of a nested jobnet.

Figure 12‒72: Example priorities of delay for the root jobnet and job group

Determining the status of job group A

According to Table 12-24, the priority of status is "6" for job group B (Now running), "3" for jobnet C (Killed), and "7" for jobnet D (Skipped so not exe.). Since the highest priority is "3", "Ended abnormally" for priority 3 is determined to be the status of job group A.

Determining the delay of job group A

According to Table 12-25, the priority of delay is "5" for job group B (No delay), "3" for jobnet C (Delay, i.e., start-time delay of a root jobnet), and "2 " for jobnet D (Nest delay, i.e., end-time delay of a nested jobnet). Since the highest priority is "2", "(Nest delay)" for priority 2 is determined to be the delay of job group A.

Double-click on jobnet

Specify the window displayed when you double-click a jobnet in the list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The default is Open jobnet editor. You can specify the following items.

Open jobnet monitor and show status

If you double-click a jobnet, the Jobnet Monitor window displays the latest status.

Open jobnet monitor and show result

If you double-click a jobnet, the Jobnet Monitor window displays the latest result.

Open jobnet editor

If you double-click a jobnet, the Jobnet Editor window appears.

Setting when window starts

Make settings on window operation when the Jobnet Editor window or the Jobnet Monitor window appears.

Exclusive edit when Jobnet Editor starts

Specify the status of the exclusive editing mode when you want to display the Jobnet Editor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window. The default is No. You can specify the following status of the exclusive edit mode:

Yes

Sets the exclusive edit mode when the Jobnet Editor window is started.

No

Does not set the exclusive edit mode when the Jobnet Editor window is started.

Monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts

Set the monitoring mode to display the Jobnet Monitor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The default is Monitor the previous status.

Note that the Jobnet Monitor window displays the generations in the status and result fields of the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) regardless of the mode specified here when you display the Jobnet Monitor window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window).

You can set either of the following monitoring modes:

Monitor the previous status

The Jobnet Monitor window displays only the generations appearing in the status and result fields of the list area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window).

Monitor the latest status and result

If you select Open jobnet monitor and show status, the latest status appears.

If you select Open jobnet monitor and show result, the latest results appear.

(3) Editor/Monitor page

On the Editor/Monitor page, specify the settings for the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window. Such settings include whether to display comments in the map area, the colors used for highlighting for preceding and succeeding units, and the operations to be performed when units are double-clicked in the list area.

The following figure shows the Editor/Monitor page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒73: Editor Monitor page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Map area

Set information about the map areas in the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window.

Unit name new line

Specify whether to specify the line-feed location of the unit name when displaying the unit icon in the map area of the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. The default is Not selected. You can set the following items:

Selected

Enables you to specify the line-feed location of the unit name.

Not selected

Does not allow you to specify the line-feed location of the unit name. The system executes a line feed in the unit name after 10 bytes. Selecting Not selected causes Characters per line to become inactive.

Characters per line

If you want to specify the line-feed location in the unit name, specify the number of characters from the beginning of the unit name regardless of whether the characters are single-byte or multi-byte characters. You can specify 1 to 30. The default is a blank.

Display comments

Specify whether to concurrently display the comment below the unit name in the map area in the Jobnet Editor window and the Jobnet Monitor Window. The default is No. You can set the following items.

Yes

Displays the comment below the unit name in the map area in the Jobnet Editor window and the Jobnet Monitor Window.

If the comment contains a blank (space), it will be treated as a end-of-line character, so that the rest of the comment appears on the next line.

No

Does not display the comment below the unit name in the map area in the Jobnet Editor window and the Jobnet Monitor Window.

If you select No, the Displayed characters, New line character, and Hide comment when items become unavailable.

Displayed characters

If you want to display the comment below the unit name, specify the number of characters from the beginning of the comment regardless of whether the characters are single-byte or multi-byte characters. You can specify 1 to 80. The default is 80.

New line character

When displaying a comment below the unit name, specify the comment line-feed location using characters. You can use New line character to select the character you want to specify. You can specify the following values:

None

" " (space)

, (comma)

. (period)

- (hyphen)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

The default is " " (space). If None is selected, the system displays the comments in the range of Displayed characters for all unit icons. If you specify a value other than None and " " (space), a line-feed occurs after the specified character. If " " (space) is specified, the comment wraps to the next line regardless of whether the space is a single-byte space or a multi-byte space. If another character is specified, the comment wraps to the next line only when the character is a single-byte character.

Hide comment when

If you do not want to display a command in any unit, specify a symbol at the head of the comment you want to hide. In Hide comment when, select the character you specify. You can hide a comment for each unit even if you specify Yes for Display comment. You can set the following values.

None

#

@

% (percent)

&

*

The default is None. Specifying None causes "is the first character" to become inactive.

Highlighted display

Specify the colors for the base unit, the directly preceding and succeeding units of the base unit, and relation lines when you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window.

Base unit

Specify the color for the base unit when you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. The default is Red (R, G, B=224, 0, 0).

Direct preceding

Specify the color for a directly preceding unit of the base unit and the relation line between the directly preceding unit and the base unit when you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. The default is Orange (R, G, B=255, 128, 0).

Direct succeeding

Specify the color for a directly succeeding unit of the base unit and the relation line between the directly succeeding unit and the base unit when you specify highlighting in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. The default is Dark pink (R, G, B=255, 128, 160).

Select button

Click this button to change the color specified for Base unit, Direct preceding or Direct succeeding, or create a display color. When you click the Select button, the Select Color dialog box appears. For details, see 12.3.44 Select Color dialog box.

List area

Specify the settings regarding the list area in the Jobnet Editor window and Jobnet Monitor window.

Double-click on unit

Specify the operation to be performed when you double-click a unit in the list area in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window. The default is Open monitor details or define details dialog box. The available options are as follows:

Open monitor details or define details dialog box

In the Jobnet Editor window, when you double-click a unit in the list area, the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, when you double-click a unit in the list area, the Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box appears.

Select and show on center of map area

When you double-click a unit in the list area, the map area is scrolled and the unit appears in the center of the map area, selected. When you select the Highlight preceding/succeeding rows check box, the preceding and succeeding units are highlighted. This check box is not selected by default.

(4) Schedule page

The following figure shows the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒74: Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Execution time

Set the first execution time in seconds. The system uses the first execution time to estimate the end time when first executing a jobnet or job.

The system estimates the end time based on the average duration of jobnet or job execution. Since there is no average for the first jobnet or job execution, specify the first execution time.

First execution time

You can specify 1 to 86,400. The default is 1,200 seconds.

Display hours

Select hours for which to display the daily time area in the Daily Schedule window.

Daily display time

Select whether to display the time area in the Daily Schedule window in 24 or 48 hours. You can select 24 hours or 48 hours. The default is 24 hours.

Monthly execution simulation

Monthly execution simulation is the process of determining an execution schedule by adding the execution time of jobnets or jobs to the schedule rules.

For registration for planned execution, the system computes the next execution schedule upon the end of the previous execution schedule. For the monthly schedule, the system displays the subsequent execution schedules by simulation.

Simulation

Indicates whether to simulate execution for a monthly schedule. You can specify Perform or Do not perform. The default is Do not perform.

Tree area of the Daily/Monthly windows

Specify the order of the units displayed in the tree areas of the Daily Schedule window and the Monthly Schedule window.

Order display by

Select whether the unit names are to be displayed in the order of name or execution time. There are two choices: Name and Execution time. The default is Name.

Name

The unit names in the tree area are displayed in ascending order. The sorting order differs depending on the type of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager character code set.

Execution time

Starting with the oldest execution start date shown in the screen, the unit names in the tree area are displayed in ascending order.

Root jobnet with no schedule

Indicates whether to display root jobnets with no schedule and whether to display planning groups, in the tree areas of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window and the Monthly Schedule window. The default is Display for both cases.

Daily (hierarchy)

Display

Select this if you want to display both root jobnets with no schedule and planning groups in the tree areas of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Hide

Select this if you do not want to display root jobnets with no schedule or planning groups in the tree areas of the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Monthly

Display

Select this if you want to display root jobnets with no schedule in the tree areas of the Monthly Schedule window.

Hide

Select this if you do not want to display root jobnets with no schedule in the tree areas of the Monthly Schedule window.

Supplementary note

When you display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the Monthly Schedule window, the tree area appears as follows, depending on the settings of Monthly:

Display is selected

Unregistered units are always displayed.

Hide is selected

If an execution schedule exists within the display period, unregistered units are displayed in the tree area. If no execution schedule exists within the display period, unregistered units are not displayed in the tree area.

Planning group

Indicates whether to display planning groups when you call the Monthly Schedule window with a planning group specified in the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

Planning group

Indicates whether to display planning groups in the Monthly Schedule window. The default is Display.

If you select Display and open the Monthly Schedule window with a planning group or its upper-level job group specified, the schedule for the root jobnet immediately below the planning group will be merged for display.

(5) General page

Used to change the display color of execution statuses, results, and delay. To change the display color, select the appropriate item in the List of icon colors list, and then choose the color you want in the Change icon color dropdown list. Then, if you click the OK button, the status-color mapping is changed.

The following figure shows the General page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒75: General page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Color mapping

Set information about display colors.

List of icon colors

Lists colors for the execution status, results, and delay. The following table covers the displayed items and colors.

Table 12‒26: Items and colors

No.

Item

Color

1

Not registered

None

2

Wait for start time

Sky blue

3

Wait for prev. to end

Sky blue

4

Hold plan

Yellow

5

Being held

Yellow

6

Waiting to execute

Sky blue

7

Not sched. to exe.

Gray

8

Now queuing

Sky blue

9

Now running

Green

10

Running + Warning

Red

11

Running + Abend

Red

12

Ended normally

Light green

13

Ended with warning

Light red

14

Ended abnormally

Light red

15

Bypassed

Gray

16

Not executed + Ended (not scheduled)

Gray

17

Not executed + Ended (scheduled)

Gray

18

Interrupted

Light red

19

Killed

Light red

20

Invalid exe. seq.

Light red

21

Skipped so not exe. (not scheduled)

Gray

22

Skipped so not exe. (scheduled)

Gray

23

Failed to start

Light red

24

Unknown end status

Light red

25

Shutdown

Brown

26

Now monitoring

Green

27

Wait for start cond.

Sky blue

28

Unmonitored + Ended

Gray

29

Monitor-end normal

Light green

30

Monitor terminated

Light red

31

Interrupted monitoring

Light green

32

Normal end + False

Light green

33

Start delay

Pink

34

Start delay + Running

Dark pink

35

End delay

Orange

36

End delay + Running

Dark orange

Supplementary note

If you have modified the mapping of icon colors, the correspondence between items and colors may differ from those in the above table.

Change icon color

Choose the color you want to use to display the execution status, results, and delay, as you selected in List of icon colors. You can set one of the following colors (Basic color). The default is None. If you have created an original display color, that color will appear following the basic colors.

Sky blue

Yellow

Green

Light green

Red

Light red

Brown

Orange

Dark orange

Pink

Dark pink

Gray

Dark gray

None

Supplementary note

For "Not executed + Ended" and "Skipped so not exe.", different colors will be mapped depending on whether there is an execution schedule that falls within the range of generations for execution. However, for those execution statuses, results, and delays that are displayed with text only, only Not executed + Ended or Skipped so not exe. appears.

Select button

Choose this button to change the display colors assigned to the execution statuses, execution results, and delays, or to create your own colors. If you choose Select button, the Select Color dialog box appears. For details, see 12.3.44 Select Color dialog box.

Note that you can choose the Select button only if you have selected an item in the List of icon colors list.

Priority of delay display color

If the unit status of abend, warning or delay occurs concurrently, specify the priority of color to display the icon. The selected default is Abend > Warning > Delay. You can select the following items.

Abend > Warning > Delay

Prioritizes abend, warning and delay in that order. Select this to set the priority for the icon color for delay lower than abend and warning.

Abend > Delay > Warning

Prioritizes abend, delay and warning in that order. Select this to set the priority for the icon color for delay between abend and warning.

Delay > Abend > Warning

Prioritizes delay, abend and warning in that order. Select this to set the priority for the icon color for delay higher than abend and warning.

Hold plan

If the unit is in the wait status and you specify the hold attribute, specify whether to display the icon and status/result color image in the color of Hold plan. The default is Do not display. You can specify the following values:

Display

If you specify the hold status for the unit, selecting this displays the icon and status/result color image in the color of Hold plan.

Do not display

Displays the icon and status/result image in the color of Wait for, regardless of whether you specify the hold attribute for the unit. If you select Do not display, Only if hold attribute changes becomes inactive.

Only if hold attribute changes

If you select this item, the system determines that you set a hold plan when the following (A) is met.

If you do not select this item, the system determines that a hold plan is set when either of the following (A) and (B) is met.

(A) You specify the hold attribute for the execution generation to be displayed.

(B) You do not change the hold attribute for the execution generation to be displayed and you specify Hold for the unit attribute.

You can select Only if hold attribute changes only when you select Display.

Cautionary notes

Specify yes for the UNITDEFINERELOAD environment setting parameter at the destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager to ensure that the displayed hold plan matches the status transitions at unit execution.

If you specify Hold if prev.='abend' or Hold if prev.='warning' or 'abend' for the root jobnet hold attribute, the system assumes No to ask hold scheduled. However, the status may change to Being held during execution.

You can also display hold scheduled for pseudo-schedule in the Daily Schedule window and Monthly Schedule window. To do this, deselect Only if hold attribute changes.

The system may simultaneously detect Hold plan and Delayed for the execution generation to be displayed. In this case, the system gives display priority to the color of Delayed.

(6) Other page

This page sets items on troubleshooting.

The following figure shows the Other page in the Preferences dialog box.

Figure 12‒76: Other page in the Preferences dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Troubleshooting

Set the upper limit value for the trace level and log file.

If the multiuser remote desktop connection function is enabled, this item can be set for each OS user.

Trace level

Select the level of information to be output to a log file. You can set 1, 3 or 5. The default is 3. The higher the value, the more detailed the output information.

For details of information output to a log file, see 1.2 Types of log information and storage locations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Troubleshooting.

Max. log file size

Set the maximum log file size in megabytes. You can specify 1 to 4,512. The default is 1.

For details about how the system operates when the log file size exceeds the set value, see 1.2.5 List of log files and directories in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Troubleshooting.

For details about estimating the log file size, see 3.4.4 Estimating the size of log files for JP1/AJS3 - View in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

View customize setting

You can upload the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) to the connection-destination manager host. The uploaded parameters are revised and then saved. The uploaded file is loaded when the user logs in the next time.

For details about the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView), see 11.3.19 Displaying the information about the connection-destination manager host.

If the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) has already been uploaded, it can be downloaded.

Setting file

You can upload or download the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView).

Upload button

If you click this button, you can upload the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView).

Download button

If you click this button, you can download the View customization settings file (jajsCustomizeView) that has been uploaded.

The timing at which the settings in the Preferences dialog box become valid depends on the page. The following table provides the timing at which page settings become valid.

Table 12‒27: Timing at which page settings become valid

Page

Item

Timing at which settings become valid

Login

Auto login

When you log in to JP1/AJS3 - View next

Start mode

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View next time

View customize setting

When you log in to JP1/AJS3 - View next

Main

Icon color

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Show color image in status and result

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Display status of a job group

When you display the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) in another window

When you start JP1/AJS3 - View next

Double-click on jobnet

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Exclusive edit when Jobnet Editor starts

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Editor Monitor

Map area

When you execute Refresh in the Jobnet Editor or Jobnet Monitor window

When you open the Jobnet Editor or Jobnet Monitor window next

Highlighted display

When you click Refresh in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window

The next time you specify or cancel highlighting

Double-click on unit

When you open the Jobnet Editor or Jobnet Monitor window next

Schedule

First execution time

When you execute Refresh in the Daily Schedule window, or upon automatic refreshing

When you open the Daily Schedule window next

Daily display time

When you open the Daily Schedule window next

Simulation

When you execute Refresh in the Monthly Schedule window

When you start the Monthly Schedule window next

Order display by

When you open the Daily Schedule window or the Monthly Schedule window

Jobnet with no schedule

When you open the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window or the Monthly Schedule window

Planning group

When you open the Daily Schedule window next

General

Change icon color

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Priority of delay display color

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Hold plan

The next time you open a window

For the Search window, the next time you display search results

Other

Trace level

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Max. log file size

After you click the OK button in the Preferences dialog box

Setting file

When you log in to JP1/AJS3 - View next

Cautionary note

The value set in the Login page is saved in the JP1/AJS3 local file. This local file is not, however, locked for specific security. Use the auto login function in an environment for OS security.

12.3.43 Set Function Menu dialog box

The Set Function Menu dialog box allows you to specify the function menus to be displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window. The following figure shows the Set Function Menu dialog box.

Figure 12‒77: Set Function Menu dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Displayable function menu

Displays the function menu items that are not currently displayed. This section is blank by default.

Add button

Moves the function menu item selected in Displayable function menu to Displayed function menu.

Delete button

Moves the function menu item selected in Displayed function menu to Displayable function menu.

Displayed function menu

Displays the function menu items that are currently displayed. This section displays all the function menu items by default.

Displayed function menu must contain at least one function menu item.

Default button

Click this button to restore the default settings for the function menu items to be displayed. Even if you click the Default button in the Preferences dialog box, the settings in the Set Function Menu dialog box are not restored to the default settings. To return the settings in the Set Function Menu dialog box to the default settings, click this button.

The following shows the function menu items to be displayed as standard and their display sequence:

Job Group Definition

Jobnet Definition

Calendar Definition

Schedule Definition

Register for Execution

Cancel Registration

Release Entry

Release Cancel

Status Monitor

Summary Monitor

12.3.44 Select Color dialog box

The Select Color dialog box lists the colors you can select for icons that represent execution status, delays, and highlighting. The following figure shows the Select Color dialog box.

Figure 12‒78: Select Color dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Available colors

Lists the colors you can select for icons that represent execution status, delays and highlighting, and the corresponding RGB elements. Any colors you have created will appear following the basic colors provided by JP1/AJS3 - View.

Color

Displays the sample image and name of a display color.

RGB-element

RGB elements of a color is displayed in (R, G, B) format.

When you double-click a color you have created in Available colors, the Change Color dialog box appears.

Add button

Select this if you want to create your own colors other than those provided with JP1/AJS3 - View. If you click the Add button, the Create Color dialog box appears. The colors you created will appear following the basic colors in the Available colors. For details, see 12.3.45 Create Color / Change Color dialog box.

Edit button

To modify the RGB elements or name of your custom color, click the Edit button to display the Change Color dialog box. The items that appear in the Change Color dialog box are similar to those of the Create Color dialog box. For details, see 12.3.45 Create Color / Change Color dialog box.

You can edit only the colors you created.

Delete button

Deletes a color you have created. You can delete only the colors you created.

Supplementary note

Edit an appropriate color in the Change Color dialog box and click the OK button to newly add the color to the Available colors list in the Select Color dialog box. The new color will appear highlighted in the list. If you assign the color as a display color, click the OK button. For details, see 11.3 Customization common to many windows.

12.3.45 Create Color / Change Color dialog box

The Create Color dialog box allows you to create additional colors other than those provided with JP1/AJS3 - View. If you are editing a color you created, Change Color dialog box appears.

The following figure shows the Create Color dialog box.

Figure 12‒79: Create Color dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Name

Specify the name of the color using a character string of up to 20 bytes. Japanese characters can be used. The default is blank if you are creating a new color or the name of the pre-edited color if you are editing an existing color.

You cannot specify the following characters.

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

=

/

Supplementary note

If you use a single-byte space in Name, it will be treated as follows.

If you specify a single-byte space between character strings, the space is recognized as a blank character. In the following examples, is assumed to be a single-byte space.

For example, "LEMONYELLOW" will be treated as "LEMONYELLOW".

Any leading or trading single-byte spaces will be ignored.

For example, "BLUE" will be treated as "BLUE".

If you specify single-byte spaces only, they are treated as 0 bytes, resulting in an error.

For example, " " will be treated as "".

RGB-element

Set RGB elements.

Basic color

Select this when you use basic colors provided with JP1/AJS3 - View as a basis to create a new color. The default is None.

R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue)

For R, G, and B, you can specify a value in the range from 0 to 255.

The default is 255 for all three elements if you are creating a new color or the respective values of pre-edited RGB elements if you are editing an existing color.

Sample

Shows the sample color according to the values specified in R, G, and B.

The default is white if you are creating a new color or the pre-edited color image if you are editing an existing color.

Cautionary notes

You can create up to 50 colors.

You cannot create a color that has the same RGB elements as any basic color.

You cannot create a color that has the same name as any basic color.

You cannot create multiple colors that have the same RGB elements.

You cannot create multiple colors that have the same name.

Supplementary note

For details on creating colors, see 11.3.3 Creating colors for execution status, execution results, and delays.

12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box

The Display Item Setup dialog box allows you to specify the columns to be displayed in the list area and their display sequence in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). This dialog box has the following pages:

Main Window page

Daily Window page

Monthly Window page

Search Window page

Editor Window page

Monitor Window page

The following figure shows the Display Item Setup dialog box.

Figure 12‒80: Display Item Setup dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Items

Specify displayed items. The following shows the displayed items and their contents:

Table 12‒28: Displayed items

Page name

Window

Displayable items

Main Window page

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Suspend

Name

Status

Result

Type

Comment

Start time (Status)

Start time (Result)

Rerun start time (Status)

Rerun start time (Result)

End time (Status)

End time (Result)

Execution type (Status)

Execution type (Result)

Start condition (Status)

Start condition (Result)

Processing time (Status)

Processing time (Result)

Time when start delayed (Status)

Time when start delayed (Result)

Time when end delayed (Status)

Time when end delayed (Result)

Execution ID (Status)

Execution ID (Result)

Change Plan (Status)

Change Plan (Result)

Daily Window page

Monthly Window page

Daily Schedule window/Monthly Schedule window

Icon

Unit name

Start time

End time

Status

Rerun start time

Register type

Start condition

Processing time

Time when start delayed

Time when end delayed

Execution ID

Change Plan

Type

Comment

Retry status

Retry execution times

Search Window page

Search window

Unit name

Upper path

Comment

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Last updated

Exec-agent

File name

Parameters

Release date

Release status

Release ID

Status

Scheduled start time

Start time

End time

Start delay

End delay

Hold

Target host

Execution ID

Reference calendar

Root jobnet

Retry execution times

Maximum retry times

Retry interval

Editor Window page

Jobnet Editor window

Unit name

Comment

Type

Retry settings

Monitor Window page

Jobnet Monitor window

Unit name

Comment

Type

Status

Delay status

Retry status

Retry execution times

Displayable items

Displays the items not being displayed in the list area.

Add button

Used to add the item you selected in Displayable items to Displayed items.

Delete button

Used to delete the item you selected in Displayed items from the list and then move that item to Displayable items.

Up button

Used to move the item selected in Displayed items to the next-higher row in the list.

Down button

Used to move the item selected in Displayed items to the next-lower row in the list.

Displayed items

Displays the items currently displayed in the list area in their listed order from left to right, starting at the top.

Default button

Used to return to the defaults of the items you display in the list area and the display order. Also use this button to return to the defaults of the horizontal size of an item in the list area of the window. The following shows items displayed and as standard and the display order:

Main Window page

1. Suspend Window, 2. Name, 3 Status, 4. Result, 5. Type, 6. Comment

Daily Window page/Monthly Window page

1. Icon Display, 2. Unit Name, 3. Start Time, 4. End Time, 5. Status

Search Window page

1. Unit name, 2. Upper path, 3. Comment, 4. Type

Editor Window page

1. Unit name, 2. Comment, 3. Type

Monitor Window page

1. Unit name, 2. Comment, 3. Type 4. Status, 5. Delay status

12.3.47 Set Display Order dialog box

The Set Display Order dialog box allows you to set the order in which to display units in the tree area and list area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window). The following figure shows the Set Display Order dialog box.

Figure 12‒81: Set Display Order dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Upper unit name

Displays the upper unit of the units whose display order you want to set.

Display order

Set the display order. You can set the display order of the following types of units:

job group

planning group

Set Display Order

Select this check box to set the display order. The check box is not selected by default.

Up button

Moves the selected unit to the next-higher row in the list.

Down button

Moves the selected unit to the next-lower row in the list.

Supplementary note

For details about how to change the display order, see 11.4.18 Changing the order in which scheduler services or job groups are displayed in the tree area and in the list area.

12.3.48 Set Default Values dialog box

The Set Default Values dialog box allows you to perform the following:

Change default values in dialog boxes

Prohibit change of specific definition items in the Define Details dialog boxes

Prohibit displaying unit icons in icon list if they are not used in the Jobnet Editor window

The following figures show a case where a definition item is selected in the tree area in the Set Default Values dialog box and a case where an icon name is selected in the Set Default Values dialog box.

Figure 12‒82: Set Default Values dialog box (when a definition item is selected)

Figure 12‒83: Set Default Values dialog box (when an icon name is selected)

The following explains the displayed items.

Tree area

Lists the customizable dialog boxes and the settings for each dialog box in a hierarchical format. The following table lists the items for which you can change default values.

Note that the name enclosed between angle brackets (< >) in the Dialog box name column indicates the name of a dialog box shown in the tree area in the Set Default Values dialog box.

Table 12‒29: Items whose defaults you can customize

Dialog box name

Setting item

Define Details (for all units)#1

<Define Details - common>

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [Job Group]

Specify base day

Week (week)

Week (day of the week)

Treat as

Set base time

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a root jobnet)

<Define Details - Root Jobnet>

Concurrent exec.

No. logs to keep

Priority

Time-out period

Schedule option

Monitor jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Exec. order control#2, #3

Connection range#2, #4

Exec. order method#2, #3

Hold

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a nested jobnet)

<Define Details - Jobnet>

Monitor jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a root jobnet)

<Define Details - Root Remote Jobnet>

Concurrent exec.

No. logs to keep

Priority

Time-out period

Schedule option

Monitor jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Hold

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a nested jobnet)

<Define Details - Remote Jobnet>

Monitor jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Define Details - [Planning Group]

Specify base day

Week (week)

Week (day of the week)

Treat as

Set base time

Exec. order control#3

Connection range#4

Exec. order method#3

Define Details - [Start Condition]

Start Condition

Concurrent exec. of monitoring gen.

Pause exec. gen. for start cond.

Task after abend

Define Details - [UNIX Job]

Priority

End judgment - Rule

Retry on abnormal end

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [PC Job]

Priority

End judgment - Rule

Retry on abnormal end

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [Queue Job]

Priority

End judgment - Rule

Retry on abnormal end

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [Jobnet Connector]

Connection range#4

Define Details - [Judgment Job]

Judgment type

Condition (Return code)

Condition (File)

Condition (Variable (char.))

Condition (Variable (number))

Judgment value (range specification) - Lower limit

Judgment value (range specification) - Upper limit

Define Details - [Flexible Job]

Broadcast execution - Execute

Broadcast execution - Broadcast execution method

Relay agent - Relay

End judgment - Rule

Retry on abnormal end

Executed by

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job]

Request type

Transmission information file - Extended mode#5

How to store received data

Priority

End judgment - Rule

Retry on abnormal end

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition (for all event jobs)#1

<Detailed Definition - All Event Jobs>

Set timeout period

Status after close

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event]

End judgment

Find event before exec.

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files]

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail]

Platform

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message]

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message]

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files]

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log]

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Interval Control]

Expire right after starting

Set timeout period

Status after close

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition (for all action jobs)#1

<Detailed Definition - All Action Jobs>

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event]

Check event arrivals

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Send Mail]

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message]

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message]

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report]

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control]

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control]

Platform

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [Custom Job]

<Define Details - Custom Job (PC)> or

<Define Details - Custom Job (UNIX)>

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job]

Set timeout period

Delayed end - Time-required-for-execution

Executed by

Register for Execution

Register method

Planned execution - Planned time passed when daemon starts

Planned execution - Planned time passed when reg. for exe.

Planned execution - Holding

Fixed execution - Planned time passed when daemon starts

Fixed execution - Holding

Immediate execution - Start condition

Immediate execution - Start condition (count)

Immediate execution - Start condition (period)

Immediate execution - Holding

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Start time

When schedule is pushed ahead:

Change schedule of all lower jobnets

Immediate Execution

When schedule is pushed ahead:

Change date and time of all lower jobnets

Rerun dialog box (for root jobnets)

Rerun with hold

Set skipped jobs to warning

Rerun dialog box (for nested jobnet or job)

Rerun with hold

Set skipped jobs to warning

Add dialog box (for root jobnet)

Hold

Waiting Condition Settings

<Waiting - Wait Conditions Settings>

Wait method#6

If not waiting for any generations#6

When Unmonitored + Ended#6

Abnormal end for an execution generation#6

Start when skipped so not exe.#6, #7

#1

If you specify the same item in the Common dialog box and other dialog boxes, the item set later becomes valid.

#2

When you create a unit under a planning group, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#3

When you create a unit when you connect to a JP1/AJS2 - Manager of version 08-00 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#4

When you create a unit when you connect to a JP1/AJS2 - Manager of version 08-10 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

The following table lists the items for which you can disable permission for changes.

#5

When you create a unit when you connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager of version 12-10 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#6

You can only change this item if no wait conditions are defined. You are considered not to have defined a wait condition when:

- You have not assigned a wait condition to the unit since creating it

- In the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box, you delete a wait condition setting by clicking OK without setting a unit whose end is to be waited for

#7

This item is inactive in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box if Execute is set as the default value for Abnormal end for an execution generation.

The following table lists the items for which you can disable permission for changes.

Table 12‒30: Items for which you can disable permission for changes

Dialog box name

Setting item

Define Details - [Job Group]

Specify base day

Week (week)

Week (day of the week)

Treat as

Set base time

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a root jobnet)

<Define Details - Root Jobnet>

Exec-agent#1

Concurrent exec.

No. logs to keep

Priority

Time-out period

Schedule option

Monitoring jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Exec. order control#2, #3

Connection range#2, #4

Exec. order method#2, #3

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a nested jobnet)

<Define Details - Jobnet>

Exec-agent#1

Priority

Monitoring jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a root remote jobnet)

<Define Details - Root Remote Jobnet>

Exec-agent

Concurrent exec.

No. logs to keep

Priority

Time-out period

Schedule option

Monitoring jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a nested remote jobnet)

<Define Details - Remote Jobnet>

Exec-agent

Priority

Monitoring jobnet - Time-required-for-execution

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Planning Group]

Specify base day

Week (week)

Week (day of the week)

Treat as

Set base time

Exec. order control#3

Connection range#4

Exec. order method #3

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Start Condition]

Start condition

Concurrent exec. of monitoring gen.

Pause exec. gen. for start cond.

Task after abend

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [UNIX Job]

Exec-agent#1

Command statement

Script file name

Parameters

Environment variables

Environment file

Working path

Priority

Standard input

Standard output - File name

Standard output - Append

Standard error - File name

Standard error - Append

End judgment - Rule

End judgment - Warning#5

Retry on abnormal end

User name

Transfer file 1 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 1 - Destination file

Transfer file 1 - Yes

Transfer file 2 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 2 - Destination file

Transfer file 2 - Yes

Transfer file 3 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 3 - Destination file

Transfer file 3 - Yes

Transfer file 4 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 4 - Destination file

Transfer file 4 - Yes

Hold

Type

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Monitor end delay - Time-required-for-execution

Owner

JP1 resource group

Executed by

Define Details - [PC Job]

Exec-agent#1

File name

Parameters

Environment variables

Environment file

Working path

Priority

Standard input

Standard output - File name

Standard output - Append

Standard error - File name

Standard error - Append

End judgment - Rule

End judgment - Warning#5

Retry on abnormal end

User name

Transfer file 1 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 1 - Destination file

Transfer file 1 - Yes

Transfer file 2 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 2 - Destination file

Transfer file 2 - Yes

Transfer file 3 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 3 - Destination file

Transfer file 3 - Yes

Transfer file 4 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 4 - Destination file

Transfer file 4 - Yes

Hold

Type

Exec. Service

Set timeout period

Monitor end delay - Time-required-for-execution

Owner

JP1 resource group

Executed by

Define Details - [Queue Job]

Host name

Job name

File name

Parameters

Priority

End judgment - Rule

End judgment - Warning#5

Retry on abnormal end

Transfer file 1 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 1 - Destination file

Transfer file 2 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 2 - Destination file

Transfer file 3 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 3 - Destination file

Transfer file 4 - File to transfer#6

Transfer file 4 - Destination file

Hold

Type

Monitor end delay - Time-required-for-execution

Owner

JP1 resource group

Executed by

Define Details - [Jobnet Connector]

Connection range#4

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [OR Job]

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Judgment Job]

Judgment type

Condition (Return code)

Condition (File)

Condition (Variable (char.))

Condition (Variable (number))

Judgment value (range specification) - Lower limit

Judgment value (range specification) - Upper limit

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Define Details - [Flexible Job]

Broadcast execution - Execute

Broadcast execution - Broadcast execution method

Relay agent - Relay

Parameters

Environment variables

End judgment - Rule

End judgment - Warning#5

Retry on abnormal end

Hold

Type

Owner

JP1 resource group

Executed by

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job]

Exec-agent#1

Request type

Transmission information file - Extended mode#7

Trans. info. file name

URL parameter#7

Message body#7

How to store received data

Priority

Standard output

Standard error

Return code specification - Add#7

Return code specification - Edit#7

Return code specification - Delete#7

End judgment - Rule

End judgment - Warning#5

Retry on abnormal end

User name

Hold

Type

Set timeout period

Monitor end delay - Time-required-for-execution

Owner

JP1 resource group

Executed by

Detailed Definition - [Interval Control]

Expire right after starting

Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job]

Hold

Type

Set timeout period

Owner

JP1 resource group

#1

When the Change is not permitted check box is selected for this definition item, if you enter an execution agent that is not permitted in the Exec-agent field of the Define Details dialog box and click OK, the error message KAVV1500-E appears and the definition cannot be changed. In this scenario, either clear the Change is not permitted check box or change the value of ViewCheckLevel in the execution agent profile to warning, and then try again.

#2

When you create a unit under a planning group, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#3

When you create a unit when you connect to a JP1/AJS2 - Manager of version 08-00 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#4

When you create a unit when you connect to a JP1/AJS2 - Manager of version 08-10 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

#5

When you select the Change is not permitted check box for this definition item in the Set Default Values dialog box, the value in Abnormal in End judgment in the Define Details dialog box must be greater than the value in Warning. If you enter a value in Abnormal that is smaller than the value in Warning and click the OK button, an error message appears and the value in Warning is selected. Because the value in Warning cannot be changed, change the value in Abnormal and click the OK button.

#6

When you select the Change is not permitted check box for this definition item in the Set Default Values dialog box, if the File to transfer text box in any of Transfer file 1 to Transfer file 4 in the Define Details dialog box is blank, you cannot enter a value in the Destination file text box. If you enter a value in Destination file and click the OK button without entering a value in the File to transfer text box, an error message appears and File to transfer is selected. However, because the value in File to transfer cannot be changed, delete the value in Destination file and click the OK button.

#7

When you connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager of version 12-10 or earlier, the specified default value will be invalid because this definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details dialog box.

You can choose not to display the unit icons that are displayed by default for the following types of units:

Unix Job

PC Job

Queue Job

Jobnet

Jobnet Connector

OR Job

Judgment Job

Flexible Job

HTTP Connection Job

Receive JP1 Event Job

Monitoring Files Job

Receive Mail Job

Monitoring Log Files Job

Monitoring Event Log Job

Interval Control Job

Send JP1 Event Job

Send Mail Job

OpenView Status Report Job

Local Power Control Job

Remote Power Control Job

Passing information setting job

You can choose to display the unit icons that are not displayed by default for the following types of units:

Remote Jobnet

Receive MQ Message Job

Receive MSMQ Message Job

Send MQ Message Job

Send MSMQ Message Job

Item name

Displays the item name you selected in the tree area.

Browse button

Displays the explanation of the manual for the item you selected in the tree area.

Setting item area

Displays a list of items from the items you selected in the tree area, the default statuses of the items, and other information.

Change is not permitted

This check box appears when you select a definition item in the tree area for which you can choose not to permit change. When you select this check box, the definition item is disabled and not available for change in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box. The check box is not selected by default.

The unit is not used

This check box appears when you select a unit in the tree area for which you can choose not to display its unit icon. When you select this check box, the unit icon does not appear in the icon list in the Jobnet Editor window. The check boxes for the following items are selected by default:

Remote Jobnet

Receive MQ Message Job

Receive MSMQ Message Job

Send MQ Message Job

Send MSMQ Message Job

12.3.49 Refresh Interval dialog box

In the Refresh Interval dialog box, you specify the time interval during which you update the display information of the window shown below. You cannot specify this time interval in the Monthly Schedule window.

List area and detailed information area of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), and summary list and unit detailed information list of the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Schedule area and execution result list of the Daily Schedule window

Map area of the Jobnet Monitor window

The following figure shows the Refresh Interval dialog box:

Figure 12‒84: Refresh Interval dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Auto refresh

Specify whether to set a refresh interval. You can select Do or Not do. The default is Do.

If you select Not do, you will have to manually update the displayed information before performing an operation on a unit.

Refresh interval

When you choose Do in Auto refresh, specify, in seconds, the time interval for updating displayed information. You can specify an interval from 30 to 3,600. The default interval for the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), and Daily Schedule window is 300. The default interval for the Jobnet Monitor window is 30.

12.3.50 Change Password dialog box

You can use the Change Password dialog box to change the password of a JP1 user who is logged in to JP1/AJS3 - View. This dialog box can be displayed only when the CHANGEPASSWORD environment setting parameter is set to yes (changing of the password is enabled).

The following figure shows the Change Password dialog box.

Figure 12‒85: Change Password dialog box

The following describes the display items:

JP1 user

Displays the login JP1 user name.

Current password

Specify the current password as a character string from 6 to 32 bytes. Each input character is displayed as an asterisk (*). The default is a blank.

Note that the following characters cannot be specified:

Non-ASCII characters, control characters, backslashes (\), double quotation marks ("), colons (:), spaces, and tab characters

New password

Specify a new password as a character string from 6 to 32 bytes. Each input character is displayed as an asterisk (*). The default is a blank.

Note that you cannot specify the following characters:

Non-ASCII characters, control characters, backslashes (\), double quotation marks ("), colons (:), spaces, and tab characters

Confirm new password

Enter the same character string as the character string you entered in New password. Each input character is displayed as an asterisk (*). The default is a blank.

Cautionary notes

Only standard users can change passwords by using the change password functionality. A JP1 user (linkage user) whose password is managed on the directory server cannot change the password.

For details about standard users and linkage users, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

If automatic JP1/AJS3 - View login has been enabled on the Login tab of the Preferences dialog box and you want to change the password, you also need to change the automatic login settings.

If the KAVV3357-E message appears when you change the password, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

12.3.51 Tool Settings dialog box

The Tool Settings dialog box lets you register a tool that you want to activate from JP1/AJS3 - View. This dialog box also lets you activate a registered tool on the JP1/AJS3 - View host.

The following figure shows the Tool Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒86: Tool Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Tools list

This is a list box that displays the entry names and associated commands for all the tools that can be selected.

The tools that can be activated from the pop-up menu are marked with an asterisk (*) at the leftmost column. The order of the tools displayed in the pop-up menu is the same as in the Tools list box. You can use the Up and Down buttons to change the order of tools in this list box.

Double-clicking a line in the list box is an alternate operation for selecting the line and then clicking the Change button.

You cannot select more than one tool at the same time.

Add button

This button adds an item to Tools list. This list can display a maximum of 50 items. When you click this button, the Tool Entry dialog box appears. For details about this dialog box, see 12.3.52 Tool Entry dialog box.

Change button

This button displays the Tool Entry dialog box, in which you can change the settings of the item selected in Tools list. For details about the Tool Entry dialog box, see 12.3.52 Tool Entry dialog box.

Delete button

This button deletes the selected item from Tools list.

Up button

This button moves the selected line in Tools list one line upwards.

After the move, the line remains selected.

Down button

This button moves the selected line in Tools list one line downwards.

After the move, the line remains selected.

Start button

When you click this button, the command associated with the item selected in Tools list is executed on the host where JP1/AJS3 - View is running.

Close button

When you click this button, a confirmation message (KAVV386-Q) appears, if the settings have been changed.

Supplementary note

The tools are executed using the permissions of the OS user who activated JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.3.52 Tool Entry dialog box

In the Tool Entry dialog box, you can perform the following operations:

Assigning a name to a registered tool

Registering or changing the command associated with a tool

Setting whether to add a tool to the pop-up menu

The following figure shows the Tool Entry dialog box.

Figure 12‒87: Tool Entry dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Entry name

Specify the name of a tool by using a character string no longer than 50 bytes. When you add a new tool, this field is blank by default. When you change the settings for an existing tool, the previous name is the default name. When you have set a tool to be available in the pop-up menu, the name specified here is displayed in the pop-up menu.

Single-byte spaces in a name are handled as shown below. In the following description, Δ indicates a single-byte space.

If you place single-byte spaces between characters, the spaces are recognized as blanks.

Example: ToolΔ1 --> ToolΔ1

If you place single-byte spaces before or after a name, the spaces are ignored.

Example: ΔTool1Δ --> Tool1

If you specify only single-byte spaces, they are assumed to be a zero-byte string, which results in an error.

Example: Δ Δ Δ -->

Add to pop-up menu

This check box allows for a tool to be available through the pop-up menu. When you register a tool with this check box selected, the tool is added to the pop-up menu that can be displayed in specific windows, so that the tool can be activated from the pop-up menu.

When you click the OK button in the dialog box with this check box selected, an asterisk (*) is displayed at the leftmost column of Tools list.

The pop-up menu can display a maximum of 10 items.

Command

Use a character string no longer than 2,048 bytes to specify the command that activates the tool. When you add a new tool, this field is blank by default. When you change the settings of an existing tool, the default command name is the previous command name. You can use the provided parameters that are dynamically replaced with specific entity names. You can also use relative path names. The following shows the current directory on which the relative path is based.

JP1/AJS3 - View installation folder

If you want to use a character string that includes spaces as an argument, enclose the character string in double quotation marks.

The handling of single-byte spaces specified in Command is the same as for Entry name.

... button

When you click the ... button beside the Command text field, the file selection dialog box provided by the OS appears. The following shows the directory that is initially opened in the dialog box.

JP1/AJS3 - View installation folder

When you select a file in the dialog box, the absolute path name of the file is set in Command.

Replace drop-down list and Insert button

You can insert a parameter at the cursor position in the Command text field, by selecting the parameter from the Replace drop-down list, and then clicking the Insert button.

The following table lists the items that can be selected from the Replace drop-down list, and the character strings inserted in the Command text field when the Insert button is clicked.

Item

Character string to be inserted

Host name

(HOST_NAME)

Service name

(SERVICE_NAME)

Unit name

(UNIT_NAME)

Character code

(CHAR_CODE)

User name#

(USER_NAME)

#

This item appears in version 09-10 or later of JP1/AJS3 - View. A parameter in the ajs2view_opt.conf determines whether User name appears as an option in the drop-down list. For details, see 11.4.15 Displaying User name in the Replace drop-down list box in the Tool Entry dialog box.

You can also enter a JP1 user name directly into the Command field.

Example:

To specify the JP1 user name jp1admin in the Command field (where Δ is a single-byte space)

sample.exeΔ(HOST_NAME)Δ(SERVICE_NAME)Δ(UNIT_NAME)Δjp1admin

Supplementary note

After you close the dialog box by clicking the OK button, when you click the Close button in the Tool Settings dialog box, a KAVV386-Q message appears, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed.

About parameters

By specifying a replacement string, you can dynamically replace the host name, scheduler service name, full unit name, character code, and JP1 user name at execution. The parameter names are case sensitive. You can use the following parameters:

Parameter

Description

(HOST_NAME)

Connection-target host name

(SERVICE_NAME)

Scheduler service name of the unit selected in the window

(UNIT_NAME)

Full unit name of the unit selected in the window

(CHAR_CODE)

Character code set for the scheduler service to which the unit selected in the window belongs (ASCII)

(USER_NAME)

Name of JP1 user logged in to JP1/AJS - Manager from JP1/AJS3 - View

The following shows how parameters are replaced with entity names at runtime. In the following example, Δ indicates a single-byte space.

Specified string

sample.exeΔ(HOST_NAME)Δ(SERVICE_NAME)Δ(UNIT_NAME)

String after parameters are replaced

sample.exeΔhost_AΔAJSROOT1Δ/group/net/job

Whether the tool can be activated depends on the selection status of units. The following table describes the conditions when the tool can be activated.

Parameter

Selection status of units in the window from which to activate the tool

No tools selected

One tool selected

More than one tool selected

(HOST_NAME)

Y

Y

Y

(SERVICE_NAME)

N#1

Y

Y#2

(UNIT_NAME)

N#1

Y#3

N#4

(CHAR_CODE)

N#1

Y

Y#2

(USER_NAME)

Y

Y

Y

Legend:

Y: The tool can be activated.

N: The tool cannot be activated.

Note:

In the Daily Schedule window and Monthly Schedule window, if an item is selected in the tree area, the system assumes that a unit is selected, even when no units are selected in execution result list.

#1

The KAVV116-E error message appears.

#2

When multiple units are selected, the system replaces the scheduler service name (if the replacement string is (SERVICE_NAME)) or character code (if the replacement string is (CHAR_CODE)) of the first of the selected units.

#3

If a full path unit name includes any of the following characters, the KAVV389-E error message appears:

" (double quotation mark), &, ' (right single quotation mark), *, <, >, ?, [, \, ], ^, ' (left single quotation mark), {, |, }, and ~

#4

The KAVV145-E error message appears. However, if the selected units are all the same, the tool starts and no error message is output.

Activating a tool from the pop-up menu

When you register a tool with Add to pop-up menu selected, the tool is added to the pop-up menu that can be displayed in specific windows. You can activate the tool by choosing it from the pop-up menu. The following figure gives an overview of tool activation from the pop-up menu.

You can activate tools in the following windows:

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Jobnet Editor window

Jobnet Monitor window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Monthly Schedule window

Search window

If the Options menu and its subordinate Set Tools menu are disabled, tools are not displayed in the pop-up menu.

Supplementary notes

To specify a full unit name including a scheduler service name, specify the following character string:

(SERVICE_NAME):(UNIT_NAME)

In Command, you can specify the same parameter more than once. The parameters that are identical are replaced with the same character string.

Example:

If you enter the command sample.exeΔ(UNIT_NAME)Δ(UNIT_NAME) when JOB1 is selected, the command name will be converted to sample.exeΔ/group/net/JOB1Δ/group/net/JOB1.

Note:

When multiple units are selected in the window from which you want to activate a tool, if you execute a command with multiple (UNIT_NAME) parameters specified, a KAVV145-E error occurs. Multiple (UNIT_NAME) parameters are not replaced with different unit names.

When a parameter other than (UNIT_NAME) is specified more than once, the identical parameters are replaced with the same character string, regardless of whether more than one unit is selected.

The program you specify in Command must not output to standard output or standard error output.

12.3.53 JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box

The JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box lists the JP1/AJS3 commands registered from the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box. You can also executed registered commands from the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box:

Figure 12‒88: JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box

The displayed items are explained below.

JP1/AJS3 command list

For each registered JP1/AJS3 command, the entry name, command name, command arguments, and output file are displayed in list format. A maximum of 50 JP1/AJS3 commands can be registered. The shortcut menu displays the registered commands in the order that they appear in this list.

Add button

Use this button to add a new command to the JP1/AJS3 command list. Clicking this button opens the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Add dialog box. For details about the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Add dialog box, see 12.3.54 JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

Change button

Use this button to change the settings of the command selected in the JP1/AJS3 command list. Clicking this button opens the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Change dialog box. For details about the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Change dialog box, see 12.3.54 JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

If the currently logged-in JP1 user does not have the necessary permissions to execute the JP1/AJS3 commands selected in the list, the message KAVV3903-E is output, and the settings cannot be changed.

Copy button

Use this button to copy the settings of the command selected in the JP1/AJS3 command list. Clicking this button opens the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Copy dialog box. For details about the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry - Copy dialog box, see 12.3.54 JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

If the currently logged-in JP1 user does not have the necessary permissions to execute the JP1/AJS3 command selected in the list, the message KAVV3903-E is output, and the settings cannot be copied.

Delete button

This button deletes the selected item from the JP1/AJS3 command list.

Up button

This button moves the line selected in the JP1/AJS3 command list up by one line.

Down button

This button moves the line selected in the JP1/AJS3 command list down by one line.

Start button

Clicking this button executes the command selected in the JP1/AJS3 command list.

If the currently logged-in JP1 user does not have the necessary permissions to execute the JP1/AJS3 commands selected in the list, the message KAVV3903-E is output, and the command cannot be executed.

12.3.54 JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box

Use the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box to register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed on the connection-destination manager host.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box:

Figure 12‒89: JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box

The displayed items are described below.

Entry name

Specify an entry name of no more than 50 bytes for the JP1/AJS3 command to be registered or for a JP1/AJS3 command that is already registered. The default value varies depending on the operation. If you are adding a new command, this field is blank by default. If you are changing the settings of a registered command, the previously-set entry name is displayed. If you are copying the settings of a registered command, the entry name of the copy-source command is displayed.

If you select the Add to pop-up menu check box, the entry name specified for this item will be displayed in the shortcut menu.

Add to pop-up menu

Use this check box to select whether to display the JP1/AJS3 command in the shortcut menu. The default setting of this check box varies depending on the operation. If you are adding a new command, by default, this check box is not selected. If you are changing the settings of a registered command, the previously-set setting for this check box is displayed. If you are copying the settings of a registered command, the setting for this check box is inherited from the copy-source settings. If this check box is selected, the entry name will be displayed as a subitem of the JP1/AJS3 Command item in the shortcut menu of each window. When you select an entry name in the shortcut menu, the corresponding JP1/AJS3 command is executed. The following figure shows an example of selecting an entry name in the shortcut menu.

Figure 12‒90: Example of selecting an entry name in the shortcut menu

Command

Specify the name of an executable JP1/AJS3 command. The following table lists the JP1/AJS3 command names that can be specified.

Table 12‒31: Specifiable JP1/AJS3 command names

No.

Command

Description

1

ajslogprint

Extracts and outputs scheduler log data.

2

ajsprint

Outputs unit definition information.

3

ajsshow

Outputs information about a unit, such as the execution history, the current status, and the next execution time.

4

ajsstatus

Outputs information about the operating environment of a scheduler service.

Note that only JP1/AJS3 commands for which the logged-in JP1 user has permission to execute are displayed.

Command argument

Specify the arguments of the command. The value displayed by default differs depending on the operation. If you are adding a new command, this field is blank by default. If you are changing the settings of a registered command, the previously-set arguments are displayed. If you are copying the settings of a registered command, the arguments of the copy-source command are displayed.

When specifying a full unit name for an argument, exclude the scheduler service name from the full unit name.

If you use parameters, make sure that the total length of the command argument string (after the parameters are replaced by their corresponding values) does not exceed 2,047 bytes.

Cautionary notes:

You cannot specify an ordinary character string that is the same as a parameter.

If the unit name specified for an argument includes any of the following symbols, enclose the entire unit name in double quotation marks ("), and prefix each symbol with a backslash (\):

Double quotation mark ("), ampersand (&), single quotation mark ('), asterisk (*), left angle bracket (<), right angle bracket (>), question mark (?), left square bracket ([), backslash (\), right square bracket (]), caret (^), left curly bracket ({), vertical bar (|), right curly bracket (}), tilde (~)

Note that, if you use the symbol *, ?, [, or ] in regular expressions, you do not need to prefix it an escape character.

If, for the argument, you specify a value that includes single-byte spaces, make sure to enclose the value in double quotation marks (").

If you use a generic name or the -R option to specify target units, too many units are subject to processing. As a result, the increased load on the network or manager during command execution might affect JP1/AJS3 performance.

For examples of specifying arguments, see the description JP1/AJS3 command specification examples below.

The following table lists the arguments that can be specified in commands.

Table 12‒32: Arguments that can be specified in commands

No.

Command

Arguments

Required / Optional

1

ajslogprint#1

-b output-start-day

O

2

-e output-end-day

O

3

-k log-type

O

4

-F service-name

R

5

-u unit-name#2

O

6

-m message-ID

O

7

scheduler-log-file-name

R

8

ajsprint

-F service-name

R

9

-a

O

10

-c year[/month[/day]]

O

11

-d

O

12

-f format-indicator

O

13

-v

O

14

-s {yes|no}

O

15

-t format-indicator

O

16

-J

O

17

-N

O

18

-G

O

19

-R

O

20

-L

O

21

-E

O

22

-T

O

23

job-name or jobnet-name or job-group-name#2

R

24

ajsshow

-F service-name

R

25

-s

O

26

-p

O

27

-l

O

28

-xw

O

29

-xi {b|c}

O

30

-r

O

31

-f "format-indicator"

O

32

-i "two-byte-format-indicator"

O

33

-t "format-indicator"

O

34

-k

O

35

-g {number-of-generations|a}

O

36

-b year/month[/day]

O

37

-e year/month[/day]

O

38

-v year/month[/day]

O

39

-w year/month[/day]

O

40

-B execution-registration-number

O

41

-u user-name

O

42

-c

O

43

-R

O

44

-E

O

45

-T

O

46

-N

O

47

-J

O

48

-d [[year/]month/]day

O

49

-h hours[:minutes]

O

50

-X {yes|no|auto}

O

51

job-name or jobnet-name or job-group-name#2

R

52

ajsstatus

-F service-name

R

Legend:

R: Required

O: Optional

For details about command arguments, see 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

#1

Because the -F option must be specified, you cannot output any log entries that do not include scheduler service names, even if you specify the log type (-k option) or the message ID (-m option).

#2

Specify the full name of the unit excluding the scheduler service name.

Specify a string that meets one of the following conditions:

A string that begins with / and does not include the parameter UNIT_FULL_NAME

A string that begins with "/ and does not include the parameter UNIT_FULL_NAME

A string that begins with the parameter UNIT_FULL_NAME

To use a parameter (EXEC_ID) to specify the unit name, use the following format: (UNIT_FULL_NAME): (EXEC_ID)

Replace and Insert button (Command argument)

You can insert a parameter at the cursor position in the Command argument text box by selecting the parameter from the Replace drop-down list box and then clicking the Insert button. When the command is executed, the inserted parameter will be replaced by the corresponding information, such as a scheduler service name.

The following table lists the items that can be selected from the Replace drop-down list box, and the corresponding character strings that are inserted in the Command argument text box when the Insert button is clicked.

Table 12‒33: Items that can be selected from the Replace drop-down list and the corresponding character strings that are inserted when the Insert button is clicked

Item

Character string to be inserted

Description

Service name

(SERVICE_NAME) #1, #2, #3

Scheduler service name of the unit selected in the window

Full unit name

(UNIT_FULL_NAME) #1, #2, #3, #4

Full unit name of the unit selected in the window (excluding the scheduler service name)

User name

(USER_NAME)#3

Name of the JP1 user who executed the JP1/AJS3 command

Exec ID

(EXEC_ID) #2, #3, #5, #6

Execution ID of the unit selected in the window

Year

(YEAR)

Year in the system date for the JP1/AJS3 - View machine that executed the JP1/AJS3 command

Month

(MONTH)

Month in the system date for the JP1/AJS3 - View machine that executed the JP1/AJS3 command

Day

(DAY)

Day in the system date for the JP1/AJS3 - View machine that executed the JP1/AJS3 command

#1

Even if the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box is opened from a window where no unit is selected in the list area or in map area, if a unit is selected in the tree area, the command assumes that this unit is the target unit.

#2

If the parameter is replaced by a character string that includes control characters such as line breaks and tabs, the KAVV3905-E message is output and the command fails.

#3

To execute this command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), select a unit whose icon is displayed in the Unit name column of the summary list. If you select a unit whose icon is not displayed, the KAVV2304-E message is output and the command fails.

#4

To execute the ajsprint command for a jobnet that is registered for release, if you select a unit definition whose release status is not Being applied, the KAVV2507-E message is output and the command fails.

#5

To execute the command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

Select the target execution generation in the detailed information area. If the start mode is Normal, you can view the execution generation in the detailed information area by selecting Status Monitor in Function Menu.

If you execute the command by selecting a unit that has generations under both the status and the result from the list area, the KAVV2301-E message is output and the command fails.

To execute the command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window):

Select the target execution generation in the unit detailed information list. If you execute the command by selecting a unit that has multiple generations from the summary list, the KAVV2301-E message is output and the command fails.

To execute the command from the Jobnet Editor window:

The KAVV263-E message is output and the command fails, because generation information cannot be obtained.

To execute the command from a window other than the above:

Make sure that the target execution generation is selected, and then execute the command.

#6

To use a parameter (EXEC_ID) to specify the unit name, use the following format: (UNIT_FULL_NAME): (EXEC_ID)

The following shows how parameters are replaced with entity names at runtime. In the following example, Δ indicates a single-byte space.

Specified string

ajsshowΔ-FΔ(SERVICE_NAME)Δ(UNIT_NAME)

String after parameters are replaced

ajsshowΔ-FΔAJSROOT1Δ/group/net/job

You might be unable to execute a command that includes parameters, depending on the number of units selected in the source window of the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box.

The following table shows whether each command can be executed based on the number of units selected in the source window.

Table 12‒34: Whether each command can be executed based on the number of units selected in the source window (for [Command argument])

Parameter

Units selected in the source window

No unit selected

One unit selected

Multiple units selected

(SERVICE_NAME)

N

Y

N

(UNIT_FULL_NAME)

N

Y

N

(USER_NAME)

Y

Y

Y

(EXEC_ID)

N

Y

N

(YEAR)

Y

Y

Y

(MONTH)

Y

Y

Y

(DAY)

Y

Y

Y

Legend:

Y: The command can be executed.

N: The command cannot be executed.

Notes:

You cannot specify an ordinary character string that is the same as a parameter.

If the full unit name (after parameters are replaced) ends with a backslash (\), the command will not be executed normally.

Output

Specify the name of the file to which JP1/AJS3 command execution results are output. The maximum character string length you can specify is 255 bytes. The default file name changes according to the operation. If you are adding a new command, this field is blank by default. If you are changing the settings of a registered command, the previously set file name is displayed by default. If you are copying the settings of a registered command, the name of the output file for the copy-source command is displayed by default.

You cannot use an asterisk (*), question mark (?), double quotation mark ("), left angle bracket (<), right angle bracket (>), or vertical bar (|).

You can click the ... button to open a dialog box from which to select a file.

You can specify either an absolute path or a relative path. If you specify a relative path, the following folder is used as the base of the relative path.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\command\JP1-user-name

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

In any one of the following cases, the folder name JP1-user-name is enclosed in parentheses:

When an MS-DOS device name (NUL, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, or PRN) is specified

When a character string that begins with MS-DOS-device-name. is specified

When a character string that begins with a period (.) is specified

Cautionary notes:

If a communication failure or a text recognition error occurs during command execution, file output might fail. To avoid this failure or error, we recommend that you do not specify the any of the following output files:

- A file located on a network drive (including a subfolder of the network drive).

- UNC (that begins with \\).

- A file whose name is in short file name format (such as C:\PROGRA~1).

You cannot specify the following character strings:

- URI (path beginning with file://)

- The file name or the folder name is the device name for MS-DOS (NUL, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, PRN)

- The file name or the folder name begins with the following character string (period included): device-name-for-MS-DOS.

- File name that ends with a backslash (\) or forward slash (/)

- File or folder name that begins with a period (.)

- File or folder name that includes a colon (:)

You cannot specify an ordinary character string that is the same as a parameter.

Even if you specify a path that contains the environment variable (%variable-name%) as the output destination, the path will not be converted to the path specified in the environment variable. For example, suppose that C:\TEMP is set for the environment variable TEMP and you specify %TEMP%\output.txt as the output destination. Then, when the command is executed, output.txt will be output to the following path:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\command\JP1-user-name\%TEMP%\output.txt

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

To prevent unintentional overwriting of a path, do not specify a path that contains the environment variable (%variable-name%) as the destination for saving command execution results. Note that, if you click the Open File or Open Folder buttons in the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box, the path will be converted to the path specified in the environment variable, and the file or folder will be opened.

This note applies when the User Account Control (UAC) feature is enabled. If the command execution results are output from JP1/AJS3 - View that was started by an administrator or by the standard user, the UAC feature might sometimes redirect the output file to a user-specific virtual folder.

The output file is redirected if a specific path is specified as the output destination. The following table shows the output destination path and the redirect destination.

Table 12‒35: Output destination path and the redirect destination

No.

Output destination path

Redirect destination

1

Path that includes %ProgramFiles%

%ProgramFiles% is redirected to the following location:

%LocalAppData%#

2

Path that includes %WINDIR%

%WINDIR% is redirected to the following location:

%LocalAppData%#\VirtualStore\Windows

3

Path that includes %SYSTEMROOT%

%SYSTEMROOT% is redirected to the following location:

%LocalAppData%#\VirtualStore\Windows

4

Root folder of the system drive

The output file is redirected to the following location:

%LocalAppData%#\VirtualStore

#: The default %LocalAppData% value is system-drive\Users\OS-user-name\AppData\Local.

If you click the Open File or Open Folder button in the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box, the path specified for the output destination (before it is redirected) opens. For this reason, when specifying where to save command execution result files, do not specify a path that might be redirected. If you specify such a path and the files are redirected, unexpected files or folders might be displayed when you click the Open File or Open Folder button.

Append

If you select the Append check box, new execution results are appended to the existing output file without overwriting the contents of the file.

Replace and Insert button (Output)

You can insert a parameter at the cursor position in the Output text field, by selecting the parameter from the Replace drop-down list, and then clicking the Insert button. If you specify a parameter, it is replaced by the corresponding information, such as a scheduler service name, when the command is executed.

The following table lists the items that can be selected from the Replace drop-down list, and the character strings inserted in the Output text field when the Insert button is clicked.

Table 12‒36: Character string that can be inserted in the Output text field

Item

Character string to be inserted

Description

Service name

(SERVICE_NAME) #1, #2, #3

Scheduler service name of the unit selected in the window

Unit name

(UNIT_NAME) #1, #2, #3

Unit name of the unit selected in the window

Character code

(CHAR_CODE)#3

Character code set for the scheduler service to which the unit selected in the window belongs

User name

(USER_NAME)#3

Name of the JP1 user who executed the JP1/AJS3 command

Exec ID

(EXEC_ID) #2, #3, #4

Execution ID of the unit selected in the window

Year

(YEAR)

JP1/AJS3 - View system year that the JP1/AJS3 command was executed

Month

(MONTH)

JP1/AJS3 - View system month that the JP1/AJS3 command was executed

Day

(DAY)

JP1/AJS3 - View system day that the JP1/AJS3 command was executed

Time

(TIME)

JP1/AJS3 - View system time that the JP1/AJS3 command was executed

#1

Even if the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box is opened from a window where no unit is selected in the list area or in map area, if a unit is selected in the tree area, the command assumes that this unit is the target unit.

#2

If the parameter is replaced by a character string that includes control characters such as line breaks and tabs, the KAVV3905-E message is output and the command fails.

#3

To execute this command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), select a unit whose icon is displayed in the Unit name column of the summary list. If you select a unit whose icon is not displayed, the KAVV2304-E message is output and the command fails.

#4

To execute the command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

Select the target execution generation in the detailed information area. If the start mode is Normal, you can view the execution generation in the detailed information area by selecting Status Monitor in Function Menu.

If you execute the command by selecting a unit that has generations under both the status and the result from the list area, the KAVV2301-E message is output and the command fails.

To execute the command from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window):

Select the target execution generation in the unit detailed information list. If you execute the command by selecting a unit that has multiple generations from the summary list, the KAVV2301-E message is output and the command fails.

To execute the command from the Jobnet Editor window:

The KAVV263-E message is output and the command fails, because generation information cannot be obtained.

To execute the command from a window other than the above:

Make sure that the target execution generation is selected, and then execute the command.

The following shows how parameters are replaced with entity names at runtime.

Specified string

C:\TMP\(SERVICE_NAME)_(UNIT_NAME).txt

String after parameters are replaced

C:\TMP\AJSROOT1_NET1.txt

You might be unable to execute a command that includes parameters, depending on the number of units selected in the source window of the JP1/AJS3 Command Settings dialog box.

The following table shows whether each command can be executed based on the number of units selected in the source window.

Table 12‒37: Whether each command can be executed based on the number of units selected in the source window(for [Output])

Parameter

Units selected in the source window

No unit selected

One unit selected

Multiple units selected

(SERVICE_NAME)

N

Y

N

(UNIT_NAME)

N

Y

N

(CHAR_CODE)

N

Y

N

(USER_NAME)

Y

Y

Y

(EXEC_ID)

N

Y

N

(YEAR)

Y

Y

Y

(MONTH)

Y

Y

Y

(DAY)

Y

Y

Y

(TIME)

Y

Y

Y

Legend:

Y: The command can be executed.

N: The command cannot be executed.

JP1/AJS3 command specification examples:

The command in the following example extracts log records about jobnet re-execution (C105) of the AJSROOT1 scheduler service from the scheduler log of connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager:

Command: ajslogprint

Arguments: -F AJSROOT1 -k C105 "C:\ProgramData\Hitachi\jp1\jp1_default\JP1AJS2\log\schedule\AJSROOT1\ajs-log1.log"

The command in the following example outputs the definition information about the unit selected in JP1/AJS3 - View:

Command: ajsprint

Arguments: -F (SERVICE_NAME) -a (UNIT_FULL_NAME)

The command in the following example outputs the definition information about all units managed by the AJSROOT1 scheduler service:

Command: ajsprint

Arguments: -F AJSROOT1 -a /*

The command in the following example outputs the same information as that of the unit selected in JP1/AJS3 - View displayed in the Monthly Scheduler window of JP1/AJS3 - View:

Command: ajsshow

Arguments: -F (SERVICE_NAME) -i "%Jm,%BB,%OO,%CC,%TT,%cm,%KK,%ii,%qq,%mm,%aa,%ds,%de,%##,%MM,%RC,%RY" -R (UNIT_FULL_NAME)

The command in the following example outputs the current operating environment of the AJSROOT1 scheduler service:

Command: ajsstatus

Arguments: -F AJSROOT1

12.3.55 JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box

Use the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box to check the execution result of a JP1/AJS3 command. This dialog box appears when execution of a JP1/AJS3 command is completed.

The following figure shows the JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box:

Figure 12‒91: JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result dialog box

The displayed items are explained below.

Result

Displays the execution result of the executed JP1/AJS3 command.

Entry name

Displays the entry name of the executed JP1/AJS3 command.

Command

Displays the name of the executed JP1/AJS3 command.

Output

Displays the absolute path of the output file registered in the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

Standard error

Displays the contents of the standard error output for the executed JP1/AJS3 command. A maximum of 1,000 lines can be displayed.

Return code

Displays the return code for the executed JP1/AJS3 command.

Cautionary note

During command execution, if the command process is forcibly terminated on the manager host, 0 is sometimes displayed.

Open File button

Displays the output file registered in the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

Open Folder button

Displays the output destination folder of the output file registered in the JP1/AJS3 Command Entry dialog box.

12.3.56 Multi-execution Results dialog box

In the Multi-execution Results dialog box, you confirm the details of errors generated during operations on multiple units or multiple generations. If no error occurs, this dialog box does not appear. The following figure shows the Multi-execution Results dialog box:

Figure 12‒92: Multi-execution Results dialog box

The following explains the displayed item.

Results

Lists the details about errors if errors occur during operation of multiple units or multiple generations.

Unit name

Displays the name of the unit with an error.

If the Multi-execution Results dialog box was displayed from the Wait Conditions Statuses window, the unit name appears in the following format:

Unit-with-wait-conditions:(waiting-target unit)

Group name#1, #2

Displays the full path of the upper-most unit containing the unit with the error.

Execution ID#1, #2

Displays the execution ID of the unit with the error. If the execution ID of the unit with the error cannot be determined because the unit is not registered or it is in the Not sched. to exe. status, this column displays a blank. The column displays None if the unit with the error is a dummy-schedule generation.

Error message#2

Displays the error message that describes the error.

#1

This item might not be displayed depending on the area where multiple units or multiple generations are manipulated.

#2

If the Multi-execution Results dialog box was displayed from the Wait Conditions Statuses window, these items display the information for the unit with wait conditions.

Supplementary note

When you click the Unit name, Group name, Execution ID, or Error message header, the sequence of results is changed.

12.3.57 Monitoring Unit Select dialog box

The Monitoring Unit Select dialog box allows you to select the jobnets to be monitored in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window) or the displays sequence of the jobnets. The following figure shows the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box.

Figure 12‒93: Monitoring Unit Select dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Selectable units

Displays the units and scheduler services you can select as monitoring targets in a hierarchical format. A maximum of 20 scheduler services can be displayed. The following types of units are displayed here:

Job group#1, #2

Planning group

Root jobnet

Root remote jobnet

#1

Includes the job groups that are automatically generated on the execution target host of a remote jobnet.

#2

Job groups themselves cannot be specified as monitoring targets. When you select a job group in Selectable units and click the Add button, the jobnets and planning job groups under the selected job group appear in Monitored units.

Monitored units

Lists the units that can be monitored from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window). A unit is displayed in the following format in this section:

unit-name [scheduler-service-name:upper-unit-full-name]

Add button

Moves the unit selected in Units that can be selected to Monitored units.

Delete button

Deletes a unit selected in Monitored units. Once a unit is deleted from this section, that unit is not monitored.

Up button

Moves the unit selected in Monitored units one line above.

Down button

Moves the unit selected in Monitored units one line down.

Cautionary note

The list of units displayed in the Monitored units area is saved when you close the JP1/AJS3 - View window, not when you click the OK button in the Monitoring Unit Select dialog box. The saved list is retrieved the next time you open the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

12.4 Jobnet Editor window

The Jobnet Editor window defines a jobnet.

To display the Jobnet Editor window, use either of the following procedures:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), click Edit and then Edit.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), click Edit and then Jobnet Editor.

In the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, click Edit and then Jobnet Editor.

In the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window, click Edit and then Jobnet Editor.

In the Monthly Schedule window, click Edit and then Jobnet Editor.

In the Search window, click Edit and then Jobnet Editor.

In the Wait Conditions Settings List window, click Edit, Jobnet Editor, and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

This section describes the configuration of the Jobnet Editor window, menu commands, transitions of the window, and dialog boxes to be displayed.

12.4.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Jobnet Editor window.

Figure 12‒94: Jobnet Editor window

The following explains the displayed items.

(1) Tree area

Displays the jobnet being defined in a hierarchy.

For a release target jobnet, the jobnet is displayed in the root-jobnet-name(release-ID) format for each definition for which release entry is performed. Note that the release ID is not displayed if the release ID is AJS_AUTO.

(2) Map area

Displays the definition contents of the jobnet selected in the tree area.

If you have chosen wallpaper for each unit from Set Wall Paper in the Options menu, or if you have set additional, customized wallpaper, it appears as a background image. For details, see 12.4.43 Wall Paper dialog box and 11.5.6 Changing the background image of the map area.

If you set Selected for Unit name new line in the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box, you can specify the line-feed location of the unit name. If you have selected Yes for Display comments in the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box, the comment set in the Define Details dialog box will also appear. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

(3) Icon list

Displays icons. The icons are divided into five types: Basic, Events, Actions, Custom Jobs, and Tools. For details of the icons, see Table 12-39.

You can make settings so that icons that are not used are not displayed in the icon list. For details about how to do this, see 11.5.12 Hiding the icons of unused units in the icon list. A tab without any icons to be displayed is not displayed in the icon list. However, if all tabs have no icons to be displayed, only the Basic tab is displayed without any icons.

(4) Jobnet

Displays the relative or full name of the jobnet currently displayed in the map area. You can edit the file ajs2view_opt.conf in order to determine whether to display the relative name or full name for the jobnet. For details, see 11.5 Customizing the Jobnet Editor window.

(5) Exclusive edit check box

Select whether to use the Jobnet Editor window in exclusive edit mode. When you define or associate jobs, use exclusive edit mode in order to prevent the other users from accessing this window. In the initial status, this item is not selected. Editing is impossible if the window cannot be placed in exclusive edit mode. For example, you cannot place the window in exclusive edit mode when another Jobnet Editor window has been placed in exclusive edit mode.

In the exclusive edit mode, no other user can add or delete units using commands that perform operations on JP1/AJS3 - View and units. However, even during exclusive editing, another user can edit the contents of the unit definition before the system enters the exclusive edit mode. Therefore, multiple users must pay attention when editing.

Moreover, you cannot perform operations, such as registering for execution and canceling execution, for jobnets containing units being exclusively edited. After finishing the definition edit operations such as addition or deletion of units and related settings, cancel the exclusive edit mode.

(6) Edit mode selection button

This button associates or dissociates units in the map area. For details about relating the units, see 5.2.5 Relating jobs and jobnets. The following are the available edit mode selection buttons.

Basic button

Make Relation button

Make Consecutive Relations button

Make Conditional Relations button

Break Relation button

(7) List area

Lists the basic information about the units displayed in the map area. You can minimize the list area by clicking View, List Area, and then Minimum.

You can change the items displayed in the list area and the order in which they appear. For details about how to set the display items, see 12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box.

Unit name

Displays the icon and name of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Retry settings

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When retry settings are enabled

Yes is displayed.

When retry settings are disabled

No is displayed.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

12.4.2 Menu commands

Table 12-38 lists the menu commands supported in the Jobnet Editor window. Table 12-39 covers the dialog boxes displayed when you drag an icon from the icon list.

Table 12‒38: Menu commands supported in the Jobnet Editor window

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

Backup

Specifies how to back up a unit.

Backup

Restore

Specifies how to restore a unit.

Restore

New Window

Displays the Jobnet Editor window in a new window.

--

Close

Closes the Jobnet Editor window.

--

Edit

Edit Mode - Basic

Selects an icon in the map area.

--

Edit Mode - Make Relation

Associates icons.

--

Edit Mode - Make Consecutive Relations

Associates icons repeatedly.

--

Edit Mode - Make Conditional Relations

Sets a conditional relation between judgment jobs and dependent units.

--

Edit Mode - Break Relation

Dissociates execution orders and conditional relations.

--

Cut

Copies an icon selected in the map area. If you paste the icon, the original icon is deleted.

--

Copy

Copies an icon selected in the map area.

--

Paste (Units and relations)

Pastes a cut or copied icon, the coordinate location of the icon, and the relation with other icons onto the map area.

--

Paste (Units only)

Pastes a cut or copied icon, and the coordinate location of the icon onto the map area.

--

Paste#1

Pastes a cut or copied icon onto the map area.

--

Paste (Extension)#1

Pastes a cut or copied icon, the coordinate location of the icon, and the relation with other icons onto the map area.

--

Delete

Deletes an icon selected in the map area.

--

Select All

Selects all the units in the area containing a selected unit.

--

Auto-create Jobnet Connector#2

Generates, in the map area, the jobnet connector to be connected to the root jobnet (connection-destination jobnet) or planning group (connection-destination planning group) saved in the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

--

Search

Displays the Search window for a unit defined in the hierarchy shown in the map area.

--

Simple Search - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Search window to search for units with wait conditions that specify the selected unit as a unit whose end is to be waited for.

--

Map Size

Resizes the map area.

Map Size

Define Start Condition

Defines start conditions for the root jobnet.

Define Details - [Start Condition]

Cancel Start Condition

Deletes start conditions set for a root jobnet.

--

Schedule

Edits a jobnet schedule.

With a single jobnet selected, displays the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule dialog box if you click Add, Change or Copy button in the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box if you choose Repeat in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Schedule Settings

Schedule Rule

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings

Waiting Conditions Settings

Assigns wait conditions to selected units.

Waiting Condition Settings

Waiting-Target Unit Settings

Select Waiting-Target Unit

Properties

Displays and edits unit definitions. The dialog box name varies with a selected unit.

Define Details - [iconname]

View

Open Jobnet

Displays the elements under a jobnet selected in the map area.

--

Upper Jobnet

Displays the upper level jobnet of the jobnet appearing in the map area.

--

Highlighted Display - Only Preceding

Highlights only directly or indirectly preceding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Only Succeeding

Highlights only directly or indirectly succeeding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Preceding and Succeeding

Highlights only directly or indirectly preceding or succeeding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Release

Cancels highlighting.

--

Zoom

Zooms in or out of the map area.

Zoom

Toolbar

Switches the icon list and the edit mode selection button between display and non-display.

--

List Area - Minimum

Minimizes the list area.

--

List Area - Restore

Restores the list area to the original size when it was minimized.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Wait Conditions Settings List

Displays the Wait Conditions Settings List window in which you can view the wait conditions assigned to units with wait conditions under the selected unit.

--

Refresh

Refreshes information in the tree and map areas.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup

Configure the items displayed in the list area.

Display Item Setup

Set Wall Paper

Sets an image file as the wallpaper of the map area for individual units.

Wall Paper

Save Full Unit Name

Saves, in the system clipboard, the full path name of the selected unit having a scheduler service name.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data#3

Saves the information selected in the list area on the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

--

Legend:

-- : Not displayed

#1

This item is not displayed by default. For details about how to display this command, see 11.5.18 Replacing "Paste (Units and relations)" and "Paste (Units only)" with the menu items and behavior from version 10-50 and earlier.

#2

You cannot automatically create a jobnet connector for a scheduler service that differs from the save source. If you want to define a jobnet connector for a different scheduler service, define it manually.

#3

A maximum of 1,000 lines of data can be copied to the clipboard at one time.

Table 12‒39: Dialog boxes displayed when you drag an icon

Tab

Icon name

Dialog box displayed

Basic

Unix Job

Define Details - [UNIX Job]

PC Job

Define Details - [PC Job]

Queue Job

Define Details - [Queue Job]

Jobnet

Define Details - [Jobnet]

Remote-Jobnet

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet]

Jobnet Connector

Define Details - [Jobnet Connector]

OR-Job

Define Details - [OR job]

Judgment-Job

Define Details - [Judgment Job]

Flexible Job

Define Details - [Flexible Job]

HTTP Connection Job

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job]

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification]

Events

Receive JP1 Event

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Passing Information]

Monitoring Files

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] - [Passing Information]

Receive Mail

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail]

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive]

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Passing Information]

Receive MQ Message

Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message]

Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] - [Passing Information]

Receive MSMQ Message

Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message]

Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] - [Passing Information]

Monitoring Log Files

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Passing Information]

Monitoring Event Log

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] - [Passing Information]

Interval Control

Detailed Definition - [Interval Control]

Actions

Send JP1 Event

Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event]

Send Mail

Detailed Definition - [Send Mail]

Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File]

Send MQ Message

Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message]

Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting]

Send MSMQ Message

Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message]

Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body]

OpenView Status Report

Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report]

Local Power Control

Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control]

Remote Power Control

Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control]

Custom Jobs

FTP Job

Define Details - [Custom Job]

SAP Job

Define Details - [Custom Job]

CPA job

Define Details - [Custom Job]

Tools

Passing Information

Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job]

12.4.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Editor window

The following figure shows the windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Editor window.

Figure 12‒95: Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Editor window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#2

The Define Details - [icon - name] dialog box is displayed. For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window as well.

12.4.4 Map Size dialog box

The Map Size dialog box resizes the map area. After you changed the map size, if the resized map area does not have enough space to display icons, the map size is adjusted automatically. The following figure shows the Map Size dialog box.

Figure 12‒96: Map Size dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Columns

Specify the horizontal size of the map area by the number of icons. You can specify 1 to 100. The default is 10.

Rows

Specify the vertical size of the map area by the number of icons. You can specify 1 to 100. The default is 8.

12.4.5 Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box

The Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box sets start conditions for a root jobnet.

Cautionary notes

You can define only the event job icon for start conditions.

You cannot make relation.

You can set up to 32 icons in the map area.

Registration for execution results in an error if a jobnet connector is defined under the selected root jobnet.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒97: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

You cannot set this item for start conditions. .CONDITION appears.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify this for start conditions.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box.

Figure 12‒98: Definition page in the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Start condition

You can select either of the following items as a start condition. The default is AND.

AND

With multiple events set as start conditions, using AND starts the jobnet if all of those events occur.

OR

With multiple events set as start conditions, using OR starts the jobnet if any of those events occurs.

Concurrent exec. of monitoring gen.

Choose the operation to be performed if there is a generation in the Now monitoring status when the start time for the jobnet with a start condition has been reached. Start monitoring. is chosen by default. For details about how to perform multiple startup of monitoring generations, see 3.4.5 Concurrent execution of monitoring generations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The available options are as follows:

Do not start monitoring.

Places the jobnet that has reached the start time in the Skipped so not exe. status without starting monitoring if there is a generation already in the Now monitoring status.

If you have selected Unlimited in the Times or Period text box in Valid range of start condition, we recommend that you choose Do not start monitoring.

Wait for the end of monitoring.

Places a jobnet that has reached the start time in the Wait for start time status if there is a generation already in the Now monitoring status. At this time, a message KAVS1420-I (A jobnet with a preset start condition (jobnet-name:execution-ID) will wait for the termination of its monitoring status generation (execution-ID-of-generation-being-monitored)) appears. When the generation in the Now monitoring status ends, the status of the generation in the Wait for start time status changes to Now monitoring.

If the timeout period expires while the jobnet is in the Wait for start time status, the jobnet enters the Skipped so not exe. status.

Start monitoring.

Places a jobnet that has reached the start time in the Now monitoring status even if there is a generation already in the Now monitoring status.

If you have selected Unlimited in the Times or Period text box in Valid range of start condition, specifying cycle processing results in multiple monitoring. In this case, occurrence of one event establishes the start condition for each generation in the Now monitoring status.

Pause exec. gen. for start cond.

Use this section to specify whether to retain the established generation if you have chosen Disable in Concurrent exec. in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box, the start condition is established, and there is a generation being executed. If you have chosen Enable in Concurrent exec. in the Define Details - [Jobnet] dialog box, the jobnet enters the Now running status when the start condition is established, regardless of whether Pause exec. gen. for start cond. is chosen. Stay without skip. is chosen by default. For details about retaining execution generations, see 3.4.6 Retention of execution generations with satisfied start conditions in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The available options are as follows:

Does not stay with skip.

Places the established generation in the Skipped so not exe. status and does not retain it.

Stay without skip.

Places the established generation in the Wait for start cond. status and retains it until the generation being executed ends.

Task after abend

Specify whether to suppress the execution of later jobnets with start conditions if a jobnet with a start condition ends abnormally. Start execution of jobnet. is selected by default. For details about suppressing execution of jobnets, see 3.4.7 Suppressing further executions of a jobnet with start conditions after it abnormally terminates in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The available options are as follows:

Start execution of jobnet.

Even after a jobnet terminates abnormally, the system continues to execute those jobnets that meet the subsequent start conditions.

Hold start of jobnet.

After a jobnet terminates abnormally, the system places jobnets that meet the subsequent start conditions into either the Being held or Wait for start cond. status and suppresses execution.

Stop monitoring of start conditions.

After a jobnet terminates abnormally, the system stops monitoring the start conditions.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box.

Figure 12‒99: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Start Condition] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot select this as a start condition.

Type

You cannot set this item for start conditions.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.4.6 Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box defines the details of a Unix job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Transfer File page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒100: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Unix-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of Unix job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒101: Definition page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Command statement

Specify the contents of a script file. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank. If the script file name contains any blanks, they must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").

If you omit both of Command statement and Script file name, the system executes an empty job, then ends normally.

If you specify a statement in Command statement and a file name in Script file name, the command statement and the script file are executed in this order.

Note that the parameter you specify in Parameters is not valid in the command or script file specified in Command statement. The parameter you specify in Parameters is valid only in the script file specified in Script file name.

Script file name

Specify the name of the script file on the agent host to be run. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify an absolute path name, or a path name relative to the working path used at the time of job execution or the path specified by the PATH environment variable. If the execution destination service is Standard, the PATH environment variable of the OS user that executes the jobs takes effect. If the execution destination service is Queueless Agent, the PATH environment variable used at start of the queueless agent service takes effect. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

If the execution destination service is Queueless Agent, you must prefix the script file name with ./ to specify a script file in the working path by a relative path. However, you can omit the ./ if you specify yes for the AJSQL_EXECCURRENTSCRIPT environment setting parameter. For details, see 20.10.2(6) AJSQL_EXECCURRENTSCRIPT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

If you omit both of Command statement and Script file name, the system executes an empty job, then ends normally.

If you specify a statement in Command statement and a file name in Script file name, the command statement and the script file are executed in this order.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied, an OS user can execute a job without having execution permission for the script file:

The execution destination service is Queueless Agent

The Command statement and Parameters fields are empty

The OS user who executes the job has read privileges for the script file

Parameters

Specify job parameters. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

The parameters you specify here are valid only for the script file specified for Script file name. It has no effect on the commands and script files specified for Command statement.

Environment variables

The environment variables that are set in the local login script for users of the operating system become valid at the time of job execution. You can add new variables to the environment for job execution. Use a character string of up to 20,479 bytes as the name of a new environment variable. You can also use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

For notes on defining environment variables see A. Notes on Defining Environment Variables and an Environment Variable File in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Environment file

The environment variables that are set in the local login script for users of the operating system become valid at the time of job execution. You can add new variables to the environment for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes as the name of an environment file on the agent host. You can specify an absolute path name, or a path name relative to the working path used at the time of job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

For notes on defining environment variables see A. Notes on Defining Environment Variables and an Environment Variable File in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Working path

For job execution, specify the working (current) path name. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify the working (current) path as a full path. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

By default, the working path is the home directory for users of job execution. If the user's home directory is not defined, the root directory (/) is assumed.

Supplementary note

The working path is set as the current directory for executing a job. In the working path, a temporary work file is generated for executing a job. The work file may remain undeleted in this directory after a job process was terminated abnormally during job execution. You can remove this file while JP1/AJS3 is not running.

Priority

Select the priority of job execution. You can set None or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None.

When None is selected, the priority depends on the definition of the upper-level jobnet. If None is selected here when None is specified for all upper-level jobnets up to the highest-level jobnet, the priority value specified for the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is assumed. If the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is not set, 1 is assumed. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY, see 20.4.2(108) DEFAULTPRIORITY in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Note that, when the target host is a UNIX machine, if a user who is not logged in as a superuser attempts to execute the jobs resulting from mapping and 4 or 5 is set, a runtime privilege error occurs.

The following gives the values you can specify, and their meanings.

Table 12‒40: Specifiable values and execution priority

Specifiable values

Execution priority

1

nice value +20

2

nice value +10

3

nice value

4

nice value -10

5

nice value -20

In UNIX, JP1/AJS3 service's nice value used when jajs_spmd is executed is used as the default (base) nice value. When the JP1/AJS3 service's nice value has not been set, 20 is assumed as the nice value.

For example, when the priority setting is 1 and the nice value is 20, the priority value is calculated as shown below.

39 20 (initial value) + 20 (increment)

If the resulting value is not within the possible nice value range (0-39), the maximum value is 39 and the minimum value is 0.

If Queueless Agent is selected as the execution service, you can set only 39, 30, 20, 10, or 0 as a nice value, according to the job execution priority (0 corresponds to the highest execution priority). When you change the nice value, you must specify the job execution priority corresponding to the nice value.

Standard input

Specify the name of the standard input file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

Standard output

Specify the name of the standard output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can use macro variables and $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$ in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank. If you select Append, the standard output file is added.

If you specify $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$, the standard output file is a temporary file. In this case, the Append text box is ignored.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

For notes on defining the standard output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Standard error

Specify the name of the standard error output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank. If you select Append, the standard error output file is added.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

The default mode also creates a result file temporarily on the agent host, and transfers it to the manager host when the job terminates. This file is deleted from the agent host when the job terminates, and is deleted from the manager host when job information is deleted. Assign /dev/null if any reference to the details of execution results is unnecessary and you do not want to output unnecessary files.

For notes on defining the standard error output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the Unix job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the Unix job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Normal if specified file exists

Ends normally the Unix job if the agent host contains the file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

Normal if file was updated

Ends normally the Unix job if the agent host's file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list is updated within the period from the job start to the job end. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

The system uses the update time to determine whether a file was updated. Because the system truncates the timestamp to the second when making this determination, it might not recognize that a file has been updated when there is less than one second between updates. In this case, the job will terminate abnormally.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In UNIX, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the program ends in an error.

You can select this option when all of the following conditions are met:

The version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later

The database of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a standard configuration

Judgment by threshold is selected in the Rule drop-down list

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits between the error occurring and retrying the job. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

User name

Specify the OS user name of JP1/AJS3 - Agent that executes the job. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

You must map this user name to User who registered or User who owns in Executed by. However, if the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, you must map this user name to a fixed user regardless of the contents of the Executed by field.

By default, the job is executed under the primary user name in the user mapping. If the home directory of the OS user you want to map has not been created, you must create it. The home directory is required for successful execution of the job. For details about the user mapping, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

Important

In Standard input, Standard output, or Standard error, you can specify only a text file.

(3) Transfer File page

The Transfer File page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box defines settings for transferring a file required to execute a job from JP1/AJS3 - Manager to JP1/AJS3 - Agent. You can transfer only text-format files.

The following figure shows the Transfer File page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒102: Transfer File page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Transfer file 1 - Transfer file 4

You can set up to four transfer files for one job.

File to transfer

Specify a file in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

Destination file

Specify the name of the file to be transferred to the agent host. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This specification is optional.

If you want to use the files created at the destination at the time the job is executed, specify the $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMPxx$ variable by using a script file or a parameter.

Only when a file is specified for File to transfer is a number (01 to 04, in ascending order) assigned to xx in this variable.

For example, you might specify the following:

Transfer file 1

File to transfer: Not specified

Destination file: Not specified

Transfer file 2

File to transfer: Specified

Destination file: Specified

Transfer file 3

File to transfer: Not specified

Destination file: Not specified

Transfer file 4

File to transfer: Specified

Destination file: Not specified

In this case, $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMP01$ is assigned as the destination file for transfer file 2, and $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMP02$ is assigned as the definition file for transfer file 4.

Delete of job end

To delete a transferred file after the end of job execution, select Yes. By default, this box is not selected.

If the source file name is specified but the destination file name is omitted, the system assumes that Yes is selected.

Cautionary note

JP1/AJS3 transfers transfer files from the manager host to the agent host. It also transfers result files (standard output files and standard error output files) from the agent host to the manager host. When files are transferred, each file is converted into the character code set that the JP1/AJS3 service on the destination host is using. Therefore, you must ensure that the character code set that the files use and the character code set that JP1/AJS3 uses are identical.

For transfer files

When you specify transfer files for a Unix job, make sure that the character code set for the JP1/AJS3 service at the manager host is identical to the character code set for the source files. When you specify transfer files for a job for submitting jpqjobsub and other commands, make sure that the character code set for the command execution process is identical to the character code set for the source file.

For result files

You must make sure that the character code set for job-generated result files is identical to that for the JP1/AJS3 service at the agent host.

For example, if the JP1/AJS3 service on the manager host is started using Japanese Shift JIS and the JP1/AJS3 service on the agent host is started using Japanese EUC, then if you transfer files encoded in Japanese Shift JIS from the manager host to the agent host, the destination files are created with Japanese EUC encoding.

For details on the JP1/AJS3 character code settings, see 13.4.1 Setting the language environment in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

For details on the characters that can be used in the data of files to be transferred, see 2.4.2(7)(a) Available characters in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

(4) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒103: Attributes page in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Indicates whether to put a unit in hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the service of the execution destination. You can specify two types: Standard and Queueless Agent. The default is Standard.

Set timeout period

Indicates whether to set a timeout period of job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can specify 1 to 1,440. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who registered the job. The system executes the job under the converted OS user account.

User who owns

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who owns the job. The system executes the job under the converted user account.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.7 Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box defines the details of a PC job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Transfer File page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒104: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is PC-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of PC job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒105: Definition page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

File name

Specify the name of a file on the agent host to be run. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can specify an absolute path name, or a path name relative to the working path for job execution or the path specified by the PATH environment variable (The system environment variable is valid). A system environment variable is effective for the PATH environment variable. You can also use a macro variable. If the script file name contains any blanks, they must be enclosed in double quotation marks ("). By default, the system executes an empty job, and ends normally.

Specify a parameter in Parameters, not in File name.

If you specify Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page and specify a parameter in File name on the Definition page for a job, that job will fail to start up.

Parameters

Specify job parameters. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Environment variables

System environment variables are valid during job execution. You can add new variables to the environment for job execution. Use a character string of up to 20,479 bytes as the name of a new environment variable. You can also use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

For notes on defining environment variables, see A. Notes on Defining Environment Variables and an Environment Variable File in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Environment file

System environment variables are valid during job execution. You can add new variables to the environment for job execution. As a new environment variable, specify an environment file name on the agent host by using a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name, or a path name relative to the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

For notes on defining environment variables see A. Notes on Defining Environment Variables and an Environment Variable File in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Working path

Specify the working (current) path name for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify the working (current) path as a full path. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

The system defaults to the working directory name for agent process execution set through configuring the agent.

If you specify Standard in Exec. service without specifying the working path name, the working directory used for executing the agent process defined in the agent environment is assumed.

If you specify Queueless Agent, the folder for containing the JP1/AJS3 working files is assumed.

Supplementary note

The working path is set in the current directory for executing a job. In the working path, a temporary work file is generated for executing a job. The work file may remain undeleted in this directory after a job process was terminated abnormally during job execution. You can remove this file while JP1/AJS3 is not running.

Priority

Select the priority of job execution. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None.

When None is selected, the priority depends on the definition of the upper-level jobnet. If None is selected here when None is specified for all upper-level jobnets up to the highest-level jobnet, the priority value specified for the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is assumed. If the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is not set, 1 is assumed. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY, see 20.4.2(108) DEFAULTPRIORITY in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The following gives the values you can specify, and their meanings.

Table 12‒41: Specifiable values and execution priority

Specifiable values

Execution priority

1

Lower than interactive processing

2

Lower than interactive processing

3

Equal to interactive processing

4

Higher than interactive processing

5

Higher than interactive processing

Supplementary note

Windows provides three priority stages. Specify the following three priority classes to start a job process.

If the specified value is 1 or 2, the job process runs when the system is idle. (Specify IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 3, the job process runs as a general one. (Specify NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 4 or 5, the job process runs before the thread of the process to which you assigned the above priority classes. (Specify HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

Standard input

Specify the name of the standard input file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

Standard output

Specify the name of the standard output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can use macro variables and $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$ in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank. If you select Append, the standard output file is added.

If you specify $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$, the standard output file is a temporary file. In this case, the Append text box is ignored.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

For notes on defining the standard output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Standard error

Specify the name of the standard error output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank. If you select Append, the standard error output file is added.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

The default mode also creates a result file temporarily on the agent host, and transfers it to the manager host when the job terminates. This file is deleted from the agent host when the job terminates, and is deleted from the manager host when job information is deleted. Assign NUL if any reference to the details of execution results is unnecessary and you do not want to output unnecessary files.

For notes on defining the standard error output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the PC job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the PC job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Normal if specified file exists

Ends normally the PC job if the agent host contains the file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

Normal if file was updated

Ends normally the PC job if the agent host's file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list is updated within the period from the job start to the job end. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name or a relative path name from the working path for job execution. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the executable file ends in an error.

You can select this option when all of the following conditions are met:

The version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later

The database of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a standard configuration

Judgment by threshold is selected in the Rule drop-down list

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits before retrying a job when an error occurs in an executable file. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

User name

Specify the OS user name of JP1/AJS3 - Agent that executes the job. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

You must map this user name to User who registered or User who owns in Executed by. However, if the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, you must map this user name to a fixed user regardless of the contents of the Executed by field.

By default, the job is executed under the primary user name in the user mapping. For details about the user mapping, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

For a job executed on a Windows host, information regarding the OS user is limited by the authority of the OS user. The account that is set in the JP1/AJS3 service is used for access to the file specified by the file name. The OS user serves to access a file from the execution file.

If you restrict access permission for the execution user to the local server user, specify the OS user name using the host-name\user-name format.

Important

Do not specify, as the file name, a path beginning with a network drive name. Specify a path beginning with a computer name such as \\computer-name\shared-folder\execution-file-name. Do not use a path beginning with a network drive name.

In Standard input, Standard output, or Standard error, you can specify only a text file.

(3) Transfer File page

The Transfer File page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box defines settings for transferring a file required to execute a job from JP1/AJS3 - Manager to JP1/AJS3 - Agent. You can transfer only text-format files.

The following figure shows the Transfer File page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒106: Transfer File page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Transfer file 1 - Transfer file 4

You can set up to four transfer files for one job.

File to transfer

Specify a file in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

If a file of several megabytes is transferred either during job registration or as the result of job information collection, the transfer may fail or take time.

Destination file

Specify the name of the file to be transferred to the agent host. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This specification is optional.

If you want to use the files created at the destination at the time the job is executed, specify the $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMPxx$ variable by using a script file or a parameter.

Only when a file is specified for File to transfer is a number (01 to 04, in ascending order) assigned to xx in this variable.

For example, you might specify the following:

Transfer file 1

File to transfer: Not specified

Destination file: Not specified

Transfer file 2

File to transfer: Specified

Destination file: Specified

Transfer file 3

File to transfer: Not specified

Destination file: Not specified

Transfer file 4

File to transfer: Specified

Destination file: Not specified

In this case, $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMP01$ is assigned as the destination file for transfer file 2, and $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMP02$ is assigned as the definition file for transfer file 4.

Note, however, that the $JP1AJS2_JPQTEMPxx$ variable cannot be used to specify the file name. If you specify this variable, the job will fail to start.

Delete of job end

To delete a transferred file after the end of job execution, select Yes. By default, this box is not selected.

If the source file name is specified but the destination file name is omitted, the system assumes that Yes is selected.

Cautionary note

JP1/AJS3 transfers transfer files from the manager host to the agent host. It also transfers result files (standard output files and standard error output files) from the agent host to the manager host. When files are transferred, each file is converted into the character code set that the JP1/AJS3 service on the destination host is using. Therefore, you must ensure that the character code set that the files use and the character code set that JP1/AJS3 uses are identical.

For transfer files

When you specify transfer files for a PC job, make sure that the character code set for the JP1/AJS3 service at the manager host is identical to the character code set for the source files. When you specify transfer files for a job submitting jpqjobsub and other commands, make sure that the character code set for the command execution process is identical to the character code set for the source files.

For result files

You must make sure that the character code set for job-generated result files is identical to that for the JP1/AJS3 service at the agent host.

For example, if the JP1/AJS3 service on the manager host is started using Japanese Shift JIS and the JP1/AJS3 service on the agent host is started using Japanese EUC, then if you transfer files encoded in Japanese Shift JIS from the manager host to the agent host, the destination files are created with Japanese EUC encoding.

For details on the JP1/AJS3 character code settings, see 13.4.1 Setting the language environment in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

For details on the characters that can be used in the data of files to be transferred, see 2.4.2(7)(a) Available characters in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

Important

Do not specify, as the file name, a path beginning with a network drive name. Specify a path beginning with a computer name such as \\computer-name\shared-folder\execution-file-name. Do not use a path beginning with a network drive name.

(4) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒107: Attributes page in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the service of the execution destination. You can specify two types: Standard and Queueless Agent. The default is Standard.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following.

User who registered

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who registered the job. The system executes the job under the converted OS user account.

User who owns

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who owns the job. The system executes the job under the converted user account.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.8 Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box defines the details of a Queue job. A user uses this dialog box to register a job with JP1/OJE for VOS3, Himalaya, or AS/400 (JP1/OJE for Midrange Computer). For the restrictions for Himalaya, see The following table. For details about the restrictions for JP1/OJE for VOS3, AS/400 (JP1/OJE for Midrange Computer), see 1.3 Linkage with other programs in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Table 12‒42: Restrictions for linkage with Himalaya

Definition item

Restrictions

Host name

Host name of the Himalaya system: Character string of up to 240 bytes

Queue name

Character string of up to 32 bytes

The system distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Job name

Job name of the Himalaya system: Character string of up to 8 bytes

File name

Unspecifiable

Parameters

Unspecifiable

Priority

Specify None.

Transfer file

Unspecifiable

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Transfer File page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒108: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Queue-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify this for a Queue job.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒109: Definition page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Host name

Specify the name of the host in which the Queue job is to be registered. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

Queue name

Specify the name of the host in which the Queue job is to be registered. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. You must specify this item. The default is a blank.

Job name

Specify the name of the Queue job to be executed. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

If you leave this field blank, the system uses the file name minus its path information.

File name

Specify a file name for the Queue job to be executed. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. The default is a blank. You can also use a macro variable.

You can specify an absolute path name, or a path name relative to the working path for job execution or the path specified by the PATH environment variable.

For a Windows host, the PATH environment variable is valid for the system environment variable. For a UNIX host, the PATH environment variable for the OS user that executes jobs takes effect.

If the script file name contains any blanks, they must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").

If JP1/AJS3 is linked with JP1/OJE for VOS3, the name of the file to be executed cannot be omitted.

Parameters

Specify job parameters. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. The default is a blank. You can also use a macro variable.

Priority

Select the priority of job execution. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None.

When None is selected, the priority depends on the definition of the upper-level jobnet. If None is selected here when None is specified for all upper-level jobnets up to the highest-level jobnet, the priority value specified for the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is assumed. If the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is not set, 1 is assumed. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY, see 20.4.2(108) DEFAULTPRIORITY in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

For a UNIX host, if users who execute jobs resulting from mapping do not have superuser privileges, specifying the value of 4 or 5 will result in an authority error at the time of job execution.

The following gives the values you can specify, and their meanings.

Table 12‒43: Specifiable values and execution priority

Specifiable values

For UNIX

For Windows

1

nice value +20

Lower than interactive processing

2

nice value +10

Lower than interactive processing

3

nice value

Equal to interactive processing

4

nice value -10

Higher than interactive processing

5

nice value -20

Higher than interactive processing

Supplementary note

Windows provides three priority stages. Specify the following three priority classes to start a job process.

If the specified value is 1 or 2, the job process runs when the system is idle. (Specify IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS, which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 3, the job process runs as a general one. (Specify NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS, which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 4 or 5, the job process runs before the thread of the process to which you assigned the above priority class. (Specify HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS, which Windows stipulates.)

In UNIX, JP1/AJS3 service's nice value used when jajs_spmd is executed is used as the default (base) nice value. When the JP1/AJS3 service's nice value has not been set, 20 is assumed as the nice value.

For example, when the priority setting is 1 and the nice value is 20, the priority value is calculated as shown below.

39 20 (initial value) + 20 (increment)

If the resulting value is not within the possible nice value range (0-39), the maximum value is 39 and the minimum value is 0.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the Queue job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the Queue job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In UNIX, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the executable file ends in an error.

You can select this option when all of the following conditions are met:

The version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later

The database of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a standard configuration

Judgment by threshold is selected in the Rule drop-down list

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits before retrying a job when an error occurs in an executable file. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Important

Do not specify, as the file name, the path beginning with the network drive name. Specify the path beginning with a computer name such as \\computer-name\shared-folder\execution-file-name. Do not use a path beginning with a network drive name.

(3) Transfer File page

The Transfer File page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box defines settings for transferring a file required to execute a job from JP1/AJS3 - Manager to JP1/AJS3 - Agent. You can transfer only text-format files.

The following figure shows the Transfer File page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒110: Transfer File page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Transfer file 1 - Transfer file 4

You can set up to four transfer files for one job.

File to transfer

Specify a file in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Set a full path file name. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

Destination file

Specify the name of the file to be transferred to the agent host. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Set a full path file name. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

Cautionary note

JP1/AJS3 transfers transfer files from the manager host to the agent host. It also transfers result files (standard output files and standard error output files) from the agent host to the manager host. When files are transferred, each file is converted into the character code set that the JP1/AJS3 service on the destination host is using. Therefore, you must ensure that the character code set that the files use and the character code set that JP1/AJS3 uses are identical.

For transfer files

When you specify transfer files for a Queue job, make sure that the character code set for the JP1/AJS3 service at the manager host is identical to the character code set for the source files. When you specify transfer files for a job submitting jpqjobsub and other commands, make sure that the character code set for the command execution process is identical to the character code set for the source files.

For result files

You must make sure that the character code set for job-generated result files is identical to that for the JP1/AJS3 service at the agent host.

For example, if the JP1/AJS3 service on the manager host is started using Japanese Shift JIS and the JP1/AJS3 service on the agent host is started using Japanese EUC, then if you transfer files encoded in Japanese Shift JIS from the manager host to the agent host, the destination files are created with Japanese EUC encoding.

For details on the JP1/AJS3 character code settings, see 13.4.1 Setting the language environment in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

For details on the characters that can be used in the data of files to be transferred, see 2.4.2(7)(a) Available characters in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

Important

Do not specify, as the file name, the path beginning with the network drive name. Specify the path beginning with a computer name such as \\computer-name\shared-folder\execution-file-name. Do not use a path beginning with a network drive name.

(4) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒111: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Queue Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Set timeout period

You cannot specify this for a Queue job.

Timeout period

You cannot specify this for a Queue job.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following.

User who registered

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who registered the job. The system executes the job under the converted OS user account.

User who owns

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who owns the job. The system executes the job under the converted user account.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.9 Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

The Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box allows you to define details about jobnet connectors.

This dialog box has the following two pages and common items on both pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒112: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes. The text box displays Jobnet-Connector by default.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of a maximum of 80 bytes. The text box is blank by default.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify an agent name for a jobnet connector.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box.

Figure 12‒113: Definition page in the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Connection range

Specify the range of connection for the jobnet connector. The default selection is Same service.

Same service

Click this option if you want to control the execution order of the root jobnets under the same scheduler service.

Other service

Click this option if you want to control the execution order of the root jobnets under a different scheduler service. When you click this option, you can enter names in Connection host and Connection service.

This section appears for JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection host

Use a character string of a maximum of 255 bytes to specify the host name of the host that defines the jobnet to which this jobnet connector is connected.

You can specify a name in this section when you choose Other service in Connection range.

This section is not available when you choose Same service in Connection range.

This text box is blank by default.

You cannot specify single-byte spaces, tab characters, and linefeed characters.

You do not need to specify a host name here when the connection-destination jobnet for the jobnet connector belongs to a different scheduler service but exists on the same host.

The text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connection service

Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes to specify the scheduler service name of the scheduler service for which the connection-destination jobnet for this jobnet connector is defined.

You must specify a name in this section when you choose Other service in Connection range.

This section is not available when you choose Same service in Connection range.

This text box is blank by default.

You can specify single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (! # $ % + @ - . _).

The text box appears for JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Connect destination

Use a character string of a maximum of 930 bytes to specify the full unit name of the connection-destination jobnet (root jobnet or planning group) for this jobnet connector.

This text box is blank by default.

You cannot specify single-byte spaces, and symbols (, ( ) : ; =).

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box.

Figure 12‒114: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot specify this for a jobnet connector.

Type

You cannot specify this for a jobnet connector.

Owner

Use a character string of a maximum of 31 bytes to specify the owner of the unit. The text box displays the name of the JP1 user who is logged in by default. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Use a character string of a maximum of 63 bytes to specify the name of the JP1 resource group. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The text box displays the name of the JP1 resource group of the upper-level unit. If this text box is blank, you do not have access permission for any JP1 resource group.

12.4.10 Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box defines the details of an OR job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following page:

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒115: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is OR-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify this item for OR jobs.

(2) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒116: Attributes page in the Define Details - [OR Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

You cannot select this item for OR jobs.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. You can specify this when all the preceding and subsequent jobs are set to Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.4.11 Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box defines the details of a judgment job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒117: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Judgment-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify this for a judgment job.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box. The displayed items for the Definition page in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box vary with judgment types.

(a) When the judgment type is Return code

The following figure shows the Definition page (with Return code selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box. The information on the page differs depending on whether the judgment is based on a comparison with a specific value or a range of values.

Figure 12‒118: Definition page (with Return code selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Judgment type

Select the type of judgment condition. The default is Return code. You can select any of the following types:

Return code

File

Variable (char.)

Variable (number)

Cautionary note

The return value of a jobnet is always treated as 0. Therefore, if you define a jobnet as the preceding unit of a judgment job, the judgment is always the same. If you want to choose Return code as the judgment type, the preceding unit must be a job. For details, see 3.1.1(1)(c) Judgment job in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Condition

Select a judgment condition. The default is Return code > judgment value.. You can select one of the following:

Return code > judgment value.

True if the return code is larger than the value set in Judgment value.

Return code > or = judgment value.

True if the return code is equal to or larger than the value set in Judgment value.

Return code < judgment value.

True if the return code is less than the value set in Judgment value.

Return code < or = judgment value.

True if the return code is equal to or less than the value set in Judgment value.

Return code = judgment value.

True if the return code is equal to the value set in Judgment value.

Return code not = judgment value.

True if the return code is not equal to the value set in Judgment value.

Return code within judgment value range.

True if the return code is within the range set in Judgment value.

Return code not within judgment value range.

True if the return code is outside the range set in Judgment value.

Judgment value

For judgment based on a specific return code

Specify a reference value against which to judge the return code. You can specify 0 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank.

For judgment based on a return code range

Define a reference range by entering an upper and a lower reference value. You must specify both an upper and a lower limit when specifying a return code range.

Lower limit

Specify the lower limit of the value range. You can specify 0 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank.

You can use negative return codes as judgment values by converting them to unsigned integers. For example, -1 is handled as 4,294,967,295 in Windows, and as 255 in UNIX. However, because negative return codes span a range from 2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295 when converted to unsigned integers, you cannot specify a range of return codes that includes 0.

Boundary conditions for lower limit

Select Greater than or equal to or Greater than. The default is Greater than or equal to.

If you select Greater than or equal to, the lower limit value is included in the range of judgment values. If you specify Greater than, the range of judgment values excludes the lower limit value.

Upper limit

Specify the upper limit of the value range. You can specify 0 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank.

You can use negative return codes as judgment values by converting them to unsigned integers. For example, -1 is handled as 4,294,967,295 in Windows, and as 255 in UNIX. However, because negative return codes span a range from 2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295 when converted to unsigned integers, you cannot specify a range of return codes that includes 0.

Boundary conditions for upper limit

Select Less than or equal to or Less than. The default is Less than or equal to.

If you select Less than or equal to, the upper limit value is included in the range of judgment values. If you specify Less than, the range of judgment values excludes the upper limit value.

(b) When the judgment type is File

The following figure shows the Definition page (with File selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒119: Definition page (with File selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Judgment type

Select File.

Condition

Select whether to use the file for judgment. You can select File exists or File does not exist. The default is File exists.

File name

Specify the name of the file to be used for judgment. Use a character string of up to 260 bytes. The default is a blank.

(c) When the judgment type is Variable (char.)

The following figure shows the Definition page (with Variable (char.) selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒120: Definition page (with Variable (char.) selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Judgment type

Select Variable (char.).

Variable

Specify the variable name that has been set in Passing Info in a root jobnet or a preceding job. Specify the variable name by using a character string of no more than 64 bytes in the format of ?AJS2xxxxx?. The xxxxx portion can consist of upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and periods (.). The default is a blank.

Condition

Select a judgment condition. The default is Var. value = judgment value..

If you have specified Variable (char.) in Judgment type, you can select any of the following conditions. Note that alphabetic characters are case sensitive when a string is used for judgment.

Var. value = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is equal to the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value includes judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is at least partly equal to the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value not = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is not equal to the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value does not include judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable does not include the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value exists.

The condition is true if the value of a variable exists.

Var. value does not exists.

The condition is true if the value of a variable does not exist.

Judgment value

When you use a variable (char.) for judgment, specify the values for the judgment criterion by using a character string of 1 to 511 bytes. The default is a blank.

Cautionary note

In Judgment value, do not specify the return or tab stroke, or any machine-dependent characters. Doing so may prevent the specified information from being passed correctly when jobs are executed.

(d) When the judgment type is Variable (number)

The following figure shows the Definition page (with Variable (number) selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box. The information on the page differs depending on whether the judgment is based on a comparison with a specific value or a range of values.

Figure 12‒121: Definition page (with Variable (number) selected) in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Judgment type

Select Variable (number).

Variable

Specify a variable name that has been set in Passing Info in a root jobnet or a preceding job. Specify the variable name by using a character string of no more than 64 bytes in the format ?AJS2xxxxx?. The xxxxx portion can consist of upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and periods (.). The default is a blank.

Condition

Select a judgment condition. The default is Var. value > judgment value..

If you have specified Variable (number) in Judgment type, you can select any of the following conditions.

Var. value > judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is greater than the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value > or = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is equal to or greater than the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value < judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is smaller than the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value < or = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is equal to or smaller than the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is equal to the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value not = judgment value.

The condition is true if the value of a variable is not equal to the value specified in Judgment value.

Var. value within judgment value range.

The condition is true if the value is inside the range specified in Judgment value.

Var. value not within judgment value range.

The condition is true if the value is outside the range specified in Judgment value.

Judgment value

For judgment based on a specific variable value

Specify a reference value against which to judge the variable value. You can specify an unsigned integer from 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank.

For judgment based on a range of variable values

Define a reference range by entering an upper and a lower reference value. You must specify both an upper and a lower limit when specifying a value range.

Lower limit

Specify the lower limit of the value range. You can specify an unsigned integer from 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank.

Boundary conditions for lower limit

Select Greater than or equal to or Greater than. The default is Greater than or equal to.

If you select Greater than or equal to, the lower limit value is included in the range of judgment values. If you specify Greater than, the range of judgment values excludes the lower limit value.

Upper limit

Specify the upper limit of the value range. You can specify an unsigned integer from 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank.

Boundary conditions for upper limit

Select Less than or equal to or Less than. The default is Less than or equal to.

If you select Less than or equal to, the upper limit value is included in the range of judgment values. If you specify Less than, the range of judgment values excludes the upper limit value.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒122: Attributes page in the Defile Details - [Judgment Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

12.4.12 Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box defines the details of a flexible job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒123: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Flexible-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Destination / Broadcast agent

Specify the host name, IP address, or DNS name of the destination to which a flexible job execution request will be sent. Use a character string of no more than 128 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank. Information about jp1hosts or jp1hosts2 is not referenced.

When broadcasting is used, the destination of the execution request is a broadcast agent.

When a load balancer is used without broadcasting, the destination of the execution request is the load balancer.

When neither broadcasting nor a load balancer is used, the destination of the execution request is the agent host on which the flexible job is to be executed.

Broadcast execution

Specify whether to run a flexible job by using broadcast execution. To run a flexible job by using broadcast execution, select Execute. By default, Execute is not selected.

If you select Execute, you can also specify whether to use sync mode or async mode. In sync mode, a job finishes and processing for the next job starts when execution of the broadcast job finishes on all of the destination agents. In async mode, a job finishes and processing for the next job starts when execution requests are sent to all of the destination agents. The default setting is Sync.

Relay agent

Specify whether to use a relay agent. Select the Relay check box to use the relay agent. The check box is not selected by default.

If the OS of the manager host is not Windows or Linux, select the Relay check box. Flexible jobs must be relayed via a relay agent on which the ajsatsetup command is used to set up the function that requests the flexible job.

If you select the Relay check box, specify the name of the execution agent or execution agent group used to relay a flexible job. Use a character string of no more than 255 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Note that relay agents are subject to execution agent restriction. However, because this item is displayed as a text box rather than a combo box, you cannot select the execution agent that is set in the execution agent profile. In addition, when you click the OK button, the system does not check whether the value specified for this item is set in the execution agent profile.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒124: Definition page in the Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

File name

Specify the name of a file on the agent host to be run. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can specify an absolute path name. You can specify just the name of the file to be executed if the file is located on a path specified in the PATH environment variable.

You can also use a macro variable. If the file name contains any blanks, they must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").

Specify a parameter in Parameters, not in File name.

Parameters

Specify job parameters. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. You can also use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Environment variables

The environment variables that are set at the time of job execution, system environment variables, or the environment variables that are set for the local login script of the execution user (OS user) are valid during job execution. You can add new variables to the environment for job execution. Use a character string of up to 10,240 bytes as the name of a new environment variable. You can also use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

For the environment variables that are set at the time of job execution, see 1.4.2 Environment variables set when a job is executed from JP1/AJS3 in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

For notes on defining environment variables, see A. Notes on Defining Environment Variables and an Environment Variable File in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the flexible job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the flexible job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Normal if specified file exists

When the execution of the job process on the destination agent is finished, the flexible job ends normally if the agent host contains the file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name. You can specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

Normal if file was updated

The flexible job ends normally if the agent host file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list is updated during the time that the job process is being executed on the destination agent. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name. You can specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

The system uses the update time to determine whether a file was updated. When a job is executed in Linux, because the system truncates the timestamp to the second when making this determination, it might not recognize that a file has been updated when there is less than one second between updates. In this case, the job will end abnormally.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In Linux, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

Cautionary note

If Normal if specified file exists or Normal if file was updated is selected, the return code of a flexible job is set to either of the following values rather than the return code of the executed program:

Normal end: 0

Abnormal end: 1

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the executable file ends in an error.

You can select this item if Judgment by threshold is selected for Rule.

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits before retrying a job when an error occurs in an executable file. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒125: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Flexible Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is a blank. If you set a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following.

User who registered

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who registered the job. The system executes the job under the converted OS user account.

User who owns

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who owns the job. The system executes the job under the converted user account.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.13 Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box defines the details of an HTTP connection Job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒126: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is HTTP-Connection-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of HTTP connection job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If you define the unit under a remote jobnet, this item is displayed with a text box.

If you define the unit not under a remote jobnet, this item is displayed with a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒127: Definition page in the Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box

Conn. configuration file name

Specify a name of the connection configuration file on the agent host, in which the connection information for HTTP connection is defined, by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

You cannot omit this item.

If the connection configuration file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

Request type

Select the request type (HTTP method) for using HTTP communication. The default is GET. You can select the following request types:

GET

POST

PUT

DELETE

Transmission information file

Select whether to use extended mode. To use extended mode, select Extended mode.

If extended mode is not used, the contents of the transmission information file name are sent as an HTTP request.

If extended mode is used, the contents of both the URL parameter and message body are sent as an HTTP request.

This item is displayed if the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is 12-50 or later.

Trans. info. file name

Specify this item if the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - Agent are 12-10 or earlier, or if extended mode is not used. Specify a name of the transmission information file, on the agent host, in which the information to be sent as an HTTP request is defined, by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If you leave this field blank, empty request information will be sent.

If the transmission information file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

URL parameter

Specify this item if extended mode is used when the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - Agent are 12-50 or later. Specify the name of the transmission information file (URL parameter) on the agent host by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes. In this file, the information to be sent as the URL parameter for an HTTP request is defined.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If you leave this field blank, empty request information will be sent.

If the transmission information file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

This item is displayed if the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is 12-50 or later.

Message body

Specify this item if extended mode is used when the versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - Agent are 12-50 or later. Specify the name of the transmission information file (Message body) on the agent host by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes. In this file, the information to be sent as the Message body for an HTTP request is defined.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If you leave this field blank, empty request information will be sent.

If the transmission information file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

This item is displayed if the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is 12-50 or later.

Status file name

Specify a name of the status file, which is created on the agent host for storing the HTTP status information included in an HTTP response, by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

You cannot omit this item.

How to store received data

Specify whether to output an HTTP header and an HTTP body, both of which are received as an HTTP response, to separate files or the same file. The default is Output header/body to another file. You can select one of the following methods for storing received data:

Output header/body to another file

The header of the received data is written in the received header file. The body is written in the received body file.

Output header/body to the same file

The received data, including the header and body, is written to the received header file only.

Received header file name

Specify a name of the received header file, which is created on the agent host to store the HTTP header information that is received as an HTTP response, by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

You cannot omit this item.

If the received header file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

Received body file name

Specify a name of the received body file, which is created on the agent host to store the HTTP body information that is received as an HTTP response, by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes.

You can specify an absolute path name.

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If the received body file name contains double quotation marks (") or #, use a cast character (#) to specify them. For example, specify #" for ", and specify ## for #.

You cannot omit Received body file name if Output header/body to another file is selected for How to store received data. If Output header/body to the same file is selected, the value specified for Received body file name is ignored.

Priority

Select the priority of job execution. You can set None or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None.

When None is selected, the priority depends on the definition of the upper-level jobnet. If None is selected here when None is specified for all upper-level jobnets up to the highest-level jobnet, the priority value specified for the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is assumed. If the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is not set, 1 is assumed. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY, see 20.4.2(108) DEFAULTPRIORITY in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Note that, when the target host is a Linux machine, if a user who is not logged in as a superuser attempts to execute the jobs resulting from mapping and 4 or 5 is set, a runtime privilege error occurs.

The following gives the values you can specify, and their meanings.

Table 12‒44: Specifiable values and execution priority

Specifiable values

In Linux

In Windows

1

nice value +20

Lower than interactive processing

2

nice value +10

Lower than interactive processing

3

nice value

Equal to interactive processing

4

nice value -10

Higher than interactive processing

5

nice value -20

Higher than interactive processing

Supplementary note

Windows provides three priority stages. Specify the following three priority classes to start a job process.

If the specified value is 1 or 2, the job process runs when the system is idle. (Specify IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 3, the job process runs as a general one. (Specify NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

If the specified value is 4 or 5, the job process runs before the thread of the process to which you assigned the above priority classes. (Specify HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS which Windows stipulates.)

In Linux, JP1/AJS3 service's nice value used when jajs_spmd is executed is used as the default (base) nice value. When the JP1/AJS3 service's nice value has not been set, 20 is assumed as the nice value.

For example, when the priority setting is 1 and the nice value is 20, the priority value is calculated as shown below.

39 20 (initial value) + 20 (increment)

If the resulting value is not within the possible nice value range (0-39), the maximum value is 39 and the minimum value is 0.

Standard output

Specify the name of the standard output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. We recommend specifying a file name by using an absolute path. If you specify a file name by using a relative path and Windows is used as the OS for executing an HTTP connection job, the path is relative to the work directory name when the agent process, which is set for the agent environment settings, is executed. If Linux is used as the OS for executing an HTTP connection job, the path is relative to the home directory of the execution user. If the home directory is not defined, the path is relative to "/ (root)".

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

If you specify $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$, the standard output file is a temporary file.

For notes on defining the standard output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Standard error

Specify the name of the standard error output file on the agent host used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. We recommend specifying a file name by using an absolute path. If you specify a file name by using a relative path and Windows is used as the OS for executing an HTTP connection job, the path is relative to the work directory name when the agent process, which is set for the agent environment settings, is executed. If Linux is used as the OS for executing an HTTP connection job, the path is relative to the home directory of the execution user. If the home directory is not defined, the path is relative to "/ (root)".

You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

For notes on defining the standard error output file name, see 7.10.1 Notes on the standard output file and standard error output file in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Return code specification

Specify a job return code for each HTTP status code. For HTTP status codes for which no return codes are specified, the default return codes are specified.

This item is displayed if the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is 12-50 or later.

Add button

When you click the Add button, the Return Code Specification dialog box opens. Specify a return code for each HTTP status code by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes. The return code specified in the Return Code Specification dialog box is added to the list in the Return code specification area.

For details, see 12.4.14 Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification] dialog box.

Edit button

When you select a return code in the list and click the Edit button, the Return Code Specification dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you can edit the specification of the return code associated with an HTTP status code. The return code edited by using the Return Code Specification dialog box is added to the list.

For details, see 12.4.14 Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification] dialog box.

Delete button

When you select a return code in the list and click the Delete button, the specification of the selected return code is deleted.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the HTTP connection job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the HTTP connection job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Normal if specified file exists

Ends normally the HTTP connection job if the agent host contains the file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name. You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

Normal if file was updated

Ends normally the HTTP connection job if the agent host's file specified in the File name text box that appears below the Rule drop-down list is updated within the period from the job start to the job end. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can specify an absolute path name. You can also specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In Linux, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the executable file ends in an error.

You can select this item if Judgment by threshold is selected for Rule.

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits between the error occurring and retrying the job. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

User name

Specify the OS user name of JP1/AJS3 - Agent that executes the job. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field. The default is a blank.

You must map this user name to User who registered or User who owns in Executed by. However, if the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, you must map this user name to a fixed user regardless of the contents of the Executed by field.

By default, the job is executed under the primary user name in the user mapping. For details about the user mapping, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

For a job executed on a Windows host, information regarding the OS user is limited by the authority of the OS user. The specified OS user is used to access the files from the HTTP connection job.

If you restrict access permission for the execution user to the local server user, specify the OS user name using the host-name\user-name format.

Important

Do not specify, as the file name, a path beginning with a network drive name. Specify a path beginning with a computer name such as \\computer-name\shared-folder\execution-file-name. Do not use a path beginning with a network drive name.

You can specify only text files in the Detailed Definition - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box.

For details about characters that can be used for data contained in the connection configuration file or transmission information file, see the C. Files Used for HTTP Connection Jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒128: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [HTTP Connection Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

If you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time (in minutes) required for job execution. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 1,440.

For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who registered the job. The system executes the job under the converted OS user account.

User who owns

Performs user mapping for the JP1 user who owns the job. The system executes the job under the converted user account.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.14 Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification] dialog box

Use the Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification] dialog box to define a return code for each HTTP status code. The following figure shows this dialog box.

Figure 12‒129: Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Return code specification

Use the two text boxes to specify a job return code for each HTTP status code by using a character string of no more than 511 bytes. By default, the text boxes are blank. For a job return code specification, definition data is stored in job-return-code:HTTP-status-code format. For job-return-code, you can specify a value in the range from 0 to 9. For HTTP-status-code, you can specify a value in the range from 100 to 999. For one job return code, multiple HTTP status codes can be specified in comma-separated list format. Note, however, that only one job return code can be specified for one HTTP status code.

For details about the return code of a job, see 7.10.3 Checking the return code of a job in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Clicking the OK button adds the specified text to the list.

12.4.15 Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box defines the details of monitoring JP1 event reception.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒130: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Receive-JP1-Event.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task of monitoring JP1 event reception. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. Clicking the Pass Info button displays the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event ]- [Passing Information] dialog box. For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box.

Figure 12‒131: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Event ID

Specify the event ID in hexadecimal notation. The format is basic-code:extended-code. The event ID is one of the basic attributes of a JP1 event. For the values that can be specified, see the chapter on JP1 events in the JP1/Base User's Guide.

You can specify a value from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF in both the basic code and the extended code. The default is a blank. By default, the system monitors all JP1 events.

Event sender information

Specify conditions for basic JP1 event information.

User name

Enter the name of the user who issues the event. You can use a regular expression to specify the user name. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation. The default is a blank.

When UNIX is used as the platform for receiving JP1 events or when an extended regular expression is used in Windows, you can enclose the name in parentheses, to inherit it as extracted data.

Group name

Enter the name of the group that issues the event. You can use a regular expression to specify the group name. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation. The default is a blank.

When UNIX is used as the platform for receiving JP1 events or when an extended regular expression is used in Windows, you can enclose the name in parentheses, to inherit it as extracted data.

Host name

Enter the name of the host that issues the event, which is the same as the name of the server that issues the event. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. For event server names, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

You can use a regular expression to specify the host name. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

When UNIX is used as the platform for receiving JP1 events or when an extended regular expression is used in Windows, you can enclose the name in parentheses, to inherit it as extracted data.

IP address

Enter the IP address of the host that issues the event. Do not specify an IP address in IPv6 format. You can set up to four IP addresses. Use a character string of up to 3 bytes. The default is a blank.

The following gives an example of the specification format.

Example

XXX.YYY.xxx.yyy

For each of XXX, YYY, xxx and yyy, you can set 0 to 255.

Other basic information

If conditions on the other basic information are set by a command for the JP1 event, this item appears.

If you click Details button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details] dialog box appears. For details, see 12.4.16 Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details] dialog box.

Message

Enter a message. Use a character string of up to 1,024 bytes. You can use a regular expression to specify message information. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation.

When UNIX is used as the platform for receiving JP1 events or when an extended regular expression is used in Windows, you can enclose the message in parentheses, to inherit it as extracted data.

The default is a blank.

Event details

Enter event details. You can use a character string of up to 1,024 bytes. You can use a regular expression to specify event details. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation.

When UNIX is used as the platform for receiving JP1 events or when an extended regular expression is used in Windows, you can enclose the message in parentheses, to inherit it as extracted data.

The default is a blank.

Extended attribute

Specify conditions for extended JP1 event information.

Extended attribute

If you click the Set button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute] dialog box appears. Specify the event level and extended attributes. If you select Apply, the settings become valid.

For details, see 12.4.17 Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute] dialog box.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

End judgment

You can select one of the following rules for end judgment. The default is a blank. The system assumes Always normal if you do not specify anything for this item. If you specify Always normal, this item will appear blank.

Blank

Assumes Always normal.

Always normal

Always terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception normally.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception abnormally.

Normal if message matches

If the message monitored for reception matches the contents of the specified file, this option terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception normally.

Abnormal if message matches

If the message monitored for reception matches the contents of the specified file, this option terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception abnormally.

Normal if details match

If the detail information monitored for reception matches the contents of the specified file, this option terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception normally.

Abnormal if details match

If the detail information monitored for reception matches the contents of the specified file, this option terminates the task for monitoring JP1 event reception abnormally.

For File name, specify the name of a file containing messages and detail information. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank. This item appears only when you select Normal if message matches, Abnormal if message matches, Normal if details match or Abnormal if details match.

Find event before exec.

Specify whether to monitor the receptions of JP1 events immediately after a job for monitoring JP1 event reception is registered for execution (before UP1 event monitoring starts). Those JP1 events occurred until the job for monitoring JP1 event reception was registered for execution. The default is No.

No

Monitors the receptions of only the JP1 events that occurred immediately after the job for monitoring JP1 event reception was registered for execution. The system does not monitor the JP1 events that occurred before start of execution.

Yes

Of the JP1 events that occurred before the job for monitoring JP1 event reception was registered for execution, monitors the JP1 events that occurred before the specified time. This monitoring occurs immediately after the job for monitoring JP1 event reception is registered for execution (before JP1 event monitoring starts). Specify the monitoring time in minutes. You can specify 1 to 720. The default is 10. If you specify Yes, Event ID is mandatory.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box.

Figure 12‒132: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Timeout period

Indicates whether to set a timeout period of job. If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can specify 1 to 1,440. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the JP1 event reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The user type for the event job is executed by the user authority activating JP1/AJS3.

12.4.16 Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details] dialog box references the reception monitoring condition in other basic information. The following figure shows this dialog box.

Figure 12‒133: Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Event sender information

Displays conditions on basic information defined by a command. You cannot define this here.

12.4.17 Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute] dialog box specifies the event level and extended attributes. The following figure shows this dialog box.

Figure 12‒134: Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Extended attribute

Specify an extended attribute of the JP1 event.

Event level

Specify the severity level of JP events subject to reception monitoring. You can select one of the following items.

Emergency

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Emergency.

Alert

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Alert.

Critical

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Critical.

Error

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Error.

Warning

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Warning.

Notice

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Notice.

Information

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Information.

Debug

Select this for monitoring JP1 events that severity level is Debug.

Arbitrary extended attribute

If a user-defined extended attribute is specified for a JP1 event subject to reception monitoring, specify an arbitrary extended attribute for the user. The default is a blank.

For an arbitrary extended attribute for the user, defined data is stored in the format of evwfr=extended-attribute-name:"value";.

You can set multiple extended attributes within 2,048 bytes in the evwfr=extended-attribute-name:"value"; format.

In the Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended attribute] dialog box, specify only extended-attribute-name and "value";. Specify extended-attribute-name.

Use a character string of up to 32 bytes consisting of uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and underscores (_). The character string must begin with an uppercase alphabetic character.

Specify "value" using any character string. The total number of bytes including the remaining part of the complete format must not exceed 2,048. You can use a regular expression. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide. For details about regular expressions for UNIX, see your UNIX documentation. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead.

If you click the Add button, this item is added to the list.

12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box specifies information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. The event-job-icon-name varies with the dialog box in which you click the Pass Info button.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box.

Figure 12‒135: Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Passing information

Specifies the passing information. The default is blank. In the passing information, definition information is represented in the format jpoif=macro-variable-name:value;. A macro variable name is stored as a character string of no more than 64 bytes in the format ?AJS2xxxxx?. You can specify multiple pieces of passing information in the poif=macro-variable-name:value; format, to a maximum of 2,048 bytes.

In the Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box, you can specify the xxxxx portion and value, omitting ?AJS2 and ?:.

For the xxxxx portion, use a character string consisting of upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and periods (.).

For details of information you can specify for value, see B. Information Passed by Event Jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

If you click the Add button, this item is added to the list.

Supplementary note

If you have defined multiple pieces of inherited information in the same macro variable name, the first defined information is inherited.

12.4.19 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box defines the details on monitoring a file.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒136: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Monitoring-Files.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task for monitoring a file. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files]- [Passing Information] dialog box appears. For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box.

Figure 12‒137: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Monitoring file

Enter the name of the file you want to monitor. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. You must specify this item. The default is a blank.

You can specify the file name using either an absolute path name or wildcard characters consisting of an absolute path name and a wildcard (*).

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

To specify a file over a network, use a UNC path to specify the file name. A path beginning with a network drive name cannot be specified.

Monitoring options

Select conditions for monitoring a file. The default is Create. You can select the following conditions:

Create

Monitors whether a new file has been created. With Create selected, you can choose either Establish at file creation or Establish for existing files as the monitoring conditions. Choosing Establish for existing files starts the file monitoring job and, when there is already a file to be monitored, terminates the file monitoring job normally. If, however, the file to be monitored is busy, the file monitoring job continues its monitoring operation.

The default is Establish at file creation.

Delete

Monitors whether the file has been deleted.

Change size

Monitors whether the file has been resized. You cannot select this item together with Final time write.

Final time write

Monitors whether the last write time for the file has been changed. You cannot set this item together with Change size.

Monitoring interval

Specify a time interval to monitor the file. You can set 1 to 600 seconds. However, if you use wildcard characters to specify the target file, you can set 10 to 600 seconds. The default is a blank, meaning that the interval is 60 seconds. If you specify 60 for this item, the field will appear blank.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box.

Figure 12‒138: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the file monitoring job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The user type for the event job is executed by the user authority activating JP1/AJS3.

12.4.20 Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box defines the details on monitoring email reception.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒139: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Receive-Mail.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task of monitoring email reception. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears. For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box.

Figure 12‒140: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

List of senders

Specify an email sender to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. However, if the execution host of the email reception monitoring job is Windows, use no more than 255 characters to specify a sender. The maximum number of bytes that can be specified is 256, but if you specify 256 or more characters, the email reception monitoring conditions are not met.

Specify a character string, and then click the Add button to add the sender to the list. You can add up to 20 senders to the list. If you add no senders, the system monitors the mail issued by all the senders. To monitor email reception, you must set one or more conditions for List of senders, List of subjects or List of message texts. The default is a blank.

List of subjects

Enter an email subject by using a character string of up to 256 bytes. However, if the execution host of the email reception monitoring job is Windows, use no more than 253 characters to specify an email subject. The maximum number of bytes that can be specified is 256, but if you specify 254 or more characters, the email reception monitoring conditions are not met.

Specify a character string, and then click the Add button to add the subject to the list. You can add up to 20 subjects to the list. If you add no subjects, the system monitors all the subjects. To monitor email reception, you must set one or more conditions for List of senders, List of subjects or List of message texts. The default is a blank.

List of message texts

Clicking the Add button displays the dialog box for entering the text of mail to be monitored. Specify a message using a character string of up to 512 bytes. Clicking the OK button adds the specified text to the list. You can add up to 20 messages to the list. If you do not add any messages, the system monitors all of the messages. To monitor email reception, you must set one or more conditions for List of senders, List of subjects or List of message texts. The default is a blank.

A line feed entered in the text is not correctly displayed in the text list.

Cautionary note

Do not enter a line feed in the text if a UNIX host monitors email reception. A line feed specified in the text causes an inconsistency with the email reception monitoring conditions. This makes the system to remain in the email reception monitoring status.

Option after receive

Specify how to process received email.

Option after receive

If you click the Set button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box appears. Set option information to define how to handle received email. If you select Apply, the settings become valid.

The dialog box used when PC is selected in Platform is different from that used when UNIX is selected.

For details, see 12.4.21 Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box.

Platform

Specify the type of platform for monitoring the reception of emails. Depending on the selected platform, the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box to be displayed differs.

The following options are available. The default selection is PC.

PC

Runs the system in the Windows environment.

UNIX

Runs the system in the UNIX environment.

Profile name

You must specify this if you have selected PC in Platform. This item does not appear if you have selected UNIX.

Profile name

Specify a profile name to be used to log in to the email service. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box.

Figure 12‒141: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status to place the event job into after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the email reception monitoring job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The user type for the event job is executed by the user authority activating JP1/AJS3.

12.4.21 Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box specifies how to process received email. The displayed items in the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box vary with the platform for monitoring email reception.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box (for PC).

Figure 12‒142: Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box (for PC)

The following explains the displayed items.

Option after receive

Specify an option for received email.

Save file

Specify how to process received email.

Message text file

Enter the full path of the destination where you want to save received messages. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. Received messages are saved as a text-format file. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

Folder for saving attached file

Enter the full path of the folder where you want to save files attached to received email. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear to set the currently open folder.

List file

Enter the full path of the destination where you want to save a list of the files attached to received email. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box (for UNIX).

Figure 12‒143: Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive] dialog box (for UNIX)

The following explains the displayed items.

Option after receive

Specify an option for received email.

Save mail

Select whether to save email. You can select Save or Do not save. The default is Save.

List received mail

Specify the name of the file where you want to save a list of received email. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

12.4.22 Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box (compatible with version 7)

The Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box defines the details for monitoring message queue reception.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒144: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Receive-MQ-Message.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name host to be assigned the task for monitoring message queue reception. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears.

For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒145: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Monitoring options

Specify conditions for monitoring messages received in the message queue.

Correlation ID

Specify the correlation ID of the message to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 24 bytes.

You must specify this item. You can use the uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). The default is a blank.

Message ID

Specify the message ID of the message to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 24 bytes. You can use the uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). The default is a blank.

Execution environment

Specify an operating environment for monitoring message queue reception.

Message input queue

Specify the name of the queue you want to monitor for message reception. Use an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. You must specify this item. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string. To use MQSeries linkage, specify the default queue name for the queue manager.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

Model queue

Specify the model queue name of the queue you want to monitor for message reception. Use an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string. To use MQSeries linkage, specify the default queue name for the queue manager.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

Message storage file

Specify the name of the file where you want to store received messages. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

You must use the full path name when specifying a file name.

A stored file is not automatically deleted. Delete an unnecessary file.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒146: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MQ message job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The system uses the user authority activating JP1/AJS3 to execute the event job.

12.4.23 Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box (compatible with version 7)

The Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box defines the details on monitoring MSMQ reception.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒147: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Receive-MSMQ-Message.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task of monitoring MSMQ reception. Use a character string of 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears.

For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒148: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Reception queue

Specify an input queue for monitoring messages.

Path name

Specify the path name of the queue you want to monitor for message input. Use a character string of up to 259 bytes. You must specify this item. The default is a blank.

Reception monitoring condition

Specify conditions for monitoring messages.

Correlation ID

Specify the correlation ID of the message to be monitored. You must specify this item. The default is a blank. You can use the uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9).

Message label

Specify the message label of the message to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 249 bytes. The default is a blank.

Application information

Specify application information for the message to be monitored. Use a hexadecimal string. The default is a blank. You can set 0 to FFFFFFFF.

Message storage file

If you want to save messages that meet conditions, specify the name of the file where you want to save the messages. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

You must use the full path name when specifying a file name.

The stored file is not automatically deleted; delete any unnecessary files.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒149: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Indicates whether to set a timeout period of job. Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the receive MSMQ message job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The system uses the user authority activating JP1/AJS3 to execute the event job.

12.4.24 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box defines the details on monitoring a log file.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒150: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Monitoring-Log-Files.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task to monitor a log file. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears. For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box.

Figure 12‒151: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

File to be monitored

Specify the name of the log file to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. You must specify this item.

If you click the Add button, this item is added to the list. You can add up to 8 senders to the list. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

Data to be trapped

Data to be trapped means a character string that is to be monitored by a log file monitoring job. You must specify this item.

You can specify multiple pieces of data to be trapped.

If a character string that matches the defined conditions is written in a log file, the conditions for a log file monitoring job is established.

Specification method

In the Data to be trapped field in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box, specify the following items.

Drop-down list

Select AND or OR conditions.

Select OR to create new conditions. Select AND to add more conditions to the defined conditions.

The default is AND.

Check box

Use the check box to select NOT conditions.

Clear the Not check box to monitor the records that contain the character string specified in the text field. Select the Not check box to monitor the records that do not contain the character string specified in the text field.

By default, the check box is not selected.

Text field

Specify the data to be trapped in a regular expression.

The default is a blank.

For details about regular expressions in Windows, see the chapter describing installation and setup in the JP1/Base User's Guide.

For details about regular expressions in UNIX, see your UNIX documentation.

List

A list of character strings you added in the text field are displayed as described below. The default is a blank.

- The start defined conditions or defined conditions for which you have set OR conditions are displayed.

- Defined conditions for which you have set AND conditions are displayed with an indent added.

- Conditions defined with multiple AND conditions are displayed so that the first (leftmost) condition is followed by AND conditions each of which is on an indented line.

Add button

If you click the Add button, the data entered in the text field is added to the list.

Insert button

If you select data in the list and then click the Insert button, the data entered in the text field is inserted before the data selected in the list.

Edit button

If you select data in the list and then click the Edit button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box opens.

For details, see 12.4.25 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box.

Delete button

If you select data in the list and then click the Delete button, the data selected in the list is deleted.

Format used to store the data to be trapped

Information specified in the Data to be trapped field is stored as defined data in the following format:

lftpd=[!]"data-to-be-trapped"[:[!]"data-to-be-trapped-2"...];[lftpd=...]

A maximum of 2,048 bytes can be stored in the above format.

If you select the Not check box,! is added before the data to be trapped.

For the initial defined conditions displayed in the list, the specification of AND/OR conditions is invalid. Those conditions are always created as defined data beginning with lftpd=.

Defined data for which you have selected AND conditions consists of lftpd=[!]"data-to-be-trapped":[!]"data-2-to-be trapped"...;, and so on.

Defined data for which you have selected OR conditions is created in a new format beginning with lftpd=.

Data to be trapped that is displayed in the list is enclosed in double quotation marks so that it is stored in the defined data in "data-to-be-trapped" format.

Data lines except log

Data other than log information means a character string that is not to be monitored by a log file monitoring job.

You can specify multiple pieces of data.

If a character string that matches the defined conditions is written in a log file, the conditions for a log file monitoring job is not established because this character string is not subject to monitoring.

Specification method

In the Data lines except log field in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box, specify the following items.

Drop-down list

Select AND or OR conditions.

Select OR to create new conditions. Select AND to add more conditions to the defined conditions.

The default is AND.

Check box

Use the check box to select NOT conditions.

Clear the Not check box not to monitor the records that contain the character string specified in the text field. Select the Not check box not to monitor the records that do not contain the character string specified in the text field.

By default, the check box is not selected.

Text field

Specify the data other than log information in a regular expression.

The default is a blank.

For details about regular expressions in Windows, see the chapter describing installation and setup in the JP1/Base User's Guide.

For details about regular expressions in UNIX, see your UNIX documentation.

List

A list of character strings you added in the text field are displayed as described below. The default is a blank.

- The start defined conditions or defined conditions for which you have set OR conditions are displayed.

- Defined conditions for which you have set AND conditions are displayed with an indent added.

- Conditions defined with multiple AND conditions are displayed so that the first (leftmost) condition is followed by AND conditions each of which is on an indented line.

Add button

If you click the Add button, the data entered in the text field is added to the list.

Insert button

If you select data in the list and then click the Insert button, the data entered in the text field is inserted before the data selected in the list.

Edit button

If you select data in the list and then click the Edit button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box opens.

For details, see 12.4.25 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box.

Delete button

If you select data in the list and then click the Delete button, the data selected in the list is deleted.

Format used to store data other than log information

Information specified in the Data lines except log field is stored as defined data in the following format:

lfmks=[!]"data-other-than-log-information"[:[!]"data-other-than-log-information-2"...];[lfmks-...]

A maximum of 1,024 bytes can be stored in the above format.

If you select the Not check box,! is added before the data other than log information.

For the initial defined conditions displayed in the list, the specification of AND/OR conditions is invalid. Those conditions are always created as defined data beginning with lfmks=.

Defined data for which you have selected AND conditions consists of lfmks=[!]"data-other-than-log-information":[!]"data-other-than-log-information-2"...;, and so on.

Defined data for which you have selected OR conditions is created in a new format beginning with lfmks=.

Data other than log information that is displayed in the list is enclosed in double quotation marks so that it is stored in the defined data in "data-other-than-log-information" format.

Log file behavior

Select an output format for log file data to be acquired.

Log file behavior

If you click the Set button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log file behavior] dialog box appears. Set an output format for the log file. If you select Apply, the settings become valid.

For details, see 12.4.26 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior] dialog box.

Supplementary note

In the File to be monitored section, you can specify blanks and symbols. Note, however, that you must specify a backslash (\) before a special character such as double quotation marks (") to use them as normal characters.

Example:

\log\"file

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box.

Figure 12‒152: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

You cannot specify this item if you defined the log file monitoring job in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The user type for the event job is executed by the user authority activating JP1/AJS3.

12.4.25 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box edits data to be acquired, and data lines excluding log information.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box.

Figure 12‒153: Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Select AND and OR conditions in the dropdown list, and Not conditions in the check box. Use the text field to change the data to be acquired.

12.4.26 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior] dialog box sets a log file output format.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior] dialog box.

Figure 12‒154: Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Log file behavior

Define log file behavior.

Output format

Select a log file output format. The default is a blank. The system defaults to SEQ. If you specify SEQ for this item, the field will appear blank.

You can select one of the following items:

Blank

Assumes SEQ. Log data is output to the specified file in a sequential file format.

SEQ

Outputs log data to the specified file in a sequential file format. If the name of the log file to be monitored is changed, the system monitors the log file with the new name.

When the execution host is Windows, you cannot change the name of the log file to be monitored or delete the log file during monitoring.

When the execution host is UNIX and the name of the log file to be monitored is changed, the system monitors the log file with the new name. The system does not monitor the log file with the old name.

SEQ2

Outputs log data to the specified file in a sequential file format. If the name of the log file to be monitored is changed, the system monitors both the log file with the old name and the log file with the new name. If you need to change the file name twice, perform the second file name change after the length of time specified in Monitoring interval in Monitoring options has elapsed after you change the file name for the first time. If you change the file name a second time before this time has elapsed, the first file name change is not applied. Note that SEQ2 is available when the execution host is Windows, JP1/Base is version 08-10 or later, and JP1/AJS is version 08-00 or later.

WRAP1

Outputs log data to the specified file in one wraparound format (existing data is overwritten starting from the beginning of the file when the end of the file is reached).

WRAP2

Outputs log data to the specified file in a different wraparound format (all existing data is erased completely and then new data is written when the end of the file is reached). WRAP2 is not applicable when a file is deleted or when a file name is changed before a new one is created.

Record format

Select a record format for log data to be trapped. The default is Variable length. You can select one of the following items:

Variable length

Specify the line end character string of 3 or 4 bytes in the format of 'arbitrary-character-string'. The default is a blank. In the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log file behavior] dialog box, specify arbitrary-character-string of 1 or 2 bytes. The system defaults to \n.

Fixed length

Specify a record length. You can specify 1 to 9,999,999. The default is a blank. If you have selected Fixed length, you must specify a record length. If you do not specify a record length, Variable length defaults to \n as the line end character.

Header

Select a header format for a log file to be trapped. The default is Header lines. You can select one of the following items:

Header lines

If the log file to be trapped has a header, specify the number of header lines. You can specify 0 to 99,999. The default is a blank.

Size

If the log file to be trapped contains a header that cannot be set as the number of lines, specify a header size. You can specify 0 to 9,999,999. The default is a blank.

Monitoring options

Specify option information to monitor a log file.

Monitoring interval:

Specify a time interval in units of seconds to monitor a log file. You can specify 1 to 86,400. The default is a blank. The system defaults to 10.

Input from first data

Select whether to input a log file from the first data when monitoring starts. By default, this item is not selected.

Error when file does not exist

Select whether to terminate log file monitoring abnormally if the specified log file is not found when it is trapped. If you do not select this item, the log file is opened repeatedly until it is created. Then, the system starts to monitor the log file. By default, this item is not selected.

Event data length

Specify the number of bytes in the first event data in the log file. You can specify 2 to 512. The default is a blank. The system defaults to 512 bytes. The end character of a line is changed to the end symbol, \0. The number of bytes in the first event data includes \0.

12.4.27 Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box defines the details on monitoring Windows event logs.

Only the Windows host monitors Windows event logs.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒155: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Monitoring-Event-Log.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task of monitoring Windows event logs. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears.

For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box.

Figure 12‒156: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Log type

Select the type of Windows logs. The default is System. You can select the following items.

System

Monitors system logs.

Security

Monitors security logs.

Application

Monitors application logs.

DNS Server

Monitors DNS Server logs.

Directory Service

Monitors Directory Service logs.

File Replication Service

Monitors File Replication Service logs.

Any log type

Monitors the type of log specified in the combo box.

The list in the combo box contains the following entries:

- Setup

- Internet Explorer

- Key Management Service

- HardwareEvents

You can also directly enter a character string into the combo box.

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later. However, this item is unavailable if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is earlier than 10-00.

Cautionary note:

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Event type

In the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box, you must select one or more event types. By default, all the items are selected. You can select the following event types:

Verbose#

Monitors verbose events.

Information

Monitors information events.

Warning

Monitors warning events.

Error

Monitors error events.

Critical#

Monitors critical events.

Success audit

Monitors success audit events.

Failure audit

Monitors failure audit events.

#

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later. However, this item is unavailable if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is earlier than 10-00.

Source

Specify the source of events to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank. If you select Not, the sources other than the specified one are monitored.

Category

Specify the category of events to be monitored. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank. If you select Not, the events in the event categories other than the specified one are monitored.

Cautionary note

If the system cannot identify the category of an event, the Windows event viewer displays Others. If you use the JP1/Base Windows event log trap function to convert the event to an JP1 event, however, None is assumed. For this item, therefore, specify None instead of Others. Even if you specify a character string of Others, no monitoring conditions are applied.

Event ID

Specify the event ID to be monitored.

You can set 0 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you select Not, the events having the event IDs other than the specified one are monitored.

Explanation

To monitor descriptions on a specified event, specify a character string to be used for comparison, using up to 1,024 bytes. The default is a blank. Use a regular expression to specify this item. For details about regular expressions for Windows, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box.

Figure 12‒157: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

This item is unavailable when the Windows event log monitoring job is defined in a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The system uses the user authority activating JP1/AJS3 to execute the event job.

12.4.28 Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box defines the details on execution interval control.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒158: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Interval-Control.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name to be assigned the task of controlling an execution interval. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. If the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, you can specify a macro variable instead. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you leave this text box blank, the system inherits the specification of the upper-level jobnet.

If an execution agent group for an upper-level jobnet has been specified, the system uses the execution agent group as the execution agent.

Because event jobs do not support an execution agent group, explicitly specify an execution agent name in Exec-agent. For details about the operation performed if an execution agent group is specified for an event job, see 7.6 Notes on using event jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

Pass Info button

Specify information to be inherited by the subsequent job or jobnet. If you click the Pass Info button, the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] - [Passing Information] dialog box appears. For more information, see 12.4.18 Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information] dialog box. This button is at the bottom of the dialog box.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒159: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Waiting time

Specify the wait time in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is 10 minutes. You cannot omit this item.

Expire right after starting

Specify whether to satisfy the start condition as soon as monitoring starts. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is only available when the interval control job is defined as a start condition (.CONDITION).

If you copy or move the interval control job to a jobnet other than .CONDITION, No is specified regardless of the setting in Expire right after starting, and this item becomes inactive.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒160: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Interval Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Status after close

If you select Yes for Set timeout period, select the status into which the event job is to be placed after the timeout period elapses. You can specify Killed, Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally. The default is Killed.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

This item is unavailable when the interval control job is defined as a start condition.

Owner

Even if you specify the owner, the owner will become invalid when the event job is executed.

JP1 resource group

Even if you specify the JP1 resource group, the JP1 resource group will become invalid when the event job is executed.

Executed by

Even if you specify the user who executes the job, the user will become invalid when the event job is executed. The system uses the user authority activating JP1/AJS3 to execute the event job.

12.4.29 Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box defines the details on sending a JP1 event.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒161: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Send-JP1-Event.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of sending a JP1 event. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box.

Figure 12‒162: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Event destination host

Specify the name of the host to which you want to send the event. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Event ID

Specify the ID of the event to be sent using a hexadecimal string in the format of basic-code. You can set 00000000 to 00001FFF, and 7FFF8000 to 7FFFFFFF. You must specify this item. The default is a blank.

Message

Specify an event message. Use a character string of up to 1,023 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Event level

Select the severity level of the JP1 event to be sent. The default is Notice. You can select the following items.

Emergency

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Emergency.

Alert

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Alert.

Critical

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Critical.

Error

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Error.

Warning

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Warning.

Notice

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Notice.

Information

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Information.

Debug

Select this for sending a JP1 event that severity level is Debug.

Check event arrivals

Specify whether to confirm arrival of JP1 events. You can select No or Yes. The default is No. When Yes is selected, whether a JP1 event has arrived is checked within 3 seconds of sending the JP1 event.

Check interval

Specify the arrival confirmation interval in seconds if a JP1 event does not arrive. You can specify this item when you select Yes for Check event arrivals. You can specify 3 to 600. The default is 10.

Check count

Specify the number of times of arrival confirmations are performed if a JP1 event does not arrive. You can specify this item if you select Yes for Check event arrivals. You can specify 0 to 999. The default is 0.

Extended attribute

Specify a user-defined extended attribute. The default is a blank. Defined data is stored if the extended attribute is in the format of evsfr=extended-attribute-name:"value";. The maximum length must be within 128 bytes.

In the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box, specify only extended-attribute-name and value.

Use a character string of up to 32 bytes consisting of uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and underscores (_). The character string must begin with an uppercase alphabetic character.

Specify value using any character string. The maximum length must not exceed 128 bytes. You can use a macro variable.

Platform

Select the platform on which you want to execute jobs. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

Supplementary notes

You can also use blanks and symbols for Event destination host, Message, and value in Extended attribute. However, if you use any of the following special characters as an ordinary character, specify a backslash (\) before the special character.

Windows:

double quotation mark (")

UNIX:

', $, backslash (\), and double quotation mark (")

For sending of a JP1 event, the specifications of Event destination host, Message, and value in Extended attributes are enclosed in double-quotes ("), considering that the specifications may contain blanks and symbols. If you want to specify a backslash (\) as an ordinary character at the end of a character string in Windows, prefix another backslash (\) to it.

If passing information contains any of the above special characters, the information might fail to be passed correctly or the job might fail and end abnormally.

However, if you use the option to enable double quotation marks ("), the passing information including double quotation marks will be passed correctly.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box.

Figure 12‒163: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.30 Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box defines the details on emailing.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒164: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Send-Mail.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of emailing. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box.

Figure 12‒165: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Recipients

Specify the address of a destination. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. However, if the execution host of the email sending job is Windows and uses Outlook, use no more than 255 characters to specify a destination. The maximum number of bytes that can be specified is 256, but if you specify 256 or more characters, the first 255 characters are assumed to be the destination.

You must specify this item. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Specify a character string, and then select TO, CC, or BCC.

TO

Sends email to the destination.

CC

Sends an email copy to the destination.

BCC

Sends an email copy to the destination; like paper BCC (blind carbon copy), this copy is hidden from other recipients.

If you click the Add button, this item is added to the list. You can add up to 20 addresses to the list.

The following table shows the address formats that you can type in the Recipients field when you choose PC for Platform.

Table 12‒45: Address formats supported in the Recipients field

No.

Profile type

Supported format

1

Exchange Server#

- Display name

- Alias

- Internet mail address

2

Internet mail (SMTP/POP3)

Internet mail address

#

JP1/AJS3 - View cannot send email to X.400 format addresses.

The following is an example of an address in X.400 format:

c=JP;p=MailServer;o=Exchange;g=Taro;s=Hitachi;

Subject

Specify an email subject. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. However, if the execution host of the email sending job is Windows and uses Outlook, use no more than 255 characters to specify an email subject. The maximum number of bytes that can be specified is 256, but if you specify 256 or more characters, the first 255 characters are assumed to be the email subject.

You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

If you omit this item when using an email client other than Outlook, emails are sent with a single-byte space as the subject line. In email clients other than Outlook, you can specify reserved words that are replaced by the date, time, and other information when the email is sent. Although you can specify a character string containing reserved words that is longer than 256 bytes, the character string must not exceed 989 bytes after it is converted. For details about the reserved words you can specify, see Table 12-46.

Message text

Specify the text of an email message in the text field by using a character string of up to 512 bytes (including linefeed characters). In UNIX, you need to add a linefeed character at the end of the final line when you send an email.

You can use macro variables in the text. You can also use the content of a file as the text. When using the content of a file as the text, select Use file and fill the text field with a file name consisting of a character string of up to 256 bytes. In this case, click the ... button, and then select a file name from the displayed dialog box. You can also use macro variables in the file name, but you cannot use them in the file itself.

In email clients other than Outlook, you can specify reserved words that are replaced by the date, time, and other information when the email is sent. Although you can specify a character string containing reserved words that is longer than 512 bytes, the length of the character string after conversion must not exceed 998 bytes per line. For details about the reserved words you can specify, see Table 12-46.

If you select Use file, note that what is specified in the text of the email message will be invalid.

Platform

Select the platform on which you want to execute jobs. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC. If you select UNIX, you can specify neither Profile name nor Attached file.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

Profile name

Specify a source profile name. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. You can use a macro variable. If you have selected PC for Platform, be sure to specify this item. You cannot specify a profile name if you selected UNIX for Platform.

The default is a blank.

Attached file

If you click the Set button, the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box appears. Specify an attached file name. If you select Apply, the settings become valid. Only when you select PC in Platform, you can have the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box appear. You cannot specify an attached file if you selected UNIX for Platform.

For details about this dialog box, see 12.4.31 Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box.

Reserved words

This item can be used only when Outlook is not used to send emails.

The following table lists the reserved words you can use in the Subject and Message text fields.

Table 12‒46: Reserved words

No.

Reserved word

Replaced with

Example

1

~Date~

~date~

The date when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

2012/12/01

2

~Time~

~time~

The time when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

12:15:30

3

~Year~

The year when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

2012

4

~Month~

The month when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

12

5

~DayOfMonth~

The day when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

01

6

~Hour~

The hour when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

12

7

~Minute~

The minute when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

15

8

~Second~

The second when the email sending job was executed by the execution agent

30

9

~CurrentVersion~

The OS version of the execution agent

Windows NT 6.2

10

~ComputerName~

The computer name of the execution agent

COMPUTER1

11

~IPaddress~

The IP address of the execution agent

If the execution agent has multiple IP addresses, this reserved word is replaced with the first IP address supplied by the operating system.

192.168.0.2

Notes on reserved words

Reserved words are case sensitive.

If a character string enclosed by tildes (~) does not match an entry in the table above, the character string will be sent as is.

Replacement of reserved words takes place at the execution agent of the email sending job.

Reserved words that relate to time are subject to the time zone setting of the execution agent.

Examples of reserved word substitutions

The following table shows examples of how certain character strings specified in the Subject and Message text fields appear in emails.

Table 12‒47: Examples of reserved word substitutions

No.

Specified character string

Replaced with

Description

1

~Date~ ~Time~

2012/12/01 12:15:30

The parts that match reserved words are replaced accordingly.

2

~Date~~Time~

2012/12/0112:15:30

The parts that match reserved words are replaced accordingly.

3

~~Date~~Time~~

~2012/12/0112:15:30~

The parts that match reserved words are replaced accordingly.

4

~DATE~

~DATE~

Because ~DATE~ is written in upper case letters, it does not match a reserved word and no substitution takes place.

5

~Date~Time~

2012/12/01Time~

Because Time is not enclosed by tildes (~), no substitution takes place.

6

~Today~

~Today~

Because ~Today~ is not a reserved word, no substitution takes place.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box.

Figure 12‒166: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can select No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscore (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.31 Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box sets whether to add an attached file. This dialog box will be displayed only if you have selected PC in Platform.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box.

Figure 12‒167: Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Attached file

Specify an attached file name in the text field. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. You can use a macro variable. If you click the Add button, this item is added to the list. You can add up to 20 file names. The default is a blank. You can also click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

To specify an attached file from the list, select Use list. By default, this box is cleared. If you select Use list, the attached file name becomes invalid. Then, specify the listed file name of the attached file in the text field. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. You can select a file name from the dialog box displayed by clicking the ... button.

Even with Use list selected, you can use a macro variable in a file name. If you use files contents in the list (that is, if you select Use list), the specified list file must not contain any macro variable.

You cannot specify a file that exists on a network drive as an attached file or in the attached-file list.

When you use the email service, whether or not the file can be attached depends on the email service login account. The file can be attached only when the email service login account has a permission to access the file.

For details about the format of attached file lists, see 2.7.3 List of attached files to be sent (Windows only) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

12.4.32 Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box (compatible with version 7)

The Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box defines the details on sending messages through a message queue. The system sends messages to the MQServer message queue.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒168: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Send-MQ-Message.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of sending messages through a message queue. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒169: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Destination

Specify a destination for message queuing.

Queue

Specify the name of the queue to be sent a message. Use a character string of up to 48 bytes.

You must specify this item. The default is a blank. You can set one of the following queues:

Local queue

Alias local queue

Remote queue

Alias remote queue

Dynamic queue

Transmission queue

Queue manager

Specify a queue manager name using an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

Model queue

Specify the name of the model queue to be sent a message using an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

Connection queue manager

Specify the name of the queue management program to be connected for transmission. Use an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

Message

Specify the settings about the message to send.

Correlation ID

Specify the correlation ID of the message to be sent. Use a character string of up to 24 bytes.

Be sure to set this item. You can use the uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). The default is a blank.

Message ID

Specify the message ID of the message to be sent to the message queue. Use a character string of up to 24 bytes. Be sure to set this item. You can use uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9). The default is a blank.

Retain

Specify whether to retain the message until a restart occurs. By default, this item is not selected.

Detailed setting

If you click the Set button, the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Settings] dialog box appears. Set details on the message. If you select Apply, the settings become valid.

For details, see 12.4.33 Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting] dialog box.

Platform

Select the platform on which you want to execute jobs. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

In 08-00, no Windows platforms are available.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒170: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.33 Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting] dialog box sets the details on the message to be sent.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting] dialog box.

Figure 12‒171: Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Format

Specify a format name. Use uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numeric characters (0 to 9) of up to 8 bytes. The default is a blank.

Message data file

Specify the name of the message data file as a message. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. You can use a macro variable in the message data file name. In that case, you cannot use a macro variable in the specified message data file.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

Retention time

Specify the retention time for the message to be sent. You can specify 1 to 9,999,999. The default is a blank. By default, no time limit is applied.

Priority

Specify the priority of the message to be sent. You can set 0 to 9. The highest priority is 9. The default is a blank.

Dead-letter queue

Specify the name of the queue to which you want to transfer the message if the message cannot be sent. Use an MQ character string of up to 48 bytes. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters for the MQ character string.

Letters (A to Z and a to z)

Numbers (0 to 9)

Periods (.)

Forward slashes (/)

Underscores (_)

Percent signs (%)

12.4.34 Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box (compatible with version 7)

The Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box defines the details on sending an MSMQ message.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒172: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Send-MSMQ-Message.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of sending an MSMQ message. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒173: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Destination

Specify information about a destination.

Path name

Specify the queue to which you want to send a message. Use a character string of up to 259 bytes. You can use a macro variable.

Be sure to specify either Path name or Queue label. The default is a blank. You can specify the following items.

Public queue for the local computer

Private queue for the local computer

Public queue for the remote computer

Queue label

Specify the queue label name for the destination. Use a character string of up to 124 bytes. You can use a macro variable. Be sure to specify either Path name or Queue label. The default is a blank.

Message

Specify information about a message.

Correlation ID

Specify the correlation ID of the message to be sent. Use a character string of up to 20 bytes.

You must specify this item. The default is a blank. You can use the following characters.

Uppercase alphabetic characters (A to Z)

Numeric characters (0 to 9)

Message label

Specify the label of the message to be sent. Use a character string of up to 249 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

Application information

Specify application information about a send message. Use a hexadecimal character string. You can set values of 0 to FFFFFFFF. The default is a blank.

Time to reach queue

Specify the delivery limit time for the message to be sent in seconds. The default is -2. If you omit this item, a value of -2 is assumed. You can set the following values.

-2 (LONG_LIVED)

-1 (INFINITE)

0 to 2,147,483,647

Time to be received

Specify how many seconds you want to retain the message. The default is -1. If you omit this item, a value of -1 is assumed. You can set the following values.

-1 (INFINITE)

0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds

Priority

Specify the priority of the message to be sent. You can set 0 to 7. The highest priority is 7. The default is 3.

Delivery

Select delivery mode for a send message. You can select Express or Recoverable. The default is Express.

Logging

Specify which log you want to use after a send message is received. By default, this item is not selected.

Journal queue

Select whether to put a sent message into the journal queue. By default, this item is not selected.

Dead-letter queue

Select whether to put a message that could not be sent into the dead-letter queue. By default, this item is not selected.

Message body

Clicking the Set button displays the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box. Specify required settings about the body text of the MSMQ message to send. Selecting Apply validates settings.

For details, see 12.4.35 Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box.

Figure 12‒174: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can select No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following:

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.35 Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box sets the details on sending an MSMQ message.

The following figure shows the Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box.

Figure 12‒175: Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Message body file

Specify the name of the file containing the message to be sent. Use a character string of up to 259 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

You can click the ... button to select a file name from the dialog box that will appear.

Message body type

Specify a message text type using a hexadecimal string. You can set values of 0 to FFFFFFFF. The default is a blank.

12.4.36 Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box defines the details on reporting a status to HP NNM.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒176: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is OpenView-Status-Report.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of reporting a status to HP NNM. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box.

Figure 12‒177: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Status

Select the status you want to report to HP NNM. The default is Unknown. You can select the following items.

Unknown

Normal

Warning

Minor

Major

Critical

Restricted

Testing

Disabled

Additional information

Specify additional information on the message. Use a character string of up to 256 bytes. You can use a macro variable. The default is a blank.

If you use multi-byte characters, ensure that the type of character code set for HP NNM and the type of character code set for JP1/AJS3 are identical.

Platform

Select the platform on which you want to execute jobs. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box.

Figure 12‒178: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.37 Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box defines the details on local power control.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒179: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Local-Power-Control.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of local power control. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒180: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Platform

Select the platform on which you want to execute jobs. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

Execution type

Select how to control the local power. The default is Power off. The items you can select are different depending on whether you have set PC or UNIX for Platform. You can select the following items.

PC

If the following processing is selected within ten minutes after the operating system of the execution host starts up; the processing starts ten minutes after the startup of the operating system.

Power off

Shuts down the system, and then turns off the power. If you want to turn on the power again, you must set the next power-on time by the JP1/Power Monitor schedule. The system will be started at the time specified by JP1/Power Monitor.

Restart after shutdown

Shuts down and then restarts the system.

Shutdown

Only shuts down the system.

The shutdown is performed based on the setting of the Group Policy Object of the OS, which is "Do not turn off system power after a Windows system shutdown has occurred".

For details about this setting, see the OS documentation or contact the manufacturer of your OS.

UNIX

Power off

Shuts down the system, and then turns off the power. If you want to turn on the power again, you must set the next power-on time by the JP1/Power Monitor schedule. The system will be started at the time specified by JP1/Power Monitor.

Restart after shutdown

Shuts down and then restarts the system.

Termination request type

Select how to terminate the system. The default is Forced termination. The items you can select are different depending on whether you have set PC or UNIX for Platform. The following gives the items you can select.

PC

Planned termination

Terminates the host in a planned manner.

Forced termination

Kills the host.

UNIX

Monitored termination

Terminates the host under monitoring.

Restricted termination

Terminates the host according to the restrictions specified.

Forced termination

Kills the host.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒181: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following:

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.38 Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box

The Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box defines the details on remote power control.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒182: Items displayed in common in the Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is Remote-Power-Control.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of remote power control. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can specify a macro variable in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later, and Standard is specified for Exec. service. The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary notes

If you have selected Queueless Agent in Exec. service on the Attributes page, specify the name of an execution host.

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒183: Definition page in the Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Remote host

Specify the name of the JP1/Power Monitor agent host subject to power control. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can use a macro variable. Be sure to set this item. The default is a blank. Also, select PC or UNIX.

Request type

Select the type of host power control. The default is Power off: Planned termination. The items you can select are different depending on whether you have selected PC or UNIX for Remote host. You can select one of the following items:

PC

Power on

Turns on the power to the host.

Power off: Planned termination

Terminates the host in a planned manner.

Power off: Forced termination

Kills the host.

Power off: Forced stop

Directly turns off the power controller for the host.

Cautionary note

Remember that Power off: Forced stop turns off the host's power without normally terminating the job or application being executed. Therefore, it should be used only in an emergency such as a host hang-up.

UNIX

Power on

Turns on the power to the host.

Power off: Monitored termination

Terminates the host under monitoring.

Power off: Restricted termination

Terminates the host according to the restrictions specified.

Power off: Forced termination

Kills the host.

Power off: Forced stop

Directly turns off the power controller for the host.

Cautionary note

Remember that Power off: Forced stop turns off the host's power without normally terminating the job or application being executed. Therefore, it should be used only in an emergency such as a host hang-up.

Set next power-on time

Specify the time of the next power-on for the host. The default is Agent setting. If you select Power on or Forced stop for Request type, you cannot set this item.

No setting

Without setting the time of next power-on, this option turns off the power to the host.

Agent setting

Turns on the power to the host at the time set in the schedule of JP1/Power Monitor in the agent host.

Change next power-on time

Select this if you want to turn on the power to the host at a time different from that set in JP1/Power Monitor in the agent host. You can set the following values.

Month: 1 to 12

Day: 1 to 31

Hours: 0 to 23

Minutes: 0 to 59

If Month or Day is omitted, the month and day of execution will be assumed. This means that an error will occur if you specify a set of Hours and Minutes that is earlier than the time of execution.

The time of next power-on you specify will act as the time specified in the time zone for the user of the host that executes the remote power control job.

Restart

If you select Power off, specify whether to restart the system. You can select Restart or Do not restart. The default is Do not restart. With Power on selected for Request type, you cannot specify this item.

Cautionary note

With Power off: Forced stop selected, choosing Restart may result in an improper startup, depending on the type of power controller, if the interval between the power-off and power-on processes is too small. If this occurs, you should allow for a sufficient length of time from the power-off to the power-on.

Power-off completion

If you select Power off, specify whether to wait for the end of power-off. Power-off completion is a shutdown method in which the JP1/Power Monitor on the agent host notifies the JP1/Power Monitor on the manager host that shutdown processing has just started. The system does not wait for the agent host to shut down.

You can select Wait or Do not wait. The default is Do not wait.

If you select Wait, the maximum wait time differs depending on whether PC or UNIX is selected for Platform.

If PC is selected: 24 hours

After 24 hours have passed, the JP1/Power Monitor message KAVP11087-E is output to the integrated trace log, and the Remote Power Control job ends abnormally.

If UNIX is selected: Unlimited

Platform

Select a platform that needs remote power control. You can select PC or UNIX. The default is PC.

PC

A Windows environment is used.

UNIX

A UNIX environment is used.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box.

Figure 12‒184: Attributes page in the Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Exec. service

Select the target service. You can specify Standard or Queueless Agent. The default is Standard. Note that this text box appears for connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 07-00-/C or later.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.39 Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box defines the details on a custom job provided by the Windows version of JP1 series programs.

You can define the following custom jobs.

JP1FTP

JP1AMR3

JP1AMR3BW

JP1AMR3CP

JP1AMR3UX

JP1AMR3BWUX

JP1AMR3CPUX

JP1AMOAP

ADSHPC

ADSHUX

ADSHAPPEXEC

DHAJEW

CPALINK

Cautionary note

You cannot specify any job other than shown above.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following pages:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒185: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box

The following explains the items displayed in common.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default depends on the defined custom job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

Specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name to be assigned the task of custom job execution. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. You can also use macro variables if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later.

The default is a blank.

This item appears as a text box when either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS - View or the connection-target JP1/AJS - Manager is earlier than 09-50

The unit is being defined under a remote jobnet

Otherwise, this item appears as a combo box in which you can select an execution agent. You can also directly enter an execution agent name into the combo box. The content of the list component of the combo box differs depending on whether execution agent profiles are enabled, and the contents of those profiles.

When execution agent profiles are disabled

The list is empty.

When execution agent profiles are enabled

If the specified job is associated with an execution agent profile

The list displays the execution agents permitted for the specified job.

If the specified job is not associated with an execution agent profile

If the upper-level unit is associated with an execution agent profile, the list displays the execution agents permitted for the upper-level unit.

If the upper-level unit is not associated with an execution agent profile, the list will be empty.

For details about execution agents, see 5.1.1 Execution agents in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Cautionary note

When you copy and paste a cell in Excel, a space may be appended to the end of the pasted text. In such a case, delete the space.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page (for a PC job) in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box for the standard custom jobs. The items displayed in this Definition page for the custom PC jobs are the same as in the Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box. For details, see 12.4.7 Define Details - [PC Job] dialog box.

The items displayed in the Definition page for the Unix job are the same as in the Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box. For details, see 12.4.6 Define Details - [UNIX Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒186: Definition page in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Priority

Select the priority of job execution. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is None.

When None is selected, the priority depends on the definition of the upper-level jobnet. If None is selected here when None is specified for all upper-level jobnets up to the highest-level jobnet, the priority value specified for the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is assumed. If the DEFAULTPRIORITY environment setting parameter is not set, 1 is assumed. For details about how to specify the environment setting parameter DEFAULTPRIORITY, see 20.4.2(108) DEFAULTPRIORITY in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Standard output

Specify the name of the standard output file to be used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can use a macro variable and $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$ in this field if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later. If you specify $JP1AJS2_JPQSTDOUTTEMP$, the standard output file is a temporary file. The default is a blank.

Standard error

Specify the name of the standard error output file to be used for job execution. Use a character string of up to 511 bytes. Specify a full path file name. You can also use macro variables if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later. The default is a blank.

End judgment

Select conditions for end judgment.

Rule

The displayed items vary depending on the rule selected in the Rule drop-down list. In the initial status, Judgment by threshold is selected and the thresholds for the Warning and Abnormal levels are displayed. You can select one of the following rules for end judgment.

Always normal

Always terminates the custom job normally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Always abnormal

Always terminates the custom job abnormally. You can specify neither Warning nor Abnormal.

Normal if specified file exists

Ends normally the custom job if the file specified in the File name text box that appears below the drop-down list exists. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can also use macro variables if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later. The default is a blank.

Normal if file was updated

Ends normally the custom job if the file set in the File name text box that appears below the drop-down list is updated. You can use a character string of up to 511 bytes to specify a file. You can also use macro variables if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later. The default is a blank.

The system uses the update time to determine whether a file was updated. When a job is executed in UNIX, because the system truncates the timestamp to the second when making this determination, it might not recognize that a file has been updated when there is less than one second between updates. In this case, the job will end abnormally.

Judgment by threshold

Define reference values for the normal end and the warning end, or for the normal end and the abnormal end. In the Warning and Abnormal text boxes, you can set 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is a blank for Warning, and 0 for Abnormal.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you set Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning. It assumes warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you set Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal. It assumes an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes as follows:

Normal end: The return code is from zero to the Warning value.

Warning end: The return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value.

Abnormal end: The return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In UNIX, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

Retry on abnormal end

Select whether to retry execution when the program ends in an error.

You can select this option when all of the following conditions are met:

The version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later

The database of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is a standard configuration

Judgment by threshold is selected in the Rule drop-down list

You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Return code

If Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the range of return codes for which to retry jobs.

Greater than or equal to

Specify the lowest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is greater than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, a value one greater than the value specified in Abnormal is used.

Less than or equal to

Specify the highest return code for jobs that are to be retried. A job is retried when its return code is less than or equal to this value.

You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 4,294,967,295. The default is a blank. If you omit this setting, 4,294,967,295 is used.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Maximum retry times

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify the maximum number of times a job can be retried. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 12. The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

Retry interval

When Yes is selected for Retry on abnormal end, specify how long the system waits between the error occurring and retrying the job. You can specify a value in the range from 1 to 10 (minutes). The default is 1.

This item is displayed in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 and later.

User name

Specify the OS user name of JP1/AJS3 - Agent for job execution. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can also use macro variables if the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-50 or later. The default is a blank.

You must map this user to User who registered or User who owns for Executed by. However, if the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, you must map this user name to a fixed user regardless of the contents of the Executed by field.

By default, the primary user in the user mapping is applied for execution. For details about the user mapping, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

Define detailed info.

If you click the Details button, the window for defining a program to be linked appears. For details about the items displayed in this window, see the program documentation.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒187: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can select No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select either of the following.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.40 Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box

The Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box defines the details of a passing information setting job.

This dialog box contains the items displayed in common, and also contains the following page:

Definition page

Attributes page

(1) Items displayed in common

The following figure shows the items displayed in common.

Figure 12‒188: Items displayed in common in the Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Specify a unit name. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is AjsVar-Job.

Comment

Specify a comment for the unit. Use a character string of up to 80 bytes. The default is a blank.

Exec-agent

You cannot specify an execution agent for a passing information setting job.

(2) Definition page

The following figure shows the Definition page in the Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒189: Definition page in the Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Passing Information

Displays the passing information in list form. You can use the list to add, delete, and change passing information. You can add up to 32 passing information items to the list.

Regular Expression

Displays the value of the regular expression.

Output Macro Variable

Displays the macro variable name without the first five characters (?AJS2) and last character (?).

Add button

Adds passing information. When you click the Add button, the Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box appears.

Change button

Changes passing information. When you click the Change button, the Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box appears.

Copy button

Creates a copy of the selected passing information. Use this feature when you want to create a new piece of passing information based on an existing piece. When you click the Copy button, the Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box appears.

Delete button

Deletes the selected passing information.

End judgment

Specify the conditions for end judgment.

Rule

Displays Judgment by threshold. Threshold judgment is the only method supported for end judgment of passing information setting jobs.

Warning

Define reference values for normal and warning ends. You can specify a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is blank.

Abnormal

Define reference values for normal and abnormal ends. You can specify a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647. The default is zero.

By default, the system assumes an abnormal end if the return code is other than zero. If you specify a value in Warning, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Warning, and a warning end if the return code is larger than the value of Warning. If you specify a value in Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the value of Abnormal, and an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the value of Abnormal. If you specify both Warning and Abnormal, the system assumes a normal end if the return code is from zero to the Warning value, a warning end if the return code is larger than the Warning value but not larger than the Abnormal value, and an abnormal end if the return code is not larger than -1 or larger than the Abnormal value.

In UNIX, the return codes only have positive values from 0 to 255.

If the program exits with a negative value, the return code is assumed to be 256 + (exit code). For example, if the program exists with -1, the system assumes 256 - 1 = 255.

(3) Attributes page

The following figure shows the Attributes page in the Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box.

Figure 12‒190: Attributes page in the Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Hold

Specify whether to place the unit in the hold status in advance. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Type

Set the unit type to Normal or Recovery. The default is Normal.

Set timeout period

Select whether to set a time-out period for job execution. You can specify No or Yes. The default is No.

Timeout period

If you select Yes in Set timeout period, specify a time-out period in minutes. You can set 1 to 1,440 minutes. The default is a blank.

Delayed end

Specify whether to monitor delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution. Select the Time-required-for-execution check box to monitor delayed end of jobs. The check box is not selected by default.

When you select the Time-required-for-execution check box, specify the time required for execution for a job from 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).

This section appears for the JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View of version 08-50 or later. For details about cautionary notes on monitoring of delayed end of jobs based on time required for execution, see 5.1.3 End delay monitoring based on time-required-for-execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Owner

Specify the owner of the unit. Use a character string of up to 31 bytes. The default is the login JP1 user name. Note that if the upper-level unit-attribute inheritance function has been set for the upper-level jobnet, the default is the owner of the upper-level unit.

JP1 resource group

Specify a JP1 resource group name. Use a character string of up to 63 bytes. You can specify alphanumeric characters and underscores (_). The default is the JP1 resource group name of the upper-level unit. If you specify a blank, you are not authorized to access this group.

Executed by

Select the user who executes the job. The default is User who registered. You can select the following items.

User who registered

The JP1 user who registered the job executes the job.

User who owns

The JP1 user who owns the job executes the job.

You must perform user mapping on the host where you want to execute the job so that the specified user is converted to a OS user.

If the execution-user fixing function is configured for the upper-level unit, the execution user conforms to the unit-attribute profile regardless of the contents of this field.

12.4.41 Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box

In the Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box, you can register or change the passing information for a job or jobnet.

The following figure shows the Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box.

Figure 12‒191: Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Regular Exp.

Specify the regular expression that extracts information from the standard output file of the preceding job. You can specify a character string of a maximum of 64 bytes. The default is blank.

Output Macro Var.

Specify the macro variable name without the first five characters (?AJS2) and last character (?), as a character string of no more than 58 bytes. You can use upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), and periods (.).

12.4.42 Zoom dialog box

The Zoom dialog box sets the display size of the map area as a percentage. The following figure shows the Zoom dialog box.

Figure 12‒192: Zoom dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Percent

Set the display size of the map area as a percentage. You can specify 20% to 200%. The spin button allows you to set the size in steps of 10%. The default is 100%.

12.4.43 Wall Paper dialog box

The Wall Paper dialog box allows you to set an image file as the wallpaper of the map area in the Jobnet Monitor window for individual units. The following figure shows the Wall Paper dialog box.

Figure 12‒193: Wall Paper dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Tree area

Displays the scheduler services that define the jobnets selected in the Jobnet Editor window or the tree area of the Jobnet Monitor window, and also displays their subordinate units in hierarchy view.

The jobnet selected in the Jobnet Editor window or the Jobnet Monitor window are highlighted.

Depends on upper-level unit

If the parent unit of the selected unit has a wallpaper setting, indicates whether to use the same image file as its wallpaper. Clear the check box if you want to use a different image file. The default is off if you have selected a scheduler service, or on if you have selected a unit other than a scheduler service.

File name

Specify an absolute path of an image file to be set for the unit. You can specify a character string of up to 255 bytes. There is no limitation on characters for the file name. The supported file extensions are .gif or .jpg only. You can specify the file name only if Depends on upper-level unit is not selected. If this box is selected, the absolute path of an image file set for its upper-level unit appears, and you cannot modify it.

If you click the ... button, the Select File dialog box appears. Once you select an image file from the Select File dialog box, its absolute path appears in the File name area.

Preview area

This area is used to preview the image file specified for File name. Click the Preview button to view the file. If the image does not fit the Preview area, it will be scaled to fit the area.

Preview button

Available only if Depends on upper-level unit is not selected. Click the Preview button to let the Preview area display the image file specified for File name.

Set button

Sets what you specified in the dialog box. Click OK button if you want these settings to take effect.

Clear button

Clears the contents of the File name field and the contents of the Preview area. Available only if Depends on upper-level unit is not selected.

Optimize button

Checks the consistency between the unit's definition information and the image file, and deletes unnecessary information from the wallpaper settings.

Cautionary notes

The wallpaper settings will be maintained for each host running JP1/AJS3 - View, for each JP1 user, and for each destination host. Even for one destination host, the separate settings may be maintained depending on whether you have specified the destination host by host name or by IP address.

You can only specify a file having the extension .gif or .jpg.

If you leave the File name blank, nothing will appear in the preview area, the Jobnet Editor window, or the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window. Any single-byte spaces in the File name will also be treated in the same way.

If the Jobnet Editor window or the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window is insufficient for the specified image file, the image is not scaled down. This results in part of the image being hidden.

If you change the wallpaper of an upper-level unit, the wallpaper of its subordinate units with Depends on upper-level unit selected will also be affected.

To use the same wallpaper image common to map areas of the Jobnet Editor window and the Jobnet Monitor window regardless of the units, see 11.5.6 Changing the background image of the map area.

If you configure wallpaper settings both through customization and from the Wall Paper dialog box, the settings made with the Wall Paper dialog box take precedence.

If you change the background of the map area in the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window, system resources might run short or performance might deteriorate.

Supplementary notes

You can specify, in File name, the name of an image file that does not exist, and can add an specified image file later. However, clicking the Preview button results in an error due to the absence of the image file to be displayed. When you click the Set or OK button, you will be prompted to set the image as wallpaper.

In order to set wallpaper for the map area of the Jobnet Editor or Jobnet Monitor window for manager job groups or manager jobnets, connect to the manager at the referenced host and assign the wallpaper to an appropriate unit.

In order to set wallpaper for the map area of the Jobnet Monitor window for remote jobnets, connect to the manager at the referenced host and assign the wallpaper to an appropriate unit.

You can set up to 10,000 wallpaper selections for a single destination host in the Wall Paper dialog box.

Once you have set wallpaper, a configuration file will be created for each destination host, which defines the association of units with corresponding image files. If the number of configuration files exceed 9,999, an error occurs.

When you currently have 9,999 wallpaper configuration files, and if you want to set additional wallpaper for a new destination host, edit the management file (wallpaper.conf) manually to delete the unnecessary files.

The management file and the wallpaper configuration files are stored in the following folder or directory.

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name\MapBackGround

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

The following shows the steps for manually editing the management file:

Open the management file (wallpaper.conf) with a text editor.

The management file specifies the associated destination host and configuration file in "destination-host-name (host name or IP address)=configuration-filename (wallpaper#nnnn.conf)" format, where nnnn is a value of 0001 to 9999.

Delete unnecessary "destination-host-name=configuration-filename" lines.

Save the management file.

Place the management file in the original folder or directory (MapBackGround) without renaming it (wallpaper.conf).

Remove the configuration files you deleted in step 2 from the ~\MapBackGround directory.

Restart JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.5 Edit Monthly Calendar window

The Edit Monthly Calendar window defines the monthly calendar information on a job group.

To display the Edit Monthly Calendar window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the Edit menu, choose Calendar.

In the Edit Annual Calendar window, from the View menu, choose Edit Monthly Calendar.

This section describes the configuration of the Edit Monthly Calendar window, menu commands, and transitions of the window.

12.5.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

Figure 12‒194: Edit Monthly Calendar window

The following explains the displayed items.

(1) Standard week

By clicking days of the week in Standard week, you can define closed or open days for all the selected days of the week.

Closed day

Displays the day of the week in red. The date background in the calendar area is displayed in light red.

Open day

Displays the day of the week in blue. The date background in the calendar area is displayed in light blue.

Not defined

Displays the day of the week in black.

(2) Previous month button

Displays calendar information on the previous month. The months from January 1994 to December four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter can be displayed. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, you can set a period up to December 2036.

(3) Next month button

Displays calendar information on the next month.

(4) Calendar area

Displays calendar information. The digits indicating the current date are displayed in yellow. Clicking dates or days of the week allows you to define closed or open days. Clicking a day of the week in the calendar area allows you define closed or open days only for the day of the week in the month. You can operate a nested job group using the calendar information for the upper-level job group.

The following gives the contents of definitions and the displayed colors.

Closed day

Displays the digits indicating a date in white with a red background. A closed day for the upper-level job group is displayed in orange.

Open day

Displays the digits indicating a date in white with a blue background. An open day for the upper-level job group is displayed in green.

Not defined

Displays the digits indicating a date in black with a white background.

The following gives priority applied when you use Standard week, the calendar area and the upper-level job group at the same time to define calendar information. The highest priority is 1.

Calendar area

Standard week

Upper-level job group

If you use Standard week to define calendar information, the dates in the calendar area are displayed in black.

12.5.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands in the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

Table 12‒48: Menu commands supported in the Edit Monthly Calendar window

Menu

Menu command

Description

File

Save

Saves defined calendar information.

Close

Closes the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

View

Edit Annual Calendar

Displays the Edit Annual Calendar window.

Refresh

Refreshes calendar definitions.

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.5.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Edit Monthly Calendar window

The following figure shows the transitions of the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

Figure 12‒195: Transitions of the Edit Monthly Calendar window

12.6 Edit Annual Calendar window

The Edit Annual Calendar window allows you to edit the calendar information of a job group in units of years.

To display the Edit Annual Calendar window:

In the Edit Monthly Calendar window, from the View menu, choose Edit Annual Calendar.

This section describes the configuration of the Edit Annual Calendar window, menu commands, and transitions of the window.

12.6.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Edit Annual Calendar window.

Figure 12‒196: Edit Annual Calendar window

The following explains the displayed items.

(1) Standard week

By clicking days of the week in Standard week, you can define closed or open days for all the selected days of the week.

Closed day

Displays the day of the week in red. The date background in the calendar area is displayed in light red.

Open day

Displays the day of the week in blue. The date background in the calendar area is displayed in light blue.

Not defined

Displays the day of the week in black.

(2) Previous year button

Displays calendar information on the previous year. The years from 1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter can be displayed. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

(3) Next year button

Displays calendar information on the next year.

(4) Calendar area

Displays calendar information. The digits indicating the current date are displayed in yellow. Clicking dates or days of the week allows you to define closed or open days. Clicking a day of the week in the calendar area allows you define closed or open days only for the day of the week in the month. You can operate a nested job group using the calendar information for the upper-level job group.

The following gives the contents of definitions and the displayed colors.

Closed day

Displays the digits indicating a date in white with a red background. A closed day for the upper-level job group is displayed in orange.

Open day

Displays the digits indicating a date in white with a blue background. An open day for the upper-level job group is displayed in green.

Not defined

Displays the digits indicating a date in black with a white background.

The following gives priority applied when you use Standard week, the calendar area and the upper-level job group at the same time to define calendar information. The highest priority is 1.

Calendar area

Standard week

Upper-level job group

If you use Standard week to define calendar information, the dates in the calendar area are displayed in black.

12.6.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands in the Edit Annual Calendar window.

Table 12‒49: Menu commands supported in the Edit Annual Calendar window

Menu

Menu command

Description

File

Save

Saves defined calendar information.

Close

Closes the Edit Annual Calendar window.

View

Edit Monthly Calendar

Displays the Edit Monthly Calendar window.

Refresh

Refreshes calendar definitions.

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.6.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Edit Annual Calendar window

The following figure shows the transitions of the Edit Annual Calendar window.

Figure 12‒197: Transitions of the Edit Annual Calendar window

12.7 Daily Schedule window

The Daily Schedule window lets you display and edit the daily execution schedule for a jobnet. The Daily Schedule window supports two display modes: Hierarchy and All Jobs. The Hierarchy mode displays jobnets or jobs in the tree area. The All Jobs mode displays all the jobs in a job group or jobnet in the tree area.

To display the Daily Schedule window, use one of the following procedures:

For the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the Monthly Schedule window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the Search window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then Hierarchy.

In the Wait Conditions Statuses window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, Hierarchy, and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

For the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the Monthly Schedule window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the Search window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, and then All Jobs.

In the Wait Conditions Statuses window, from the View menu, choose Daily Schedule, All Jobs, and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

This section describes the configuration of the Daily Schedule window, menu commands, transitions of the window, and dialog boxes to be displayed.

12.7.1 Configuration of the window

The Daily Schedule window supports two display modes:

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

The details about the items displayed in each window are described below.

(1) Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Figure 12‒198: Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Tree area

Displays the jobnets or jobs under the root jobnet in a tree structure. The units under the remote jobnet, and the manager jobnet are not displayed.

For a release target jobnet, the jobnet is displayed in the root-jobnet-name(release-ID) format for each definition for which release entry is performed. Note that the release ID is not displayed if the release ID is AJS_AUTO.

The unit names are displayed in the order specified by the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box. In the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box, you can also specify whether to view a root jobnet that has no schedule information. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

(b) Display date change buttons

Use one of these buttons to change the date of the currently displayed schedule information. The following buttons are available:

Previous Day button

Displays the schedule of the previous day.

That Day button

Displays the schedule of today.

Next Day button

Displays the schedule of the next day.

Cautionary note

If the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM, these buttons are disabled and cannot be clicked.

(c) Cancel button

Click this button to cancel the display update processing. Normally, this button is disabled. This button is enabled only while a schedule is being obtained.

Cautionary note

If the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM, this button is disabled and cannot be clicked.

(d) Time area

The upper row displays a date, while the lower row displays hours. The system also displays a selection frame. The value of hours is shown according to what has been selected by the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

On a 24 hours basis:

If the minutes in the base time are 00, the system displays 24 hours from the base time. If they are not 00, the system displays 25 hours from the base time.

On a 48 hours basis:

If the minutes in the base time are 00, the system displays 48 hours from the base time. If they are not 00, the system displays 49 hours from the base time.

(e) Schedule area

Displays cells indicating execution schedules, and a selection frame. Both edges of each cell indicate the start time and the end time, respectively. They indicate schedule time if the job is not executed.

If delay occurs, the upper and lower lines of the cell are displayed thick.

The gray background in the schedule area indicates the past, and the white background indicates the present and future.

The color of each cell indicates the status of job or jobnet execution. The following table lists the status of job or jobnet execution and the colors of cells.

Table 12‒50: Cell colors and job or jobnet execution status

No.

Job execution status

Color

1

Not registered

None

2

Wait for start time

Sky blue

3

Wait for prev. to end

Sky blue

4

Being held

Yellow

5

Waiting to execute

Sky blue

6

Not sched. to exe.

Gray

7

Now queuing

Sky blue

8

Now running

Green

9

Running + Warning

Red

10

Running + Abend

Red

11

Ended normally

Light green

12

Ended with warning

Light red

13

Ended abnormally

Light red

14

Bypassed

Gray

15

Interrupted

Light red

16

Killed

Light red

17

Invalid exe. seq.

Light red

18

Skipped so not exe. (not scheduled)

Gray

19

Skipped so not exe. (scheduled)

Gray

20

Failed to start

Light red

21

Unknown end status

Light red

22

Shutdown

Brown

23

Now monitoring

Green

24

Wait for start cond.

Sky blue

25

Unmonitored + Ended

Gray

26

Monitor-end normal

Light green

27

Monitor terminated

Light red

28

Interrupted monitoring

Light green

29

Normal end + False

Light green

30

Start delay

Pink

31

Start delay + Running

Dark pink

32

End delay

Orange

33

End delay + Running

Dark orange

You can use the Preferences dialog box to change the cell colors. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

When a job is configured to retry automatically, no distinction is made between ordinary execution schedules and those initiated by the automatic retry feature. The entire schedule from the initial execution of the job until the retried job ends occupies one cell.

(f) Selection frame

Select an execution schedule in hour units. The selection frame encloses the period from 30 minutes before to 30 minutes after the click position.

(g) Execution result list

Lists only the execution schedules set in the tree area and selection frame and having target IDs (that the Jobnet Monitor window can display). When you click an execution schedule in the list, the contents of the tree area and schedule area will be refreshed to reflect the selected schedule information.

You can change the items displayed in the list area and the display order. For details on how to set the displayed items, see 12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box.

The horizontal sizes of the displayed items are saved when you close the window or you changed the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the unit name.

Start time

Displays the start time or scheduled start time of execution.

End time

Displays the end time of execution.

Status

Displays the latest execution status.

Rerun start time

Displays the time when a job was re-executed. If the job is not rerun, this displays a blank.

Execution type

Displays either of the following: planned execution, fixed execution, and immediate execution.

Start condition

Displays the number of times of execution cancellations and time for execution cancellation if you specify the start condition. If you do not specify the start condition, a blank appears.

Processing time

Displays the time required from the start to end of run. If a job is in execution, this item displays the time that elapses from the start time. If you executed the job again, this item displays the processing time required from the start of rerun.

When a job is configured to retry automatically, different versions of JP1/AJS3 - View calculate the processing time for retried jobs in different ways.

In JP1/AJS3 - View 10-00 or later

The time elapsed from the initial execution of the job is displayed as the processing time.

In JP1/AJS3 - View 09-50 and earlier

The processing time depends on the job status.

No processing time is displayed if the job status is Wait for prev. to end, Being held, or Waiting to execute.

If the job status is Now running or Now queuing, the time elapsed from the initial execution of the job is displayed as the processing time.

Time when start delayed

Displays the time when the start is delayed. If you do not specify the monitoring of the start delay, a blank appears.

Time when end delayed

Displays the time when the end is delayed. If you do not specify the monitoring of the end delay, a blank appears.

Execution ID

Displays the target ID.

Change plan

Displays whether the plans are temporarily changed. If there are plans that have been changed, the type of the change (Change Time, Execution Prohibited, Previous execution prohibited, or Temporary linkage change) is displayed for the plans.

Type

Displays the type of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment you defined in the Define Details dialog box.

Retry status

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the retry status (retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end). If the job has never been retried, this field is blank.

When automatic retry is disabled

This field is blank.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

Retry execution times

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the number of times the job has been retried. If the job has never been retried, 0 is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays 0.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

(2) Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

The following figure shows the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

Figure 12‒199: Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Tree area

Displays only the jobs under a job group or jobnet having schedule information to be displayed.

If a job is under a release target jobnet, the job is displayed in the job-name(release-ID) format for each definition for which release entry is performed. Note that the release ID is not displayed if the release ID is AJS_AUTO.

The name is displayed in the format of job-name:relative-path. The jobs under start conditions are not displayed.

The job names are displayed in the order specified by the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

(b) Display date change buttons

Use one of these buttons to change the date of the currently displayed schedule information. The following buttons are available:

Previous Day button

Displays the schedule of the previous day.

That Day button

Displays the schedule of today.

Next Day button

Displays the schedule of the next day.

Cautionary note

If the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM, these buttons are disabled and cannot be clicked.

(c) Cancel button

Click this button to cancel the display update processing. Normally, this button is disabled. This button is enabled only while a schedule is being obtained.

Cautionary note

If the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM, this button is disabled and cannot be clicked.

(d) Time area

The upper row displays a date, while the lower row displays hours. The system also displays a selection frame.

The value of hours is shown according to what has been selected by the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

On a 24 hours basis:

If the minutes in the base time are 00, the system displays 24 hours from the base time. If they are not 00, the system displays 25 hours from the base time.

On a 48 hours basis:

If the minutes in the base time are 00, the system displays 48 hours from the base time. If they are not 00, the system displays 49 hours from the base time.

(e) Schedule area

Displays cells indicating execution schedules, and a selection frame. Both edges of each cell indicate the start time and the end time, respectively. They indicate schedule time if the job is not executed.

If delay occurs, the upper and lower lines of the cell are displayed thick.

The gray background in the schedule area indicates the past, and the white background indicates the present and future.

The square color indicates the status of job execution. For details about cell colors and status of job execution, see Table 12-50.

You can use the Preferences dialog box to change the cell colors. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

When a job is configured to retry automatically, no distinction is made between ordinary execution schedules and those initiated by the automatic retry feature. The entire schedule from the initial execution of the job until the retried job ends occupies one cell.

(f) Selection frame

Select an execution schedule in hour units. The selection frame encloses the period from 30 minutes before to 30 minutes after the click position.

(g) Execution result list

Lists only the execution schedules set in the tree area and selection frame and having target IDs (that the Jobnet Monitor window can display). When you click an execution schedule in the list, the contents of the tree area and schedule area will be refreshed to reflect the selected schedule information. For details about the displayed items, see the description of the execution result list in (1) Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

12.7.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands the Daily Schedule window supports.

Table 12‒51: Menu commands the Daily Schedule window supports

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

Close

Closes the Daily Schedule window.

--

Edit

Jobnet Editor

Displays the Jobnet Editor window.

--

Schedule#1

Edits a jobnet schedule.

With a jobnet selected, displays the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule dialog box if you choose Add, Change or Copy in the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box if you choose Repeat in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Schedule Settings

Schedule Rule

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings

Operations#2

Register for Execution#3

Registers the jobnet selected in the tree area for execution.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Register for Execution

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Cancel Registration#3

Cancels the execution of the jobnet selected in the tree area during a specified period.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Cancel Registration

Add#4

For a root jobnet, adds an execution schedule at the selected time.

For a nested jobnet or job, adds a non-execution schedule at the selected time.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Add

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Change Plan - Change Time

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected jobnet.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately

Pushes ahead the next execution schedule or fixed execution schedule.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited

Cancels the next execution schedule or fixed execution schedule.

--

Change Plan - Release Change

Cancels the date and time change or execution cancellation of the next execution schedule of a jobnet registered for planned execution, or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold

Sets a hold attribute for a selected schedule.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold-Release

Releases the hold attribute set for a schedule.

--

Change Delay Monitor

Changes how to monitor for a jobnet delay.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily

Change Priority

Changes the priority of a jobnet.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Change Priority

Interrupted

Interrupts jobnet execution.

You can select this only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Kill

Kills the root jobnet or job execution.

--

Rerun

Reruns a jobnet or job.

Rerun

Change Job Status

Changes the job status and return code.

Change Job Status

Change Execution Order Method - Synchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Synchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Change Execution Order Method - Asynchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Asynchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

View

Detailed Information

Displays detailed schedule information on a jobnet or job.

Detailed Schedule

Resize

Resizes the date and schedule areas, and changes display hours in the schedule area.

Resize

Change Display Date - Next Day#5

Displays schedule information for the next day.

--

Change Display Date - Today#5

Displays schedule information for today.

--

Change Display Date - Previous Day#5

Displays schedule information for the previous day.

--

Change Display Date - Specify Day#5

Displays schedule information for a specified day.

Change Display Date

Cancel#6

Cancels the display update processing for schedule information.

--

Display Order - Name

Displays the unit names in the tree area in ascending order for the unit name.

--

Display Order - Execution Time

Starting with the oldest date of execution start shown in the screen, the unit names in the tree area are displayed in ascending order.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs or Hierarchy

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) or (Hierarchy) window.

--

Monthly Schedule

Displays the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet Monitor

Displays the jobnets, or jobs selected in the execution result list, in the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (Hierarchy)#7

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (All Jobs)#7

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Monthly Schedule#7

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Monthly Schedule window.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Jobnet Monitor#7

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window.

Displayed only in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Temporary Changes

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Inherit Result

Displays the resolution result of macro variables that the unit uses in the definition item.

Inherit Result

Wait Conditions Statuses

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Refresh

Refreshes information in the schedule area and the execution result list.

--

Options

Preferences

Sets up an operating environment for JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup

Sets the item to be displayed in the list area of the window.

Display Item Setup

Set Refresh Interval

Sets a time interval to refresh information in the schedule area and the execution result list.

Refresh Interval

Filter

Selects the status of the units to be displayed in the schedule area and execution result list.

Filter Settings

Save Csv Unit Data

Saves the information selected in the execution result list on the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

--

Legend:

-- : Not displayed.

#1

When you click the OK button to close the Schedule Settings dialog box, only the information in the schedule area and execution result list for the jobnet for which the Schedule Settings dialog box was opened is updated to the latest information.

#2

Normally, this item is enabled. It is disabled only while a schedule is being obtained. If this item is disabled, the submenus of this item cannot be selected.

#3

Available only when a root jobnet is selected. Otherwise, it will result in an error.

#4

It will result in an error if a planning group or a jobnet immediately below the planning group is selected.

#5

This item is synchronized with the display date change buttons.

#6

This item is synchronized with the Cancel button.

Normally, this button is disabled. This button is enabled only while a schedule is being obtained.

This item is not displayed when the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM.

#7

If the host of a jobnet connector and the host of a connection-destination jobnet are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

12.7.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Daily Schedule window

The following figure shows the windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Daily Schedule window.

Figure 12‒200: Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Daily Schedule window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

This is not displayed in the Daily Schedule [All Jobs] window.

#2

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#3

This is displayed only for a root jobnet.

#4

This item is replaced with [Hierarchy] when the top window is Daily Schedule [All Jobs], not Daily Schedule [Hierarchy].

#5

This item is replaced with Daily Schedule [Hierarchy] when the top window is Daily Schedule [All Jobs], not Daily Schedule [Hierarchy].

12.7.4 Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

The Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box sets how to monitor a jobnet delay. The following figure shows the Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box.

Figure 12‒201: Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet whose delay monitor method is to be changed.

Base time

Displays the base time for the job group containing the jobnet.

Scheduled start time

Displays the scheduled start time of the specified jobnet.

Scheduled end time

Displays the scheduled end time of the specified jobnet.

Delayed start

Specify this when monitoring the delayed start of the jobnet. The default is the previously set monitoring method. The monitoring method you can specify is different between the root jobnet and a nested jobnet. You can select one of the following items:

Do not monitor

Does not monitor the delayed start.

Absolute time

Specify the absolute time when the monitoring of the delayed start is started.

You can set 0 to 47 for the value of hours and 0 to 59 for the value of minutes. By default, the hours before change and the minutes before change are applicable.

Relative from start of root jobnet

Specify the relative time from the scheduled start time of the root jobnet for the specified jobnet.

Note that the relative time is when the monitoring of delay is started.

For the root jobnet, you cannot specify this item.

Relative from start of upper-l jobnet

Specify the relative time from the scheduled start time of the upper-level jobnet for the specified jobnet.

Note that the relative time is when the monitoring of delay is started.

For the root jobnet, you cannot specify this item.

Relative from start of the jobnet

Specify the minutes since the scheduled start time of the specified jobnet passed until the monitoring of delay is started.

You can set 1 to 2,879 for the value of minutes. By default, the minutes before change are applicable.

Delayed end

Specify this when monitoring the delayed end of the jobnet. The default is the previously set monitoring method. You can specify one of the following monitoring methods.

Do not monitor

Does not monitor the delayed end.

Absolute time

Specify the absolute time when the monitoring of the delayed end is started.

You can set 0 to 47 for the value of hours and 0 to 59 for the value of minutes. By default, the hours before change and the minutes before change are applicable.

Relative from end of root jobnet

Specify the relative time from the scheduled end time of the root jobnet for the specified jobnet.

Note that the relative time is when the monitoring for a delay starts.

For the root jobnet, you cannot specify this item.

Relative from end of upper-l jobnet

Specify the relative time from the scheduled end time of the upper-level jobnet for the specified jobnet.

Note that the relative time is when the monitoring for a delay starts.

For the root jobnet, you cannot specify this item.

Relative from end of the jobnet

Specify the minutes since the scheduled end time of the specified jobnet passed until the monitoring for a delay starts.

You can set 1 to 2,879 for the value of minutes. By default, the minutes before change are applicable.

Monitoring jobnet

When using jobnet execution time to monitor the end of the jobnet, select Time-required-for-execution and specify the time required for execution for the jobnet in minutes. You can specify 1 to 2,879. By default, the contents defined in the Define Details dialog box appear.

12.7.5 Change Priority dialog box

The Change Priority dialog box changes the priority of jobnet execution. The following figure shows the Change Priority dialog box.

Figure 12‒202: Change Priority dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Jobnet name

Displays the name of the jobnet to be changed.

Priority

In the Priority dropdown list, specify the priority of jobnet execution. You can set None, or 1 to 5. The highest priority is 5. The default is the priority preset for the jobnet.

12.7.6 Change Job Status dialog box

The Change Job Status dialog box allows you to change the status of jobs and jobnet connectors, and their return codes. The following figure shows the Change Job Status dialog box.

Figure 12‒203: Change Job Status dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Job name

Displays the name of the job or jobnet connector whose status or return code you want to change.

Current status

Displays the current status of the target job or jobnet connector.

New status

Use the arrow on the right of the drop-down list to select a new status for the job or jobnet connector. The default is Does not change.

If the selected unit is a jobnet connector, only Ended normally, Ended with warning, and Ended abnormally are available.

If the selected unit is an event job, action job, or OR job, Judge by return code is not displayed.

You cannot change the status of a judgment job selected as a unit.

You can select one of the following:

Does not change

Does not change job status.

Ended normally

Sets job status to Ended normally.

Failed to start

Sets job status to Failed to start.

Ended with warning

Sets job status to Ended with warning.

Ended abnormally

Sets job status to Ended abnormally.

Bypassed

Sets job status to Bypassed.

Judge by return code

Judges the status according to the return code, and changes it to a specified return code.

Current return code

Displays the current return code.

If the selected unit is a jobnet connector, no return code is displayed.

New return code

In the right text field, enter a new return code. By default, the return code is not changed. The default is the current return code. You can set values of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.

If the selected unit is a jobnet connector, you cannot enter a return code here.

Supplementary note

You cannot change the status of a judgment job. If you specify a judgment job, choosing OK causes the message KAVV568-E to appear, indicating that the job status does not match the specified conditions.

You cannot change the status of a judgment job and the status of an event job you defined as the start condition. If you specify a judgment job and click the OK button, the message "KAVV568-E This operation cannot be executed for the specified unit's status" appears. If you specify the event job you defined for the start condition and click the OK button, the message "KAVV556-E The unit cannot be operated." appears.

12.7.7 Detailed Schedule dialog box

The Detailed Schedule dialog box displays detailed schedule information on a jobnet or job. The following figure shows the Detailed Schedule dialog box.

Figure 12‒204: Detailed Schedule dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Name

Displays the name of a jobnet or job.

Execution schedule for the selected item

Displays detailed schedule information on the selected jobnet or jobnet.

Status

Displays the status of detailed schedule information on the execution schedule selected in Execution schedule for the selected item.

Some of the statuses shown in the items need special attention as mentioned below.

Scheduled start time

Displays the date and time at which execution requested by the schedule rules takes place, only in the case of jobnets.

Start time

Displays the date and time at which execution is scheduled to start. If the execution has already started, it displays the date and time at which execution started. For a flexible job, the date and time that the relay agent or JP1/AJS3 - Manager sent an execution request to the destination is displayed.

Rerun start time

Displays the date and time at which re-execution took place last, only in the case of jobnets.

When the unit is re-executed, the rerun start time is set for the upper-level jobnet at the rerun start point.

However, the rerun start time is not set for the root jobnet if the root jobnet is being executed. If the root jobnet has terminated and the root jobnet has been specified for the rerun start point, the rerun start time is exclusively set for the root jobnet.

End time

Displays the date and time at which execution is scheduled to end. Otherwise, displays the date and time at which execution ended.

Delay status

If there are a number of delays, the following priority is given to them:

End delay

Nest end delay

Start delay

Nest start delay

Time when start delayed

Displays the date and time at which a start delay is to be monitored.

Time when end delayed

Displays the date and time from which to start monitoring of delayed end.

For jobnets

When an end delay is monitored based on the end time in the schedule, the system assumes the following to be the time from which to start monitoring an end delay: time after the specified number of days and hours from the scheduled start time or absolute time of the scheduled end.

When an end delay is monitored based on the time required for execution, the system assumes the number of days and hours from the start date and time. Therefore, the date and time from which to start detecting an end delay is determined when a jobnet starts to be executed.

If you have specified monitoring of an end delay based on both the scheduled end time and the time required for execution, the earlier time is shown here.

For jobs

When an end delay is monitored based on the time required for execution, the system assumes the number of days and hours from the start date and time. Therefore, the date and time from which to start detecting an end delay is determined when a job starts to be executed.

Execution ID

Displays the execution ID.

Exec. ID (Destination)

Displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet for a jobnet connector.

For the following cases, the Status column displays None.

When no jobnet is connected.

When you do not have reference permission for the connection-destination jobnet.

When an error occurs during referencing of the connection-destination jobnet.

The Status column displays a hyphen (-) for units other than jobnet connectors.

This line appears only for nested jobnets, nested remote jobnets, and jobnet connectors.

Cautionary note

When the jobnet connector is connected to a jobnet under a scheduler service on a different host, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on the host with the connection-destination jobnet beforehand.

Supplementary notes

The following table describes whether this item displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet based on the status of the jobnet.

Table 12‒52: Status of a connection-destination jobnet and whether its execution ID is displayed

Result/schedule

Generation of jobnet connector

Status of connection-destination jobnet

Execution ID

Result

Result

The connection-destination jobnet is not connected.

N

The connection-destination jobnet is connected.

The connection-destination jobnet exists.

Y

The connection-destination jobnet does not exist (deleted when registration is canceled).

Y

Schedule

Fixed

A fixed execution schedule exists for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

The unit type of the connection-destination jobnet is correct.

Y

The unit type of the connection-destination jobnet is invalid.

Y#

A dummy schedule exists for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

N

A dummy schedule does not exist for the connection-destination jobnet on the execution day of the jobnet connector.

N

Dummy schedule

--

N

Legend:

--: Not applicable.

Y: Displayed.

N: None is displayed.

#

When a normal root jobnet or nested jobnet is specified as the connection-destination jobnet (invalid definition), Exec. ID (Destination) displays the execution ID of the connection-destination jobnet for a scheduled generation of the jobnet connector. However, the jobnet enters the Ended abnormally status when it is executed because the definition is invalid. To check whether there are any definition errors, perform a definition pre-check.

For generations without fixed connection, the connection-destination jobnet determines the generation to be connected and Exec. ID (Destination) displays the execution ID for this generation.

At this time, if the connection-destination jobnet exists on a different host, the host with the jobnet connector communicates with the host with the jobnet. If the two hosts are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Detailed Schedule dialog box is displayed, login might be required because the host obtains a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID.

Exec. ID (Destination) displays Unknown when you click Cancel in the Login screen. When Unknown is displayed, redisplay or automatic update of the Detailed Schedule dialog box will not allow the host with the jobnet connector to communicate with the other host where the connection-destination jobnet exists. Therefore, Unknown remains displayed.

If you want to display the execution ID of a connection-destination jobnet in Exec. ID (Destination), click View and then Refresh to update the display.

When the connection between the jobnet connector and the connection-destination jobnet is fixed, this item displays the execution ID of the jobnet without communicating with the host where the connection-destination jobnet exists.

Exec. ID (Source)

Displays the execution ID of the connected jobnet connector for root jobnets only.

A hyphen (-) is displayed for root jobnets for which execution order control is not performed or for remote jobnets.

This item displays None when execution order control is performed but no jobnet connector is connected. This item also displays None when you do not have reference permission for the connected jobnet connector.

This line appears only for root jobnets and root remote jobnets.

Cautionary note

When the connected jobnet connector is under a scheduler service on a different host, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on the host with the jobnet connector beforehand.

Supplementary notes

The following table describes whether this item displays the execution ID of a jobnet connector based on the status of the jobnet connector.

Table 12‒53: Status of a jobnet connector and whether its execution ID is displayed

Result/schedule

Generation of connection-destination jobnet

Status of jobnet connector

Execution ID

Execution order control method

Result

Result

No jobnet connector is connected.

N

Y

A jobnet connector is connected.

The jobnet connector exists.

Y

Y

The jobnet connector does not exist (deleted when registration is canceled).

Y

Y

Schedule

Fixed

A fixed execution schedule exists for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

The unit type of the jobnet connector is correct.

Y

Y

The unit type of the jobnet connector is invalid.

Y#

Y

A dummy schedule exists for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

N

Y

A dummy schedule does not exist for a jobnet connector on the execution day of the connection-destination jobnet.

N

Y

Dummy schedule

--

N

Y

Legend:

--: Not applicable.

Y: Displayed.

N: None is displayed.

#

When a jobnet connector is defined in a normal nested jobnet (invalid definition), Exec. ID (Source) displays the execution ID of the jobnet connector for a scheduled generation of the connection-destination jobnet. However, the jobnet enters the Ended abnormally status when it is executed because the definition is invalid. To check whether there are any definition errors, perform a definition pre-check.

For jobnet generations without fixed connection, the jobnet connector determines the generation to be connected and Exec. ID (Source) displays the execution ID for this generation.

At this time, if the jobnet connector exists on a different host, the host with the jobnet communicates with the host with the jobnet connector. If the two hosts are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Detailed Schedule dialog box is displayed, login might be required because the host obtains a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID.

The Status column displays Unknown when you click Cancel in the Login screen. When Unknown is displayed, redisplay or automatic update of the Detailed Schedule dialog box will not allow the host with the jobnet to communicate with the other host where the jobnet connector exists. Therefore, Unknown remains displayed.

If you want to display the execution ID of a jobnet connector in Exec. ID (Source), click View and then Refresh to update the display.

When the connection between the jobnet and the jobnet connector is fixed, the Status column displays the execution ID of the jobnet connector without communicating with the host where the jobnet connector exists.

Exec. order method

Displays an execution order control method for root jobnets only.

You can temporarily change the execution order control method for each generation. This item displays a method as follows.

When the method is not changed:

Follow the definition. (execution order control method) appears.

When the method is changed from Asynchro to Synchro:

Synchro appears.

When the method is changed from Synchro to Asynchro:

Asynchro appears.

A hyphen (-) is displayed for root jobnets for which execution order control is not performed and for remote jobnets.

This line appears only for root jobnets and root remote jobnets.

Waiting

If the unit has wait conditions, this field shows whether the wait conditions are satisfied.

If there are any conditions waiting to be satisfied:

Displays Yes.

If there are no conditions waiting to be satisfied:

Displays No.

This field shows a hyphen if any of the following apply:

The unit has no wait conditions

The connection target is JP1/AJS2 - Manager or a version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager earlier than 09-50

The JP1/AJS3 - Manager database uses the compatible ISAM configuration

Retry status

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry execution times

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the number of times the job has been retried. If the job has never been retried, 0 is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays 0.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry start time

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the date and time when the job last entered Now running status as a result of an automatic retry, in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry registration time

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the date and time when the job last entered Waiting to execute status as a result of an automatic retry, in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Cautionary note

Note the following when you display the Detailed Schedule dialog box for a generation without fixed connection with a jobnet connector or connection-destination jobnet:

When you specify a jobnet connector or a connection-destination jobnet on the host in a different authentication bloc as the connection destination, you might need to log in to the host containing the destination item in order to obtain a connection source execution ID or connection target execution ID.

Because the local host might need to communicate with the host containing the connection destination unit, you need to start the JP1/AJS3 service on the host with the connection destination item beforehand. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs. You cannot perform other operations before a communication error is detected.

12.7.8 Resize dialog box

The Resize dialog box resizes the date and schedule areas and changes display hours in the schedule area. The following figure shows the Resize dialog box.

Figure 12‒205: Resize dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Width

Changes the column width indicating one hour in the date and schedule areas. You can select Large, Middle or Small. The default is the size displayed in the Daily Schedule window.

Display hours

Select whether to display the schedule area in 24 or 48 hours. The default is hours displayed in the Daily Schedule window.

12.7.9 Change Display Date dialog box

The Change Display Date dialog box specifies a date whose schedule information is displayed in the Daily Schedule window. The following figure shows the Change Display Date dialog box.

Figure 12‒206: Change Display Date dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Date

Specify a date you want to display. The default is the date displayed in the Daily Schedule window.

12.7.10 Inherit Result dialog box

The Inherit Result dialog box displays the results of inheritance in a list format.

The following figure shows the Inherit Result dialog box.

Figure 12‒207: Inherit Result dialog box

Unit name

Displays the target unit name. You cannot edit the Unit name text field.

Execution ID

Displays the target execution generation. You cannot edit the Execution ID text field.

Inherit result

Displays a list of resolution results of the target-unit macro variables used in the definition item in the format of Variable: Inherit result. For the root jobnet, the system displays the passing information specified at the time of registration for execution. Even if the same variable is used repeatedly in the target unit definition, the inherit result will not be displayed repeatedly.

Supplementary notes

Even when the Inherit Result dialog box is displayed, you can operate the windows in the background.

Only an Inherit Result dialog box can be displayed for one unit and one generation from a single window. If you attempt to display another Inherit Result dialog box for the same unit and generation from the same window, the current dialog box comes to the forefront.

The displayed content in the Inherit Result dialog box will not be updated even if you perform operations in the window on the calling side. Such operations include updating automatically, refreshing, changing the monitoring mode, changing the display day, and changing the display month. Therefore, you must display the content again after closing the Inherit Result dialog box.

12.7.11 Filter Settings dialog box

The Filter Settings dialog box selects the job status displayed in the following windows:

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Monthly Schedule window

The following figure shows the Filter Settings dialog box.

Figure 12‒208: Filter Settings dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Use

Specify whether you want to select the condition of displayed unit statuses. The default is Do not use. The following are choices.

Use

Displays the status selected by Filter.

Do not use

Displays all the statuses.

Filter

You can deselect the unit statuses in the following windows by deselecting them in the check boxes. You can also set displayed statuses using the windows.

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window

Monthly Schedule window

By default, all the check boxes are selected.

Waiting to execute

Displays jobs waiting for execution (Wait for start time, Wait for prev. to end, Waiting to execute, Now queuing, and Wait for start cond.).

Shutdown

Displays jobs that are shut down.

Being held

Displays jobs placed in the hold status.

For the JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - View version 08-50 or later, when it is set so that a hold plan is displayed, if you select the Being held status includes hold plan check box in Option, the units to be held is also displayed.

Now running

Displays the running jobs (Now running and Now monitoring).

Running + Warning

Displays jobs that are subject to warning detection (Running + Warning).

Running + Abend

Displays jobs that are subject to error detection (Running + Abend).

Ended normally

Displays jobs that ended normally (Ended normally, Normal end + False, Interrupted monitoring, and Monitor-end normal).

Ended with warning

Displays jobs that ended with a warning (Ended with warning).

Ended abnormally

Displays jobs that ended abnormally (Ended with warning, Invalid exe. seq., Interrupt, Killed, Failed to start, Unknown end status, and Monitor terminated).

Not executed + Ended

Displays jobs that ended without being executed (Skipped so not exe. and Unmonitored + Ended).

All button

Causes all check boxes to be selected.

Clear button

Causes all check boxes to be deselected.

Option

This section appears for JP1/AJS3 - View, or JP1/AJS2 - View 08-50 or later.

Being held status includes hold plan

When you select Being held in Filter and this check box, the system displays the waiting units with the hold attribute (units that are scheduled to be held) together with the units that are being held.

This check box is enabled when you have chosen Display in Hold plan on the General page in the Preferences dialog box. Whether to display the units that are newly specified with the hold attribute is determined based on whether the Only if hold attribute changes check box is selected in Hold plan on the General page in the Preferences dialog box. For details about specifying settings in the Preferences dialog box, see the description about the General page in 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box and 11.3.4 Changing a display color of a unit to be held.

Supplementary note

The units with the hold attribute are in the Waiting to execute status. Therefore, if you select Waiting to execute in Filter, the units with the hold attribute are displayed regardless of whether the Being held status includes hold plan text box is selected.

12.8 Monthly Schedule window

The Monthly Schedule window lets you display and edit the monthly execution schedule for a jobnet.

To display the Monthly Schedule window, use one of the following procedures:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window, from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the Search window, from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule.

In the Wait Conditions Statuses window, from the View menu, choose Monthly Schedule, and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

This section describes the configuration of the Monthly Schedule window, menu commands, transitions of the window, and dialog boxes to be displayed.

12.8.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Monthly Schedule window.

Figure 12‒209: Monthly Schedule window

The following explains the displayed items.

(1) Tree area

Displays the jobnets or jobs under the root jobnet in a tree structure. The units under the remote jobnet, and the manager jobnet are not displayed.

For a release target jobnet, the jobnet is displayed in root-jobnet-name(release-ID) format for each definition for which release entry is performed. Note that the release ID is not displayed if the release ID is AJS_AUTO.

The unit names are displayed in the order specified by the Schedule page in the Preferences dialog box. In the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box, you can also specify whether to view a root jobnet that has no schedule information. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

(2) Time area

The upper row displays dates, and the lower row displays the days of the week. The default is the current date. The gray background indicates the past, while the white background in the time area indicates the present or future. The red characters indicate closed days, while the blue characters indicate open days.

The closed days and open days are displayed according to the calendar information defined for the job group that was selected when starting the Monthly Schedule window.

If you select a jobnet when starting the Monthly Schedule window, the days are displayed according to the calendar information defined for the upper-level job group.

This means that when you select the jobnet, the display of the closed days and open days differs from that for the job group you want to reference even if you set Refer to a calendar of another job group in the Schedule Settings dialog box for the jobnet.

(3) Display month change buttons

Use these buttons to change the month of the currently displayed schedule information. The following buttons are available:

Previous Month button

Displays the schedule of the previous month.

This Month button

Displays the schedule of this month.

Next Month button

Displays the schedule of the next month.

Cautionary note

The buttons are disabled and cannot be operated when the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM.

(4) Cancel button

Click this button to cancel the display update processing. Normally, this button is disabled. This button is enabled only while a schedule is being obtained.

Cautionary note

The button is disabled and cannot be operated when the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM.

(5) Schedule area

Displays the selection frame, and the square (for planned or immediate registration), circle (for fixed registration), or triangle (for unregistered) indicating an execution schedule. The square or circle is displayed at a scheduled date. The triangle is displayed at information of schedule definition. If you set the base time and the start time after 24 hours, up to two days are shifted from the start time.

The start time is displayed differently depending on whether the schedule definition for root jobnets is based on 24 or 48 hours.

If the 24-hour schedule is used and the execution starting time is 25 hours on the 29th day.

The square, circle, or triangle is displayed in the Day 30 column (by handling the execution day as the following day).

If the 48-hour schedule is used and the execution starting time is 25 hours on the 29th day.

The square, circle, or triangle is displayed in the Day 29 column.

For details, see 3.3.2 Defining a schedule in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

The start time is different depending on whether you simulate a schedule. If you specify that a schedule not be simulated, the displayed start time differs from the start time of a daily schedule always simulated. You can set simulation in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

The square indicates an execution schedule registered for planned execution or immediate execution. The circle indicates an execution schedule registered for fixed execution. The triangle indicates an unregistered execution schedule.

If delay occurs, the square or circle is displayed thick.

The gray background in the schedule area indicates the past, and the white background indicates the present and future.

The color of each cell indicates the status of job or jobnet execution. For details about the square colors and the status of job or jobnet execution, see Table 12-50. You can use the Preferences dialog box to change the square colors.

(6) Selection frame

Select an execution schedule per day.

(7) Execution result list

Lists only the execution schedules set in the tree area and selection frame and having target IDs (that can be displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window).

When you click an execution schedule in the list, the contents of the tree area and schedule area will be refreshed to reflect the selected schedule information.

You can change the items displayed in the list area and the display order. For details on how to set the displayed items, see 12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box.

You can also display the execution schedule of unregistered units in the list area. Only unregistered units, even when they lack execution IDs, are displayed. For details about how to display unregistered units in the execution result list, see 11.9.8 Displaying the execution schedule of unregistered units in the execution result list.

The horizontal sizes of the displayed items are saved when you close the window or you change displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the unit name.

Start time

Displays the start time or scheduled start time of execution. When this item has not been registered and a job or start condition is set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

End time

Displays the end time of execution. If this item is not registered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Status

Displays the latest execution status.

Rerun start time

Displays the time when a job was re-executed. If re-execution is not performed or if this item is not registered, a blank is displayed.

Execution type

Displays either of the following: planned execution, fixed execution, and immediate execution. If this item is not registered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Start condition

Displays the number of times of execution cancellation and time for execution cancellation if you specify the start condition. If you do not specify the start condition, a blank appears.

Processing time

Displays the time required from the start to end of run. If a job is in execution, this item displays the time that elapses from the start time. If you executed the job again, this item displays the processing time required from the start of rerun. If this item is not registered, a blank is displayed.

Time when start delayed

Displays the time when the start is delayed. If you do not specify the monitoring of the start delay, a blank appears.

Time when end delayed

Displays the time when the end is delayed. If you do not specify the monitoring of the end delay, a blank appears.

Execution ID

Displays the target ID. If this item is not registered, None is displayed.

Change plan

Displays whether the plans are temporarily changed. If there are plans that have been changed, the type of the change (Change Time, Execution Prohibited, Previous execution prohibited, or Temporary linkage change) is displayed for the plans. If this item is not registered, None is displayed.

Type

Displays the type of a unit.

Comment

Displays the comment you defined in the Define Details dialog box.

Retry status

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the retry status (retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end). If the job has never been retried, this field is blank.

When automatic retry is disabled

This field is blank.

When this item is not registered

This field is blank.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

Retry execution times

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the number of times the job has been retried. If the job has never been retried, 0 is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays 0.

When this item is not registered

This field is blank.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

Supplementary note

If you select Display for Planning group on the Schedule page of the Preferences dialog box and choose a planning group or its upper-level job group, the schedule for the root jobnets immediately below the planning group will be merged for display. For the Monthly Schedule window, the system does not automatically update the information of the schedule area and of the execution result list.

12.8.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands the Monthly Schedule window supports.

Table 12‒54: Menu commands the Monthly Schedule window supports

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

Close

Closes the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Edit

Jobnet Editor

Displays the Jobnet Editor window.

--

Schedule#1

Edits a jobnet schedule.

With a jobnet selected, displays the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule dialog box if you choose Add, Change or Copy in the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box if you choose Repeat in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Schedule Settings

Schedule Rule

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings

Operations#2, #8

Register for Execution#3

Registers the jobnet selected in the tree area for execution.

Register for Execution

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Cancel Registration#3

Cancels the execution of the jobnet selected in the tree area during a specified period.

Cancel Registration

Add#4

Adds an execution schedule at the selected time.

Add

Passing Information

Register Passing Information

Variables Used

Change Plan - Change Time

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected jobnet.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately

Immediately executes the next planned execution schedule or fixed execution schedule for the unit.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited

Cancels the next planned execution schedule or fixed execution schedule.

--

Change Plan - Release Change

Cancels the time change in the next execution schedule or the execution stop of the fixed execution schedule.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold

Sets a hold attribute for a selected schedule.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold-Release

Releases the hold attribute set for a schedule.

--

Change Delay Monitor

Changes how to monitor for a jobnet delay.

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily

Change Priority

Changes the priority of a jobnet.

Change Priority

Interrupted

Interrupts jobnet execution.

--

Kill

Kills the root jobnet or job execution.

--

Rerun

Reruns a jobnet or job.

Rerun

Change Job Status

Changes the job status and return code.

Change Job Status

Change Execution Order Method - Synchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Synchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

--

Change Execution Order Method - Asynchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Asynchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

--

View

Detailed Information

Displays detailed schedule information on a jobnet or job.

Detailed Schedule

Change Display Month - Next Month#5

Displays schedule information for the next month.

--

Change Display Month - This Month#5

Displays schedule information for this month.

--

Change Display Month - Previous Month#5

Displays schedule information for the previous month.

--

Change Display Month - Specify Month#5

Displays schedule information for a specified year and month.

Change Display Month

Cancel#6

Cancels the display update processing for schedule information.

--

Display Order - Name

Displays the unit names in the tree area in ascending order for the unit name.

--

Display Order - Execution Time

Starting with the oldest date of execution start shown in the screen, the unit names in the tree area are displayed in ascending order.

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy#8

Displays the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs#8

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Jobnet Monitor#8

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for the jobnet or job selected in the execution result list.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (Hierarchy)#7, #8

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (All Jobs)#7, #8

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Monthly Schedule#7, #8

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Jobnet Monitor#7, #8

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Temporary Changes#8

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Inherit Result#8

Displays the resolution result of macro variables that the unit uses in the definition item.

Inherit Result

Wait Conditions Statuses#8

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Unregistered Schedules#9

Displays or hides the execution schedule of unregistered units.

--

Refresh

Refreshes information in the schedule area and the execution result list.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup

Sets the items displayed in the list area of the window.

Display Item Setup

Filter

Selects the status of the unit to be listed in the execution result list as well as the schedule area.

Filter Settings

Save Csv Unit Data

Saves the information selected in the execution result list on the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

--

Legend:

-- : Not displayed.

#1

When you click the OK button to close the Schedule Settings dialog box, only the information in the schedule area and execution result list for the jobnet for which the Schedule Settings dialog box was displayed is updated to the latest information.

#2

Normally, this item is enabled. It is disabled only while a schedule is being obtained. If this item is disabled, the submenus of this item cannot be selected.

#3

Available only when a root jobnet is selected. Otherwise, it will result in an error.

#4

It will result in an error if either of a planning group or a jobnet immediately below the planning group is selected.

#5

This item is synchronized with the display month change buttons.

#6

This item is synchronized with the Cancel button.

Normally, this button is disabled. This button is enabled only while a schedule is being obtained.

This item is not displayed when the version of the connection target JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or earlier, or the scheduler database for the connection target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is ISAM.

#7

If the host of a jobnet connector and the host of a connection-destination jobnet are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

#8

This menu command is not displayed in the Monthly Schedule - Confirm Schedule window.

#9

When the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or earlier or the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager uses a compatible ISAM configuration, this menu command cannot be selected.

12.8.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Monthly Schedule window

The following figure shows the windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Monthly Schedule window.

Figure 12‒210: Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Monthly Schedule window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#2

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.7 Daily Schedule window.

12.8.4 Change Display Month dialog box

The Change Display Month dialog box sets the year and month whose schedule information appears in the Monthly Schedule window. The following figure shows the Change Display Month dialog box.

Figure 12‒211: Change Display Month dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Month

Specify the year and month you want to display. The default is the month displayed in the Monthly Schedule window.

12.9 Jobnet Monitor window

The Jobnet Monitor window is used to monitor the status and results of jobnet execution.

The Jobnet Monitor window displays jobnets for the generation that was specified in the window from which the Jobnet Monitor window was displayed. However, if the window from which the Jobnet Monitor window was displayed was the JP1/AJS3 - View window (the Main window), you can, by specifying the monitoring mode, change the information displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window to either of the following:

The generation that was specified in the window from which the Jobnet Monitor window was displayed

The latest status and results

The monitoring mode can be set from the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42(2) Main page.

To display the Jobnet Monitor window, use one of the following procedures:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor, and then Status, Result, or Next Schedule.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor.

In the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor.

In the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window, from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor.

In the Monthly Schedule window, from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor.

In the Search window, from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor.

In the Wait Conditions Statuses window, from the View menu, choose Jobnet Monitor and then Unit with Wait Conditions or Waiting-target unit.

This section describes the configuration of the Jobnet Monitor window, menu commands, and transitions of the window.

12.9.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Jobnet Monitor window.

Figure 12‒212: Jobnet Monitor window

The following explains the displayed items.

(1) Tree area

Hierarchically displays the jobnet being defined.

For a release target jobnet, the jobnet is displayed in the root-jobnet-name(release-ID) format for each definition for which release entry is performed. Note that the release ID is not displayed if the release ID is AJS_AUTO.

(2) Map area

Displays information on the jobnet selected in the tree area.

If you have chosen wallpaper for each unit from Set Wall Paper in the Options menu, or if you have set additional, customized wallpaper, it appears as a background image. For details, see 12.4.43 Wall Paper dialog box and 11.5.6 Changing the background image of the map area.

If you specify Selected for Unit name new line in the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box, you can specify the line-feed location of the unit name.

If you have selected Yes for Display comments in the Editor/Monitor page of the Preferences dialog box, the comment set in the Define Details dialog box will also appear. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Jobnet

Displays the relative or full name of the jobnet currently displayed in the map area. You can edit the file ajs2view_opt.conf in order to determine whether to display the relative or full name for the jobnet. For details, see 11.5 Customizing the Jobnet Editor window.

(3) List area

Lists the basic information about the units displayed in the map area. You can minimize the list area by clicking View, List Area, and then Minimum.

You can change the items displayed in the list area and the order in which they appear. For details about how to set the display items, see 12.3.46 Display Item Setup dialog box.

Unit name

Displays the icon and name of a unit. The icons are displayed in the colors corresponding to their status or result.

Specify the colors for icons on the General page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Comment

Displays the comment defined in the Define Details dialog box for the unit.

Type

Displays the type of the unit.

Status

Displays the execution status.

Delay status

Displays the delay status.

Retry status

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the retry status (retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end). If the job has never been retried, this field is blank.

When automatic retry is disabled

This field is blank.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

Retry execution times

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the number of times the job has been retried. If the job has never been retried, 0 is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays 0.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later.

12.9.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands the Jobnet Monitor window supports.

Table 12‒55: Menu commands the Jobnet Monitor window supports

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box displayed

File

Close

Closes the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Edit

Schedule

Edits a jobnet schedule.

With a jobnet selected, displays the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule dialog box if you choose Add, Change or Copy in the Schedule Settings dialog box.

Displays the Schedule Rule Repetition Settings dialog box if you choose Repeat in the Schedule Rule dialog box.

Schedule Settings

Schedule Rule

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings

Search

Displays the Search window for the units defined in the hierarchy displayed in the map area.

--

Simple Search - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Search window to search for units with wait conditions that specify the selected unit as a unit whose end is to be waited for.

--

Operations

Change Plan - Change Time

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected jobnet.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately

Immediately executes the next planned execution schedule or fixed execution schedule for the unit.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited

Cancels the next planned execution schedule or fixed execution schedule.

--

Change Plan - Release Change

Cancels the time change or execution cancellation in the next planned execution schedule.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold

Sets the hold attribute in the unit selected in the tree area or map area.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold-Release

Cancels the hold attribute in the unit selected in the tree area or map area.

--

Change Delay Monitor

Changes how to monitor for a jobnet delay.

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily

Change Priority

Changes the priority of a jobnet.

Change Priority

Interrupted

Interrupts jobnet execution.

--

Kill

Kills the root jobnet or job execution.

--

Rerun

Reruns a jobnet or job.

Rerun

Change Job Status

Changes the job status and return code.

Change Job Status

Change Execution Order Method - Synchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Synchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

--

Change Execution Order Method - Asynchro

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the connection-destination jobnet to Asynchro. This operation can be performed for the generations of the connection-destination jobnet.

--

View

Detailed Information

Checks detailed information about the status and results of jobnet or job execution.

When you click the Details button in the Monitor Details dialog box, the Execution Result Details dialog box appears.

Displays the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Monitor Details - [icon-name]

Execution Result Details

Define Details - [icon-name]

Open Jobnet

Displays the elements under a jobnet selected in the map area.

--

Upper Jobnet

Displays the upper-level jobnet for the jobnet displayed in the map area.

--

Highlighted Display - Only Preceding

Highlights only directly or indirectly preceding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Only Succeeding

Highlights only directly or indirectly succeeding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Preceding and Succeeding

Highlights only directly or indirectly preceding or succeeding units of basic units.

--

Highlighted Display - Release

Cancels highlighting.

--

Only Execution Units

Enables or disables the executing unit display feature.

When you enable this feature, the dialog box displays those units that were executed or are scheduled to execute today in the standard way, and dims all other units and relation lines.

--

Zoom

Zooms in or out of the map area.

Zoom

Monitor Mode - Fixed Monitor

Monitors the jobnet without updating the execution generation being monitored.

--

Monitor Mode - Monitor Last Status

Monitors the latest job status in the root jobnet.

--

Monitor Mode - Monitor Last Result

Monitors the latest job results in the root jobnet.

--

List Area - Minimum

Minimizes the list area.

--

List Area - Restore

Restores the list area to the original size when it was minimized.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy

Displays the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Monthly Schedule

Displays the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (Hierarchy)#

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Daily Schedule (All Jobs)#

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Monthly Schedule#

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet for Destination - Jobnet Monitor#

Displays the connection-destination jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Temporary Changes

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Inherit Result

Displays the resolution result of macro variables that the unit uses in the definition item.

Inherit Result

Wait Conditions Statuses

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

Refresh

Refreshes information on the jobnet displayed in the map area.

--

Options

Preferences

Sets up an operating environment for JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup

Configure the items displayed in the list area.

Display Item Setup

Set Refresh Interval

Sets intervals at which map area information is refreshed automatically.

Refresh Interval

Set Wall Paper

Sets an image file as the wallpaper of the map area for individual units.

Wall Paper

Save Full Unit Name

Saves in the system clipboard the full path name of the selected unit having a scheduler service name.

Example

AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data

Saves the information selected in the list area in the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

The Web browser starts, displaying the contents of the online help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

--

Legend:

-- : Not displayed.

#

If the host of a jobnet connector and the host of a connection-destination jobnet are managed by different authentication servers, login is required.

12.9.3 Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Monitor window

The following figure shows the windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Monitor window.

Figure 12‒213: Windows and dialog boxes displayed from the Jobnet Monitor window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#2

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.7 Daily Schedule window.

#3

The Monitor Details - [icon - name] dialog box is displayed. For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#4

The Define Details - [icon - name] dialog box is displayed. For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window or 12.4 Jobnet Editor window.

#5

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.4 Jobnet Editor window.

12.9.4 Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box

The Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box displays detailed information on the status and results of the execution for the selected unit (except jobnets, remote jobnets, and jobnet connectors). For details about the Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box, the Monitor Details - [Remote Jobnet] dialog box, and Monitor Details - [Jobnet Connector] dialog box, see 12.3.38 Monitor Details - [Jobnet] dialog box.

The following figure shows the Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Figure 12‒214: Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Unit name

Displays the full name of a unit.

Status

Displays the status of the unit.

Change plan

Displays whether any plan in the unit has been changed temporarily.

Hold

Displays whether to hold the execution of the unit.

The displayed information differs depending on the hold setting. The following table lists the character strings that can be displayed and the corresponding hold settings.

Table 12‒56: Hold statuses displayed in the Monitor Details - [icon-name] dialog box and their corresponding hold settings

Status

Hold setting

Follow the definition. (Hold)

Yes is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Do not hold)

No is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Yes

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold is selected.

None

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold-Release is selected.

Start time

Displays the start time of the execution of the unit. For a flexible job, the date and time that the relay agent or JP1/AJS3 - Manager sent an execution request to the destination is displayed.

End time

Displays the end time of the execution of the unit.

Delay status

Displays the delay status of the unit.

Time when end delayed

Displays the date and time from which to start monitoring of delayed end.

Monitoring of delayed end based on time required for execution starts after the specified number of days and hours from the start time. Therefore, the date and time from which to start detecting an end delay is determined when a job starts to be executed.

End delayed

Displays whether end delay has occurred.

Time when job registered

Displays the time when the job was registered for execution.

Job number

Displays a job number.

Return code

Displays a job return code. For details about the return code of a job, see 7.10.3 Checking the return code of a job in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Target host

Displays the name of the host in which the unit was executed actually. For a flexible job, the relay agent name or manager host name is displayed.

Waiting

If the unit has wait conditions, this field shows whether the wait conditions are satisfied.

If there are any conditions waiting to be satisfied:

Displays Yes.

If there are no conditions waiting to be satisfied:

Displays None.

This field shows a hyphen if any of the following apply:

The unit has no wait conditions

The connection target is JP1/AJS2 - Manager or a version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager earlier than 09-50

The JP1/AJS3 - Manager database uses the compatible ISAM configuration

Retry status

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry execution times

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the number of times the job has been retried. If the job has never been retried, 0 is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays 0.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry start time

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the date and time when the job last entered Now running status as a result of an automatic retry, in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Retry registration time

The following is displayed for Unix jobs, PC jobs, Queue jobs, flexible jobs, HTTP connection jobs, standard custom jobs, custom PC jobs, and custom Unix jobs:

When automatic retry is enabled

Displays the date and time when the job last entered Waiting to execute status as a result of an automatic retry, in the format YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss. If the job has never been retried, None is displayed.

When automatic retry is disabled

Displays None.

For the following units, a hyphen (-) is displayed:

Units other than the above types

Units whose connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager version is earlier than 10-00

Units for which the JP1/AJS3 - Manager database is a compatible ISAM configuration

This item does not appear if either of the following applies:

The version of JP1/AJS3 - View is earlier than 10-00

The unit is a root jobnet, nested jobnet, root remote jobnet, nested remote jobnet, or jobnet connector

Execution result details

If you click Details button, the Execution Result Details dialog box appears.

For more information, see 12.3.39 Execution Result Details dialog box.

Start button

Launches an external program to check the execution status of a custom job.

To display the Start button, you need to enter a setting in the custom job extended settings file. For details, see 11.7.16 Setting whether the Start button is displayed in the Monitor Details dialog box and which external program it launches.

Supplementary notes

The external program is subject to the permissions of the OS user who started JP1/AJS3 - View on the JP1/AJS3 - View host.

JP1/AJS3 - View does not wait for the external program to finish executing.

Clicking the Start button multiple times launches the external program an equivalent number of times.

The external program must not output to standard output or standard error output.

Edit Def button

Displays the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box that defines the details of the unit. For details, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window or 12.4 Jobnet Editor window.

12.10 Search window

The Search window allows you specify a condition and find the target unit.

To display the Search window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), choose Edit and then Search.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), choose Edit and then Search.

In the Jobnet Editor window, choose Edit and then Search.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose Edit and then Search.

This section describes the configuration of the Search window, menu commands, transitions of the window, and dialog boxes to be displayed.

12.10.1 Configuration of the window

The items to be displayed in the Search window differ depending on whether the connection target is JP1/AJS3 - Manager 09-00 or later, or JP1/AJS2 - Manager 08-50 or earlier. The following describes the configuration of the window for each case.

(1) When the connection target is JP1/AJS3 - Manager 09-00 or later

The following figure shows the Search window.

Figure 12‒215: Search window

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Search condition setting area

In this area, you specify a search condition. If you specify multiple conditions, they are used as AND conditions. You can save the search conditions you have specified. A maximum of 32 search conditions can be saved.

Search location and Search object are mandatory. You can specify any of the listed types of conditions. To specify a search condition, select the applicable check box, and select or enter a value. The check boxes are not selected by default.

Save button

Displays the Save Search Condition dialog box to allow you to save search conditions. For details about the Save Search Condition dialog box, see 12.10.4 Save Search Condition dialog box.

Delete button

Deletes a search condition saved with the name shown in the Search Condition drop-down list.

Search Condition drop-down list

When search conditions are saved, you can select a desired search condition from this list. The drop-down list displays (Default) and the names of saved search conditions in the sequence they were recently used. If no search condition is saved, the list displays only (Default).

When you select (Default), the content of the search condition setting area returns to the default status.

When you select the name of a saved search condition, the selected search condition appears in the search condition setting area.

Note that Search location displays the same value and its status remains the same regardless of what is selected from the drop-down list.

Cautionary note

If you select another search condition or (Default) from the Search Condition drop-down list while you are editing a search condition, the settings of the search condition being edited are discarded. If you do not want to discard the settings of the currently edited search condition, click the Save button to save the search condition.

Search location

Specify the full name of the upper-level unit of the search target. Use a character string of up to 961 bytes. By default, this text box displays the full name of the unit selected in the tree area in the window from which the Search window was started. You can also click the ... button to display the Search Location dialog box, and specify the upper-level unit of the search target.

Note that you cannot specify the following characters:

; (semicolon)

=

(

)

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

If you want to find all the units under the unit displayed in Search location, select the Search lower units check box. The check box is not selected by default. If you perform the search without selecting the Search lower units check box, the system finds only the units directly under the search target unit.

Cautionary notes

When you select the Search lower units check box, if you do not specify a unit name in Unit name and perform the search, search processing might take some time.

When you display the Search window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), make sure that you select one unit in the summary list. If you do not select any unit in the summary list, an error occurs. When you display the Search window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), Jobnet Editor window, or Jobnet Monitor window, something is always selected in the tree area and this error will not occur.

Search object

Specify the range of search targets. You can select either of the following:

Definition

The system searches for only the definitions of units. The system does not search for the execution status or generation numbers of units.

Definition & Status

The system searches for the definitions and status of units, taking the execution status and generation numbers of units into account.

The default setting differs depending on the window from which the Search window starts. When you start the Search window from the Jobnet Editor window, the default setting is Definition. When you start the Search window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window or Jobnet Monitor window, the default setting is Definition & Status.

Unit name

Use a character string of a maximum of 30 bytes to specify a unit name. This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and perform the search, an error occurs.

You cannot specify the following characters:

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

/ (forward slash)

=

(

)

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. The following table lists the available match methods and details about each method. The default method is Equals.

Table 12‒57: Match methods (for character strings)

No.

Match method

Description

1

Equals

The target name must completely match the search condition.

2

Begins with

The target name must begin with the search condition.

3

Ends with

The target name must end with the search condition.

4

Does not equal

The target name must not match the search condition.

5

Contains

The target name must contain the search condition.

6

Does not contain

The target name must not contain the search condition.

7

Regular expression

The search condition is treated as a regular expression.

When the match method is Regular expression, you can use a character string of a maximum of 64 bytes to specify the name of the unit to be found. The following table lists the symbols and examples you can specify as a search condition when the match method is Regular expression.

Table 12‒58: Symbols and examples you can specify as a search condition when the match method is regular expression

Symbol

Meaning

Specification example

Search example

?

Any one character

A?

AB, A1, A?, A*, A\

?E

DE, 1E, ?E, *E, \E

*

Any character string

B*

B, BC, B12, B?*\

\

A symbol immediately after this is treated as a character.#

C\?

Only C?

#

An error occurs if you specify \ at the end of a character string.

Comment

Use a character string of a maximum of 80 bytes to specify the comment defined for a unit. This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you select Equals from the drop-down list as the match method, leave the text box blank and perform the search, the system finds units for which no comment is defined.

You cannot specify the following characters:

Tab character

Linefeed character

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available options, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 164 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Unit type

Select the unit type of the search target from the left drop-down list.

You can select a category of unit types from the left drop-down list by default. If you want to select a specific unit type from the drop-down list, select the Details check box. The Details check box is not selected by default.

The following table lists available unit type categories and individual unit types you can search for with each category. The default setting is Job Group etc..

Table 12‒59: Available unit type categories and unit types you can search for

No.

Available unit type category

Unit type you can search for

1

Job Group etc.

Job Group

Planning Group

Manager Job Group

2

Root Jobnet etc.

Root Jobnet

Root Remote Jobnet

Manager Jobnet

3

Jobnet etc.

Root Jobnet

Root Remote Jobnet

Manager Jobnet

Nest Jobnet

Nest Remote Jobnet

4

Standard Job

Unix Job

PC Job

Queue Job

OR Job

Judgment Job

Flexible Job#3

HTTP Connection Job#3

5

Event Job#1

Receive JP1 Event Job

Monitoring Files Job

Receive Mail Job

Receive MQ Message Job

Receive MSMQ Message Job

Monitoring Log Files Job

Monitoring Event Log Job

Interval Control Job

6

Action Job

Send JP1 Event Job

Send Mail Job

Send MQ Message Job

Send MSMQ Message Job

OpenView Status Report Job

Local Power Control Job

Remote Power Control Job

7

Custom Job#2

Custom Job

Passing information setting job

8

Job etc.

All jobs that fall under No. 4 to 7

Note

You can specify a jobnet connector only when you select the Details check box.

#1

When you have selected Event Job from the left drop-down list, or you have selected the Details check box and specified a job in the event job category, you can select a range of event jobs you can search from the right drop-down list.

The available options are as follows. The default setting is All.

All

Searches all event jobs.

Start Condition

Searches only the event jobs under the start condition directory (.CONDITION).

#2

You can specify a custom job only when the Details check box is not selected.

#3

Flexible Job and HTTP Connection Job appear when the version of JP1/AJS3 - View and the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 11-00 or later.

Definition page

Specify the search conditions regarding the definitions of units.

The following figure shows the Definition page:

Figure 12‒216: Definition page in the Search window

The following explains the search conditions on the Definition page.

Owner

Use a character string of a maximum of 31 bytes to specify the owner of units. This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you select Equals as the match method from the drop-down list, leave the text box blank and perform the search, the system finds units that are not associated with owners.

You cannot specify the following characters:

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

/ (forward slash)

=

(

)

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 66 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

JP1 resource group

Use a character string of a maximum of 63 bytes to specify the JP1 resource group for the units. This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you select Equals as the match method from the drop-down list, leave the text box blank and perform the search, the system finds units that are not defined with JP1 resource groups.

You cannot specify the following characters:

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

/ (forward slash)

=

(

)

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

. (period)

' (single quotation mark)

" (double quotation mark)

#

$

%

&

~

|

[

]

@

<

>

{

}

+

!

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 130 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Last updated

Specify the year, month, day, hour, and minute when units were updated last. This section is blank by default.

The following table lists the values you can specify.

Table 12‒60: Values you can specify as the time of last update

No.

Time

Specifiable value

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

2

Month

1 to 12

3

Day

1 to the last day of the selected month

4

Hour

0 to 23

5

Minute

0 to 59

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

The following table lists the operations to be performed when you select this check box and leave some or all of the boxes of time specification blank.

Table 12‒61: Operations to be performed when part or all of time specification is blank

No.

Type of time specification

Operation to be performed during search

1

All boxes of the year, month, day, hour, and minutes are blank.

An error occurs.

2

The year, month, and day are specified but the hour and minute are blank.

The system finds units from 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 on the specified year, month, and day.

3

The hour and minutes are specified but the year, month, and day are blank.

The system finds units from 00 seconds to 59 seconds at the specified time on the day when Search button is clicked.

4

One or multiple boxes of the year, month and day combination, and one or both boxes of the hour and minute combination are blank.

An error occurs.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. The following table lists available match methods and their descriptions. The default setting is Equals.

Table 12‒62: Match methods (for dates)

No.

Match method

Description

1

Equals

The system finds units that match the specified date and time.

2

Former

The system finds units before the specified date and time.

3

After

The system finds units after the specified date and time.

The following table describes the possible search time range for each combination of the year-month-day group or hour-minute group and a match method.

Table 12‒63: Search time range for different combinations of time specification and match methods

No.

Year, month, day

Hour, minute

Match method

Possible search time range

1

Y

Y

Equals

The system finds units from 00 seconds to 59 seconds at the specified time on the specified date.

2

Y

Y

Former

The system finds units before 59 seconds at the specified time on the specified date.

3

Y

Y

After

The system finds units after 00 seconds at the specified time on the specified date.

4

Y

N

Equals

The system finds units from 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 on the specified date.

5

Y

N

Former

The system finds units before 23:59:59 on the specified date.

6

Y

N

After

The system finds units after 00:00:00 on the specified date.

7

N

Y

Equals

The system finds units from 00 seconds to 59 seconds at the specified time on the day when the Search window is displayed.

8

N

Y

Former

The system finds units before 59 seconds at the specified time on the day when the Search window is displayed.

9

N

Y

After

The system finds units after 00 seconds at the specified time on the day when the Search window is displayed.

Legend:

Y: Specified.

N: Not specified.

Exec-agent

Use a character string of a maximum of 255 bytes to specify the execution agent name or execution agent group name defined for units. This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you select Equals from the drop-down list as the match method, leave the text box blank and perform the search, the system finds units with detailed definitions containing no execution agent names.

You cannot specify tab characters.

You can also use this search condition to match the execution host of a queueless job.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Exec-agent is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

- Jobnet Connector

- OR Job

- Judgment Job

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 514 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

If no execution agent is defined for a unit, the system assumes the execution agent of the upper-level unit. If you want to search for the definitions or status of units taking the execution agents of upper-level units into account, select the Search for exec-agent in upper jobnet check box. The check box is not selected by default.

File name

Use a character string of a maximum of 511 bytes to specify the execution file name defined in a PC job, Queue job, or flexible job, or the script file name defined in a Unix job.

When you specify this condition, the search will target PC jobs, Queue jobs, Unix jobs, and flexible jobs. This text box is available when you have selected one of the following items in Unit type:

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Standard Job

- Job etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Unix Job

- PC Job

- Queue Job

- Flexible Job

This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and choose Equals as the match method, the search will target PC jobs, Queue jobs, and Unix jobs for which no execution file name is defined.

You cannot specify tab characters.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 1,026 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Cautionary note

Specifying this condition excludes custom PC jobs and custom Unix jobs as search targets.

Parameters

Specify the parameters defined in a PC job, Queue job, Unix job, or flexible job, as a character string of no more than 1,023 bytes. When you specify this condition, the search will target PC jobs, Queue jobs, Unix jobs and flexible jobs. This text box is available when you have selected one of the following in Unit type.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Standard Job

- Job etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Unix Job

- PC job

- Queue Job

- Flexible Job

This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and choose Equals as the match method, the search will target PC jobs, Queue jobs, Unix jobs, and flexible jobs for which no execution file name is defined.

You cannot specify tab characters.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 2,050 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Cautionary note

Specifying this condition excludes custom PC jobs and custom Unix jobs as search targets.

Release

Specify release information about units. Select the type of release information you want to use for your search from the drop-down list.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, the drop-down list is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Root remote Jobnet

- Manager Jobnet

- Nest Remote Jobnet

You can select either of the following from the drop-down list as the desired type of release information. The default setting is Date.

Date

Allows you to specify the year, month, day, hour, and minutes of release. All the boxes are blank by default. For details about the values you can specify, see Table 12-60.

For details about the operations to be performed when you select this check box and leave part or all of the boxes of time specification blank, see Table 12-61.

You can select a match method from the lower drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-62 and Table 12-63. The default setting is Equals.

ID

Allows you to specify a release ID in 30 or fewer bytes. The text box is blank by default. However, when you start the Search window while displaying a release target jobnet in the Jobnet Editor window, this text box displays the release ID of the release target jobnet displayed in the Jobnet Editor window.

When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and perform the search, an error occurs.

You cannot specify the following characters:

- Single-byte space

- (

- )

- , (comma)

- : (colon)

- ; (semicolon)

- =

- / (forward slash)

- Tab character

- Linefeed character

- ' (single quotation mark)

- " (double quotation mark)

- &

- *

- <

- >

- ?

- [

- \

- ]

- ^

- {

- |

- }

- ~

Reference calendar

If the unit references the calendar of another job group, specify the job group name (as specified in Job group name in the Schedule Settings dialog box) as a character string of no more than 930 bytes.

You can specify this item when one of the following is selected in Unit type:

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Root Jobnet etc.

- Jobnet etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Root Jobnet

- Root Remote Jobnet

- Nest Jobnet

- Nest Remote Jobnet

The default is blank. When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and choose Equals as the match method, the search will target units that do not reference a calendar of another job group.

You cannot specify the following characters:

(

)

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

=

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 1,864 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Waiting-target

Specify the name of the unit whose end is to be waited for, as defined in the wait conditions for the unit. Use a character string no longer than 930 bytes. The default is blank. When you select this check box, if you leave the text box blank and choose Equals as the match method, the search will target units without wait conditions assigned.

You cannot specify the following characters:

(

)

; (semicolon)

=

Single-byte space

Tab character

Linefeed character

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, this item is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

- Nest Remote Jobnet

- OR Job

- Judgment Job

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 1,864 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Retry Settings

From the drop-down list, select whether to use retry settings as a search condition.

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later. You cannot use retry settings as a search condition if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is earlier than 10-00, or the database is a compatible ISAM configuration.

You can specify this item when one of the following is selected in Unit type:

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Standard Job

- Custom Job

- Job etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Unix Job

- PC Job

- Queue Job

- Flexible Job

- HTTP Connection Job

You can select one of the following from the drop-down list. The default is Yes.

Yes

The system finds units configured to retry automatically.

None

The system finds units that are not configured to retry automatically.

Status page

Specify the search conditions for the execution status of units.

All the search conditions displayed on this page are disabled when Definition is selected in Search object.

The following figure shows the Status page:

Figure 12‒217: Status page in the Search window

The following explains the search conditions on the Status page.

Generation

Select the desired type or ID of the target generation from the drop-down list. Note that the system does not search dummy schedules and schedules that are suppressed from execution. If you do not select a check box, the system searches all execution generations.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Generation is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

You can select one of the following from the drop-down list as the desired type or ID of the target generation:

Latest status

The system finds the generations of the latest status.

The system determines such generations based on the value set for the VIEWSTATUSRANGE environment setting parameter of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager to which you are currently logged in. The following describes the relationship between a value set for the environment setting parameter and the precedence of generations.

For VIEWSTATUSRANGE=all (default)

1. Execution generation whose start date and time or re-execution start date and time are closest to the current time

2. Scheduled generation that was re-executed and is waiting

3. Scheduled generation that will be executed next time or a generation in the Shutdown status

For VIEWSTATUSRANGE=today#

1. Execution generation whose start date and time or re-execution start date and time are closest to the current time

2. Scheduled generation that was re-executed and is waiting

3. Generation to be executed next time among the scheduled generations of today or a generation in the Shutdown state

4. Generation whose end date and time are closest to the current time among the result generations that have finished execution today

#: For VIEWSTATUSRANGE=today, the system will not search the root jobnets in the Not sched. to exe. status.

Latest result

The system finds the generations whose end date and time are closest to the current time.

Specify period

The system finds the generations associated with the specified period.

This item appears when the version of JP1/AJS3 - View and the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 09-10 or later.

After you select this check box, you can specify when the period you want to search begins and ends.

The following table lists the values you can specify. By default, the start time is 00:00 and the end time is 23:59.

Table 12‒64: Values specifiable in dates and times

No

Field

Specifiable values

1

Year

1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter#

2

Month

1 to 12

3

Day

1 to last day of selected month

4

Hour

0 to 23

5

Minute

0 to 59

#

For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, the range of specifiable values is from 1994 to 2036.

An error occurs if:

- You omit the year, month, day, hour, and minute fields.

- You omit any one or two of the year, month, and day fields (you can omit all three).

- You omit either of the hour and minute fields.

- The start date of the period is later than the end date.

- You specify a value outside the specifiable range.

If you leave the year, month, and day fields empty, the system uses the date on which the search is conducted.

The search finds generations whose root jobnet overlaps with the specified period, even in part. If the root jobnet has no start or end time, the system assumes the values listed in the following table according to the root jobnet status.

Table 12‒65: Assumed values for start and end times by root jobnet status

No.

Category

Root jobnet status

Value assumed for start and end times

1

Scheduled generation

Wait for start time

Being held

Because the generation has not yet started executing, the system uses the scheduled start date and time as the start and end dates.

If the scheduled start date and time has already passed, the system assumes the current date and time.#

2

Executing generation

Now running

Now monitoring

Running + Warning

Running + Abend

Wait for start cond.

Because the generation has not yet finished executing, the system uses the current date and time as the end date. However, if the root jobnet is in Wait for start cond. status, the system uses the current date and time as the start and end dates.#

3

Result generation

Ended normally

Ended with warning

Ended abnormally

Interrupted

Killed

Invalid exe. seq.

Skipped so not exe.

Monitor-end normal

Unmonitored + Ended

Monitor terminated

Interrupted monitoring

--

The search is conducted using the actual start and end dates and times#.

#

If the root jobnet was rerun, the system uses the start date of the first run. This applies regardless of how many times the root jobnet is rerun.

Searches made with information in the Specify period fields obey the time zone in effect when the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager started. For this reason, we recommend that you use the same time zone as JP1/AJS3 - Manager for JP1/AJS3 - View. For details about how to match time zones between hosts, see 2.4.1 Time zones in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

When specifying a search period, exercise caution if JP1/AJS3 - Manager operates in a time zone affected by daylight saving time.

The following figure shows an example of North American Eastern Time (TZ=EST5EDT) in 2010.

Figure 12‒218: Example of switching from standard to daylight saving time

If JP1/AJS3 - Manager is subject to North American Eastern Time, when the time reaches 2:00 on 2010/3/14, it jumps to 3:00 on 3/14 (daylight saving time). This eliminates the time period from 2:00 to 2:59:59 on 2010/3/14 (standard time) (see (1) in Figure 12-218). If you specify a time from 2:00 to 2:59:59 on 2010/3/14 in Specify period, the search is conducted as if 3/14 3:00 daylight saving time were specified.

On the other hand, upon reaching 2:00 on 2010/11/7, the time jumps to 1:00 on 2010/11/7 in standard time. In this scenario, the time period from 1:00 to 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 occurs in both standard and daylight saving time (see (2) in Figure 12-218). If you specify a time from 1:00 to 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 in Specify period, the system assumes 1:00 to 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 in daylight saving time. However, if you specify 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 as the end time in Specify period, the period until 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 in standard time is searched. To search for generations associated with the time period from 1:00 to 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 in standard time, specify 1:59:59 on 2010/11/7 as the end time in Specify period.

Specify generation (execution-ID)

The system finds the generation with a specific execution ID. You can select this option when you display the Search window from the Jobnet Monitor window. execution-ID is replaced by the execution ID of the generation displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window.

The default selection differs depending on the window from which the Search window starts. The following describes the default selection for each window.

When the Search window starts from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window):

Latest status appears.

When the Search window starts from the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window):

Latest status appears.

When the Search window starts from the Jobnet Editor window:

The drop-down list is disabled because Definition is automatically selected in Search object.

When the Search window starts from the Jobnet Monitor window:

Specify generation (execution-ID) appears. execution-ID is replaced by the execution ID of the generation displayed in the Jobnet Monitor window.

Status

Select the desired execution status of units from the drop-down list.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Status is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

You can select a category for execution status by default. If you want to select a specific execution status, select the Details check box. The Details check box is not selected by default.

The following table lists available execution status categories and individual execution statuses you can search for with each category. The default selection is Waiting to start when the Details check box is not selected and Not registered when the Details check box is selected.

Table 12‒66: Available execution status categories and execution statuses you can search for

No.

Available execution status category

Execution status you can search for

1

Waiting to start

Wait for start time

Wait for prev. to end

Waiting to execute

Now queuing

Wait for start cond.

2

Being held

Being held

3

Now running

Now running

Running + Warning

Running + Abend

Now monitoring

4

Ended abnormally

Ended abnormally

Invalid exe. seq.

Interrupted

Killed

Failed to start

Unknown end status

Monitor terminated

5

Ended with warning

Ended with warning

6

Successfully ended

Ended normally

Normal end + False

Unmonitored + Ended

Interrupted monitoring

Monitor-end normal

Note

If you want to find the units in one of the following states, select the Details check box and select the desired status from the drop-down list.

Not registered

Not sched. to exe.

Not executed + Ended

Bypassed

Skipped so not exe.

Shutdown

Delay

Select the desired delay status from the drop-down list.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Delay is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

- Jobnet Connector

- OR Job

- Judgment Job

The following table lists available options in Delay and individual delay states you can search for with each option. The default selection is Start delayed or end delayed.

Table 12‒67: Available options and delay status you can search for

No.

Available option

Delay status you can search for

1

Start delayed or end delayed

Start delay

Nest start delay

End delay

Nest end delay

2

Start delayed

Start delay

Nest start delay

3

End delayed

End delay

Nest end delay

Hold plan

Select an option from the drop-down list to specify whether to find units that are scheduled to be held.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Hold plan is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

- Jobnet Connector

You can select either of the following from the drop-down list. The default selection is Yes.

Yes

The system finds the units for which Yes is chosen in Hold on the Attributes page in the Define Details dialog box and the units that are specified for holding when the schedule was temporarily changed.

None

The system finds units that are not found when Yes is selected.

Supplementary note

If you select this check box, the search finds not just waiting generations, but also generations that are being held and have finished executing. Because the scope of the search includes finished generations, you can search for held generations of a jobnet that has been rerun.

You can limit the scope of the search to waiting generations, generations that have finished executing, or specific generations by filling in the Generation and Status fields.

Start time

Specify the year, month, day, hour, and minute of unit startup. By default, all the boxes are blank. For details about specifiable values, see Table 12-60.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Start time is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

For details about the operations to be performed when you select this check box and leave part or all of the boxes of time specification blank, see Table 12-61.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-62 and Table 12-63. The default setting is Equals.

Note that when you specify this condition, the system finds only generations that are being executed or are already executed.

End time

Specify the year, month, day, hour, and minute of unit end. By default, all the time specification boxes are blank. For details about specifiable values, see Table 12-60.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, End time is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

For details about the operations to be performed when you select this check box and leave part or all of the boxes of time specification blank, see Table 12-61.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-62 and Table 12-63. The default setting is Equals.

Note that when you specify this condition, the system finds only the generations that are already executed.

Target host

Use a character string of a maximum of 255 bytes to specify the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager or JP1/AJS3 - Agent on which units were actually executed.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Target host is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

- Root Jobnet etc.

- Jobnet etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Root Jobnet

- Root remote Jobnet

- Manager Jobnet

- Nest Jobnet

- Nest Remote Jobnet

- Jobnet Connector

- OR Job

- Judgment Job

This text box is blank by default. When you select this check box, if you select Equals from the drop-down list as the match method, leave the text box blank and perform the search, the system finds waiting jobs without a fixed execution host, or job groups and jobnets that are not executed on JP1/AJS3 - Agent.

You cannot specify tab characters.

You can select a match method from the drop-down list. For details about available match methods, see Table 12-57. The default setting is Equals. When the match method is Regular expression, you can specify a character string of a maximum of 514 bytes. For details about the symbols you can specify when the match method is Regular expression, see Table 12-58.

Scheduled

To exclude units that do not have an execution schedule, select the Exclude unscheduled units check box.

When you select this check box, the system finds only units that are scheduled for execution.

Units with the following statuses lack an execution schedule:

Not registered

Not sched. to exe.

Bypassed

Not executed + Ended

A unit that has no execution schedule because its execution was prohibited or it is a nested jobnet whose schedule does not match that of the upper-level jobnet enters Not sched. to exe. status. An abnormal end of the preceding job or similar event causes a unit in Not sched. to exe. status to transition to Not executed + Ended status. In this scenario, the unit in Not executed + Ended status is considered to have no execution schedule.

Skipped so not exe.

A unit that has no execution schedule because its execution was prohibited or it is a nested jobnet whose schedule does not match that of the upper-level jobnet enters Not sched. to exe. status. When the root jobnet is skipped, the unit in Not sched. to exe. status transitions to Skipped so not exe. status. In this scenario, the unit in Skipped so not exe. status is considered to have no execution schedule.

Execution type

Select an execution registration method from the drop-down list.

When one of the following is selected in Unit type, Execution type is disabled and not treated as a search condition.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Job Group etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Job Group

- Planning Group

- Manager Job Group

- Manager Jobnet

You can select the following options from the drop-down list. The default selection is Planned execution.

Planned execution

The system finds units registered for planned execution.

Fixed execution

The system finds units registered for fixed execution.

Immediate execution

The system finds units registered for immediate execution.

Retry execution

From the drop-down list, specify whether to find only units whose execution has been retried.

This item appears in JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later. You cannot use this search condition if the version of the connection-target JP1/AJS3 - Manager is earlier than 10-00, or the database is a compatible ISAM configuration.

You can specify retry settings when one of the following is selected in Unit Type.

If the Details check box is not selected:

- Standard Job

- Custom Job

- Job etc.

If the Details check box is selected:

- Unix Job

- PC Job

- Queue Job

- Flexible Job

- HTTP Connection Job

You can select one of the following from the drop-down list. The default is Yes.

Yes

The system finds units for which retry execution is enabled, and whose retry status is retry waiting, retry executing, or retry end.

None

The system finds units for which retry execution is enabled, but whose retry status is neither retry waiting, retry executing, nor retry end. For example, the system will find jobs with retry execution enabled that ended normally at their first run.

(b) Search button

Starts a search.

Although by default the Search button is displayed at the bottom of the part of the search condition setting area that appears on screen, you can configure JP1/AJS3 - View to display the button at the very bottom of the search condition setting area. For details about how to change the positioning of the button, see 11.10.3 Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area.

(c) Cancel button

Stops a search. When you click the Cancel button, the search results up to that point appear in the search result list area.

Although by default the Cancel button is displayed at the bottom of the part of the search condition setting area that appears on screen, you can configure JP1/AJS3 - View to display the button at the very bottom of the search condition setting area. For details about how to change the positioning of the button, see 11.10.3 Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area.

(d) Clear button

Displays (Default) in the Search Condition drop-down list and discards the conditions edited in the search condition setting area. At the same time, the button erases the search result displayed in the search result list area.

Although by default the Clear button is displayed at the bottom of the part of the search condition setting area that appears on screen, you can configure JP1/AJS3 - View to display the button at the very bottom of the search condition setting area. For details about how to change the positioning of the button, see 11.10.3 Changing whether the Search, Cancel, and Clear buttons are fixed at the bottom of the search condition setting area.

(e) Search result list area

Displays the units that satisfy the conditions specified in the search condition setting area.

Unit name

Displays the icon and unit name of the found unit. The color of the icon corresponds to the status or result of the unit.

To specify a color for an icon, use the General page in the Preferences dialog box. For details, see 12.3.42 Preferences dialog box.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the found unit. An upper path indicates the full path for the upper-level unit of the found unit except for the service name. This column displays a blank for units directly under a scheduler service.

Example:

When the full path for the search target job is AJSROOT1:/jobnet/job01, the upper path is /jobnet.

Comment

Displays the comment defined for the unit found. This column displays a blank when no comment is defined for the displayed unit.

Type

Display the unit type of the unit found.

Owner#1

Displays the owner of the unit found. This column displays a blank when no owner is defined for the displayed unit.

JP1 resource group#1

Displays the JP1 resource group defined for the unit found. This column displays a blank when no JP1 resource group is defined for the displayed unit.

Last updated#1

Display the date and time when the unit found was last updated in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format.

Exec-agent#1

Displays the name of the execution agent defined for the unit found. This column displays a blank when no execution agent is defined for the displayed unit. If the found unit is a flexible job, the relay agent name is displayed.

File name#1

Displays the name of the execution file or script file defined for the job found. This column displays a blank when no execution file or script file is defined for the job. A hyphen (-) is displayed when the found unit is other than a Unix job, PC job, Queue job, or flexible job.

Parameters#1

Displays the parameter defined for the job found. This column displays a blank when no parameter is defined for the job. A hyphen (-) is displayed when the found job is other than a Unix job, PC job, Queue job, or flexible job.

Release date#1

Displays the release date and time of the unit found in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is other than the release target jobnet or a unit under the release target jobnet.

Release status#1

Displays the releases status of the unit found. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is other than the release target jobnet or a unit under the release target jobnet.

One of the following release states is displayed:

Being applied

Release wait

Applied

Release ID#1

Displays the release ID of the unit found. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is other than the release target jobnet or a unit under the release target jobnet.

Status#1, #2

Displays the execution status of the unit found.

Scheduled start time#1, #2

Displays the scheduled start date and time of the unit found in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered.

Start time#1, #2

Displays the start date and time of the unit found in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered or has not started yet.

End time#1, #2

Displays the end date and time of the unit found in yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss format. This column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered or has not ended yet.

Start delay#1, #2

Indicates whether the start of the unit found and its subordinate units is delayed. A hyphen (-) is displayed when the displayed unit is a job. The column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered.

End delay#1, #2

Indicates whether the end of the unit found and its subordinate units is delayed. The column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered.

Hold#1, #2

Displays an option about whether the unit is being held. The column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered.

The displayed information differs depending on the hold setting. The following table lists the character strings that can be displayed and the corresponding hold settings.

Table 12‒68: Hold statuses displayed in the Search result list area and their corresponding hold settings

Status

Hold setting

Follow the definition. (Hold)

Yes is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Do not hold)

No is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Follow the definition. (Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend')

Hold if prev. = 'warning' or 'abend' is selected for Hold in the Define Details - [icon-name] dialog box.

Yes

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold is selected.

Hold is selected in the Holding field of the Register for Execution dialog box.

None

From the Operations menu, Change Hold Attribute is selected, and then Hold-Release is selected.

Target host#1, #2

Displays the name of the host where the unit found was actually executed. The column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered or has not started yet. If the found unit is a flexible job, the relay agent name or manager host name is displayed.

Execution ID#1, #2

Displays the execution ID of the unit found in @[mmmm]{A-Z}nnnn format. The column displays a blank when the displayed unit is not registered.

Reference calendar#1

Displays the name of the job group whose calendar the found unit references. This column displays a hyphen (-) if the unit is not a jobnet, and is blank if the unit does not reference the calendar of another jobnet.

Root jobnet#1

Displays the path of the root jobnet of the found unit. This column displays a hyphen (-) if the unit is a job group.

Maximum retry times#1

Displays the maximum number of retry executions defined for the found unit. This column is blank if retry execution is disabled for the unit.

This column displays a hyphen (-) if the unit is not a Unix job, PC job, Queue job, flexible job, HTTP connection job, standard custom job, custom PC job, or custom Unix job.

Retry interval#1

Displays the retry interval defined for the found unit. This column is blank if retry execution is disabled for the unit.

This column displays a hyphen (-) if the unit is not a Unix job, PC job, Queue job, flexible job, HTTP connection job, standard custom job, custom PC job, or custom Unix job.

Retry execution times#1, #2

Displays the number of times the found unit has been subjected to retry execution. This column displays 0 if retry execution is disabled for the unit, or execution of the unit has never been retried.

This column displays a hyphen (-) if the unit is not a Unix job, PC job, Queue job, flexible job, HTTP connection job, standard custom job, custom PC job, or custom Unix job.

#1

This column is not displayed by default. For details about how to show this column, see 11.10.2 Specifying the columns displayed in the search result list area.

#2

This column always displays a hyphen (-) when you select Definition in Search object.

Cautionary notes

Because the units under a remote jobnet are not search targets, they are not displayed in the search result list area.

An error message appears when the system cannot find any unit that satisfies the specified search conditions.

The execution status specified as a search condition might differ from the execution status of a unit displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window or Jobnet Monitor window.

You cannot search for the execution status of job groups even if Yes is chosen in Display status of a job group on the Main page in the Preferences dialog box.

Supplementary notes

The search result list area can display a maximum of 1,000 units by default. You can customize the maximum number of units to be displayed in this area. For details about how to customize this item, see 11.10.1 Changing the maximum number of units displayable in the search result list area.

The subwindow that appears when you double-click a job or jobnet displayed in the search result list area differs depending on the option selected in Search object.

When you select Definition in Search object, the Jobnet Editor window appears.

When you select Definition & Status in Search object, the Jobnet Editor window appears if the jobnet or job is not registered. If the jobnet or job is already registered, the Jobnet Monitor window appears.

When you double-click a job, the tree area is expanded from the upper-level unit of that job, and the unit you double-clicked is selected in the map area.

When you double-click a jobnet, the tree area is expanded at the level of that jobnet.

Note that double-clicking a job group does not display a subwindow.

(2) When the connection target is JP1/AJS2 - Manager 08-50 or earlier

The following figure shows the Search window.

Figure 12‒219: Search window (when the version of the destination JP1/AJS2 - Manager is 08-50 or later)

The following explains the displayed items.

(a) Search condition setting area

In this area, you specify a search condition. When you specify multiple conditions, they are used as AND conditions.

Search location

Displays the full name of the job group or jobnet selected in the tree area. If you also want to search for a unit under those units belonging to the unit displayed in Search location, you need to select Search lower units. In the initial status, this item is not selected.

Name

Specify a unit name to be searched for. Use a character string of up to 30 bytes. The default is a blank. Select Regular expression if your search uses regular expressions. With Regular expression selected, you can use a character string of up to 64 bytes to specify a unit name to be searched for. The following lists the symbols along with their meanings and examples.

Table 12‒69: List of symbols that can be used in regular expressions

Symbol

Meaning

Example of use

Unit name(s) searched for

?

Any character

A?

AB, A1, A?, A*, A\

?E

DE, 1E, ?E, *E, \E

*

Any character string

B*

B, BC, B12, B?*\

\

Casting the subsequent symbol (handling it as a character)#

C\?

Only C?

D\E

Only DE

#

An error will occur if it is specified at the end of a character string.

With Regular expression selected, you cannot select Left, Middle, and Right in Partial match

You cannot specify the following characters.

( (Left parenthesis)

) (Right parenthesis)

, (Comma)

: (Colon)

; (Semicolon)

= (Equal sign)

\ (Backslash)

Space

Partial match

Select this to search for unit names containing the character string set in Name. Selecting Regular expression in Name makes it impossible to use these.

The default is Left. You can select the following items.

Left

Searches for unit names beginning with the character string set in Name.

Middle

Searches for unit names containing the character string set in Name.

Note, however, that the system does not search for unit names that begin or end with the entered character string.

Right

Searches for unit names that end with the character string set in Name.

Unit type

Select a unit type. The following table lists available options. The default selection is All.

Table 12‒70: Available options and unit types you can search for

No.

Available option

Unit type you can search for

1

All

All unit types

2

Job Group#1

Job Group

Planning Group

Manager job Group

3

Root Jobnet#1

Root Jobnet

Root Remote Jobnet

Root Manager Jobnet

4

Jobnet

Jobnet

Remote Jobnet

Manager Jobnet

Jobnet connector

5

Jobnet Connector#2

Jobnet Connector

6

Job etc.

PC job, event job, action job, custom job

#1

You can select this option only when you start the Search window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#2

This option does not appear when the connection target is earlier than JP1/AJS3 - Manager 08-10.

Status to search

Specify whether to search for units based on status or result. The available options are Status and Results. The default selection is Status.

This section is not available when you start the Search window from the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window.

When you choose Status, the system determines the generations to be found based on the value set for the VIEWSTATUSRANGE environment setting parameter of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager to which you are currently logged in. The following describes the relationship between a value set for the environment setting parameter and the precedence of generations.

For VIEWSTATUSRANGE=all (default)

1. Execution generation whose start date and time or re-execution start date and time are closest to the current time

2. Scheduled generation that was re-executed and is waiting

3. Scheduled generation that will be executed next time or a generation in Shutdown status

For VIEWSTATUSRANGE=today

1. Execution generation whose start date and time or re-execution start date and time are closest to the current time

2. Scheduled generation that was re-executed and is waiting

3. Generation to be executed next time among the scheduled generation of today or a generation in Shutdown status

4. Generation whose end date and time are closest to the current time among the result generations that have finished execution today

When you choose Results, the system finds generations whose end date and time are closest to the current time.

Status/Delay

Select the execution status of units. The default selection is All.

If you want to search only for delayed units, select the Delay unit search check box. The check box is not selected by default.

Status/Delay is not available when you start the Search window from the Jobnet Editor window. In addition, you cannot select the Delay unit search check box.

The available options are as follows:

All

Not registered

Wait for start time

Wait for prev. to end

Being held

Waiting to execute

Not sched. to exe.

Now queuing

Now running

Running + Warning

Running + Abend

Ended normally

Ended with warning

Ended abnormally

Bypassed

Not executed + Ended

Interrupted

Killed

Invalid exe. seq.

Skipped so not exe.

Failed to start

Unknown end status

Shutdown

Now monitoring

Wait for start cond.

Unmonitored + Ended

Monitor-end normal

Monitor terminated

Interrupted monitoring

Normal end + False

Other

Specify search conditions other than unit types and status of search targets.

Search item

Select one of the following options to specify a comment, owner, or JP1 resource group as a search condition. The default selection is None. The available options are as follows:

None

Select this when you do not specify a search condition.

Comment

Select this when you want to use a comment as a search condition.

Owner

Select this when you want to use an owner as a search condition.

JP1 resource group

Select this when you want to use a JP1 resource group as a search condition.

Include char.

The system finds the units defined with the character string entered in Include char. based on the option selected in Search item. This text box is not available when you select None in Search item.

You can omit specifying a character string in this text box if you select Comment, Owner, or JP1 resource group in Search item.

Depending on the option selected in Search item, the number of bytes and the types of characters you can specify differ. The following table lists characters you can specify and default values.

Table 12‒71: Specifiable characters and default values

No.

Search item

Limit

Specifiable character

Default value

1

None

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

Blank (disabled)

2

Comment

80 bytes

Any

Blank

3

Owner

31 bytes

Any characters except for the following:

(

)

, (comma)

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

=

/ (forward slash)

Blank character

Blank

4

JP1 resource group

63 bytes

A to Z, a to z (alphabetic characters)

0 to 9 (Arabic numerals)

_ (underscore)

Blank

(b) Search button

Starts a search.

(c) Clear button

Returns the search conditions to the default status and erases the search results.

(d) Search result list area

Displays the units that satisfy the conditions specified in the search condition setting area.

Unit name

Displays the unit name of the found unit.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the found unit. An upper path indicates the full path for the upper-level unit of the found unit except for the service name.

Example:

When the full path for the search target job is AJSROOT1:/jobnet/job01, the upper path is /jobnet.

Cautionary notes

The following units are not displayed in the search result list area because they are not search targets:

- Units under remote jobnets

- Start conditions

An error message appears when the system cannot find any unit that satisfies the specified search conditions.

The execution status specified as a search condition might differ from the execution status of a unit displayed in the JP1/AJS3 - View window or Jobnet Monitor window.

You cannot search for the execution status of job groups when No is chosen in Display status of a job group on the Main page in the Preferences dialog box.

The search might take some time when the Search lower units check box is selected and no unit name is entered in Name.

Supplementary notes

The search result list area can display a maximum of 1,000 units by default. You can customize the maximum number of units to be displayed in this area. For details about how to customize this item, see 11.10.1 Changing the maximum number of units displayable in the search result list area.

When you open the Search window from the JP1/AJS3 - View window, Jobnet Editor window, or Jobnet Monitor window to perform a search, the following search conditions and settings reappear the next time you open the Search window:

- Name

- Regular expression

- Partial match

- Search item

- Include char.

When you double-click a job or jobnet displayed in the search result list area, a subwindow appears.

When you double-click an unregistered jobnet or its subordinate job, the Jobnet Editor window appears.

When you double-click a registered jobnet or its subordinate job, the Jobnet Monitor window appears.

When you double-click a job, the tree area is expanded from the upper-level unit of that job, and the unit you double-clicked is selected in the map area.

When you double-click a jobnet, the tree area is expanded at the level of that jobnet.

Note that double-clicking a job group does not display a subwindow.

If the system cannot find the unit you double-click, an error message appears.

12.10.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands in the Search window.

Table 12‒72: Menu commands in the Search window

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box to be displayed

File

Close

Closes the Search window.

--

Edit

Jobnet Editor

Displays the Jobnet Editor window when a jobnet or a remote jobnet is selected.

--

Select All

Selects all the units in the area containing a selected unit.

--

Operations

Change Plan - Change Time #1

Changes the scheduled start date and time for the selected jobnet.

Shift Schedule Date and Time

Change Plan - Execute Immediately#1

Advances and executes the next execution schedule of a jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

Immediate Execution

Change Plan - Execution Prohibited#1,

Cancels the next execution schedule of a jobnet registered for planned execution or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Change Plan - Release Change#1

Cancels the date and time change or execution cancellation of the next execution schedule of a jobnet registered for planned execution, or the execution schedule of a jobnet registered for fixed execution.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold #1

Assigns the hold attribute to the selected schedule.

--

Change Hold Attribute - Hold-Release#1

Cancels the hold attribute of the schedule.

--

Interrupted#1

Interrupts the execution of the jobnet.

--

Kill#1

Forcibly ends the execution of the root jobnet or job.

--

Rerun#1

Re-executes the jobnet or job.

Rerun

View

Main

Displays the JP1/AJS3 - View window.

--

Summary Monitor#2, #3, #4

Displays the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window (Temporary)).

You can temporarily display the summary monitor window by selecting one or more units in the search results list area.

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy

Displays the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs

Displays the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Monthly Schedule

Displays the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet Monitor#1

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window.

--

Temporary Changes#4

Displays the Temporary Changes dialog box in which you can view information about past temporary changes.

Selects and re-executes a temporary change in the Temporary Changes dialog box.

Temporary Changes

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results

Wait Conditions Settings List

Displays the Wait Conditions Settings List window in which you can view the wait conditions assigned to units with wait conditions under the selected unit.

--

Wait Conditions Statuses

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses window in which you can view the status of the wait conditions assigned to the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Display Item Setup#4

Specifies the items to be displayed in the search result list area.

Display Item Setup

Save Full Unit Name

Saves, on the system clipboard, the full path name of the selected unit having a scheduler service name.

Example: AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data#5

Saves the information selected in the search result list area on the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Set Tools

Lets you register a tool to be activated from View.

Lets you activate a registered tool on the View host.

Tool Settings

Tool Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings#5

Lets you register JP1/AJS3 commands that can be executed from JP1/AJS3 - View.

Lets you execute registered JP1/AJS3 commands.

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result

Help

Help Contents

Launches the Web browser, and displays the contents of online Help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Legend:

--: Not displayed.

#1

This command cannot be chosen when Definition is selected in Search object.

#2

In the Summary Monitor window, you can monitor root jobnets, root remote jobnets, and planning groups.

If you select the following types of unit, an error occurs:

- Job groups

- Manager job groups

- Manager jobnets

If you select a job, the window monitors the root jobnet under which the job is defined.

#3

Summary Monitor (Temporary) appears in the title bar, indicating that the window is temporary. The following operations are unavailable when you use this menu item to display the Summary Monitor window:

- New Window in the File menu

- Saving monitored units

- Preferences, Set Default Values, Save Status, and Common User Profile in the Options menu.

#4

This command is not displayed when the connection target is earlier than JP1/AJS2 - Manager 08-50.

#5

A maximum of 1,000 lines of data can be copied to the clipboard at one time.

12.10.3 Transitions of the Search window

The following figure shows the transitions of the Search window.

Figure 12‒220: Transitions of the Search window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

#2

Appears when you click the Save button in the search condition setting area.

#3

Appears when you click the ... button in Search Location in the search condition setting area.

12.10.4 Save Search Condition dialog box

The Save Search Condition dialog box allows you to specify the name of the search condition to be saved and saves the search condition. The following figure shows the Save Search Condition dialog box.

Figure 12‒221: Save Search Condition dialog box

Condition name

Specify the name of the search condition to be saved. Use a character string of up to 52 bytes.

You cannot specify blank characters or the following characters:

(

)

Single-byte spaces

Mulit-byte spaces

12.10.5 Search Location dialog box

The Search Location dialog box allows you to specify a search target unit. The following figure shows the Search Location dialog box.

Figure 12‒222: Search Location dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Tree area

Displays a scheduler service and its subordinate units in a hierarchical format. Select a search target unit from the displayed units.

The following lists the types of units that are displayed and those that are not displayed:

Units that are displayed

Job group

Root jobnet

Nested jobnet

Remote jobnet

Planning group

.CONDITION (start condition)

Units that are not displayed

Units under a release target jobnet

Manager job group

Manager jobnet

Jobnet connector

Job

12.11 Wait Conditions Settings List window

The Wait Conditions Settings List window displays details of the wait conditions assigned to a unit.

To display the Wait Conditions Settings List window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), from the View menu, choose Wait Conditions Settings List.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), from the View menu, choose Wait Conditions Settings List.

In the Jobnet Editor window, from the View menu, choose Wait Conditions Settings List.

In the Search window, from the View menu, choose Wait Conditions Settings List.

Cautionary notes

When you display released jobnets in the Wait Conditions Settings List window, the system checks for invalid definitions among the targets of wait conditions defined under jobnets whose release status is Being applied. To check units with wait conditions that are defined under a jobnet in Release wait status, you need to check the release source jobnet prior to release entry.

You cannot display the Wait Conditions Settings List window if you select a jobnet with a release status other than Being applied in the Search window or Jobnet Editor window.

This section describes the configuration of the Wait Conditions Settings List window, menu commands, and transitions of the window.

12.11.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Wait Conditions Settings List window.

Figure 12‒223: Wait Conditions Settings List window

The following explains the displayed items.

Name

Displays the icon and unit name of the unit with wait conditions.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the unit with wait conditions.

Comment

Displays the comment defined for the unit with wait conditions.

Release ID

Displays the release ID of the unit with wait conditions if the unit has been registered for release. This column displays a hyphen (-) if there has been no release entry for the unit.

Waiting-target unit

Displays the icon and unit name of a unit whose end a unit with wait conditions is waiting for.

A question mark (?) is displayed as the icon if you do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit. No icon appears if the unit definition is invalid.

Upper path(waiting-target)

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the unit whose end is being waited for.

Comment(waiting-target)

Displays the comment defined for the unit whose end is being waited for.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

The definition of the unit whose end is being waited for is invalid

The unit whose end is being waited for is defined under a planning group

You do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit

Release ID(waiting-target)

Displays the release ID of units registered for release whose ends are being waited for.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

No release entry has been made for the unit whose end is being waited for

The definition of the unit whose end is being waited for is invalid

You do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit

Waiting definition

The information displayed in this column differs when the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later, and when the version is 09-50 or later but earlier than 10-00. The information displayed for each version is described below.

When the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 10-00 or later:

This column displays detailed information indicating whether any aspect of the waiting definition is invalid. The table below shows the information displayed in this column and what it means. Review the wait conditions based on this information. If these checks do not apply to the definition, a blank is displayed.

If you use the release function, this column displays the result of checking jobnet definitions whose release status is Being applied. Note that the system does not check for execution loops that might result from the wait conditions.

Table 12‒73: Information displayed in Waiting definition

Displayed Contents

Meaning

Not exist

The unit whose end is being waited for does not exist.

Review the wait conditions, and either specify an existing unit as the unit whose end is being waited for, or delete the waiting specification for the missing unit, as the situation warrants.

No permission

The wait conditions could not be checked because the JP1 user who opened the Wait Conditions Settings List window does not have reference permission (JP1_AJS_Guest or higher) for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit.

If the unit is one whose end can be waited for, the unit with wait conditions will start executing when the wait condition is satisfied. If the unit is not one whose end can be waited for, an error will occur when the unit with wait conditions executes.

We recommend that you review the wait conditions from a user account with the appropriate permissions.

For details about the units that can be specified as units whose ends are to be waited for, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Under the planning group

The wait conditions could not be checked because the unit whose end is to be waited for is created under a planning group.

For details about the cautionary notes that apply when specifying a unit under a planning group as a unit whose end is to be waited for, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Unit type is invalid

The unit whose end is to be waited for is the wrong type.

For details about the units you can specify as a unit whose end is being waited for, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Same unit

The same unit is specified as the unit with wait conditions and the unit whose end is being waited for.

As the unit whose end is being waited for, specify a different unit from the unit with wait conditions.

Upper unit

An upper-level unit of the unit with wait conditions is specified as the unit whose end is being waited for.

As the unit whose end is being waited for, specify a unit that is not an upper-level unit of the unit with wait conditions.

Lower unit

A lower-level unit of the unit with wait conditions is specified as the unit whose end is being waited for.

As the unit whose end is being waited for, specify a unit that is not a lower-level unit of the unit with wait conditions.

Start condition

A start condition is set for the root jobnet of the unit whose end is being waited for or the unit with start conditions.

If you use a start condition, an error might occur when the unit is executed. For details, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

When the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is at least 09-50 but earlier than 10-00:

This column shows whether the definition of the wait condition is invalid.

If Invalid definition appears, review the definition of the wait condition. An error will occur when the unit is executed.

In the following circumstances, a hyphen (-) appears in this column. An error might occur when the unit is executed, so review the definition of the wait condition.

The unit whose end is being waited for is defined under a planning group

You do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit

If these checks do not apply to the definition, Normal is displayed.

If you use the release function, this column indicates whether the definition is invalid for jobnet definitions whose release status is Being applied. Note that the system does not check for execution loops that might result from the wait conditions.

For details about the units you can specify as a unit whose end is being waited for, see 2.2.5 Using wait conditions to control the order of unit execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

Wait method

Displays the wait method specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

If not waiting for any generations

Displays the behavior when there are no applicable generations of units whose ends are being waited for, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

When Unmonitored + Ended

Displays the behavior when the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

You connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager version 09-50 from JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later

Abnormal end for an execution generation

Displays the behavior when the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

The Start when skipped so not exe. setting is not displayed.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

You connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager version 09-50 from JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later

12.11.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands in the Wait Conditions Settings List window.

Table 12‒74: Menu commands in the Wait Conditions Settings List window

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box to be displayed

File

Close

Closes the Wait Conditions Settings List window.

--

Edit

Jobnet Editor - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Jobnet Editor window for the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

Jobnet Editor - Waiting-target unit

Displays the Jobnet Editor window for the selected unit whose end is being waited for.

--

Select All

Selects all the units in the list area.

--

Waiting Conditions Settings

Displays the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box for the selected unit with wait conditions.

Waiting Condition Settings

Waiting-Target Unit Settings

Select Waiting-Target Unit

View

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Save Full Unit Name - Unit with Wait Conditions

Copies the full path name of the selected unit with wait conditions, including the scheduler service name, to the system clipboard.

Example: AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Full Unit Name - Waiting-target unit#

Copies the full path name of the selected unit whose end is being waited for, including the scheduler service name, to the system clipboard.

Example: AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data

Saves the selected information to the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Help

Help Contents

Launches the Web browser, and displays the contents of online Help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Legend:

--: Not displayed.

#

If the unit whose end is being waited for is defined under a root jobnet directly under a planning group, the full unit name is not copied to the system clipboard. Instead, this menu command copies a character string created by removing the root jobnet name from the full name. For example, when the full name of the unit is /planning-group/root-jobnet/job, the command copies /planning-group/job to the system clipboard.

12.11.3 Transitions of the Wait Conditions Settings List window

The following figure shows the transitions of the Wait Conditions Settings List window.

Figure 12‒224: Transitions of the Wait Conditions Settings List window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

Displays the Jobnet Editor window for the unit with wait conditions.

#2

Displays the Jobnet Editor window for the unit whose end is being waited for.

#3

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

12.12 Wait Conditions Statuses window

In the Wait Conditions Statuses window, you can check the status of units with wait conditions and units whose ends are being waited for.

The Wait Conditions Statuses window displays information about generations that are currently subject to a wait condition. For details, see 2.2.5(8) Checking units whose ends are being waited for in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

To display the Wait Conditions Statuses window:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), choose View, Wait Conditions Statuses, and then Status, Result, or Next Schedule.

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window), choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

In the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window, choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

In the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window, choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

In the Monthly Schedule window, choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

In the Jobnet Monitor window, choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

In the Search window, choose View and then Wait Conditions Statuses.

Cautionary note

The Wait Conditions Statuses window can take a long time to appear if you select a large number of units in the source window or there are a large number of units to display. For this reason, try not to display too many units in the Wait Conditions Statuses window. We recommend that you assign as few units whose ends are to be waited for as possible to units with wait conditions.

This section describes the configuration of the Wait Conditions Statuses window, menu commands, and transitions of the window.

12.12.1 Configuration of the window

The following figure shows the Wait Conditions Statuses window.

Figure 12‒225: Wait Conditions Statuses window

The following explains the displayed items.

Name

Displays the icon and unit name of the unit with wait conditions.

Upper path

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the unit with wait conditions including the scheduler service name.

Comment

Displays the comment defined for the unit with wait conditions.

Status

Displays the status of the unit with wait conditions.

If the unit with wait conditions is a jobnet with a start condition, this item displays the status of the monitoring generation.

Execution ID

Displays the execution ID of the unit with wait conditions.

If the unit with wait conditions is a jobnet with a start condition, this item displays the execution ID of the monitoring generation.

Waiting-target unit

Displays the icon and unit name of the unit whose end is to be waited for by the unit with wait conditions.

A question mark (?) is displayed as the icon if you do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit.

No icon appears if any of the following apply:

The definition of the unit whose end is to be waited for is invalid

The unit whose end is to be waited for is not scheduled for execution

The unit whose end is to be waited for is not registered

Upper path(waiting-target)

Displays the path for the upper-level unit of the unit whose end is being waited for, including the scheduler service name.

Comment(waiting-target)

Displays the comment defined for the unit whose end is being waited for.

If the target of the wait condition is a planning group, this column displays the comment of the unit in the planning group whose end is actually being waited for.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

The definition of the unit whose end is being waited for is invalid

The unit whose end is being waited for is not scheduled for execution

The unit whose end is being waited for is not registered

You do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit

The target of the wait condition is a planning group, and the unit in the planning group whose end is actually being waited for is not scheduled for execution

Status(waiting-target)

Displays the status of the unit whose end is being waited for.

If the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, this item displays the status of the monitoring generation.

If the unit whose end is being waited for is a planning group, this item displays the status of the unit under the planning group.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

The definition of the unit whose end is being waited for is invalid

The unit whose end is being waited for is not scheduled for execution

The target of the wait condition is a planning group, and the unit in the planning group whose end is actually being waited for is not scheduled for execution

Not registered appears in this column if the unit whose end is being waited for has not been registered for execution.

This information appears even if you do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit.

Execution ID(waiting-target)

Displays the execution ID of the unit whose end is being waited for.

If the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, this item displays the execution ID of the monitoring generation.

If the unit whose end is being waited for is a planning group, this item displays the execution ID of the unit under the planning group.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

The definition of the unit whose end is being waited for is invalid

The unit whose end is being waited for is not scheduled for execution

The target of the wait condition is a planning group, and the unit in the planning group whose end is actually being waited for is not scheduled for execution

This column is blank if the unit whose end is being waited for has not been registered for execution.

This information appears even if you do not have reference permission for the unit whose end is being waited for or its upper-level unit.

Waiting status

Displays the wait status with respect to the unit whose end is being waited for, as one of the following:

Wait incomplete

The end of the waiting-target unit is still being waited for.

Wait incomplete (manual)

The end of the waiting-target unit is still being waited for, as a result of manual reinstatement of the wait condition.

Wait incomplete (rerun)

The status of the waiting-target unit was changed from abnormal end to the end status as a result of re-execution of the succeeding unit. The end of the waiting-target unit is still being waited for.

Wait complete

The waiting-target unit has finished executing and is no longer being waited for.

Wait complete (manual)

The end of the waiting-target unit is no longer being waited for, as a result of manual deactivation of the wait condition.

Wait method

Displays the wait method as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

If not waiting for any generations

Displays the behavior when there are no applicable generations of units whose ends are being waited for, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

When Unmonitored + Ended

Displays the behavior when the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

You connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager version 09-50 from JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later

Abnormal end for an execution generation

Displays the behavior when the unit whose end is being waited for is a jobnet with a start condition, as specified in the Waiting Condition Settings dialog box.

The Start when skipped so not exe. setting is not displayed.

A hyphen (-) appears in this column when:

You connect to JP1/AJS3 - Manager version 09-50 from JP1/AJS3 - View version 10-00 or later

12.12.2 Menu commands

The following table lists the menu commands in the Wait Conditions Statuses window.

Table 12‒75: Menu commands in the Wait Conditions Statuses window

Menu

Menu command

Description

Dialog box to be displayed

File

Close

Closes the Wait Conditions Statuses window.

--

Edit

Select All

Selects all the units in the window.

--

Operations

Waiting - Wait Disabled

Disables waiting for the selected units with wait conditions and units whose ends are being waited for.

--

Waiting - Wait Enabled

Enables waiting for the selected units with wait conditions and units whose ends are being waited for.

--

View

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy - Unit with Wait Conditions#1

Displays the selected unit with wait conditions in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - Hierarchy - Waiting-target unit#1, #2

Displays the selected unit whose end is being waited for in the Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs - Unit with Wait Conditions#1

Displays the selected unit with wait conditions in the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Daily Schedule - All Jobs - Waiting-target unit#1, #2

Displays the selected unit whose end is being waited for in the Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window.

--

Monthly Schedule - Unit with Wait Conditions#1

Displays the selected unit with wait conditions in the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Monthly Schedule - Waiting-target unit#1, #2

Displays the selected unit whose end is being waited for in the Monthly Schedule window.

--

Jobnet Monitor - Unit with Wait Conditions

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for the selected unit with wait conditions.

--

Jobnet Monitor - Waiting-target unit#2

Displays the Jobnet Monitor window for the selected unit whose end is being waited for.

--

List Filter

Enables or disables the list filter function.

--

Refresh

Updates the window contents to the latest information.

--

Options

Preferences

Configures JP1/AJS3 - View.

Preferences

Set Function Menu

Select Color

Create Color/Change Color

Save Full Unit Name - Unit with Wait Conditions

Copies the full path name of the selected unit with wait conditions, including the scheduler service name, to the system clipboard.

Example: AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Full Unit Name - Waiting-target unit#3

Copies the full path name of the selected unit whose end is being waited for, including the scheduler service name, to the system clipboard.

Example: AJSROOT1:/GROUP1/net1

--

Save Csv Unit Data

Saves the selected information to the system clipboard in CSV format.

--

Help

Help Contents

Launches the Web browser, and displays the contents of online Help.

--

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Displays the version number of JP1/AJS3 - View.

About JP1/AJS3 - View

Legend:

--: Not displayed.

#1

If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is earlier than 10-00, the message KAVV455-E is output when you execute this command.

#2

If the unit whose end is being waited for is a planning group, the window displays the generation of the root jobnet directly under the planning group that is actually being waited for.

If the unit whose end is being waited for is under a root jobnet directly under a planning group, the window displays the generation of the root jobnet directly under the planning group that is actually being waited for.

#3

If the unit whose end is being waited for is defined under a root jobnet directly under a planning group, the full unit name is not copied to the system clipboard. Instead, this menu command copies a character string created by removing the root jobnet name from the full name. For example, when the full name of the unit is /planning-group/root-jobnet/job, the command copies /planning-group/job to the system clipboard.

12.12.3 Transitions of the Wait Conditions Statuses window

The following figure shows the transitions of the Wait Conditions Settings List window.

Figure 12‒226: Transitions of the Wait Conditions Statuses window

Legend:

: Window

: Dialog box

: Menu or menu command

#1

The window displays the unit with wait conditions.

#2

The window displays the unit whose end is being waited for.

#3

For details about the items displayed in the dialog box, see 12.3 JP1/AJS3 - View window.

12.13 Other dialog boxes

This section describes dialog boxes you cannot start from other windows.

12.13.1 Register Custom Job dialog box

JP1/AJS3 - View allows a registered custom job to be defined in a jobnet. The Register Custom Job dialog box is used to display registered custom jobs, as well as change or delete the information about registered custom jobs.

From the Start menu of Windows, choose JP1_Automatic Job Management System 3 - View, and then Register Custom Jobs. The Register Custom Job dialog box appears.

The following figure shows the Register Custom Job dialog box.

Figure 12‒227: Register Custom Job dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Registered Custom Job

Displays the names of registered custom jobs, and comments.

Add button

Registers information about a new custom job. If you click Add, the Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box appears. For details, see 12.13.2 Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box.

Change button

Changes information about a registered custom job. If you click Change, the Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box appears. For details, see 12.13.2 Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box.

Delete button

Deletes a registered custom job.

12.13.2 Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box

The Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box defines information about a custom job to be registered.

For details about the types of custom jobs (standard custom job, custom PC job, and custom Unix job), see 3. Adding Custom Jobs in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

The following figure shows the Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box.

Figure 12‒228: Set Properties of Custom Job dialog box

The following explains the displayed items.

Name

Specify a custom job name. Use a character string of up to 8 bytes. The default is a blank.

You cannot specify the following characters:

Single-byte space

" (double quotation mark)

*

/

: (colon)

<

>

?

\

|

MS-DOS device names (NUL, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, PRN)

Character strings that begin with MS-DOS-device-name. (period).

Control characters such as linefeed characters and tabs

The system will be unable to register the custom job if the name contains a control character.

Comment

Specify a comment. Use a character string of up to 40 bytes. The default is a blank. A specified comment is displayed at Unit name in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box under the job name of the custom job under JP1/AJS3 - View. For this reason, do not use characters whose use is prohibited in unit names. If you specify a character string that exceeds the maximum length of the unit name (30 bytes), only the first 30 characters are displayed in Unit name in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box.

Defining program

Specify the full path name of a defined program to be linked to a standard custom job. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. The defined program must be placed on a JP1/AJS3 - View host. Alternatively, you can select a file name from the dialog box displayed when you click the ... button. You must specify this item for a standard custom job. You cannot specify linefeed characters.

For a custom PC job, specify any character string. Although the defining program specified here will not be used, you need to specify the program for compatibility with the custom job registration information for a standard custom job.

You cannot specify this item for a custom Unix job.

Executing program

Specify the full path name of a target program (.exe) to be linked to a standard custom job. Use a character string of up to 255 bytes. Specify a target program on the same host as for JP1/AJS3 - Manager or JP1/AJS3 - Agent. If the host for JP1/AJS3 - View is the same as that of JP1/AJS3 - Manager or JP1/AJS3 - Agent, you can select a file name from the dialog box displayed when you click the ... button. You must specify this item for a standard custom job. You cannot specify linefeed characters.

For a custom PC job, specify any character string. Although the executing program specified here will not be used, you need to specify the program for compatibility with the custom job registration information for a standard custom job.

You cannot specify this item for a custom Unix job.

The target program may be located on multiple JP1/AJS3 - Agent hosts, with the installation path being different. In this case, you specify $xxx$\executable-file-name, where the xxx part refers to a variable. You must register (define) variables in the JP1/AJS3 - Agent host. For details about how to register variables, see 6.2.1 Defining variables for work paths used during job execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide (for Windows) or 15.2.1 Defining variables for work paths used during job execution in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide (for UNIX).

Version

Set 0600.

Class

Specify a class name for each of the programs being linked. You can specify the following items.

For the standard custom jobs

JP1/FTP: JP1FTP

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3BW

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3CP

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3UX

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3BWUX

JP1/AJS3 for Enterprise Applications: JP1AMR3CPUX

JP1/Advanced Shell: ADSHPC

JP1/Advanced Shell: ADSHUX

JP1/Advanced Shell: ADSHAPPEXEC

JP1/DH - AJE: DHAJEW

JP1/CPA: CPALINK

For the custom PC jobs and custom Unix jobs

Specify a character string consisting of up to 16 bytes in the USER_arbitrary-name format, where the USER_ part is required.

If you want to use a double quotation mark (") or a hash mark (#) as a character, prefix the character by #. That is, use #" instead of " and use ## instead of #.

If you specify any of the following, the icon for the custom job does not appear in the icon list of the Jobnet Editor window:

- " (double quotation mark)

- *

- /

- : (Colon)

- <

- >

- ?

- \

- |

- MS-DOS device names (NUL, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, PRN)

- Character strings that begin with MS-DOS-device-name. (period).

You cannot specify the following characters:

- Single-byte space

- Control characters such as linefeed characters and tabs

For the class name, do not specify a name that is already being used by a registered custom job. In addition, do not enter line breaks by using a paste operation. If line breaks are included, no custom job icons are displayed in the icon list in the Jobnet Editor window.

If no custom job icons are displayed, use the following procedure:

1. Delete all the files and folders in the custom job registration information folder except the following folders and files:

Do not delete:

ja folder

en folder

Cjobregm.exe

CJNAME.cjx.model

*.cjx

CJX.xsd

*.dll

*.olb

*.tlb

The custom job registration information folder is as follows:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\custom.dir

The default value for %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

2. Re-register all custom jobs.

Job Type

For a standard custom job, select PC as the type of a job being executed. To execute a custom PC job, select PC. To execute a custom Unix job, select UNIX.

The default is PC.

The item displayed in the Definition page in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box depends on the selected job type. For the displayed items, see 12.4.39 Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box.

Cautionary note

You can only register one set of custom job information for each linked program. Make sure that the custom job information is consistent across the system for each linked program.

12.14 Notes on JP1/AJS3 - View

This section provides the notes to follow when you use JP1/AJS3 - View, as well as the notes regarding the windows used in JP1/AJS3 - View.

12.14.1 General notes on JP1/AJS3 - View

When many definitions or related settings are assigned to a single jobnet

The performance of operation will degrade if you assign a single jobnet a large number of jobnets, job definitions, or related settings. From the viewpoint of the ease of operation and performance, we recommend that you limit the number of units defined in a single jobnet to somewhere between 50 and 80 by giving the jobnet a hierarchy of two or three levels.

When the character code set is a Japanese character code set

For details about the characters that can be used when the character code set for JP1/AJS3 is a Japanese character code set, see 2.4.2 Language type and character encoding of the system in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

When the character code set for JP1/AJS3 - Manager is UTF-8

If the character code set is UTF-8 and the DEFLENTYPE environment setting parameter is set to sjis, the number of characters that can be specified for the following items is the same as in a Shift JIS environment:

Unit name in the detailed unit definition

Comment in the detailed unit definition

Exclusive jobnet in the schedule settings

Note, however, that the maximum number of nests (the maximum number of hierarchies) in a unit is 10 (the default is 30).

Displaying online help in the Execution Result Details dialog box

The Execution Result Details dialog box, which is displayed when you click the Details button in the Monitor Details dialog box, has no Help button.

If you want to read the explanation of the online help for the Execution Result Details dialog box, click the Help button in the Monitor Details dialog box and then display the explanation of 12.3.39 Execution Result Details dialog box.

Entering double-byte characters in dialog boxes

If you want to enter Japanese or other double-byte characters in a JP1/AJS3 - View dialog box, change the input mode each time you display the dialog box. Do not use platform-dependent characters. If you use platform-dependent characters, they might be garbled.

When a unit has been referenced by using JP1/AJS3 - View

When you are referencing a unit on JP1/AJS3 - View, you cannot perform editing that changes the unit configuration starting from the root jobnet up to the referenced unit (such as changing the unit name, deleting or moving the unit).

Referenced units refer to the following:

In the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window), Jobnet Editor window, and Jobnet Monitor window:

Units that are selected in the tree area in one of the above windows

In the Daily Schedule window, Monthly Schedule window, and Edit Monthly Calendar window:

A unit that is selected to open one of the above windows

12.14.2 Notes on the Login screen

Starting JP1/AJS3 - View from the JP1/IM - View integrated function menu

The user name and password are the same as those specified when you made a login in JP1/IM - View. In the Login screen, therefore, you cannot enter your user name or password.

Making another login

In the following cases, the user who has already made a login tries another login.

Opening the manager job group, manager jobnet, or remote jobnet

Starting from the main console of JP1/IM - View

When the user selects, in the Daily Schedule window, Monthly Schedule window, or Jobnet Editor window, a jobnet connector that is connected to the connection-destination jobnet under the scheduler service running on a different host and then chooses one of the following menu items:

(a) View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Daily Schedule (Hierarchy)

(b) View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Daily Schedule (All Jobs)

(c) View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Monthly Schedule

(d) View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Jobnet Monitor

When the user performs one of the following operations for a generation of a jobnet connector or its connection-destination jobnet without a fixed connection and the host with the jobnet connector or its connection-destination jobnet needs to obtain the connection source execution ID or connection target execution ID from the host with the connection destination unit:

(a) Display the Monitor Details dialog box or Detailed Schedule dialog box

(b) Click Refresh, or else automatic update is performed when the Monitor Details dialog box or Detailed Schedule dialog box is displayed

If the login procedure fails, the Login screen in which you enter only the User Name and Password appears. In that case, you cannot specify Host to connect.

12.14.3 Notes on the JP1/AJS3 - View window

(1) Notes on both modes of the JP1/AJS3 - View window

When the selected unit is deleted or the full unit name is changed

A message appears and the upper-level layer is selected.

Displaying manager job groups

When you double-click a manager job group in the list area, another JP1/AJS3 - View window appears and the chosen job group appears. If you have already logged in, but fail to connect to the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host at this time, the Login screen appears. In that case, re-log in.

Displaying manager jobnets

When you specify a manager jobnet and open the Jobnet Editor window, Daily Schedule window, or Monthly Schedule window, another JP1/AJS3 - View window appears, allowing you to reference the manager jobnet. If you have already logged in but fail to connect to the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host at this time, the Login screen appears. In that case, re-log in.

Displaying remote jobnets

When you specify a remote jobnet and open the Jobnet Monitor window, another JP1/AJS3 - View window appears, allowing you to reference the remote jobnet. If you have already logged in but fail to connect to the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host at this time, the Login screen appears. In that case, re-log in.

Displaying manager job groups, manager jobnets, or remote jobnets in a different JP1/AJS3 - View window

When you open a manager job group, manager jobnet or remote jobnet, and a new JP1/AJS3 - View window appears, note the following:

The new JP1/AJS3 - View window remains displayed even after you log out from the previous JP1/AJS3 - View. You must log out from each JP1/AJS3 - View that is displayed.

The status of the new JP1/AJS3 - View window is not saved by the previous JP1/AJS3 - View window. The status of windows is saved by each JP1/AJS3 - View that is displayed.

Height of windows

When you click Options, Save status and then Save in the JP1/AJS3 - View window to save the status of a different window, the height of the saved window might be higher next time than the time when it was saved.

(2) Notes on the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Units that are not displayed in the tree area

Manager job groups are not displayed in the tree area.

Status and results displayed in the list area

The status and results of manager jobnets are not displayed in the list area. When you open the Jobnet Monitor window, manager jobnets appear with the latest status and results, not according to the setting specified in the Preferences dialog box (Monitor the previous status in Monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts on the Main page in the Preferences dialog box is not applicable).

Displaying the detailed information area

To display information in the detailed information area, select a unit in the list area and click the Show button. Even if the screen is updated or you select another unit in the list area, the unit displayed in the detailed information area does not change.

Updating the screen

The target of screen update is the information about units being displayed in the detailed information area. The units themselves do not change in the detailed information area when the screen is updated.

Displaying the Monitor Details dialog box for a jobnet to which a jobnet connector is connected

Note the following when you display the Monitor Details dialog box for a generation of the jobnet to which a jobnet connector is connected if connection of the generation is not fixed.

If the jobnet connector exists on a host that is managed by a different authentication server, you need to log in to the host with the jobnet connector to obtain the connection source execution ID. If that is the case, the Login screen appears. Log in to the host with the jobnet connector. The Login screen will not appear when you attempt to display the Monitor Details dialog box for a generation with a fixed connection.

When you click Cancel in the Login screen, Unknown appears in Exec. ID (Source) in the Monitor Details dialog box.

Because the host with the jobnet needs to communicate with the host with the jobnet connector, the JP1/AJS3 service must be started on the host with the jobnet connector. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs. Note that other operations cannot be performed until the communication error is detected.

Jobnet definition to be copied or pasted when you attempt to copy or paste a release target jobnet

When you click Copy or Paste for a release target jobnet, only the definition in the Being applied release status is copied or pasted. When you click Delete, the jobnet itself is deleted together with the definition for which release entry is performed.

(3) Notes on the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)

Displaying the units of the same name

The Unit name column in the summary list or unit detailed information list displays the unit names defined in the Define Details dialog box, not the full names of units. Therefore, if you display units under different scheduler services or different job groups in the summary list or unit detailed information list at the same time, you might not be able to differentiate different units with the same name. If you want to differentiate such units, display the Jobnet Editor window or Jobnet Monitor window for each unit, and check the full name of each unit.

Displaying the unit detailed information list

The unit detailed information list appears only when you select a unit in the summary list, and click View, Unit Detailed Information List and then execution-status. Even when the screen is updated or you select another unit in the summary list, the units displayed in the unit detailed information list do not change.

Updating the screen

The target of screen update is the information about units being displayed in the summary list. The units themselves do not change in the summary list when the screen is updated.

12.14.4 Notes on the Jobnet Editor window

Displaying the manager jobnet

When displaying the manager jobnet, an error will occur if any unit other than the jobnet has been specified as the destination's unit name.

Timing updated during editing

A change of the definition in the Jobnet Editor window is registered with JP1/AJS3 - Manager as soon as the change has been made (including the processes of changing unit positions and editing relations).

Editing start conditions

Just like ordinary jobnets, start conditions can be edited as virtual jobnets, although they involve the following restrictions:

Only event job icons can be used as start conditions.

It is possible to define up to 32 event job icons.

You cannot set the hold or recovery attribute.

You cannot make relation.

Selecting units

If the focus is in the tree area, those units selected in the tree area become the target of operation. Otherwise, the target refers to those units selected in the map area. If no units have been selected in the map area and the focus is outside the tree area, you cannot operate any unit.

Asynchronous communication

Operation is possible even during communication because of asynchronous communication with the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host. However, some elements of the operation must be conducted only after the communication process has been completed.

Exclusive edit mode

In the exclusive edit mode, exclusive processing occurs when you change the jobnet configuration, such as when adding or deleting a unit, or specifying related settings. Even in the exclusive edit mode, another user can change the definition of a unit in the relevant jobnet. However, an error occurs if multiple users define and edit a single nested job or job. To avoid this, assign an operator to each nested jobnet so that edit operations do not conflict with each other.

A network error may occur in a host on which JP1/AJS3 - View is running or that host may stop abnormally. If this occurs, end processing of JP1/AJS3 - View is not performed normally. If JP1/AJS3 - View is referencing or editing a unit, another JP1/AJS3 - View or a command may not be able to delete or change that unit for a fixed period. Note that the period during which the unit cannot be edited depends on the value specified for the SESSIONTIMEOUT environment setting parameter.

When the exclusive edit mode is not established, selecting any non-standard button among the edit mode selection buttons will automatically establish the exclusive edit mode.

When the exclusive edit mode has been established or when a display map in the Jobnet Editor window has been moved during exclusive editing, the unit information in the map area is read again in order to maintain the integrity with the information that has been registered with JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

With the exclusive edit mode established, you should take care not to update the information registered with JP1/AJS3 - Manager. The target is the jobnet displayed in the map area.

With the exclusive edit mode established, if an error occurs during editing or if a reconnection is made with the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host, the system forcibly terminates the exclusive edit mode.

Exclusive editing under suspended conditions

Under the suspended condition, the following kinds of exclusive editing processing are disabled:

- Renaming an existing unit

- Cutting

- Moving from a non-suspended unit to a suspended unit (pasting after cutting)

- Changing the recovery attribute for a unit currently being executed

- Deleting a unit currently being executed

In deleting more than one unit, if there is a unit currently being executed, an error message (KAVV591-E) appears. As a result, the deleting process may sometimes be terminated halfway.

After making sure that the unit that has not been deleted is a unit currently being executed, you should perform the deleting process again.

Clicking the Details button in the Define Details - [Custom Job] dialog box displays the dialog box that defines a custom job. When you click the OK button in that dialog box, a command prompt screen temporarily appears. This does not affect the operation However, do not forcibly terminate the command prompt screen either by clicking the x button or choosing Close in the menu.

When a root jobnet is copied to under a root jobnet

The Depends on upper-level jobnet schedule rule is selected. When a schedule has been set, set the schedule again from the Schedule Settings dialog box.

12.14.5 Notes on the Edit Monthly Calendar and Edit Yearly Calendar windows

(1) Notes on the Edit Monthly Calendar window

Range of display and definition

In the Edit Monthly Calendar window, you can display or define the range from January 1994 to December four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, you can set a period up to December 2036.

Definition regarding base date and time

You cannot define the base date or base time. For definition, use the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box.

When the scheduler service not running

When the scheduler service is not running, the system is abnormally terminated.

Users who are allowed to change calendar information

Users who can change calendar information in JP1/AJS3 - View are limited to those who are given update privilege for job group definitions or attribute changes. If the job group has an upper-level job group, the user must have a reference privilege for all upper-level job groups.

Using multiple means to change the same job group

Using the Edit Monthly Calendar window and related commands, if you change several items of calendar information in the same job group, only the last items will become valid.

Defining calendar information covering multiple years

Defining calendar information for multiple years may sometimes cause a memory shortage. You should save such calendar information at regular intervals.

For details about how to define monthly calendar information, see 6.2.1 Defining the monthly calendar information as well.

(2) Notes on the Edit Yearly Calendar window

Range of display and definition

In the Edit Yearly Calendar window, you can display or define the range from 1994 to four-digit year set for the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter. For details about the SCHEDULELIMIT environment setting parameter, see 20.4.2(123) SCHEDULELIMIT in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. If the version of the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager is 12-60 or earlier, you can set a period up to 2036. Note that the Edit Yearly Calendar window can display some months outside the job-schedulable range unless the window is opened in January. Such months are grayed out when displayed.

Definition regarding base date and time

You cannot define the base date or base time. For definition, use the Define Details - [Job Group] dialog box.

Users who are allowed to change calendar information

Users who can change calendar information in JP1/AJS3 - View are limited to those who are given update privilege for job group definitions or attribute changes. If the job group has an upper-level job group, the user must have a reference privilege for all upper-level job groups.

Using multiple means to change the same job group

Using the Edit Monthly Calendar window and related commands, if you change several items of calendar information in the same job group, only the last items will become valid.

Defining calendar information covering multiple years

Defining calendar information for multiple years may sometimes cause a memory shortage. You should save such calendar information at regular intervals.

For details about how to define annual calendar information, see 6.2.2 Defining the annual calendar information as well.

12.14.6 Notes on the Jobnet Monitor window

Displaying the manager jobnet

An error will occur if any unit other than a jobnet has been specified as the destination's unit name.

Before operating units in the Jobnet Monitor window

Because the unit status might have been updated, we recommend that before operating units you execute Refresh to update the display.

Starting the Jobnet Monitor window from another window

A new window will always be displayed, irrespective of the unit or execution ID.

Selecting units

If the focus is in the tree area, those units selected in the tree area become the target of operation. Otherwise, the target refers to those units selected in the map area. If no units have been selected in the map area and the focus is outside the tree area, you cannot operate any unit.

Updating the state of execution

The state of execution displayed in the map area is read only in the following cases.

Reading the map area information in the jobnet

Automatic updating

If the generation shown in the map area is different from the generation of what is to be monitored

Unless the target generation to be monitored has been updated, the state of execution will not be updated even if you reselect a jobnet whose state has been acquired.

Updating generation values

The target generation is actually updated if the monitor mode is "monitoring the latest state" or "monitoring the latest result." Note, however, that the updating process occurs only when the jobnet's map information is read and during automatic updating. No search is made with new generations even if you reselect a jobnet whose state has been acquired.

Updating comments

Comments are not updated by automatic update. To update the comment display, perform Refresh.

What takes place when the monitor generation is lost in acquiring the state

Automatic updating will be discontinued if an error occurs during the process of state acquisition so that the system concludes that there are no more generations to be monitored. The process of automatic updating will be restarted after the state has been successfully acquired.

Asynchronous communication

Operation is possible even during communication because of asynchronous communication with the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host. However, some elements of the operation must be conducted only after the communication process has been completed. Note that automatic updating will not take place during communication.

Displaying the Jobnet Monitor window from JP1/IM - View

When you display the Jobnet Monitor window on the JP1/IM - View main console by selecting an event that has been output by the remote jobnet, you should pay attention to the following:

Displaying remote jobnets in the Jobnet Monitor window causes two JP1/AJS3 - View processes to be started. This will consume an increasingly large amount of memory or system resources. It is recommended, therefore, that you close the Jobnet Monitor window once monitoring has been completed.

To display a remote jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window, you need to internally log in to both the remote jobnet manager's JP1/AJS3 - Manager and the remote jobnet agent's JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

For this reason, two Login screens may be displayed, depending on the configuration of the certificate authority. In this case, you must assign a valid set of the user name and password to the remote jobnet manager's JP1/AJS3 - Manager and the remote jobnet agent's JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Displaying the Monitor Details dialog box for a jobnet connector or its connection-destination jobnet

Note the following when you display the Monitor Details dialog box for a generation of a jobnet connector or a generation of a connection-destination jobnet if connection of the generation is not fixed.

If the unit to be connected exists on a host that is managed by a different authentication server, you need to log in to the host with the unit to be connected to obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID. If that is the case, the Login screen appears. Log in to the host with the unit to be connected. When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Monitor Details dialog box is displayed, you might need to log in to obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID. The Login screen will not appear when you display the Monitor Details dialog box for a generation with a fixed connection.

When you click Cancel in the Login screen, the Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) text box in the Monitor Details dialog box displays Unknown.

When the Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) text box displays Unknown, redisplay or automatic update of the Monitor Details dialog box does not obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID. Therefore, the Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) text box continues to display Unknown. To display an execution ID in the Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) text box, click View and then Refresh to update the display.

Because the local host needs to communicate with the host with the unit to be connected, the JP1/AJS3 service must be started on the host with the unit to be connected. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs. Other operations cannot be performed until the communication error is detected.

Displaying a connection-destination jobnet from a jobnet connector in the Jobnet Monitor window

Note the following when you select a jobnet connector, and click View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Jobnet Monitor.

When you display a connection-destination jobnet in the Jobnet Monitor window, two JP1/AJS3 - View processes might be started. If that occurs, large amounts of memory and system resources are consumed.

We recommend that you close the Jobnet Monitor window when monitoring is ended.

When a jobnet connector and its connection-destination jobnet exist on different hosts that are managed by different authentication servers, the Login screen appears when you display the connection-destination jobnet from the jobnet connector in the Jobnet Monitor window. Log in to the host with the connection-destination jobnet.

When you display the Monitor Details dialog box for the connection-destination jobnet from the Jobnet Monitor window being displayed, the Login screen appears for each Jobnet Monitor window for the generations without a fixed connection. Log in to the host with the jobnet connector.

Note that the Login screen will not appear when you display the Monitor Details dialog box for the generations with a fixed connection.

Because the host with the jobnet connector needs to communicate with the host with the connection-destination jobnet, the JP1/AJS3 service must be started on the host with the connection-destination jobnet. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs.

Other operations cannot be performed until the communication error is detected.

The host with the jobnet connector uses one of the following host names to communicate with the host with the connection-destination jobnet. Configure the hosts file so that host names can be resolved on the JP1/AJS3 - View hosts.

For generations without fixed connection

The host with the jobnet connector uses the name of the host specified as the connection target host.

For generations with a fixed connection

The host with the jobnet connector uses the name of the host# with the connection-destination jobnet.

#: The actual host name to be used is as follows:

- For a physical host, host name returned by the hostname command

- For a logical host, logical host name

12.14.7 Notes on the Daily/Monthly Schedule window

Changing the base time in the job group including the registered jobnet

Depending on the new base time, the Monthly Schedule window displays execution results and schedule information (such as schedules created for fixed registration) one day before or after the actual date. To correctly display execution results and schedule information, cancel the registration of the jobnet and re-register the jobnet for execution.

Changing the definition of the unit being displayed

In the Daily Schedule/Monthly Schedule window, even if you update the definition to the latest one, the system does not reread the definition. To change the definition of the unit being displayed, close the Daily Schedule/Monthly Schedule window, change the definition, and then display the window.

When the target unit has no reference privileges

The Daily Schedule/Monthly Schedule window displays the schedule that has been calculated through schedule simulation and execution simulation. Accordingly, in the following cases, the execution schedule will not be displayed:

The login user has no reference privileges for any of the units to be displayed in the Daily Schedule/Monthly Schedule window.

The job group specified in the reference calendar has no reference privileges.

The jobnet specified in the exclusive schedule has no reference privileges.

Displaying the Detailed Schedule dialog box for a jobnet connector or its connection-destination jobnet

Note the following when you display the Detailed Schedule dialog box for a generation of a jobnet connector or a generation of a connection-destination jobnet if connection of the generation is not fixed.

If the unit to be connected exists on a host that is managed by a different authentication server, the Login screen appears to allow you to obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID. Log in to the host with the unit to be connected.

When you click Refresh or perform automatic update while the Detailed Schedule dialog box is displayed, you might need to log in to obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID.

When you click Cancel in the Login screen, Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) listed in the Detailed Schedule dialog box is Unknown.

When the Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) column displays Unknown, redisplay or automatic update of the Detailed Schedule dialog box does not obtain a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID. Therefore, Exec. ID (Destination) or Exec. ID (Source) continues to be Unknown. To display a connection target execution ID or connection source execution ID, click View and then Refresh to update the display.

The Login screen will not appear when you display the Detailed Schedule dialog box for the generations with a fixed connection.

Because the local host might need to communicate with the host with the unit to be connected, the JP1/AJS3 service must be started on the host with the unit to be connected. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs.

Other operations cannot be performed until the communication error is detected.

Displaying a connection-destination jobnet from a jobnet connector in the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window

Note the following when you select a jobnet connector, and click View, Jobnet for Destination, and then Daily Schedule or Monthly Schedule.

When you display a connection-destination jobnet in the Daily Schedule or Monthly Schedule window, two JP1/AJS3 - View processes might be started. If that occurs, large amounts of memory and system resources are consumed.

We recommend that you close the Daily Schedule or Monthly Schedule window when monitoring is ended.

When a jobnet connector and its connection-destination jobnet exist on different hosts that are managed by different authentication servers, the Login screen appears when you display the connection-destination jobnet from the jobnet connector in the Daily Schedule window or Monthly Schedule window. Log in to the host with the connection-destination jobnet.

When you display the Detailed Schedule dialog box for the connection-destination jobnet from the Daily Schedule or Monthly Schedule window being displayed, the Login screen appears for each Daily Schedule or Monthly Schedule window for the generations without a fixed connection. Log in to the host with the jobnet connector.

Note that the Login screen will not appear when you display the Detailed Schedule dialog box for the generations with a fixed connection.

Because the local host might need to communicate with the host with the unit to be connected, the JP1/AJS3 service must be started on the host with the unit to be connected. If the JP1/AJS3 service is not active, a communication error occurs.

Other operations cannot be performed until the communication error is detected.

12.14.8 Notes on the Search window

Searching for units that are not allowed to be accessed

If you search for a unit for which you have no access permission, no error occurs. However, that unit for which you have no access permission and its subordinate units are not considered to be search targets.

When the scheduler database for JP1/AJS3 - Manager is unknown

If the scheduler database for the unit specified in Search location is unknown, the system attempts to find the database based only on the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager. In this case, the search conditions you can specify in the Search window also depend on the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

Part 2: Web GUI

13 Overview

The Web GUI is an interface that can be used, with a web browser on a client PC, to check whether the JP1/AJS3 system is operating stably and to monitor and operate units. This chapter provides an overview of the Web GUI.

13.1 Overview of Web GUI

The Web GUI is an interface that can be used with a web browser on a client PC. With the Web GUI, the following operations can be performed:

Check the information required for the JP1/AJS3 system to operate stably.

Monitor and operate the units that are defined on the manager host.

The Web GUI provides the job portal and the management portal.

The job portal allows users to monitor the execution status and progress of each unit, to execute jobnets, and to operate execution agents.

The management portal allows users to visualize various kinds of JP1/AJS3 information and check whether the system is operating stably.

13.1.1 What you can do with the Job Portal

The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using the Web GUI (Job Portal).

(1) Monitor the execution status and progress of units

You can use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to monitor the execution status and progress of a root jobnet or of any other unit (namely, jobnets that include root jobnets, or jobs).

Figure 13‒1: Example of a Web GUI (Job Portal) window that can be used to monitor the execution status and progress of each unit

(2) Check the execution statuses of units in a tree or list format

You can use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to check, in tree or list format, the execution statuses of job groups and jobnets that are defined in JP1/AJS3.

Figure 13‒2: Example of a Web GUI (Job Portal) window that displays the execution statuses of units in tree or list format

(3) Check the unit execution schedule for each month

You can use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to check the execution schedule of jobnets and jobs for each month.

Figure 13‒3: Example of a Web GUI (Job Portal) window that displays the unit execution schedule of one month

(4) Monitor or check the execution status or result of each unit in a graphical job flow

You can use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to monitor or check, in a graphical job flow, the execution status or result of the jobs and nested jobnets that are defined for a jobnet.

Figure 13‒4: Example of a Web GUI (Job Portal) window that displays the execution status or execution result of each unit in a graphical job flow

(5) Operate execution agents and execution agent groups

You can use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to check the statuses of execution agents and execution agent groups, and to add, change, and delete execution agents and execution agent groups.

Figure 13‒5: Example of a Web GUI (Job Portal) window that allows you to operate execution agents and execution agent groups

13.1.2 What you can do with the Management Portal

The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using the Web GUI (Management Portal).

(1) Checking whether the JP1/AJS3 system is operating stably

The Web GUI (Management Portal) allows users to visualize the statuses of scheduler services and databases and check whether the JP1/AJS3 system is operating stably.

Figure 13‒6: Example of the screen displayed when the Web GUI (Management Portal) is used to check whether the JP1/AJS3 system is operating stably

14 Setup and Management of the Web GUI

This chapter describes the settings for using the Web GUI, and the management of information set by users.

14.1 Web browser configuration

When using the Web GUI, check the web browser settings described below. For details about how to specify settings, see the documentation for your web browser.

Setting of Pop-up Blocker

If the pop-up blocker is enabled in your web browser, display of Web GUI dialog boxes might be blocked. In the pop-up block settings in your web browser, add the address of the Web Console server to the allowed sites, to release the server from the pop-up block.

Setting of Java Scripts

To use the Web GUI, you need to enable Java Scripts (Active Scripts) in your web browser.

Java Scripts (Active Scripts) are enabled by default.

If Java Scripts (Active Scripts) are disabled, you cannot log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Also, if Java Scripts (Active Scripts) are disabled after login, subsequent operation will be disabled.

Web storage setting

To use the Web GUI, the web storage (DOM storage and site data) settings must be enabled on the web browser.

The web storage (DOM storage and site data) settings are enabled by default.

Setting of SSL/TLS

To use the communication encryption function, you need to enable SSL and TLS encryption in your web browser.

The SSL/TLS settings are enabled by default.

If SSL and TLS encryption is disabled, the Login window does not appear even when you access the Web Console server. Also, if SSL and TLS encryption is disabled after login, subsequent operation will be disabled.

Cautionary note

Do not switch the display page of the Web browser to another page. Also do not use the back button and the forward button.

Supplementary note

The language in which the Web GUI displays text depends on the language setting of your web browser.

14.2 Settings for restricting the operations that Web GUI (Job Portal) users can perform

You can restrict the operations that can be performed by each JP1 user who logs in to the Web GUI (Job Portal).

14.2.1 Restricting operations on units

Before you can restrict operations on units from the Web GUI (Job Portal), first, you must change the following two settings in the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) on the Web Console server:

Enable the operation restriction function

Enable the operation restriction function, which is disabled by default. If the operation restriction function is enabled on a Web Console server, the function is available on all manager hosts to which the Web Console server connects. Immediately after this function is enabled, the default setting (permit only viewing) is applied to all users.

Specify a user who can set operational restrictions

Specify a JP1 user who can change the operation restriction settings of individual JP1 users for each manager host to which a connection is to be established. This JP1 user is referred to as a user who sets permissions.

The Management menu appears at the top of the Web GUI (Job Portal) screen only if the logged-in user is a user who sets permissions. To specify the operation restriction settings for each JP1 user, from the Management menu, open the Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box, and then apply the operating permission configuration file. Note that you must apply the operating permission configuration file to each manager host to which a connection is to be established.

Cautionary note

Immediately after you enable the operation restriction function of the Web GUI (Job Portal) on a Web Console server, all JP1 users can perform only viewing operations on all manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect. If you enable the operation restriction function, make sure that no users use the Web GUI (Job Portal) to operate any units until you finish applying the operating permission configuration file.

For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

For details about the operating permission configuration file, see 15.4.2 Customizing the operation restriction settings for each user.

When a user whose operations are restricted logs in to the Web GUI (Job Portal), the buttons, menus, and other items that correspond to the restricted operations are disabled. When a user for which user-specific operational restrictions are not set logs in, the default settings (permit only viewing) are applied to that user.

The following table lists the operations that can be restricted by using the operating permission configuration file, and shows the GUI items corresponding to those operations.

Table 14‒1: Operations that can be restricted by using the operating permission configuration file and the GUI items corresponding to those operations

No.

Operation that can be restricted

Description

Corresponding GUI items

Locations of the GUI items

1

Register for Execution

Registers a unit for execution.

Entry button

List screen

Monthly Schedule screen

2

Cancel Registration

Cancels the execution registration of a unit.

Leave button

List screen

Monthly Schedule screen

3

Adding an execution schedule

Schedules a unit to run at a specified time.

Add button

Monthly Schedule screen

4

Change plan (change time)

Temporarily changes the start time of a unit that has been registered for execution.

Change Time menu displayed by clicking the Change Plan button#

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

5

Change plan (execute immediately)

Temporarily changes the execution schedule of a unit that has been registered for execution so that the unit is executed immediately.

Execute Immediately menu displayed by clicking the Change Plan button#

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

6

Change plan (execution prohibited)

Temporarily changes the execution schedule of a unit that has been registered for execution so that execution of the unit is canceled.

Execution Prohibited menu displayed by clicking the Change Plan button#

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

7

Change plan (release change)

Restores the execution schedule of a unit whose execution schedule was temporarily changed.

Release Change menu displayed by clicking the Change Plan button#

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

8

Change delay monitor

Temporarily changes the delay monitoring settings of a unit that has been registered for execution.

Change Delay Monitor button

Monthly Schedule screen

9

Rerun

Reruns a unit that has already been run.

Rerun button

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

10

Interrupt

Interrupts the execution of a unit.

Interrupt button

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

11

Kill

Kills the execution of a unit.

Kill button

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

12

Change job status

Changes the job status.

Change Status button

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

13

Edit definition

Lets you edit the detailed definition of a job (PC job or Unix job only).

Edit mode button

Define Details dialog box

14

Hold

Sets the hold attribute of the unit.

Hold-On button

Dashboard screen

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

15

Hold Release

Cancels the hold attribute of the unit.

Hold-Off button

Dashboard screen

Monthly Schedule screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

16

Change Exec Order Method

Temporarily changes the execution order control method for the root jobnet.

Change to Synchro button

Change to Asynchro button

Connection Information dialog box

17

Change Wait Status

Temporarily changes the wait status of a unit with wait conditions (whether a unit with wait conditions is still waiting for the end of the waiting-target unit).

Wait Enabled button

Wait Disabled button

Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box

#

The Change Plan button is disabled if all of the following operations are restricted:

Change plan (change time)

Change plan (execute immediately)

Change plan (execution prohibited)

Change plan (release change)

14.2.2 Restricting operations on execution agents

Operations performed on execution agents from the Web GUI (Job Portal) can be restricted by using the JP1 permission level. For details about restricting operations on execution agents by using the JP1 permission level, see 6.4.1(2)(c) Access permissions for working with agent management information in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Work Tasks) Guide.

14.3 Managing information about user environment settings

The Web Console server stores and manages information about the user environment settings that were set for each user by using the Web GUI.

The following table shows the settings that can be saved as user environment settings and when the settings take effect.

Table 14‒2: Settings that can be saved as user environment settings on the Web Console server and when the settings take effect (For Job Portal)

Location for customizing settings

Settings that can be saved

When settings take effect

Setting dialog box

Environment

Initial window that appears when a user logs in

The next time the user logs in

The interval or times to display a web page reload confirmation message when the Web GUI (Job Portal) is used for a long time

Immediately

Displayed Item

Items displayed on the Dashboard screen

Immediately

How the dates on which to perform monitoring are updated when the base time is exceeded while the Dashboard screen is displayed

Immediately

Items displayed on the List screen

Immediately

Items displayed in the Monthly Schedule screen

When the Monthly Schedule screen is restarted

Window updating

Interval to automatically refresh the Dashboard screen, the List screen, the Monitor dialog box, and the Monitor screen

Immediately (For the Monitor screen, this setting takes effect at the next login. For the Monitor dialog box opened from the Monthly Schedule screen, this setting takes effect when the Monthly Schedule screen is re-opened.)

Dashboard screen

Monitoring-target display area

Display order of monitoring targets

Immediately

Automatic refresh of monitoring targets#

Immediately

List tab

Number of lines to be displayed on one page#

Immediately

List screen

List area

Automatic refresh of the List screen

Immediately

Number of lines to be displayed on one page

Immediately

Monthly Schedule screen

List area

Number of lines to be displayed on one page

Immediately

Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

Monitoring target settings

Immediately

Monitor dialog box, Monitor screen

Automatic refresh of the top right area of the screen

Automatic refresh of the Monitor dialog box or Monitor screen

Immediately

Map area

Display of unit names and comments in the map area

Immediately

Legend:

Immediately: When the change operation is performed

#

This setting can be specified for each monitoring target.

Table 14‒3: Settings that can be saved as user environment settings on the Web Console server and when the settings take effect (For Management Portal)

Location for customizing settings

Settings that can be saved

When settings take effect

Summary screen

Automatic refresh of the top right area of the screen

Automatic refresh of the Summary screen

Immediately

Scheduler Service Details screen

Automatic refresh of the top right area of the screen

Automatic refresh of the Scheduler Service Details screen

Immediately

Database Details screen

Automatic refresh of the top right area of the screen

Automatic refresh of the Database Details screen

Immediately

Legend:

Immediately: When the change operation is performed

Cautionary note

If multiple users share the same JP1 user account, the user environment settings might be updated by other users.

15 Job Portal of the Web GUI

This chapter describes the job portal of the Web GUI.

15.1 Login to the Job Portal and logout from the Job Portal

This section describes the procedures for logging in from a web browser to the job portal and for logging out from the job portal.

15.1.1 Logging in to the Job Portal

To monitor and work with units in the job portal, you need to log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from your web browser.

To log in from your web browser:

In the address bar of your web browser, enter the URL of the Login screen for job portal.

http://host-name-or-IP-address-of-Web-Console-server:port-number/ajs/login.html

The default port number is 22252 for HTTP connections and 22253 for HTTPS connections.

Prefix the URL with https if you have SSL enabled and wish to connect using HTTPS.

The Login screen appears.

Enter information in the User name, Password, and Host to connect fields, and then click OK.

In the User name and Password fields, specify the user name and password of the JP1 user who is to log in.

In the Host to connect field#, specify the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host.

#

If the manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect are restricted and the specified input method for Host to connect is a drop-down list, select the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which a connection is to be established from the drop-down list.

If login is successful, the following window appears:

If the Dashboard screen is set to be displayed initially and no units are set as monitoring targets:

The Set Monitoring Targets dialog box appears. After you set units as monitoring targets in the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box, the Dashboard screen appears.

If the Dashboard screen is set to be displayed initially and units are set as monitoring targets:

The Dashboard screen appears.

If the List screen is set to be displayed initially:

The List screen appears.

If the Execution agent screen is set to be displayed initially:

The Execution agent screen appears.

Cautionary notes

If no request is issued to the Web Console server after login, a session timeout occurs, and the login is canceled. The session timeout period for the job portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

If you use the Web GUI for a long time, restart the Web browser once a day. If you specify the interval or times to display a web page reload confirmation message in the Setting dialog box, the KNAK2416-Q message is displayed when such times come.

If the manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect are restricted and the name of a host to which Web Console is not permitted to connect is specified for Host to connect, attempts to log in will fail with the KNAK3279-E message.

15.1.2 Logging out from the Job Portal

To log out from job portal, click the Log Out button on the Dashboard, List, or Execution agent screen. When you have logged out, the Login screen appears.

Cautionary note

If you close the web browser without clicking the Log Out button, the job portal session times out, preventing you from logging out until automatic logout processing occurs on the server side.

The session timeout period for the job portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

15.2 Screens and Dialog Boxes of the Job Portal

This chapter describes the screens and dialog boxes that you use in the job portal.

15.2.1 Page transitions in Job Portal

The following figure shows the screen transitions in the job portal.

Figure 15‒1: Screen transitions in job portal

The following table lists the screens and dialog boxes of the job portal and the sections related to them:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Dashboard screen

15.2.2

2

List screen

15.2.3

3

Execution Agent screen

15.2.4

4

Monthly Schedule screen

15.2.7

5

Monitor dialog box

15.2.8

6

Monitor screen

15.2.9

7

Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

15.2.10

8

Generation Selection dialog box

15.2.11

9

Rerun dialog box

15.2.12

10

Change Job Status dialog box

15.2.13

11

Detail Information dialog box

15.2.14

12

Define Details dialog box

15.2.15

13

Execution Result Details dialog box

15.2.16

14

Inherit Result dialog box

15.2.17

15

Register for Execution dialog box

15.2.18

16

Register Passing Information dialog box

15.2.19

17

Variables Used dialog box

15.2.20

18

Cancel Registration dialog box

15.2.21

19

Add dialog box

15.2.22

20

Change Time dialog box

15.2.23

21

Execute Immediately dialog box

15.2.24

22

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

15.2.25

23

View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box

15.2.26

24

Change Display Month dialog box

15.2.27

25

Setting dialog box

15.2.28

26

Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box

15.2.29

27

Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box

15.2.30

28

Connection Information dialog box

15.2.31

29

Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent)

15.2.32

30

Add Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.33

31

Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box

15.2.34

32

Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.35

33

Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box

15.2.36

34

Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.37

35

Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box

15.2.38

36

Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group).

15.2.39

37

Job Execution Status dialog box

15.2.40

38

Add Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.41

39

Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.42

40

Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.43

41

Attach Relation to Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.44

42

Change the Priority Order dialog box

15.2.45

43

Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.46

15.2.2 Dashboard screen

In the Dashboard screen, you can perform tasks such as monitoring units and setting hold attributes. Clicking the List tab displays the List screen.

You can also open the Dashboard screen from the Integrated Operation Viewer window of JP1/IM2.

The following figure shows the Dashboard screen.

Figure 15‒2: Dashboard screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Dashboard screen is refreshed every 10 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled. The automatic refresh interval can be changed in the Setting dialog box.

The Dashboard screen displays as many monitoring-target display areas as the number of monitoring targets you have specified. You can set a monitoring target in the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box, which is opened by clicking the Add Targets button. For details about the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box, see 15.2.10 Set Monitoring Targets dialog box.

Note that you can set a maximum of five monitoring targets by default. By editing the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf), you can change the maximum number of monitoring targets that can be set. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

Monitoring-target display area

The Monitoring-target display area consists of two main areas: the Status of Root Jobnet area and the Detail Information area. You can collapse the display of the Status of Root Jobnet and Detail Information areas, and specify in the Setting dialog box the items to be displayed in each of these areas when it is collapsed.

The following figure shows how the Monitoring-target display area appears when the Status of Root Jobnet and Detail Information areas are collapsed.

Figure 15‒3: Monitoring-target display area when the Status of Root Jobnet and Detail Information areas are collapsed

Status of Root Jobnet area

In this area, you can check the number of monitored units and the execution progress and status of each monitored unit on the day specified for Day for Monitor in the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box.

The Status of Root Jobnet area displays the following two types of information:

Execution progress and the number of units by status for a registered root jobnet

When you click one of the root jobnet status icons, information about only the selected root jobnet is displayed in the Detail Information area.

Execution progress and status of each monitored unit (jobnets, including root jobnets, and jobs)

When you click one of the unit status icons, information about only the selected unit is displayed in the Detail Information area.

Detail Information area

In this area, you can view the execution status of monitored units. You can also change the hold attributes of monitored units. The start date and time and end date and time are values calculated from an execution simulation#.

#

If a jobnet has never been executed, its execution is simulated with the time required for execution set to 1,200 seconds.

In this area, you can open the List tab or the Chart tab. The List tab displays execution statuses in a list format, and the Chart tab displays an execution schedule.

List tab

Displays the status, start time, and other information about each unit in a list format.

If you click one of the root jobnet status icons or unit status icons in the Status of Root Jobnet area, information about only the selected unit is displayed in this tab.

The following figure shows the List tab.

Figure 15‒4: List tab

You can manipulate a unit by selecting it in the list and clicking one of the buttons above the list. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒1: Operations that can be performed with the buttons on the List tab

No.

Button

Operation

1

Hold-On#

Holds the selected unit.

2

Hold-Off#

Releases the selected unit from the hold.

3

Monitor

Displays the Monitor dialog box.

4

Monthly

Displays the Monthly Schedule screen.

#

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

Chart tab

Displays the execution schedule for the root jobnets.

The execution schedule is displayed in the range of 24 hours from the base time. If a single monitoring target contains root jobnets with different base times, you can select a base time in the Base time drop-down list. In this case, the schedule for 24 hours from the selected base time is displayed. Periods in which monitoring for each root jobnet is not scheduled are gray.

If you click one of the root jobnet status icons in the Status of Root Jobnet area, information about only the selected root jobnet is displayed in this tab.

The following figure shows the Chart tab.

Figure 15‒5: Chart tab

You can manipulate a unit by selecting it in the list and clicking the buttons above the list. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒2: Operations that can be performed with the buttons on the Chart tab

No.

Button

Operation

1

Monitor

Displays the Monitor dialog box.

If the selected unit has multiple generations whose status can be checked, the Generation Selection dialog box (for selecting the generation to be displayed in the Monitor dialog box) appears.

2

Monthly

Displays the Monthly Schedule screen to enable you to check the unit execution schedule on a monthly basis.

Cautionary notes

If the Chart tab is displayed in the Detail Information area, you cannot select a unit status icon.

If you open the Chart tab when the List tab displays information that was filtered by selecting a unit status icon, selection of the unit status icon is canceled.

If job groups with different base times are being monitored, a warning icon appears at the upper left corner of the Monitoring-target display area each time a base time is exceeded before the Dashboard screen is refreshed. Clicking this icon displays the KNAK2409-Q message. Note that you can use the Setting dialog box to specify how the dates on which to perform monitoring are updated when the base time is exceeded while the Dashboard screen is displayed. You can select either for a confirmation message to appear asking the user whether to update the dates or for the dates to be immediately updated without displaying a confirmation message.

The Dashboard screen can be opened from JP1/IM2 only if the relevant unit or generation exists.

If, for a certain length of time, no operations are performed in the Dashboard screen and the Dashboard screen is not refreshed, the session times out. If the session times out, an error message appears, and the web browser closes. The session timeout period for the job portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The following operations or events that usually cause the web browser to close, instead cause the Login screen being displayed:

- Clicking the Log Out button or the Close button on the Dashboard screen.

- An error that usually causes the web browser to close (such as an invalid session error).

The Login screen might not be displayed if an error occurs during the startup of the Dashboard screen. If the Login screen is not displayed, manually close the web browser

With the Setting dialog box, you can specify the settings that are convenient for long-time use. By specifying these settings, the Dashboard screen can be reloaded without displaying a confirmation message. To maintain the same layout before and after reloading the window, specify the following settings:

In the Setting dialog box, specify Dashboard for Initial display screen.

In the Setting dialog box, under the settings that determine whether the areas displayed in the Dashboard screen are collapsed or expanded initially, specify the states in which the screen is used for long-time monitoring.

For a web browser in which to display Web Console, hide the scroll bars or reset their sliders to the initial positions.

In the Setting dialog box, select Dashboard > Operation to update the Day for Monitor when the Base time is exceeded > Update without displaying message.

List of screens that can be displayed from the Dashboard screen:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Monthly Schedule screen

15.2.7

2

Monitor dialog box

15.2.8

3

Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

15.2.10

4

Generation Selection dialog box

15.2.11

5

Setting dialog box

15.2.28

6

Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box

15.2.29

15.2.3 List screen

In the List screen, you can perform tasks such as monitoring units, setting hold attributes, and registering units for execution. Clicking the Dashboard tab displays the Dashboard screen.

You can also open the List screen from the Integrated Operation Viewer window of JP1/IM2.

The following figure shows the List screen.

Figure 15‒6: List screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the List screen is refreshed every 10 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled. The automatic refresh interval can be changed in the Setting dialog box.

The List screen consists of two main areas:

Tree area

This area displays the units the logged-in JP1 user has permission to reference in tree format. When you select a job group in the tree area, the units under the selected job group appear in the list area.

List area

This area displays the units under the job group selected in the tree area.

You can manipulate a unit by selecting it in the list and clicking the buttons above the list. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒3: Operations that can be performed by clicking the buttons in the List screen

No.

Button

Operation

1

Entry#

Displays the Register for Execution dialog box, allowing you to register the selected unit for execution.

2

Leave#

Displays the Cancel Registration dialog box, allowing you to unregister the selected unit for execution.

3

Status

Displays the Monitor dialog box, allowing you to check the current status of the selected unit.

4

Result

Displays the Monitor dialog box, allowing you to check the execution result of the selected unit.

5

Next

Displays the Monitor dialog box, allowing you to check when the selected unit will be executed next.

6

Monthly

Displays the Monthly Schedule screen.

#

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

Cautionary notes

The List screen can be opened from JP1/IM2 only if the relevant unit or generation exists.

If, for a certain length of time, no operations are performed in the List screen and the List screen is not refreshed, the session times out. If the session times out, an error message appears, and the web browser closes. The session timeout period for the job portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The following operations or events that usually cause the web browser to close, instead cause the Login screen being displayed:

- Clicking the Log Out button or the Close button on the List screen.

- An error that usually causes the web browser to close (such as an invalid session error).

The Login screen might not be displayed if an error occurs during the startup of the List screen. If the Login screen is not displayed, manually close the web browser.

List of screens that can be displayed from the List screen:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Monthly Schedule screen

15.2.7

2

Monitor dialog box

15.2.8

3

Register for Execution dialog box

15.2.18

4

Register Passing Information dialog box

15.2.19

5

Variables Used dialog box

15.2.20

6

Cancel Registration dialog box

15.2.21

7

Setting dialog box

15.2.28

8

Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box

15.2.29

15.2.4 Execution Agent screen

The Execution Agent screen has a tree area on the left side. From the tree area, you can open the Execution Agent Management screen, which is used to operate execution agents, or the Execution Agent Group Management screen, which is used to operate execution agent groups.

You can also open the Execution Agent screen from the Integrated Operation Viewer window of JP1/IM2.

The following figure shows the Execution Agent screen.

Figure 15‒7: Execution Agent screen

15.2.5 Execution Agent Management screen

On the Execution Agent Management screen, you can view a list of execution agents and the job execution status of each execution agent.

The following figure shows the Execution Agent Management screen.

Figure 15‒8: Execution Agent Management screen

If you select a execution agent, and then click a button at the top of the screen, you can perform an operation for the execution agent. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒4: Operations that can be performed by clicking the buttons in the Execution Agent Management screen

No.

Button

Operation

1

Add

Displays the Add Execution Agent dialog box, allowing you to add an execution agent to the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

2

Change Settings

Displays the Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box, allowing you to change the settings of the selected execution agent.

3

Change Status

Displays the following menu items, allowing you to change the job transfer restriction status and the status of an execution agent:

Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status

Displays the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box, allowing you to change the job transfer restriction status of the selected execution agent.

Change the Execution Agent Status#

Displays the Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box, allowing you to change the status of the selected execution agent.

4

Delete

Deletes the selected execution agents. A maximum of 100 execution agents can be selected at one time.

5

Check the Communication Status#

Displays the Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box, allowing you to start and end the communication status check of the job distribution delay reduction function, and check the check result.

6

Detail

Displays the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent), allowing you to check the definitions of the selected execution agent.

#

Before you can use this function, you must enable the job distribution delay reduction function in JP1/AJS3 - Manager. For details about how to enable the job distribution delay reduction function, see 21.5.1 Procedure to enable the job distribution delay reduction function in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

List of screens that can be displayed from the Execution Agent Management screen:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent)

15.2.32

2

Add Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.33

3

Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box

15.2.34

4

Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.35

5

Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box

15.2.36

6

Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.37

15.2.6 Execution Agent Group Management screen

On the Execution Agent Group Management screen, you can view a list of execution agent groups and the job execution status of each execution agent group.

The following figure shows the Execution Agent Group Management screen.

Figure 15‒9: Execution Agent Group Management screen

If you select a execution agent group, and then click a button at the top of the screen, you can perform an operation for the execution agent group. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒5: Operations that can be performed by clicking the buttons in the Execution Agent Group Management screen

No.

Button

Operation

1

Add

Displays the Add Execution Agent Group dialog box, allowing you to add an execution agent group to the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

2

Change Settings

Displays the Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box, allowing you to change the settings of the selected execution agent group.

3

Change Status

Displays the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box, allowing you to change the job transfer restriction status of the selected execution agent group.

4

Delete

Deletes the selected execution agent groups. A maximum of 100 execution agent groups can be selected at one time.

5

Attach Relation

Displays the Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box, allowing you to exclude execution agents that are associated with the selected execution agent group.

6

Detail

Displays the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group), allowing you to check the definitions of the selected execution agent group.

List of screens that can be displayed from the Execution Agent Group Management screen:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group)

15.2.39

2

Add Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.41

3

Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.42

4

Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.43

5

Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.46

15.2.7 Monthly Schedule screen

On the Monthly Schedule screen, you can check the unit execution schedule on a monthly basis. You can also add and change execution schedules.

The following figure shows the Monthly Schedule screen.

Figure 15‒10: Monthly Schedule screen

The Monthly Schedule screen consists of three main areas:

Tree area

The tree area displays, in a tree layout, the jobnet selected on the Dashboard or List screen and the units under the jobnet.

Schedule area

In the schedule area, you can check monthly unit execution schedules.

The schedule area displays icons that indicate execution schedules. The shape of each icon varies according to the type of execution registration and execution schedule, as follows:

The square : an execution schedule registered for planned execution or immediate execution

The circle : an execution schedule registered for fixed execution

The triangle : an unregistered execution schedule

Each icon appears on the execution day of the corresponding execution schedule. For details about the execution day, see 3.3.1 Time formats and schedule rules for root jobnets in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

If a unit is executed multiple times in a day (that is, multiple execution generations of the unit exist in the day), only the last execution generation in the day is indicated by an icon.

List area

The list area lists all generations of the execution schedule of the unit selected in the schedule area. Note that this area displays only the execution schedule for the execution day selected in the schedule area.

The start dates and times differ depending on whether execution simulation is performed. If you have configured the system to not perform execution simulation, the start dates and times will differ from those displayed in the Dashboard screen, in which execution simulation is always performed. You can specify whether to perform execution simulation in the Setting dialog box. Jobnets that have never been run are simulated as if they require 1,200 seconds to run.

If you select a unit or execution schedule, and then click a button at the top of the screen, you can perform an operation for the unit or execution schedule. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒6: Operations that can be performed by clicking the buttons in the Monthly Schedule screen

No.

Button

Operation

1

Entry#1

Displays the Register for Execution dialog box, allowing you to register the selected unit for execution.

2

Leave#1

Displays the Cancel Registration dialog box, allowing you to unregister the selected unit for execution.

3

Hold-On#1

Holds the selected unit.

4

Hold-Off#1

Releases the selected unit from the hold.

5

Add#1

Displays the Add dialog box, in which you can add the selected execution schedule to a specified date and time.

6

Change Plan#1

Displays the following menu commands, which allow you to perform operations such as temporarily changing the selected execution schedule and releasing the execution schedule from the temporary changes:

Change Time

Displays the Change Time dialog box, in which you can change the scheduled start date and time of the execution schedule of the selected unit.

Execute Immediately

Displays the Execute Immediately dialog box, in which you can immediately execute the execution schedule of a selected unit.

Execution Prohibited

Cancels execution of the execution schedule of the selected unit.

Release Change

Releases the execution schedule of the selected unit from temporary changes.

7

Change Delay Monitor#1, #2

Displays the Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box, in which you can change the delay monitoring method for the selected unit.

8

View Delay Monitor#2

Displays the View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box, in which you can check the delay monitoring method for the selected unit.

9

Monitor

Displays the Monitor dialog box.

#1

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

#2

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, when a user who is not permitted to perform the Change Delay Monitor operation logs in, the View Delay Monitor button appears instead of the Change Delay Monitor button.

Cautionary notes

The Monthly Schedule screen is not refreshed automatically. To update displayed information, click the refresh button (). If you want to cancel refreshing, click the cancel button ().

When you select a unit (icon) in the Schedule area of the Monthly Schedule screen, the information in the Schedule area might not match the information in the List area. This is because selecting an icon causes the latest information to be displayed in the List area, but it does not refresh the Schedule area. If the information in the Schedule area and List area does not match, click the Refresh button to update the contents of the Monthly Schedule screen.

If the addition or deletion of units results in changes to the unit definition after the Monthly Schedule screen is displayed, click the Refresh button to update the contents of the Monthly Schedule screen.

You cannot display the Monthly Schedule screen for the following purposes:

To display a root jobnet that includes a unit (a jobnet or job) for which your JP1 resource group does not have reference permission

To display a release-target unit under a root jobnet that includes a unit (a jobnet or job) for which your JP1 resource group does not have reference permission

To display a unit that specifies, in the reference calendar, a job group for which your JP1 resource group does not have reference permission

To display a unit that specifies, in the exclusive schedule, a job group for which your JP1 resource group does not have reference permission

If there are many units and generations to be displayed, it might take time to display the Monthly Schedule screen.

Before changing the definition of the base date or base time, unregister the jobnets registered for execution. If you change the base date or base time without unregistering those jobnets, the Monthly Schedule screen might incorrectly display execution results and schedule information generated based on fixed execution registration. To correctly display execution results and schedule information, cancel the registration of the jobnet and re-register the jobnet for execution.

List of screens that can be displayed from the Monthly Schedule screen:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Monitor dialog box

15.2.8

2

Register for Execution dialog box

15.2.18

3

Register Passing Information dialog box

15.2.19

4

Variables Used dialog box

15.2.20

5

Cancel Registration dialog box

15.2.21

6

Add dialog box

15.2.22

7

Change Time dialog box

15.2.23

8

Execute Immediately dialog box

15.2.24

9

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

15.2.25

10

View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor

15.2.26

11

Change Display Month dialog box

15.2.27

15.2.8 Monitor dialog box

In the Monitor dialog box, you can view lines showing the relations between units under the unit selected in the Dashboard screen or List screen. You can also perform operations such as Change Hold Attribute, Interrupt, and Rerun.

The following figure shows the Monitor dialog box.

Figure 15‒11: Monitor dialog box

The Monitor dialog box consists of two main areas:

Tree area

Defined jobnets are displayed in a tree. If you select a jobnet in the tree area, the map area displays the units under the selected jobnet.

Map area

Units under the jobnet selected in the tree area are displayed. In the tool tip of the icon for a unit, you can check the unit name and the comment defined for the unit.

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Monitor dialog box is refreshed every 5 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled. The automatic refresh interval can be changed in the Setting dialog box.

You can manipulate a unit by selecting it and clicking the buttons at the top of the dialog box. The following table describes the operations that can be performed by using these buttons.

Table 15‒7: Operations that can be performed by clicking the buttons in the Monitor dialog box

No.

Button

Operation

1

Hold-On#

Holds the selected unit.

2

Hold-Off#

Releases the selected unit from the hold.

3

Interrupt#

Interrupts execution of a jobnet.

4

Kill#

Forcibly terminates a unit that is running.

5

Rerun#

Displays the Rerun dialog box, allowing you to rerun a unit.

6

Change Status#

Displays the Change Job Status dialog box, allowing you to change the status of a job.

7

Change Plan#

Displays the following menu commands, which allow you to perform operations such as temporarily changing the selected execution schedule and releasing the execution schedule from the temporary changes:

Change Time

Displays the Change Time dialog box, in which you can change the scheduled start date and time of the execution schedule of the selected unit.

Execute Immediately

Displays the Execute Immediately dialog box, in which you can immediately execute the execution schedule of a selected unit.

Execution Prohibited

Cancels execution of the execution schedule of the selected unit.

Release Change

Releases the execution schedule of the selected unit from temporary changes.

8

Detail

Displays the Detailed Information dialog box, allowing you to check the detailed information about a unit.

9

Result

Displays the Execution Result Details dialog box, allowing you to check the execution result of a unit.

10

Inheritance

Displays the Inherit Result dialog box, allowing you to check the inheritance result of a unit.

11

Waiting

Displays the Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box, allowing you to check the wait status of a unit.

#

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

You can switch the information shown under the icon for each unit displayed in the map area between the unit name and the comments defined for the unit. Clicking the Unit name button at the top of the map area displays unit names. Clicking the Comment button at the top of the map area displays the comments defined for the units. If no comment is defined for a unit, nothing is displayed under the icon for the unit.

You can copy the URL of the Monitor screen for a specific unit. To do this, select the unit in the Monitor dialog box, and then click the URL Copy button at the bottom of the dialog box. For details about the Monitor screen, see 15.2.9 Monitor screen. Note that to use the obtained URL to open the Monitor screen, you must perform authentication by using the JP1/AJS3 - Web Console login screen.

The function that copies the URL of the Monitor screen is useful when you want to inform other users by email of the URL of the Monitor screen for a monitored unit.

List of screens that can be displayed from the Monitor dialog box:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Rerun dialog box

15.2.12

2

Change Job Status dialog box

15.2.13

3

Detail Information dialog box

15.2.14

4

Define Details dialog box

15.2.15

5

Execution Result Details dialog box

15.2.16

6

Inherit Result dialog box

15.2.17

7

Change Time dialog box

15.2.23

8

Execute Immediately dialog box

15.2.24

9

Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box

15.2.30

15.2.9 Monitor screen

The Monitor screen displays lines which show the relations between units, which you can use to check the relations between a unit and its subordinate units. You can also perform operations such as Change Hold Attribute, Interrupt, and Rerun.

You can display the Monitor screen by accessing a URL. This URL can be copied by using JP1/IM - View or by using the Monitor dialog box. You can also open the Monitor screen from the Integrated Operation Viewer window of JP1/IM2.

The following figure shows the Monitor screen.

Figure 15‒12: Monitor screen

The Monitor screen consists of two main areas:

Tree area

Defined jobnets are displayed in a tree. If you select a jobnet in the tree area, the map area displays the units under the selected jobnet.

Map area

Units under the jobnet selected in the tree area are displayed. In the tool tip of the icon for a unit, you can check the unit name and the comment defined for the unit.

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Monitor screen is refreshed every 5 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled. The automatic refresh interval can be changed in the Setting dialog box.

The operations that can be performed in the Monitor screen are the same as those that can be performed in the Monitor dialog box. For details about the Monitor dialog box, see 15.2.8 Monitor dialog box.

If you log in from the Login screen and then display the Monitor screen, the Log Out button is displayed instead of the Close button.

Cautionary notes

The Monitor screen opens only if the relevant unit or generation exists.

If, for a certain length of time, no operations are performed in the Monitor screen and the Monitor screen is not refreshed, the session times out. If the session times out, an error message appears, and the web browser closes. The session timeout period for the job portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The following operations or events that usually cause the web browser to close, instead cause the Login screen being displayed:

- Clicking the Log Out button or the Close button on the Monitor screen.

- An error that usually causes the web browser to close (such as an invalid session error).

Note that the Login screen might not be displayed if an error occurs during the startup of the Monitor screen. If the Login screen is not displayed, manually close the web browser.

15.2.10 Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

In the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box, you can set the jobnets to be monitored in the Dashboard screen, and the days on which to monitor those jobnets. The jobnets you specify as monitoring targets must be selected from the same scheduler service.

The following figure shows the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box.

Figure 15‒13: Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

The following describes the items that are displayed in the Set Monitoring Targets dialog box.

Day for Monitor

Select the day to acquire the information (execution progress and status) on the monitoring-target unit in the range from 31 days before to Tomorrow.

The date on which monitoring is performed on the Dashboard screen is determined by the day selected here and by the base time of the monitoring-target unit.

For example, if the base time is 8:00, the date is updated based on 8:00, and the period from 8:00 to 7:59 on the next day is handled as one day. If you select Today for Day for Monitor and the current monitoring time is 7:00 on August 3, August 2 is assumed as the monitoring day.

Figure 15‒14: Monitoring days when the base time is 8:00

Monitoring name

Specify a monitoring name of 30 or fewer characters for the monitoring-target setting.

Monitored units

Select the units to be monitored from a selected job group. A maximum of 20 units can be selected.

However, if you select monitoring targets from job groups that have different base times, multiple monitoring days might exist depending on the monitoring time. Therefore, we recommend that you separately register monitoring targets from job groups that have the same base time, rather than registering a group of monitoring targets that have different base times.

15.2.11 Generation Selection dialog box

The Generation Selection dialog box might open when you click the Monitor button after selecting a unit on the Chart tab of the Dashboard screen. If the selected unit has two or more generations whose status can be checked, the Generation Selection dialog box opens. You can select the generation whose status you want to check.

The following figure shows the Generation Selection dialog box.

Figure 15‒15: Generation Selection dialog box

15.2.12 Rerun dialog box

You can use the Rerun dialog box to rerun the unit selected in the Monitor dialog box.

The following figure shows the Rerun dialog box.

Figure 15‒16: Rerun dialog box (for root jobnets)

Figure 15‒17: Rerun dialog box (for a nested jobnet or job)

15.2.13 Change Job Status dialog box

You can use the Change Job Status dialog box to change the status of the job selected in the Monitor dialog box.

The following figure shows the Change Job Status dialog box.

Figure 15‒18: Change Job Status dialog box

15.2.14 Detail Information dialog box

In the Detail Information dialog box, you can check the execution status and the details about the execution result of a selected unit in the Monitor dialog box.

The following figure shows the Detail Information dialog box

Figure 15‒19: Detail Information dialog box (For a root jobnet or jobnet connector)

Figure 15‒20: Detail Information dialog box (For a job)

The Show Connection Information button is displayed when the selected unit is root jobnet or jobnet connector. If you click the Show Connection Information button, the Connection Information dialog box appears, allowing you to check the connection information.

If the selected unit is a PC job or a Unix job, the Refer Definition button is displayed. Clicking this button opens the Define Details dialog box, which can be used to edit job definitions.

Note that if JP1/AJS3 is set up to link with JP1/PFM, the Open PFM Report button appears at the bottom of the Define Details dialog box. Clicking this button opens the PFM - Web Console window. This window can be used to examine the cause of a problem with a JP1/AJS3 job that occurred due to system performance, or to display a report containing performance information about the manager host.

The Open PFM Report button appears if the selected unit is a job (other than a QUEUE job, jobnet connector, OR job, judgment job, or passing information setting job). You can display a report only when execution of the selected job has started and the execution host has been determined.

For details about the setup for linkage with JP1/PFM, see 12. Linking JP1/PFM in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Linkage Guide.

For details about the PFM - Web Console window, see the manual JP1/Performance Management Reference.

15.2.15 Define Details dialog box

You can use the Define Details dialog box to edit the detailed definition for the job displayed in the Detail Information dialog box. However, you can only edit the detailed definition if the job is a PC job or a Unix job. The items that can be edited for a PC job and the items that can be edited for a Unix job are different.

Cautionary notes

If the job portal operation restriction function is enabled, the Edit mode check box appears only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the Edit Definition operation.

If the job portal operation restriction function is enabled and a user who is not permitted to perform the Edit Definition operation logs in, the Close button is displayed, instead of the OK and Cancel buttons.

The following figure shows the Define Details dialog box.

Figure 15‒21: Define Details dialog box (for PC job)

Figure 15‒22: Define Details dialog box (for Unix job)

15.2.16 Execution Result Details dialog box

In the Execution Result Details dialog box, you can check the execution result of a selected unit in the Monitor dialog box.

The following figure shows the Execution Result Details dialog box.

Figure 15‒23: Execution Result Details dialog box

15.2.17 Inherit Result dialog box

In the Inherit Result dialog box, you can check the inherit result of a selected unit in the Monitor dialog box.

The following figure shows the Inherit Result dialog box.

Figure 15‒24: Inherit Result dialog box

15.2.18 Register for Execution dialog box

In the Register for Execution dialog box, you can select an execution registration method and register a unit for execution.

The following figure shows the Register for Execution dialog box.

Figure 15‒25: Register for Execution dialog box

In the Setting Option area, you can set the conditions for execution registration of the unit.

In the Passing information area, you can set the passing information that applies when the selected unit is executed. When you click the Add or Change button in the Passing information area, the Register Passing Information dialog box appears.

15.2.19 Register Passing Information dialog box

In the Register Passing Information dialog box, you can set the passing information that applies when the selected unit is executed.

The following figure shows the Register Passing Information dialog box.

Figure 15‒26: Register Passing Information dialog box

Clicking the Refer button to the right of Variable opens the Variables Used dialog box, in which you can view a list of the macro variables being used.

15.2.20 Variables Used dialog box

In the Variables Used dialog box, you can check the macro variables being used.

The following figure shows the Variables Used dialog box.

Figure 15‒27: Variables Used dialog box

15.2.21 Cancel Registration dialog box

In the Cancel Registration dialog box, you can cancel the execution registration of a unit. You can also cancel execution registration only for a certain period.

The following figure shows the Cancel Registration dialog box.

Figure 15‒28: Cancel Registration dialog box

15.2.22 Add dialog box

In the Add dialog box, you can add a unit execution schedule.

The following figure shows the Add dialog box.

Figure 15‒29: Add dialog box (for a root jobnet)

Figure 15‒30: Add dialog box (for a nested jobnet)

Figure 15‒31: Add dialog box (for a job)

If the unit you selected is a root jobnet, you can specify the information to be passed when adding the execution schedule of the jobnet. To do this, click the Pass Info button.

15.2.23 Change Time dialog box

In the Change Time dialog box, you can change the execution start time of the execution schedule.

The following figure shows the Change Time dialog box.

Figure 15‒32: Change Time dialog box

15.2.24 Execute Immediately dialog box

In the Execute Immediately dialog box, you can immediately execute the execution schedule.

The following figure shows the Execute Immediately dialog box.

Figure 15‒33: Execute Immediately dialog box

15.2.25 Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

In the Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box, you can change the delay monitoring method for an execution schedule.

The following figure shows the Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box.

Figure 15‒34: Change Delay Monitor Temporarily dialog box

15.2.26 View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box

In the View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box, you can check the delay monitoring method for an execution schedule.

The following figure shows the View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box.

Figure 15‒35: View Temporary Changes to Delay Monitor dialog box

15.2.27 Change Display Month dialog box

In the Change Display Month dialog box, you can change the year and month whose schedule information is displayed in the Monthly Schedule screen.

The following figure shows the Change Display Month dialog box.

Figure 15‒36: Change Display Month dialog box

15.2.28 Setting dialog box

With the Setting dialog box, you can specify several settings, such as: the initial screen to be displayed after login, the behavior of the Web GUI when used for a long time, the items to be displayed in each area, and the refresh interval of each screen.

The following figure shows the Setting dialog box.

Figure 15‒37: Setting dialog box

The following table describes the items that can be set in this dialog box.

Table 15‒8: Items that can be set in the Setting dialog box

Setting item

Description

Environment

Initial display screen

You can select the Dashboard screen, the List screen, or the Execution Agent screen as the initial screen that appears when you log in.

Operation when used for a long time#

You can set the behavior of the job portal when it is used for a long time.

Interval or times to display a web page reload confirmation message while the job portal is used for a long time

Whether to reload the Dashboard screen without displaying a confirmation message when the screen is displayed

Displayed Item

Dashboard

You can set the monitoring items to be displayed in the Dashboard screen and the order in which they are displayed.

Also, you can set how the dates on which to perform monitoring are updated when the base time is exceeded while the Dashboard screen is displayed.

Dashboard - Status of Root Jobnet

You can set the following items for the Dashboard screen:

Whether to collapse or expand the initial display of the Status of Root Jobnet area

The items to be displayed in the Status of Root Jobnet area when it is collapsed

Dashboard - Detail Information

You can set the following items for the Dashboard screen:

Whether to collapse or expand the initial display of the Detail Information area

Whether the List tab or the Chart tab is to be displayed initially

Whether the units in the Chart tab are to be listed in order of the start time, the unit name, or the full path name of the unit

Dashboard - Detail Information - Root Jobnets

You can set the monitoring items to be displayed when information about only root jobnets is displayed in the List tab of the Dashboard screen.

Dashboard - Detail Information - All Units

You can set the monitoring items to be displayed when information about all units, including root jobnets, is displayed in the List tab of the Dashboard screen.

List

You can set the monitored items to be displayed in the List screen and the order in which they are displayed.

Monthly Schedule

You can set the following items for the Monthly Schedule screen:

Whether the units in the Tree area are to be listed in order of start time or in order of unit name

Whether to perform execution simulation for the execution schedules displayed in the schedule area

Whether the start date displayed in the schedule area is set to the base date or to a relative date (specified by a number of days from the current day)

The monitoring items to be displayed in the List area and the order in which they are displayed

Window updating

Auto refresh - Refresh interval

You can set the automatic refresh interval for the following screens:

Dashboard screen

List screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

#

With the Setting dialog box, you can specify the settings that are convenient for long-time use. By specifying these settings, the Dashboard screen can be reloaded without displaying a confirmation message. To maintain the same layout before and after reloading the window, specify the following settings:

In the Setting dialog box, specify Dashboard for Initial display screen.

In the Setting dialog box, under the settings that determine whether the areas displayed in the Dashboard screen are collapsed or expanded initially, specify the states in which the screen is used for long-time monitoring.

For a web browser in which to display Web Console, hide the scroll bars or reset their sliders to the initial positions.

In the Setting dialog box, select Dashboard > Operation to update the Day for Monitor when the Base time is exceeded > Update without displaying message.

15.2.29 Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box

You can use the Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box to apply the operating permission configuration file.

Cautionary note

After you select the operating permission configuration file, if you change the file contents and then apply the file, the changes might not be applied or communication might time out because a request cannot be sent.

If you change the contents of the operating permission configuration file after selecting the file, reselect the file.

The following figure shows the Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box.

Figure 15‒38: Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box

15.2.30 Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box

In the Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box, you can view information about units with wait conditions, units whose end is being waited for, and wait conditions. To enable waiting, click the Wait Enabled button#. To disable waiting, click the Wait Disabled button#.

#

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

The following figure shows the Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box.

Figure 15‒39: Wait Conditions Statuses dialog box

15.2.31 Connection Information dialog box

In the Connection Information dialog box, you can view connection information about a unit. If the selected unit is a root jobnet, the connection information of the Source is displayed. If the selected unit is a jobnet connector, the connection information of the Destination is displayed.

If the selected unit is a root jobnet, the Change to Synchro button# or the Change to Asynchro button# is displayed. If you click the Change to Synchro button, the execution order control method is changed to sync mode. If you click the Change to Asynchro button, the execution order control method is changed to async mode.

#

If the operation restriction function of the job portal is enabled, these buttons appear only if the logged-in user is a user who is permitted to perform the corresponding operations.

The following figure shows the Connection Information dialog box.

Figure 15‒40: Connection Information dialog box (For a root jobnet)

Figure 15‒41: Connection Information dialog box(For a jobnet connector)

15.2.32 Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent)

In the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent), you can view the definitions of the execution agent selected in the Execution Agent Management screen.

The following figure shows the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent).

Figure 15‒42: Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent)

15.2.33 Add Execution Agent dialog box

In the Add Execution Agent dialog box, you can add an execution agent to the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

The following figure shows the Add Execution Agent dialog box.

Figure 15‒43: Add Execution Agent dialog box

The Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level area displays time periods and their job-execution multiplicity levels. The job-execution multiplicity level can be changed for each time period. If you click the Add or Change button in this area, the Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box appears.

15.2.34 Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box

In the Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box, you can change the settings of the execution agent selected on the Execution Agent Management screen.

The following figure shows the Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box.

Figure 15‒44: Change Execution Agent Settings dialog box

The Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level area displays time periods and their job-execution multiplicity levels. The job-execution multiplicity level can be changed for each time period. If you click the Add or Change button in this area, the Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box appears.

15.2.35 Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

In the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box, you can change the job transfer restriction status of the execution agent selected on the Execution Agent Management screen. At this time, you can also select multiple execution agents to simultaneously change their job transfer restriction status.

Cautionary note

A maximum number of 100 execution agents can be selected at one time.

The following figure shows the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box.

Figure 15‒45: Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.36 Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box

In the Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box, you can change the status of the execution agent selected on the Execution Agent Management screen. At this time, you can also select multiple execution agents to simultaneously change their status.

The following figure shows the Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box.

Figure 15‒46: Change the Execution Agent Status dialog box

Cautionary notes

A maximum number of 100 execution agents can be selected at one time.

Before you can change the status of execution agents, you must enable the job distribution delay reduction function. If this function is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed in the Execution agent status column on the Execution Agent Management screen.

For details about how to enable the job distribution delay reduction function, see 21.5.1 Procedure to enable the job distribution delay reduction function in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

15.2.37 Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

In the Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box, you can start or end the communication status check of the job distribution delay reduction function. You can also check the result of the communication status check of the job distribution delay reduction function.

For details about the job distribution delay reduction function, see 21.5 Setting up the job distribution delay reduction function in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The following figure shows the Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box.

Figure 15‒47: Check the Communication Status of the Execution Agent dialog box

Cautionary note

Before you can check the communication status of execution agents, you must enable the job distribution delay reduction function.

For details about how to enable the job distribution delay reduction function, see 21.5.1 Procedure to enable the job distribution delay reduction function in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

15.2.38 Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box

In the Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box, you can set the time period for which you want to change the job-execution multiplicity level and the job-execution multiplicity level of that time period.

The following figure shows the Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box.

Figure 15‒48: Add Time Period and Job-Execution Multiplicity Level dialog box

15.2.39 Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group)

In the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group), you can view the definitions of the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen.

The following figure shows the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group).

Figure 15‒49: Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group)

The Attach Relation to Execution Agent area displays a list of execution agents that are associated with the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen. When you select an execution agent and click the Job Execution Status button, you can view the job execution status of the selected execution agent.

15.2.40 Job Execution Status dialog box

In the Job Execution Status dialog box, you can view the job execution status of the execution agent selected in the Detail Information dialog box (for an execution agent group).

The following figure shows the Job Execution Status dialog box.

Figure 15‒50: Job Execution Status dialog box

15.2.41 Add Execution Agent Group dialog box

In the Add Execution Agent Group dialog box, you can add an execution agent group to the connection-destination JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

The following figure shows the Add Execution Agent Group dialog box.

Figure 15‒51: Add Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.42 Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box

In the Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box, you can change the description of the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen.

The following figure shows the Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box.

Figure 15‒52: Change Settings of Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.43 Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box

In the Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box, you can view a list of the execution agents that are associated with the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen.

The following figure shows the Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box.

Figure 15‒53: Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.2.44 Attach Relation to Execution Agent dialog box

In the Attach Relation to Execution Agent dialog box, you can set the execution agent to be newly associated with the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen. At this time, you can also set the priority level of the execution agent.

The following figure shows the Attach Relation to Execution Agent dialog box.

Figure 15‒54: Attach Relation to Execution Agent dialog box

15.2.45 Change the Priority Order dialog box

In the Change the Priority Order dialog box, you can change the priority level of the execution agent selected in the Attach Relation to Execution Agent Group dialog box.

The following figure shows the Change the Priority Order dialog box.

Figure 15‒55: Change the Priority Order dialog box

15.2.46 Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box

In the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box, you can change the job transfer restriction status of the execution agent group selected on the Execution Agent Group Management screen. At this time, you can also select multiple execution agent groups to simultaneously change their job transfer restriction status.

Cautionary note

A maximum number of 100 execution agent groups can be selected at one time.

The following figure shows the Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box.

Figure 15‒56: Change the Job Transfer Restriction Status of the Execution Agent Group dialog box

15.3 User customization of the Job Portal

This section describes how a user can customize the job portal.

15.3.1 Customizing the items displayed in windows

You can use the Setting dialog box of the job portal to customize the window to be displayed immediately after login to the job portal, the items displayed in the Detail Information area of the Dashboard window, and so on. For details, see 15.2.28 Setting dialog box.

15.3.2 Customizing the automatic screen refresh settings

You can use the Setting dialog box of the job portal to set the automatic refresh interval for the following screens:

Dashboard screen

List screen

Monitor dialog box and Monitor screen

You can set the automatic refresh interval in the range from 180 to 600 seconds (from 3 to 10 minutes). The default is 600 seconds (10 minutes).

For details about Setting dialog box, see 15.2.28 Setting dialog box.

15.3.3 Customizing the behavior of the Web GUI when used for a long time

You can use the Setting dialog box of the job portal to specify the following settings that are related to the behavior of the job portal when used for a long time:

Interval or times to display a web page reload confirmation message

Whether to reload the Dashboard screen without displaying a confirmation message when the screen is displayed

If Reload without displaying message when the Dashboard is displayed is selected when the Dashboard screen is displayed, the page is reloaded without displaying a confirmation message when a page reload time comes.

Each time the job portal screen is automatically reloaded, the login session is renewed. To maintain the same layout before and after reloading the window, specify the following settings:

In the Setting dialog box, specify Dashboard for Initial display screen.

In the Setting dialog box, under the settings that determine whether the areas displayed in the Dashboard screen are collapsed or expanded initially, specify the states in which the screen is used for long-time monitoring.

For a web browser in which to display Web Console, hide the scroll bars or reset their sliders to the initial positions.

In the Setting dialog box, select Dashboard > Operation to update the Day for Monitor when the Base time is exceeded > Update without displaying message.

For details about Setting dialog box, see 15.2.28 Setting dialog box.

15.4 Customizations by administrators

This section describes customizations of the job portal that administrators can perform.

15.4.1 Customizing the display colors that indicate unit statuses

You can edit the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) on the Web Console server to customize the following. These settings are shared by the windows and dialog boxes of the job portal:

Changing the display colors indicating unit statuses

Setting the display colors indicating unit statuses to those used for JP1/AJS3 - View

Setting the display colors indicating delays

Setting the display color for hold plan

The following table lists the windows and dialog boxes subject to customization using the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) and the items whose display colors can be changed. Note that, for icons, you can change only the background color.

Table 15‒9: Items whose display colors can be changed by editing the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf)

No.

Screen and Dialog box

Items whose display colors can be changed

1

Dashboard screen

Status of Root Jobnet area

Execution progress (for individual root jobnets)

2

Root jobnet status icons

3

Execution progress (for the whole units)

4

Unit status icons

5

Detail Information area

List tab

Icons in the Status column

6

Icon for the Hold-On button

7

Icon for the Hold-Off button

8

Chart tab

Execution schedule

9

List screen

List area

Icons in the Status column

10

Icons in the Result column

11

Monitor dialog box, Monitor screen

Map area

Icons for the Unit

12

Top of the screen and dialog box

Icon for the Hold-On button

13

Icon for the Hold-Off button

14

Icon for the Interrupt button

15

Icon for the Kill button

16

Icon for the Rerun button

17

Generation Selection dialog box

Icons in the Status column

18

Monthly Schedule screen

Schedule area

Execution schedule

19

List area

Icons in the Status column

20

Top of the screen

Icon for the Hold-On button

21

Icon for the Hold-Off button

For details about the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.7 Details on the settings in the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.7 Details on the settings in the display color settings file (ajs3web_color.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

15.4.2 Customizing the operation restriction settings for each user

You can restrict the operations that can be performed by each JP1 user who logs in to the job portal. To do so, use the job portal to apply the operating permission configuration file. This subsection describes the format of the operating permission configuration file and details of the settings in this file.

Note that only a JP1 user who is set as a user who sets permissions can apply the operating permission configuration file. For details about users who set permissions, see 14.2 Settings for restricting the operations that Web GUI (Job Portal) users can perform.

(1) Editing the file

The procedure for editing the operating permission configuration file differs for each of the following situations:

If you are using the operation restriction function for the first time

If you want to add, change, or delete operation permission settings for a user

If a manager host has been added

If JP1/AJS3 - Web Console has been upgraded

(a) If you are using the operation restriction function for the first time

If you are using the operation restriction function for the first time, perform the following procedure to edit the operating permission configuration file:

Specify the manager host for which you want to set operational restrictions, and then use the job portal to log in.

From the Management menu at the top of the screen, select Operating Permission Settings and then Acquire Model File.

The model file for the operating permission configuration file (operationpermission_model.csv) is downloaded.

Copy the downloaded model file, and then rename it as appropriate.

In a folder of your choice, save the renamed operating permission configuration file as the operating permission configuration master file.

The master file you created in this step will be used the second and subsequent times you perform the Apply Operating Permission Settings operation. Store and manage the file appropriately.

Open the master operating permission configuration file (CSV file) with spreadsheet software or a similar program.

Change the definitions.

Save the operating permission configuration file in CSV format.

From the Management menu at the top of the job portal window, select Operating Permission Settings and then Apply.

The Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box opens.

From Select, select the operating permission configuration file that you edited, and then click the OK button.

Note

After you select the operating permission configuration file, if you change the file contents and then apply the file, the changes might not be applied or communication might time out because a request cannot be sent. If you change the contents of the operating permission configuration file after selecting the file, reselect the file.

Notify all job portal users that re-login is required.

Note

The added or changed operation permission settings are not applied for each job portal user until the user logs in to the Web GUI again. If necessary, restart the JP1/AJS3 HTTP Server service and the JP1/AJS3 Web Application Server service.

(b) If you want to add, change, or delete operation permission settings for a user

If you want to add, change, or delete operation permission settings that have already been applied, perform the following procedure to edit the operating permission configuration file:

Use spreadsheet software or a similar program to open the master operating permission configuration file (CSV file that you kept).

Change the definitions.

Save the operating permission configuration file in CSV format.

Specify the manager host for which you want to change the settings, and then use the job portal to log in.

From the Management menu at the top of the Web GUI window, select Operating Permission Settings and then Apply.

The Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box opens.

From Select, select the operating permission configuration file that you edited, and then click the OK button.

Note

After you select the operating permission configuration file, if you change the file contents and then apply the file, the changes might not be applied or communication might time out because a request cannot be sent. If you change the contents of the operating permission configuration file after selecting the file, reselect the file.

Notify all job portal users that re-login is required.

Note

The added or changed operation permission settings are not applied for each job portal user until the user logs in to the Web GUI again. If necessary, restart the JP1/AJS3 HTTP Server service and the JP1/AJS3 Web Application Server service.

(c) If a manager host has been added

If a new manager host has been added, perform the following procedure to edit the operating permission configuration file:

Use spreadsheet software or a similar program to open the master operating permission configuration file (CSV file that you kept).

Change the definitions as necessary.

Save the operating permission configuration file in CSV format.

Specify the newly added manager host, and then use the job portal to log in.

From the Management menu at the top of the Web GUI window, select Operating Permission Settings and then Apply.

The Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box opens.

From Select, select the operating permission configuration file that you edited, and then click the OK button.

Note

After you select the operating permission configuration file, if you change the file contents and then apply the file, the changes might not be applied or communication might time out because a request cannot be sent. If you change the contents of the operating permission configuration file after selecting the file, reselect the file.

Notify all job portal users that re-login is required.

Note

The added or changed operation permission settings are not applied for each job portal user until the user logs in to the Web GUI again. If necessary, restart the JP1/AJS3 HTTP Server service and the JP1/AJS3 Web Application Server service.

(d) If JP1/AJS3 - Web Console has been upgraded

If JP1/AJS3 - Web Console has been upgraded, the number of operations that need to be restricted might increase. If JP1/AJS3 - Web Console has been upgraded, perform the following procedure to edit the operating permission configuration file:

Specify the manager host for which you want to set operational restrictions, and then use the job portal to log in.

From the Management menu at the top of the screen, select Operating Permission Settings and then Acquire Model File.

The upgraded version of the model file for the operating permission configuration file (operationpermission_model.csv) is downloaded.

Copy the downloaded model file, and then rename it as appropriate.

Use spreadsheet software or a similar program to open the renamed operating permission configuration file (CSV file).

Use spreadsheet software or a similar program to open the master operating permission configuration file (CSV file that you kept).

Copy the contents of the master file to the appropriate location in the new operating permission configuration file.

For the items that were added as a result of the version upgrade, change the settings as necessary.

Save the operating permission configuration file in CSV format.

In a folder of your choice, save the edited operating permission configuration file as the new master file.

From the Management menu at the top of the job portal window, select Operating Permission Settings and then Apply.

The Apply Operating Permission Settings dialog box opens.

From Select, select the operating permission configuration file that you edited, and then click the OK button.

Note

After you select the operating permission configuration file, if you change the file contents and then apply the file, the changes might not be applied or communication might time out because a request cannot be sent. If you change the contents of the operating permission configuration file after selecting the file, reselect the file.

Notify all job portal users that re-login is required.

Note

The added or changed operation permission settings are not applied for each job portal user until the user logs in to the Web GUI again. If necessary, restart the JP1/AJS3 HTTP Server service and the JP1/AJS3 Web Application Server service.

(2) Acquiring the operating permission configuration file that was applied

After the operating permission configuration file has been applied to a manager host, you can use the job portal to acquire the file and check the settings in the file. The procedure for using the job portal to acquire the operating permission configuration file that was applied is as follows.

Use the job portal to log in, specifying the manager host from which you want to acquire the operating permission configuration file.

From the Management menu at the top of the screen, select Operating Permission Settings and then Acquire.

The operating permission configuration file that was applied is downloaded.

The name of the downloaded operating permission configuration file is in the format operationpermission_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.csv, where YYYYMMDDHHMMSS is the file acquisition date and time according to the Web Console server.

(3) When settings take effect

When a user for whom operational restrictions are set logs in

(4) File format

The format of the operating permission configuration file is as follows.

File type

CSV format (comma separated)

Maximum size

3MB

Maximum number of lines

1,000 lines (excluding the FileVersion line, lines in which the JP1 user name is an asterisk (*), and comment lines)

Cautionary notes

Do not edit the FileVersion line at the beginning of the file. If you edit this line, you will no longer be able to use the job portal to apply the file.

Do not enter any values in the 31th and subsequent columns.

Setting values are not case sensitive.

If you use any program other than Excel to edit the file, use a pair of double quotation marks (") to enclose each character string that includes any of the following characters:

- , (comma)

- " (double quotation mark)

- Linefeed character (CR+LF or LF)

Lines beginning with a hash mark (#) are treated as comment lines.

If a line in which the JP1 user name is an asterisk (*) is omitted, the system behaves in accordance with the default settings (permit only viewing).

If the file contains any of the following lines, an error occurs:

- A line whose first column begins with a character other than a hash mark (#)

- A line consisting of only commas (,)

Note

If you are using Excel or a similar spreadsheet program, saving a worksheet in which all settings in a row are blank will generate a line that include only commas. If such a line exists, delete it or comment it out.

If the file is to be saved in Unicode, save the file in the UTF-8 format.

(5) Setting items

The following describes the items to be set.

(a) Start of a line (column 1)

If you enter a hash mark (#) at the start of a line, the entire line is treated as a comment.

(b) Optional data (columns 2 to 11)

In these columns, you can enter information of your choice. For example, you can enter the name of a user for whom you want to restrict operations, and the group to which the user belongs.

When you enter data in these columns, limit the number of characters in each column to about 50 characters so that the size of the operation permission configuration file does not exceed the maximum size.

Recommended value

Set the value appropriate for the operating environment.

(c) Names of JP1 users for whom operations are to be restricted (column 12)

In this column, enter the names of the JP1 users for whom you want to set operational restrictions. You must enter a value in this column.

Specifiable value

JP1 user name

For details about the characters that can be used to specify a JP1 user name, see the JP1/Base User's Guide.

If an asterisk (*) is entered as a JP1 user name, you can specify the default operation restriction settings for all JP1 users. If there is no line in which an asterisk (*) is specified as the JP1 user name, the system behaves in accordance with the default settings (permits only viewing).

Recommended value

Set the value appropriate for the operating environment.

Cautionary note

If the file contains two or more lines in which the same value is specified in this column, an error occurs.

(d) Type of operating permission settings (column 13)

In this column, specify the type of operating permission settings for the user. You must enter a value in this column.

Specifiable value

R

Permits only viewing (prohibits all operations that can be restricted).

If this value is specified in column 13, the settings of all subsequent columns are ignored.

A

Permits execution of all operations.

If this value is specified in column 13, the settings of all subsequent columns are ignored.

C

Permissions for each operation are to be specified separately.

Recommended value

Set the value appropriate for the operating environment.

(e) Specification of permissions for operations that can be performed from the job portal (columns 14 to 30)

If C (separate specification) is specified for the type of operating permission settings (in column 13), specify whether to permit execution of each operation that can be performed from job portal in these columns. If you do not specify any value, the system assumes that 0 (do not permit execution of the operation) is specified.

The following table shows the column numbers and their corresponding operations.

Table 15‒10: Column numbers and their corresponding operations

Column number

Operation

14

Register for Execution

15

Cancel Registration

16

Adding an execution schedule

17

Change plan (change time)

18

Change plan (execute immediately)

19

Change plan (execution prohibited)

20

Change plan (release change)

21

Change delay monitor

22

Rerun

23

Interrupt

24

Kill

25

Change job status

26

Edit definition

27

Hold

28

Hold Release

29

Change Exec Order Method

30

Change Wait Status

The values that can be specified for each column are as follows:

Specifiable value

0

Prohibit execution of the operation.

1

Permit execution of the operation.

Recommended value

Set the value appropriate for the operating environment.

(6) Cautionary notes

The settings in the operating permission configuration file apply only to the manager host to which the user who applies the configuration file is logged in. To set operational restrictions on multiple manager hosts, log in to each host and apply the operating permission configuration file on each host.

Make sure that users log in to a manager host to which the operating permission configuration file has been applied. If users log in to a manager host to which the operating permission configuration file has not been applied, the default settings (permit only viewing) are applied. You can also restrict the manager hosts to which users can log in. If you do so, you must also use the function for restricting the hosts to which the Web Console server can connect.

Users who set permissions can log in to a manager host by specifying the IP address of the manager host or by specifying the host name of the manager host. Note that, even if the IP address and host name refer to the same manager host, the system considers login by IP-address specification and login by host-name specification different. To use the same restriction settings in both cases, you must apply the operating permission configuration file twice: once when logging in by specifying the IP address, and once when logging in by specifying the host name. You can also restrict the manager hosts to which users can log in. If you do so, you must also use the function for restricting the hosts to which the Web Console server can connect.

Immediately after you enable the operation restriction function of the job portal on a Web Console server, all JP1 users are permitted to perform only viewing operations on all manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect.

If multiple users who set permissions apply operating permission configuration files on the same manager host, the settings in the last-applied file override the settings in previously applied files.

If JP1/AJS3 - Web Console has been upgraded, the number of operations that can be restricted might increase. If you upgrade JP1/AJS3 - Web Console and then apply the operating permission configuration file that was used before the upgrade, the system assumes that 0 (do not permit execution) is specified for all new operation settings.

(7) Example

This subsection shows an example of the contents of the operating permission configuration file for specifying the operating restrictions in the following table:

Table 15‒11: Settings that can be specified in the operating permission configuration file

User name

JP1 user name

Section

Post

Operational restrictions

Taro Hitachi

jp1admin

Operational section

Administrator

Permit all operations

Hanako Hitachi

jp1user1

Operational section

Operator

Permit all operations other than the editing of definitions

Jiro Hitachi

jp1user2

Development section

Developer

Permit the viewing and editing of definitions

Other users

Permit only viewing

Example

FileVersion=1.1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
#,Option 1,Option 2,Option 3,Option 4,Option 5,Option 6,Option 7,Option 8,Option 9,Option 10,JP1 User Name,Classification,Register for Execution,Cancel Registration,Add,Change Plan (Change Time),Change Plan (Execute Immediately),Change Plan (Execution Prohibited),Change Plan (Release Change),Delay monitoring changed,Rerun,Interrupted,Kill,Change Status,Edit Definition,Hold,Hold Release,Change Exec Order Method,Change Wait Status
,Hitachi, Ltd.,Operational section,Administrator,Taro Hitachi,,,,,,,jp1admin,A,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,Hitachi, Ltd.,Operational section,Operator,Hanako Hitachi,,,,,,,jp1user1,C,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0,1,1,1,1
,Hitachi, Ltd.,Development section,Developer,Jiro Hitachi,,,,,,,jp1user2,C,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,0
,Default setting,,,,,,,,,,*,R,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

16 Management Portal of the Web GUI

This chapter describes the management portal of the Web GUI.

16.1 Login to the Management Portal and logout from the Management Portal

This section describes the procedures for logging in from a web browser to the management portal and for logging out from the management portal.

16.1.1 Logging in to the Management Portal

To operate the management portal, you must log in to JP1/AJS3 - Manager from a web browser.

To log in from your web browser:

In the address bar of your web browser, enter the URL of the Login screen for management portal.

http://host-name-or-IP-address-of-Web-Console-server:port-number/ajs/login_mp.html

The default port number is 22252 for HTTP connections and 22253 for HTTPS connections.

Prefix the URL with https if you have SSL enabled and wish to connect using HTTPS.

The Login screen appears.

Enter information in the User name, Password, and Host to connect fields, and then click OK.

In the User name and Password fields, specify the user name and password of the JP1 user who is to log in.

In the Host to connect field#, specify the host name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host.

#

If the manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect are restricted and the specified input method for Host to connect is a drop-down list, select the name of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager host to which a connection is to be established from the drop-down list.

When login is successful, the Summary screen of the management portal appears.

Cautionary notes

If no request is issued to the Web Console server after login, a session timeout occurs, and the login is canceled. The session timeout period for the management portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

If you use the Web GUI for a long time, restart the Web browser once a day. The KNAK2416-Q message appears after the Web GUI has been used for 25 hours.

If the manager hosts to which the Web Console server can connect are restricted and the name of a host to which Web Console is not permitted to connect is specified for Host to connect, attempts to log in will fail with the KNAK3279-E message.

16.1.2 Logging out from the Management Portal

You can log out from the management portal by clicking the Log Out button on any of the following screens:

Summary screen

List of Scheduler Services screen

Scheduler Service Details screen

List of Databases screen

Database Details screen

Target host screen

When you have logged out, the Login screen appears.

Cautionary note

If you close the web browser without clicking the Log Out button, the management portal session times out, preventing you from logging out until automatic logout processing occurs on the server side.

The session timeout period for the management portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

16.2 Screens and Dialog Boxes of the Management Portal

This chapter describes the screens and dialog boxes that you use in the management portal.

16.2.1 Page transitions in Management Portal

The following figure shows the screen transitions in the management portal.

Figure 16‒1: Screen transitions in management portal

The following table lists the screens and dialog boxes of the management portal and the sections related to them:

No.

Screen

Relevant section

1

Summary screen

16.2.3

2

List of Scheduler Services screen

16.2.4

3

Scheduler Service Details screen

16.2.5

4

Job Execution Details dialog box

16.2.6

5

Event Job Retention Details dialog box

16.2.7

6

Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box

16.2.8

7

List of Databases screen

16.2.9

8

Database Details screen

16.2.10

9

Database Configuration Information dialog box

16.2.11

10

Target host screen

16.2.12

11

Service Details dialog box

16.2.13

12

Process Details dialog box

16.2.14

16.2.2 Management Portal main window

The Management Portal main window consists of the navigation area and screen display area. The following figure shows the Management Portal main window.

Figure 16‒2: Management Portal main window

Navigation area

Displays the following menu items that display the corresponding screens:

Summary

List of Scheduler Services

List of Databases

Target host

When you click the Open button () of the List of Scheduler Services item, scheduler service names are listed under the menu item.

When you click the Open button () of the List of Databases item, the setup identifier names for databases are listed under the item. Note that the List of Databases item is not displayed if external databases are used.

To refresh the information displayed in the navigation area, click the refresh button () on the MENU title bar.

Screen display area

When you click a menu item in the navigation area, the corresponding screen appears in the screen display area.

The following table lists the menu items in the navigation area and the screens to be displayed in the screen display area.

Table 16‒1: Menu items in the navigation area and the screens to be displayed in the screen display area

No.

Menu item

Screen displayed in the screen display area

Relevant section

1

Summary

The Summary screen appears.

16.2.3

2

List of Scheduler Services

The List of Scheduler Services screen appears.

16.2.4

3

scheduler-service-name

The Scheduler Service Details screen appears. You can view detailed information about the scheduler service you clicked.

16.2.5

4

List of Databases

The List of Databases screen appears.

16.2.9

5

setupi-dentifier

The Database Details screen appears. You can view detailed information about the database that corresponds to the setup identifier you clicked.

16.2.10

6

Target host

The Target host screen appears.

16.2.12

Cautionary notes

If no on-screen operations (including refreshing) are performed in the management portal for a certain length of time, the session times out. If the session times out, an error message appears, and the web browser closes. The session timeout period for the management portal can be specified by using the environment setting file (ajs3web.conf). The default is 15 minutes. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Windows, see 3.4.3 Details on the settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide. For details about the environment settings file (ajs3web.conf) in Linux, see 13.3.3 Details on settings in the environment-settings file (ajs3web.conf) in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

The web browser displaying the management portal does not close and displays the login screen if the Log Out is clicked or an error that closes the web browser (for example, the session was invalidated) occurs.

The web browser might fail to display the login screen if an error occurs when the management portal screen is being opened. In this case, manually close the web browser.

16.2.3 Summary screen

The Summary screen can display status summary information for the connected manager host. With this information, you can check whether there are factors that might stop job execution on the manager host. If there is such a factor, you can view more detailed information on the details screen for the relevant status.

The following figure shows the Summary screen.

Figure 16‒3: Summary screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Summary screen is refreshed every 3 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled.

Scheduler Services, Databases, and Target host display the target where an abnormal or warning event has occurred.

The Summary screen also displays the operating status of the connected manager host. Clicking an item displays a screen or dialog box that shows detailed information about the clicked item. The following table lists items and what operations you can perform for them.

Table 16‒2: Items displayed in the Summary screen and what operations you can perform for them

No.

Item

Operation

Relevant section

1

Service Status button

The Service Details dialog box appears. You can check the statuses of services on the connected manager host.

16.2.13

2

Job Portal button

The Dashboard screen of the job portal appears. You can monitor and operate the units defined on the manager host.

15.2.2

3

scheduler-service-name displayed under Scheduler Services

The Scheduler Service Details screen appears. You can view detailed information about the scheduler service you clicked.

16.2.5

4

setup-identifier displayed under Databases

The Database Details screen appears. You can view detailed information about the database that corresponds to the setup identifier you clicked.

16.2.10

5

execution-host-name displayed under Target host

The Target host screen appears. You can check the communication status of the execution host.

16.2.12

Cautionary note

If many scheduler services and databases are set up on the connected manager host, it might take some time to render the Summary screen.

16.2.4 List of Scheduler Services screen

The List of Scheduler Services screen can display a list of scheduler services that are set up on the connected manager host. When you click the name of a scheduler service, the Scheduler Service Details screen appears, in which you can view detailed information about the scheduler service.

The following figure shows the List of Scheduler Services screen.

Figure 16‒4: List of Scheduler Services screen

16.2.5 Scheduler Service Details screen

The Scheduler Service Details screen can display status summary information about the selected scheduler service. If there is abnormality in the scheduler service, you can identify which status of the scheduler service is abnormal. If there is a factor that might stop job execution, you can display the applicable dialog box and view detailed information about the factor.

The following figure shows the Scheduler Service Details screen.

Figure 16‒5: Scheduler Service Details screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Scheduler Service Details screen is refreshed every 3 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled.

For details on the values displayed for the Suppress function and Termination restriction in Status, see ajsstatus in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

The Number of Jobs That Are in Queue or Running in Job Execution Status and the Number of Unreported Information Items in Retention Status of Event Jobs display the maximum values output to performance reports in the past 10 minutes. The following table shows the correspondence between the items in the Scheduler Service Details screen and the items output to performance reports.

Table 16‒3: Correspondence between the items in the Scheduler Service Details screen and the items output to performance reports

No.

Scheduler Service Details screen

the performance report output function

(The ajsreport command)

Relevant section

1

Number of Jobs That Are in Queue or Running

CONTENTJOB_NUM

ajsreport in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference

2

Number of Unreported Information Items

EVJOB_UNREPORTED_EVENT_NUM

The Number of Execution Generations in Retention Status of Jobnets with Start Conditions displays the maximum number of execution generations monitored by the CONDGENWARNNUM environment setting parameter for the past 10 minutes. The number is updated according to the check interval specified for the CONDGENWARNINT environment setting parameter. For details on the CONDGENWARNINT and CONDGENWARNNUM environment setting parameters, see 20.4.2 Details of the environment setting parameters for scheduler services in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

When you click a desired item, the corresponding dialog box appears, in which you can view the detailed information about the clicked item. The following table lists items and what operations you can perform for them.

Table 16‒4: Items displayed in the Scheduler Service Details screen and what operations you can perform for them

No.

Item

Operation

Relevant section

1

Operating Environment button

The Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box appears. You can check the operating environment of the scheduler service.

16.2.8

2

Job Portal button

The List screen of the job portal appears. You can operate the units managed by the scheduler service.

15.2.3

3

number-of-jobs displayed under Job Execution Status

The Job Execution Details dialog box appears.

16.2.6

4

number-of-unreported-information-items displayed under Retention Status of Event Jobs

The Event Job Retention Details dialog box appears.

16.2.7

Cautionary note

The Number of Execution Generations in Retention Status of Jobnets with Start Conditions is updated after the time (minutes) set in the CONDGENWARNINT environment setting parameter has elapsed since the time the scheduler service was restarted or the last time it was checked. This item might display 0 until the value is updated.

16.2.6 Job Execution Details dialog box

The Job Execution Details dialog box can display the number of jobs in the Now queuing and Now running status for a 10-minute period (10 per-minute values). The displayed value is the same as CONTENTJOB_NUM, which is an item that is output to performance reports. For details on the items output to performance reports, see ajsreport in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference. You can use this information to identify periods when a lot of jobs are Now queuing or Now running status. This dialog box displays information about the last 10-minute period after information acquisition started on the manager host.

The following figure shows the Job Execution Details dialog box.

Figure 16‒6: Job Execution Details dialog box

If it is likely that the number of jobs in the Now queuing and Now running status will reach the upper limit specified by the MaximumContentJob environment setting parameter in a specific time period, review the jobs that are executed in and around that period. For details about the MaximumContentJob environment setting parameter, see 20.5.2(12) MaximumContentJob in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Configuration Guide.

If necessary, review operation of jobs by using JP1/AJS3 - View or the job portal. For details about the operation procedure in JP1/AJS3 - View, see 9. Controlling the Execution of a Jobnet and Jobs. For details about the operation procedure in job portal, see 15. Job Portal of the Web GUI.

16.2.7 Event Job Retention Details dialog box

In the Event Job Retention Details dialog box, you can display the top five names of execution hosts and jobnets with startup conditions that most frequently send data to the manager host within 24 hours.

The following figure shows the Event Job Retention Details dialog box.

Figure 16‒7: Event Job Retention Details dialog box

When you select a jobnet name and click the Job Portal button, the List screen of the job portal appears. In this screen, you can operate units.

If there is unreported information, a large number of unexpected events might have occurred for a specific jobnet with start conditions. In such a case, take measures by operating units from JP1/AJS3 - View or the job portal, or by executing commands. For details about how to take measures, see 2.5 Troubleshooting problems if processing of a jobnet with a start condition is delayed in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Troubleshooting.

16.2.8 Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box

The Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box can display the operating environment of the selected scheduler service.

The following figure shows the Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box.

Figure 16‒8: Scheduler Service Operating Environment dialog box

For details on the displayed items, see ajsstatus in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

16.2.9 List of Databases screen

The List of Databases screen can display a list of embedded databases that are set up on the connected manager host. The setup identifiers of the databases are displayed. When you click a desired setup identifier, the Database Details screen appears, and you can view detailed information about the database in this screen.

The following figure shows the List of Databases screen.

Figure 16‒9: List of Databases screen

16.2.10 Database Details screen

The Database Details screen can display detailed information about the selected embedded database.

The following figure shows the Database Details screen.

Figure 16‒10: Database Details screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Database Details screen is refreshed every 3 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled.

For details on the values displayed for the Status of the Automatic log unload function in Status, see AUTO_LOG_UNLOAD in ajsembdboplog in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

When you click the Configuration Information button, the Database Configuration Information dialog box appears, and you can view configuration information about the database in the dialog box.

If the backup enhancement function is used, the AJS2DATA2 and AJS2INDEX2 screens appear. For details about the backup enhancement function, see 2.5 Backing up and recovering JP1/AJS3 - Manager by using the backup enhancement function in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Administration Guide.

After confirming the condition of the database in the Database Details screen, if necessary, maintain or reorganize the database. For details about maintenance and reorganization of a database, see 9.2 Performing maintenance in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Administration Guide.

16.2.11 Database Configuration Information dialog box

The Database Configuration Information dialog box allows you to view detailed configuration information about the selected embedded database.

The following figure shows the Database Configuration Information screen.

Figure 16‒11: Database Configuration Information dialog box

For details on the displayed items, see ajsembdbstatus in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

16.2.12 Target host screen

The Target host screen can display the communication statuses of the execution hosts registered on the connected host. If you find a problem in the summary status information of execution hosts, you can use this screen to identify the execution hosts in the abnormal communication status.

The following figure shows the Target host screen.

Figure 16‒12: Target host screen

If automatic refresh is enabled, the Target host screen is refreshed every 3 minutes, starting from the time that automatic refresh is enabled.

For details on the values displayed in the Target host screen, see ajsagtshow in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

When you select an execution host under Execution host name and click the Service Status button, the Service Details dialog box appears, and you can check the status of the service in the dialog box. If the execution agent is unconnectable, check the status of the JP1/AJS3 service on the agent host in the Service Details dialog box.

When you select an execution host under Execution host name and click the Job Portal button, the Execution Agent screen of the job portal appears, and you can operate the execution agent in the screen.

16.2.13 Service Details dialog box

The Service Details dialog box can display the status of a JP1/AJS3 service on the connected host. The target service differs depending on whether the manager host or agent host is connected.

The following figure shows the Service Details dialog box.

Figure 16‒13: Service Details dialog box

If the following functions are used on the connected host, you can also check whether they are active:

Flexible job

Linkage with a mail system (if Outlook is used on a Windows host)

Definition pre-check function

If you click the Process Details button while the JP1/AJS3 service is selected, the Process Details dialog box is displayed, where you can check the detailed process startup status.

16.2.14 Process Details dialog box

The Process Details dialog box can display the activation status of a JP1/AJS3 process.

The following figure shows the Process Details dialog box.

Figure 16‒14: Process Details dialog box

Note that the information displayed in this dialog box is the same as the output results of the jajs_spmd_status command. For details about the jajs_spmd_status command, see jajs_spmd_status in 3. Commands Used for Normal Operations in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Command Reference.

Appendixes

A. JP1/AJS3 - View Compatibility

This appendix describes JP1/AJS3 - View compatibility.

A.1 Version compatibility with JP1/AJS3 - Manager

This section describes version compatibility of JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS3 - Manager. Note that when you connect JP1/AJS3 - View to JP1/AJS3 - Manager without an embedded database (the scheduler database is ISAM), the available functions are equivalent to those in JP1/AJS2 - Manager 08-50.

(1) When the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is older than the version of the JP1/AJS3 - Manager

When the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is older than the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the available functions are equivalent to those in the version of JP1/AJS3 - View. You cannot use functions or manipulate definitions that are supported only in later versions of JP1/AJS3 - View. Note, however, that the functions in version 11-50 of JP1/AJS3 - Manager are supported in version 11-10 of JP1/AJS3 - View.

Version compatibility of units:

If a unit supported by a JP1/AJS3 - View version later than the version of JP1/AJS3 - View being used is defined in JP1/AJS3 - Manager, that unit is displayed with the unknown-type icon or the icon of the base unit. An attempt to operate the unknown-type icon fails and results in display of an error message. You can operate the icon of the base unit as is.

Version compatibility of detailed definitions:

There is a case where a problem is caused by a detailed definition item that is supported by a JP1/AJS3 - View version later than the version of JP1/AJS3 - View being used. If such a detailed definition item is defined in JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the Define Details dialog box might not be displayed, depending on the item type.

When the Define Details dialog box appears, the detailed definition items that are supported only in later versions of JP1/AJS3 - View are not displayed. Also note that if you change the value of a detailed definition item, the values of the detailed definition items that are supported only in later versions of JP1/AJS3 - View might change.

Version compatibility of schedule definitions:

There is a case where a problem is caused by a schedule definition item that is supported by a JP1/AJS3 - View version later than the version of JP1/AJS3 - View being used. If such a schedule definition item is defined in JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the Define Details dialog box might not be displayed, depending on the item type.

There is also a case where an error is caused by a schedule definition item that is supported by a JP1/AJS3 - View version later than the version of JP1/AJS3 - View being used. If such a schedule definition item is being used by the upper-level jobnet and the Copy Upper button is clicked in the Schedule Settings dialog box, an error occurs.

For details about version compatibility of JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS3 - Manager, see 8.1.2 Version compatibility between JP1/AJS3 - Manager and JP1/AJS3 - View in the JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 System Design (Configuration) Guide.

(2) When the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is newer than the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager

When the version of JP1/AJS3 - View is newer than the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager, the available functions are equivalent to those of the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager.

JP1/AJS3 - View displays only items supported by the version of JP1/AJS3 - Manager you are using. If you try to display a window or item that is supported only in later versions of JP1/AJS3 - Manager, one of the following occurs:

The window or item is not displayed.

The item is disabled.

The window or item is displayed, but an error occurs when you select the window or item.

A.2 Version compatibility with JP1/AJS2 - Manager

When you connect JP1/AJS3 - View and JP1/AJS2 - Manager, the available functions are equivalent to those in the version of JP1/AJS2 - Manager.

B. Customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00

From version 11-00, the default values have changed for some customizable items in JP1/AJS3 - View. This appendix describes the items whose default values have changed in version 11-00, and how to change the default values back to those used in version 10-50 and earlier.

B.1 List of customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00

The following table lists the customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00.

Table B‒1: List of customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00

No.

Customizable item

Default value in 10-50 and earlier

Default value in 11-00 and later

Location of item

Description

1

Icon for unregistered custom jobs

Display the jobnet icon for unregistered custom jobs (Yes)

Display a question mark as the icon for unregistered custom jobs (No)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.3.11

2

Order in which units are displayed in the tree area

Display units in the tree area in a different order from the list area (No)

Display units in the same order (Unicode order) in the tree area and the list area (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.3.15

3

Status of the tree area and list area when the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window) is displayed

The tree area displays the unit selected in the source window, and the list area displays the hierarchy below that unit (No)

The tree area is expanded from one level above the unit selected in the source window, and the unit selected in the source window is selected in the list area (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.4.4

4

Status of unit selection and scroll position after the window is updated or list filtering is specified

Unit selection and scroll position are not maintained (No)

The same units are selected and scroll position is maintained (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.4.7

5

Displaying a confirmation message before deleting defined schedule rules for nested jobnets with Depends on upper-level jobnet selected in the schedule settings

Do not display a confirmation message (No)

Display a confirmation message (Yes)

User-specified option file in JP1/AJS3 - View (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.4.16

6

Displaying jobnets that have been registered for execution in the list area when Jobnet Definition is selected from the Function Menu

Do not display jobnets that have been registered for execution (No)

Display jobnets that have been registered for execution (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.4.17

7

Displaying nested jobnets and nested remote jobnets in the tree area when the Jobnet Editor window or the Jobnet Monitor window is displayed

Display the unit selected in the source window in the tree area, and the hierarchy below that unit in the map area (No)

Display the tree area with the tree expanded from one level above the unit selected in the source window, and with the unit selected in the source window selected in the map area (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.5.2

11.7.3

8

Whether to prevent the opening of multiple Jobnet Editor and Jobnet Monitor windows

Permit the opening of multiple windows (No)

Prevent the opening of multiple windows (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.5.17

11.7.21

9

Automatically refreshing the Execution Result Details dialog box

Refresh automatically (Yes)

Do not refresh automatically (No)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.7.18

10

Size of Execution Result Details dialog box

640 x 480 pixels (Normal)

1024 x 768 pixels (Large)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.4.12

11.7.19

11

Behavior when the Jobnet Monitor window is opened from JP1/IM - View

Display the units directly below the root jobnet of the selected job in the map area (No)

Display the specified job directly in the map area (Yes)

User-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf)

11.7.20

12

Use of color images in Status and Result in the list area and Status in the detailed information area in the JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)

Do not display

Display

Main tab of Preferences dialog box

12.3.42(2)

B.2 Using the default values for version 10-50 and earlier for customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00

This section describes how to use the original default values for version 10-50 and earlier with customizable items whose default values have changed in version 11-00.

(1) Items set in the user-specified option file

You can restore the original default values for customizable items by using the model file for the user-specified option file (ajs2view_opt.conf.V10.model) provided for version 10-50 and earlier.

To restore the default values to those used in version 10-50 and earlier:

Back up the user-specified option file to a location of your choice.

The user-specified option file is stored in the following folder:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Hitachi\JP1\JP1_DEFAULT\JP1AJS2V\conf\JP1-user-name#

The default value of %ALLUSERSPROFILE% is system-drive\ProgramData.

#

A folder is created for any JP1 user who has logged in at least once.

If you use any of the following names as a JP1 user name, the folder created for that JP1 user will be enclosed in single-byte parentheses (()):

- A device name such as NUL, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM9, LPT1 to LPT9, or PRN

- A name in the format device-name.extension

- A name that starts with a period (.)

Copy the model file for the user-specified option file in version 10-50 and earlier (ajs2view_opt.conf.V10.model) to the folder that contains the model file for the user-specified option file.

The ajs2view_opt.conf.V10.model file is stored in the following folder:

JP1/AJS3 - View-installation-folder\conf

Change the name of the copy of the ajs2view_opt.conf.V10.model file to ajs2view_opt.conf.

Start JP1/AJS3 - View.

Any instance of JP1/AJS3 - View started after you have replaced the user-specified option file will apply the default values for version 10-50 and earlier to customizable items.

(2) Items set in the Preferences dialog box

To restore the default value from version 10-50 and earlier for a customizable item whose default value in the Preferences dialog box has changed in version 11-00, change the corresponding value in the Preferences dialog box.

C. Notes on using the Web GUI in a smart device environment

The following provides notes on using the Web GUI in a smart device environment:

The graphics performance of the Web GUI depends on the amount of memory installed on the smart device. We recommend that you use a smart device with at least 2 GB of memory.

Make sure that the number of units that make up a root jobnet monitored by the Web GUI (Job Portal) does not exceed 1,000. If the number of units exceeds 1,000, the web browser might hang or might be unable to display information correctly.

In a smart device environment, the following Web GUI (Job Portal) functions cannot be used:

Linking JP1/PFM

Although linkage with JP1/PFM has been set up, the Open PFM Report button, which opens the PFM - Web Console window from the Web GUI (Job Portal), is not displayed.

Applying and acquiring the operation permission settings

The Management menu is not displayed even when a user who sets permissions logs in.

In a smart device environment, you cannot perform the following operations with the Web GUI:

Moving and resizing a displayed dialog box

Changing the order of monitoring-target display areas displayed in the Dashboard screen

Checking of the content represented by an ellipsis (...) when a list is displayed

In a smart device environment, some system behavior in the following Web GUI (Job Portal) dialog boxes is different from that in the standard environment:

Set Monitoring Targets dialog box

When an item is selected in Jobnet or Monitored units, a select box is displayed.

Setting dialog box

When an item is selected in Non-display item or Displayed item, a select box is displayed.

Disable the pop-up blocker of the web browser. If the pop-up blocker is enabled, correct operation might not be possible. For example, the Monthly window does not open.

Do not use the Web GUI with a web browser with private browsing enabled. If private browsing is enabled, correct operation might not be possible. For example, the Monthly Schedule screen does not open.

D. Version Revisions

For details on the version revisions, see B. Version Revisions in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

E. Reference Material for This Manual

For details on reference information that would be helpful in reading this manual, see C. Reference Material for This Manual in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

F. Glossary

For the glossary, see D. Glossary in the manual JP1/Automatic Job Management System 3 Overview.

Index

A

access key of menu command[1]

Advanced page[1]

All Jobs[1]

animation functionality is enabled[1]

arbitrary extended attribute[1]

assigning wait conditions[1]

B

Backup box[1]

Backup file[1]

Base time[1], [2]

Basic page[1]

Break Relation button[1]

C

cabinet ID[1]

calendar area[1], [2]

calendar information[1]

defining[1]

canceling held execution of jobnets and jobs[1]

canceling relation[1]

changed execution start time

restoring[1]

change icon color[1]

Change Password dialog box[1]

changing background color for closed days defined for upper-level job group[1]

changing background color for closed days specified based on day of the week or absolute day[1]

changing background color for closed days specified with standard week value[1]

changing background color for days for which no calendar information is defined for upper-level job group[1]

changing background color for open days defined for upper-level job group[1]

changing background color for open days specified based on day of week or absolute day[1]

changing background color for open days specified with standard week value[1]

changing color indicating selected status[1]

changing display colors for execution status, execution results, and delays[1]

changing execution start time[1]

characters per line[1]

Check event arrivals[1]

checking execution schedule and execution status of a jobnet (by days)

example[1]

checking execution schedule and execution status of a jobnet (by months)

example[1]

color image in status and result[1]

Common User Profile[1]

common user profiles[1]

Compatible mode of JP1/AJS3 - View window[1], [2]

Concurrent exec.[1], [2]

conditions for basic JP1 event information[1]

conditions for end judgment[1]

control

type of[1]

copying

unit and relation[1]

units only[1]

copying or moving unit between multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View[1]

customizable items

items with different default values in version 11-00[1]

customization common to many windows[1]

custom jobs that can be defined[1]

D

Daily Schedule (All Jobs) window[1]

Daily Schedule (Hierarchy) window[1]

Daily Schedule window[1]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

windows and dialog boxes displayed[1]

Day for Specify base day[1], [2]

default values

items with different default values in version 11-00[1]

using default values from version 10-50 and earlier[1]

Defining a jobnet in a jobnet[1]

defining jobnet (root jobnet)[1]

defining jobs[1]

defining manager jobnet[1]

defining remote jobnet[1]

definition on JP1/AJS3 - View window

example[1]

Detailed Schedule dialog box[1]

dialog boxes

Add (for nested jobnet or job)[1]

Add (for root jobnet)[1]

Backup[1]

Cancel Registration[1]

Change Color[1]

Change Delay Monitor Temporarily[1]

Change Display Date[1]

Change Display Month[1]

Change Job Status[1]

Change Priority[1]

Create Color[1]

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job] - [Return Code Specification][1]

Define Details - [Custom Job][1]

Define Details - [Flexible Job][1]

Define Details - [HTTP Connection Job][1]

Define Details - [Job Group][1]

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a nested jobnet)[1]

Define Details - [Jobnet] (for a root jobnet)[1]

Define Details - [Jobnet Connector][1]

Define Details - [Judgment Job][1]

Define Details - [Manager Job Group][1]

Define Details - [Manager Jobnet][1]

Define Details - [OR Job][1]

Define Details - [Passing Information Settings Job][1]

Define Details - [Passing Info Settings Job] - [Passing Info][1]

Define Details - [PC Job][1]

Define Details - [Planning Group][1]

Define Details - [Queue Job][1]

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a nested remote jobnet)[1]

Define Details - [Remote Jobnet] (for a root remote jobnet)[1]

Define Details - [Start Condition][1]

Define Details - [UNIX Job][1]

Detailed Definition - [event-job-icon-name] - [Passing Information][1]

Detailed Definition - [Interval Control][1]

Detailed Definition - [Local Power Control][1]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Event Log][1]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Files][1]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files][1]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Edit][1]

Detailed Definition - [Monitoring Log Files] - [Log File Behavior][1]

Detailed Definition - [OpenView Status Report][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Details][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive JP1 Event] - [Extended Attribute][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive Mail] - [Option after Receive][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive MQ Message][1]

Detailed Definition - [Receive MSMQ Message][1]

Detailed Definition - [Remote Power Control][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send JP1 Event][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send Mail][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send Mail] - [Attached File][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send MQ Message] - [Detailed Setting][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message][1]

Detailed Definition - [Send MSMQ Message] - [Message Body][1]

Display Item Setup[1]

Execute Suspension[1]

Execution Result Details[1]

Filter Settings[1]

Generation Selection[1]

Immediate Execution[1]

Inherit Result[1]

Input unit name[1]

JP1/AJS3 Command Entry[1]

JP1/AJS3 Command Execution Result[1]

JP1/AJS3 Command Settings[1]

Map Size[1]

Monitor Details - [icon-name][1]

Monitor Details - [Jobnet][1]

Monitoring Unit Select[1]

Multi-execution Results[1]

Package[1]

Passing Information[1]

Preferences[1]

Refresh Interval[1]

Register Custom Job[1]

Register for Execution[1]

Register for Execution (for fixed execution)[1]

Register for Execution (for immediate execution)[1]

Register for Execution (for planned execution)[1]

Register for Release[1]

Register Passing Information[1]

Release Suspension[1]

Rerun (for a nested jobnet or job)[1]

Rerun (for a root subnet)[1]

Restore[1]

Save Search Condition[1]

Schedule Rule[1]

Schedule Rule Repetition Settings[1]

Schedule Settings[1]

Search Location[1]

Select Color[1]

Selection of Release Target[1]

Select Waiting-Target Unit[1]

Set Default Values[1]

Set Display Order[1]

Set Function Menu[1]

Set Properties of Custom Job[1]

Shift Schedule Date and Time[1]

Temporary Change Re-execution Processing Results[1]

Temporary Changes[1]

Tool Entry[1]

Tool Settings[1]

Variables Used[1]

Waiting Condition Settings[1]

Waiting-Target Unit Settings[1]

Wall Paper[1]

Zoom[1]

dialog boxes displayed when you drag icon[1]

disabling automatic reconnection with JP1/AJS3 - Manager[1]

disabling exclusive editing[1]

disabling menus[1]

display and display driver[1]

display color of execution statuses, results, and delay[1]

display comments[1]

displayed characters[1]

display hours[1]

displaying full names of jobnets[1]

displaying unregistered custom jobs with the jobnet icon[1]

display resolution and color[1]

display status of job group[1]

dotted-line box focus[1]

Double-click on jobnet[1]

Double-click on unit[1]

dummy schedule[1], [2]

E

Edit Annual Calendar window[1], [2]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

transition of[1]

editing lower-level definition of root jobnet[1]

Edit Monthly Calendar window[1], [2]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

transition of[1]

Edit Monthly Calendar window and Edit Annual Calendar window

customizing[1]

Editor/Monitor page[1]

event ID[1]

exclusive edit when Jobnet Editor starts[1]

Exclusive schedule[1]

Execution result detail[1]

Execution Result Details dialog box

available sizes[1]

enabling automatic refresh[1]

Execution Result Details dialog box sizes on screen[1]

execution schedule[1]

execution status[1]

expiration date of schedule rule[1]

F

Find event prior to exec.[1]

first execution time[1]

fixed execution registration[1]

G

general notes on JP1/AJS3 - View[1]

General page[1]

generation[1]

H

Hide comment when[1]

Hierarchy[1]

highlighted display[1]

holding execution of jobnets and jobs[1]

Hold plan[1]

host to connect[1]

host to reference[1], [2]

how to re-execute jobnet[1]

how to re-execute nested jobnet or job[1]

how to register a schedule for execution[1]

how to set the execution start date[1]

I

icon color[1]

immediate execution registration[1]

immediately executing jobnet in Wait for start time status[1]

J

job group

defining[1]

jobnet

registering for execution[1]

jobnet connector

defining[1]

Jobnet Editor window[1], [2]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

windows and dialog boxes displayed from[1]

Jobnet Monitor window[1], [2]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

windows and dialog boxes displayed from[1]

jobnet release[1]

JP1/AJS3 - View window[1], [2]

basic operations in each mode[1]

Main window in Compatible mode[1]

Main window in Normal mode[1]

notes on both modes[1]

start modes[1]

Summary Monitor window in Compatible mode[1]

Summary Monitor window in Normal mode[1]

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Main window)[1]

menu commands[1]

notes[1]

transition of[1]

JP1/AJS3 - View window (Summary Monitor window)[1]

menu commands[1]

notes[1]

transition of[1]

judgment type[1]

L

level 3 and level 4 kanji characters added in JIS 2004[1]

list filtering[1]

list of icon colors[1]

Login page[1]

login screen[1]

Login screen[1]

M

Main page[1]

Make Conditional Relations button[1]

Make Consecutive Relations button[1]

Make Relation button[1], [2], [3]

manager job group

defining in job group[1]

max. log file size[1]

mnemonics of menus for different windows[1]

Monitor Delay page[1]

monitor end-time delay[1]

Monitoring mode of JP1/AJS3 - View window[1], [2]

monitoring mode when Jobnet Monitor starts[1]

monitoring options[1]

Monitor jobnet[1]

monitor start-time delay[1]

Monthly execution simulation[1]

Monthly Schedule window[1], [2]

customizing[1]

menu commands[1]

windows and dialog boxes displayed from[1]

moving

unit and relation[1]

unit only[1]

multiple dialog boxes or message boxes displayed at the same time[1]

multi-schedule[1]

N

new line character[1]

new return code[1]

new status[1]

No. logs to keep[1]

Normal mode of JP1/AJS3 - View window[1], [2]

Note on text fields[1]

notes on Daily/Monthly Schedule window[1]

notes on Edit Monthly Calendar and Edit Yearly Calendar windows[1]

notes on Edit Monthly Calendar window[1]

notes on Edit Yearly Calendar window[1]

notes on incorrect window display[1]

notes on Jobnet Editor window[1]

notes on Jobnet Monitor window[1]

notes on JP1/AJS3 - View window[1]

notes on Login screen[1]

notes on setting item of dialog box[1]

notes on using JP1/AJS3 - View[1]

O

Other page[1]

P

package ID[1]

package name[1]

pass info button[1]

password[1]

period for fixed execution schedule[1]

planned execution registration[1]

planned time passed when daemon starts[1]

planned time passed when reg. for exe.[1]

planning group

defining in job group[1]

Planning group[1]

priorities of delay for root jobnet and job group[1]

priorities of status for root jobnet and job group[1]

Priority[1]

priority of delay display color[1]

problem on minimized window[1]

processing cycle[1]

progress[1]

R

Refer to a calendar of another job group[1]

register custom job[1]

relating judgment job and dependent unit[1]

Relating more than two units consecutively[1]

Relating multiple units from one unit[1]

Relating multiple units to one unit[1]

Relating two units[1]

relationships among windows[1]

releasing jobnet from registration for execution[1]

releasing root jobnet from suspension[1]

resizing map area[1], [2]

Restored unit uses same name as backup[1]

Restore unit[1]

RGB values

example[1]

Root jobnet with no schedule[1]

S

Save as Jobnet Connector[1]

Save Csv Unit Data[1]

Save Full Unit Name[1]

schedule[1]

defining[1], [2]

Schedule by days from start[1]

Schedule option[1], [2]

Schedule page[1]

schedule rule[1]

Schedule skip[1]

scroll arrow button for drop-down lists[1]

Search window[1], [2]

customization[1]

menu commands[1]

notes[1]

transition of[1]

Set base time[1], [2]

Specify base day[1], [2]

specifying format of calendar displayed first[1]

Standard week[1], [2]

start condition[1], [2]

setting[1]

start mode[1]

start modes of JP1/AJS3 - View window

Compatible mode[1], [2]

Monitoring mode[1], [2]

start modes of JP1/AJS3 - Window[1]

Normal mode[1], [2]

storing the display status and position of a window[1]

substitute schedule of closed day job[1]

suppressing confirmation message[1]

suppressing display of comment when mouse pointer is positioned at icon in map area[1]

suspending root jobnet[1]

system resource (memory) in the startup sequence[1]

T

timing at which page settings become valid[1]

trace level[1]

trace log setting (JP1/AJS3 - View)[1]

treat as "this" month or "next" month[1], [2]

tree area of Daily/Monthly windows[1]

type of jobnet start date[1]

type of start date and settings[1]

U

Unit name new line[1]

unit to reference[1], [2]

user name[1]

using JP1/AJS3 - View for a long time[1]

W

Wait Conditions Settings List window[1], [2]

menu commands[1]

transition of[1]

Wait Conditions Statuses window[1], [2]

menu commands[1]

transition of[1]

Web browser

configuration for Web GUI[1]

Web GUI

managing information about user environment settings[1]

page transitions[1]

Web browser configuration[1]

Week for Specify base day[1], [2]

when running multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View concurrently[1]

when starting multiple instances of JP1/AJS3 - View[1]

window displaying results of application execution on JP1/AJS3 - View

example[1]

window operation while dialog box is displayed[1]

windows[1]

Z

zooming display size of map area[1], [2]